* [PATCH v2 01/29] docs: connector: convert to ReST and rename to connector.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 02/29] docs: lcd-panel-cgram.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (27 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Evgeniy Polyakov
As it has some function definitions, move them to connector.h.
The remaining conversion is actually:
- add blank lines and identation in order to identify paragraphs;
- fix tables markups;
- add some lists markups;
- mark literal blocks;
- adjust title markups.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../{connector.txt => connector.rst} | 130 ++++++------------
drivers/w1/Kconfig | 2 +-
include/linux/connector.h | 63 ++++++++-
samples/Kconfig | 2 +-
4 files changed, 109 insertions(+), 88 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/connector/{connector.txt => connector.rst} (57%)
diff --git a/Documentation/connector/connector.txt b/Documentation/connector/connector.rst
similarity index 57%
rename from Documentation/connector/connector.txt
rename to Documentation/connector/connector.rst
index ab7ca897fab7..24e26dc22dbf 100644
--- a/Documentation/connector/connector.txt
+++ b/Documentation/connector/connector.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
-/*****************************************/
-Kernel Connector.
-/*****************************************/
+:orphan:
+
+================
+Kernel Connector
+================
Kernel connector - new netlink based userspace <-> kernel space easy
to use communication module.
@@ -12,94 +14,55 @@ identifier, the appropriate callback will be called.
From the userspace point of view it's quite straightforward:
- socket();
- bind();
- send();
- recv();
+ - socket();
+ - bind();
+ - send();
+ - recv();
But if kernelspace wants to use the full power of such connections, the
driver writer must create special sockets, must know about struct sk_buff
handling, etc... The Connector driver allows any kernelspace agents to use
netlink based networking for inter-process communication in a significantly
-easier way:
+easier way::
-int cn_add_callback(struct cb_id *id, char *name, void (*callback) (struct cn_msg *, struct netlink_skb_parms *));
-void cn_netlink_send_multi(struct cn_msg *msg, u16 len, u32 portid, u32 __group, int gfp_mask);
-void cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 portid, u32 __group, int gfp_mask);
+ int cn_add_callback(struct cb_id *id, char *name, void (*callback) (struct cn_msg *, struct netlink_skb_parms *));
+ void cn_netlink_send_multi(struct cn_msg *msg, u16 len, u32 portid, u32 __group, int gfp_mask);
+ void cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 portid, u32 __group, int gfp_mask);
-struct cb_id
-{
+ struct cb_id
+ {
__u32 idx;
__u32 val;
-};
+ };
idx and val are unique identifiers which must be registered in the
-connector.h header for in-kernel usage. void (*callback) (void *) is a
+connector.h header for in-kernel usage. `void (*callback) (void *)` is a
callback function which will be called when a message with above idx.val
is received by the connector core. The argument for that function must
-be dereferenced to struct cn_msg *.
+be dereferenced to `struct cn_msg *`::
-struct cn_msg
-{
+ struct cn_msg
+ {
struct cb_id id;
__u32 seq;
__u32 ack;
- __u32 len; /* Length of the following data */
+ __u32 len; /* Length of the following data */
__u8 data[0];
-};
+ };
-/*****************************************/
-Connector interfaces.
-/*****************************************/
+Connector interfaces
+====================
-int cn_add_callback(struct cb_id *id, char *name, void (*callback) (struct cn_msg *, struct netlink_skb_parms *));
+ .. kernel-doc:: include/linux/connector.h
- Registers new callback with connector core.
+ Note:
+ When registering new callback user, connector core assigns
+ netlink group to the user which is equal to its id.idx.
- struct cb_id *id - unique connector's user identifier.
- It must be registered in connector.h for legal in-kernel users.
- char *name - connector's callback symbolic name.
- void (*callback) (struct cn..) - connector's callback.
- cn_msg and the sender's credentials
-
-
-void cn_del_callback(struct cb_id *id);
-
- Unregisters new callback with connector core.
-
- struct cb_id *id - unique connector's user identifier.
-
-
-int cn_netlink_send_multi(struct cn_msg *msg, u16 len, u32 portid, u32 __groups, int gfp_mask);
-int cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 portid, u32 __groups, int gfp_mask);
-
- Sends message to the specified groups. It can be safely called from
- softirq context, but may silently fail under strong memory pressure.
- If there are no listeners for given group -ESRCH can be returned.
-
- struct cn_msg * - message header(with attached data).
- u16 len - for *_multi multiple cn_msg messages can be sent
- u32 port - destination port.
- If non-zero the message will be sent to the
- given port, which should be set to the
- original sender.
- u32 __group - destination group.
- If port and __group is zero, then appropriate group will
- be searched through all registered connector users,
- and message will be delivered to the group which was
- created for user with the same ID as in msg.
- If __group is not zero, then message will be delivered
- to the specified group.
- int gfp_mask - GFP mask.
-
- Note: When registering new callback user, connector core assigns
- netlink group to the user which is equal to its id.idx.
-
-/*****************************************/
-Protocol description.
-/*****************************************/
+Protocol description
+====================
The current framework offers a transport layer with fixed headers. The
recommended protocol which uses such a header is as following:
@@ -132,9 +95,8 @@ driver (it also registers itself with id={-1, -1}).
As example of this usage can be found in the cn_test.c module which
uses the connector to request notification and to send messages.
-/*****************************************/
-Reliability.
-/*****************************************/
+Reliability
+===========
Netlink itself is not a reliable protocol. That means that messages can
be lost due to memory pressure or process' receiving queue overflowed,
@@ -142,32 +104,31 @@ so caller is warned that it must be prepared. That is why the struct
cn_msg [main connector's message header] contains u32 seq and u32 ack
fields.
-/*****************************************/
-Userspace usage.
-/*****************************************/
+Userspace usage
+===============
2.6.14 has a new netlink socket implementation, which by default does not
allow people to send data to netlink groups other than 1.
So, if you wish to use a netlink socket (for example using connector)
with a different group number, the userspace application must subscribe to
-that group first. It can be achieved by the following pseudocode:
+that group first. It can be achieved by the following pseudocode::
-s = socket(PF_NETLINK, SOCK_DGRAM, NETLINK_CONNECTOR);
+ s = socket(PF_NETLINK, SOCK_DGRAM, NETLINK_CONNECTOR);
-l_local.nl_family = AF_NETLINK;
-l_local.nl_groups = 12345;
-l_local.nl_pid = 0;
+ l_local.nl_family = AF_NETLINK;
+ l_local.nl_groups = 12345;
+ l_local.nl_pid = 0;
-if (bind(s, (struct sockaddr *)&l_local, sizeof(struct sockaddr_nl)) == -1) {
+ if (bind(s, (struct sockaddr *)&l_local, sizeof(struct sockaddr_nl)) == -1) {
perror("bind");
close(s);
return -1;
-}
+ }
-{
+ {
int on = l_local.nl_groups;
setsockopt(s, 270, 1, &on, sizeof(on));
-}
+ }
Where 270 above is SOL_NETLINK, and 1 is a NETLINK_ADD_MEMBERSHIP socket
option. To drop a multicast subscription, one should call the above socket
@@ -180,16 +141,15 @@ group number 12345, you must increment CN_NETLINK_USERS to that number.
Additional 0xf numbers are allocated to be used by non-in-kernel users.
Due to this limitation, group 0xffffffff does not work now, so one can
-not use add/remove connector's group notifications, but as far as I know,
+not use add/remove connector's group notifications, but as far as I know,
only cn_test.c test module used it.
Some work in netlink area is still being done, so things can be changed in
2.6.15 timeframe, if it will happen, documentation will be updated for that
kernel.
-/*****************************************/
Code samples
-/*****************************************/
+============
Sample code for a connector test module and user space can be found
in samples/connector/. To build this code, enable CONFIG_CONNECTOR
diff --git a/drivers/w1/Kconfig b/drivers/w1/Kconfig
index 03dd57581df7..160053c0baea 100644
--- a/drivers/w1/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/w1/Kconfig
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ config W1_CON
default y
---help---
This allows to communicate with userspace using connector. For more
- information see <file:Documentation/connector/connector.txt>.
+ information see <file:Documentation/connector/connector.rst>.
There are three types of messages between w1 core and userspace:
1. Events. They are generated each time new master or slave device found
either due to automatic or requested search.
diff --git a/include/linux/connector.h b/include/linux/connector.h
index 1d72ef76f24f..6b6c7396a584 100644
--- a/include/linux/connector.h
+++ b/include/linux/connector.h
@@ -55,10 +55,71 @@ struct cn_dev {
struct cn_queue_dev *cbdev;
};
+/**
+ * cn_add_callback() - Registers new callback with connector core.
+ *
+ * @id: unique connector's user identifier.
+ * It must be registered in connector.h for legal
+ * in-kernel users.
+ * @name: connector's callback symbolic name.
+ * @callback: connector's callback.
+ * parameters are %cn_msg and the sender's credentials
+ */
int cn_add_callback(struct cb_id *id, const char *name,
void (*callback)(struct cn_msg *, struct netlink_skb_parms *));
-void cn_del_callback(struct cb_id *);
+/**
+ * cn_del_callback() - Unregisters new callback with connector core.
+ *
+ * @id: unique connector's user identifier.
+ */
+void cn_del_callback(struct cb_id *id);
+
+
+/**
+ * cn_netlink_send_mult - Sends message to the specified groups.
+ *
+ * @msg: message header(with attached data).
+ * @len: Number of @msg to be sent.
+ * @portid: destination port.
+ * If non-zero the message will be sent to the given port,
+ * which should be set to the original sender.
+ * @group: destination group.
+ * If @portid and @group is zero, then appropriate group will
+ * be searched through all registered connector users, and
+ * message will be delivered to the group which was created
+ * for user with the same ID as in @msg.
+ * If @group is not zero, then message will be delivered
+ * to the specified group.
+ * @gfp_mask: GFP mask.
+ *
+ * It can be safely called from softirq context, but may silently
+ * fail under strong memory pressure.
+ *
+ * If there are no listeners for given group %-ESRCH can be returned.
+ */
int cn_netlink_send_mult(struct cn_msg *msg, u16 len, u32 portid, u32 group, gfp_t gfp_mask);
+
+/**
+ * cn_netlink_send_mult - Sends message to the specified groups.
+ *
+ * @msg: message header(with attached data).
+ * @portid: destination port.
+ * If non-zero the message will be sent to the given port,
+ * which should be set to the original sender.
+ * @group: destination group.
+ * If @portid and @group is zero, then appropriate group will
+ * be searched through all registered connector users, and
+ * message will be delivered to the group which was created
+ * for user with the same ID as in @msg.
+ * If @group is not zero, then message will be delivered
+ * to the specified group.
+ * @gfp_mask: GFP mask.
+ *
+ * It can be safely called from softirq context, but may silently
+ * fail under strong memory pressure.
+ *
+ * If there are no listeners for given group %-ESRCH can be returned.
+ */
int cn_netlink_send(struct cn_msg *msg, u32 portid, u32 group, gfp_t gfp_mask);
int cn_queue_add_callback(struct cn_queue_dev *dev, const char *name,
diff --git a/samples/Kconfig b/samples/Kconfig
index d63cc8a3e0df..9ec524b2e003 100644
--- a/samples/Kconfig
+++ b/samples/Kconfig
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ config SAMPLE_CONNECTOR
When enabled, this builds both a sample kernel module for
the connector interface and a user space tool to communicate
with it.
- See also Documentation/connector/connector.txt
+ See also Documentation/connector/connector.rst
config SAMPLE_SECCOMP
bool "Build seccomp sample code"
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 02/29] docs: lcd-panel-cgram.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 01/29] docs: connector: convert to ReST and rename to connector.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 21:14 ` Miguel Ojeda
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 03/29] docs: lp855x-driver.txt: convert to ReST and move to kernel-api Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (26 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 1 reply; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
This small text file describes the usage of parallel port LCD
displays from userspace PoV. So, a good candidate for the
admin guide.
While this is not part of the admin-guide book, mark it as
:orphan:, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../{lcd-panel-cgram.txt => lcd-panel-cgram.rst} | 9 +++++++--
MAINTAINERS | 2 +-
2 files changed, 8 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/auxdisplay/{lcd-panel-cgram.txt => lcd-panel-cgram.rst} (88%)
diff --git a/Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.txt b/Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.rst
similarity index 88%
rename from Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.txt
rename to Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.rst
index 7f82c905763d..dfef50286018 100644
--- a/Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.txt
+++ b/Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,9 @@
+:orphan:
+
+======================================
+Parallel port LCD/Keypad Panel support
+======================================
+
Some LCDs allow you to define up to 8 characters, mapped to ASCII
characters 0 to 7. The escape code to define a new character is
'\e[LG' followed by one digit from 0 to 7, representing the character
@@ -7,7 +13,7 @@ illuminated pixel with LSB on the right. Lines are numbered from the
top of the character to the bottom. On a 5x7 matrix, only the 5 lower
bits of the 7 first bytes are used for each character. If the string
is incomplete, only complete lines will be redefined. Here are some
-examples :
+examples::
printf "\e[LG0010101050D1F0C04;" => 0 = [enter]
printf "\e[LG1040E1F0000000000;" => 1 = [up]
@@ -21,4 +27,3 @@ examples :
printf "\e[LG00002061E1E060200;" => small speaker
Willy
-
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index e20a1762ec0b..d64d8bb46323 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -11935,7 +11935,7 @@ PARALLEL LCD/KEYPAD PANEL DRIVER
M: Willy Tarreau <willy@haproxy.com>
M: Ksenija Stanojevic <ksenija.stanojevic@gmail.com>
S: Odd Fixes
-F: Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.txt
+F: Documentation/auxdisplay/lcd-panel-cgram.rst
F: drivers/auxdisplay/panel.c
PARALLEL PORT SUBSYSTEM
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* Re: [PATCH v2 02/29] docs: lcd-panel-cgram.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 02/29] docs: lcd-panel-cgram.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 21:14 ` Miguel Ojeda
2019-06-18 23:14 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
0 siblings, 1 reply; 82+ messages in thread
From: Miguel Ojeda @ 2019-06-18 21:14 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Mauro Carvalho Chehab
Cc: Linux Doc Mailing List, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
On Tue, Jun 18, 2019 at 10:56 PM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
<mchehab+samsung@kernel.org> wrote:
>
> This small text file describes the usage of parallel port LCD
> displays from userspace PoV. So, a good candidate for the
> admin guide.
>
> While this is not part of the admin-guide book, mark it as
> :orphan:, in order to avoid build warnings.
If we are going to move everything else to `.rst` too, even things
outside the guide, then ack.
Cheers,
Miguel
^ permalink raw reply [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* Re: [PATCH v2 02/29] docs: lcd-panel-cgram.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 21:14 ` Miguel Ojeda
@ 2019-06-18 23:14 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-20 8:37 ` Miguel Ojeda
0 siblings, 1 reply; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 23:14 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Miguel Ojeda
Cc: Linux Doc Mailing List, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
Em Tue, 18 Jun 2019 23:14:01 +0200
Miguel Ojeda <miguel.ojeda.sandonis@gmail.com> escreveu:
> On Tue, Jun 18, 2019 at 10:56 PM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
> <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org> wrote:
> >
> > This small text file describes the usage of parallel port LCD
> > displays from userspace PoV. So, a good candidate for the
> > admin guide.
> >
> > While this is not part of the admin-guide book, mark it as
> > :orphan:, in order to avoid build warnings.
>
> If we are going to move everything else to `.rst` too, even things
> outside the guide, then ack.
Yeah, the plan is to move all text files inside Documentation/ to .rst[1].
[1] There are some exceptions: for ABI and features, the current plan
is to have a script that parses their strict formats and produce
a ReST output.
Btw, Still pending to be sent, I have already a patch removing the
:orphan: from this file and adding it to the admin guide:
https://git.linuxtv.org/mchehab/experimental.git/commit/?h=convert_rst_renames_v5.1&id=eae5b48cab115c83be8dd59ee99b9e45f8142134
And the corresponding output, after the patches I currently have:
https://www.infradead.org/~mchehab/rst_conversion/admin-guide/lcd-panel-cgram.html
Thanks,
Mauro
^ permalink raw reply [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* Re: [PATCH v2 02/29] docs: lcd-panel-cgram.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 23:14 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-20 8:37 ` Miguel Ojeda
0 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Miguel Ojeda @ 2019-06-20 8:37 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Mauro Carvalho Chehab
Cc: Linux Doc Mailing List, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
On Wed, Jun 19, 2019 at 1:15 AM Mauro Carvalho Chehab
<mchehab+samsung@kernel.org> wrote:
>
> Yeah, the plan is to move all text files inside Documentation/ to .rst[1].
>
> [1] There are some exceptions: for ABI and features, the current plan
> is to have a script that parses their strict formats and produce
> a ReST output.
>
>
> Btw, Still pending to be sent, I have already a patch removing the
> :orphan: from this file and adding it to the admin guide:
>
> https://git.linuxtv.org/mchehab/experimental.git/commit/?h=convert_rst_renames_v5.1&id=eae5b48cab115c83be8dd59ee99b9e45f8142134
>
> And the corresponding output, after the patches I currently have:
>
> https://www.infradead.org/~mchehab/rst_conversion/admin-guide/lcd-panel-cgram.html
Thanks for the pointers! I guess you will take all these
patches/series on your tree(s), but if you want maintainers to do it,
please let me know!
Cheers,
Miguel
^ permalink raw reply [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* [PATCH v2 03/29] docs: lp855x-driver.txt: convert to ReST and move to kernel-api
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 01/29] docs: connector: convert to ReST and rename to connector.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 02/29] docs: lcd-panel-cgram.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 04/29] docs: m68k: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (25 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
This small file seems to be an attempt to start documenting
backlight drivers.
It contains descriptions of the controls for the driver
with could sound as an somewhat user-faced description, but
it's main focus is to describe, instead, the data that should
be passed via platform data and some driver-specific stuff.
While this is not part of the driver-api book, mark it as
:orphan:, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst | 83 +++++++++++++++++++++++
Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt | 66 ------------------
MAINTAINERS | 2 +-
3 files changed, 84 insertions(+), 67 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst
delete mode 100644 Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst b/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..62b7ed847a77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+:orphan:
+
+====================
+Kernel driver lp855x
+====================
+
+Backlight driver for LP855x ICs
+
+Supported chips:
+
+ Texas Instruments LP8550, LP8551, LP8552, LP8553, LP8555, LP8556 and
+ LP8557
+
+Author: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+* Brightness control
+
+ Brightness can be controlled by the pwm input or the i2c command.
+ The lp855x driver supports both cases.
+
+* Device attributes
+
+ 1) bl_ctl_mode
+
+ Backlight control mode.
+
+ Value: pwm based or register based
+
+ 2) chip_id
+
+ The lp855x chip id.
+
+ Value: lp8550/lp8551/lp8552/lp8553/lp8555/lp8556/lp8557
+
+Platform data for lp855x
+------------------------
+
+For supporting platform specific data, the lp855x platform data can be used.
+
+* name:
+ Backlight driver name. If it is not defined, default name is set.
+* device_control:
+ Value of DEVICE CONTROL register.
+* initial_brightness:
+ Initial value of backlight brightness.
+* period_ns:
+ Platform specific PWM period value. unit is nano.
+ Only valid when brightness is pwm input mode.
+* size_program:
+ Total size of lp855x_rom_data.
+* rom_data:
+ List of new eeprom/eprom registers.
+
+Examples
+========
+
+1) lp8552 platform data: i2c register mode with new eeprom data::
+
+ #define EEPROM_A5_ADDR 0xA5
+ #define EEPROM_A5_VAL 0x4f /* EN_VSYNC=0 */
+
+ static struct lp855x_rom_data lp8552_eeprom_arr[] = {
+ {EEPROM_A5_ADDR, EEPROM_A5_VAL},
+ };
+
+ static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8552_pdata = {
+ .name = "lcd-bl",
+ .device_control = I2C_CONFIG(LP8552),
+ .initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT,
+ .size_program = ARRAY_SIZE(lp8552_eeprom_arr),
+ .rom_data = lp8552_eeprom_arr,
+ };
+
+2) lp8556 platform data: pwm input mode with default rom data::
+
+ static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8556_pdata = {
+ .device_control = PWM_CONFIG(LP8556),
+ .initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT,
+ .period_ns = 1000000,
+ };
diff --git a/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt b/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 01bce243d3d7..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver lp855x
-====================
-
-Backlight driver for LP855x ICs
-
-Supported chips:
- Texas Instruments LP8550, LP8551, LP8552, LP8553, LP8555, LP8556 and
- LP8557
-
-Author: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com>
-
-Description
------------
-
-* Brightness control
-
-Brightness can be controlled by the pwm input or the i2c command.
-The lp855x driver supports both cases.
-
-* Device attributes
-
-1) bl_ctl_mode
-Backlight control mode.
-Value : pwm based or register based
-
-2) chip_id
-The lp855x chip id.
-Value : lp8550/lp8551/lp8552/lp8553/lp8555/lp8556/lp8557
-
-Platform data for lp855x
-------------------------
-
-For supporting platform specific data, the lp855x platform data can be used.
-
-* name : Backlight driver name. If it is not defined, default name is set.
-* device_control : Value of DEVICE CONTROL register.
-* initial_brightness : Initial value of backlight brightness.
-* period_ns : Platform specific PWM period value. unit is nano.
- Only valid when brightness is pwm input mode.
-* size_program : Total size of lp855x_rom_data.
-* rom_data : List of new eeprom/eprom registers.
-
-example 1) lp8552 platform data : i2c register mode with new eeprom data
-
-#define EEPROM_A5_ADDR 0xA5
-#define EEPROM_A5_VAL 0x4f /* EN_VSYNC=0 */
-
-static struct lp855x_rom_data lp8552_eeprom_arr[] = {
- {EEPROM_A5_ADDR, EEPROM_A5_VAL},
-};
-
-static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8552_pdata = {
- .name = "lcd-bl",
- .device_control = I2C_CONFIG(LP8552),
- .initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT,
- .size_program = ARRAY_SIZE(lp8552_eeprom_arr),
- .rom_data = lp8552_eeprom_arr,
-};
-
-example 2) lp8556 platform data : pwm input mode with default rom data
-
-static struct lp855x_platform_data lp8556_pdata = {
- .device_control = PWM_CONFIG(LP8556),
- .initial_brightness = INITIAL_BRT,
- .period_ns = 1000000,
-};
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index d64d8bb46323..3e43c7ab3d6a 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -15831,7 +15831,7 @@ F: sound/soc/codecs/isabelle*
TI LP855x BACKLIGHT DRIVER
M: Milo Kim <milo.kim@ti.com>
S: Maintained
-F: Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.txt
+F: Documentation/backlight/lp855x-driver.rst
F: drivers/video/backlight/lp855x_bl.c
F: include/linux/platform_data/lp855x.h
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 04/29] docs: m68k: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (2 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 03/29] docs: lp855x-driver.txt: convert to ReST and move to kernel-api Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 05/29] docs: cma/debugfs.txt: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (24 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
Convert the m68k kernel-options.txt file to ReST.
The conversion is trivial, as the document is already on a format
close enough to ReST. Just some small adjustments were needed in
order to make it both good for being parsed while keeping it on
a good txt shape.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst | 2 +-
Documentation/m68k/index.rst | 17 +
...{kernel-options.txt => kernel-options.rst} | 319 ++++++++++--------
3 files changed, 191 insertions(+), 147 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 Documentation/m68k/index.rst
rename Documentation/m68k/{kernel-options.txt => kernel-options.rst} (78%)
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst
index 8d3273e32eb1..006196bd763a 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst
@@ -118,7 +118,7 @@ parameter is applicable::
LOOP Loopback device support is enabled.
M68k M68k architecture is enabled.
These options have more detailed description inside of
- Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt.
+ Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.rst.
MDA MDA console support is enabled.
MIPS MIPS architecture is enabled.
MOUSE Appropriate mouse support is enabled.
diff --git a/Documentation/m68k/index.rst b/Documentation/m68k/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f3273ec075c3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/m68k/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+:orphan:
+
+=================
+m68k Architecture
+=================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 2
+
+ kernel-options
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt b/Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.rst
similarity index 78%
rename from Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt
rename to Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.rst
index 79d21246c75a..cabd9419740d 100644
--- a/Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.txt
+++ b/Documentation/m68k/kernel-options.rst
@@ -1,22 +1,24 @@
-
-
- Command Line Options for Linux/m68k
- ===================================
+===================================
+Command Line Options for Linux/m68k
+===================================
Last Update: 2 May 1999
+
Linux/m68k version: 2.2.6
+
Author: Roman.Hodek@informatik.uni-erlangen.de (Roman Hodek)
+
Update: jds@kom.auc.dk (Jes Sorensen) and faq@linux-m68k.org (Chris Lawrence)
0) Introduction
===============
- Often I've been asked which command line options the Linux/m68k
+Often I've been asked which command line options the Linux/m68k
kernel understands, or how the exact syntax for the ... option is, or
... about the option ... . I hope, this document supplies all the
answers...
- Note that some options might be outdated, their descriptions being
+Note that some options might be outdated, their descriptions being
incomplete or missing. Please update the information and send in the
patches.
@@ -38,11 +40,11 @@ argument contains an '=', it is of class 2, and the definition is put
into init's environment. All other arguments are passed to init as
command line options.
- This document describes the valid kernel options for Linux/m68k in
+This document describes the valid kernel options for Linux/m68k in
the version mentioned at the start of this file. Later revisions may
add new such options, and some may be missing in older versions.
- In general, the value (the part after the '=') of an option is a
+In general, the value (the part after the '=') of an option is a
list of values separated by commas. The interpretation of these values
is up to the driver that "owns" the option. This association of
options with drivers is also the reason that some are further
@@ -55,21 +57,21 @@ subdivided.
2.1) root=
----------
-Syntax: root=/dev/<device>
- or: root=<hex_number>
+:Syntax: root=/dev/<device>
+:or: root=<hex_number>
This tells the kernel which device it should mount as the root
filesystem. The device must be a block device with a valid filesystem
on it.
- The first syntax gives the device by name. These names are converted
+The first syntax gives the device by name. These names are converted
into a major/minor number internally in the kernel in an unusual way.
Normally, this "conversion" is done by the device files in /dev, but
this isn't possible here, because the root filesystem (with /dev)
isn't mounted yet... So the kernel parses the name itself, with some
hardcoded name to number mappings. The name must always be a
combination of two or three letters, followed by a decimal number.
-Valid names are:
+Valid names are::
/dev/ram: -> 0x0100 (initial ramdisk)
/dev/hda: -> 0x0300 (first IDE disk)
@@ -81,7 +83,7 @@ Valid names are:
/dev/sde: -> 0x0840 (fifth SCSI disk)
/dev/fd : -> 0x0200 (floppy disk)
- The name must be followed by a decimal number, that stands for the
+The name must be followed by a decimal number, that stands for the
partition number. Internally, the value of the number is just
added to the device number mentioned in the table above. The
exceptions are /dev/ram and /dev/fd, where /dev/ram refers to an
@@ -100,12 +102,12 @@ the kernel command line.
[Strange and maybe uninteresting stuff ON]
- This unusual translation of device names has some strange
+This unusual translation of device names has some strange
consequences: If, for example, you have a symbolic link from /dev/fd
to /dev/fd0D720 as an abbreviation for floppy driver #0 in DD format,
you cannot use this name for specifying the root device, because the
kernel cannot see this symlink before mounting the root FS and it
-isn't in the table above. If you use it, the root device will not be
+isn't in the table above. If you use it, the root device will not be
set at all, without an error message. Another example: You cannot use a
partition on e.g. the sixth SCSI disk as the root filesystem, if you
want to specify it by name. This is, because only the devices up to
@@ -118,7 +120,7 @@ knowledge that each disk uses 16 minors, and write "root=/dev/sde17"
[Strange and maybe uninteresting stuff OFF]
- If the device containing your root partition isn't in the table
+If the device containing your root partition isn't in the table
above, you can also specify it by major and minor numbers. These are
written in hex, with no prefix and no separator between. E.g., if you
have a CD with contents appropriate as a root filesystem in the first
@@ -136,6 +138,7 @@ known partition UUID as the starting point. For example,
if partition 5 of the device has the UUID of
00112233-4455-6677-8899-AABBCCDDEEFF then partition 3 may be found as
follows:
+
PARTUUID=00112233-4455-6677-8899-AABBCCDDEEFF/PARTNROFF=-2
Authoritative information can be found in
@@ -145,8 +148,8 @@ Authoritative information can be found in
2.2) ro, rw
-----------
-Syntax: ro
- or: rw
+:Syntax: ro
+:or: rw
These two options tell the kernel whether it should mount the root
filesystem read-only or read-write. The default is read-only, except
@@ -156,7 +159,7 @@ for ramdisks, which default to read-write.
2.3) debug
----------
-Syntax: debug
+:Syntax: debug
This raises the kernel log level to 10 (the default is 7). This is the
same level as set by the "dmesg" command, just that the maximum level
@@ -166,7 +169,7 @@ selectable by dmesg is 8.
2.4) debug=
-----------
-Syntax: debug=<device>
+:Syntax: debug=<device>
This option causes certain kernel messages be printed to the selected
debugging device. This can aid debugging the kernel, since the
@@ -175,7 +178,7 @@ devices are possible depends on the machine type. There are no checks
for the validity of the device name. If the device isn't implemented,
nothing happens.
- Messages logged this way are in general stack dumps after kernel
+Messages logged this way are in general stack dumps after kernel
memory faults or bad kernel traps, and kernel panics. To be exact: all
messages of level 0 (panic messages) and all messages printed while
the log level is 8 or more (their level doesn't matter). Before stack
@@ -185,19 +188,27 @@ at least 8 can also be set by the "debug" command line option (see
Devices possible for Amiga:
- - "ser": built-in serial port; parameters: 9600bps, 8N1
- - "mem": Save the messages to a reserved area in chip mem. After
+ - "ser":
+ built-in serial port; parameters: 9600bps, 8N1
+ - "mem":
+ Save the messages to a reserved area in chip mem. After
rebooting, they can be read under AmigaOS with the tool
'dmesg'.
Devices possible for Atari:
- - "ser1": ST-MFP serial port ("Modem1"); parameters: 9600bps, 8N1
- - "ser2": SCC channel B serial port ("Modem2"); parameters: 9600bps, 8N1
- - "ser" : default serial port
+ - "ser1":
+ ST-MFP serial port ("Modem1"); parameters: 9600bps, 8N1
+ - "ser2":
+ SCC channel B serial port ("Modem2"); parameters: 9600bps, 8N1
+ - "ser" :
+ default serial port
This is "ser2" for a Falcon, and "ser1" for any other machine
- - "midi": The MIDI port; parameters: 31250bps, 8N1
- - "par" : parallel port
+ - "midi":
+ The MIDI port; parameters: 31250bps, 8N1
+ - "par" :
+ parallel port
+
The printing routine for this implements a timeout for the
case there's no printer connected (else the kernel would
lock up). The timeout is not exact, but usually a few
@@ -205,26 +216,29 @@ Devices possible for Atari:
2.6) ramdisk_size=
--------------
+------------------
-Syntax: ramdisk_size=<size>
+:Syntax: ramdisk_size=<size>
- This option instructs the kernel to set up a ramdisk of the given
+This option instructs the kernel to set up a ramdisk of the given
size in KBytes. Do not use this option if the ramdisk contents are
passed by bootstrap! In this case, the size is selected automatically
and should not be overwritten.
- The only application is for root filesystems on floppy disks, that
+The only application is for root filesystems on floppy disks, that
should be loaded into memory. To do that, select the corresponding
size of the disk as ramdisk size, and set the root device to the disk
drive (with "root=").
2.7) swap=
+
+ I can't find any sign of this option in 2.2.6.
+
2.8) buff=
-----------
- I can't find any sign of these options in 2.2.6.
+ I can't find any sign of this option in 2.2.6.
3) General Device Options (Amiga and Atari)
@@ -233,13 +247,13 @@ drive (with "root=").
3.1) ether=
-----------
-Syntax: ether=[<irq>[,<base_addr>[,<mem_start>[,<mem_end>]]]],<dev-name>
+:Syntax: ether=[<irq>[,<base_addr>[,<mem_start>[,<mem_end>]]]],<dev-name>
- <dev-name> is the name of a net driver, as specified in
+<dev-name> is the name of a net driver, as specified in
drivers/net/Space.c in the Linux source. Most prominent are eth0, ...
eth3, sl0, ... sl3, ppp0, ..., ppp3, dummy, and lo.
- The non-ethernet drivers (sl, ppp, dummy, lo) obviously ignore the
+The non-ethernet drivers (sl, ppp, dummy, lo) obviously ignore the
settings by this options. Also, the existing ethernet drivers for
Linux/m68k (ariadne, a2065, hydra) don't use them because Zorro boards
are really Plug-'n-Play, so the "ether=" option is useless altogether
@@ -249,9 +263,9 @@ for Linux/m68k.
3.2) hd=
--------
-Syntax: hd=<cylinders>,<heads>,<sectors>
+:Syntax: hd=<cylinders>,<heads>,<sectors>
- This option sets the disk geometry of an IDE disk. The first hd=
+This option sets the disk geometry of an IDE disk. The first hd=
option is for the first IDE disk, the second for the second one.
(I.e., you can give this option twice.) In most cases, you won't have
to use this option, since the kernel can obtain the geometry data
@@ -262,9 +276,9 @@ disks.
3.3) max_scsi_luns=
-------------------
-Syntax: max_scsi_luns=<n>
+:Syntax: max_scsi_luns=<n>
- Sets the maximum number of LUNs (logical units) of SCSI devices to
+Sets the maximum number of LUNs (logical units) of SCSI devices to
be scanned. Valid values for <n> are between 1 and 8. Default is 8 if
"Probe all LUNs on each SCSI device" was selected during the kernel
configuration, else 1.
@@ -273,9 +287,9 @@ configuration, else 1.
3.4) st=
--------
-Syntax: st=<buffer_size>,[<write_thres>,[<max_buffers>]]
+:Syntax: st=<buffer_size>,[<write_thres>,[<max_buffers>]]
- Sets several parameters of the SCSI tape driver. <buffer_size> is
+Sets several parameters of the SCSI tape driver. <buffer_size> is
the number of 512-byte buffers reserved for tape operations for each
device. <write_thres> sets the number of blocks which must be filled
to start an actual write operation to the tape. Maximum value is the
@@ -286,9 +300,9 @@ buffers allocated for all tape devices.
3.5) dmasound=
--------------
-Syntax: dmasound=[<buffers>,<buffer-size>[,<catch-radius>]]
+:Syntax: dmasound=[<buffers>,<buffer-size>[,<catch-radius>]]
- This option controls some configurations of the Linux/m68k DMA sound
+This option controls some configurations of the Linux/m68k DMA sound
driver (Amiga and Atari): <buffers> is the number of buffers you want
to use (minimum 4, default 4), <buffer-size> is the size of each
buffer in kilobytes (minimum 4, default 32) and <catch-radius> says
@@ -305,20 +319,22 @@ don't need to expand the sound.
4.1) video=
-----------
-Syntax: video=<fbname>:<sub-options...>
+:Syntax: video=<fbname>:<sub-options...>
The <fbname> parameter specifies the name of the frame buffer,
-eg. most atari users will want to specify `atafb' here. The
+eg. most atari users will want to specify `atafb` here. The
<sub-options> is a comma-separated list of the sub-options listed
below.
-NB: Please notice that this option was renamed from `atavideo' to
- `video' during the development of the 1.3.x kernels, thus you
+NB:
+ Please notice that this option was renamed from `atavideo` to
+ `video` during the development of the 1.3.x kernels, thus you
might need to update your boot-scripts if upgrading to 2.x from
an 1.2.x kernel.
-NBB: The behavior of video= was changed in 2.1.57 so the recommended
-option is to specify the name of the frame buffer.
+NBB:
+ The behavior of video= was changed in 2.1.57 so the recommended
+ option is to specify the name of the frame buffer.
4.1.1) Video Mode
-----------------
@@ -341,11 +357,11 @@ mode, if the hardware allows. Currently defined names are:
- falh2 : 896x608x1, Falcon only
- falh16 : 896x608x4, Falcon only
- If no video mode is given on the command line, the kernel tries the
+If no video mode is given on the command line, the kernel tries the
modes names "default<n>" in turn, until one is possible with the
hardware in use.
- A video mode setting doesn't make sense, if the external driver is
+A video mode setting doesn't make sense, if the external driver is
activated by a "external:" sub-option.
4.1.2) inverse
@@ -358,17 +374,17 @@ option, you can make the background white.
4.1.3) font
-----------
-Syntax: font:<fontname>
+:Syntax: font:<fontname>
Specify the font to use in text modes. Currently you can choose only
-between `VGA8x8', `VGA8x16' and `PEARL8x8'. `VGA8x8' is default, if the
+between `VGA8x8`, `VGA8x16` and `PEARL8x8`. `VGA8x8` is default, if the
vertical size of the display is less than 400 pixel rows. Otherwise, the
-`VGA8x16' font is the default.
+`VGA8x16` font is the default.
-4.1.4) hwscroll_
-----------------
+4.1.4) `hwscroll_`
+------------------
-Syntax: hwscroll_<n>
+:Syntax: `hwscroll_<n>`
The number of additional lines of video memory to reserve for
speeding up the scrolling ("hardware scrolling"). Hardware scrolling
@@ -378,7 +394,7 @@ possible with plain STs and graphics cards (The former because the
base address must be on a 256 byte boundary there, the latter because
the kernel doesn't know how to set the base address at all.)
- By default, <n> is set to the number of visible text lines on the
+By default, <n> is set to the number of visible text lines on the
display. Thus, the amount of video memory is doubled, compared to no
hardware scrolling. You can turn off the hardware scrolling altogether
by setting <n> to 0.
@@ -386,31 +402,31 @@ by setting <n> to 0.
4.1.5) internal:
----------------
-Syntax: internal:<xres>;<yres>[;<xres_max>;<yres_max>;<offset>]
+:Syntax: internal:<xres>;<yres>[;<xres_max>;<yres_max>;<offset>]
This option specifies the capabilities of some extended internal video
hardware, like e.g. OverScan. <xres> and <yres> give the (extended)
dimensions of the screen.
- If your OverScan needs a black border, you have to write the last
+If your OverScan needs a black border, you have to write the last
three arguments of the "internal:". <xres_max> is the maximum line
length the hardware allows, <yres_max> the maximum number of lines.
<offset> is the offset of the visible part of the screen memory to its
physical start, in bytes.
- Often, extended interval video hardware has to be activated somehow.
+Often, extended interval video hardware has to be activated somehow.
For this, see the "sw_*" options below.
4.1.6) external:
----------------
-Syntax:
- external:<xres>;<yres>;<depth>;<org>;<scrmem>[;<scrlen>[;<vgabase>\
- [;<colw>[;<coltype>[;<xres_virtual>]]]]]
+:Syntax:
+ external:<xres>;<yres>;<depth>;<org>;<scrmem>[;<scrlen>[;<vgabase>
+ [;<colw>[;<coltype>[;<xres_virtual>]]]]]
-[I had to break this line...]
+.. I had to break this line...
- This is probably the most complicated parameter... It specifies that
+This is probably the most complicated parameter... It specifies that
you have some external video hardware (a graphics board), and how to
use it under Linux/m68k. The kernel cannot know more about the hardware
than you tell it here! The kernel also is unable to set or change any
@@ -418,38 +434,44 @@ video modes, since it doesn't know about any board internal. So, you
have to switch to that video mode before you start Linux, and cannot
switch to another mode once Linux has started.
- The first 3 parameters of this sub-option should be obvious: <xres>,
+The first 3 parameters of this sub-option should be obvious: <xres>,
<yres> and <depth> give the dimensions of the screen and the number of
planes (depth). The depth is the logarithm to base 2 of the number
of colors possible. (Or, the other way round: The number of colors is
2^depth).
- You have to tell the kernel furthermore how the video memory is
+You have to tell the kernel furthermore how the video memory is
organized. This is done by a letter as <org> parameter:
- 'n': "normal planes", i.e. one whole plane after another
- 'i': "interleaved planes", i.e. 16 bit of the first plane, than 16 bit
+ 'n':
+ "normal planes", i.e. one whole plane after another
+ 'i':
+ "interleaved planes", i.e. 16 bit of the first plane, than 16 bit
of the next, and so on... This mode is used only with the
- built-in Atari video modes, I think there is no card that
- supports this mode.
- 'p': "packed pixels", i.e. <depth> consecutive bits stand for all
- planes of one pixel; this is the most common mode for 8 planes
- (256 colors) on graphic cards
- 't': "true color" (more or less packed pixels, but without a color
- lookup table); usually depth is 24
+ built-in Atari video modes, I think there is no card that
+ supports this mode.
+ 'p':
+ "packed pixels", i.e. <depth> consecutive bits stand for all
+ planes of one pixel; this is the most common mode for 8 planes
+ (256 colors) on graphic cards
+ 't':
+ "true color" (more or less packed pixels, but without a color
+ lookup table); usually depth is 24
For monochrome modes (i.e., <depth> is 1), the <org> letter has a
different meaning:
- 'n': normal colors, i.e. 0=white, 1=black
- 'i': inverted colors, i.e. 0=black, 1=white
+ 'n':
+ normal colors, i.e. 0=white, 1=black
+ 'i':
+ inverted colors, i.e. 0=black, 1=white
- The next important information about the video hardware is the base
+The next important information about the video hardware is the base
address of the video memory. That is given in the <scrmem> parameter,
as a hexadecimal number with a "0x" prefix. You have to find out this
address in the documentation of your hardware.
- The next parameter, <scrlen>, tells the kernel about the size of the
+The next parameter, <scrlen>, tells the kernel about the size of the
video memory. If it's missing, the size is calculated from <xres>,
<yres>, and <depth>. For now, it is not useful to write a value here.
It would be used only for hardware scrolling (which isn't possible
@@ -460,7 +482,7 @@ empty, either by ending the "external:" after the video address or by
writing two consecutive semicolons, if you want to give a <vgabase>
(it is allowed to leave this parameter empty).
- The <vgabase> parameter is optional. If it is not given, the kernel
+The <vgabase> parameter is optional. If it is not given, the kernel
cannot read or write any color registers of the video hardware, and
thus you have to set appropriate colors before you start Linux. But if
your card is somehow VGA compatible, you can tell the kernel the base
@@ -472,18 +494,18 @@ uses the addresses vgabase+0x3c7...vgabase+0x3c9. The <vgabase>
parameter is written in hexadecimal with a "0x" prefix, just as
<scrmem>.
- <colw> is meaningful only if <vgabase> is specified. It tells the
+<colw> is meaningful only if <vgabase> is specified. It tells the
kernel how wide each of the color register is, i.e. the number of bits
per single color (red/green/blue). Default is 6, another quite usual
value is 8.
- Also <coltype> is used together with <vgabase>. It tells the kernel
+Also <coltype> is used together with <vgabase>. It tells the kernel
about the color register model of your gfx board. Currently, the types
"vga" (which is also the default) and "mv300" (SANG MV300) are
implemented.
- Parameter <xres_virtual> is required for ProMST or ET4000 cards where
-the physical linelength differs from the visible length. With ProMST,
+Parameter <xres_virtual> is required for ProMST or ET4000 cards where
+the physical linelength differs from the visible length. With ProMST,
xres_virtual must be set to 2048. For ET4000, xres_virtual depends on the
initialisation of the video-card.
If you're missing a corresponding yres_virtual: the external part is legacy,
@@ -499,13 +521,13 @@ currently works only with the ScreenWonder!
4.1.8) monitorcap:
-------------------
-Syntax: monitorcap:<vmin>;<vmax>;<hmin>;<hmax>
+:Syntax: monitorcap:<vmin>;<vmax>;<hmin>;<hmax>
This describes the capabilities of a multisync monitor. Don't use it
with a fixed-frequency monitor! For now, only the Falcon frame buffer
uses the settings of "monitorcap:".
- <vmin> and <vmax> are the minimum and maximum, resp., vertical frequencies
+<vmin> and <vmax> are the minimum and maximum, resp., vertical frequencies
your monitor can work with, in Hz. <hmin> and <hmax> are the same for
the horizontal frequency, in kHz.
@@ -520,28 +542,28 @@ If this option is given, the framebuffer device doesn't do any video
mode calculations and settings on its own. The only Atari fb device
that does this currently is the Falcon.
- What you reach with this: Settings for unknown video extensions
+What you reach with this: Settings for unknown video extensions
aren't overridden by the driver, so you can still use the mode found
when booting, when the driver doesn't know to set this mode itself.
But this also means, that you can't switch video modes anymore...
- An example where you may want to use "keep" is the ScreenBlaster for
+An example where you may want to use "keep" is the ScreenBlaster for
the Falcon.
4.2) atamouse=
--------------
-Syntax: atamouse=<x-threshold>,[<y-threshold>]
+:Syntax: atamouse=<x-threshold>,[<y-threshold>]
- With this option, you can set the mouse movement reporting threshold.
+With this option, you can set the mouse movement reporting threshold.
This is the number of pixels of mouse movement that have to accumulate
before the IKBD sends a new mouse packet to the kernel. Higher values
reduce the mouse interrupt load and thus reduce the chance of keyboard
overruns. Lower values give a slightly faster mouse responses and
slightly better mouse tracking.
- You can set the threshold in x and y separately, but usually this is
+You can set the threshold in x and y separately, but usually this is
of little practical use. If there's just one number in the option, it
is used for both dimensions. The default value is 2 for both
thresholds.
@@ -550,7 +572,7 @@ thresholds.
4.3) ataflop=
-------------
-Syntax: ataflop=<drive type>[,<trackbuffering>[,<steprateA>[,<steprateB>]]]
+:Syntax: ataflop=<drive type>[,<trackbuffering>[,<steprateA>[,<steprateB>]]]
The drive type may be 0, 1, or 2, for DD, HD, and ED, resp. This
setting affects how many buffers are reserved and which formats are
@@ -563,15 +585,15 @@ Syntax: ataflop=<drive type>[,<trackbuffering>[,<steprateA>[,<steprateB>]]]
no for the Medusa and yes for all others.
With the two following parameters, you can change the default
- steprate used for drive A and B, resp.
+ steprate used for drive A and B, resp.
4.4) atascsi=
-------------
-Syntax: atascsi=<can_queue>[,<cmd_per_lun>[,<scat-gat>[,<host-id>[,<tagged>]]]]
+:Syntax: atascsi=<can_queue>[,<cmd_per_lun>[,<scat-gat>[,<host-id>[,<tagged>]]]]
- This option sets some parameters for the Atari native SCSI driver.
+This option sets some parameters for the Atari native SCSI driver.
Generally, any number of arguments can be omitted from the end. And
for each of the numbers, a negative value means "use default". The
defaults depend on whether TT-style or Falcon-style SCSI is used.
@@ -597,11 +619,14 @@ ignored (others aren't affected).
32). Default: 8/1. (Note: Values > 1 seem to cause problems on a
Falcon, cause not yet known.)
- The <cmd_per_lun> value at a great part determines the amount of
+ The <cmd_per_lun> value at a great part determines the amount of
memory SCSI reserves for itself. The formula is rather
complicated, but I can give you some hints:
- no scatter-gather : cmd_per_lun * 232 bytes
- full scatter-gather: cmd_per_lun * approx. 17 Kbytes
+
+ no scatter-gather:
+ cmd_per_lun * 232 bytes
+ full scatter-gather:
+ cmd_per_lun * approx. 17 Kbytes
<scat-gat>:
Size of the scatter-gather table, i.e. the number of requests
@@ -634,19 +659,23 @@ ignored (others aren't affected).
4.5 switches=
-------------
-Syntax: switches=<list of switches>
+:Syntax: switches=<list of switches>
- With this option you can switch some hardware lines that are often
+With this option you can switch some hardware lines that are often
used to enable/disable certain hardware extensions. Examples are
OverScan, overclocking, ...
- The <list of switches> is a comma-separated list of the following
+The <list of switches> is a comma-separated list of the following
items:
- ikbd: set RTS of the keyboard ACIA high
- midi: set RTS of the MIDI ACIA high
- snd6: set bit 6 of the PSG port A
- snd7: set bit 6 of the PSG port A
+ ikbd:
+ set RTS of the keyboard ACIA high
+ midi:
+ set RTS of the MIDI ACIA high
+ snd6:
+ set bit 6 of the PSG port A
+ snd7:
+ set bit 6 of the PSG port A
It doesn't make sense to mention a switch more than once (no
difference to only once), but you can give as many switches as you
@@ -654,16 +683,16 @@ want to enable different features. The switch lines are set as early
as possible during kernel initialization (even before determining the
present hardware.)
- All of the items can also be prefixed with "ov_", i.e. "ov_ikbd",
-"ov_midi", ... These options are meant for switching on an OverScan
+All of the items can also be prefixed with `ov_`, i.e. `ov_ikbd`,
+`ov_midi`, ... These options are meant for switching on an OverScan
video extension. The difference to the bare option is that the
switch-on is done after video initialization, and somehow synchronized
to the HBLANK. A speciality is that ov_ikbd and ov_midi are switched
off before rebooting, so that OverScan is disabled and TOS boots
correctly.
- If you give an option both, with and without the "ov_" prefix, the
-earlier initialization ("ov_"-less) takes precedence. But the
+If you give an option both, with and without the `ov_` prefix, the
+earlier initialization (`ov_`-less) takes precedence. But the
switching-off on reset still happens in this case.
5) Options for Amiga Only:
@@ -672,10 +701,10 @@ switching-off on reset still happens in this case.
5.1) video=
-----------
-Syntax: video=<fbname>:<sub-options...>
+:Syntax: video=<fbname>:<sub-options...>
The <fbname> parameter specifies the name of the frame buffer, valid
-options are `amifb', `cyber', 'virge', `retz3' and `clgen', provided
+options are `amifb`, `cyber`, 'virge', `retz3` and `clgen`, provided
that the respective frame buffer devices have been compiled into the
kernel (or compiled as loadable modules). The behavior of the <fbname>
option was changed in 2.1.57 so it is now recommended to specify this
@@ -697,9 +726,11 @@ predefined video modes are available:
NTSC modes:
- ntsc : 640x200, 15 kHz, 60 Hz
- ntsc-lace : 640x400, 15 kHz, 60 Hz interlaced
+
PAL modes:
- pal : 640x256, 15 kHz, 50 Hz
- pal-lace : 640x512, 15 kHz, 50 Hz interlaced
+
ECS modes:
- multiscan : 640x480, 29 kHz, 57 Hz
- multiscan-lace : 640x960, 29 kHz, 57 Hz interlaced
@@ -715,6 +746,7 @@ ECS modes:
- dblpal-lace : 640x1024, 27 kHz, 47 Hz interlaced
- dblntsc : 640x200, 27 kHz, 57 Hz doublescan
- dblpal : 640x256, 27 kHz, 47 Hz doublescan
+
VGA modes:
- vga : 640x480, 31 kHz, 60 Hz
- vga70 : 640x400, 31 kHz, 70 Hz
@@ -726,7 +758,7 @@ chipset and 8-bit color for the AGA chipset.
5.1.2) depth
------------
-Syntax: depth:<nr. of bit-planes>
+:Syntax: depth:<nr. of bit-planes>
Specify the number of bit-planes for the selected video-mode.
@@ -739,32 +771,32 @@ Use inverted display (black on white). Functionally the same as the
5.1.4) font
-----------
-Syntax: font:<fontname>
+:Syntax: font:<fontname>
Specify the font to use in text modes. Functionally the same as the
-"font" sub-option for the Atari, except that `PEARL8x8' is used instead
-of `VGA8x8' if the vertical size of the display is less than 400 pixel
+"font" sub-option for the Atari, except that `PEARL8x8` is used instead
+of `VGA8x8` if the vertical size of the display is less than 400 pixel
rows.
5.1.5) monitorcap:
-------------------
-Syntax: monitorcap:<vmin>;<vmax>;<hmin>;<hmax>
+:Syntax: monitorcap:<vmin>;<vmax>;<hmin>;<hmax>
This describes the capabilities of a multisync monitor. For now, only
the color frame buffer uses the settings of "monitorcap:".
- <vmin> and <vmax> are the minimum and maximum, resp., vertical frequencies
+<vmin> and <vmax> are the minimum and maximum, resp., vertical frequencies
your monitor can work with, in Hz. <hmin> and <hmax> are the same for
the horizontal frequency, in kHz.
- The defaults are 50;90;15;38 (Generic Amiga multisync monitor).
+The defaults are 50;90;15;38 (Generic Amiga multisync monitor).
5.2) fd_def_df0=
----------------
-Syntax: fd_def_df0=<value>
+:Syntax: fd_def_df0=<value>
Sets the df0 value for "silent" floppy drives. The value should be in
hexadecimal with "0x" prefix.
@@ -773,7 +805,7 @@ hexadecimal with "0x" prefix.
5.3) wd33c93=
-------------
-Syntax: wd33c93=<sub-options...>
+:Syntax: wd33c93=<sub-options...>
These options affect the A590/A2091, A3000 and GVP Series II SCSI
controllers.
@@ -784,9 +816,9 @@ below.
5.3.1) nosync
-------------
-Syntax: nosync:bitmask
+:Syntax: nosync:bitmask
- bitmask is a byte where the 1st 7 bits correspond with the 7
+bitmask is a byte where the 1st 7 bits correspond with the 7
possible SCSI devices. Set a bit to prevent sync negotiation on that
device. To maintain backwards compatibility, a command-line such as
"wd33c93=255" will be automatically translated to
@@ -796,35 +828,35 @@ all devices, eg. nosync:0xff.
5.3.2) period
-------------
-Syntax: period:ns
+:Syntax: period:ns
- `ns' is the minimum # of nanoseconds in a SCSI data transfer
+`ns` is the minimum # of nanoseconds in a SCSI data transfer
period. Default is 500; acceptable values are 250 - 1000.
5.3.3) disconnect
-----------------
-Syntax: disconnect:x
+:Syntax: disconnect:x
- Specify x = 0 to never allow disconnects, 2 to always allow them.
+Specify x = 0 to never allow disconnects, 2 to always allow them.
x = 1 does 'adaptive' disconnects, which is the default and generally
the best choice.
5.3.4) debug
------------
-Syntax: debug:x
+:Syntax: debug:x
- If `DEBUGGING_ON' is defined, x is a bit mask that causes various
+If `DEBUGGING_ON` is defined, x is a bit mask that causes various
types of debug output to printed - see the DB_xxx defines in
wd33c93.h.
5.3.5) clock
------------
-Syntax: clock:x
+:Syntax: clock:x
- x = clock input in MHz for WD33c93 chip. Normal values would be from
+x = clock input in MHz for WD33c93 chip. Normal values would be from
8 through 20. The default value depends on your hostadapter(s),
default for the A3000 internal controller is 14, for the A2091 it's 8
and for the GVP hostadapters it's either 8 or 14, depending on the
@@ -834,15 +866,15 @@ hostadapters.
5.3.6) next
-----------
- No argument. Used to separate blocks of keywords when there's more
+No argument. Used to separate blocks of keywords when there's more
than one wd33c93-based host adapter in the system.
5.3.7) nodma
------------
-Syntax: nodma:x
+:Syntax: nodma:x
- If x is 1 (or if the option is just written as "nodma"), the WD33c93
+If x is 1 (or if the option is just written as "nodma"), the WD33c93
controller will not use DMA (= direct memory access) to access the
Amiga's memory. This is useful for some systems (like A3000's and
A4000's with the A3640 accelerator, revision 3.0) that have problems
@@ -853,32 +885,27 @@ possible.
5.4) gvp11=
-----------
-Syntax: gvp11=<addr-mask>
+:Syntax: gvp11=<addr-mask>
- The earlier versions of the GVP driver did not handle DMA
+The earlier versions of the GVP driver did not handle DMA
address-mask settings correctly which made it necessary for some
people to use this option, in order to get their GVP controller
running under Linux. These problems have hopefully been solved and the
use of this option is now highly unrecommended!
- Incorrect use can lead to unpredictable behavior, so please only use
+Incorrect use can lead to unpredictable behavior, so please only use
this option if you *know* what you are doing and have a reason to do
so. In any case if you experience problems and need to use this
option, please inform us about it by mailing to the Linux/68k kernel
mailing list.
- The address mask set by this option specifies which addresses are
+The address mask set by this option specifies which addresses are
valid for DMA with the GVP Series II SCSI controller. An address is
valid, if no bits are set except the bits that are set in the mask,
too.
- Some versions of the GVP can only DMA into a 24 bit address range,
+Some versions of the GVP can only DMA into a 24 bit address range,
some can address a 25 bit address range while others can use the whole
32 bit address range for DMA. The correct setting depends on your
controller and should be autodetected by the driver. An example is the
24 bit region which is specified by a mask of 0x00fffffe.
-
-
-/* Local Variables: */
-/* mode: text */
-/* End: */
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 05/29] docs: cma/debugfs.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (3 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 04/29] docs: m68k: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (23 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
The debugfs interface for CMA should be there together with other
mm-related documents.
Convert this small file to ReST and move it to its rightful place.
The conversion is actually quite simple: just add a title for the
document. In order to make it to look better for the audience,
also mark the "echo" command as a literal block.
While this is not part of any book, mark it as :orphan:,
in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/cma/{debugfs.txt => debugfs.rst} | 8 +++++++-
1 file changed, 7 insertions(+), 1 deletion(-)
rename Documentation/cma/{debugfs.txt => debugfs.rst} (91%)
diff --git a/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt b/Documentation/cma/debugfs.rst
similarity index 91%
rename from Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt
rename to Documentation/cma/debugfs.rst
index 6cef20a8cedc..518fe401b5ee 100644
--- a/Documentation/cma/debugfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/cma/debugfs.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,9 @@
+:orphan:
+
+=====================
+CMA Debugfs Interface
+=====================
+
The CMA debugfs interface is useful to retrieve basic information out of the
different CMA areas and to test allocation/release in each of the areas.
@@ -12,7 +18,7 @@ The structure of the files created under that directory is as follows:
- [RO] count: Amount of memory in the CMA area.
- [RO] order_per_bit: Order of pages represented by one bit.
- [RO] bitmap: The bitmap of page states in the zone.
- - [WO] alloc: Allocate N pages from that CMA area. For example:
+ - [WO] alloc: Allocate N pages from that CMA area. For example::
echo 5 > <debugfs>/cma/cma-2/alloc
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 06/29] docs: console.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 01/29] docs: connector: convert to ReST and rename to connector.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 03/29] docs: lp855x-driver.txt: convert to ReST and move to kernel-api Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (26 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz, Greg Kroah-Hartman,
Jiri Slaby, dri-devel, linux-fbdev
Convert this small file to ReST in preparation for adding it to
the driver-api book.
While this is not part of the driver-api book, mark it as
:orphan:, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../console/{console.txt => console.rst} | 63 ++++++++++---------
Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst | 4 +-
drivers/tty/Kconfig | 2 +-
3 files changed, 38 insertions(+), 31 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/console/{console.txt => console.rst} (80%)
diff --git a/Documentation/console/console.txt b/Documentation/console/console.rst
similarity index 80%
rename from Documentation/console/console.txt
rename to Documentation/console/console.rst
index d73c2ab4beda..b374141b027e 100644
--- a/Documentation/console/console.txt
+++ b/Documentation/console/console.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+:orphan:
+
+===============
Console Drivers
===============
@@ -17,25 +20,26 @@ of driver occupying the consoles.) They can only take over the console that is
occupied by the system driver. In the same token, if the modular driver is
released by the console, the system driver will take over.
-Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, have to call:
+Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, have to call::
do_take_over_console() - load and bind driver to console layer
give_up_console() - unload driver; it will only work if driver
is fully unbound
-In newer kernels, the following are also available:
+In newer kernels, the following are also available::
do_register_con_driver()
do_unregister_con_driver()
If sysfs is enabled, the contents of /sys/class/vtconsole can be
examined. This shows the console backends currently registered by the
-system which are named vtcon<n> where <n> is an integer from 0 to 15. Thus:
+system which are named vtcon<n> where <n> is an integer from 0 to 15.
+Thus::
ls /sys/class/vtconsole
. .. vtcon0 vtcon1
-Each directory in /sys/class/vtconsole has 3 files:
+Each directory in /sys/class/vtconsole has 3 files::
ls /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0
. .. bind name uevent
@@ -46,27 +50,29 @@ What do these files signify?
read, or acts to bind or unbind the driver to the virtual consoles
when written to. The possible values are:
- 0 - means the driver is not bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver
+ 0
+ - means the driver is not bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver
to unbind
- 1 - means the driver is bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver to
+ 1
+ - means the driver is bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver to
bind
- 2. name - read-only file. Shows the name of the driver in this format:
+ 2. name - read-only file. Shows the name of the driver in this format::
- cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0/name
- (S) VGA+
+ cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0/name
+ (S) VGA+
- '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, i.e., it cannot be directly
- commanded to bind or unbind
+ '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, i.e., it cannot be directly
+ commanded to bind or unbind
- 'VGA+' is the name of the driver
+ 'VGA+' is the name of the driver
- cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/name
- (M) frame buffer device
+ cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/name
+ (M) frame buffer device
- In this case, '(M)' stands for a (M)odular driver, one that can be
- directly commanded to bind or unbind.
+ In this case, '(M)' stands for a (M)odular driver, one that can be
+ directly commanded to bind or unbind.
3. uevent - ignore this file
@@ -75,14 +81,17 @@ driver takes over the consoles vacated by the driver. Binding, on the other
hand, will bind the driver to the consoles that are currently occupied by a
system driver.
-NOTE1: Binding and unbinding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under:
+NOTE1:
+ Binding and unbinding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under::
-Device Drivers -> Character devices -> Support for binding and unbinding
-console drivers
+ Device Drivers ->
+ Character devices ->
+ Support for binding and unbinding console drivers
-NOTE2: If any of the virtual consoles are in KD_GRAPHICS mode, then binding or
-unbinding will not succeed. An example of an application that sets the console
-to KD_GRAPHICS is X.
+NOTE2:
+ If any of the virtual consoles are in KD_GRAPHICS mode, then binding or
+ unbinding will not succeed. An example of an application that sets the
+ console to KD_GRAPHICS is X.
How useful is this feature? This is very useful for console driver
developers. By unbinding the driver from the console layer, one can unload the
@@ -92,10 +101,10 @@ framebuffer console to VGA console and vice versa, this feature also makes
this possible. (NOTE NOTE NOTE: Please read fbcon.txt under Documentation/fb
for more details.)
-Notes for developers:
-=====================
+Notes for developers
+====================
-do_take_over_console() is now broken up into:
+do_take_over_console() is now broken up into::
do_register_con_driver()
do_bind_con_driver() - private function
@@ -104,7 +113,7 @@ give_up_console() is a wrapper to do_unregister_con_driver(), and a driver must
be fully unbound for this call to succeed. con_is_bound() will check if the
driver is bound or not.
-Guidelines for console driver writers:
+Guidelines for console driver writers
=====================================
In order for binding to and unbinding from the console to properly work,
@@ -140,6 +149,4 @@ The current crop of console drivers should still work correctly, but binding
and unbinding them may cause problems. With minimal fixes, these drivers can
be made to work correctly.
-==========================
Antonino Daplas <adaplas@pol.net>
-
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst
index cfb9f7c38f18..22112718dd5d 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst
+++ b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst
@@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ the hardware. Thus, in a VGA console::
Assuming the VGA driver can be unloaded, one must first unbind the VGA driver
from the console layer before unloading the driver. The VGA driver cannot be
unloaded if it is still bound to the console layer. (See
-Documentation/console/console.txt for more information).
+Documentation/console/console.rst for more information).
This is more complicated in the case of the framebuffer console (fbcon),
because fbcon is an intermediate layer between the console and the drivers::
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ fbcon. Thus, there is no need to explicitly unbind the fbdev drivers from
fbcon.
So, how do we unbind fbcon from the console? Part of the answer is in
-Documentation/console/console.txt. To summarize:
+Documentation/console/console.rst. To summarize:
Echo a value to the bind file that represents the framebuffer console
driver. So assuming vtcon1 represents fbcon, then::
diff --git a/drivers/tty/Kconfig b/drivers/tty/Kconfig
index 0e3e4dacbc12..1cb50f19d58c 100644
--- a/drivers/tty/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/tty/Kconfig
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ config VT_HW_CONSOLE_BINDING
select the console driver that will serve as the backend for the
virtual terminals.
- See <file:Documentation/console/console.txt> for more
+ See <file:Documentation/console/console.rst> for more
information. For framebuffer console users, please refer to
<file:Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst>.
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 06/29] docs: console.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
0 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: linux-fbdev, Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz, Greg Kroah-Hartman,
Jonathan Corbet, linux-kernel, dri-devel, Mauro Carvalho Chehab,
Jiri Slaby, Mauro Carvalho Chehab
Convert this small file to ReST in preparation for adding it to
the driver-api book.
While this is not part of the driver-api book, mark it as
:orphan:, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../console/{console.txt => console.rst} | 63 ++++++++++---------
Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst | 4 +-
drivers/tty/Kconfig | 2 +-
3 files changed, 38 insertions(+), 31 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/console/{console.txt => console.rst} (80%)
diff --git a/Documentation/console/console.txt b/Documentation/console/console.rst
similarity index 80%
rename from Documentation/console/console.txt
rename to Documentation/console/console.rst
index d73c2ab4beda..b374141b027e 100644
--- a/Documentation/console/console.txt
+++ b/Documentation/console/console.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+:orphan:
+
+===============
Console Drivers
===============
@@ -17,25 +20,26 @@ of driver occupying the consoles.) They can only take over the console that is
occupied by the system driver. In the same token, if the modular driver is
released by the console, the system driver will take over.
-Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, have to call:
+Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, have to call::
do_take_over_console() - load and bind driver to console layer
give_up_console() - unload driver; it will only work if driver
is fully unbound
-In newer kernels, the following are also available:
+In newer kernels, the following are also available::
do_register_con_driver()
do_unregister_con_driver()
If sysfs is enabled, the contents of /sys/class/vtconsole can be
examined. This shows the console backends currently registered by the
-system which are named vtcon<n> where <n> is an integer from 0 to 15. Thus:
+system which are named vtcon<n> where <n> is an integer from 0 to 15.
+Thus::
ls /sys/class/vtconsole
. .. vtcon0 vtcon1
-Each directory in /sys/class/vtconsole has 3 files:
+Each directory in /sys/class/vtconsole has 3 files::
ls /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0
. .. bind name uevent
@@ -46,27 +50,29 @@ What do these files signify?
read, or acts to bind or unbind the driver to the virtual consoles
when written to. The possible values are:
- 0 - means the driver is not bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver
+ 0
+ - means the driver is not bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver
to unbind
- 1 - means the driver is bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver to
+ 1
+ - means the driver is bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver to
bind
- 2. name - read-only file. Shows the name of the driver in this format:
+ 2. name - read-only file. Shows the name of the driver in this format::
- cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0/name
- (S) VGA+
+ cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0/name
+ (S) VGA+
- '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, i.e., it cannot be directly
- commanded to bind or unbind
+ '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, i.e., it cannot be directly
+ commanded to bind or unbind
- 'VGA+' is the name of the driver
+ 'VGA+' is the name of the driver
- cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/name
- (M) frame buffer device
+ cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/name
+ (M) frame buffer device
- In this case, '(M)' stands for a (M)odular driver, one that can be
- directly commanded to bind or unbind.
+ In this case, '(M)' stands for a (M)odular driver, one that can be
+ directly commanded to bind or unbind.
3. uevent - ignore this file
@@ -75,14 +81,17 @@ driver takes over the consoles vacated by the driver. Binding, on the other
hand, will bind the driver to the consoles that are currently occupied by a
system driver.
-NOTE1: Binding and unbinding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under:
+NOTE1:
+ Binding and unbinding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under::
-Device Drivers -> Character devices -> Support for binding and unbinding
-console drivers
+ Device Drivers ->
+ Character devices ->
+ Support for binding and unbinding console drivers
-NOTE2: If any of the virtual consoles are in KD_GRAPHICS mode, then binding or
-unbinding will not succeed. An example of an application that sets the console
-to KD_GRAPHICS is X.
+NOTE2:
+ If any of the virtual consoles are in KD_GRAPHICS mode, then binding or
+ unbinding will not succeed. An example of an application that sets the
+ console to KD_GRAPHICS is X.
How useful is this feature? This is very useful for console driver
developers. By unbinding the driver from the console layer, one can unload the
@@ -92,10 +101,10 @@ framebuffer console to VGA console and vice versa, this feature also makes
this possible. (NOTE NOTE NOTE: Please read fbcon.txt under Documentation/fb
for more details.)
-Notes for developers:
-=====================
+Notes for developers
+====================
-do_take_over_console() is now broken up into:
+do_take_over_console() is now broken up into::
do_register_con_driver()
do_bind_con_driver() - private function
@@ -104,7 +113,7 @@ give_up_console() is a wrapper to do_unregister_con_driver(), and a driver must
be fully unbound for this call to succeed. con_is_bound() will check if the
driver is bound or not.
-Guidelines for console driver writers:
+Guidelines for console driver writers
=====================================
In order for binding to and unbinding from the console to properly work,
@@ -140,6 +149,4 @@ The current crop of console drivers should still work correctly, but binding
and unbinding them may cause problems. With minimal fixes, these drivers can
be made to work correctly.
-==========================
Antonino Daplas <adaplas@pol.net>
-
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst
index cfb9f7c38f18..22112718dd5d 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst
+++ b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst
@@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ the hardware. Thus, in a VGA console::
Assuming the VGA driver can be unloaded, one must first unbind the VGA driver
from the console layer before unloading the driver. The VGA driver cannot be
unloaded if it is still bound to the console layer. (See
-Documentation/console/console.txt for more information).
+Documentation/console/console.rst for more information).
This is more complicated in the case of the framebuffer console (fbcon),
because fbcon is an intermediate layer between the console and the drivers::
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ fbcon. Thus, there is no need to explicitly unbind the fbdev drivers from
fbcon.
So, how do we unbind fbcon from the console? Part of the answer is in
-Documentation/console/console.txt. To summarize:
+Documentation/console/console.rst. To summarize:
Echo a value to the bind file that represents the framebuffer console
driver. So assuming vtcon1 represents fbcon, then::
diff --git a/drivers/tty/Kconfig b/drivers/tty/Kconfig
index 0e3e4dacbc12..1cb50f19d58c 100644
--- a/drivers/tty/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/tty/Kconfig
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ config VT_HW_CONSOLE_BINDING
select the console driver that will serve as the backend for the
virtual terminals.
- See <file:Documentation/console/console.txt> for more
+ See <file:Documentation/console/console.rst> for more
information. For framebuffer console users, please refer to
<file:Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst>.
--
2.21.0
_______________________________________________
dri-devel mailing list
dri-devel@lists.freedesktop.org
https://lists.freedesktop.org/mailman/listinfo/dri-devel
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 06/29] docs: console.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
0 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: linux-fbdev, Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz, Greg Kroah-Hartman,
Jonathan Corbet, linux-kernel, dri-devel, Mauro Carvalho Chehab,
Jiri Slaby, Mauro Carvalho Chehab
Convert this small file to ReST in preparation for adding it to
the driver-api book.
While this is not part of the driver-api book, mark it as
:orphan:, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../console/{console.txt => console.rst} | 63 ++++++++++---------
Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst | 4 +-
drivers/tty/Kconfig | 2 +-
3 files changed, 38 insertions(+), 31 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/console/{console.txt => console.rst} (80%)
diff --git a/Documentation/console/console.txt b/Documentation/console/console.rst
similarity index 80%
rename from Documentation/console/console.txt
rename to Documentation/console/console.rst
index d73c2ab4beda..b374141b027e 100644
--- a/Documentation/console/console.txt
+++ b/Documentation/console/console.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+:orphan:
+
+======= Console Drivers
=======
@@ -17,25 +20,26 @@ of driver occupying the consoles.) They can only take over the console that is
occupied by the system driver. In the same token, if the modular driver is
released by the console, the system driver will take over.
-Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, have to call:
+Modular drivers, from the programmer's point of view, have to call::
do_take_over_console() - load and bind driver to console layer
give_up_console() - unload driver; it will only work if driver
is fully unbound
-In newer kernels, the following are also available:
+In newer kernels, the following are also available::
do_register_con_driver()
do_unregister_con_driver()
If sysfs is enabled, the contents of /sys/class/vtconsole can be
examined. This shows the console backends currently registered by the
-system which are named vtcon<n> where <n> is an integer from 0 to 15. Thus:
+system which are named vtcon<n> where <n> is an integer from 0 to 15.
+Thus::
ls /sys/class/vtconsole
. .. vtcon0 vtcon1
-Each directory in /sys/class/vtconsole has 3 files:
+Each directory in /sys/class/vtconsole has 3 files::
ls /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0
. .. bind name uevent
@@ -46,27 +50,29 @@ What do these files signify?
read, or acts to bind or unbind the driver to the virtual consoles
when written to. The possible values are:
- 0 - means the driver is not bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver
+ 0
+ - means the driver is not bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver
to unbind
- 1 - means the driver is bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver to
+ 1
+ - means the driver is bound and if echo'ed, commands the driver to
bind
- 2. name - read-only file. Shows the name of the driver in this format:
+ 2. name - read-only file. Shows the name of the driver in this format::
- cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0/name
- (S) VGA+
+ cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon0/name
+ (S) VGA+
- '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, i.e., it cannot be directly
- commanded to bind or unbind
+ '(S)' stands for a (S)ystem driver, i.e., it cannot be directly
+ commanded to bind or unbind
- 'VGA+' is the name of the driver
+ 'VGA+' is the name of the driver
- cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/name
- (M) frame buffer device
+ cat /sys/class/vtconsole/vtcon1/name
+ (M) frame buffer device
- In this case, '(M)' stands for a (M)odular driver, one that can be
- directly commanded to bind or unbind.
+ In this case, '(M)' stands for a (M)odular driver, one that can be
+ directly commanded to bind or unbind.
3. uevent - ignore this file
@@ -75,14 +81,17 @@ driver takes over the consoles vacated by the driver. Binding, on the other
hand, will bind the driver to the consoles that are currently occupied by a
system driver.
-NOTE1: Binding and unbinding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under:
+NOTE1:
+ Binding and unbinding must be selected in Kconfig. It's under::
-Device Drivers -> Character devices -> Support for binding and unbinding
-console drivers
+ Device Drivers ->
+ Character devices ->
+ Support for binding and unbinding console drivers
-NOTE2: If any of the virtual consoles are in KD_GRAPHICS mode, then binding or
-unbinding will not succeed. An example of an application that sets the console
-to KD_GRAPHICS is X.
+NOTE2:
+ If any of the virtual consoles are in KD_GRAPHICS mode, then binding or
+ unbinding will not succeed. An example of an application that sets the
+ console to KD_GRAPHICS is X.
How useful is this feature? This is very useful for console driver
developers. By unbinding the driver from the console layer, one can unload the
@@ -92,10 +101,10 @@ framebuffer console to VGA console and vice versa, this feature also makes
this possible. (NOTE NOTE NOTE: Please read fbcon.txt under Documentation/fb
for more details.)
-Notes for developers:
-==========+Notes for developers
+==========
-do_take_over_console() is now broken up into:
+do_take_over_console() is now broken up into::
do_register_con_driver()
do_bind_con_driver() - private function
@@ -104,7 +113,7 @@ give_up_console() is a wrapper to do_unregister_con_driver(), and a driver must
be fully unbound for this call to succeed. con_is_bound() will check if the
driver is bound or not.
-Guidelines for console driver writers:
+Guidelines for console driver writers
==================
In order for binding to and unbinding from the console to properly work,
@@ -140,6 +149,4 @@ The current crop of console drivers should still work correctly, but binding
and unbinding them may cause problems. With minimal fixes, these drivers can
be made to work correctly.
-=============
Antonino Daplas <adaplas@pol.net>
-
diff --git a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst
index cfb9f7c38f18..22112718dd5d 100644
--- a/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst
+++ b/Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst
@@ -187,7 +187,7 @@ the hardware. Thus, in a VGA console::
Assuming the VGA driver can be unloaded, one must first unbind the VGA driver
from the console layer before unloading the driver. The VGA driver cannot be
unloaded if it is still bound to the console layer. (See
-Documentation/console/console.txt for more information).
+Documentation/console/console.rst for more information).
This is more complicated in the case of the framebuffer console (fbcon),
because fbcon is an intermediate layer between the console and the drivers::
@@ -204,7 +204,7 @@ fbcon. Thus, there is no need to explicitly unbind the fbdev drivers from
fbcon.
So, how do we unbind fbcon from the console? Part of the answer is in
-Documentation/console/console.txt. To summarize:
+Documentation/console/console.rst. To summarize:
Echo a value to the bind file that represents the framebuffer console
driver. So assuming vtcon1 represents fbcon, then::
diff --git a/drivers/tty/Kconfig b/drivers/tty/Kconfig
index 0e3e4dacbc12..1cb50f19d58c 100644
--- a/drivers/tty/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/tty/Kconfig
@@ -93,7 +93,7 @@ config VT_HW_CONSOLE_BINDING
select the console driver that will serve as the backend for the
virtual terminals.
- See <file:Documentation/console/console.txt> for more
+ See <file:Documentation/console/console.rst> for more
information. For framebuffer console users, please refer to
<file:Documentation/fb/fbcon.rst>.
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* Re: [PATCH v2 06/29] docs: console.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
(?)
@ 2019-06-21 13:48 ` Greg Kroah-Hartman
-1 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Greg Kroah-Hartman @ 2019-06-21 13:48 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Mauro Carvalho Chehab
Cc: Linux Doc Mailing List, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz, Jiri Slaby,
dri-devel, linux-fbdev
On Tue, Jun 18, 2019 at 05:53:24PM -0300, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> Convert this small file to ReST in preparation for adding it to
> the driver-api book.
>
> While this is not part of the driver-api book, mark it as
> :orphan:, in order to avoid build warnings.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
^ permalink raw reply [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* Re: [PATCH v2 06/29] docs: console.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
@ 2019-06-21 13:48 ` Greg Kroah-Hartman
0 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Greg Kroah-Hartman @ 2019-06-21 13:48 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Mauro Carvalho Chehab
Cc: linux-fbdev, Jonathan Corbet, Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz,
Linux Doc Mailing List, linux-kernel, dri-devel,
Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Jiri Slaby
On Tue, Jun 18, 2019 at 05:53:24PM -0300, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> Convert this small file to ReST in preparation for adding it to
> the driver-api book.
>
> While this is not part of the driver-api book, mark it as
> :orphan:, in order to avoid build warnings.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
_______________________________________________
dri-devel mailing list
dri-devel@lists.freedesktop.org
https://lists.freedesktop.org/mailman/listinfo/dri-devel
^ permalink raw reply [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* Re: [PATCH v2 06/29] docs: console.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
@ 2019-06-21 13:48 ` Greg Kroah-Hartman
0 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Greg Kroah-Hartman @ 2019-06-21 13:48 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Mauro Carvalho Chehab
Cc: linux-fbdev, Jonathan Corbet, Bartlomiej Zolnierkiewicz,
Linux Doc Mailing List, linux-kernel, dri-devel,
Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Jiri Slaby
On Tue, Jun 18, 2019 at 05:53:24PM -0300, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> Convert this small file to ReST in preparation for adding it to
> the driver-api book.
>
> While this is not part of the driver-api book, mark it as
> :orphan:, in order to avoid build warnings.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Greg Kroah-Hartman <gregkh@linuxfoundation.org>
^ permalink raw reply [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* [PATCH v2 07/29] docs: pti_intel_mid.txt: convert it to pti_intel_mid.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (5 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 08/29] docs: early-userspace: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (21 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
Convert this small file to ReST format and rename it.
Most of the conversion were related to adjusting whitespaces
in order for each section to be properly parsed.
While this is not part of any book, mark it as :orphan:, in order
to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.rst | 106 ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt | 99 --------------------------
2 files changed, 106 insertions(+), 99 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.rst
delete mode 100644 Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.rst b/Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ea05725174cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+:orphan:
+
+=============
+Intel MID PTI
+=============
+
+The Intel MID PTI project is HW implemented in Intel Atom
+system-on-a-chip designs based on the Parallel Trace
+Interface for MIPI P1149.7 cJTAG standard. The kernel solution
+for this platform involves the following files::
+
+ ./include/linux/pti.h
+ ./drivers/.../n_tracesink.h
+ ./drivers/.../n_tracerouter.c
+ ./drivers/.../n_tracesink.c
+ ./drivers/.../pti.c
+
+pti.c is the driver that enables various debugging features
+popular on platforms from certain mobile manufacturers.
+n_tracerouter.c and n_tracesink.c allow extra system information to
+be collected and routed to the pti driver, such as trace
+debugging data from a modem. Although n_tracerouter
+and n_tracesink are a part of the complete PTI solution,
+these two line disciplines can work separately from
+pti.c and route any data stream from one /dev/tty node
+to another /dev/tty node via kernel-space. This provides
+a stable, reliable connection that will not break unless
+the user-space application shuts down (plus avoids
+kernel->user->kernel context switch overheads of routing
+data).
+
+An example debugging usage for this driver system:
+
+ * Hook /dev/ttyPTI0 to syslogd. Opening this port will also start
+ a console device to further capture debugging messages to PTI.
+ * Hook /dev/ttyPTI1 to modem debugging data to write to PTI HW.
+ This is where n_tracerouter and n_tracesink are used.
+ * Hook /dev/pti to a user-level debugging application for writing
+ to PTI HW.
+ * `Use mipi_` Kernel Driver API in other device drivers for
+ debugging to PTI by first requesting a PTI write address via
+ mipi_request_masterchannel(1).
+
+Below is example pseudo-code on how a 'privileged' application
+can hook up n_tracerouter and n_tracesink to any tty on
+a system. 'Privileged' means the application has enough
+privileges to successfully manipulate the ldisc drivers
+but is not just blindly executing as 'root'. Keep in mind
+the use of ioctl(,TIOCSETD,) is not specific to the n_tracerouter
+and n_tracesink line discpline drivers but is a generic
+operation for a program to use a line discpline driver
+on a tty port other than the default n_tty::
+
+ /////////// To hook up n_tracerouter and n_tracesink /////////
+
+ // Note that n_tracerouter depends on n_tracesink.
+ #include <errno.h>
+ #define ONE_TTY "/dev/ttyOne"
+ #define TWO_TTY "/dev/ttyTwo"
+
+ // needed global to hand onto ldisc connection
+ static int g_fd_source = -1;
+ static int g_fd_sink = -1;
+
+ // these two vars used to grab LDISC values from loaded ldisc drivers
+ // in OS. Look at /proc/tty/ldiscs to get the right numbers from
+ // the ldiscs loaded in the system.
+ int source_ldisc_num, sink_ldisc_num = -1;
+ int retval;
+
+ g_fd_source = open(ONE_TTY, O_RDWR); // must be R/W
+ g_fd_sink = open(TWO_TTY, O_RDWR); // must be R/W
+
+ if (g_fd_source <= 0) || (g_fd_sink <= 0) {
+ // doubt you'll want to use these exact error lines of code
+ printf("Error on open(). errno: %d\n",errno);
+ return errno;
+ }
+
+ retval = ioctl(g_fd_sink, TIOCSETD, &sink_ldisc_num);
+ if (retval < 0) {
+ printf("Error on ioctl(). errno: %d\n", errno);
+ return errno;
+ }
+
+ retval = ioctl(g_fd_source, TIOCSETD, &source_ldisc_num);
+ if (retval < 0) {
+ printf("Error on ioctl(). errno: %d\n", errno);
+ return errno;
+ }
+
+ /////////// To disconnect n_tracerouter and n_tracesink ////////
+
+ // First make sure data through the ldiscs has stopped.
+
+ // Second, disconnect ldiscs. This provides a
+ // little cleaner shutdown on tty stack.
+ sink_ldisc_num = 0;
+ source_ldisc_num = 0;
+ ioctl(g_fd_uart, TIOCSETD, &sink_ldisc_num);
+ ioctl(g_fd_gadget, TIOCSETD, &source_ldisc_num);
+
+ // Three, program closes connection, and cleanup:
+ close(g_fd_uart);
+ close(g_fd_gadget);
+ g_fd_uart = g_fd_gadget = NULL;
diff --git a/Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt b/Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index e7a5b6d1f7a9..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/pti/pti_intel_mid.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
-The Intel MID PTI project is HW implemented in Intel Atom
-system-on-a-chip designs based on the Parallel Trace
-Interface for MIPI P1149.7 cJTAG standard. The kernel solution
-for this platform involves the following files:
-
-./include/linux/pti.h
-./drivers/.../n_tracesink.h
-./drivers/.../n_tracerouter.c
-./drivers/.../n_tracesink.c
-./drivers/.../pti.c
-
-pti.c is the driver that enables various debugging features
-popular on platforms from certain mobile manufacturers.
-n_tracerouter.c and n_tracesink.c allow extra system information to
-be collected and routed to the pti driver, such as trace
-debugging data from a modem. Although n_tracerouter
-and n_tracesink are a part of the complete PTI solution,
-these two line disciplines can work separately from
-pti.c and route any data stream from one /dev/tty node
-to another /dev/tty node via kernel-space. This provides
-a stable, reliable connection that will not break unless
-the user-space application shuts down (plus avoids
-kernel->user->kernel context switch overheads of routing
-data).
-
-An example debugging usage for this driver system:
- *Hook /dev/ttyPTI0 to syslogd. Opening this port will also start
- a console device to further capture debugging messages to PTI.
- *Hook /dev/ttyPTI1 to modem debugging data to write to PTI HW.
- This is where n_tracerouter and n_tracesink are used.
- *Hook /dev/pti to a user-level debugging application for writing
- to PTI HW.
- *Use mipi_* Kernel Driver API in other device drivers for
- debugging to PTI by first requesting a PTI write address via
- mipi_request_masterchannel(1).
-
-Below is example pseudo-code on how a 'privileged' application
-can hook up n_tracerouter and n_tracesink to any tty on
-a system. 'Privileged' means the application has enough
-privileges to successfully manipulate the ldisc drivers
-but is not just blindly executing as 'root'. Keep in mind
-the use of ioctl(,TIOCSETD,) is not specific to the n_tracerouter
-and n_tracesink line discpline drivers but is a generic
-operation for a program to use a line discpline driver
-on a tty port other than the default n_tty.
-
-/////////// To hook up n_tracerouter and n_tracesink /////////
-
-// Note that n_tracerouter depends on n_tracesink.
-#include <errno.h>
-#define ONE_TTY "/dev/ttyOne"
-#define TWO_TTY "/dev/ttyTwo"
-
-// needed global to hand onto ldisc connection
-static int g_fd_source = -1;
-static int g_fd_sink = -1;
-
-// these two vars used to grab LDISC values from loaded ldisc drivers
-// in OS. Look at /proc/tty/ldiscs to get the right numbers from
-// the ldiscs loaded in the system.
-int source_ldisc_num, sink_ldisc_num = -1;
-int retval;
-
-g_fd_source = open(ONE_TTY, O_RDWR); // must be R/W
-g_fd_sink = open(TWO_TTY, O_RDWR); // must be R/W
-
-if (g_fd_source <= 0) || (g_fd_sink <= 0) {
- // doubt you'll want to use these exact error lines of code
- printf("Error on open(). errno: %d\n",errno);
- return errno;
-}
-
-retval = ioctl(g_fd_sink, TIOCSETD, &sink_ldisc_num);
-if (retval < 0) {
- printf("Error on ioctl(). errno: %d\n", errno);
- return errno;
-}
-
-retval = ioctl(g_fd_source, TIOCSETD, &source_ldisc_num);
-if (retval < 0) {
- printf("Error on ioctl(). errno: %d\n", errno);
- return errno;
-}
-
-/////////// To disconnect n_tracerouter and n_tracesink ////////
-
-// First make sure data through the ldiscs has stopped.
-
-// Second, disconnect ldiscs. This provides a
-// little cleaner shutdown on tty stack.
-sink_ldisc_num = 0;
-source_ldisc_num = 0;
-ioctl(g_fd_uart, TIOCSETD, &sink_ldisc_num);
-ioctl(g_fd_gadget, TIOCSETD, &source_ldisc_num);
-
-// Three, program closes connection, and cleanup:
-close(g_fd_uart);
-close(g_fd_gadget);
-g_fd_uart = g_fd_gadget = NULL;
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 08/29] docs: early-userspace: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (6 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 07/29] docs: pti_intel_mid.txt: convert it to pti_intel_mid.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [Intel-wired-lan] " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (20 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
The two files there describes a Kernel API feature, used to
support early userspace stuff. Prepare for moving them to
the kernel API book by converting to ReST format.
The conversion itself was quite trivial: just add/mark a few
titles as such, add a literal block markup, add a table markup
and a few blank lines, in order to make Sphinx to properly parse it.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../{buffer-format.txt => buffer-format.rst} | 19 +++++++++++++------
.../{README => early_userspace_support.rst} | 3 +++
Documentation/early-userspace/index.rst | 18 ++++++++++++++++++
Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt | 2 +-
.../filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt | 4 ++--
usr/Kconfig | 2 +-
6 files changed, 38 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/early-userspace/{buffer-format.txt => buffer-format.rst} (91%)
rename Documentation/early-userspace/{README => early_userspace_support.rst} (99%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/early-userspace/index.rst
diff --git a/Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.txt b/Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.rst
similarity index 91%
rename from Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.txt
rename to Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.rst
index e1fd7f9dad16..7f74e301fdf3 100644
--- a/Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.txt
+++ b/Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
- initramfs buffer format
- -----------------------
+=======================
+initramfs buffer format
+=======================
- Al Viro, H. Peter Anvin
- Last revision: 2002-01-13
+Al Viro, H. Peter Anvin
+
+Last revision: 2002-01-13
Starting with kernel 2.5.x, the old "initial ramdisk" protocol is
getting {replaced/complemented} with the new "initial ramfs"
@@ -18,7 +20,8 @@ archive can be compressed using gzip(1). One valid version of an
initramfs buffer is thus a single .cpio.gz file.
The full format of the initramfs buffer is defined by the following
-grammar, where:
+grammar, where::
+
* is used to indicate "0 or more occurrences of"
(|) indicates alternatives
+ indicates concatenation
@@ -49,7 +52,9 @@ hexadecimal ASCII numbers fully padded with '0' on the left to the
full width of the field, for example, the integer 4780 is represented
by the ASCII string "000012ac"):
+============= ================== ==============================================
Field name Field size Meaning
+============= ================== ==============================================
c_magic 6 bytes The string "070701" or "070702"
c_ino 8 bytes File inode number
c_mode 8 bytes File mode and permissions
@@ -65,6 +70,7 @@ c_rmin 8 bytes Minor part of device node reference
c_namesize 8 bytes Length of filename, including final \0
c_chksum 8 bytes Checksum of data field if c_magic is 070702;
otherwise zero
+============= ================== ==============================================
The c_mode field matches the contents of st_mode returned by stat(2)
on Linux, and encodes the file type and file permissions.
@@ -82,7 +88,8 @@ If the filename is "TRAILER!!!" this is actually an end-of-archive
marker; the c_filesize for an end-of-archive marker must be zero.
-*** Handling of hard links
+Handling of hard links
+======================
When a nondirectory with c_nlink > 1 is seen, the (c_maj,c_min,c_ino)
tuple is looked up in a tuple buffer. If not found, it is entered in
diff --git a/Documentation/early-userspace/README b/Documentation/early-userspace/early_userspace_support.rst
similarity index 99%
rename from Documentation/early-userspace/README
rename to Documentation/early-userspace/early_userspace_support.rst
index 955d667dc87e..3deefb34046b 100644
--- a/Documentation/early-userspace/README
+++ b/Documentation/early-userspace/early_userspace_support.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=======================
Early userspace support
=======================
@@ -26,6 +27,7 @@ archive to be used as the image or have the kernel build process build
the image from specifications.
CPIO ARCHIVE method
+-------------------
You can create a cpio archive that contains the early userspace image.
Your cpio archive should be specified in CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE and it
@@ -34,6 +36,7 @@ CONFIG_INITRAMFS_SOURCE and directory and file names are not allowed in
combination with a cpio archive.
IMAGE BUILDING method
+---------------------
The kernel build process can also build an early userspace image from
source parts rather than supplying a cpio archive. This method provides
diff --git a/Documentation/early-userspace/index.rst b/Documentation/early-userspace/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..2b8eb6132058
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/early-userspace/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+:orphan:
+
+===============
+Early Userspace
+===============
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ early_userspace_support
+ buffer-format
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt
index d2963123eb1c..4862d3d77e27 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/nfs/nfsroot.txt
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ rdinit=<executable file>
A description of the process of mounting the root file system can be
found in:
- Documentation/early-userspace/README
+ Documentation/early-userspace/early_userspace_support.rst
diff --git a/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt
index 79637d227e85..fa985909dbca 100644
--- a/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/filesystems/ramfs-rootfs-initramfs.txt
@@ -105,7 +105,7 @@ All this differs from the old initrd in several ways:
- The old initrd file was a gzipped filesystem image (in some file format,
such as ext2, that needed a driver built into the kernel), while the new
initramfs archive is a gzipped cpio archive (like tar only simpler,
- see cpio(1) and Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.txt). The
+ see cpio(1) and Documentation/early-userspace/buffer-format.rst). The
kernel's cpio extraction code is not only extremely small, it's also
__init text and data that can be discarded during the boot process.
@@ -159,7 +159,7 @@ One advantage of the configuration file is that root access is not required to
set permissions or create device nodes in the new archive. (Note that those
two example "file" entries expect to find files named "init.sh" and "busybox" in
a directory called "initramfs", under the linux-2.6.* directory. See
-Documentation/early-userspace/README for more details.)
+Documentation/early-userspace/early_userspace_support.rst for more details.)
The kernel does not depend on external cpio tools. If you specify a
directory instead of a configuration file, the kernel's build infrastructure
diff --git a/usr/Kconfig b/usr/Kconfig
index 43658b8a975e..86e37e297278 100644
--- a/usr/Kconfig
+++ b/usr/Kconfig
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ config INITRAMFS_SOURCE
When multiple directories and files are specified then the
initramfs image will be the aggregate of all of them.
- See <file:Documentation/early-userspace/README> for more details.
+ See <file:Documentation/early-userspace/early_userspace_support.rst> for more details.
If you are not sure, leave it blank.
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 09/29] docs: driver-model: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 02/29] docs: lcd-panel-cgram.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (27 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Linus Walleij, Bartosz Golaszewski,
Jean Delvare, Guenter Roeck, Greg Kroah-Hartman,
Rafael J. Wysocki, Jeff Kirsher, David S. Miller, Julia Lawall,
Gilles Muller, Nicolas Palix, Michal Marek, linux-gpio,
linux-hwmon, intel-wired-lan, netdev, cocci
Convert the various documents at the driver-model, preparing
them to be part of the driver-api book.
The conversion is actually:
- add blank lines and identation in order to identify paragraphs;
- fix tables markups;
- add some lists markups;
- mark literal blocks;
- adjust title markups.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Jeff Kirsher <jeffrey.t.kirsher@intel.com> # ice
---
Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst | 2 +-
.../driver-model/{binding.txt => binding.rst} | 20 +-
.../driver-model/{bus.txt => bus.rst} | 69 ++--
.../driver-model/{class.txt => class.rst} | 74 ++--
...esign-patterns.txt => design-patterns.rst} | 106 +++---
.../driver-model/{device.txt => device.rst} | 57 +--
.../driver-model/{devres.txt => devres.rst} | 50 +--
.../driver-model/{driver.txt => driver.rst} | 112 +++---
Documentation/driver-model/index.rst | 26 ++
.../{overview.txt => overview.rst} | 37 +-
.../{platform.txt => platform.rst} | 30 +-
.../driver-model/{porting.txt => porting.rst} | 333 +++++++++---------
Documentation/eisa.txt | 4 +-
Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.rst | 2 +-
drivers/base/platform.c | 2 +-
drivers/gpio/gpio-cs5535.c | 2 +-
drivers/net/ethernet/intel/ice/ice_main.c | 2 +-
scripts/coccinelle/free/devm_free.cocci | 2 +-
18 files changed, 489 insertions(+), 441 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{binding.txt => binding.rst} (92%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{bus.txt => bus.rst} (76%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{class.txt => class.rst} (75%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{design-patterns.txt => design-patterns.rst} (59%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{device.txt => device.rst} (71%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{devres.txt => devres.rst} (93%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{driver.txt => driver.rst} (75%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/driver-model/index.rst
rename Documentation/driver-model/{overview.txt => overview.rst} (90%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{platform.txt => platform.rst} (95%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{porting.txt => porting.rst} (62%)
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst
index 4af9aae724f0..349f2dc33029 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst
@@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ symbol:
will pass the struct gpio_chip* for the chip to all IRQ callbacks, so the
callbacks need to embed the gpio_chip in its state container and obtain a
pointer to the container using container_of().
- (See Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt)
+ (See Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.rst)
- gpiochip_irqchip_add_nested(): adds a nested cascaded irqchip to a gpiochip,
as discussed above regarding different types of cascaded irqchips. The
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/binding.rst
similarity index 92%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/binding.rst
index abfc8e290d53..7ea1d7a41e1d 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/binding.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
+==============
Driver Binding
+==============
Driver binding is the process of associating a device with a device
driver that can control it. Bus drivers have typically handled this
@@ -25,7 +26,7 @@ device_register
When a new device is added, the bus's list of drivers is iterated over
to find one that supports it. In order to determine that, the device
ID of the device must match one of the device IDs that the driver
-supports. The format and semantics for comparing IDs is bus-specific.
+supports. The format and semantics for comparing IDs is bus-specific.
Instead of trying to derive a complex state machine and matching
algorithm, it is up to the bus driver to provide a callback to compare
a device against the IDs of a driver. The bus returns 1 if a match was
@@ -36,14 +37,14 @@ int match(struct device * dev, struct device_driver * drv);
If a match is found, the device's driver field is set to the driver
and the driver's probe callback is called. This gives the driver a
chance to verify that it really does support the hardware, and that
-it's in a working state.
+it's in a working state.
Device Class
~~~~~~~~~~~~
Upon the successful completion of probe, the device is registered with
the class to which it belongs. Device drivers belong to one and only one
-class, and that is set in the driver's devclass field.
+class, and that is set in the driver's devclass field.
devclass_add_device is called to enumerate the device within the class
and actually register it with the class, which happens with the
class's register_dev callback.
@@ -53,7 +54,7 @@ Driver
~~~~~~
When a driver is attached to a device, the device is inserted into the
-driver's list of devices.
+driver's list of devices.
sysfs
@@ -67,18 +68,18 @@ to the device's directory in the physical hierarchy.
A directory for the device is created in the class's directory. A
symlink is created in that directory that points to the device's
-physical location in the sysfs tree.
+physical location in the sysfs tree.
A symlink can be created (though this isn't done yet) in the device's
physical directory to either its class directory, or the class's
top-level directory. One can also be created to point to its driver's
-directory also.
+directory also.
driver_register
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-The process is almost identical for when a new driver is added.
+The process is almost identical for when a new driver is added.
The bus's list of devices is iterated over to find a match. Devices
that already have a driver are skipped. All the devices are iterated
over, to bind as many devices as possible to the driver.
@@ -94,5 +95,4 @@ of the driver is decremented. All symlinks between the two are removed.
When a driver is removed, the list of devices that it supports is
iterated over, and the driver's remove callback is called for each
-one. The device is removed from that list and the symlinks removed.
-
+one. The device is removed from that list and the symlinks removed.
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/bus.rst
similarity index 76%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/bus.rst
index c247b488a567..016b15a6e8ea 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/bus.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
-Bus Types
+=========
+Bus Types
+=========
Definition
~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -13,12 +14,12 @@ Declaration
Each bus type in the kernel (PCI, USB, etc) should declare one static
object of this type. They must initialize the name field, and may
-optionally initialize the match callback.
+optionally initialize the match callback::
-struct bus_type pci_bus_type = {
- .name = "pci",
- .match = pci_bus_match,
-};
+ struct bus_type pci_bus_type = {
+ .name = "pci",
+ .match = pci_bus_match,
+ };
The structure should be exported to drivers in a header file:
@@ -30,8 +31,8 @@ Registration
When a bus driver is initialized, it calls bus_register. This
initializes the rest of the fields in the bus object and inserts it
-into a global list of bus types. Once the bus object is registered,
-the fields in it are usable by the bus driver.
+into a global list of bus types. Once the bus object is registered,
+the fields in it are usable by the bus driver.
Callbacks
@@ -43,17 +44,17 @@ match(): Attaching Drivers to Devices
The format of device ID structures and the semantics for comparing
them are inherently bus-specific. Drivers typically declare an array
of device IDs of devices they support that reside in a bus-specific
-driver structure.
+driver structure.
The purpose of the match callback is to give the bus an opportunity to
determine if a particular driver supports a particular device by
comparing the device IDs the driver supports with the device ID of a
particular device, without sacrificing bus-specific functionality or
-type-safety.
+type-safety.
When a driver is registered with the bus, the bus's list of devices is
iterated over, and the match callback is called for each device that
-does not have a driver associated with it.
+does not have a driver associated with it.
@@ -64,22 +65,23 @@ The lists of devices and drivers are intended to replace the local
lists that many buses keep. They are lists of struct devices and
struct device_drivers, respectively. Bus drivers are free to use the
lists as they please, but conversion to the bus-specific type may be
-necessary.
+necessary.
-The LDM core provides helper functions for iterating over each list.
+The LDM core provides helper functions for iterating over each list::
-int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start, void * data,
- int (*fn)(struct device *, void *));
+ int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start,
+ void * data,
+ int (*fn)(struct device *, void *));
-int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start,
- void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *));
+ int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start,
+ void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *));
These helpers iterate over the respective list, and call the callback
for each device or driver in the list. All list accesses are
synchronized by taking the bus's lock (read currently). The reference
count on each object in the list is incremented before the callback is
called; it is decremented after the next object has been obtained. The
-lock is not held when calling the callback.
+lock is not held when calling the callback.
sysfs
@@ -87,14 +89,14 @@ sysfs
There is a top-level directory named 'bus'.
Each bus gets a directory in the bus directory, along with two default
-directories:
+directories::
/sys/bus/pci/
|-- devices
`-- drivers
Drivers registered with the bus get a directory in the bus's drivers
-directory:
+directory::
/sys/bus/pci/
|-- devices
@@ -106,7 +108,7 @@ directory:
Each device that is discovered on a bus of that type gets a symlink in
the bus's devices directory to the device's directory in the physical
-hierarchy:
+hierarchy::
/sys/bus/pci/
|-- devices
@@ -118,26 +120,27 @@ hierarchy:
Exporting Attributes
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-struct bus_attribute {
+
+::
+
+ struct bus_attribute {
struct attribute attr;
ssize_t (*show)(struct bus_type *, char * buf);
ssize_t (*store)(struct bus_type *, const char * buf, size_t count);
-};
+ };
Bus drivers can export attributes using the BUS_ATTR_RW macro that works
similarly to the DEVICE_ATTR_RW macro for devices. For example, a
-definition like this:
+definition like this::
-static BUS_ATTR_RW(debug);
+ static BUS_ATTR_RW(debug);
-is equivalent to declaring:
+is equivalent to declaring::
-static bus_attribute bus_attr_debug;
+ static bus_attribute bus_attr_debug;
This can then be used to add and remove the attribute from the bus's
-sysfs directory using:
-
-int bus_create_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
-void bus_remove_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
-
+sysfs directory using::
+ int bus_create_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
+ void bus_remove_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/class.rst
similarity index 75%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/class.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/class.rst
index 1fefc480a80b..fff55b80e86a 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/class.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
+==============
Device Classes
-
+==============
Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -13,37 +13,37 @@ device. The following device classes have been identified:
Each device class defines a set of semantics and a programming interface
that devices of that class adhere to. Device drivers are the
implementation of that programming interface for a particular device on
-a particular bus.
+a particular bus.
Device classes are agnostic with respect to what bus a device resides
-on.
+on.
Programming Interface
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-The device class structure looks like:
+The device class structure looks like::
-typedef int (*devclass_add)(struct device *);
-typedef void (*devclass_remove)(struct device *);
+ typedef int (*devclass_add)(struct device *);
+ typedef void (*devclass_remove)(struct device *);
See the kerneldoc for the struct class.
-A typical device class definition would look like:
+A typical device class definition would look like::
-struct device_class input_devclass = {
+ struct device_class input_devclass = {
.name = "input",
.add_device = input_add_device,
.remove_device = input_remove_device,
-};
+ };
Each device class structure should be exported in a header file so it
can be used by drivers, extensions and interfaces.
-Device classes are registered and unregistered with the core using:
+Device classes are registered and unregistered with the core using::
-int devclass_register(struct device_class * cls);
-void devclass_unregister(struct device_class * cls);
+ int devclass_register(struct device_class * cls);
+ void devclass_unregister(struct device_class * cls);
Devices
@@ -52,16 +52,16 @@ As devices are bound to drivers, they are added to the device class
that the driver belongs to. Before the driver model core, this would
typically happen during the driver's probe() callback, once the device
has been initialized. It now happens after the probe() callback
-finishes from the core.
+finishes from the core.
The device is enumerated in the class. Each time a device is added to
the class, the class's devnum field is incremented and assigned to the
device. The field is never decremented, so if the device is removed
from the class and re-added, it will receive a different enumerated
-value.
+value.
The class is allowed to create a class-specific structure for the
-device and store it in the device's class_data pointer.
+device and store it in the device's class_data pointer.
There is no list of devices in the device class. Each driver has a
list of devices that it supports. The device class has a list of
@@ -73,15 +73,15 @@ Device Drivers
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Device drivers are added to device classes when they are registered
with the core. A driver specifies the class it belongs to by setting
-the struct device_driver::devclass field.
+the struct device_driver::devclass field.
sysfs directory structure
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-There is a top-level sysfs directory named 'class'.
+There is a top-level sysfs directory named 'class'.
Each class gets a directory in the class directory, along with two
-default subdirectories:
+default subdirectories::
class/
`-- input
@@ -89,8 +89,8 @@ default subdirectories:
`-- drivers
-Drivers registered with the class get a symlink in the drivers/ directory
-that points to the driver's directory (under its bus directory):
+Drivers registered with the class get a symlink in the drivers/ directory
+that points to the driver's directory (under its bus directory)::
class/
`-- input
@@ -99,8 +99,8 @@ that points to the driver's directory (under its bus directory):
`-- usb:usb_mouse -> ../../../bus/drivers/usb_mouse/
-Each device gets a symlink in the devices/ directory that points to the
-device's directory in the physical hierarchy:
+Each device gets a symlink in the devices/ directory that points to the
+device's directory in the physical hierarchy::
class/
`-- input
@@ -111,37 +111,39 @@ device's directory in the physical hierarchy:
Exporting Attributes
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-struct devclass_attribute {
+
+::
+
+ struct devclass_attribute {
struct attribute attr;
ssize_t (*show)(struct device_class *, char * buf, size_t count, loff_t off);
ssize_t (*store)(struct device_class *, const char * buf, size_t count, loff_t off);
-};
+ };
Class drivers can export attributes using the DEVCLASS_ATTR macro that works
-similarly to the DEVICE_ATTR macro for devices. For example, a definition
-like this:
+similarly to the DEVICE_ATTR macro for devices. For example, a definition
+like this::
-static DEVCLASS_ATTR(debug,0644,show_debug,store_debug);
+ static DEVCLASS_ATTR(debug,0644,show_debug,store_debug);
-is equivalent to declaring:
+is equivalent to declaring::
-static devclass_attribute devclass_attr_debug;
+ static devclass_attribute devclass_attr_debug;
The bus driver can add and remove the attribute from the class's
-sysfs directory using:
+sysfs directory using::
-int devclass_create_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *);
-void devclass_remove_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *);
+ int devclass_create_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *);
+ void devclass_remove_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *);
In the example above, the file will be named 'debug' in placed in the
-class's directory in sysfs.
+class's directory in sysfs.
Interfaces
~~~~~~~~~~
There may exist multiple mechanisms for accessing the same device of a
-particular class type. Device interfaces describe these mechanisms.
+particular class type. Device interfaces describe these mechanisms.
When a device is added to a device class, the core attempts to add it
to every interface that is registered with the device class.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.rst
similarity index 59%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.rst
index ba7b2df64904..41eb8f41f7dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
+=============================
Device Driver Design Patterns
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+=============================
This document describes a few common design patterns found in device drivers.
It is likely that subsystem maintainers will ask driver developers to
@@ -19,23 +19,23 @@ that the device the driver binds to will appear in several instances. This
means that the probe() function and all callbacks need to be reentrant.
The most common way to achieve this is to use the state container design
-pattern. It usually has this form:
+pattern. It usually has this form::
-struct foo {
- spinlock_t lock; /* Example member */
- (...)
-};
+ struct foo {
+ spinlock_t lock; /* Example member */
+ (...)
+ };
-static int foo_probe(...)
-{
- struct foo *foo;
+ static int foo_probe(...)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo;
- foo = devm_kzalloc(dev, sizeof(*foo), GFP_KERNEL);
- if (!foo)
- return -ENOMEM;
- spin_lock_init(&foo->lock);
- (...)
-}
+ foo = devm_kzalloc(dev, sizeof(*foo), GFP_KERNEL);
+ if (!foo)
+ return -ENOMEM;
+ spin_lock_init(&foo->lock);
+ (...)
+ }
This will create an instance of struct foo in memory every time probe() is
called. This is our state container for this instance of the device driver.
@@ -43,21 +43,21 @@ Of course it is then necessary to always pass this instance of the
state around to all functions that need access to the state and its members.
For example, if the driver is registering an interrupt handler, you would
-pass around a pointer to struct foo like this:
+pass around a pointer to struct foo like this::
-static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg)
-{
- struct foo *foo = arg;
- (...)
-}
+ static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo = arg;
+ (...)
+ }
-static int foo_probe(...)
-{
- struct foo *foo;
+ static int foo_probe(...)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo;
- (...)
- ret = request_irq(irq, foo_handler, 0, "foo", foo);
-}
+ (...)
+ ret = request_irq(irq, foo_handler, 0, "foo", foo);
+ }
This way you always get a pointer back to the correct instance of foo in
your interrupt handler.
@@ -66,38 +66,38 @@ your interrupt handler.
2. container_of()
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Continuing on the above example we add an offloaded work:
+Continuing on the above example we add an offloaded work::
-struct foo {
- spinlock_t lock;
- struct workqueue_struct *wq;
- struct work_struct offload;
- (...)
-};
+ struct foo {
+ spinlock_t lock;
+ struct workqueue_struct *wq;
+ struct work_struct offload;
+ (...)
+ };
-static void foo_work(struct work_struct *work)
-{
- struct foo *foo = container_of(work, struct foo, offload);
+ static void foo_work(struct work_struct *work)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo = container_of(work, struct foo, offload);
- (...)
-}
+ (...)
+ }
-static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg)
-{
- struct foo *foo = arg;
+ static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo = arg;
- queue_work(foo->wq, &foo->offload);
- (...)
-}
+ queue_work(foo->wq, &foo->offload);
+ (...)
+ }
-static int foo_probe(...)
-{
- struct foo *foo;
+ static int foo_probe(...)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo;
- foo->wq = create_singlethread_workqueue("foo-wq");
- INIT_WORK(&foo->offload, foo_work);
- (...)
-}
+ foo->wq = create_singlethread_workqueue("foo-wq");
+ INIT_WORK(&foo->offload, foo_work);
+ (...)
+ }
The design pattern is the same for an hrtimer or something similar that will
return a single argument which is a pointer to a struct member in the
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/device.rst
similarity index 71%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/device.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/device.rst
index 2403eb856187..2b868d49d349 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/device.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
+==========================
The Basic Device Structure
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+==========================
See the kerneldoc for the struct device.
@@ -8,9 +8,9 @@ See the kerneldoc for the struct device.
Programming Interface
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The bus driver that discovers the device uses this to register the
-device with the core:
+device with the core::
-int device_register(struct device * dev);
+ int device_register(struct device * dev);
The bus should initialize the following fields:
@@ -20,30 +20,33 @@ The bus should initialize the following fields:
- bus
A device is removed from the core when its reference count goes to
-0. The reference count can be adjusted using:
+0. The reference count can be adjusted using::
-struct device * get_device(struct device * dev);
-void put_device(struct device * dev);
+ struct device * get_device(struct device * dev);
+ void put_device(struct device * dev);
get_device() will return a pointer to the struct device passed to it
if the reference is not already 0 (if it's in the process of being
removed already).
-A driver can access the lock in the device structure using:
+A driver can access the lock in the device structure using::
-void lock_device(struct device * dev);
-void unlock_device(struct device * dev);
+ void lock_device(struct device * dev);
+ void unlock_device(struct device * dev);
Attributes
~~~~~~~~~~
-struct device_attribute {
+
+::
+
+ struct device_attribute {
struct attribute attr;
ssize_t (*show)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
char *buf);
ssize_t (*store)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
const char *buf, size_t count);
-};
+ };
Attributes of devices can be exported by a device driver through sysfs.
@@ -54,39 +57,39 @@ As explained in Documentation/kobject.txt, device attributes must be
created before the KOBJ_ADD uevent is generated. The only way to realize
that is by defining an attribute group.
-Attributes are declared using a macro called DEVICE_ATTR:
+Attributes are declared using a macro called DEVICE_ATTR::
-#define DEVICE_ATTR(name,mode,show,store)
+ #define DEVICE_ATTR(name,mode,show,store)
-Example:
+Example:::
-static DEVICE_ATTR(type, 0444, show_type, NULL);
-static DEVICE_ATTR(power, 0644, show_power, store_power);
+ static DEVICE_ATTR(type, 0444, show_type, NULL);
+ static DEVICE_ATTR(power, 0644, show_power, store_power);
This declares two structures of type struct device_attribute with respective
names 'dev_attr_type' and 'dev_attr_power'. These two attributes can be
-organized as follows into a group:
+organized as follows into a group::
-static struct attribute *dev_attrs[] = {
+ static struct attribute *dev_attrs[] = {
&dev_attr_type.attr,
&dev_attr_power.attr,
NULL,
-};
+ };
-static struct attribute_group dev_attr_group = {
+ static struct attribute_group dev_attr_group = {
.attrs = dev_attrs,
-};
+ };
-static const struct attribute_group *dev_attr_groups[] = {
+ static const struct attribute_group *dev_attr_groups[] = {
&dev_attr_group,
NULL,
-};
+ };
This array of groups can then be associated with a device by setting the
-group pointer in struct device before device_register() is invoked:
+group pointer in struct device before device_register() is invoked::
- dev->groups = dev_attr_groups;
- device_register(dev);
+ dev->groups = dev_attr_groups;
+ device_register(dev);
The device_register() function will use the 'groups' pointer to create the
device attributes and the device_unregister() function will use this pointer
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.rst
similarity index 93%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/devres.rst
index 69c7fa7f616c..4ac99122b5f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+================================
Devres - Managed Device Resource
================================
@@ -5,17 +6,18 @@ Tejun Heo <teheo@suse.de>
First draft 10 January 2007
+.. contents
-1. Intro : Huh? Devres?
-2. Devres : Devres in a nutshell
-3. Devres Group : Group devres'es and release them together
-4. Details : Life time rules, calling context, ...
-5. Overhead : How much do we have to pay for this?
-6. List of managed interfaces : Currently implemented managed interfaces
+ 1. Intro : Huh? Devres?
+ 2. Devres : Devres in a nutshell
+ 3. Devres Group : Group devres'es and release them together
+ 4. Details : Life time rules, calling context, ...
+ 5. Overhead : How much do we have to pay for this?
+ 6. List of managed interfaces: Currently implemented managed interfaces
- 1. Intro
- --------
+1. Intro
+--------
devres came up while trying to convert libata to use iomap. Each
iomapped address should be kept and unmapped on driver detach. For
@@ -42,8 +44,8 @@ would leak resources or even cause oops when failure occurs. iomap
adds more to this mix. So do msi and msix.
- 2. Devres
- ---------
+2. Devres
+---------
devres is basically linked list of arbitrarily sized memory areas
associated with a struct device. Each devres entry is associated with
@@ -58,7 +60,7 @@ using dma_alloc_coherent(). The managed version is called
dmam_alloc_coherent(). It is identical to dma_alloc_coherent() except
for the DMA memory allocated using it is managed and will be
automatically released on driver detach. Implementation looks like
-the following.
+the following::
struct dma_devres {
size_t size;
@@ -98,7 +100,7 @@ If a driver uses dmam_alloc_coherent(), the area is guaranteed to be
freed whether initialization fails half-way or the device gets
detached. If most resources are acquired using managed interface, a
driver can have much simpler init and exit code. Init path basically
-looks like the following.
+looks like the following::
my_init_one()
{
@@ -119,7 +121,7 @@ looks like the following.
return register_to_upper_layer(d);
}
-And exit path,
+And exit path::
my_remove_one()
{
@@ -140,13 +142,13 @@ on you. In some cases this may mean introducing checks that were not
necessary before moving to the managed devm_* calls.
- 3. Devres group
- ---------------
+3. Devres group
+---------------
Devres entries can be grouped using devres group. When a group is
released, all contained normal devres entries and properly nested
groups are released. One usage is to rollback series of acquired
-resources on failure. For example,
+resources on failure. For example::
if (!devres_open_group(dev, NULL, GFP_KERNEL))
return -ENOMEM;
@@ -172,7 +174,7 @@ like above are usually useful in midlayer driver (e.g. libata core
layer) where interface function shouldn't have side effect on failure.
For LLDs, just returning error code suffices in most cases.
-Each group is identified by void *id. It can either be explicitly
+Each group is identified by `void *id`. It can either be explicitly
specified by @id argument to devres_open_group() or automatically
created by passing NULL as @id as in the above example. In both
cases, devres_open_group() returns the group's id. The returned id
@@ -180,7 +182,7 @@ can be passed to other devres functions to select the target group.
If NULL is given to those functions, the latest open group is
selected.
-For example, you can do something like the following.
+For example, you can do something like the following::
int my_midlayer_create_something()
{
@@ -199,8 +201,8 @@ For example, you can do something like the following.
}
- 4. Details
- ----------
+4. Details
+----------
Lifetime of a devres entry begins on devres allocation and finishes
when it is released or destroyed (removed and freed) - no reference
@@ -220,8 +222,8 @@ All devres interface functions can be called without context if the
right gfp mask is given.
- 5. Overhead
- -----------
+5. Overhead
+-----------
Each devres bookkeeping info is allocated together with requested data
area. With debug option turned off, bookkeeping info occupies 16
@@ -237,8 +239,8 @@ and 400 bytes on 32bit machine after naive conversion (we can
certainly invest a bit more effort into libata core layer).
- 6. List of managed interfaces
- -----------------------------
+6. List of managed interfaces
+-----------------------------
CLOCK
devm_clk_get()
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/driver.rst
similarity index 75%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/driver.rst
index d661e6f7e6a0..11d281506a04 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/driver.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
+==============
Device Drivers
+==============
See the kerneldoc for the struct device_driver.
@@ -26,50 +27,50 @@ Declaration
As stated above, struct device_driver objects are statically
allocated. Below is an example declaration of the eepro100
driver. This declaration is hypothetical only; it relies on the driver
-being converted completely to the new model.
+being converted completely to the new model::
-static struct device_driver eepro100_driver = {
- .name = "eepro100",
- .bus = &pci_bus_type,
-
- .probe = eepro100_probe,
- .remove = eepro100_remove,
- .suspend = eepro100_suspend,
- .resume = eepro100_resume,
-};
+ static struct device_driver eepro100_driver = {
+ .name = "eepro100",
+ .bus = &pci_bus_type,
+
+ .probe = eepro100_probe,
+ .remove = eepro100_remove,
+ .suspend = eepro100_suspend,
+ .resume = eepro100_resume,
+ };
Most drivers will not be able to be converted completely to the new
model because the bus they belong to has a bus-specific structure with
-bus-specific fields that cannot be generalized.
+bus-specific fields that cannot be generalized.
The most common example of this are device ID structures. A driver
typically defines an array of device IDs that it supports. The format
of these structures and the semantics for comparing device IDs are
completely bus-specific. Defining them as bus-specific entities would
-sacrifice type-safety, so we keep bus-specific structures around.
+sacrifice type-safety, so we keep bus-specific structures around.
Bus-specific drivers should include a generic struct device_driver in
-the definition of the bus-specific driver. Like this:
+the definition of the bus-specific driver. Like this::
-struct pci_driver {
- const struct pci_device_id *id_table;
- struct device_driver driver;
-};
+ struct pci_driver {
+ const struct pci_device_id *id_table;
+ struct device_driver driver;
+ };
A definition that included bus-specific fields would look like
-(using the eepro100 driver again):
+(using the eepro100 driver again)::
-static struct pci_driver eepro100_driver = {
- .id_table = eepro100_pci_tbl,
- .driver = {
+ static struct pci_driver eepro100_driver = {
+ .id_table = eepro100_pci_tbl,
+ .driver = {
.name = "eepro100",
.bus = &pci_bus_type,
.probe = eepro100_probe,
.remove = eepro100_remove,
.suspend = eepro100_suspend,
.resume = eepro100_resume,
- },
-};
+ },
+ };
Some may find the syntax of embedded struct initialization awkward or
even a bit ugly. So far, it's the best way we've found to do what we want...
@@ -77,12 +78,14 @@ even a bit ugly. So far, it's the best way we've found to do what we want...
Registration
~~~~~~~~~~~~
-int driver_register(struct device_driver * drv);
+::
+
+ int driver_register(struct device_driver *drv);
The driver registers the structure on startup. For drivers that have
no bus-specific fields (i.e. don't have a bus-specific driver
structure), they would use driver_register and pass a pointer to their
-struct device_driver object.
+struct device_driver object.
Most drivers, however, will have a bus-specific structure and will
need to register with the bus using something like pci_driver_register.
@@ -101,7 +104,7 @@ By defining wrapper functions, the transition to the new model can be
made easier. Drivers can ignore the generic structure altogether and
let the bus wrapper fill in the fields. For the callbacks, the bus can
define generic callbacks that forward the call to the bus-specific
-callbacks of the drivers.
+callbacks of the drivers.
This solution is intended to be only temporary. In order to get class
information in the driver, the drivers must be modified anyway. Since
@@ -113,16 +116,16 @@ Access
~~~~~~
Once the object has been registered, it may access the common fields of
-the object, like the lock and the list of devices.
+the object, like the lock and the list of devices::
-int driver_for_each_dev(struct device_driver * drv, void * data,
- int (*callback)(struct device * dev, void * data));
+ int driver_for_each_dev(struct device_driver *drv, void *data,
+ int (*callback)(struct device *dev, void *data));
The devices field is a list of all the devices that have been bound to
the driver. The LDM core provides a helper function to operate on all
the devices a driver controls. This helper locks the driver on each
node access, and does proper reference counting on each device as it
-accesses it.
+accesses it.
sysfs
@@ -142,7 +145,9 @@ supports.
Callbacks
~~~~~~~~~
- int (*probe) (struct device * dev);
+::
+
+ int (*probe) (struct device *dev);
The probe() entry is called in task context, with the bus's rwsem locked
and the driver partially bound to the device. Drivers commonly use
@@ -162,9 +167,9 @@ the driver to that device.
A driver's probe() may return a negative errno value to indicate that
the driver did not bind to this device, in which case it should have
-released all resources it allocated.
+released all resources it allocated::
- int (*remove) (struct device * dev);
+ int (*remove) (struct device *dev);
remove is called to unbind a driver from a device. This may be
called if a device is physically removed from the system, if the
@@ -173,43 +178,46 @@ in other cases.
It is up to the driver to determine if the device is present or
not. It should free any resources allocated specifically for the
-device; i.e. anything in the device's driver_data field.
+device; i.e. anything in the device's driver_data field.
If the device is still present, it should quiesce the device and place
-it into a supported low-power state.
+it into a supported low-power state::
- int (*suspend) (struct device * dev, pm_message_t state);
+ int (*suspend) (struct device *dev, pm_message_t state);
-suspend is called to put the device in a low power state.
+suspend is called to put the device in a low power state::
- int (*resume) (struct device * dev);
+ int (*resume) (struct device *dev);
Resume is used to bring a device back from a low power state.
Attributes
~~~~~~~~~~
-struct driver_attribute {
- struct attribute attr;
- ssize_t (*show)(struct device_driver *driver, char *buf);
- ssize_t (*store)(struct device_driver *, const char * buf, size_t count);
-};
-Device drivers can export attributes via their sysfs directories.
+::
+
+ struct driver_attribute {
+ struct attribute attr;
+ ssize_t (*show)(struct device_driver *driver, char *buf);
+ ssize_t (*store)(struct device_driver *, const char *buf, size_t count);
+ };
+
+Device drivers can export attributes via their sysfs directories.
Drivers can declare attributes using a DRIVER_ATTR_RW and DRIVER_ATTR_RO
macro that works identically to the DEVICE_ATTR_RW and DEVICE_ATTR_RO
macros.
-Example:
+Example::
-DRIVER_ATTR_RW(debug);
+ DRIVER_ATTR_RW(debug);
-This is equivalent to declaring:
+This is equivalent to declaring::
-struct driver_attribute driver_attr_debug;
+ struct driver_attribute driver_attr_debug;
This can then be used to add and remove the attribute from the
-driver's directory using:
+driver's directory using::
-int driver_create_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
-void driver_remove_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
+ int driver_create_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
+ void driver_remove_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-model/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9f85d579ce56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+:orphan:
+
+============
+Driver Model
+============
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ binding
+ bus
+ class
+ design-patterns
+ device
+ devres
+ driver
+ overview
+ platform
+ porting
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/overview.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/overview.rst
similarity index 90%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/overview.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/overview.rst
index 6a8f9a8075d8..d4d1e9b40e0c 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/overview.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+=============================
The Linux Kernel Device Model
+=============================
Patrick Mochel <mochel@digitalimplant.org>
@@ -41,14 +43,14 @@ data structure. These fields must still be accessed by the bus layers,
and sometimes by the device-specific drivers.
Other bus layers are encouraged to do what has been done for the PCI layer.
-struct pci_dev now looks like this:
+struct pci_dev now looks like this::
-struct pci_dev {
+ struct pci_dev {
...
struct device dev; /* Generic device interface */
...
-};
+ };
Note first that the struct device dev within the struct pci_dev is
statically allocated. This means only one allocation on device discovery.
@@ -80,26 +82,26 @@ easy. This has been accomplished by implementing a special purpose virtual
file system named sysfs.
Almost all mainstream Linux distros mount this filesystem automatically; you
-can see some variation of the following in the output of the "mount" command:
+can see some variation of the following in the output of the "mount" command::
-$ mount
-...
-none on /sys type sysfs (rw,noexec,nosuid,nodev)
-...
-$
+ $ mount
+ ...
+ none on /sys type sysfs (rw,noexec,nosuid,nodev)
+ ...
+ $
The auto-mounting of sysfs is typically accomplished by an entry similar to
-the following in the /etc/fstab file:
+the following in the /etc/fstab file::
-none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
+ none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
-or something similar in the /lib/init/fstab file on Debian-based systems:
+or something similar in the /lib/init/fstab file on Debian-based systems::
-none /sys sysfs nodev,noexec,nosuid 0 0
+ none /sys sysfs nodev,noexec,nosuid 0 0
-If sysfs is not automatically mounted, you can always do it manually with:
+If sysfs is not automatically mounted, you can always do it manually with::
-# mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys
+ # mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys
Whenever a device is inserted into the tree, a directory is created for it.
This directory may be populated at each layer of discovery - the global layer,
@@ -108,7 +110,7 @@ the bus layer, or the device layer.
The global layer currently creates two files - 'name' and 'power'. The
former only reports the name of the device. The latter reports the
current power state of the device. It will also be used to set the current
-power state.
+power state.
The bus layer may also create files for the devices it finds while probing the
bus. For example, the PCI layer currently creates 'irq' and 'resource' files
@@ -118,6 +120,5 @@ A device-specific driver may also export files in its directory to expose
device-specific data or tunable interfaces.
More information about the sysfs directory layout can be found in
-the other documents in this directory and in the file
+the other documents in this directory and in the file
Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/platform.rst
similarity index 95%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/platform.rst
index 9d9e47dfc013..334dd4071ae4 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/platform.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+============================
Platform Devices and Drivers
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+============================
+
See <linux/platform_device.h> for the driver model interface to the
platform bus: platform_device, and platform_driver. This pseudo-bus
is used to connect devices on busses with minimal infrastructure,
@@ -19,15 +21,15 @@ be connected through a segment of some other kind of bus; but its
registers will still be directly addressable.
Platform devices are given a name, used in driver binding, and a
-list of resources such as addresses and IRQs.
+list of resources such as addresses and IRQs::
-struct platform_device {
+ struct platform_device {
const char *name;
u32 id;
struct device dev;
u32 num_resources;
struct resource *resource;
-};
+ };
Platform drivers
@@ -35,9 +37,9 @@ Platform drivers
Platform drivers follow the standard driver model convention, where
discovery/enumeration is handled outside the drivers, and drivers
provide probe() and remove() methods. They support power management
-and shutdown notifications using the standard conventions.
+and shutdown notifications using the standard conventions::
-struct platform_driver {
+ struct platform_driver {
int (*probe)(struct platform_device *);
int (*remove)(struct platform_device *);
void (*shutdown)(struct platform_device *);
@@ -46,25 +48,25 @@ struct platform_driver {
int (*resume_early)(struct platform_device *);
int (*resume)(struct platform_device *);
struct device_driver driver;
-};
+ };
Note that probe() should in general verify that the specified device hardware
actually exists; sometimes platform setup code can't be sure. The probing
can use device resources, including clocks, and device platform_data.
-Platform drivers register themselves the normal way:
+Platform drivers register themselves the normal way::
int platform_driver_register(struct platform_driver *drv);
Or, in common situations where the device is known not to be hot-pluggable,
the probe() routine can live in an init section to reduce the driver's
-runtime memory footprint:
+runtime memory footprint::
int platform_driver_probe(struct platform_driver *drv,
int (*probe)(struct platform_device *))
Kernel modules can be composed of several platform drivers. The platform core
-provides helpers to register and unregister an array of drivers:
+provides helpers to register and unregister an array of drivers::
int __platform_register_drivers(struct platform_driver * const *drivers,
unsigned int count, struct module *owner);
@@ -73,7 +75,7 @@ provides helpers to register and unregister an array of drivers:
If one of the drivers fails to register, all drivers registered up to that
point will be unregistered in reverse order. Note that there is a convenience
-macro that passes THIS_MODULE as owner parameter:
+macro that passes THIS_MODULE as owner parameter::
#define platform_register_drivers(drivers, count)
@@ -81,7 +83,7 @@ macro that passes THIS_MODULE as owner parameter:
Device Enumeration
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
As a rule, platform specific (and often board-specific) setup code will
-register platform devices:
+register platform devices::
int platform_device_register(struct platform_device *pdev);
@@ -133,14 +135,14 @@ tend to already have "normal" modes, such as ones using device nodes that
were created by PNP or by platform device setup.
None the less, there are some APIs to support such legacy drivers. Avoid
-using these calls except with such hotplug-deficient drivers.
+using these calls except with such hotplug-deficient drivers::
struct platform_device *platform_device_alloc(
const char *name, int id);
You can use platform_device_alloc() to dynamically allocate a device, which
you will then initialize with resources and platform_device_register().
-A better solution is usually:
+A better solution is usually::
struct platform_device *platform_device_register_simple(
const char *name, int id,
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/porting.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/porting.rst
similarity index 62%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/porting.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/porting.rst
index 453053f1661f..ae4bf843c1d6 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/porting.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/porting.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
+=======================================
Porting Drivers to the New Driver Model
+=======================================
Patrick Mochel
@@ -8,8 +9,8 @@ Patrick Mochel
Overview
-Please refer to Documentation/driver-model/*.txt for definitions of
-various driver types and concepts.
+Please refer to `Documentation/driver-model/*.rst` for definitions of
+various driver types and concepts.
Most of the work of porting devices drivers to the new model happens
at the bus driver layer. This was intentional, to minimize the
@@ -18,11 +19,11 @@ of bus drivers.
In a nutshell, the driver model consists of a set of objects that can
be embedded in larger, bus-specific objects. Fields in these generic
-objects can replace fields in the bus-specific objects.
+objects can replace fields in the bus-specific objects.
The generic objects must be registered with the driver model core. By
doing so, they will exported via the sysfs filesystem. sysfs can be
-mounted by doing
+mounted by doing::
# mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys
@@ -30,108 +31,109 @@ mounted by doing
The Process
-Step 0: Read include/linux/device.h for object and function definitions.
+Step 0: Read include/linux/device.h for object and function definitions.
-Step 1: Registering the bus driver.
+Step 1: Registering the bus driver.
-- Define a struct bus_type for the bus driver.
+- Define a struct bus_type for the bus driver::
-struct bus_type pci_bus_type = {
- .name = "pci",
-};
+ struct bus_type pci_bus_type = {
+ .name = "pci",
+ };
- Register the bus type.
+
This should be done in the initialization function for the bus type,
- which is usually the module_init(), or equivalent, function.
+ which is usually the module_init(), or equivalent, function::
-static int __init pci_driver_init(void)
-{
- return bus_register(&pci_bus_type);
-}
+ static int __init pci_driver_init(void)
+ {
+ return bus_register(&pci_bus_type);
+ }
-subsys_initcall(pci_driver_init);
+ subsys_initcall(pci_driver_init);
The bus type may be unregistered (if the bus driver may be compiled
- as a module) by doing:
+ as a module) by doing::
bus_unregister(&pci_bus_type);
-- Export the bus type for others to use.
+- Export the bus type for others to use.
- Other code may wish to reference the bus type, so declare it in a
+ Other code may wish to reference the bus type, so declare it in a
shared header file and export the symbol.
-From include/linux/pci.h:
+From include/linux/pci.h::
-extern struct bus_type pci_bus_type;
+ extern struct bus_type pci_bus_type;
-From file the above code appears in:
+From file the above code appears in::
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(pci_bus_type);
+ EXPORT_SYMBOL(pci_bus_type);
- This will cause the bus to show up in /sys/bus/pci/ with two
- subdirectories: 'devices' and 'drivers'.
+ subdirectories: 'devices' and 'drivers'::
-# tree -d /sys/bus/pci/
-/sys/bus/pci/
-|-- devices
-`-- drivers
+ # tree -d /sys/bus/pci/
+ /sys/bus/pci/
+ |-- devices
+ `-- drivers
-Step 2: Registering Devices.
+Step 2: Registering Devices.
struct device represents a single device. It mainly contains metadata
-describing the relationship the device has to other entities.
+describing the relationship the device has to other entities.
-- Embed a struct device in the bus-specific device type.
+- Embed a struct device in the bus-specific device type::
-struct pci_dev {
- ...
- struct device dev; /* Generic device interface */
- ...
-};
+ struct pci_dev {
+ ...
+ struct device dev; /* Generic device interface */
+ ...
+ };
- It is recommended that the generic device not be the first item in
+ It is recommended that the generic device not be the first item in
the struct to discourage programmers from doing mindless casts
between the object types. Instead macros, or inline functions,
- should be created to convert from the generic object type.
+ should be created to convert from the generic object type::
-#define to_pci_dev(n) container_of(n, struct pci_dev, dev)
+ #define to_pci_dev(n) container_of(n, struct pci_dev, dev)
-or
+ or
-static inline struct pci_dev * to_pci_dev(struct kobject * kobj)
-{
+ static inline struct pci_dev * to_pci_dev(struct kobject * kobj)
+ {
return container_of(n, struct pci_dev, dev);
-}
+ }
- This allows the compiler to verify type-safety of the operations
+ This allows the compiler to verify type-safety of the operations
that are performed (which is Good).
- Initialize the device on registration.
- When devices are discovered or registered with the bus type, the
+ When devices are discovered or registered with the bus type, the
bus driver should initialize the generic device. The most important
things to initialize are the bus_id, parent, and bus fields.
The bus_id is an ASCII string that contains the device's address on
the bus. The format of this string is bus-specific. This is
- necessary for representing devices in sysfs.
+ necessary for representing devices in sysfs.
parent is the physical parent of the device. It is important that
- the bus driver sets this field correctly.
+ the bus driver sets this field correctly.
The driver model maintains an ordered list of devices that it uses
for power management. This list must be in order to guarantee that
@@ -140,13 +142,13 @@ static inline struct pci_dev * to_pci_dev(struct kobject * kobj)
devices.
Also, the location of the device's sysfs directory depends on a
- device's parent. sysfs exports a directory structure that mirrors
+ device's parent. sysfs exports a directory structure that mirrors
the device hierarchy. Accurately setting the parent guarantees that
sysfs will accurately represent the hierarchy.
The device's bus field is a pointer to the bus type the device
belongs to. This should be set to the bus_type that was declared
- and initialized before.
+ and initialized before.
Optionally, the bus driver may set the device's name and release
fields.
@@ -155,107 +157,107 @@ static inline struct pci_dev * to_pci_dev(struct kobject * kobj)
"ATI Technologies Inc Radeon QD"
- The release field is a callback that the driver model core calls
- when the device has been removed, and all references to it have
+ The release field is a callback that the driver model core calls
+ when the device has been removed, and all references to it have
been released. More on this in a moment.
-- Register the device.
+- Register the device.
Once the generic device has been initialized, it can be registered
- with the driver model core by doing:
+ with the driver model core by doing::
device_register(&dev->dev);
- It can later be unregistered by doing:
+ It can later be unregistered by doing::
device_unregister(&dev->dev);
- This should happen on buses that support hotpluggable devices.
+ This should happen on buses that support hotpluggable devices.
If a bus driver unregisters a device, it should not immediately free
- it. It should instead wait for the driver model core to call the
- device's release method, then free the bus-specific object.
+ it. It should instead wait for the driver model core to call the
+ device's release method, then free the bus-specific object.
(There may be other code that is currently referencing the device
- structure, and it would be rude to free the device while that is
+ structure, and it would be rude to free the device while that is
happening).
- When the device is registered, a directory in sysfs is created.
- The PCI tree in sysfs looks like:
+ When the device is registered, a directory in sysfs is created.
+ The PCI tree in sysfs looks like::
-/sys/devices/pci0/
-|-- 00:00.0
-|-- 00:01.0
-| `-- 01:00.0
-|-- 00:02.0
-| `-- 02:1f.0
-| `-- 03:00.0
-|-- 00:1e.0
-| `-- 04:04.0
-|-- 00:1f.0
-|-- 00:1f.1
-| |-- ide0
-| | |-- 0.0
-| | `-- 0.1
-| `-- ide1
-| `-- 1.0
-|-- 00:1f.2
-|-- 00:1f.3
-`-- 00:1f.5
+ /sys/devices/pci0/
+ |-- 00:00.0
+ |-- 00:01.0
+ | `-- 01:00.0
+ |-- 00:02.0
+ | `-- 02:1f.0
+ | `-- 03:00.0
+ |-- 00:1e.0
+ | `-- 04:04.0
+ |-- 00:1f.0
+ |-- 00:1f.1
+ | |-- ide0
+ | | |-- 0.0
+ | | `-- 0.1
+ | `-- ide1
+ | `-- 1.0
+ |-- 00:1f.2
+ |-- 00:1f.3
+ `-- 00:1f.5
Also, symlinks are created in the bus's 'devices' directory
- that point to the device's directory in the physical hierarchy.
+ that point to the device's directory in the physical hierarchy::
-/sys/bus/pci/devices/
-|-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0
-|-- 00:01.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0
-|-- 00:02.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0
-|-- 00:1e.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0
-|-- 00:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.0
-|-- 00:1f.1 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.1
-|-- 00:1f.2 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.2
-|-- 00:1f.3 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.3
-|-- 00:1f.5 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.5
-|-- 01:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0/01:00.0
-|-- 02:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0
-|-- 03:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0/03:00.0
-`-- 04:04.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0/04:04.0
+ /sys/bus/pci/devices/
+ |-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0
+ |-- 00:01.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0
+ |-- 00:02.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0
+ |-- 00:1e.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0
+ |-- 00:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.0
+ |-- 00:1f.1 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.1
+ |-- 00:1f.2 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.2
+ |-- 00:1f.3 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.3
+ |-- 00:1f.5 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.5
+ |-- 01:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0/01:00.0
+ |-- 02:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0
+ |-- 03:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0/03:00.0
+ `-- 04:04.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0/04:04.0
Step 3: Registering Drivers.
struct device_driver is a simple driver structure that contains a set
-of operations that the driver model core may call.
+of operations that the driver model core may call.
-- Embed a struct device_driver in the bus-specific driver.
+- Embed a struct device_driver in the bus-specific driver.
- Just like with devices, do something like:
+ Just like with devices, do something like::
-struct pci_driver {
- ...
- struct device_driver driver;
-};
+ struct pci_driver {
+ ...
+ struct device_driver driver;
+ };
-- Initialize the generic driver structure.
+- Initialize the generic driver structure.
When the driver registers with the bus (e.g. doing pci_register_driver()),
initialize the necessary fields of the driver: the name and bus
- fields.
+ fields.
- Register the driver.
- After the generic driver has been initialized, call
+ After the generic driver has been initialized, call::
driver_register(&drv->driver);
to register the driver with the core.
When the driver is unregistered from the bus, unregister it from the
- core by doing:
+ core by doing::
driver_unregister(&drv->driver);
@@ -265,15 +267,15 @@ struct pci_driver {
- Sysfs representation.
- Drivers are exported via sysfs in their bus's 'driver's directory.
- For example:
+ Drivers are exported via sysfs in their bus's 'driver's directory.
+ For example::
-/sys/bus/pci/drivers/
-|-- 3c59x
-|-- Ensoniq AudioPCI
-|-- agpgart-amdk7
-|-- e100
-`-- serial
+ /sys/bus/pci/drivers/
+ |-- 3c59x
+ |-- Ensoniq AudioPCI
+ |-- agpgart-amdk7
+ |-- e100
+ `-- serial
Step 4: Define Generic Methods for Drivers.
@@ -281,30 +283,30 @@ Step 4: Define Generic Methods for Drivers.
struct device_driver defines a set of operations that the driver model
core calls. Most of these operations are probably similar to
operations the bus already defines for drivers, but taking different
-parameters.
+parameters.
It would be difficult and tedious to force every driver on a bus to
simultaneously convert their drivers to generic format. Instead, the
bus driver should define single instances of the generic methods that
-forward call to the bus-specific drivers. For instance:
+forward call to the bus-specific drivers. For instance::
-static int pci_device_remove(struct device * dev)
-{
- struct pci_dev * pci_dev = to_pci_dev(dev);
- struct pci_driver * drv = pci_dev->driver;
+ static int pci_device_remove(struct device * dev)
+ {
+ struct pci_dev * pci_dev = to_pci_dev(dev);
+ struct pci_driver * drv = pci_dev->driver;
- if (drv) {
- if (drv->remove)
- drv->remove(pci_dev);
- pci_dev->driver = NULL;
- }
- return 0;
-}
+ if (drv) {
+ if (drv->remove)
+ drv->remove(pci_dev);
+ pci_dev->driver = NULL;
+ }
+ return 0;
+ }
The generic driver should be initialized with these methods before it
-is registered.
+is registered::
/* initialize common driver fields */
drv->driver.name = drv->name;
@@ -320,23 +322,23 @@ is registered.
Ideally, the bus should only initialize the fields if they are not
already set. This allows the drivers to implement their own generic
-methods.
+methods.
-Step 5: Support generic driver binding.
+Step 5: Support generic driver binding.
The model assumes that a device or driver can be dynamically
registered with the bus at any time. When registration happens,
devices must be bound to a driver, or drivers must be bound to all
-devices that it supports.
+devices that it supports.
A driver typically contains a list of device IDs that it supports. The
-bus driver compares these IDs to the IDs of devices registered with it.
+bus driver compares these IDs to the IDs of devices registered with it.
The format of the device IDs, and the semantics for comparing them are
-bus-specific, so the generic model does attempt to generalize them.
+bus-specific, so the generic model does attempt to generalize them.
Instead, a bus may supply a method in struct bus_type that does the
-comparison:
+comparison::
int (*match)(struct device * dev, struct device_driver * drv);
@@ -346,59 +348,59 @@ and zero otherwise. It may also return error code (for example
not possible.
When a device is registered, the bus's list of drivers is iterated
-over. bus->match() is called for each one until a match is found.
+over. bus->match() is called for each one until a match is found.
When a driver is registered, the bus's list of devices is iterated
over. bus->match() is called for each device that is not already
-claimed by a driver.
+claimed by a driver.
When a device is successfully bound to a driver, device->driver is
set, the device is added to a per-driver list of devices, and a
symlink is created in the driver's sysfs directory that points to the
-device's physical directory:
+device's physical directory::
-/sys/bus/pci/drivers/
-|-- 3c59x
-| `-- 00:0b.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0b.0
-|-- Ensoniq AudioPCI
-|-- agpgart-amdk7
-| `-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0
-|-- e100
-| `-- 00:0c.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0c.0
-`-- serial
+ /sys/bus/pci/drivers/
+ |-- 3c59x
+ | `-- 00:0b.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0b.0
+ |-- Ensoniq AudioPCI
+ |-- agpgart-amdk7
+ | `-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0
+ |-- e100
+ | `-- 00:0c.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0c.0
+ `-- serial
This driver binding should replace the existing driver binding
-mechanism the bus currently uses.
+mechanism the bus currently uses.
Step 6: Supply a hotplug callback.
Whenever a device is registered with the driver model core, the
-userspace program /sbin/hotplug is called to notify userspace.
+userspace program /sbin/hotplug is called to notify userspace.
Users can define actions to perform when a device is inserted or
-removed.
+removed.
The driver model core passes several arguments to userspace via
environment variables, including
- ACTION: set to 'add' or 'remove'
-- DEVPATH: set to the device's physical path in sysfs.
+- DEVPATH: set to the device's physical path in sysfs.
A bus driver may also supply additional parameters for userspace to
consume. To do this, a bus must implement the 'hotplug' method in
-struct bus_type:
+struct bus_type::
- int (*hotplug) (struct device *dev, char **envp,
+ int (*hotplug) (struct device *dev, char **envp,
int num_envp, char *buffer, int buffer_size);
-This is called immediately before /sbin/hotplug is executed.
+This is called immediately before /sbin/hotplug is executed.
Step 7: Cleaning up the bus driver.
The generic bus, device, and driver structures provide several fields
-that can replace those defined privately to the bus driver.
+that can replace those defined privately to the bus driver.
- Device list.
@@ -407,36 +409,36 @@ type. This includes all devices on all instances of that bus type.
An internal list that the bus uses may be removed, in favor of using
this one.
-The core provides an iterator to access these devices.
+The core provides an iterator to access these devices::
-int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start,
- void * data, int (*fn)(struct device *, void *));
+ int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start,
+ void * data, int (*fn)(struct device *, void *));
- Driver list.
struct bus_type also contains a list of all drivers registered with
-it. An internal list of drivers that the bus driver maintains may
-be removed in favor of using the generic one.
+it. An internal list of drivers that the bus driver maintains may
+be removed in favor of using the generic one.
-The drivers may be iterated over, like devices:
+The drivers may be iterated over, like devices::
-int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start,
- void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *));
+ int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start,
+ void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *));
Please see drivers/base/bus.c for more information.
-- rwsem
+- rwsem
struct bus_type contains an rwsem that protects all core accesses to
the device and driver lists. This can be used by the bus driver
internally, and should be used when accessing the device or driver
-lists the bus maintains.
+lists the bus maintains.
-- Device and driver fields.
+- Device and driver fields.
Some of the fields in struct device and struct device_driver duplicate
fields in the bus-specific representations of these objects. Feel free
@@ -444,4 +446,3 @@ to remove the bus-specific ones and favor the generic ones. Note
though, that this will likely mean fixing up all the drivers that
reference the bus-specific fields (though those should all be 1-line
changes).
-
diff --git a/Documentation/eisa.txt b/Documentation/eisa.txt
index 2806e5544e43..f388545a85a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/eisa.txt
+++ b/Documentation/eisa.txt
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ id_table an array of NULL terminated EISA id strings,
(driver_data).
driver a generic driver, such as described in
- Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt. Only .name,
+ Documentation/driver-model/driver.rst. Only .name,
.probe and .remove members are mandatory.
=============== ====================================================
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ state set of flags indicating the state of the device. Current
flags are EISA_CONFIG_ENABLED and EISA_CONFIG_FORCED.
res set of four 256 bytes I/O regions allocated to this device
dma_mask DMA mask set from the parent device.
-dev generic device (see Documentation/driver-model/device.txt)
+dev generic device (see Documentation/driver-model/device.rst)
======== ============================================================
You can get the 'struct eisa_device' from 'struct device' using the
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.rst
index f9796b9d9db6..d5b05d3e54ba 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.rst
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.rst
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ increase the chances of your change being accepted.
console. Excessive logging can seriously affect system performance.
* Use devres functions whenever possible to allocate resources. For rationale
- and supported functions, please see Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt.
+ and supported functions, please see Documentation/driver-model/devres.rst.
If a function is not supported by devres, consider using devm_add_action().
* If the driver has a detect function, make sure it is silent. Debug messages
diff --git a/drivers/base/platform.c b/drivers/base/platform.c
index 4d1729853d1a..713903290385 100644
--- a/drivers/base/platform.c
+++ b/drivers/base/platform.c
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
* Copyright (c) 2002-3 Patrick Mochel
* Copyright (c) 2002-3 Open Source Development Labs
*
- * Please see Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt for more
+ * Please see Documentation/driver-model/platform.rst for more
* information.
*/
diff --git a/drivers/gpio/gpio-cs5535.c b/drivers/gpio/gpio-cs5535.c
index 6314225dbed0..3611a0571667 100644
--- a/drivers/gpio/gpio-cs5535.c
+++ b/drivers/gpio/gpio-cs5535.c
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ MODULE_PARM_DESC(mask, "GPIO channel mask.");
/*
* FIXME: convert this singleton driver to use the state container
- * design pattern, see Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt
+ * design pattern, see Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.rst
*/
static struct cs5535_gpio_chip {
struct gpio_chip chip;
diff --git a/drivers/net/ethernet/intel/ice/ice_main.c b/drivers/net/ethernet/intel/ice/ice_main.c
index 28ec0d57941d..41c90f2ddb31 100644
--- a/drivers/net/ethernet/intel/ice/ice_main.c
+++ b/drivers/net/ethernet/intel/ice/ice_main.c
@@ -2286,7 +2286,7 @@ ice_probe(struct pci_dev *pdev, const struct pci_device_id __always_unused *ent)
struct ice_hw *hw;
int err;
- /* this driver uses devres, see Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt */
+ /* this driver uses devres, see Documentation/driver-model/devres.rst */
err = pcim_enable_device(pdev);
if (err)
return err;
diff --git a/scripts/coccinelle/free/devm_free.cocci b/scripts/coccinelle/free/devm_free.cocci
index b2a2cf8bf81f..e32236a979a8 100644
--- a/scripts/coccinelle/free/devm_free.cocci
+++ b/scripts/coccinelle/free/devm_free.cocci
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
/// functions. Values allocated using the devm_functions are freed when
/// the device is detached, and thus the use of the standard freeing
/// function would cause a double free.
-/// See Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt for more information.
+/// See Documentation/driver-model/devres.rst for more information.
///
/// A difficulty of detecting this problem is that the standard freeing
/// function might be called from a different function than the one
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [Intel-wired-lan] [PATCH v2 09/29] docs: driver-model: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
0 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: intel-wired-lan
Convert the various documents at the driver-model, preparing
them to be part of the driver-api book.
The conversion is actually:
- add blank lines and identation in order to identify paragraphs;
- fix tables markups;
- add some lists markups;
- mark literal blocks;
- adjust title markups.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Jeff Kirsher <jeffrey.t.kirsher@intel.com> # ice
---
Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst | 2 +-
.../driver-model/{binding.txt => binding.rst} | 20 +-
.../driver-model/{bus.txt => bus.rst} | 69 ++--
.../driver-model/{class.txt => class.rst} | 74 ++--
...esign-patterns.txt => design-patterns.rst} | 106 +++---
.../driver-model/{device.txt => device.rst} | 57 +--
.../driver-model/{devres.txt => devres.rst} | 50 +--
.../driver-model/{driver.txt => driver.rst} | 112 +++---
Documentation/driver-model/index.rst | 26 ++
.../{overview.txt => overview.rst} | 37 +-
.../{platform.txt => platform.rst} | 30 +-
.../driver-model/{porting.txt => porting.rst} | 333 +++++++++---------
Documentation/eisa.txt | 4 +-
Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.rst | 2 +-
drivers/base/platform.c | 2 +-
drivers/gpio/gpio-cs5535.c | 2 +-
drivers/net/ethernet/intel/ice/ice_main.c | 2 +-
scripts/coccinelle/free/devm_free.cocci | 2 +-
18 files changed, 489 insertions(+), 441 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{binding.txt => binding.rst} (92%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{bus.txt => bus.rst} (76%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{class.txt => class.rst} (75%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{design-patterns.txt => design-patterns.rst} (59%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{device.txt => device.rst} (71%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{devres.txt => devres.rst} (93%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{driver.txt => driver.rst} (75%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/driver-model/index.rst
rename Documentation/driver-model/{overview.txt => overview.rst} (90%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{platform.txt => platform.rst} (95%)
rename Documentation/driver-model/{porting.txt => porting.rst} (62%)
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst
index 4af9aae724f0..349f2dc33029 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst
+++ b/Documentation/driver-api/gpio/driver.rst
@@ -399,7 +399,7 @@ symbol:
will pass the struct gpio_chip* for the chip to all IRQ callbacks, so the
callbacks need to embed the gpio_chip in its state container and obtain a
pointer to the container using container_of().
- (See Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt)
+ (See Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.rst)
- gpiochip_irqchip_add_nested(): adds a nested cascaded irqchip to a gpiochip,
as discussed above regarding different types of cascaded irqchips. The
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/binding.rst
similarity index 92%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/binding.rst
index abfc8e290d53..7ea1d7a41e1d 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/binding.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/binding.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
+==============
Driver Binding
+==============
Driver binding is the process of associating a device with a device
driver that can control it. Bus drivers have typically handled this
@@ -25,7 +26,7 @@ device_register
When a new device is added, the bus's list of drivers is iterated over
to find one that supports it. In order to determine that, the device
ID of the device must match one of the device IDs that the driver
-supports. The format and semantics for comparing IDs is bus-specific.
+supports. The format and semantics for comparing IDs is bus-specific.
Instead of trying to derive a complex state machine and matching
algorithm, it is up to the bus driver to provide a callback to compare
a device against the IDs of a driver. The bus returns 1 if a match was
@@ -36,14 +37,14 @@ int match(struct device * dev, struct device_driver * drv);
If a match is found, the device's driver field is set to the driver
and the driver's probe callback is called. This gives the driver a
chance to verify that it really does support the hardware, and that
-it's in a working state.
+it's in a working state.
Device Class
~~~~~~~~~~~~
Upon the successful completion of probe, the device is registered with
the class to which it belongs. Device drivers belong to one and only one
-class, and that is set in the driver's devclass field.
+class, and that is set in the driver's devclass field.
devclass_add_device is called to enumerate the device within the class
and actually register it with the class, which happens with the
class's register_dev callback.
@@ -53,7 +54,7 @@ Driver
~~~~~~
When a driver is attached to a device, the device is inserted into the
-driver's list of devices.
+driver's list of devices.
sysfs
@@ -67,18 +68,18 @@ to the device's directory in the physical hierarchy.
A directory for the device is created in the class's directory. A
symlink is created in that directory that points to the device's
-physical location in the sysfs tree.
+physical location in the sysfs tree.
A symlink can be created (though this isn't done yet) in the device's
physical directory to either its class directory, or the class's
top-level directory. One can also be created to point to its driver's
-directory also.
+directory also.
driver_register
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-The process is almost identical for when a new driver is added.
+The process is almost identical for when a new driver is added.
The bus's list of devices is iterated over to find a match. Devices
that already have a driver are skipped. All the devices are iterated
over, to bind as many devices as possible to the driver.
@@ -94,5 +95,4 @@ of the driver is decremented. All symlinks between the two are removed.
When a driver is removed, the list of devices that it supports is
iterated over, and the driver's remove callback is called for each
-one. The device is removed from that list and the symlinks removed.
-
+one. The device is removed from that list and the symlinks removed.
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/bus.rst
similarity index 76%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/bus.rst
index c247b488a567..016b15a6e8ea 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/bus.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/bus.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
-Bus Types
+=========
+Bus Types
+=========
Definition
~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -13,12 +14,12 @@ Declaration
Each bus type in the kernel (PCI, USB, etc) should declare one static
object of this type. They must initialize the name field, and may
-optionally initialize the match callback.
+optionally initialize the match callback::
-struct bus_type pci_bus_type = {
- .name = "pci",
- .match = pci_bus_match,
-};
+ struct bus_type pci_bus_type = {
+ .name = "pci",
+ .match = pci_bus_match,
+ };
The structure should be exported to drivers in a header file:
@@ -30,8 +31,8 @@ Registration
When a bus driver is initialized, it calls bus_register. This
initializes the rest of the fields in the bus object and inserts it
-into a global list of bus types. Once the bus object is registered,
-the fields in it are usable by the bus driver.
+into a global list of bus types. Once the bus object is registered,
+the fields in it are usable by the bus driver.
Callbacks
@@ -43,17 +44,17 @@ match(): Attaching Drivers to Devices
The format of device ID structures and the semantics for comparing
them are inherently bus-specific. Drivers typically declare an array
of device IDs of devices they support that reside in a bus-specific
-driver structure.
+driver structure.
The purpose of the match callback is to give the bus an opportunity to
determine if a particular driver supports a particular device by
comparing the device IDs the driver supports with the device ID of a
particular device, without sacrificing bus-specific functionality or
-type-safety.
+type-safety.
When a driver is registered with the bus, the bus's list of devices is
iterated over, and the match callback is called for each device that
-does not have a driver associated with it.
+does not have a driver associated with it.
@@ -64,22 +65,23 @@ The lists of devices and drivers are intended to replace the local
lists that many buses keep. They are lists of struct devices and
struct device_drivers, respectively. Bus drivers are free to use the
lists as they please, but conversion to the bus-specific type may be
-necessary.
+necessary.
-The LDM core provides helper functions for iterating over each list.
+The LDM core provides helper functions for iterating over each list::
-int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start, void * data,
- int (*fn)(struct device *, void *));
+ int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start,
+ void * data,
+ int (*fn)(struct device *, void *));
-int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start,
- void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *));
+ int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start,
+ void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *));
These helpers iterate over the respective list, and call the callback
for each device or driver in the list. All list accesses are
synchronized by taking the bus's lock (read currently). The reference
count on each object in the list is incremented before the callback is
called; it is decremented after the next object has been obtained. The
-lock is not held when calling the callback.
+lock is not held when calling the callback.
sysfs
@@ -87,14 +89,14 @@ sysfs
There is a top-level directory named 'bus'.
Each bus gets a directory in the bus directory, along with two default
-directories:
+directories::
/sys/bus/pci/
|-- devices
`-- drivers
Drivers registered with the bus get a directory in the bus's drivers
-directory:
+directory::
/sys/bus/pci/
|-- devices
@@ -106,7 +108,7 @@ directory:
Each device that is discovered on a bus of that type gets a symlink in
the bus's devices directory to the device's directory in the physical
-hierarchy:
+hierarchy::
/sys/bus/pci/
|-- devices
@@ -118,26 +120,27 @@ hierarchy:
Exporting Attributes
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-struct bus_attribute {
+
+::
+
+ struct bus_attribute {
struct attribute attr;
ssize_t (*show)(struct bus_type *, char * buf);
ssize_t (*store)(struct bus_type *, const char * buf, size_t count);
-};
+ };
Bus drivers can export attributes using the BUS_ATTR_RW macro that works
similarly to the DEVICE_ATTR_RW macro for devices. For example, a
-definition like this:
+definition like this::
-static BUS_ATTR_RW(debug);
+ static BUS_ATTR_RW(debug);
-is equivalent to declaring:
+is equivalent to declaring::
-static bus_attribute bus_attr_debug;
+ static bus_attribute bus_attr_debug;
This can then be used to add and remove the attribute from the bus's
-sysfs directory using:
-
-int bus_create_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
-void bus_remove_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
-
+sysfs directory using::
+ int bus_create_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
+ void bus_remove_file(struct bus_type *, struct bus_attribute *);
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/class.rst
similarity index 75%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/class.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/class.rst
index 1fefc480a80b..fff55b80e86a 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/class.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/class.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
+==============
Device Classes
-
+==============
Introduction
~~~~~~~~~~~~
@@ -13,37 +13,37 @@ device. The following device classes have been identified:
Each device class defines a set of semantics and a programming interface
that devices of that class adhere to. Device drivers are the
implementation of that programming interface for a particular device on
-a particular bus.
+a particular bus.
Device classes are agnostic with respect to what bus a device resides
-on.
+on.
Programming Interface
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-The device class structure looks like:
+The device class structure looks like::
-typedef int (*devclass_add)(struct device *);
-typedef void (*devclass_remove)(struct device *);
+ typedef int (*devclass_add)(struct device *);
+ typedef void (*devclass_remove)(struct device *);
See the kerneldoc for the struct class.
-A typical device class definition would look like:
+A typical device class definition would look like::
-struct device_class input_devclass = {
+ struct device_class input_devclass = {
.name = "input",
.add_device = input_add_device,
.remove_device = input_remove_device,
-};
+ };
Each device class structure should be exported in a header file so it
can be used by drivers, extensions and interfaces.
-Device classes are registered and unregistered with the core using:
+Device classes are registered and unregistered with the core using::
-int devclass_register(struct device_class * cls);
-void devclass_unregister(struct device_class * cls);
+ int devclass_register(struct device_class * cls);
+ void devclass_unregister(struct device_class * cls);
Devices
@@ -52,16 +52,16 @@ As devices are bound to drivers, they are added to the device class
that the driver belongs to. Before the driver model core, this would
typically happen during the driver's probe() callback, once the device
has been initialized. It now happens after the probe() callback
-finishes from the core.
+finishes from the core.
The device is enumerated in the class. Each time a device is added to
the class, the class's devnum field is incremented and assigned to the
device. The field is never decremented, so if the device is removed
from the class and re-added, it will receive a different enumerated
-value.
+value.
The class is allowed to create a class-specific structure for the
-device and store it in the device's class_data pointer.
+device and store it in the device's class_data pointer.
There is no list of devices in the device class. Each driver has a
list of devices that it supports. The device class has a list of
@@ -73,15 +73,15 @@ Device Drivers
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
Device drivers are added to device classes when they are registered
with the core. A driver specifies the class it belongs to by setting
-the struct device_driver::devclass field.
+the struct device_driver::devclass field.
sysfs directory structure
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-There is a top-level sysfs directory named 'class'.
+There is a top-level sysfs directory named 'class'.
Each class gets a directory in the class directory, along with two
-default subdirectories:
+default subdirectories::
class/
`-- input
@@ -89,8 +89,8 @@ default subdirectories:
`-- drivers
-Drivers registered with the class get a symlink in the drivers/ directory
-that points to the driver's directory (under its bus directory):
+Drivers registered with the class get a symlink in the drivers/ directory
+that points to the driver's directory (under its bus directory)::
class/
`-- input
@@ -99,8 +99,8 @@ that points to the driver's directory (under its bus directory):
`-- usb:usb_mouse -> ../../../bus/drivers/usb_mouse/
-Each device gets a symlink in the devices/ directory that points to the
-device's directory in the physical hierarchy:
+Each device gets a symlink in the devices/ directory that points to the
+device's directory in the physical hierarchy::
class/
`-- input
@@ -111,37 +111,39 @@ device's directory in the physical hierarchy:
Exporting Attributes
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-struct devclass_attribute {
+
+::
+
+ struct devclass_attribute {
struct attribute attr;
ssize_t (*show)(struct device_class *, char * buf, size_t count, loff_t off);
ssize_t (*store)(struct device_class *, const char * buf, size_t count, loff_t off);
-};
+ };
Class drivers can export attributes using the DEVCLASS_ATTR macro that works
-similarly to the DEVICE_ATTR macro for devices. For example, a definition
-like this:
+similarly to the DEVICE_ATTR macro for devices. For example, a definition
+like this::
-static DEVCLASS_ATTR(debug,0644,show_debug,store_debug);
+ static DEVCLASS_ATTR(debug,0644,show_debug,store_debug);
-is equivalent to declaring:
+is equivalent to declaring::
-static devclass_attribute devclass_attr_debug;
+ static devclass_attribute devclass_attr_debug;
The bus driver can add and remove the attribute from the class's
-sysfs directory using:
+sysfs directory using::
-int devclass_create_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *);
-void devclass_remove_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *);
+ int devclass_create_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *);
+ void devclass_remove_file(struct device_class *, struct devclass_attribute *);
In the example above, the file will be named 'debug' in placed in the
-class's directory in sysfs.
+class's directory in sysfs.
Interfaces
~~~~~~~~~~
There may exist multiple mechanisms for accessing the same device of a
-particular class type. Device interfaces describe these mechanisms.
+particular class type. Device interfaces describe these mechanisms.
When a device is added to a device class, the core attempts to add it
to every interface that is registered with the device class.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.rst
similarity index 59%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.rst
index ba7b2df64904..41eb8f41f7dd 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
+=============================
Device Driver Design Patterns
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+=============================
This document describes a few common design patterns found in device drivers.
It is likely that subsystem maintainers will ask driver developers to
@@ -19,23 +19,23 @@ that the device the driver binds to will appear in several instances. This
means that the probe() function and all callbacks need to be reentrant.
The most common way to achieve this is to use the state container design
-pattern. It usually has this form:
+pattern. It usually has this form::
-struct foo {
- spinlock_t lock; /* Example member */
- (...)
-};
+ struct foo {
+ spinlock_t lock; /* Example member */
+ (...)
+ };
-static int foo_probe(...)
-{
- struct foo *foo;
+ static int foo_probe(...)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo;
- foo = devm_kzalloc(dev, sizeof(*foo), GFP_KERNEL);
- if (!foo)
- return -ENOMEM;
- spin_lock_init(&foo->lock);
- (...)
-}
+ foo = devm_kzalloc(dev, sizeof(*foo), GFP_KERNEL);
+ if (!foo)
+ return -ENOMEM;
+ spin_lock_init(&foo->lock);
+ (...)
+ }
This will create an instance of struct foo in memory every time probe() is
called. This is our state container for this instance of the device driver.
@@ -43,21 +43,21 @@ Of course it is then necessary to always pass this instance of the
state around to all functions that need access to the state and its members.
For example, if the driver is registering an interrupt handler, you would
-pass around a pointer to struct foo like this:
+pass around a pointer to struct foo like this::
-static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg)
-{
- struct foo *foo = arg;
- (...)
-}
+ static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo = arg;
+ (...)
+ }
-static int foo_probe(...)
-{
- struct foo *foo;
+ static int foo_probe(...)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo;
- (...)
- ret = request_irq(irq, foo_handler, 0, "foo", foo);
-}
+ (...)
+ ret = request_irq(irq, foo_handler, 0, "foo", foo);
+ }
This way you always get a pointer back to the correct instance of foo in
your interrupt handler.
@@ -66,38 +66,38 @@ your interrupt handler.
2. container_of()
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
-Continuing on the above example we add an offloaded work:
+Continuing on the above example we add an offloaded work::
-struct foo {
- spinlock_t lock;
- struct workqueue_struct *wq;
- struct work_struct offload;
- (...)
-};
+ struct foo {
+ spinlock_t lock;
+ struct workqueue_struct *wq;
+ struct work_struct offload;
+ (...)
+ };
-static void foo_work(struct work_struct *work)
-{
- struct foo *foo = container_of(work, struct foo, offload);
+ static void foo_work(struct work_struct *work)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo = container_of(work, struct foo, offload);
- (...)
-}
+ (...)
+ }
-static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg)
-{
- struct foo *foo = arg;
+ static irqreturn_t foo_handler(int irq, void *arg)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo = arg;
- queue_work(foo->wq, &foo->offload);
- (...)
-}
+ queue_work(foo->wq, &foo->offload);
+ (...)
+ }
-static int foo_probe(...)
-{
- struct foo *foo;
+ static int foo_probe(...)
+ {
+ struct foo *foo;
- foo->wq = create_singlethread_workqueue("foo-wq");
- INIT_WORK(&foo->offload, foo_work);
- (...)
-}
+ foo->wq = create_singlethread_workqueue("foo-wq");
+ INIT_WORK(&foo->offload, foo_work);
+ (...)
+ }
The design pattern is the same for an hrtimer or something similar that will
return a single argument which is a pointer to a struct member in the
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/device.rst
similarity index 71%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/device.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/device.rst
index 2403eb856187..2b868d49d349 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/device.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/device.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
+==========================
The Basic Device Structure
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+==========================
See the kerneldoc for the struct device.
@@ -8,9 +8,9 @@ See the kerneldoc for the struct device.
Programming Interface
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
The bus driver that discovers the device uses this to register the
-device with the core:
+device with the core::
-int device_register(struct device * dev);
+ int device_register(struct device * dev);
The bus should initialize the following fields:
@@ -20,30 +20,33 @@ The bus should initialize the following fields:
- bus
A device is removed from the core when its reference count goes to
-0. The reference count can be adjusted using:
+0. The reference count can be adjusted using::
-struct device * get_device(struct device * dev);
-void put_device(struct device * dev);
+ struct device * get_device(struct device * dev);
+ void put_device(struct device * dev);
get_device() will return a pointer to the struct device passed to it
if the reference is not already 0 (if it's in the process of being
removed already).
-A driver can access the lock in the device structure using:
+A driver can access the lock in the device structure using::
-void lock_device(struct device * dev);
-void unlock_device(struct device * dev);
+ void lock_device(struct device * dev);
+ void unlock_device(struct device * dev);
Attributes
~~~~~~~~~~
-struct device_attribute {
+
+::
+
+ struct device_attribute {
struct attribute attr;
ssize_t (*show)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
char *buf);
ssize_t (*store)(struct device *dev, struct device_attribute *attr,
const char *buf, size_t count);
-};
+ };
Attributes of devices can be exported by a device driver through sysfs.
@@ -54,39 +57,39 @@ As explained in Documentation/kobject.txt, device attributes must be
created before the KOBJ_ADD uevent is generated. The only way to realize
that is by defining an attribute group.
-Attributes are declared using a macro called DEVICE_ATTR:
+Attributes are declared using a macro called DEVICE_ATTR::
-#define DEVICE_ATTR(name,mode,show,store)
+ #define DEVICE_ATTR(name,mode,show,store)
-Example:
+Example:::
-static DEVICE_ATTR(type, 0444, show_type, NULL);
-static DEVICE_ATTR(power, 0644, show_power, store_power);
+ static DEVICE_ATTR(type, 0444, show_type, NULL);
+ static DEVICE_ATTR(power, 0644, show_power, store_power);
This declares two structures of type struct device_attribute with respective
names 'dev_attr_type' and 'dev_attr_power'. These two attributes can be
-organized as follows into a group:
+organized as follows into a group::
-static struct attribute *dev_attrs[] = {
+ static struct attribute *dev_attrs[] = {
&dev_attr_type.attr,
&dev_attr_power.attr,
NULL,
-};
+ };
-static struct attribute_group dev_attr_group = {
+ static struct attribute_group dev_attr_group = {
.attrs = dev_attrs,
-};
+ };
-static const struct attribute_group *dev_attr_groups[] = {
+ static const struct attribute_group *dev_attr_groups[] = {
&dev_attr_group,
NULL,
-};
+ };
This array of groups can then be associated with a device by setting the
-group pointer in struct device before device_register() is invoked:
+group pointer in struct device before device_register() is invoked::
- dev->groups = dev_attr_groups;
- device_register(dev);
+ dev->groups = dev_attr_groups;
+ device_register(dev);
The device_register() function will use the 'groups' pointer to create the
device attributes and the device_unregister() function will use this pointer
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.rst
similarity index 93%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/devres.rst
index 69c7fa7f616c..4ac99122b5f1 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/devres.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+================================
Devres - Managed Device Resource
================================
@@ -5,17 +6,18 @@ Tejun Heo <teheo@suse.de>
First draft 10 January 2007
+.. contents
-1. Intro : Huh? Devres?
-2. Devres : Devres in a nutshell
-3. Devres Group : Group devres'es and release them together
-4. Details : Life time rules, calling context, ...
-5. Overhead : How much do we have to pay for this?
-6. List of managed interfaces : Currently implemented managed interfaces
+ 1. Intro : Huh? Devres?
+ 2. Devres : Devres in a nutshell
+ 3. Devres Group : Group devres'es and release them together
+ 4. Details : Life time rules, calling context, ...
+ 5. Overhead : How much do we have to pay for this?
+ 6. List of managed interfaces: Currently implemented managed interfaces
- 1. Intro
- --------
+1. Intro
+--------
devres came up while trying to convert libata to use iomap. Each
iomapped address should be kept and unmapped on driver detach. For
@@ -42,8 +44,8 @@ would leak resources or even cause oops when failure occurs. iomap
adds more to this mix. So do msi and msix.
- 2. Devres
- ---------
+2. Devres
+---------
devres is basically linked list of arbitrarily sized memory areas
associated with a struct device. Each devres entry is associated with
@@ -58,7 +60,7 @@ using dma_alloc_coherent(). The managed version is called
dmam_alloc_coherent(). It is identical to dma_alloc_coherent() except
for the DMA memory allocated using it is managed and will be
automatically released on driver detach. Implementation looks like
-the following.
+the following::
struct dma_devres {
size_t size;
@@ -98,7 +100,7 @@ If a driver uses dmam_alloc_coherent(), the area is guaranteed to be
freed whether initialization fails half-way or the device gets
detached. If most resources are acquired using managed interface, a
driver can have much simpler init and exit code. Init path basically
-looks like the following.
+looks like the following::
my_init_one()
{
@@ -119,7 +121,7 @@ looks like the following.
return register_to_upper_layer(d);
}
-And exit path,
+And exit path::
my_remove_one()
{
@@ -140,13 +142,13 @@ on you. In some cases this may mean introducing checks that were not
necessary before moving to the managed devm_* calls.
- 3. Devres group
- ---------------
+3. Devres group
+---------------
Devres entries can be grouped using devres group. When a group is
released, all contained normal devres entries and properly nested
groups are released. One usage is to rollback series of acquired
-resources on failure. For example,
+resources on failure. For example::
if (!devres_open_group(dev, NULL, GFP_KERNEL))
return -ENOMEM;
@@ -172,7 +174,7 @@ like above are usually useful in midlayer driver (e.g. libata core
layer) where interface function shouldn't have side effect on failure.
For LLDs, just returning error code suffices in most cases.
-Each group is identified by void *id. It can either be explicitly
+Each group is identified by `void *id`. It can either be explicitly
specified by @id argument to devres_open_group() or automatically
created by passing NULL as @id as in the above example. In both
cases, devres_open_group() returns the group's id. The returned id
@@ -180,7 +182,7 @@ can be passed to other devres functions to select the target group.
If NULL is given to those functions, the latest open group is
selected.
-For example, you can do something like the following.
+For example, you can do something like the following::
int my_midlayer_create_something()
{
@@ -199,8 +201,8 @@ For example, you can do something like the following.
}
- 4. Details
- ----------
+4. Details
+----------
Lifetime of a devres entry begins on devres allocation and finishes
when it is released or destroyed (removed and freed) - no reference
@@ -220,8 +222,8 @@ All devres interface functions can be called without context if the
right gfp mask is given.
- 5. Overhead
- -----------
+5. Overhead
+-----------
Each devres bookkeeping info is allocated together with requested data
area. With debug option turned off, bookkeeping info occupies 16
@@ -237,8 +239,8 @@ and 400 bytes on 32bit machine after naive conversion (we can
certainly invest a bit more effort into libata core layer).
- 6. List of managed interfaces
- -----------------------------
+6. List of managed interfaces
+-----------------------------
CLOCK
devm_clk_get()
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/driver.rst
similarity index 75%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/driver.rst
index d661e6f7e6a0..11d281506a04 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/driver.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
+==============
Device Drivers
+==============
See the kerneldoc for the struct device_driver.
@@ -26,50 +27,50 @@ Declaration
As stated above, struct device_driver objects are statically
allocated. Below is an example declaration of the eepro100
driver. This declaration is hypothetical only; it relies on the driver
-being converted completely to the new model.
+being converted completely to the new model::
-static struct device_driver eepro100_driver = {
- .name = "eepro100",
- .bus = &pci_bus_type,
-
- .probe = eepro100_probe,
- .remove = eepro100_remove,
- .suspend = eepro100_suspend,
- .resume = eepro100_resume,
-};
+ static struct device_driver eepro100_driver = {
+ .name = "eepro100",
+ .bus = &pci_bus_type,
+
+ .probe = eepro100_probe,
+ .remove = eepro100_remove,
+ .suspend = eepro100_suspend,
+ .resume = eepro100_resume,
+ };
Most drivers will not be able to be converted completely to the new
model because the bus they belong to has a bus-specific structure with
-bus-specific fields that cannot be generalized.
+bus-specific fields that cannot be generalized.
The most common example of this are device ID structures. A driver
typically defines an array of device IDs that it supports. The format
of these structures and the semantics for comparing device IDs are
completely bus-specific. Defining them as bus-specific entities would
-sacrifice type-safety, so we keep bus-specific structures around.
+sacrifice type-safety, so we keep bus-specific structures around.
Bus-specific drivers should include a generic struct device_driver in
-the definition of the bus-specific driver. Like this:
+the definition of the bus-specific driver. Like this::
-struct pci_driver {
- const struct pci_device_id *id_table;
- struct device_driver driver;
-};
+ struct pci_driver {
+ const struct pci_device_id *id_table;
+ struct device_driver driver;
+ };
A definition that included bus-specific fields would look like
-(using the eepro100 driver again):
+(using the eepro100 driver again)::
-static struct pci_driver eepro100_driver = {
- .id_table = eepro100_pci_tbl,
- .driver = {
+ static struct pci_driver eepro100_driver = {
+ .id_table = eepro100_pci_tbl,
+ .driver = {
.name = "eepro100",
.bus = &pci_bus_type,
.probe = eepro100_probe,
.remove = eepro100_remove,
.suspend = eepro100_suspend,
.resume = eepro100_resume,
- },
-};
+ },
+ };
Some may find the syntax of embedded struct initialization awkward or
even a bit ugly. So far, it's the best way we've found to do what we want...
@@ -77,12 +78,14 @@ even a bit ugly. So far, it's the best way we've found to do what we want...
Registration
~~~~~~~~~~~~
-int driver_register(struct device_driver * drv);
+::
+
+ int driver_register(struct device_driver *drv);
The driver registers the structure on startup. For drivers that have
no bus-specific fields (i.e. don't have a bus-specific driver
structure), they would use driver_register and pass a pointer to their
-struct device_driver object.
+struct device_driver object.
Most drivers, however, will have a bus-specific structure and will
need to register with the bus using something like pci_driver_register.
@@ -101,7 +104,7 @@ By defining wrapper functions, the transition to the new model can be
made easier. Drivers can ignore the generic structure altogether and
let the bus wrapper fill in the fields. For the callbacks, the bus can
define generic callbacks that forward the call to the bus-specific
-callbacks of the drivers.
+callbacks of the drivers.
This solution is intended to be only temporary. In order to get class
information in the driver, the drivers must be modified anyway. Since
@@ -113,16 +116,16 @@ Access
~~~~~~
Once the object has been registered, it may access the common fields of
-the object, like the lock and the list of devices.
+the object, like the lock and the list of devices::
-int driver_for_each_dev(struct device_driver * drv, void * data,
- int (*callback)(struct device * dev, void * data));
+ int driver_for_each_dev(struct device_driver *drv, void *data,
+ int (*callback)(struct device *dev, void *data));
The devices field is a list of all the devices that have been bound to
the driver. The LDM core provides a helper function to operate on all
the devices a driver controls. This helper locks the driver on each
node access, and does proper reference counting on each device as it
-accesses it.
+accesses it.
sysfs
@@ -142,7 +145,9 @@ supports.
Callbacks
~~~~~~~~~
- int (*probe) (struct device * dev);
+::
+
+ int (*probe) (struct device *dev);
The probe() entry is called in task context, with the bus's rwsem locked
and the driver partially bound to the device. Drivers commonly use
@@ -162,9 +167,9 @@ the driver to that device.
A driver's probe() may return a negative errno value to indicate that
the driver did not bind to this device, in which case it should have
-released all resources it allocated.
+released all resources it allocated::
- int (*remove) (struct device * dev);
+ int (*remove) (struct device *dev);
remove is called to unbind a driver from a device. This may be
called if a device is physically removed from the system, if the
@@ -173,43 +178,46 @@ in other cases.
It is up to the driver to determine if the device is present or
not. It should free any resources allocated specifically for the
-device; i.e. anything in the device's driver_data field.
+device; i.e. anything in the device's driver_data field.
If the device is still present, it should quiesce the device and place
-it into a supported low-power state.
+it into a supported low-power state::
- int (*suspend) (struct device * dev, pm_message_t state);
+ int (*suspend) (struct device *dev, pm_message_t state);
-suspend is called to put the device in a low power state.
+suspend is called to put the device in a low power state::
- int (*resume) (struct device * dev);
+ int (*resume) (struct device *dev);
Resume is used to bring a device back from a low power state.
Attributes
~~~~~~~~~~
-struct driver_attribute {
- struct attribute attr;
- ssize_t (*show)(struct device_driver *driver, char *buf);
- ssize_t (*store)(struct device_driver *, const char * buf, size_t count);
-};
-Device drivers can export attributes via their sysfs directories.
+::
+
+ struct driver_attribute {
+ struct attribute attr;
+ ssize_t (*show)(struct device_driver *driver, char *buf);
+ ssize_t (*store)(struct device_driver *, const char *buf, size_t count);
+ };
+
+Device drivers can export attributes via their sysfs directories.
Drivers can declare attributes using a DRIVER_ATTR_RW and DRIVER_ATTR_RO
macro that works identically to the DEVICE_ATTR_RW and DEVICE_ATTR_RO
macros.
-Example:
+Example::
-DRIVER_ATTR_RW(debug);
+ DRIVER_ATTR_RW(debug);
-This is equivalent to declaring:
+This is equivalent to declaring::
-struct driver_attribute driver_attr_debug;
+ struct driver_attribute driver_attr_debug;
This can then be used to add and remove the attribute from the
-driver's directory using:
+driver's directory using::
-int driver_create_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
-void driver_remove_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
+ int driver_create_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
+ void driver_remove_file(struct device_driver *, const struct driver_attribute *);
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/index.rst b/Documentation/driver-model/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9f85d579ce56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+:orphan:
+
+============
+Driver Model
+============
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ binding
+ bus
+ class
+ design-patterns
+ device
+ devres
+ driver
+ overview
+ platform
+ porting
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/overview.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/overview.rst
similarity index 90%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/overview.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/overview.rst
index 6a8f9a8075d8..d4d1e9b40e0c 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/overview.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+=============================
The Linux Kernel Device Model
+=============================
Patrick Mochel <mochel@digitalimplant.org>
@@ -41,14 +43,14 @@ data structure. These fields must still be accessed by the bus layers,
and sometimes by the device-specific drivers.
Other bus layers are encouraged to do what has been done for the PCI layer.
-struct pci_dev now looks like this:
+struct pci_dev now looks like this::
-struct pci_dev {
+ struct pci_dev {
...
struct device dev; /* Generic device interface */
...
-};
+ };
Note first that the struct device dev within the struct pci_dev is
statically allocated. This means only one allocation on device discovery.
@@ -80,26 +82,26 @@ easy. This has been accomplished by implementing a special purpose virtual
file system named sysfs.
Almost all mainstream Linux distros mount this filesystem automatically; you
-can see some variation of the following in the output of the "mount" command:
+can see some variation of the following in the output of the "mount" command::
-$ mount
-...
-none on /sys type sysfs (rw,noexec,nosuid,nodev)
-...
-$
+ $ mount
+ ...
+ none on /sys type sysfs (rw,noexec,nosuid,nodev)
+ ...
+ $
The auto-mounting of sysfs is typically accomplished by an entry similar to
-the following in the /etc/fstab file:
+the following in the /etc/fstab file::
-none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
+ none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
-or something similar in the /lib/init/fstab file on Debian-based systems:
+or something similar in the /lib/init/fstab file on Debian-based systems::
-none /sys sysfs nodev,noexec,nosuid 0 0
+ none /sys sysfs nodev,noexec,nosuid 0 0
-If sysfs is not automatically mounted, you can always do it manually with:
+If sysfs is not automatically mounted, you can always do it manually with::
-# mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys
+ # mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys
Whenever a device is inserted into the tree, a directory is created for it.
This directory may be populated at each layer of discovery - the global layer,
@@ -108,7 +110,7 @@ the bus layer, or the device layer.
The global layer currently creates two files - 'name' and 'power'. The
former only reports the name of the device. The latter reports the
current power state of the device. It will also be used to set the current
-power state.
+power state.
The bus layer may also create files for the devices it finds while probing the
bus. For example, the PCI layer currently creates 'irq' and 'resource' files
@@ -118,6 +120,5 @@ A device-specific driver may also export files in its directory to expose
device-specific data or tunable interfaces.
More information about the sysfs directory layout can be found in
-the other documents in this directory and in the file
+the other documents in this directory and in the file
Documentation/filesystems/sysfs.txt.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/platform.rst
similarity index 95%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/platform.rst
index 9d9e47dfc013..334dd4071ae4 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/platform.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+============================
Platform Devices and Drivers
-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+============================
+
See <linux/platform_device.h> for the driver model interface to the
platform bus: platform_device, and platform_driver. This pseudo-bus
is used to connect devices on busses with minimal infrastructure,
@@ -19,15 +21,15 @@ be connected through a segment of some other kind of bus; but its
registers will still be directly addressable.
Platform devices are given a name, used in driver binding, and a
-list of resources such as addresses and IRQs.
+list of resources such as addresses and IRQs::
-struct platform_device {
+ struct platform_device {
const char *name;
u32 id;
struct device dev;
u32 num_resources;
struct resource *resource;
-};
+ };
Platform drivers
@@ -35,9 +37,9 @@ Platform drivers
Platform drivers follow the standard driver model convention, where
discovery/enumeration is handled outside the drivers, and drivers
provide probe() and remove() methods. They support power management
-and shutdown notifications using the standard conventions.
+and shutdown notifications using the standard conventions::
-struct platform_driver {
+ struct platform_driver {
int (*probe)(struct platform_device *);
int (*remove)(struct platform_device *);
void (*shutdown)(struct platform_device *);
@@ -46,25 +48,25 @@ struct platform_driver {
int (*resume_early)(struct platform_device *);
int (*resume)(struct platform_device *);
struct device_driver driver;
-};
+ };
Note that probe() should in general verify that the specified device hardware
actually exists; sometimes platform setup code can't be sure. The probing
can use device resources, including clocks, and device platform_data.
-Platform drivers register themselves the normal way:
+Platform drivers register themselves the normal way::
int platform_driver_register(struct platform_driver *drv);
Or, in common situations where the device is known not to be hot-pluggable,
the probe() routine can live in an init section to reduce the driver's
-runtime memory footprint:
+runtime memory footprint::
int platform_driver_probe(struct platform_driver *drv,
int (*probe)(struct platform_device *))
Kernel modules can be composed of several platform drivers. The platform core
-provides helpers to register and unregister an array of drivers:
+provides helpers to register and unregister an array of drivers::
int __platform_register_drivers(struct platform_driver * const *drivers,
unsigned int count, struct module *owner);
@@ -73,7 +75,7 @@ provides helpers to register and unregister an array of drivers:
If one of the drivers fails to register, all drivers registered up to that
point will be unregistered in reverse order. Note that there is a convenience
-macro that passes THIS_MODULE as owner parameter:
+macro that passes THIS_MODULE as owner parameter::
#define platform_register_drivers(drivers, count)
@@ -81,7 +83,7 @@ macro that passes THIS_MODULE as owner parameter:
Device Enumeration
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
As a rule, platform specific (and often board-specific) setup code will
-register platform devices:
+register platform devices::
int platform_device_register(struct platform_device *pdev);
@@ -133,14 +135,14 @@ tend to already have "normal" modes, such as ones using device nodes that
were created by PNP or by platform device setup.
None the less, there are some APIs to support such legacy drivers. Avoid
-using these calls except with such hotplug-deficient drivers.
+using these calls except with such hotplug-deficient drivers::
struct platform_device *platform_device_alloc(
const char *name, int id);
You can use platform_device_alloc() to dynamically allocate a device, which
you will then initialize with resources and platform_device_register().
-A better solution is usually:
+A better solution is usually::
struct platform_device *platform_device_register_simple(
const char *name, int id,
diff --git a/Documentation/driver-model/porting.txt b/Documentation/driver-model/porting.rst
similarity index 62%
rename from Documentation/driver-model/porting.txt
rename to Documentation/driver-model/porting.rst
index 453053f1661f..ae4bf843c1d6 100644
--- a/Documentation/driver-model/porting.txt
+++ b/Documentation/driver-model/porting.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
-
+=======================================
Porting Drivers to the New Driver Model
+=======================================
Patrick Mochel
@@ -8,8 +9,8 @@ Patrick Mochel
Overview
-Please refer to Documentation/driver-model/*.txt for definitions of
-various driver types and concepts.
+Please refer to `Documentation/driver-model/*.rst` for definitions of
+various driver types and concepts.
Most of the work of porting devices drivers to the new model happens
at the bus driver layer. This was intentional, to minimize the
@@ -18,11 +19,11 @@ of bus drivers.
In a nutshell, the driver model consists of a set of objects that can
be embedded in larger, bus-specific objects. Fields in these generic
-objects can replace fields in the bus-specific objects.
+objects can replace fields in the bus-specific objects.
The generic objects must be registered with the driver model core. By
doing so, they will exported via the sysfs filesystem. sysfs can be
-mounted by doing
+mounted by doing::
# mount -t sysfs sysfs /sys
@@ -30,108 +31,109 @@ mounted by doing
The Process
-Step 0: Read include/linux/device.h for object and function definitions.
+Step 0: Read include/linux/device.h for object and function definitions.
-Step 1: Registering the bus driver.
+Step 1: Registering the bus driver.
-- Define a struct bus_type for the bus driver.
+- Define a struct bus_type for the bus driver::
-struct bus_type pci_bus_type = {
- .name = "pci",
-};
+ struct bus_type pci_bus_type = {
+ .name = "pci",
+ };
- Register the bus type.
+
This should be done in the initialization function for the bus type,
- which is usually the module_init(), or equivalent, function.
+ which is usually the module_init(), or equivalent, function::
-static int __init pci_driver_init(void)
-{
- return bus_register(&pci_bus_type);
-}
+ static int __init pci_driver_init(void)
+ {
+ return bus_register(&pci_bus_type);
+ }
-subsys_initcall(pci_driver_init);
+ subsys_initcall(pci_driver_init);
The bus type may be unregistered (if the bus driver may be compiled
- as a module) by doing:
+ as a module) by doing::
bus_unregister(&pci_bus_type);
-- Export the bus type for others to use.
+- Export the bus type for others to use.
- Other code may wish to reference the bus type, so declare it in a
+ Other code may wish to reference the bus type, so declare it in a
shared header file and export the symbol.
-From include/linux/pci.h:
+From include/linux/pci.h::
-extern struct bus_type pci_bus_type;
+ extern struct bus_type pci_bus_type;
-From file the above code appears in:
+From file the above code appears in::
-EXPORT_SYMBOL(pci_bus_type);
+ EXPORT_SYMBOL(pci_bus_type);
- This will cause the bus to show up in /sys/bus/pci/ with two
- subdirectories: 'devices' and 'drivers'.
+ subdirectories: 'devices' and 'drivers'::
-# tree -d /sys/bus/pci/
-/sys/bus/pci/
-|-- devices
-`-- drivers
+ # tree -d /sys/bus/pci/
+ /sys/bus/pci/
+ |-- devices
+ `-- drivers
-Step 2: Registering Devices.
+Step 2: Registering Devices.
struct device represents a single device. It mainly contains metadata
-describing the relationship the device has to other entities.
+describing the relationship the device has to other entities.
-- Embed a struct device in the bus-specific device type.
+- Embed a struct device in the bus-specific device type::
-struct pci_dev {
- ...
- struct device dev; /* Generic device interface */
- ...
-};
+ struct pci_dev {
+ ...
+ struct device dev; /* Generic device interface */
+ ...
+ };
- It is recommended that the generic device not be the first item in
+ It is recommended that the generic device not be the first item in
the struct to discourage programmers from doing mindless casts
between the object types. Instead macros, or inline functions,
- should be created to convert from the generic object type.
+ should be created to convert from the generic object type::
-#define to_pci_dev(n) container_of(n, struct pci_dev, dev)
+ #define to_pci_dev(n) container_of(n, struct pci_dev, dev)
-or
+ or
-static inline struct pci_dev * to_pci_dev(struct kobject * kobj)
-{
+ static inline struct pci_dev * to_pci_dev(struct kobject * kobj)
+ {
return container_of(n, struct pci_dev, dev);
-}
+ }
- This allows the compiler to verify type-safety of the operations
+ This allows the compiler to verify type-safety of the operations
that are performed (which is Good).
- Initialize the device on registration.
- When devices are discovered or registered with the bus type, the
+ When devices are discovered or registered with the bus type, the
bus driver should initialize the generic device. The most important
things to initialize are the bus_id, parent, and bus fields.
The bus_id is an ASCII string that contains the device's address on
the bus. The format of this string is bus-specific. This is
- necessary for representing devices in sysfs.
+ necessary for representing devices in sysfs.
parent is the physical parent of the device. It is important that
- the bus driver sets this field correctly.
+ the bus driver sets this field correctly.
The driver model maintains an ordered list of devices that it uses
for power management. This list must be in order to guarantee that
@@ -140,13 +142,13 @@ static inline struct pci_dev * to_pci_dev(struct kobject * kobj)
devices.
Also, the location of the device's sysfs directory depends on a
- device's parent. sysfs exports a directory structure that mirrors
+ device's parent. sysfs exports a directory structure that mirrors
the device hierarchy. Accurately setting the parent guarantees that
sysfs will accurately represent the hierarchy.
The device's bus field is a pointer to the bus type the device
belongs to. This should be set to the bus_type that was declared
- and initialized before.
+ and initialized before.
Optionally, the bus driver may set the device's name and release
fields.
@@ -155,107 +157,107 @@ static inline struct pci_dev * to_pci_dev(struct kobject * kobj)
"ATI Technologies Inc Radeon QD"
- The release field is a callback that the driver model core calls
- when the device has been removed, and all references to it have
+ The release field is a callback that the driver model core calls
+ when the device has been removed, and all references to it have
been released. More on this in a moment.
-- Register the device.
+- Register the device.
Once the generic device has been initialized, it can be registered
- with the driver model core by doing:
+ with the driver model core by doing::
device_register(&dev->dev);
- It can later be unregistered by doing:
+ It can later be unregistered by doing::
device_unregister(&dev->dev);
- This should happen on buses that support hotpluggable devices.
+ This should happen on buses that support hotpluggable devices.
If a bus driver unregisters a device, it should not immediately free
- it. It should instead wait for the driver model core to call the
- device's release method, then free the bus-specific object.
+ it. It should instead wait for the driver model core to call the
+ device's release method, then free the bus-specific object.
(There may be other code that is currently referencing the device
- structure, and it would be rude to free the device while that is
+ structure, and it would be rude to free the device while that is
happening).
- When the device is registered, a directory in sysfs is created.
- The PCI tree in sysfs looks like:
+ When the device is registered, a directory in sysfs is created.
+ The PCI tree in sysfs looks like::
-/sys/devices/pci0/
-|-- 00:00.0
-|-- 00:01.0
-| `-- 01:00.0
-|-- 00:02.0
-| `-- 02:1f.0
-| `-- 03:00.0
-|-- 00:1e.0
-| `-- 04:04.0
-|-- 00:1f.0
-|-- 00:1f.1
-| |-- ide0
-| | |-- 0.0
-| | `-- 0.1
-| `-- ide1
-| `-- 1.0
-|-- 00:1f.2
-|-- 00:1f.3
-`-- 00:1f.5
+ /sys/devices/pci0/
+ |-- 00:00.0
+ |-- 00:01.0
+ | `-- 01:00.0
+ |-- 00:02.0
+ | `-- 02:1f.0
+ | `-- 03:00.0
+ |-- 00:1e.0
+ | `-- 04:04.0
+ |-- 00:1f.0
+ |-- 00:1f.1
+ | |-- ide0
+ | | |-- 0.0
+ | | `-- 0.1
+ | `-- ide1
+ | `-- 1.0
+ |-- 00:1f.2
+ |-- 00:1f.3
+ `-- 00:1f.5
Also, symlinks are created in the bus's 'devices' directory
- that point to the device's directory in the physical hierarchy.
+ that point to the device's directory in the physical hierarchy::
-/sys/bus/pci/devices/
-|-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0
-|-- 00:01.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0
-|-- 00:02.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0
-|-- 00:1e.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0
-|-- 00:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.0
-|-- 00:1f.1 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.1
-|-- 00:1f.2 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.2
-|-- 00:1f.3 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.3
-|-- 00:1f.5 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.5
-|-- 01:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0/01:00.0
-|-- 02:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0
-|-- 03:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0/03:00.0
-`-- 04:04.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0/04:04.0
+ /sys/bus/pci/devices/
+ |-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0
+ |-- 00:01.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0
+ |-- 00:02.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0
+ |-- 00:1e.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0
+ |-- 00:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.0
+ |-- 00:1f.1 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.1
+ |-- 00:1f.2 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.2
+ |-- 00:1f.3 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.3
+ |-- 00:1f.5 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1f.5
+ |-- 01:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:01.0/01:00.0
+ |-- 02:1f.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0
+ |-- 03:00.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:02.0/02:1f.0/03:00.0
+ `-- 04:04.0 -> ../../../devices/pci0/00:1e.0/04:04.0
Step 3: Registering Drivers.
struct device_driver is a simple driver structure that contains a set
-of operations that the driver model core may call.
+of operations that the driver model core may call.
-- Embed a struct device_driver in the bus-specific driver.
+- Embed a struct device_driver in the bus-specific driver.
- Just like with devices, do something like:
+ Just like with devices, do something like::
-struct pci_driver {
- ...
- struct device_driver driver;
-};
+ struct pci_driver {
+ ...
+ struct device_driver driver;
+ };
-- Initialize the generic driver structure.
+- Initialize the generic driver structure.
When the driver registers with the bus (e.g. doing pci_register_driver()),
initialize the necessary fields of the driver: the name and bus
- fields.
+ fields.
- Register the driver.
- After the generic driver has been initialized, call
+ After the generic driver has been initialized, call::
driver_register(&drv->driver);
to register the driver with the core.
When the driver is unregistered from the bus, unregister it from the
- core by doing:
+ core by doing::
driver_unregister(&drv->driver);
@@ -265,15 +267,15 @@ struct pci_driver {
- Sysfs representation.
- Drivers are exported via sysfs in their bus's 'driver's directory.
- For example:
+ Drivers are exported via sysfs in their bus's 'driver's directory.
+ For example::
-/sys/bus/pci/drivers/
-|-- 3c59x
-|-- Ensoniq AudioPCI
-|-- agpgart-amdk7
-|-- e100
-`-- serial
+ /sys/bus/pci/drivers/
+ |-- 3c59x
+ |-- Ensoniq AudioPCI
+ |-- agpgart-amdk7
+ |-- e100
+ `-- serial
Step 4: Define Generic Methods for Drivers.
@@ -281,30 +283,30 @@ Step 4: Define Generic Methods for Drivers.
struct device_driver defines a set of operations that the driver model
core calls. Most of these operations are probably similar to
operations the bus already defines for drivers, but taking different
-parameters.
+parameters.
It would be difficult and tedious to force every driver on a bus to
simultaneously convert their drivers to generic format. Instead, the
bus driver should define single instances of the generic methods that
-forward call to the bus-specific drivers. For instance:
+forward call to the bus-specific drivers. For instance::
-static int pci_device_remove(struct device * dev)
-{
- struct pci_dev * pci_dev = to_pci_dev(dev);
- struct pci_driver * drv = pci_dev->driver;
+ static int pci_device_remove(struct device * dev)
+ {
+ struct pci_dev * pci_dev = to_pci_dev(dev);
+ struct pci_driver * drv = pci_dev->driver;
- if (drv) {
- if (drv->remove)
- drv->remove(pci_dev);
- pci_dev->driver = NULL;
- }
- return 0;
-}
+ if (drv) {
+ if (drv->remove)
+ drv->remove(pci_dev);
+ pci_dev->driver = NULL;
+ }
+ return 0;
+ }
The generic driver should be initialized with these methods before it
-is registered.
+is registered::
/* initialize common driver fields */
drv->driver.name = drv->name;
@@ -320,23 +322,23 @@ is registered.
Ideally, the bus should only initialize the fields if they are not
already set. This allows the drivers to implement their own generic
-methods.
+methods.
-Step 5: Support generic driver binding.
+Step 5: Support generic driver binding.
The model assumes that a device or driver can be dynamically
registered with the bus at any time. When registration happens,
devices must be bound to a driver, or drivers must be bound to all
-devices that it supports.
+devices that it supports.
A driver typically contains a list of device IDs that it supports. The
-bus driver compares these IDs to the IDs of devices registered with it.
+bus driver compares these IDs to the IDs of devices registered with it.
The format of the device IDs, and the semantics for comparing them are
-bus-specific, so the generic model does attempt to generalize them.
+bus-specific, so the generic model does attempt to generalize them.
Instead, a bus may supply a method in struct bus_type that does the
-comparison:
+comparison::
int (*match)(struct device * dev, struct device_driver * drv);
@@ -346,59 +348,59 @@ and zero otherwise. It may also return error code (for example
not possible.
When a device is registered, the bus's list of drivers is iterated
-over. bus->match() is called for each one until a match is found.
+over. bus->match() is called for each one until a match is found.
When a driver is registered, the bus's list of devices is iterated
over. bus->match() is called for each device that is not already
-claimed by a driver.
+claimed by a driver.
When a device is successfully bound to a driver, device->driver is
set, the device is added to a per-driver list of devices, and a
symlink is created in the driver's sysfs directory that points to the
-device's physical directory:
+device's physical directory::
-/sys/bus/pci/drivers/
-|-- 3c59x
-| `-- 00:0b.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0b.0
-|-- Ensoniq AudioPCI
-|-- agpgart-amdk7
-| `-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0
-|-- e100
-| `-- 00:0c.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0c.0
-`-- serial
+ /sys/bus/pci/drivers/
+ |-- 3c59x
+ | `-- 00:0b.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0b.0
+ |-- Ensoniq AudioPCI
+ |-- agpgart-amdk7
+ | `-- 00:00.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:00.0
+ |-- e100
+ | `-- 00:0c.0 -> ../../../../devices/pci0/00:0c.0
+ `-- serial
This driver binding should replace the existing driver binding
-mechanism the bus currently uses.
+mechanism the bus currently uses.
Step 6: Supply a hotplug callback.
Whenever a device is registered with the driver model core, the
-userspace program /sbin/hotplug is called to notify userspace.
+userspace program /sbin/hotplug is called to notify userspace.
Users can define actions to perform when a device is inserted or
-removed.
+removed.
The driver model core passes several arguments to userspace via
environment variables, including
- ACTION: set to 'add' or 'remove'
-- DEVPATH: set to the device's physical path in sysfs.
+- DEVPATH: set to the device's physical path in sysfs.
A bus driver may also supply additional parameters for userspace to
consume. To do this, a bus must implement the 'hotplug' method in
-struct bus_type:
+struct bus_type::
- int (*hotplug) (struct device *dev, char **envp,
+ int (*hotplug) (struct device *dev, char **envp,
int num_envp, char *buffer, int buffer_size);
-This is called immediately before /sbin/hotplug is executed.
+This is called immediately before /sbin/hotplug is executed.
Step 7: Cleaning up the bus driver.
The generic bus, device, and driver structures provide several fields
-that can replace those defined privately to the bus driver.
+that can replace those defined privately to the bus driver.
- Device list.
@@ -407,36 +409,36 @@ type. This includes all devices on all instances of that bus type.
An internal list that the bus uses may be removed, in favor of using
this one.
-The core provides an iterator to access these devices.
+The core provides an iterator to access these devices::
-int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start,
- void * data, int (*fn)(struct device *, void *));
+ int bus_for_each_dev(struct bus_type * bus, struct device * start,
+ void * data, int (*fn)(struct device *, void *));
- Driver list.
struct bus_type also contains a list of all drivers registered with
-it. An internal list of drivers that the bus driver maintains may
-be removed in favor of using the generic one.
+it. An internal list of drivers that the bus driver maintains may
+be removed in favor of using the generic one.
-The drivers may be iterated over, like devices:
+The drivers may be iterated over, like devices::
-int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start,
- void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *));
+ int bus_for_each_drv(struct bus_type * bus, struct device_driver * start,
+ void * data, int (*fn)(struct device_driver *, void *));
Please see drivers/base/bus.c for more information.
-- rwsem
+- rwsem
struct bus_type contains an rwsem that protects all core accesses to
the device and driver lists. This can be used by the bus driver
internally, and should be used when accessing the device or driver
-lists the bus maintains.
+lists the bus maintains.
-- Device and driver fields.
+- Device and driver fields.
Some of the fields in struct device and struct device_driver duplicate
fields in the bus-specific representations of these objects. Feel free
@@ -444,4 +446,3 @@ to remove the bus-specific ones and favor the generic ones. Note
though, that this will likely mean fixing up all the drivers that
reference the bus-specific fields (though those should all be 1-line
changes).
-
diff --git a/Documentation/eisa.txt b/Documentation/eisa.txt
index 2806e5544e43..f388545a85a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/eisa.txt
+++ b/Documentation/eisa.txt
@@ -103,7 +103,7 @@ id_table an array of NULL terminated EISA id strings,
(driver_data).
driver a generic driver, such as described in
- Documentation/driver-model/driver.txt. Only .name,
+ Documentation/driver-model/driver.rst. Only .name,
.probe and .remove members are mandatory.
=============== ====================================================
@@ -152,7 +152,7 @@ state set of flags indicating the state of the device. Current
flags are EISA_CONFIG_ENABLED and EISA_CONFIG_FORCED.
res set of four 256 bytes I/O regions allocated to this device
dma_mask DMA mask set from the parent device.
-dev generic device (see Documentation/driver-model/device.txt)
+dev generic device (see Documentation/driver-model/device.rst)
======== ============================================================
You can get the 'struct eisa_device' from 'struct device' using the
diff --git a/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.rst b/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.rst
index f9796b9d9db6..d5b05d3e54ba 100644
--- a/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.rst
+++ b/Documentation/hwmon/submitting-patches.rst
@@ -89,7 +89,7 @@ increase the chances of your change being accepted.
console. Excessive logging can seriously affect system performance.
* Use devres functions whenever possible to allocate resources. For rationale
- and supported functions, please see Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt.
+ and supported functions, please see Documentation/driver-model/devres.rst.
If a function is not supported by devres, consider using devm_add_action().
* If the driver has a detect function, make sure it is silent. Debug messages
diff --git a/drivers/base/platform.c b/drivers/base/platform.c
index 4d1729853d1a..713903290385 100644
--- a/drivers/base/platform.c
+++ b/drivers/base/platform.c
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
* Copyright (c) 2002-3 Patrick Mochel
* Copyright (c) 2002-3 Open Source Development Labs
*
- * Please see Documentation/driver-model/platform.txt for more
+ * Please see Documentation/driver-model/platform.rst for more
* information.
*/
diff --git a/drivers/gpio/gpio-cs5535.c b/drivers/gpio/gpio-cs5535.c
index 6314225dbed0..3611a0571667 100644
--- a/drivers/gpio/gpio-cs5535.c
+++ b/drivers/gpio/gpio-cs5535.c
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ MODULE_PARM_DESC(mask, "GPIO channel mask.");
/*
* FIXME: convert this singleton driver to use the state container
- * design pattern, see Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.txt
+ * design pattern, see Documentation/driver-model/design-patterns.rst
*/
static struct cs5535_gpio_chip {
struct gpio_chip chip;
diff --git a/drivers/net/ethernet/intel/ice/ice_main.c b/drivers/net/ethernet/intel/ice/ice_main.c
index 28ec0d57941d..41c90f2ddb31 100644
--- a/drivers/net/ethernet/intel/ice/ice_main.c
+++ b/drivers/net/ethernet/intel/ice/ice_main.c
@@ -2286,7 +2286,7 @@ ice_probe(struct pci_dev *pdev, const struct pci_device_id __always_unused *ent)
struct ice_hw *hw;
int err;
- /* this driver uses devres, see Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt */
+ /* this driver uses devres, see Documentation/driver-model/devres.rst */
err = pcim_enable_device(pdev);
if (err)
return err;
diff --git a/scripts/coccinelle/free/devm_free.cocci b/scripts/coccinelle/free/devm_free.cocci
index b2a2cf8bf81f..e32236a979a8 100644
--- a/scripts/coccinelle/free/devm_free.cocci
+++ b/scripts/coccinelle/free/devm_free.cocci
@@ -2,7 +2,7 @@
/// functions. Values allocated using the devm_functions are freed when
/// the device is detached, and thus the use of the standard freeing
/// function would cause a double free.
-/// See Documentation/driver-model/devres.txt for more information.
+/// See Documentation/driver-model/devres.rst for more information.
///
/// A difficulty of detecting this problem is that the standard freeing
/// function might be called from a different function than the one
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* Re: [PATCH v2 09/29] docs: driver-model: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [Intel-wired-lan] " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-21 13:47 ` Greg Kroah-Hartman
-1 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Greg Kroah-Hartman @ 2019-06-21 13:47 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Mauro Carvalho Chehab
Cc: Linux Doc Mailing List, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Linus Walleij, Bartosz Golaszewski,
Jean Delvare, Guenter Roeck, Rafael J. Wysocki, Jeff Kirsher,
David S. Miller, Julia Lawall, Gilles Muller, Nicolas Palix,
Michal Marek, linux-gpio, linux-hwmon, intel-wired-lan, netdev,
cocci
On Tue, Jun 18, 2019 at 05:53:27PM -0300, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> Convert the various documents at the driver-model, preparing
> them to be part of the driver-api book.
>
> The conversion is actually:
> - add blank lines and identation in order to identify paragraphs;
> - fix tables markups;
> - add some lists markups;
> - mark literal blocks;
> - adjust title markups.
>
> At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
> the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
> Acked-by: Jeff Kirsher <jeffrey.t.kirsher@intel.com> # ice
Now applied, thanks.
greg k-h
^ permalink raw reply [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* [Intel-wired-lan] [PATCH v2 09/29] docs: driver-model: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
@ 2019-06-21 13:47 ` Greg Kroah-Hartman
0 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Greg Kroah-Hartman @ 2019-06-21 13:47 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: intel-wired-lan
On Tue, Jun 18, 2019 at 05:53:27PM -0300, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> Convert the various documents at the driver-model, preparing
> them to be part of the driver-api book.
>
> The conversion is actually:
> - add blank lines and identation in order to identify paragraphs;
> - fix tables markups;
> - add some lists markups;
> - mark literal blocks;
> - adjust title markups.
>
> At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
> the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
> Acked-by: Jeff Kirsher <jeffrey.t.kirsher@intel.com> # ice
Now applied, thanks.
greg k-h
^ permalink raw reply [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* [PATCH v2 10/29] docs: arm: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (8 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [Intel-wired-lan] " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-21 12:59 ` Corentin Labbe
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 11/29] docs: memory-devices: convert ti-emif.txt to ReST Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (18 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 1 reply; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Kukjin Kim, Krzysztof Kozlowski,
Maxime Coquelin, Alexandre Torgue, Maxime Ripard, Chen-Yu Tsai,
Rob Herring, Mark Rutland, Harry Wei, Alex Shi, Russell King,
Linus Walleij, Imre Kaloz, Krzysztof Halasa, Catalin Marinas,
Will Deacon, Kevin Cernekee, Florian Fainelli, Ralf Baechle,
Paul Burton, James Hogan, Corentin Labbe, Herbert Xu,
David S. Miller, Dmitry Torokhov, Greg Kroah-Hartman, Jiri Slaby,
Alexei Starovoitov, Daniel Borkmann, Jakub Kicinski,
Jesper Dangaard Brouer, John Fastabend, linux-omap, linux-fbdev,
linux-arm-kernel, linux-samsung-soc, linux-stm32, devicetree,
bcm-kernel-feedback-list, linux-mips, linux-crypto, linux-input,
linux-serial, netdev, xdp-newbies, bpf
Converts ARM the text files to ReST, preparing them to be an
architecture book.
The conversion is actually:
- add blank lines and identation in order to identify paragraphs;
- fix tables markups;
- add some lists markups;
- mark literal blocks;
- adjust title markups.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/arm/Marvell/README | 395 --------------
Documentation/arm/Netwinder | 78 ---
Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird | 21 -
Documentation/arm/SA1100/empeg | 2 -
Documentation/arm/SA1100/serial_UART | 47 --
Documentation/arm/{README => arm.rst} | 50 +-
Documentation/arm/{Booting => booting.rst} | 71 ++-
...ance.txt => cluster-pm-race-avoidance.rst} | 177 ++++---
.../arm/{firmware.txt => firmware.rst} | 14 +-
Documentation/arm/index.rst | 80 +++
.../arm/{Interrupts => interrupts.rst} | 86 +--
Documentation/arm/{IXP4xx => ixp4xx.rst} | 61 +--
...nel_mode_neon.txt => kernel_mode_neon.rst} | 3 +
...er_helpers.txt => kernel_user_helpers.rst} | 79 +--
.../keystone/{knav-qmss.txt => knav-qmss.rst} | 6 +-
.../keystone/{Overview.txt => overview.rst} | 47 +-
Documentation/arm/marvel.rst | 488 ++++++++++++++++++
.../arm/{mem_alignment => mem_alignment.rst} | 11 +-
Documentation/arm/{memory.txt => memory.rst} | 9 +-
.../arm/{Microchip/README => microchip.rst} | 63 ++-
Documentation/arm/netwinder.rst | 85 +++
Documentation/arm/nwfpe/index.rst | 11 +
.../nwfpe/{README.FPE => netwinder-fpe.rst} | 24 +-
Documentation/arm/nwfpe/{NOTES => notes.rst} | 3 +
Documentation/arm/nwfpe/{README => nwfpe.rst} | 10 +-
Documentation/arm/nwfpe/{TODO => todo.rst} | 47 +-
Documentation/arm/{OMAP/DSS => omap/dss.rst} | 112 ++--
Documentation/arm/omap/index.rst | 10 +
.../arm/{OMAP/README => omap/omap.rst} | 7 +
.../arm/{OMAP/omap_pm => omap/omap_pm.rst} | 55 +-
Documentation/arm/{Porting => porting.rst} | 14 +-
Documentation/arm/pxa/{mfp.txt => mfp.rst} | 106 ++--
.../{SA1100/ADSBitsy => sa1100/adsbitsy.rst} | 14 +-
.../{SA1100/Assabet => sa1100/assabet.rst} | 185 +++----
.../arm/{SA1100/Brutus => sa1100/brutus.rst} | 45 +-
.../arm/{SA1100/CERF => sa1100/cerf.rst} | 10 +-
Documentation/arm/sa1100/freebird.rst | 25 +
.../graphicsclient.rst} | 46 +-
.../graphicsmaster.rst} | 13 +-
.../HUW_WEBPANEL => sa1100/huw_webpanel.rst} | 8 +-
Documentation/arm/sa1100/index.rst | 23 +
.../arm/{SA1100/Itsy => sa1100/itsy.rst} | 14 +-
.../arm/{SA1100/LART => sa1100/lart.rst} | 3 +-
.../nanoEngine => sa1100/nanoengine.rst} | 6 +-
.../{SA1100/Pangolin => sa1100/pangolin.rst} | 10 +-
.../arm/{SA1100/PLEB => sa1100/pleb.rst} | 6 +-
Documentation/arm/sa1100/serial_uart.rst | 51 ++
.../arm/{SA1100/Tifon => sa1100/tifon.rst} | 4 +-
.../arm/{SA1100/Yopy => sa1100/yopy.rst} | 5 +-
.../cpufreq.rst} | 5 +-
.../eb2410itx.rst} | 5 +-
.../GPIO.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/gpio.rst} | 23 +-
.../H1940.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/h1940.rst} | 5 +-
Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/index.rst | 18 +
.../NAND.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/nand.rst} | 6 +-
.../overview.rst} | 21 +-
.../s3c2412.rst} | 5 +-
.../s3c2413.rst} | 7 +-
.../smdk2440.rst} | 5 +-
.../suspend.rst} | 20 +-
.../usb-host.rst} | 16 +-
.../bootloader-interface.rst} | 27 +-
.../clksrc-change-registers.awk | 0
.../{Samsung/GPIO.txt => samsung/gpio.rst} | 7 +-
Documentation/arm/samsung/index.rst | 10 +
.../Overview.txt => samsung/overview.rst} | 15 +-
Documentation/arm/{Setup => setup.rst} | 49 +-
.../arm/{SH-Mobile => sh-mobile}/.gitignore | 0
.../overview.txt => spear/overview.rst} | 20 +-
.../arm/sti/{overview.txt => overview.rst} | 21 +-
...h407-overview.txt => stih407-overview.rst} | 9 +-
...h415-overview.txt => stih415-overview.rst} | 8 +-
...h416-overview.txt => stih416-overview.rst} | 5 +-
...h418-overview.txt => stih418-overview.rst} | 9 +-
Documentation/arm/stm32/overview.rst | 2 -
.../arm/stm32/stm32f429-overview.rst | 7 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32f746-overview.rst | 7 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32f769-overview.rst | 7 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32h743-overview.rst | 7 +-
.../arm/stm32/stm32mp157-overview.rst | 3 +-
Documentation/arm/{sunxi/README => sunxi.rst} | 98 +++-
.../arm/sunxi/{clocks.txt => clocks.rst} | 7 +-
.../arm/{swp_emulation => swp_emulation.rst} | 24 +-
Documentation/arm/{tcm.txt => tcm.rst} | 54 +-
Documentation/arm/{uefi.txt => uefi.rst} | 39 +-
.../release-notes.rst} | 4 +-
Documentation/arm/{vlocks.txt => vlocks.rst} | 9 +-
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xen.txt | 2 +-
.../devicetree/booting-without-of.txt | 4 +-
Documentation/index.rst | 1 +
Documentation/translations/zh_CN/arm/Booting | 4 +-
.../zh_CN/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt | 4 +-
MAINTAINERS | 4 +-
arch/arm/Kconfig | 2 +-
arch/arm/common/mcpm_entry.c | 2 +-
arch/arm/common/mcpm_head.S | 2 +-
arch/arm/common/vlock.S | 2 +-
arch/arm/include/asm/setup.h | 2 +-
arch/arm/include/uapi/asm/setup.h | 2 +-
arch/arm/kernel/entry-armv.S | 2 +-
arch/arm/mach-exynos/common.h | 2 +-
arch/arm/mach-ixp4xx/Kconfig | 14 +-
arch/arm/mach-s3c24xx/pm.c | 2 +-
arch/arm/mm/Kconfig | 4 +-
arch/arm/plat-samsung/Kconfig | 6 +-
arch/arm/tools/mach-types | 2 +-
arch/arm64/Kconfig | 2 +-
arch/arm64/kernel/kuser32.S | 2 +-
arch/mips/bmips/setup.c | 2 +-
drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-cipher.c | 2 +-
drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-core.c | 2 +-
drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-hash.c | 2 +-
drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss.h | 2 +-
drivers/input/touchscreen/sun4i-ts.c | 2 +-
drivers/tty/serial/Kconfig | 2 +-
115 files changed, 1985 insertions(+), 1420 deletions(-)
delete mode 100644 Documentation/arm/Marvell/README
delete mode 100644 Documentation/arm/Netwinder
delete mode 100644 Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird
delete mode 100644 Documentation/arm/SA1100/empeg
delete mode 100644 Documentation/arm/SA1100/serial_UART
rename Documentation/arm/{README => arm.rst} (88%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Booting => booting.rst} (89%)
rename Documentation/arm/{cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt => cluster-pm-race-avoidance.rst} (84%)
rename Documentation/arm/{firmware.txt => firmware.rst} (86%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/arm/index.rst
rename Documentation/arm/{Interrupts => interrupts.rst} (81%)
rename Documentation/arm/{IXP4xx => ixp4xx.rst} (84%)
rename Documentation/arm/{kernel_mode_neon.txt => kernel_mode_neon.rst} (99%)
rename Documentation/arm/{kernel_user_helpers.txt => kernel_user_helpers.rst} (78%)
rename Documentation/arm/keystone/{knav-qmss.txt => knav-qmss.rst} (92%)
rename Documentation/arm/keystone/{Overview.txt => overview.rst} (59%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/arm/marvel.rst
rename Documentation/arm/{mem_alignment => mem_alignment.rst} (89%)
rename Documentation/arm/{memory.txt => memory.rst} (90%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Microchip/README => microchip.rst} (92%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/arm/netwinder.rst
create mode 100644 Documentation/arm/nwfpe/index.rst
rename Documentation/arm/nwfpe/{README.FPE => netwinder-fpe.rst} (94%)
rename Documentation/arm/nwfpe/{NOTES => notes.rst} (99%)
rename Documentation/arm/nwfpe/{README => nwfpe.rst} (98%)
rename Documentation/arm/nwfpe/{TODO => todo.rst} (75%)
rename Documentation/arm/{OMAP/DSS => omap/dss.rst} (86%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/arm/omap/index.rst
rename Documentation/arm/{OMAP/README => omap/omap.rst} (62%)
rename Documentation/arm/{OMAP/omap_pm => omap/omap_pm.rst} (83%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Porting => porting.rst} (94%)
rename Documentation/arm/pxa/{mfp.txt => mfp.rst} (83%)
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/ADSBitsy => sa1100/adsbitsy.rst} (90%)
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/Assabet => sa1100/assabet.rst} (62%)
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/Brutus => sa1100/brutus.rst} (75%)
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/CERF => sa1100/cerf.rst} (91%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/arm/sa1100/freebird.rst
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/GraphicsClient => sa1100/graphicsclient.rst} (87%)
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/GraphicsMaster => sa1100/graphicsmaster.rst} (92%)
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/HUW_WEBPANEL => sa1100/huw_webpanel.rst} (78%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/arm/sa1100/index.rst
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/Itsy => sa1100/itsy.rst} (88%)
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/LART => sa1100/lart.rst} (90%)
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/nanoEngine => sa1100/nanoengine.rst} (74%)
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/Pangolin => sa1100/pangolin.rst} (81%)
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/PLEB => sa1100/pleb.rst} (95%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/arm/sa1100/serial_uart.rst
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/Tifon => sa1100/tifon.rst} (88%)
rename Documentation/arm/{SA1100/Yopy => sa1100/yopy.rst} (74%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/cpufreq.rst} (96%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung-S3C24XX/EB2410ITX.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/eb2410itx.rst} (92%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/gpio.rst} (89%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/h1940.rst} (94%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/index.rst
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/nand.rst} (92%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/overview.rst} (94%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2412.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/s3c2412.rst} (96%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2413.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/s3c2413.rst} (77%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/smdk2440.rst} (94%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/suspend.rst} (94%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt => samsung-s3c24xx/usb-host.rst} (94%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung/Bootloader-interface.txt => samsung/bootloader-interface.rst} (72%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung => samsung}/clksrc-change-registers.awk (100%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung/GPIO.txt => samsung/gpio.rst} (87%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/arm/samsung/index.rst
rename Documentation/arm/{Samsung/Overview.txt => samsung/overview.rst} (86%)
rename Documentation/arm/{Setup => setup.rst} (87%)
rename Documentation/arm/{SH-Mobile => sh-mobile}/.gitignore (100%)
rename Documentation/arm/{SPEAr/overview.txt => spear/overview.rst} (91%)
rename Documentation/arm/sti/{overview.txt => overview.rst} (82%)
rename Documentation/arm/sti/{stih407-overview.txt => stih407-overview.rst} (82%)
rename Documentation/arm/sti/{stih415-overview.txt => stih415-overview.rst} (79%)
rename Documentation/arm/sti/{stih416-overview.txt => stih416-overview.rst} (83%)
rename Documentation/arm/sti/{stih418-overview.txt => stih418-overview.rst} (83%)
rename Documentation/arm/{sunxi/README => sunxi.rst} (83%)
rename Documentation/arm/sunxi/{clocks.txt => clocks.rst} (92%)
rename Documentation/arm/{swp_emulation => swp_emulation.rst} (63%)
rename Documentation/arm/{tcm.txt => tcm.rst} (86%)
rename Documentation/arm/{uefi.txt => uefi.rst} (63%)
rename Documentation/arm/{VFP/release-notes.txt => vfp/release-notes.rst} (92%)
rename Documentation/arm/{vlocks.txt => vlocks.rst} (98%)
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README b/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README
deleted file mode 100644
index 56ada27c53be..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/Marvell/README
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,395 +0,0 @@
-ARM Marvell SoCs
-================
-
-This document lists all the ARM Marvell SoCs that are currently
-supported in mainline by the Linux kernel. As the Marvell families of
-SoCs are large and complex, it is hard to understand where the support
-for a particular SoC is available in the Linux kernel. This document
-tries to help in understanding where those SoCs are supported, and to
-match them with their corresponding public datasheet, when available.
-
-Orion family
-------------
-
- Flavors:
- 88F5082
- 88F5181
- 88F5181L
- 88F5182
- Datasheet : http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-datasheet.pdf
- Programmer's User Guide : http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-opensource-manual.pdf
- User Manual : http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-usermanual.pdf
- 88F5281
- Datasheet : http://www.ocmodshop.com/images/reviews/networking/qnap_ts409u/marvel_88f5281_data_sheet.pdf
- 88F6183
- Core: Feroceon 88fr331 (88f51xx) or 88fr531-vd (88f52xx) ARMv5 compatible
- Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-orion5x
- Linux kernel plat directory: arch/arm/plat-orion
-
-Kirkwood family
----------------
-
- Flavors:
- 88F6282 a.k.a Armada 300
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/armada_310.pdf
- 88F6283 a.k.a Armada 310
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/armada_310.pdf
- 88F6190
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6190-003_WEB.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F619x_OpenSource.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
- 88F6192
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6192-003_ver1.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F619x_OpenSource.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
- 88F6182
- 88F6180
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6180-003_ver1.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F6180_OpenSource.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
- 88F6281
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6281-004_ver1.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F6281_OpenSource.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
- Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/
- Core: Feroceon 88fr131 ARMv5 compatible
- Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-mvebu
- Linux kernel plat directory: none
-
-Discovery family
-----------------
-
- Flavors:
- MV78100
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/MV78100-003_WEB.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/HW_MV78100_OpenSource.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/FS_MV76100_78100_78200_OpenSource.pdf
- MV78200
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/MV78200-002_WEB.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/HW_MV78200_OpenSource.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/FS_MV76100_78100_78200_OpenSource.pdf
- MV76100
- Not supported by the Linux kernel.
-
- Core: Feroceon 88fr571-vd ARMv5 compatible
-
- Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-mv78xx0
- Linux kernel plat directory: arch/arm/plat-orion
-
-EBU Armada family
------------------
-
- Armada 370 Flavors:
- 88F6710
- 88F6707
- 88F6W11
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/Marvell_ARMADA_370_SoC.pdf
- Hardware Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/ARMADA370-datasheet.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/ARMADA370-FunctionalSpec-datasheet.pdf
- Core: Sheeva ARMv7 compatible PJ4B
-
- Armada 375 Flavors:
- 88F6720
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/ARMADA_375_SoC-01_product_brief.pdf
- Core: ARM Cortex-A9
-
- Armada 38x Flavors:
- 88F6810 Armada 380
- 88F6820 Armada 385
- 88F6828 Armada 388
- Product infos: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-38x/
- Functional Spec: https://marvellcorp.wufoo.com/forms/marvell-armada-38x-functional-specifications/
- Core: ARM Cortex-A9
-
- Armada 39x Flavors:
- 88F6920 Armada 390
- 88F6928 Armada 398
- Product infos: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-39x/
- Core: ARM Cortex-A9
-
- Armada XP Flavors:
- MV78230
- MV78260
- MV78460
- NOTE: not to be confused with the non-SMP 78xx0 SoCs
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/Marvell-ArmadaXP-SoC-product%20brief.pdf
- Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/ARMADA-XP-Functional-SpecDatasheet.pdf
- Hardware Specs:
- http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/HW_MV78230_OS.PDF
- http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/HW_MV78260_OS.PDF
- http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/HW_MV78460_OS.PDF
- Core: Sheeva ARMv7 compatible Dual-core or Quad-core PJ4B-MP
-
- Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-mvebu
- Linux kernel plat directory: none
-
-EBU Armada family ARMv8
------------------------
-
- Armada 3710/3720 Flavors:
- 88F3710
- 88F3720
- Core: ARM Cortex A53 (ARMv8)
-
- Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-3700/
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/PB-88F3700-FNL.pdf
- Device tree files: arch/arm64/boot/dts/marvell/armada-37*
-
- Armada 7K Flavors:
- 88F7020 (AP806 Dual + one CP110)
- 88F7040 (AP806 Quad + one CP110)
- Core: ARM Cortex A72
-
- Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-70xx/
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada7020PB-Jan2016.pdf
- http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada7040PB-Jan2016.pdf
- Device tree files: arch/arm64/boot/dts/marvell/armada-70*
-
- Armada 8K Flavors:
- 88F8020 (AP806 Dual + two CP110)
- 88F8040 (AP806 Quad + two CP110)
- Core: ARM Cortex A72
-
- Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-80xx/
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada8020PB-Jan2016.pdf
- http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada8040PB-Jan2016.pdf
- Device tree files: arch/arm64/boot/dts/marvell/armada-80*
-
-Avanta family
--------------
-
- Flavors:
- 88F6510
- 88F6530P
- 88F6550
- 88F6560
- Homepage : http://www.marvell.com/broadband/
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/broadband/assets/Marvell_Avanta_88F6510_305_060-001_product_brief.pdf
- No public datasheet available.
-
- Core: ARMv5 compatible
-
- Linux kernel mach directory: no code in mainline yet, planned for the future
- Linux kernel plat directory: no code in mainline yet, planned for the future
-
-Storage family
---------------
-
- Armada SP:
- 88RC1580
- Product infos: http://www.marvell.com/storage/armada-sp/
- Core: Sheeva ARMv7 comatible Quad-core PJ4C
- (not supported in upstream Linux kernel)
-
-Dove family (application processor)
------------------------------------
-
- Flavors:
- 88AP510 a.k.a Armada 510
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Marvell_Armada510_SoC.pdf
- Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Armada-510-Hardware-Spec.pdf
- Functional Spec : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Armada-510-Functional-Spec.pdf
- Homepage: http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/
- Core: ARMv7 compatible
-
- Directory: arch/arm/mach-mvebu (DT enabled platforms)
- arch/arm/mach-dove (non-DT enabled platforms)
-
-PXA 2xx/3xx/93x/95x family
---------------------------
-
- Flavors:
- PXA21x, PXA25x, PXA26x
- Application processor only
- Core: ARMv5 XScale1 core
- PXA270, PXA271, PXA272
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_pb.pdf
- Design guide : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_design_guide.pdf
- Developers manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_dev_man.pdf
- Specification : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_emts.pdf
- Specification update : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_spec_update.pdf
- Application processor only
- Core: ARMv5 XScale2 core
- PXA300, PXA310, PXA320
- PXA 300 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA300_PB_R4.pdf
- PXA 310 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA310_PB_R4.pdf
- PXA 320 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA320_PB_R4.pdf
- Design guide : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Design_Guide.pdf
- Developers manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Developers_Manual.zip
- Specifications : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_EMTS.pdf
- Specification Update : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Spec_Update.zip
- Reference Manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_TavorP_BootROM_Ref_Manual.pdf
- Application processor only
- Core: ARMv5 XScale3 core
- PXA930, PXA935
- Application processor with Communication processor
- Core: ARMv5 XScale3 core
- PXA955
- Application processor with Communication processor
- Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 core
-
- Comments:
-
- * This line of SoCs originates from the XScale family developed by
- Intel and acquired by Marvell in ~2006. The PXA21x, PXA25x,
- PXA26x, PXA27x, PXA3xx and PXA93x were developed by Intel, while
- the later PXA95x were developed by Marvell.
-
- * Due to their XScale origin, these SoCs have virtually nothing in
- common with the other (Kirkwood, Dove, etc.) families of Marvell
- SoCs, except with the MMP/MMP2 family of SoCs.
-
- Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-pxa
- Linux kernel plat directory: arch/arm/plat-pxa
-
-MMP/MMP2/MMP3 family (communication processor)
------------------------------------------
-
- Flavors:
- PXA168, a.k.a Armada 168
- Homepage : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/armada-168.jsp
- Product brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/pxa_168_pb.pdf
- Hardware manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_datasheet.pdf
- Software manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_software_manual.pdf
- Specification update : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/ARMADA16x_Spec_update.pdf
- Boot ROM manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_ref_manual.pdf
- App node package : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_app_note_package.pdf
- Application processor only
- Core: ARMv5 compatible Marvell PJ1 88sv331 (Mohawk)
- PXA910/PXA920
- Homepage : http://www.marvell.com/communication-processors/pxa910/
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/communication-processors/pxa910/assets/Marvell_PXA910_Platform-001_PB_final.pdf
- Application processor with Communication processor
- Core: ARMv5 compatible Marvell PJ1 88sv331 (Mohawk)
- PXA688, a.k.a. MMP2, a.k.a Armada 610
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-600/assets/armada610_pb.pdf
- Application processor only
- Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 88sv581x core
- PXA2128, a.k.a. MMP3 (OLPC XO4, Linux support not upstream)
- Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada/pxa2128/assets/Marvell-ARMADA-PXA2128-SoC-PB.pdf
- Application processor only
- Core: Dual-core ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4C core
- PXA960/PXA968/PXA978 (Linux support not upstream)
- Application processor with Communication Processor
- Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 core
- PXA986/PXA988 (Linux support not upstream)
- Application processor with Communication Processor
- Core: Dual-core ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4B-MP core
- PXA1088/PXA1920 (Linux support not upstream)
- Application processor with Communication Processor
- Core: quad-core ARMv7 Cortex-A7
- PXA1908/PXA1928/PXA1936
- Application processor with Communication Processor
- Core: multi-core ARMv8 Cortex-A53
-
- Comments:
-
- * This line of SoCs originates from the XScale family developed by
- Intel and acquired by Marvell in ~2006. All the processors of
- this MMP/MMP2 family were developed by Marvell.
-
- * Due to their XScale origin, these SoCs have virtually nothing in
- common with the other (Kirkwood, Dove, etc.) families of Marvell
- SoCs, except with the PXA family of SoCs listed above.
-
- Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-mmp
- Linux kernel plat directory: arch/arm/plat-pxa
-
-Berlin family (Multimedia Solutions)
--------------------------------------
-
- Flavors:
- 88DE3010, Armada 1000 (no Linux support)
- Core: Marvell PJ1 (ARMv5TE), Dual-core
- Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com.cn/digital-entertainment/assets/armada_1000_pb.pdf
- 88DE3005, Armada 1500 Mini
- Design name: BG2CD
- Core: ARM Cortex-A9, PL310 L2CC
- 88DE3006, Armada 1500 Mini Plus
- Design name: BG2CDP
- Core: Dual Core ARM Cortex-A7
- 88DE3100, Armada 1500
- Design name: BG2
- Core: Marvell PJ4B-MP (ARMv7), Tauros3 L2CC
- 88DE3114, Armada 1500 Pro
- Design name: BG2Q
- Core: Quad Core ARM Cortex-A9, PL310 L2CC
- 88DE3214, Armada 1500 Pro 4K
- Design name: BG3
- Core: ARM Cortex-A15, CA15 integrated L2CC
- 88DE3218, ARMADA 1500 Ultra
- Core: ARM Cortex-A53
-
- Homepage: https://www.synaptics.com/products/multimedia-solutions
- Directory: arch/arm/mach-berlin
-
- Comments:
-
- * This line of SoCs is based on Marvell Sheeva or ARM Cortex CPUs
- with Synopsys DesignWare (IRQ, GPIO, Timers, ...) and PXA IP (SDHCI, USB, ETH, ...).
-
- * The Berlin family was acquired by Synaptics from Marvell in 2017.
-
-CPU Cores
----------
-
-The XScale cores were designed by Intel, and shipped by Marvell in the older
-PXA processors. Feroceon is a Marvell designed core that developed in-house,
-and that evolved into Sheeva. The XScale and Feroceon cores were phased out
-over time and replaced with Sheeva cores in later products, which subsequently
-got replaced with licensed ARM Cortex-A cores.
-
- XScale 1
- CPUID 0x69052xxx
- ARMv5, iWMMXt
- XScale 2
- CPUID 0x69054xxx
- ARMv5, iWMMXt
- XScale 3
- CPUID 0x69056xxx or 0x69056xxx
- ARMv5, iWMMXt
- Feroceon-1850 88fr331 "Mohawk"
- CPUID 0x5615331x or 0x41xx926x
- ARMv5TE, single issue
- Feroceon-2850 88fr531-vd "Jolteon"
- CPUID 0x5605531x or 0x41xx926x
- ARMv5TE, VFP, dual-issue
- Feroceon 88fr571-vd "Jolteon"
- CPUID 0x5615571x
- ARMv5TE, VFP, dual-issue
- Feroceon 88fr131 "Mohawk-D"
- CPUID 0x5625131x
- ARMv5TE, single-issue in-order
- Sheeva PJ1 88sv331 "Mohawk"
- CPUID 0x561584xx
- ARMv5, single-issue iWMMXt v2
- Sheeva PJ4 88sv581x "Flareon"
- CPUID 0x560f581x
- ARMv7, idivt, optional iWMMXt v2
- Sheeva PJ4B 88sv581x
- CPUID 0x561f581x
- ARMv7, idivt, optional iWMMXt v2
- Sheeva PJ4B-MP / PJ4C
- CPUID 0x562f584x
- ARMv7, idivt/idiva, LPAE, optional iWMMXt v2 and/or NEON
-
-Long-term plans
----------------
-
- * Unify the mach-dove/, mach-mv78xx0/, mach-orion5x/ into the
- mach-mvebu/ to support all SoCs from the Marvell EBU (Engineering
- Business Unit) in a single mach-<foo> directory. The plat-orion/
- would therefore disappear.
-
- * Unify the mach-mmp/ and mach-pxa/ into the same mach-pxa
- directory. The plat-pxa/ would therefore disappear.
-
-Credits
--------
-
- Maen Suleiman <maen@marvell.com>
- Lior Amsalem <alior@marvell.com>
- Thomas Petazzoni <thomas.petazzoni@free-electrons.com>
- Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch>
- Nicolas Pitre <nico@fluxnic.net>
- Eric Miao <eric.y.miao@gmail.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Netwinder b/Documentation/arm/Netwinder
deleted file mode 100644
index f1b457fbd3de..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/Netwinder
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,78 +0,0 @@
-NetWinder specific documentation
-================================
-
-The NetWinder is a small low-power computer, primarily designed
-to run Linux. It is based around the StrongARM RISC processor,
-DC21285 PCI bridge, with PC-type hardware glued around it.
-
-Port usage
-==========
-
-Min - Max Description
----------------------------
-0x0000 - 0x000f DMA1
-0x0020 - 0x0021 PIC1
-0x0060 - 0x006f Keyboard
-0x0070 - 0x007f RTC
-0x0080 - 0x0087 DMA1
-0x0088 - 0x008f DMA2
-0x00a0 - 0x00a3 PIC2
-0x00c0 - 0x00df DMA2
-0x0180 - 0x0187 IRDA
-0x01f0 - 0x01f6 ide0
-0x0201 Game port
-0x0203 RWA010 configuration read
-0x0220 - ? SoundBlaster
-0x0250 - ? WaveArtist
-0x0279 RWA010 configuration index
-0x02f8 - 0x02ff Serial ttyS1
-0x0300 - 0x031f Ether10
-0x0338 GPIO1
-0x033a GPIO2
-0x0370 - 0x0371 W83977F configuration registers
-0x0388 - ? AdLib
-0x03c0 - 0x03df VGA
-0x03f6 ide0
-0x03f8 - 0x03ff Serial ttyS0
-0x0400 - 0x0408 DC21143
-0x0480 - 0x0487 DMA1
-0x0488 - 0x048f DMA2
-0x0a79 RWA010 configuration write
-0xe800 - 0xe80f ide0/ide1 BM DMA
-
-
-Interrupt usage
-===============
-
-IRQ type Description
----------------------------
- 0 ISA 100Hz timer
- 1 ISA Keyboard
- 2 ISA cascade
- 3 ISA Serial ttyS1
- 4 ISA Serial ttyS0
- 5 ISA PS/2 mouse
- 6 ISA IRDA
- 7 ISA Printer
- 8 ISA RTC alarm
- 9 ISA
-10 ISA GP10 (Orange reset button)
-11 ISA
-12 ISA WaveArtist
-13 ISA
-14 ISA hda1
-15 ISA
-
-DMA usage
-=========
-
-DMA type Description
----------------------------
- 0 ISA IRDA
- 1 ISA
- 2 ISA cascade
- 3 ISA WaveArtist
- 4 ISA
- 5 ISA
- 6 ISA
- 7 ISA WaveArtist
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird
deleted file mode 100644
index ab9193663b2b..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/FreeBird
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,21 +0,0 @@
-Freebird-1.1 is produced by Legend(C), Inc.
-http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.legend.com.cn
-and software/linux maintained by Coventive(C), Inc.
-(http://www.coventive.com)
-
-Based on the Nicolas's strongarm kernel tree.
-
-===============================================================
-Maintainer:
-
-Chester Kuo <chester@coventive.com>
- <chester@linux.org.tw>
-
-Author :
-Tim wu <timwu@coventive.com>
-CIH <cih@coventive.com>
-Eric Peng <ericpeng@coventive.com>
-Jeff Lee <jeff_lee@coventive.com>
-Allen Cheng
-Tony Liu <tonyliu@coventive.com>
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/empeg b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/empeg
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ece4849a42c..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/empeg
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2 +0,0 @@
-See ../empeg/README
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/serial_UART b/Documentation/arm/SA1100/serial_UART
deleted file mode 100644
index a63966f1d083..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/serial_UART
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,47 +0,0 @@
-The SA1100 serial port had its major/minor numbers officially assigned:
-
-> Date: Sun, 24 Sep 2000 21:40:27 -0700
-> From: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@transmeta.com>
-> To: Nicolas Pitre <nico@CAM.ORG>
-> Cc: Device List Maintainer <device@lanana.org>
-> Subject: Re: device
->
-> Okay. Note that device numbers 204 and 205 are used for "low density
-> serial devices", so you will have a range of minors on those majors (the
-> tty device layer handles this just fine, so you don't have to worry about
-> doing anything special.)
->
-> So your assignments are:
->
-> 204 char Low-density serial ports
-> 5 = /dev/ttySA0 SA1100 builtin serial port 0
-> 6 = /dev/ttySA1 SA1100 builtin serial port 1
-> 7 = /dev/ttySA2 SA1100 builtin serial port 2
->
-> 205 char Low-density serial ports (alternate device)
-> 5 = /dev/cusa0 Callout device for ttySA0
-> 6 = /dev/cusa1 Callout device for ttySA1
-> 7 = /dev/cusa2 Callout device for ttySA2
->
-
-You must create those inodes in /dev on the root filesystem used
-by your SA1100-based device:
-
- mknod ttySA0 c 204 5
- mknod ttySA1 c 204 6
- mknod ttySA2 c 204 7
- mknod cusa0 c 205 5
- mknod cusa1 c 205 6
- mknod cusa2 c 205 7
-
-In addition to the creation of the appropriate device nodes above, you
-must ensure your user space applications make use of the correct device
-name. The classic example is the content of the /etc/inittab file where
-you might have a getty process started on ttyS0. In this case:
-
-- replace occurrences of ttyS0 with ttySA0, ttyS1 with ttySA1, etc.
-
-- don't forget to add 'ttySA0', 'console', or the appropriate tty name
- in /etc/securetty for root to be allowed to login as well.
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/README b/Documentation/arm/arm.rst
similarity index 88%
rename from Documentation/arm/README
rename to Documentation/arm/arm.rst
index 9d1e5b2c92e6..2edc509df92a 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/README
+++ b/Documentation/arm/arm.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- ARM Linux 2.6
- =============
+=======================
+ARM Linux 2.6 and upper
+=======================
Please check <ftp://ftp.arm.linux.org.uk/pub/armlinux> for
updates.
@@ -18,22 +19,28 @@ Compilation of kernel
line as detailed below.
If you wish to cross-compile, then alter the following lines in the top
- level make file:
+ level make file::
ARCH = <whatever>
- with
+
+ with::
+
ARCH = arm
- and
+ and::
CROSS_COMPILE=
- to
+
+ to::
+
CROSS_COMPILE=<your-path-to-your-compiler-without-gcc>
- eg.
+
+ eg.::
+
CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux-
- Do a 'make config', followed by 'make Image' to build the kernel
- (arch/arm/boot/Image). A compressed image can be built by doing a
+ Do a 'make config', followed by 'make Image' to build the kernel
+ (arch/arm/boot/Image). A compressed image can be built by doing a
'make zImage' instead of 'make Image'.
@@ -46,7 +53,7 @@ Bug reports etc
Bug reports should be sent to linux-arm-kernel@lists.arm.linux.org.uk,
or submitted through the web form at
- http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/
+ http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/
When sending bug reports, please ensure that they contain all relevant
information, eg. the kernel messages that were printed before/during
@@ -60,11 +67,13 @@ Include files
which are there to reduce the clutter in the top-level directory. These
directories, and their purpose is listed below:
- arch-* machine/platform specific header files
- hardware driver-internal ARM specific data structures/definitions
- mach descriptions of generic ARM to specific machine interfaces
- proc-* processor dependent header files (currently only two
+ ============= ==========================================================
+ `arch-*` machine/platform specific header files
+ `hardware` driver-internal ARM specific data structures/definitions
+ `mach` descriptions of generic ARM to specific machine interfaces
+ `proc-*` processor dependent header files (currently only two
categories)
+ ============= ==========================================================
Machine/Platform support
@@ -129,7 +138,7 @@ ST506 hard drives
HDC base to the source.
As of 31/3/96 it works with two drives (you should get the ADFS
- *configure harddrive set to 2). I've got an internal 20MB and a great
+ `*configure` harddrive set to 2). I've got an internal 20MB and a great
big external 5.25" FH 64MB drive (who could ever want more :-) ).
I've just got 240K/s off it (a dd with bs=128k); thats about half of what
@@ -149,13 +158,13 @@ ST506 hard drives
are welcome.
-CONFIG_MACH_ and CONFIG_ARCH_
------------------------------
+`CONFIG_MACH_` and `CONFIG_ARCH_`
+---------------------------------
A change was made in 2003 to the macro names for new machines.
- Historically, CONFIG_ARCH_ was used for the bonafide architecture,
+ Historically, `CONFIG_ARCH_` was used for the bonafide architecture,
e.g. SA1100, as well as implementations of the architecture,
e.g. Assabet. It was decided to change the implementation macros
- to read CONFIG_MACH_ for clarity. Moreover, a retroactive fixup has
+ to read `CONFIG_MACH_` for clarity. Moreover, a retroactive fixup has
not been made because it would complicate patching.
Previous registrations may be found online.
@@ -163,7 +172,7 @@ CONFIG_MACH_ and CONFIG_ARCH_
<http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/>
Kernel entry (head.S)
---------------------------
+---------------------
The initial entry into the kernel is via head.S, which uses machine
independent code. The machine is selected by the value of 'r1' on
entry, which must be kept unique.
@@ -201,4 +210,5 @@ Kernel entry (head.S)
platform is DT-only, you do not need a registered machine type.
---
+
Russell King (15/03/2004)
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Booting b/Documentation/arm/booting.rst
similarity index 89%
rename from Documentation/arm/Booting
rename to Documentation/arm/booting.rst
index f1f965ce93d6..4babb6c6ae1e 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Booting
+++ b/Documentation/arm/booting.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
- Booting ARM Linux
- =================
+=================
+Booting ARM Linux
+=================
Author: Russell King
+
Date : 18 May 2002
The following documentation is relevant to 2.4.18-rmk6 and beyond.
@@ -25,8 +27,10 @@ following:
1. Setup and initialise RAM
---------------------------
-Existing boot loaders: MANDATORY
-New boot loaders: MANDATORY
+Existing boot loaders:
+ MANDATORY
+New boot loaders:
+ MANDATORY
The boot loader is expected to find and initialise all RAM that the
kernel will use for volatile data storage in the system. It performs
@@ -39,8 +43,10 @@ sees fit.)
2. Initialise one serial port
-----------------------------
-Existing boot loaders: OPTIONAL, RECOMMENDED
-New boot loaders: OPTIONAL, RECOMMENDED
+Existing boot loaders:
+ OPTIONAL, RECOMMENDED
+New boot loaders:
+ OPTIONAL, RECOMMENDED
The boot loader should initialise and enable one serial port on the
target. This allows the kernel serial driver to automatically detect
@@ -57,8 +63,10 @@ serial format options as described in
3. Detect the machine type
--------------------------
-Existing boot loaders: OPTIONAL
-New boot loaders: MANDATORY except for DT-only platforms
+Existing boot loaders:
+ OPTIONAL
+New boot loaders:
+ MANDATORY except for DT-only platforms
The boot loader should detect the machine type its running on by some
method. Whether this is a hard coded value or some algorithm that
@@ -74,8 +82,10 @@ necessary, but assures that it will not match any existing types.
4. Setup boot data
------------------
-Existing boot loaders: OPTIONAL, HIGHLY RECOMMENDED
-New boot loaders: MANDATORY
+Existing boot loaders:
+ OPTIONAL, HIGHLY RECOMMENDED
+New boot loaders:
+ MANDATORY
The boot loader must provide either a tagged list or a dtb image for
passing configuration data to the kernel. The physical address of the
@@ -97,15 +107,15 @@ entirety; some tags behave as the former, others the latter.
The boot loader must pass at a minimum the size and location of
the system memory, and root filesystem location. Therefore, the
-minimum tagged list should look:
+minimum tagged list should look::
- +-----------+
-base -> | ATAG_CORE | |
- +-----------+ |
- | ATAG_MEM | | increasing address
- +-----------+ |
- | ATAG_NONE | |
- +-----------+ v
+ +-----------+
+ base -> | ATAG_CORE | |
+ +-----------+ |
+ | ATAG_MEM | | increasing address
+ +-----------+ |
+ | ATAG_NONE | |
+ +-----------+ v
The tagged list should be stored in system RAM.
@@ -134,8 +144,10 @@ A safe location is just above the 128MiB boundary from start of RAM.
5. Load initramfs.
------------------
-Existing boot loaders: OPTIONAL
-New boot loaders: OPTIONAL
+Existing boot loaders:
+ OPTIONAL
+New boot loaders:
+ OPTIONAL
If an initramfs is in use then, as with the dtb, it must be placed in
a region of memory where the kernel decompressor will not overwrite it
@@ -149,8 +161,10 @@ recommended above.
6. Calling the kernel image
---------------------------
-Existing boot loaders: MANDATORY
-New boot loaders: MANDATORY
+Existing boot loaders:
+ MANDATORY
+New boot loaders:
+ MANDATORY
There are two options for calling the kernel zImage. If the zImage
is stored in flash, and is linked correctly to be run from flash,
@@ -174,12 +188,14 @@ In any case, the following conditions must be met:
you many hours of debug.
- CPU register settings
- r0 = 0,
- r1 = machine type number discovered in (3) above.
- r2 = physical address of tagged list in system RAM, or
- physical address of device tree block (dtb) in system RAM
+
+ - r0 = 0,
+ - r1 = machine type number discovered in (3) above.
+ - r2 = physical address of tagged list in system RAM, or
+ physical address of device tree block (dtb) in system RAM
- CPU mode
+
All forms of interrupts must be disabled (IRQs and FIQs)
For CPUs which do not include the ARM virtualization extensions, the
@@ -195,8 +211,11 @@ In any case, the following conditions must be met:
entered in SVC mode.
- Caches, MMUs
+
The MMU must be off.
+
Instruction cache may be on or off.
+
Data cache must be off.
If the kernel is entered in HYP mode, the above requirements apply to
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt b/Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.rst
similarity index 84%
rename from Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.rst
index 750b6fc24af9..aa58603d3f28 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=========================================================
Cluster-wide Power-up/power-down race avoidance algorithm
=========================================================
@@ -46,10 +47,12 @@ Basic model
Each cluster and CPU is assigned a state, as follows:
- DOWN
- COMING_UP
- UP
- GOING_DOWN
+ - DOWN
+ - COMING_UP
+ - UP
+ - GOING_DOWN
+
+::
+---------> UP ----------+
| v
@@ -60,18 +63,22 @@ Each cluster and CPU is assigned a state, as follows:
+--------- DOWN <--------+
-DOWN: The CPU or cluster is not coherent, and is either powered off or
+DOWN:
+ The CPU or cluster is not coherent, and is either powered off or
suspended, or is ready to be powered off or suspended.
-COMING_UP: The CPU or cluster has committed to moving to the UP state.
+COMING_UP:
+ The CPU or cluster has committed to moving to the UP state.
It may be part way through the process of initialisation and
enabling coherency.
-UP: The CPU or cluster is active and coherent at the hardware
+UP:
+ The CPU or cluster is active and coherent at the hardware
level. A CPU in this state is not necessarily being used
actively by the kernel.
-GOING_DOWN: The CPU or cluster has committed to moving to the DOWN
+GOING_DOWN:
+ The CPU or cluster has committed to moving to the DOWN
state. It may be part way through the process of teardown and
coherency exit.
@@ -86,8 +93,8 @@ CPUs in the cluster simultaneously modifying the state. The cluster-
level states are described in the "Cluster state" section.
To help distinguish the CPU states from cluster states in this
-discussion, the state names are given a CPU_ prefix for the CPU states,
-and a CLUSTER_ or INBOUND_ prefix for the cluster states.
+discussion, the state names are given a `CPU_` prefix for the CPU states,
+and a `CLUSTER_` or `INBOUND_` prefix for the cluster states.
CPU state
@@ -101,10 +108,12 @@ This means that CPUs fit the basic model closely.
The algorithm defines the following states for each CPU in the system:
- CPU_DOWN
- CPU_COMING_UP
- CPU_UP
- CPU_GOING_DOWN
+ - CPU_DOWN
+ - CPU_COMING_UP
+ - CPU_UP
+ - CPU_GOING_DOWN
+
+::
cluster setup and
CPU setup complete policy decision
@@ -130,17 +139,17 @@ requirement for any external event to happen.
CPU_DOWN:
-
A CPU reaches the CPU_DOWN state when it is ready for
power-down. On reaching this state, the CPU will typically
power itself down or suspend itself, via a WFI instruction or a
firmware call.
- Next state: CPU_COMING_UP
- Conditions: none
+ Next state:
+ CPU_COMING_UP
+ Conditions:
+ none
Trigger events:
-
a) an explicit hardware power-up operation, resulting
from a policy decision on another CPU;
@@ -148,15 +157,17 @@ CPU_DOWN:
CPU_COMING_UP:
-
A CPU cannot start participating in hardware coherency until the
cluster is set up and coherent. If the cluster is not ready,
then the CPU will wait in the CPU_COMING_UP state until the
cluster has been set up.
- Next state: CPU_UP
- Conditions: The CPU's parent cluster must be in CLUSTER_UP.
- Trigger events: Transition of the parent cluster to CLUSTER_UP.
+ Next state:
+ CPU_UP
+ Conditions:
+ The CPU's parent cluster must be in CLUSTER_UP.
+ Trigger events:
+ Transition of the parent cluster to CLUSTER_UP.
Refer to the "Cluster state" section for a description of the
CLUSTER_UP state.
@@ -178,20 +189,25 @@ CPU_UP:
The CPU remains in this state until an explicit policy decision
is made to shut down or suspend the CPU.
- Next state: CPU_GOING_DOWN
- Conditions: none
- Trigger events: explicit policy decision
+ Next state:
+ CPU_GOING_DOWN
+ Conditions:
+ none
+ Trigger events:
+ explicit policy decision
CPU_GOING_DOWN:
-
While in this state, the CPU exits coherency, including any
operations required to achieve this (such as cleaning data
caches).
- Next state: CPU_DOWN
- Conditions: local CPU teardown complete
- Trigger events: (spontaneous)
+ Next state:
+ CPU_DOWN
+ Conditions:
+ local CPU teardown complete
+ Trigger events:
+ (spontaneous)
Cluster state
@@ -212,20 +228,20 @@ independently of the CPU which is tearing down the cluster. For this
reason, the cluster state is split into two parts:
"cluster" state: The global state of the cluster; or the state
- on the outbound side:
+ on the outbound side:
- CLUSTER_DOWN
- CLUSTER_UP
- CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN
+ - CLUSTER_DOWN
+ - CLUSTER_UP
+ - CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN
"inbound" state: The state of the cluster on the inbound side.
- INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP
- INBOUND_COMING_UP
+ - INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP
+ - INBOUND_COMING_UP
The different pairings of these states results in six possible
- states for the cluster as a whole:
+ states for the cluster as a whole::
CLUSTER_UP
+==========> INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP -------------+
@@ -284,11 +300,12 @@ reason, the cluster state is split into two parts:
CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP:
+ Next state:
+ CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP (inbound)
+ Conditions:
+ none
- Next state: CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP (inbound)
- Conditions: none
Trigger events:
-
a) an explicit hardware power-up operation, resulting
from a policy decision on another CPU;
@@ -306,9 +323,12 @@ CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP:
setup to enable other CPUs in the cluster to enter coherency
safely.
- Next state: CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP (inbound)
- Conditions: cluster-level setup and hardware coherency complete
- Trigger events: (spontaneous)
+ Next state:
+ CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP (inbound)
+ Conditions:
+ cluster-level setup and hardware coherency complete
+ Trigger events:
+ (spontaneous)
CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP:
@@ -321,9 +341,12 @@ CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP:
CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP. All other CPUs on the cluster
should consider treat these two states as equivalent.
- Next state: CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (inbound)
- Conditions: none
- Trigger events: (spontaneous)
+ Next state:
+ CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (inbound)
+ Conditions:
+ none
+ Trigger events:
+ (spontaneous)
CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP:
@@ -335,9 +358,12 @@ CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP:
The cluster will remain in this state until a policy decision is
made to power the cluster down.
- Next state: CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (outbound)
- Conditions: none
- Trigger events: policy decision to power down the cluster
+ Next state:
+ CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (outbound)
+ Conditions:
+ none
+ Trigger events:
+ policy decision to power down the cluster
CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP:
@@ -359,13 +385,16 @@ CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP:
Next states:
CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_NOT_COMING_UP (outbound)
- Conditions: cluster torn down and ready to power off
- Trigger events: (spontaneous)
+ Conditions:
+ cluster torn down and ready to power off
+ Trigger events:
+ (spontaneous)
CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP (inbound)
- Conditions: none
- Trigger events:
+ Conditions:
+ none
+ Trigger events:
a) an explicit hardware power-up operation,
resulting from a policy decision on another
CPU;
@@ -396,13 +425,19 @@ CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP:
Next states:
CLUSTER_UP/INBOUND_COMING_UP (outbound)
- Conditions: cluster-level setup and hardware
+ Conditions:
+ cluster-level setup and hardware
coherency complete
- Trigger events: (spontaneous)
+
+ Trigger events:
+ (spontaneous)
CLUSTER_DOWN/INBOUND_COMING_UP (outbound)
- Conditions: cluster torn down and ready to power off
- Trigger events: (spontaneous)
+ Conditions:
+ cluster torn down and ready to power off
+
+ Trigger events:
+ (spontaneous)
Last man and First man selection
@@ -452,30 +487,30 @@ Implementation:
arch/arm/common/mcpm_entry.c (everything else):
__mcpm_cpu_going_down() signals the transition of a CPU to the
- CPU_GOING_DOWN state.
+ CPU_GOING_DOWN state.
__mcpm_cpu_down() signals the transition of a CPU to the CPU_DOWN
- state.
+ state.
A CPU transitions to CPU_COMING_UP and then to CPU_UP via the
- low-level power-up code in mcpm_head.S. This could
- involve CPU-specific setup code, but in the current
- implementation it does not.
+ low-level power-up code in mcpm_head.S. This could
+ involve CPU-specific setup code, but in the current
+ implementation it does not.
__mcpm_outbound_enter_critical() and __mcpm_outbound_leave_critical()
- handle transitions from CLUSTER_UP to CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN
- and from there to CLUSTER_DOWN or back to CLUSTER_UP (in
- the case of an aborted cluster power-down).
+ handle transitions from CLUSTER_UP to CLUSTER_GOING_DOWN
+ and from there to CLUSTER_DOWN or back to CLUSTER_UP (in
+ the case of an aborted cluster power-down).
- These functions are more complex than the __mcpm_cpu_*()
- functions due to the extra inter-CPU coordination which
- is needed for safe transitions at the cluster level.
+ These functions are more complex than the __mcpm_cpu_*()
+ functions due to the extra inter-CPU coordination which
+ is needed for safe transitions at the cluster level.
A cluster transitions from CLUSTER_DOWN back to CLUSTER_UP via
- the low-level power-up code in mcpm_head.S. This
- typically involves platform-specific setup code,
- provided by the platform-specific power_up_setup
- function registered via mcpm_sync_init.
+ the low-level power-up code in mcpm_head.S. This
+ typically involves platform-specific setup code,
+ provided by the platform-specific power_up_setup
+ function registered via mcpm_sync_init.
Deep topologies:
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/firmware.txt b/Documentation/arm/firmware.rst
similarity index 86%
rename from Documentation/arm/firmware.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/firmware.rst
index 7f175dbb427e..efd844baec1d 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/firmware.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/firmware.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
-Interface for registering and calling firmware-specific operations for ARM.
-----
+==========================================================================
+Interface for registering and calling firmware-specific operations for ARM
+==========================================================================
+
Written by Tomasz Figa <t.figa@samsung.com>
Some boards are running with secure firmware running in TrustZone secure
@@ -9,7 +11,7 @@ operations and call them when needed.
Firmware operations can be specified by filling in a struct firmware_ops
with appropriate callbacks and then registering it with register_firmware_ops()
-function.
+function::
void register_firmware_ops(const struct firmware_ops *ops)
@@ -19,7 +21,7 @@ and its members can be found in arch/arm/include/asm/firmware.h header.
There is a default, empty set of operations provided, so there is no need to
set anything if platform does not require firmware operations.
-To call a firmware operation, a helper macro is provided
+To call a firmware operation, a helper macro is provided::
#define call_firmware_op(op, ...) \
((firmware_ops->op) ? firmware_ops->op(__VA_ARGS__) : (-ENOSYS))
@@ -28,7 +30,7 @@ the macro checks if the operation is provided and calls it or otherwise returns
-ENOSYS to signal that given operation is not available (for example, to allow
fallback to legacy operation).
-Example of registering firmware operations:
+Example of registering firmware operations::
/* board file */
@@ -56,7 +58,7 @@ Example of registering firmware operations:
register_firmware_ops(&platformX_firmware_ops);
}
-Example of using a firmware operation:
+Example of using a firmware operation::
/* some platform code, e.g. SMP initialization */
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/index.rst b/Documentation/arm/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bd316d1a1802
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+:orphan:
+
+================
+ARM Architecture
+================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ arm
+ booting
+ cluster-pm-race-avoidance
+ firmware
+ interrupts
+ kernel_mode_neon
+ kernel_user_helpers
+ memory
+ mem_alignment
+ tcm
+ setup
+ swp_emulation
+ uefi
+ vlocks
+ porting
+
+SoC-specific documents
+======================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ ixp4xx
+
+ marvel
+ microchip
+
+ netwinder
+ nwfpe/index
+
+ keystone/overview
+ keystone/knav-qmss
+
+ omap/index
+
+ pxa/mfp
+
+
+ sa1100/index
+
+ stm32/stm32f746-overview
+ stm32/overview
+ stm32/stm32h743-overview
+ stm32/stm32f769-overview
+ stm32/stm32f429-overview
+ stm32/stm32mp157-overview
+
+ sunxi
+
+ samsung/index
+ samsung-s3c24xx/index
+
+ sunxi/clocks
+
+ spear/overview
+
+ sti/stih416-overview
+ sti/stih407-overview
+ sti/stih418-overview
+ sti/overview
+ sti/stih415-overview
+
+ vfp/release-notes
+
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Interrupts b/Documentation/arm/interrupts.rst
similarity index 81%
rename from Documentation/arm/Interrupts
rename to Documentation/arm/interrupts.rst
index f09ab1b90ef1..2ae70e0e9732 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Interrupts
+++ b/Documentation/arm/interrupts.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,10 @@
-2.5.2-rmk5
-----------
+==========
+Interrupts
+==========
-This is the first kernel that contains a major shake up of some of the
-major architecture-specific subsystems.
+2.5.2-rmk5:
+ This is the first kernel that contains a major shake up of some of the
+ major architecture-specific subsystems.
Firstly, it contains some pretty major changes to the way we handle the
MMU TLB. Each MMU TLB variant is now handled completely separately -
@@ -18,7 +20,7 @@ Unfortunately, this means that machine types that touch the irq_desc[]
array (basically all machine types) will break, and this means every
machine type that we currently have.
-Lets take an example. On the Assabet with Neponset, we have:
+Lets take an example. On the Assabet with Neponset, we have::
GPIO25 IRR:2
SA1100 ------------> Neponset -----------> SA1111
@@ -48,42 +50,47 @@ the irqdesc array). This doesn't have to be a real "IC"; indeed the
SA11x0 IRQs are handled by two separate "chip" structures, one for
GPIO0-10, and another for all the rest. It is just a container for
the various operations (maybe this'll change to a better name).
-This structure has the following operations:
+This structure has the following operations::
-struct irqchip {
- /*
- * Acknowledge the IRQ.
- * If this is a level-based IRQ, then it is expected to mask the IRQ
- * as well.
- */
- void (*ack)(unsigned int irq);
- /*
- * Mask the IRQ in hardware.
- */
- void (*mask)(unsigned int irq);
- /*
- * Unmask the IRQ in hardware.
- */
- void (*unmask)(unsigned int irq);
- /*
- * Re-run the IRQ
- */
- void (*rerun)(unsigned int irq);
- /*
- * Set the type of the IRQ.
- */
- int (*type)(unsigned int irq, unsigned int, type);
-};
+ struct irqchip {
+ /*
+ * Acknowledge the IRQ.
+ * If this is a level-based IRQ, then it is expected to mask the IRQ
+ * as well.
+ */
+ void (*ack)(unsigned int irq);
+ /*
+ * Mask the IRQ in hardware.
+ */
+ void (*mask)(unsigned int irq);
+ /*
+ * Unmask the IRQ in hardware.
+ */
+ void (*unmask)(unsigned int irq);
+ /*
+ * Re-run the IRQ
+ */
+ void (*rerun)(unsigned int irq);
+ /*
+ * Set the type of the IRQ.
+ */
+ int (*type)(unsigned int irq, unsigned int, type);
+ };
-ack - required. May be the same function as mask for IRQs
+ack
+ - required. May be the same function as mask for IRQs
handled by do_level_IRQ.
-mask - required.
-unmask - required.
-rerun - optional. Not required if you're using do_level_IRQ for all
+mask
+ - required.
+unmask
+ - required.
+rerun
+ - optional. Not required if you're using do_level_IRQ for all
IRQs that use this 'irqchip'. Generally expected to re-trigger
the hardware IRQ if possible. If not, may call the handler
directly.
-type - optional. If you don't support changing the type of an IRQ,
+type
+ - optional. If you don't support changing the type of an IRQ,
it should be null so people can detect if they are unable to
set the IRQ type.
@@ -109,6 +116,7 @@ manipulation, nor state tracking. This is useful for things like the
SMC9196 and USAR above.
So, what's changed?
+===================
1. Machine implementations must not write to the irqdesc array.
@@ -118,24 +126,19 @@ So, what's changed?
absolutely necessary.
set_irq_chip(irq,chip)
-
Set the mask/unmask methods for handling this IRQ
set_irq_handler(irq,handler)
-
Set the handler for this IRQ (level, edge, simple)
set_irq_chained_handler(irq,handler)
-
Set a "chained" handler for this IRQ - automatically
enables this IRQ (eg, Neponset and SA1111 handlers).
set_irq_flags(irq,flags)
-
Set the valid/probe/noautoenable flags.
set_irq_type(irq,type)
-
Set active the IRQ edge(s)/level. This replaces the
SA1111 INTPOL manipulation, and the set_GPIO_IRQ_edge()
function. Type should be one of IRQ_TYPE_xxx defined in
@@ -158,10 +161,9 @@ So, what's changed?
be re-checked for pending events. (see the Neponset IRQ handler for
details).
-7. fixup_irq() is gone, as is arch/arm/mach-*/include/mach/irq.h
+7. fixup_irq() is gone, as is `arch/arm/mach-*/include/mach/irq.h`
Please note that this will not solve all problems - some of them are
hardware based. Mixing level-based and edge-based IRQs on the same
parent signal (eg neponset) is one such area where a software based
solution can't provide the full answer to low IRQ latency.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx b/Documentation/arm/ixp4xx.rst
similarity index 84%
rename from Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
rename to Documentation/arm/ixp4xx.rst
index e48b74de6ac0..a57235616294 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/IXP4xx
+++ b/Documentation/arm/ixp4xx.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,6 @@
-
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+===========================================================
Release Notes for Linux on Intel's IXP4xx Network Processor
+===========================================================
Maintained by Deepak Saxena <dsaxena@plexity.net>
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@ Maintained by Deepak Saxena <dsaxena@plexity.net>
1. Overview
Intel's IXP4xx network processor is a highly integrated SOC that
-is targeted for network applications, though it has become popular
+is targeted for network applications, though it has become popular
in industrial control and other areas due to low cost and power
consumption. The IXP4xx family currently consists of several processors
that support different network offload functions such as encryption,
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ For more information on the various versions of the CPU, see:
http://developer.intel.com/design/network/products/npfamily/ixp4xx.htm
-Intel also made the IXCP1100 CPU for sometime which is an IXP4xx
+Intel also made the IXCP1100 CPU for sometime which is an IXP4xx
stripped of much of the network intelligence.
2. Linux Support
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Linux currently supports the following features on the IXP4xx chips:
- PCI interface
- Flash access (MTD/JFFS)
- I2C through GPIO on IXP42x
-- GPIO for input/output/interrupts
+- GPIO for input/output/interrupts
See arch/arm/mach-ixp4xx/include/mach/platform.h for access functions.
- Timers (watchdog, OS)
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ require the use of Intel's proprietary CSR software:
If you need to use any of the above, you need to download Intel's
software from:
- http://developer.intel.com/design/network/products/npfamily/ixp425.htm
+ http://developer.intel.com/design/network/products/npfamily/ixp425.htm
DO NOT POST QUESTIONS TO THE LINUX MAILING LISTS REGARDING THE PROPRIETARY
SOFTWARE.
@@ -53,14 +53,14 @@ SOFTWARE.
There are several websites that provide directions/pointers on using
Intel's software:
- http://sourceforge.net/projects/ixp4xx-osdg/
- Open Source Developer's Guide for using uClinux and the Intel libraries
+ - http://sourceforge.net/projects/ixp4xx-osdg/
+ Open Source Developer's Guide for using uClinux and the Intel libraries
-http://gatewaymaker.sourceforge.net/
- Simple one page summary of building a gateway using an IXP425 and Linux
+ - http://gatewaymaker.sourceforge.net/
+ Simple one page summary of building a gateway using an IXP425 and Linux
-http://ixp425.sourceforge.net/
- ATM device driver for IXP425 that relies on Intel's libraries
+ - http://ixp425.sourceforge.net/
+ ATM device driver for IXP425 that relies on Intel's libraries
3. Known Issues/Limitations
@@ -70,7 +70,7 @@ The IXP4xx family allows for up to 256MB of memory but the PCI interface
can only expose 64MB of that memory to the PCI bus. This means that if
you are running with > 64MB, all PCI buffers outside of the accessible
range will be bounced using the routines in arch/arm/common/dmabounce.c.
-
+
3b. Limited outbound PCI window
IXP4xx provides two methods of accessing PCI memory space:
@@ -79,15 +79,15 @@ IXP4xx provides two methods of accessing PCI memory space:
To access PCI via this space, we simply ioremap() the BAR
into the kernel and we can use the standard read[bwl]/write[bwl]
macros. This is the preffered method due to speed but it
- limits the system to just 64MB of PCI memory. This can be
+ limits the system to just 64MB of PCI memory. This can be
problamatic if using video cards and other memory-heavy devices.
-
-2) If > 64MB of memory space is required, the IXP4xx can be
- configured to use indirect registers to access PCI This allows
- for up to 128MB (0x48000000 to 0x4fffffff) of memory on the bus.
- The disadvantage of this is that every PCI access requires
- three local register accesses plus a spinlock, but in some
- cases the performance hit is acceptable. In addition, you cannot
+
+2) If > 64MB of memory space is required, the IXP4xx can be
+ configured to use indirect registers to access PCI This allows
+ for up to 128MB (0x48000000 to 0x4fffffff) of memory on the bus.
+ The disadvantage of this is that every PCI access requires
+ three local register accesses plus a spinlock, but in some
+ cases the performance hit is acceptable. In addition, you cannot
mmap() PCI devices in this case due to the indirect nature
of the PCI window.
@@ -96,14 +96,14 @@ you need more PCI memory, enable the IXP4XX_INDIRECT_PCI config option.
3c. GPIO as Interrupts
-Currently the code only handles level-sensitive GPIO interrupts
+Currently the code only handles level-sensitive GPIO interrupts
4. Supported platforms
ADI Engineering Coyote Gateway Reference Platform
http://www.adiengineering.com/productsCoyote.html
- The ADI Coyote platform is reference design for those building
+ The ADI Coyote platform is reference design for those building
small residential/office gateways. One NPE is connected to a 10/100
interface, one to 4-port 10/100 switch, and the third to and ADSL
interface. In addition, it also supports to POTs interfaces connected
@@ -119,9 +119,9 @@ http://www.gateworks.com/support/overview.php
the expansion bus.
Intel IXDP425 Development Platform
-http://www.intel.com/design/network/products/npfamily/ixdpg425.htm
+http://www.intel.com/design/network/products/npfamily/ixdpg425.htm
- This is Intel's standard reference platform for the IXDP425 and is
+ This is Intel's standard reference platform for the IXDP425 and is
also known as the Richfield board. It contains 4 PCI slots, 16MB
of flash, two 10/100 ports and one ADSL port.
@@ -161,11 +161,12 @@ The IXP4xx work has been funded by Intel Corp. and MontaVista Software, Inc.
The following people have contributed patches/comments/etc:
-Lennerty Buytenhek
-Lutz Jaenicke
-Justin Mayfield
-Robert E. Ranslam
-[I know I've forgotten others, please email me to be added]
+- Lennerty Buytenhek
+- Lutz Jaenicke
+- Justin Mayfield
+- Robert E. Ranslam
+
+[I know I've forgotten others, please email me to be added]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt b/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.rst
similarity index 99%
rename from Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.rst
index b9e060c5b61e..9bfb71a2a9b9 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/kernel_mode_neon.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+================
Kernel mode NEON
================
@@ -86,6 +87,7 @@ instructions appearing in unexpected places if no special care is taken.
Therefore, the recommended and only supported way of using NEON/VFP in the
kernel is by adhering to the following rules:
+
* isolate the NEON code in a separate compilation unit and compile it with
'-march=armv7-a -mfpu=neon -mfloat-abi=softfp';
* issue the calls to kernel_neon_begin(), kernel_neon_end() as well as the calls
@@ -115,6 +117,7 @@ NEON intrinsics
NEON intrinsics are also supported. However, as code using NEON intrinsics
relies on the GCC header <arm_neon.h>, (which #includes <stdint.h>), you should
observe the following in addition to the rules above:
+
* Compile the unit containing the NEON intrinsics with '-ffreestanding' so GCC
uses its builtin version of <stdint.h> (this is a C99 header which the kernel
does not supply);
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt b/Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.rst
similarity index 78%
rename from Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.rst
index 5673594717cf..eb6f3d916622 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+============================
Kernel-provided User Helpers
============================
@@ -43,7 +44,7 @@ kuser_helper_version
Location: 0xffff0ffc
-Reference declaration:
+Reference declaration::
extern int32_t __kuser_helper_version;
@@ -53,17 +54,17 @@ Definition:
running kernel. User space may read this to determine the availability
of a particular helper.
-Usage example:
+Usage example::
-#define __kuser_helper_version (*(int32_t *)0xffff0ffc)
+ #define __kuser_helper_version (*(int32_t *)0xffff0ffc)
-void check_kuser_version(void)
-{
+ void check_kuser_version(void)
+ {
if (__kuser_helper_version < 2) {
fprintf(stderr, "can't do atomic operations, kernel too old\n");
abort();
}
-}
+ }
Notes:
@@ -77,7 +78,7 @@ kuser_get_tls
Location: 0xffff0fe0
-Reference prototype:
+Reference prototype::
void * __kuser_get_tls(void);
@@ -97,16 +98,16 @@ Definition:
Get the TLS value as previously set via the __ARM_NR_set_tls syscall.
-Usage example:
+Usage example::
-typedef void * (__kuser_get_tls_t)(void);
-#define __kuser_get_tls (*(__kuser_get_tls_t *)0xffff0fe0)
+ typedef void * (__kuser_get_tls_t)(void);
+ #define __kuser_get_tls (*(__kuser_get_tls_t *)0xffff0fe0)
-void foo()
-{
+ void foo()
+ {
void *tls = __kuser_get_tls();
printf("TLS = %p\n", tls);
-}
+ }
Notes:
@@ -117,7 +118,7 @@ kuser_cmpxchg
Location: 0xffff0fc0
-Reference prototype:
+Reference prototype::
int __kuser_cmpxchg(int32_t oldval, int32_t newval, volatile int32_t *ptr);
@@ -139,18 +140,18 @@ Clobbered registers:
Definition:
- Atomically store newval in *ptr only if *ptr is equal to oldval.
- Return zero if *ptr was changed or non-zero if no exchange happened.
- The C flag is also set if *ptr was changed to allow for assembly
+ Atomically store newval in `*ptr` only if `*ptr` is equal to oldval.
+ Return zero if `*ptr` was changed or non-zero if no exchange happened.
+ The C flag is also set if `*ptr` was changed to allow for assembly
optimization in the calling code.
-Usage example:
+Usage example::
-typedef int (__kuser_cmpxchg_t)(int oldval, int newval, volatile int *ptr);
-#define __kuser_cmpxchg (*(__kuser_cmpxchg_t *)0xffff0fc0)
+ typedef int (__kuser_cmpxchg_t)(int oldval, int newval, volatile int *ptr);
+ #define __kuser_cmpxchg (*(__kuser_cmpxchg_t *)0xffff0fc0)
-int atomic_add(volatile int *ptr, int val)
-{
+ int atomic_add(volatile int *ptr, int val)
+ {
int old, new;
do {
@@ -159,7 +160,7 @@ int atomic_add(volatile int *ptr, int val)
} while(__kuser_cmpxchg(old, new, ptr));
return new;
-}
+ }
Notes:
@@ -172,7 +173,7 @@ kuser_memory_barrier
Location: 0xffff0fa0
-Reference prototype:
+Reference prototype::
void __kuser_memory_barrier(void);
@@ -193,10 +194,10 @@ Definition:
Apply any needed memory barrier to preserve consistency with data modified
manually and __kuser_cmpxchg usage.
-Usage example:
+Usage example::
-typedef void (__kuser_dmb_t)(void);
-#define __kuser_dmb (*(__kuser_dmb_t *)0xffff0fa0)
+ typedef void (__kuser_dmb_t)(void);
+ #define __kuser_dmb (*(__kuser_dmb_t *)0xffff0fa0)
Notes:
@@ -207,7 +208,7 @@ kuser_cmpxchg64
Location: 0xffff0f60
-Reference prototype:
+Reference prototype::
int __kuser_cmpxchg64(const int64_t *oldval,
const int64_t *newval,
@@ -231,22 +232,22 @@ Clobbered registers:
Definition:
- Atomically store the 64-bit value pointed by *newval in *ptr only if *ptr
- is equal to the 64-bit value pointed by *oldval. Return zero if *ptr was
+ Atomically store the 64-bit value pointed by `*newval` in `*ptr` only if `*ptr`
+ is equal to the 64-bit value pointed by `*oldval`. Return zero if `*ptr` was
changed or non-zero if no exchange happened.
- The C flag is also set if *ptr was changed to allow for assembly
+ The C flag is also set if `*ptr` was changed to allow for assembly
optimization in the calling code.
-Usage example:
+Usage example::
-typedef int (__kuser_cmpxchg64_t)(const int64_t *oldval,
- const int64_t *newval,
- volatile int64_t *ptr);
-#define __kuser_cmpxchg64 (*(__kuser_cmpxchg64_t *)0xffff0f60)
+ typedef int (__kuser_cmpxchg64_t)(const int64_t *oldval,
+ const int64_t *newval,
+ volatile int64_t *ptr);
+ #define __kuser_cmpxchg64 (*(__kuser_cmpxchg64_t *)0xffff0f60)
-int64_t atomic_add64(volatile int64_t *ptr, int64_t val)
-{
+ int64_t atomic_add64(volatile int64_t *ptr, int64_t val)
+ {
int64_t old, new;
do {
@@ -255,7 +256,7 @@ int64_t atomic_add64(volatile int64_t *ptr, int64_t val)
} while(__kuser_cmpxchg64(&old, &new, ptr));
return new;
-}
+ }
Notes:
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/keystone/knav-qmss.txt b/Documentation/arm/keystone/knav-qmss.rst
similarity index 92%
rename from Documentation/arm/keystone/knav-qmss.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/keystone/knav-qmss.rst
index fcdb9fd5f53a..7f7638d80b42 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/keystone/knav-qmss.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/keystone/knav-qmss.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
-* Texas Instruments Keystone Navigator Queue Management SubSystem driver
+======================================================================
+Texas Instruments Keystone Navigator Queue Management SubSystem driver
+======================================================================
Driver source code path
drivers/soc/ti/knav_qmss.c
@@ -34,11 +36,13 @@ driver that interface with the accumulator PDSP. This configures
accumulator channels defined in DTS (example in DT documentation) to monitor
1 or 32 queues per channel. More description on the firmware is available in
CPPI/QMSS Low Level Driver document (docs/CPPI_QMSS_LLD_SDS.pdf) at
+
git://git.ti.com/keystone-rtos/qmss-lld.git
k2_qmss_pdsp_acc48_k2_le_1_0_0_9.bin firmware supports upto 48 accumulator
channels. This firmware is available under ti-keystone folder of
firmware.git at
+
git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/firmware/linux-firmware.git
To use copy the firmware image to lib/firmware folder of the initramfs or
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/keystone/Overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/keystone/overview.rst
similarity index 59%
rename from Documentation/arm/keystone/Overview.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/keystone/overview.rst
index 400c0c270d2e..cd90298c493c 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/keystone/Overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/keystone/overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- TI Keystone Linux Overview
- --------------------------
+==========================
+TI Keystone Linux Overview
+==========================
Introduction
------------
@@ -9,47 +10,65 @@ for users to run Linux on Keystone based EVMs from Texas Instruments.
Following SoCs & EVMs are currently supported:-
------------- K2HK SoC and EVM --------------------------------------------------
+K2HK SoC and EVM
+=================
a.k.a Keystone 2 Hawking/Kepler SoC
TCI6636K2H & TCI6636K2K: See documentation at
+
http://www.ti.com/product/tci6638k2k
http://www.ti.com/product/tci6638k2h
EVM:
-http://www.advantech.com/Support/TI-EVM/EVMK2HX_sd.aspx
+ http://www.advantech.com/Support/TI-EVM/EVMK2HX_sd.aspx
------------- K2E SoC and EVM ---------------------------------------------------
+K2E SoC and EVM
+===============
a.k.a Keystone 2 Edison SoC
-K2E - 66AK2E05: See documentation at
+
+K2E - 66AK2E05:
+
+See documentation at
+
http://www.ti.com/product/66AK2E05/technicaldocuments
EVM:
-https://www.einfochips.com/index.php/partnerships/texas-instruments/k2e-evm.html
+ https://www.einfochips.com/index.php/partnerships/texas-instruments/k2e-evm.html
------------- K2L SoC and EVM ---------------------------------------------------
+K2L SoC and EVM
+===============
a.k.a Keystone 2 Lamarr SoC
-K2L - TCI6630K2L: See documentation at
+
+K2L - TCI6630K2L:
+
+See documentation at
http://www.ti.com/product/TCI6630K2L/technicaldocuments
+
EVM:
-https://www.einfochips.com/index.php/partnerships/texas-instruments/k2l-evm.html
+ https://www.einfochips.com/index.php/partnerships/texas-instruments/k2l-evm.html
Configuration
-------------
All of the K2 SoCs/EVMs share a common defconfig, keystone_defconfig and same
image is used to boot on individual EVMs. The platform configuration is
-specified through DTS. Following are the DTS used:-
- K2HK EVM : k2hk-evm.dts
- K2E EVM : k2e-evm.dts
- K2L EVM : k2l-evm.dts
+specified through DTS. Following are the DTS used:
+
+ K2HK EVM:
+ k2hk-evm.dts
+ K2E EVM:
+ k2e-evm.dts
+ K2L EVM:
+ k2l-evm.dts
The device tree documentation for the keystone machines are located at
+
Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/keystone/keystone.txt
Document Author
---------------
Murali Karicheri <m-karicheri2@ti.com>
+
Copyright 2015 Texas Instruments
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/marvel.rst b/Documentation/arm/marvel.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..16ab2eb085b8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/marvel.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,488 @@
+================
+ARM Marvell SoCs
+================
+
+This document lists all the ARM Marvell SoCs that are currently
+supported in mainline by the Linux kernel. As the Marvell families of
+SoCs are large and complex, it is hard to understand where the support
+for a particular SoC is available in the Linux kernel. This document
+tries to help in understanding where those SoCs are supported, and to
+match them with their corresponding public datasheet, when available.
+
+Orion family
+------------
+
+ Flavors:
+ - 88F5082
+ - 88F5181
+ - 88F5181L
+ - 88F5182
+
+ - Datasheet: http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-datasheet.pdf
+ - Programmer's User Guide: http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-opensource-manual.pdf
+ - User Manual: http://www.embeddedarm.com/documentation/third-party/MV88F5182-usermanual.pdf
+ - 88F5281
+
+ - Datasheet: http://www.ocmodshop.com/images/reviews/networking/qnap_ts409u/marvel_88f5281_data_sheet.pdf
+ - 88F6183
+ Core:
+ Feroceon 88fr331 (88f51xx) or 88fr531-vd (88f52xx) ARMv5 compatible
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ arch/arm/mach-orion5x
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ arch/arm/plat-orion
+
+Kirkwood family
+---------------
+
+ Flavors:
+ - 88F6282 a.k.a Armada 300
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/armada_310.pdf
+ - 88F6283 a.k.a Armada 310
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/armada_310.pdf
+ - 88F6190
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6190-003_WEB.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F619x_OpenSource.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
+ - 88F6192
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6192-003_ver1.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F619x_OpenSource.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
+ - 88F6182
+ - 88F6180
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6180-003_ver1.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F6180_OpenSource.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
+ - 88F6281
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/88F6281-004_ver1.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/HW_88F6281_OpenSource.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/assets/FS_88F6180_9x_6281_OpenSource.pdf
+ Homepage:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/kirkwood/
+ Core:
+ Feroceon 88fr131 ARMv5 compatible
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ arch/arm/mach-mvebu
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ none
+
+Discovery family
+----------------
+
+ Flavors:
+ - MV78100
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/MV78100-003_WEB.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/HW_MV78100_OpenSource.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/FS_MV76100_78100_78200_OpenSource.pdf
+ - MV78200
+
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/MV78200-002_WEB.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec : http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/HW_MV78200_OpenSource.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/discovery-innovation/assets/FS_MV76100_78100_78200_OpenSource.pdf
+ - MV76100
+
+ Not supported by the Linux kernel.
+
+ Core:
+ Feroceon 88fr571-vd ARMv5 compatible
+
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ arch/arm/mach-mv78xx0
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ arch/arm/plat-orion
+
+EBU Armada family
+-----------------
+
+ Armada 370 Flavors:
+ - 88F6710
+ - 88F6707
+ - 88F6W11
+
+ - Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/Marvell_ARMADA_370_SoC.pdf
+ - Hardware Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/ARMADA370-datasheet.pdf
+ - Functional Spec: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/ARMADA370-FunctionalSpec-datasheet.pdf
+
+ Core:
+ Sheeva ARMv7 compatible PJ4B
+
+ Armada 375 Flavors:
+ - 88F6720
+
+ - Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-300/assets/ARMADA_375_SoC-01_product_brief.pdf
+
+ Core:
+ ARM Cortex-A9
+
+ Armada 38x Flavors:
+ - 88F6810 Armada 380
+ - 88F6820 Armada 385
+ - 88F6828 Armada 388
+
+ - Product infos: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-38x/
+ - Functional Spec: https://marvellcorp.wufoo.com/forms/marvell-armada-38x-functional-specifications/
+
+ Core:
+ ARM Cortex-A9
+
+ Armada 39x Flavors:
+ - 88F6920 Armada 390
+ - 88F6928 Armada 398
+
+ - Product infos: http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-39x/
+
+ Core:
+ ARM Cortex-A9
+
+ Armada XP Flavors:
+ - MV78230
+ - MV78260
+ - MV78460
+
+ NOTE:
+ not to be confused with the non-SMP 78xx0 SoCs
+
+ Product Brief:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/Marvell-ArmadaXP-SoC-product%20brief.pdf
+
+ Functional Spec:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/ARMADA-XP-Functional-SpecDatasheet.pdf
+
+ - Hardware Specs:
+
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/HW_MV78230_OS.PDF
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/HW_MV78260_OS.PDF
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-xp/assets/HW_MV78460_OS.PDF
+
+ Core:
+ Sheeva ARMv7 compatible Dual-core or Quad-core PJ4B-MP
+
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ arch/arm/mach-mvebu
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ none
+
+EBU Armada family ARMv8
+-----------------------
+
+ Armada 3710/3720 Flavors:
+ - 88F3710
+ - 88F3720
+
+ Core:
+ ARM Cortex A53 (ARMv8)
+
+ Homepage:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-3700/
+
+ Product Brief:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/PB-88F3700-FNL.pdf
+
+ Device tree files:
+ arch/arm64/boot/dts/marvell/armada-37*
+
+ Armada 7K Flavors:
+ - 88F7020 (AP806 Dual + one CP110)
+ - 88F7040 (AP806 Quad + one CP110)
+
+ Core: ARM Cortex A72
+
+ Homepage:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-70xx/
+
+ Product Brief:
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada7020PB-Jan2016.pdf
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada7040PB-Jan2016.pdf
+
+ Device tree files:
+ arch/arm64/boot/dts/marvell/armada-70*
+
+ Armada 8K Flavors:
+ - 88F8020 (AP806 Dual + two CP110)
+ - 88F8040 (AP806 Quad + two CP110)
+ Core:
+ ARM Cortex A72
+
+ Homepage:
+ http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/armada-80xx/
+
+ Product Brief:
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada8020PB-Jan2016.pdf
+ - http://www.marvell.com/embedded-processors/assets/Armada8040PB-Jan2016.pdf
+
+ Device tree files:
+ arch/arm64/boot/dts/marvell/armada-80*
+
+Avanta family
+-------------
+
+ Flavors:
+ - 88F6510
+ - 88F6530P
+ - 88F6550
+ - 88F6560
+
+ Homepage:
+ http://www.marvell.com/broadband/
+
+ Product Brief:
+ http://www.marvell.com/broadband/assets/Marvell_Avanta_88F6510_305_060-001_product_brief.pdf
+
+ No public datasheet available.
+
+ Core:
+ ARMv5 compatible
+
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ no code in mainline yet, planned for the future
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ no code in mainline yet, planned for the future
+
+Storage family
+--------------
+
+ Armada SP:
+ - 88RC1580
+
+ Product infos:
+ http://www.marvell.com/storage/armada-sp/
+
+ Core:
+ Sheeva ARMv7 comatible Quad-core PJ4C
+
+ (not supported in upstream Linux kernel)
+
+Dove family (application processor)
+-----------------------------------
+
+ Flavors:
+ - 88AP510 a.k.a Armada 510
+
+ Product Brief:
+ http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Marvell_Armada510_SoC.pdf
+
+ Hardware Spec:
+ http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Armada-510-Hardware-Spec.pdf
+
+ Functional Spec:
+ http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/assets/Armada-510-Functional-Spec.pdf
+
+ Homepage:
+ http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-500/
+
+ Core:
+ ARMv7 compatible
+
+ Directory:
+ - arch/arm/mach-mvebu (DT enabled platforms)
+ - arch/arm/mach-dove (non-DT enabled platforms)
+
+PXA 2xx/3xx/93x/95x family
+--------------------------
+
+ Flavors:
+ - PXA21x, PXA25x, PXA26x
+ - Application processor only
+ - Core: ARMv5 XScale1 core
+ - PXA270, PXA271, PXA272
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_pb.pdf
+ - Design guide : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_design_guide.pdf
+ - Developers manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_dev_man.pdf
+ - Specification : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_emts.pdf
+ - Specification update : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/pxa_27x_spec_update.pdf
+ - Application processor only
+ - Core: ARMv5 XScale2 core
+ - PXA300, PXA310, PXA320
+ - PXA 300 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA300_PB_R4.pdf
+ - PXA 310 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA310_PB_R4.pdf
+ - PXA 320 Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA320_PB_R4.pdf
+ - Design guide : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Design_Guide.pdf
+ - Developers manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Developers_Manual.zip
+ - Specifications : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_EMTS.pdf
+ - Specification Update : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_Spec_Update.zip
+ - Reference Manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/pxa-family/assets/PXA3xx_TavorP_BootROM_Ref_Manual.pdf
+ - Application processor only
+ - Core: ARMv5 XScale3 core
+ - PXA930, PXA935
+ - Application processor with Communication processor
+ - Core: ARMv5 XScale3 core
+ - PXA955
+ - Application processor with Communication processor
+ - Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 core
+
+ Comments:
+
+ * This line of SoCs originates from the XScale family developed by
+ Intel and acquired by Marvell in ~2006. The PXA21x, PXA25x,
+ PXA26x, PXA27x, PXA3xx and PXA93x were developed by Intel, while
+ the later PXA95x were developed by Marvell.
+
+ * Due to their XScale origin, these SoCs have virtually nothing in
+ common with the other (Kirkwood, Dove, etc.) families of Marvell
+ SoCs, except with the MMP/MMP2 family of SoCs.
+
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ arch/arm/mach-pxa
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ arch/arm/plat-pxa
+
+MMP/MMP2/MMP3 family (communication processor)
+----------------------------------------------
+
+ Flavors:
+ - PXA168, a.k.a Armada 168
+ - Homepage : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/armada-168.jsp
+ - Product brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/pxa_168_pb.pdf
+ - Hardware manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_datasheet.pdf
+ - Software manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_software_manual.pdf
+ - Specification update : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/ARMADA16x_Spec_update.pdf
+ - Boot ROM manual : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_ref_manual.pdf
+ - App node package : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-100/assets/armada_16x_app_note_package.pdf
+ - Application processor only
+ - Core: ARMv5 compatible Marvell PJ1 88sv331 (Mohawk)
+ - PXA910/PXA920
+ - Homepage : http://www.marvell.com/communication-processors/pxa910/
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/communication-processors/pxa910/assets/Marvell_PXA910_Platform-001_PB_final.pdf
+ - Application processor with Communication processor
+ - Core: ARMv5 compatible Marvell PJ1 88sv331 (Mohawk)
+ - PXA688, a.k.a. MMP2, a.k.a Armada 610
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada-600/assets/armada610_pb.pdf
+ - Application processor only
+ - Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 88sv581x core
+ - PXA2128, a.k.a. MMP3 (OLPC XO4, Linux support not upstream)
+ - Product Brief : http://www.marvell.com/application-processors/armada/pxa2128/assets/Marvell-ARMADA-PXA2128-SoC-PB.pdf
+ - Application processor only
+ - Core: Dual-core ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4C core
+ - PXA960/PXA968/PXA978 (Linux support not upstream)
+ - Application processor with Communication Processor
+ - Core: ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4 core
+ - PXA986/PXA988 (Linux support not upstream)
+ - Application processor with Communication Processor
+ - Core: Dual-core ARMv7 compatible Sheeva PJ4B-MP core
+ - PXA1088/PXA1920 (Linux support not upstream)
+ - Application processor with Communication Processor
+ - Core: quad-core ARMv7 Cortex-A7
+ - PXA1908/PXA1928/PXA1936
+ - Application processor with Communication Processor
+ - Core: multi-core ARMv8 Cortex-A53
+
+ Comments:
+
+ * This line of SoCs originates from the XScale family developed by
+ Intel and acquired by Marvell in ~2006. All the processors of
+ this MMP/MMP2 family were developed by Marvell.
+
+ * Due to their XScale origin, these SoCs have virtually nothing in
+ common with the other (Kirkwood, Dove, etc.) families of Marvell
+ SoCs, except with the PXA family of SoCs listed above.
+
+ Linux kernel mach directory:
+ arch/arm/mach-mmp
+ Linux kernel plat directory:
+ arch/arm/plat-pxa
+
+Berlin family (Multimedia Solutions)
+-------------------------------------
+
+ - Flavors:
+ - 88DE3010, Armada 1000 (no Linux support)
+ - Core: Marvell PJ1 (ARMv5TE), Dual-core
+ - Product Brief: http://www.marvell.com.cn/digital-entertainment/assets/armada_1000_pb.pdf
+ - 88DE3005, Armada 1500 Mini
+ - Design name: BG2CD
+ - Core: ARM Cortex-A9, PL310 L2CC
+ - 88DE3006, Armada 1500 Mini Plus
+ - Design name: BG2CDP
+ - Core: Dual Core ARM Cortex-A7
+ - 88DE3100, Armada 1500
+ - Design name: BG2
+ - Core: Marvell PJ4B-MP (ARMv7), Tauros3 L2CC
+ - 88DE3114, Armada 1500 Pro
+ - Design name: BG2Q
+ - Core: Quad Core ARM Cortex-A9, PL310 L2CC
+ - 88DE3214, Armada 1500 Pro 4K
+ - Design name: BG3
+ - Core: ARM Cortex-A15, CA15 integrated L2CC
+ - 88DE3218, ARMADA 1500 Ultra
+ - Core: ARM Cortex-A53
+
+ Homepage: https://www.synaptics.com/products/multimedia-solutions
+ Directory: arch/arm/mach-berlin
+
+ Comments:
+
+ * This line of SoCs is based on Marvell Sheeva or ARM Cortex CPUs
+ with Synopsys DesignWare (IRQ, GPIO, Timers, ...) and PXA IP (SDHCI, USB, ETH, ...).
+
+ * The Berlin family was acquired by Synaptics from Marvell in 2017.
+
+CPU Cores
+---------
+
+The XScale cores were designed by Intel, and shipped by Marvell in the older
+PXA processors. Feroceon is a Marvell designed core that developed in-house,
+and that evolved into Sheeva. The XScale and Feroceon cores were phased out
+over time and replaced with Sheeva cores in later products, which subsequently
+got replaced with licensed ARM Cortex-A cores.
+
+ XScale 1
+ CPUID 0x69052xxx
+ ARMv5, iWMMXt
+ XScale 2
+ CPUID 0x69054xxx
+ ARMv5, iWMMXt
+ XScale 3
+ CPUID 0x69056xxx or 0x69056xxx
+ ARMv5, iWMMXt
+ Feroceon-1850 88fr331 "Mohawk"
+ CPUID 0x5615331x or 0x41xx926x
+ ARMv5TE, single issue
+ Feroceon-2850 88fr531-vd "Jolteon"
+ CPUID 0x5605531x or 0x41xx926x
+ ARMv5TE, VFP, dual-issue
+ Feroceon 88fr571-vd "Jolteon"
+ CPUID 0x5615571x
+ ARMv5TE, VFP, dual-issue
+ Feroceon 88fr131 "Mohawk-D"
+ CPUID 0x5625131x
+ ARMv5TE, single-issue in-order
+ Sheeva PJ1 88sv331 "Mohawk"
+ CPUID 0x561584xx
+ ARMv5, single-issue iWMMXt v2
+ Sheeva PJ4 88sv581x "Flareon"
+ CPUID 0x560f581x
+ ARMv7, idivt, optional iWMMXt v2
+ Sheeva PJ4B 88sv581x
+ CPUID 0x561f581x
+ ARMv7, idivt, optional iWMMXt v2
+ Sheeva PJ4B-MP / PJ4C
+ CPUID 0x562f584x
+ ARMv7, idivt/idiva, LPAE, optional iWMMXt v2 and/or NEON
+
+Long-term plans
+---------------
+
+ * Unify the mach-dove/, mach-mv78xx0/, mach-orion5x/ into the
+ mach-mvebu/ to support all SoCs from the Marvell EBU (Engineering
+ Business Unit) in a single mach-<foo> directory. The plat-orion/
+ would therefore disappear.
+
+ * Unify the mach-mmp/ and mach-pxa/ into the same mach-pxa
+ directory. The plat-pxa/ would therefore disappear.
+
+Credits
+-------
+
+- Maen Suleiman <maen@marvell.com>
+- Lior Amsalem <alior@marvell.com>
+- Thomas Petazzoni <thomas.petazzoni@free-electrons.com>
+- Andrew Lunn <andrew@lunn.ch>
+- Nicolas Pitre <nico@fluxnic.net>
+- Eric Miao <eric.y.miao@gmail.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/mem_alignment b/Documentation/arm/mem_alignment.rst
similarity index 89%
rename from Documentation/arm/mem_alignment
rename to Documentation/arm/mem_alignment.rst
index e110e2781039..aa22893b62bc 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/mem_alignment
+++ b/Documentation/arm/mem_alignment.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+================
+Memory alignment
+================
+
Too many problems popped up because of unnoticed misaligned memory access in
kernel code lately. Therefore the alignment fixup is now unconditionally
configured in for SA11x0 based targets. According to Alan Cox, this is a
@@ -26,9 +30,9 @@ space, and might cause programs to fail unexpectedly.
To change the alignment trap behavior, simply echo a number into
/proc/cpu/alignment. The number is made up from various bits:
+=== ========================================================
bit behavior when set
---- -----------------
-
+=== ========================================================
0 A user process performing an unaligned memory access
will cause the kernel to print a message indicating
process name, pid, pc, instruction, address, and the
@@ -41,12 +45,13 @@ bit behavior when set
2 The kernel will send a SIGBUS signal to the user process
performing the unaligned access.
+=== ========================================================
Note that not all combinations are supported - only values 0 through 5.
(6 and 7 don't make sense).
For example, the following will turn on the warnings, but without
-fixing up or sending SIGBUS signals:
+fixing up or sending SIGBUS signals::
echo 1 > /proc/cpu/alignment
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/memory.txt b/Documentation/arm/memory.rst
similarity index 90%
rename from Documentation/arm/memory.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/memory.rst
index 546a39048eb0..0521b4ce5c96 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/memory.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/memory.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
- Kernel Memory Layout on ARM Linux
+=================================
+Kernel Memory Layout on ARM Linux
+=================================
Russell King <rmk@arm.linux.org.uk>
+
November 17, 2005 (2.6.15)
This document describes the virtual memory layout which the Linux
@@ -15,8 +18,9 @@ As the ARM architecture matures, it becomes necessary to reserve
certain regions of VM space for use for new facilities; therefore
this document may reserve more VM space over time.
+=============== =============== ===============================================
Start End Use
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+=============== =============== ===============================================
ffff8000 ffffffff copy_user_page / clear_user_page use.
For SA11xx and Xscale, this is used to
setup a minicache mapping.
@@ -77,6 +81,7 @@ MODULES_VADDR MODULES_END-1 Kernel module space
place their vector page here. NULL pointer
dereferences by both the kernel and user
space are also caught via this mapping.
+=============== =============== ===============================================
Please note that mappings which collide with the above areas may result
in a non-bootable kernel, or may cause the kernel to (eventually) panic
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Microchip/README b/Documentation/arm/microchip.rst
similarity index 92%
rename from Documentation/arm/Microchip/README
rename to Documentation/arm/microchip.rst
index a366f37d38f1..c9a44c98e868 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Microchip/README
+++ b/Documentation/arm/microchip.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=============================
ARM Microchip SoCs (aka AT91)
=============================
@@ -22,32 +23,46 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
Flavors:
* ARM 920 based SoC
- at91rm9200
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-1768-32-bit-ARM920T-Embedded-Microprocessor-AT91RM9200_Datasheet.pdf
* ARM 926 based SoCs
- at91sam9260
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-6221-32-bit-ARM926EJ-S-Embedded-Microprocessor-SAM9260_Datasheet.pdf
- at91sam9xe
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-6254-32-bit-ARM926EJ-S-Embedded-Microprocessor-SAM9XE_Datasheet.pdf
- at91sam9261
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-6062-ARM926EJ-S-Microprocessor-SAM9261_Datasheet.pdf
- at91sam9263
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-6249-32-bit-ARM926EJ-S-Embedded-Microprocessor-SAM9263_Datasheet.pdf
- at91sam9rl
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/doc6289.pdf
- at91sam9g20
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/DS60001516A.pdf
- at91sam9g45 family
@@ -55,7 +70,9 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
- at91sam9g46
- at91sam9m10
- at91sam9m11 (device superset)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-6437-32-bit-ARM926-Embedded-Microprocessor-SAM9M11_Datasheet.pdf
- at91sam9x5 family (aka "The 5 series")
@@ -64,33 +81,44 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
- at91sam9g35
- at91sam9x25
- at91sam9x35
- + Datasheet (can be considered as covering the whole family)
+
+ * Datasheet (can be considered as covering the whole family)
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-11055-32-bit-ARM926EJ-S-Microcontroller-SAM9X35_Datasheet.pdf
- at91sam9n12
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/DS60001517A.pdf
* ARM Cortex-A5 based SoCs
- sama5d3 family
+
- sama5d31
- sama5d33
- sama5d34
- sama5d35
- sama5d36 (device superset)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/Atmel-11121-32-bit-Cortex-A5-Microcontroller-SAMA5D3_Datasheet.pdf
* ARM Cortex-A5 + NEON based SoCs
- sama5d4 family
+
- sama5d41
- sama5d42
- sama5d43
- sama5d44 (device superset)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/60001525A.pdf
- sama5d2 family
+
- sama5d21
- sama5d22
- sama5d23
@@ -98,11 +126,14 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
- sama5d26
- sama5d27 (device superset)
- sama5d28 (device superset + environmental monitors)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/DS60001476B.pdf
* ARM Cortex-M7 MCUs
- sams70 family
+
- sams70j19
- sams70j20
- sams70j21
@@ -114,6 +145,7 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
- sams70q21
- samv70 family
+
- samv70j19
- samv70j20
- samv70n19
@@ -122,6 +154,7 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
- samv70q20
- samv71 family
+
- samv71j19
- samv71j20
- samv71j21
@@ -132,7 +165,8 @@ the Microchip website: http://www.microchip.com.
- samv71q20
- samv71q21
- + Datasheet
+ * Datasheet
+
http://ww1.microchip.com/downloads/en/DeviceDoc/60001527A.pdf
@@ -157,6 +191,7 @@ definition of a "Stable" binding/ABI.
This statement will be removed by AT91 MAINTAINERS when appropriate.
Naming conventions and best practice:
+
- SoCs Device Tree Source Include files are named after the official name of
the product (at91sam9g20.dtsi or sama5d33.dtsi for instance).
- Device Tree Source Include files (.dtsi) are used to collect common nodes that can be
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/netwinder.rst b/Documentation/arm/netwinder.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..8eab66caa2ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/netwinder.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,85 @@
+================================
+NetWinder specific documentation
+================================
+
+The NetWinder is a small low-power computer, primarily designed
+to run Linux. It is based around the StrongARM RISC processor,
+DC21285 PCI bridge, with PC-type hardware glued around it.
+
+Port usage
+==========
+
+======= ====== ===============================
+Min Max Description
+======= ====== ===============================
+0x0000 0x000f DMA1
+0x0020 0x0021 PIC1
+0x0060 0x006f Keyboard
+0x0070 0x007f RTC
+0x0080 0x0087 DMA1
+0x0088 0x008f DMA2
+0x00a0 0x00a3 PIC2
+0x00c0 0x00df DMA2
+0x0180 0x0187 IRDA
+0x01f0 0x01f6 ide0
+0x0201 Game port
+0x0203 RWA010 configuration read
+0x0220 ? SoundBlaster
+0x0250 ? WaveArtist
+0x0279 RWA010 configuration index
+0x02f8 0x02ff Serial ttyS1
+0x0300 0x031f Ether10
+0x0338 GPIO1
+0x033a GPIO2
+0x0370 0x0371 W83977F configuration registers
+0x0388 ? AdLib
+0x03c0 0x03df VGA
+0x03f6 ide0
+0x03f8 0x03ff Serial ttyS0
+0x0400 0x0408 DC21143
+0x0480 0x0487 DMA1
+0x0488 0x048f DMA2
+0x0a79 RWA010 configuration write
+0xe800 0xe80f ide0/ide1 BM DMA
+======= ====== ===============================
+
+
+Interrupt usage
+===============
+
+======= ======= ========================
+IRQ type Description
+======= ======= ========================
+ 0 ISA 100Hz timer
+ 1 ISA Keyboard
+ 2 ISA cascade
+ 3 ISA Serial ttyS1
+ 4 ISA Serial ttyS0
+ 5 ISA PS/2 mouse
+ 6 ISA IRDA
+ 7 ISA Printer
+ 8 ISA RTC alarm
+ 9 ISA
+10 ISA GP10 (Orange reset button)
+11 ISA
+12 ISA WaveArtist
+13 ISA
+14 ISA hda1
+15 ISA
+======= ======= ========================
+
+DMA usage
+=========
+
+======= ======= ===========
+DMA type Description
+======= ======= ===========
+ 0 ISA IRDA
+ 1 ISA
+ 2 ISA cascade
+ 3 ISA WaveArtist
+ 4 ISA
+ 5 ISA
+ 6 ISA
+ 7 ISA WaveArtist
+======= ======= ===========
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/index.rst b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..21fa8ce192ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+===================================
+NetWinder's floating point emulator
+===================================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ nwfpe
+ netwinder-fpe
+ notes
+ todo
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README.FPE b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/netwinder-fpe.rst
similarity index 94%
rename from Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README.FPE
rename to Documentation/arm/nwfpe/netwinder-fpe.rst
index 26f5d7bb9a41..cbb320960fc4 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README.FPE
+++ b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/netwinder-fpe.rst
@@ -1,12 +1,18 @@
+=============
+Current State
+=============
+
The following describes the current state of the NetWinder's floating point
emulator.
In the following nomenclature is used to describe the floating point
instructions. It follows the conventions in the ARM manual.
-<S|D|E> = <single|double|extended>, no default
-{P|M|Z} = {round to +infinity,round to -infinity,round to zero},
- default = round to nearest
+::
+
+ <S|D|E> = <single|double|extended>, no default
+ {P|M|Z} = {round to +infinity,round to -infinity,round to zero},
+ default = round to nearest
Note: items enclosed in {} are optional.
@@ -32,10 +38,10 @@ Form 2 syntax:
<LFM|SFM>{cond}<FD,EA> Fd, <count>, [Rn]{!}
These instructions are fully implemented. They store/load three words
-for each floating point register into the memory location given in the
+for each floating point register into the memory location given in the
instruction. The format in memory is unlikely to be compatible with
other implementations, in particular the actual hardware. Specific
-mention of this is made in the ARM manuals.
+mention of this is made in the ARM manuals.
Floating Point Coprocessor Register Transfer Instructions (CPRT)
----------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -123,7 +129,7 @@ RPW{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - reverse power
POL{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - polar angle (arctan2)
LOG{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base 10
-LGN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base e
+LGN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base e
EXP{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - exponent
SIN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - sine
COS{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - cosine
@@ -134,7 +140,7 @@ ATN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arctangent
These are not implemented. They are not currently issued by the compiler,
and are handled by routines in libc. These are not implemented by the FPA11
-hardware, but are handled by the floating point support code. They should
+hardware, but are handled by the floating point support code. They should
be implemented in future versions.
Signalling:
@@ -147,10 +153,10 @@ current_set[0] correctly.
The kernel provided with this distribution (vmlinux-nwfpe-0.93) contains
a fix for this problem and also incorporates the current version of the
emulator directly. It is possible to run with no floating point module
-loaded with this kernel. It is provided as a demonstration of the
+loaded with this kernel. It is provided as a demonstration of the
technology and for those who want to do floating point work that depends
on signals. It is not strictly necessary to use the module.
-A module (either the one provided by Russell King, or the one in this
+A module (either the one provided by Russell King, or the one in this
distribution) can be loaded to replace the functionality of the emulator
built into the kernel.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/NOTES b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/notes.rst
similarity index 99%
rename from Documentation/arm/nwfpe/NOTES
rename to Documentation/arm/nwfpe/notes.rst
index 40577b5a49d3..102e55af8439 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/NOTES
+++ b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/notes.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,6 @@
+Notes
+=====
+
There seems to be a problem with exp(double) and our emulator. I haven't
been able to track it down yet. This does not occur with the emulator
supplied by Russell King.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/nwfpe.rst
similarity index 98%
rename from Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README
rename to Documentation/arm/nwfpe/nwfpe.rst
index 771871de0c8b..35cd90dacbff 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/README
+++ b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/nwfpe.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
-This directory contains the version 0.92 test release of the NetWinder
+Introduction
+============
+
+This directory contains the version 0.92 test release of the NetWinder
Floating Point Emulator.
The majority of the code was written by me, Scott Bambrough It is
@@ -31,7 +34,7 @@ SoftFloat to the ARM was done by Phil Blundell, based on an earlier
port of SoftFloat version 1 by Neil Carson for NetBSD/arm32.
The file README.FPE contains a description of what has been implemented
-so far in the emulator. The file TODO contains a information on what
+so far in the emulator. The file TODO contains a information on what
remains to be done, and other ideas for the emulator.
Bug reports, comments, suggestions should be directed to me at
@@ -48,10 +51,11 @@ Legal Notices
The NetWinder Floating Point Emulator is free software. Everything Rebel.com
has written is provided under the GNU GPL. See the file COPYING for copying
-conditions. Excluded from the above is the SoftFloat code. John Hauser's
+conditions. Excluded from the above is the SoftFloat code. John Hauser's
legal notice for SoftFloat is included below.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
SoftFloat Legal Notice
SoftFloat was written by John R. Hauser. This work was made possible in
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/TODO b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/todo.rst
similarity index 75%
rename from Documentation/arm/nwfpe/TODO
rename to Documentation/arm/nwfpe/todo.rst
index 8027061b60eb..393f11b14540 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/TODO
+++ b/Documentation/arm/nwfpe/todo.rst
@@ -1,39 +1,42 @@
TODO LIST
----------
+=========
-POW{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - power
-RPW{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - reverse power
-POL{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - polar angle (arctan2)
+::
-LOG{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base 10
-LGN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base e
-EXP{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - exponent
-SIN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - sine
-COS{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - cosine
-TAN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - tangent
-ASN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arcsine
-ACS{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arccosine
-ATN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arctangent
+ POW{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - power
+ RPW{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - reverse power
+ POL{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, Fn, <Fm,#value> - polar angle (arctan2)
+
+ LOG{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base 10
+ LGN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - logarithm to base e
+ EXP{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - exponent
+ SIN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - sine
+ COS{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - cosine
+ TAN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - tangent
+ ASN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arcsine
+ ACS{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arccosine
+ ATN{cond}<S|D|E>{P,M,Z} Fd, <Fm,#value> - arctangent
These are not implemented. They are not currently issued by the compiler,
and are handled by routines in libc. These are not implemented by the FPA11
-hardware, but are handled by the floating point support code. They should
+hardware, but are handled by the floating point support code. They should
be implemented in future versions.
There are a couple of ways to approach the implementation of these. One
-method would be to use accurate table methods for these routines. I have
+method would be to use accurate table methods for these routines. I have
a couple of papers by S. Gal from IBM's research labs in Haifa, Israel that
seem to promise extreme accuracy (in the order of 99.8%) and reasonable speed.
These methods are used in GLIBC for some of the transcendental functions.
Another approach, which I know little about is CORDIC. This stands for
-Coordinate Rotation Digital Computer, and is a method of computing
+Coordinate Rotation Digital Computer, and is a method of computing
transcendental functions using mostly shifts and adds and a few
multiplications and divisions. The ARM excels at shifts and adds,
-so such a method could be promising, but requires more research to
+so such a method could be promising, but requires more research to
determine if it is feasible.
Rounding Methods
+----------------
The IEEE standard defines 4 rounding modes. Round to nearest is the
default, but rounding to + or - infinity or round to zero are also allowed.
@@ -42,8 +45,8 @@ in a control register. Not so with the ARM FPA11 architecture. To change
the rounding mode one must specify it with each instruction.
This has made porting some benchmarks difficult. It is possible to
-introduce such a capability into the emulator. The FPCR contains
-bits describing the rounding mode. The emulator could be altered to
+introduce such a capability into the emulator. The FPCR contains
+bits describing the rounding mode. The emulator could be altered to
examine a flag, which if set forced it to ignore the rounding mode in
the instruction, and use the mode specified in the bits in the FPCR.
@@ -52,7 +55,8 @@ in the FPCR. This requires a kernel call in ArmLinux, as WFC/RFC are
supervisor only instructions. If anyone has any ideas or comments I
would like to hear them.
-[NOTE: pulled out from some docs on ARM floating point, specifically
+NOTE:
+ pulled out from some docs on ARM floating point, specifically
for the Acorn FPE, but not limited to it:
The floating point control register (FPCR) may only be present in some
@@ -64,4 +68,5 @@ would like to hear them.
Hence, the answer is yes, you could do this, but then you will run a high
risk of becoming isolated if and when hardware FP emulation comes out
- -- Russell].
+
+ -- Russell.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS b/Documentation/arm/omap/dss.rst
similarity index 86%
rename from Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS
rename to Documentation/arm/omap/dss.rst
index 4484e021290e..a40c4d9c717a 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS
+++ b/Documentation/arm/omap/dss.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=========================
OMAP2/3 Display Subsystem
--------------------------
+=========================
This is an almost total rewrite of the OMAP FB driver in drivers/video/omap
(let's call it DSS1). The main differences between DSS1 and DSS2 are DSI,
@@ -190,6 +191,8 @@ trans_key_value transparency color key (RGB24)
default_color default background color (RGB24)
/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display? directory:
+
+=============== =============================================================
ctrl_name Controller name
mirror 0=off, 1=on
update_mode 0=off, 1=auto, 2=manual
@@ -202,6 +205,7 @@ timings Display timings (pixclock,xres/hfp/hbp/hsw,yres/vfp/vbp/vsw)
panel_name
tear_elim Tearing elimination 0=off, 1=on
output_type Output type (video encoder only): "composite" or "svideo"
+=============== =============================================================
There are also some debugfs files at <debugfs>/omapdss/ which show information
about clocks and registers.
@@ -209,22 +213,22 @@ about clocks and registers.
Examples
--------
-The following definitions have been made for the examples below:
+The following definitions have been made for the examples below::
-ovl0=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/overlay0
-ovl1=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/overlay1
-ovl2=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/overlay2
+ ovl0=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/overlay0
+ ovl1=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/overlay1
+ ovl2=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/overlay2
-mgr0=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/manager0
-mgr1=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/manager1
+ mgr0=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/manager0
+ mgr1=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/manager1
-lcd=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display0
-dvi=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display1
-tv=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display2
+ lcd=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display0
+ dvi=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display1
+ tv=/sys/devices/platform/omapdss/display2
-fb0=/sys/class/graphics/fb0
-fb1=/sys/class/graphics/fb1
-fb2=/sys/class/graphics/fb2
+ fb0=/sys/class/graphics/fb0
+ fb1=/sys/class/graphics/fb1
+ fb2=/sys/class/graphics/fb2
Default setup on OMAP3 SDP
--------------------------
@@ -232,55 +236,59 @@ Default setup on OMAP3 SDP
Here's the default setup on OMAP3 SDP board. All planes go to LCD. DVI
and TV-out are not in use. The columns from left to right are:
framebuffers, overlays, overlay managers, displays. Framebuffers are
-handled by omapfb, and the rest by the DSS.
+handled by omapfb, and the rest by the DSS::
-FB0 --- GFX -\ DVI
-FB1 --- VID1 --+- LCD ---- LCD
-FB2 --- VID2 -/ TV ----- TV
+ FB0 --- GFX -\ DVI
+ FB1 --- VID1 --+- LCD ---- LCD
+ FB2 --- VID2 -/ TV ----- TV
Example: Switch from LCD to DVI
-----------------------
-
-w=`cat $dvi/timings | cut -d "," -f 2 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
-h=`cat $dvi/timings | cut -d "," -f 3 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
-
-echo "0" > $lcd/enabled
-echo "" > $mgr0/display
-fbset -fb /dev/fb0 -xres $w -yres $h -vxres $w -vyres $h
-# at this point you have to switch the dvi/lcd dip-switch from the omap board
-echo "dvi" > $mgr0/display
-echo "1" > $dvi/enabled
-
-After this the configuration looks like:
-
-FB0 --- GFX -\ -- DVI
-FB1 --- VID1 --+- LCD -/ LCD
-FB2 --- VID2 -/ TV ----- TV
-
-Example: Clone GFX overlay to LCD and TV
-------------------------------
-w=`cat $tv/timings | cut -d "," -f 2 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
-h=`cat $tv/timings | cut -d "," -f 3 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
+::
-echo "0" > $ovl0/enabled
-echo "0" > $ovl1/enabled
+ w=`cat $dvi/timings | cut -d "," -f 2 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
+ h=`cat $dvi/timings | cut -d "," -f 3 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
-echo "" > $fb1/overlays
-echo "0,1" > $fb0/overlays
+ echo "0" > $lcd/enabled
+ echo "" > $mgr0/display
+ fbset -fb /dev/fb0 -xres $w -yres $h -vxres $w -vyres $h
+ # at this point you have to switch the dvi/lcd dip-switch from the omap board
+ echo "dvi" > $mgr0/display
+ echo "1" > $dvi/enabled
-echo "$w,$h" > $ovl1/output_size
-echo "tv" > $ovl1/manager
+After this the configuration looks like:::
-echo "1" > $ovl0/enabled
-echo "1" > $ovl1/enabled
+ FB0 --- GFX -\ -- DVI
+ FB1 --- VID1 --+- LCD -/ LCD
+ FB2 --- VID2 -/ TV ----- TV
-echo "1" > $tv/enabled
+Example: Clone GFX overlay to LCD and TV
+----------------------------------------
-After this the configuration looks like (only relevant parts shown):
+::
-FB0 +-- GFX ---- LCD ---- LCD
- \- VID1 ---- TV ---- TV
+ w=`cat $tv/timings | cut -d "," -f 2 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
+ h=`cat $tv/timings | cut -d "," -f 3 | cut -d "/" -f 1`
+
+ echo "0" > $ovl0/enabled
+ echo "0" > $ovl1/enabled
+
+ echo "" > $fb1/overlays
+ echo "0,1" > $fb0/overlays
+
+ echo "$w,$h" > $ovl1/output_size
+ echo "tv" > $ovl1/manager
+
+ echo "1" > $ovl0/enabled
+ echo "1" > $ovl1/enabled
+
+ echo "1" > $tv/enabled
+
+After this the configuration looks like (only relevant parts shown)::
+
+ FB0 +-- GFX ---- LCD ---- LCD
+ \- VID1 ---- TV ---- TV
Misc notes
----------
@@ -351,12 +359,14 @@ TODO
DSS locking
Error checking
+
- Lots of checks are missing or implemented just as BUG()
System DMA update for DSI
+
- Can be used for RGB16 and RGB24P modes. Probably not for RGB24U (how
to skip the empty byte?)
OMAP1 support
+
- Not sure if needed
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/omap/index.rst b/Documentation/arm/omap/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..442aecc6f617
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/omap/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+=======
+TI OMAP
+=======
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ omap.rst
+ omap_pm.rst
+ dss.rst
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/README b/Documentation/arm/omap/omap.rst
similarity index 62%
rename from Documentation/arm/OMAP/README
rename to Documentation/arm/omap/omap.rst
index 90c6c57d61e8..f440c0f4613f 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/README
+++ b/Documentation/arm/omap/omap.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,13 @@
+============
+OMAP history
+============
+
This file contains documentation for running mainline
kernel on omaps.
+====== ======================================================
KERNEL NEW DEPENDENCIES
+====== ======================================================
v4.3+ Update is needed for custom .config files to make sure
CONFIG_REGULATOR_PBIAS is enabled for MMC1 to work
properly.
@@ -9,3 +15,4 @@ v4.3+ Update is needed for custom .config files to make sure
v4.18+ Update is needed for custom .config files to make sure
CONFIG_MMC_SDHCI_OMAP is enabled for all MMC instances
to work in DRA7 and K2G based boards.
+====== ======================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm b/Documentation/arm/omap/omap_pm.rst
similarity index 83%
rename from Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm
rename to Documentation/arm/omap/omap_pm.rst
index 4ae915a9f899..a335e4c8ce2c 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/OMAP/omap_pm
+++ b/Documentation/arm/omap/omap_pm.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-
+=====================
The OMAP PM interface
=====================
@@ -31,19 +31,24 @@ Drivers need to express PM parameters which:
This document proposes the OMAP PM interface, including the following
five power management functions for driver code:
-1. Set the maximum MPU wakeup latency:
+1. Set the maximum MPU wakeup latency::
+
(*pdata->set_max_mpu_wakeup_lat)(struct device *dev, unsigned long t)
-2. Set the maximum device wakeup latency:
+2. Set the maximum device wakeup latency::
+
(*pdata->set_max_dev_wakeup_lat)(struct device *dev, unsigned long t)
-3. Set the maximum system DMA transfer start latency (CORE pwrdm):
+3. Set the maximum system DMA transfer start latency (CORE pwrdm)::
+
(*pdata->set_max_sdma_lat)(struct device *dev, long t)
-4. Set the minimum bus throughput needed by a device:
+4. Set the minimum bus throughput needed by a device::
+
(*pdata->set_min_bus_tput)(struct device *dev, u8 agent_id, unsigned long r)
-5. Return the number of times the device has lost context
+5. Return the number of times the device has lost context::
+
(*pdata->get_dev_context_loss_count)(struct device *dev)
@@ -65,12 +70,13 @@ Driver usage of the OMAP PM functions
As the 'pdata' in the above examples indicates, these functions are
exposed to drivers through function pointers in driver .platform_data
-structures. The function pointers are initialized by the board-*.c
+structures. The function pointers are initialized by the `board-*.c`
files to point to the corresponding OMAP PM functions:
-.set_max_dev_wakeup_lat will point to
-omap_pm_set_max_dev_wakeup_lat(), etc. Other architectures which do
-not support these functions should leave these function pointers set
-to NULL. Drivers should use the following idiom:
+
+- set_max_dev_wakeup_lat will point to
+ omap_pm_set_max_dev_wakeup_lat(), etc. Other architectures which do
+ not support these functions should leave these function pointers set
+ to NULL. Drivers should use the following idiom::
if (pdata->set_max_dev_wakeup_lat)
(*pdata->set_max_dev_wakeup_lat)(dev, t);
@@ -81,7 +87,7 @@ becomes accessible. To accomplish this, driver writers should use the
set_max_mpu_wakeup_lat() function to constrain the MPU wakeup
latency, and the set_max_dev_wakeup_lat() function to constrain the
device wakeup latency (from clk_enable() to accessibility). For
-example,
+example::
/* Limit MPU wakeup latency */
if (pdata->set_max_mpu_wakeup_lat)
@@ -116,17 +122,17 @@ specialized cases to convert that input information (OPPs/MPU
frequency) into the form that the underlying power management
implementation needs:
-6. (*pdata->dsp_get_opp_table)(void)
+6. `(*pdata->dsp_get_opp_table)(void)`
-7. (*pdata->dsp_set_min_opp)(u8 opp_id)
+7. `(*pdata->dsp_set_min_opp)(u8 opp_id)`
-8. (*pdata->dsp_get_opp)(void)
+8. `(*pdata->dsp_get_opp)(void)`
-9. (*pdata->cpu_get_freq_table)(void)
+9. `(*pdata->cpu_get_freq_table)(void)`
-10. (*pdata->cpu_set_freq)(unsigned long f)
+10. `(*pdata->cpu_set_freq)(unsigned long f)`
-11. (*pdata->cpu_get_freq)(void)
+11. `(*pdata->cpu_get_freq)(void)`
Customizing OPP for platform
============================
@@ -134,12 +140,15 @@ Defining CONFIG_PM should enable OPP layer for the silicon
and the registration of OPP table should take place automatically.
However, in special cases, the default OPP table may need to be
tweaked, for e.g.:
+
* enable default OPPs which are disabled by default, but which
could be enabled on a platform
* Disable an unsupported OPP on the platform
* Define and add a custom opp table entry
-in these cases, the board file needs to do additional steps as follows:
-arch/arm/mach-omapx/board-xyz.c
+ in these cases, the board file needs to do additional steps as follows:
+
+arch/arm/mach-omapx/board-xyz.c::
+
#include "pm.h"
....
static void __init omap_xyz_init_irq(void)
@@ -150,5 +159,7 @@ arch/arm/mach-omapx/board-xyz.c
/* Do customization to the defaults */
....
}
-NOTE: omapx_opp_init will be omap3_opp_init or as required
-based on the omap family.
+
+NOTE:
+ omapx_opp_init will be omap3_opp_init or as required
+ based on the omap family.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Porting b/Documentation/arm/porting.rst
similarity index 94%
rename from Documentation/arm/Porting
rename to Documentation/arm/porting.rst
index a492233931b9..bd21958bdb2d 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Porting
+++ b/Documentation/arm/porting.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+=======
+Porting
+=======
+
Taken from list archive at http://lists.arm.linux.org.uk/pipermail/linux-arm-kernel/2001-July/004064.html
Initial definitions
@@ -89,8 +93,7 @@ DATAADDR
Virtual address for the kernel data segment. Must not be defined
when using the decompressor.
-VMALLOC_START
-VMALLOC_END
+VMALLOC_START / VMALLOC_END
Virtual addresses bounding the vmalloc() area. There must not be
any static mappings in this area; vmalloc will overwrite them.
The addresses must also be in the kernel segment (see above).
@@ -107,13 +110,13 @@ Architecture Specific Macros
----------------------------
BOOT_MEM(pram,pio,vio)
- `pram' specifies the physical start address of RAM. Must always
+ `pram` specifies the physical start address of RAM. Must always
be present, and should be the same as PHYS_OFFSET.
- `pio' is the physical address of an 8MB region containing IO for
+ `pio` is the physical address of an 8MB region containing IO for
use with the debugging macros in arch/arm/kernel/debug-armv.S.
- `vio' is the virtual address of the 8MB debugging region.
+ `vio` is the virtual address of the 8MB debugging region.
It is expected that the debugging region will be re-initialised
by the architecture specific code later in the code (via the
@@ -132,4 +135,3 @@ MAPIO(func)
INITIRQ(func)
Machine specific function to initialise interrupts.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt b/Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.rst
similarity index 83%
rename from Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.rst
index 0b7cab978c02..ac34e5d7ee44 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/pxa/mfp.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
- MFP Configuration for PXA2xx/PXA3xx Processors
+==============================================
+MFP Configuration for PXA2xx/PXA3xx Processors
+==============================================
Eric Miao <eric.miao@marvell.com>
@@ -6,15 +8,15 @@ MFP stands for Multi-Function Pin, which is the pin-mux logic on PXA3xx and
later PXA series processors. This document describes the existing MFP API,
and how board/platform driver authors could make use of it.
- Basic Concept
-===============
+Basic Concept
+=============
Unlike the GPIO alternate function settings on PXA25x and PXA27x, a new MFP
mechanism is introduced from PXA3xx to completely move the pin-mux functions
out of the GPIO controller. In addition to pin-mux configurations, the MFP
also controls the low power state, driving strength, pull-up/down and event
detection of each pin. Below is a diagram of internal connections between
-the MFP logic and the remaining SoC peripherals:
+the MFP logic and the remaining SoC peripherals::
+--------+
| |--(GPIO19)--+
@@ -69,8 +71,8 @@ NOTE: with such a clear separation of MFP and GPIO, by GPIO<xx> we normally
mean it is a GPIO signal, and by MFP<xxx> or pin xxx, we mean a physical
pad (or ball).
- MFP API Usage
-===============
+MFP API Usage
+=============
For board code writers, here are some guidelines:
@@ -94,9 +96,9 @@ For board code writers, here are some guidelines:
PXA310 supporting some additional ones), thus the difference is actually
covered in a single mfp-pxa300.h.
-2. prepare an array for the initial pin configurations, e.g.:
+2. prepare an array for the initial pin configurations, e.g.::
- static unsigned long mainstone_pin_config[] __initdata = {
+ static unsigned long mainstone_pin_config[] __initdata = {
/* Chip Select */
GPIO15_nCS_1,
@@ -116,7 +118,7 @@ For board code writers, here are some guidelines:
/* GPIO */
GPIO1_GPIO | WAKEUP_ON_EDGE_BOTH,
- };
+ };
a) once the pin configurations are passed to pxa{2xx,3xx}_mfp_config(),
and written to the actual registers, they are useless and may discard,
@@ -143,17 +145,17 @@ For board code writers, here are some guidelines:
d) although PXA3xx MFP supports edge detection on each pin, the
internal logic will only wakeup the system when those specific bits
in ADxER registers are set, which can be well mapped to the
- corresponding peripheral, thus set_irq_wake() can be called with
+ corresponding peripheral, thus set_irq_wake() can be called with
the peripheral IRQ to enable the wakeup.
- MFP on PXA3xx
-===============
+MFP on PXA3xx
+=============
Every external I/O pad on PXA3xx (excluding those for special purpose) has
one MFP logic associated, and is controlled by one MFP register (MFPR).
-The MFPR has the following bit definitions (for PXA300/PXA310/PXA320):
+The MFPR has the following bit definitions (for PXA300/PXA310/PXA320)::
31 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
+-------------------------+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+--+
@@ -183,8 +185,8 @@ The MFPR has the following bit definitions (for PXA300/PXA310/PXA320):
0b006 - slow 10mA
0b007 - fast 10mA
- MFP Design for PXA2xx/PXA3xx
-==============================
+MFP Design for PXA2xx/PXA3xx
+============================
Due to the difference of pin-mux handling between PXA2xx and PXA3xx, a unified
MFP API is introduced to cover both series of processors.
@@ -194,11 +196,11 @@ configurations, these definitions are processor and platform independent, and
the actual API invoked to convert these definitions into register settings and
make them effective there-after.
- Files Involved
- --------------
+Files Involved
+--------------
- arch/arm/mach-pxa/include/mach/mfp.h
-
+
for
1. Unified pin definitions - enum constants for all configurable pins
2. processor-neutral bit definitions for a possible MFP configuration
@@ -226,42 +228,42 @@ make them effective there-after.
for implementation of the pin configuration to take effect for the actual
processor.
- Pin Configuration
- -----------------
+Pin Configuration
+-----------------
The following comments are copied from mfp.h (see the actual source code
- for most updated info)
-
- /*
- * a possible MFP configuration is represented by a 32-bit integer
- *
- * bit 0.. 9 - MFP Pin Number (1024 Pins Maximum)
- * bit 10..12 - Alternate Function Selection
- * bit 13..15 - Drive Strength
- * bit 16..18 - Low Power Mode State
- * bit 19..20 - Low Power Mode Edge Detection
- * bit 21..22 - Run Mode Pull State
- *
- * to facilitate the definition, the following macros are provided
- *
- * MFP_CFG_DEFAULT - default MFP configuration value, with
- * alternate function = 0,
- * drive strength = fast 3mA (MFP_DS03X)
- * low power mode = default
- * edge detection = none
- *
- * MFP_CFG - default MFPR value with alternate function
- * MFP_CFG_DRV - default MFPR value with alternate function and
- * pin drive strength
- * MFP_CFG_LPM - default MFPR value with alternate function and
- * low power mode
- * MFP_CFG_X - default MFPR value with alternate function,
- * pin drive strength and low power mode
- */
+ for most updated info)::
- Examples of pin configurations are:
+ /*
+ * a possible MFP configuration is represented by a 32-bit integer
+ *
+ * bit 0.. 9 - MFP Pin Number (1024 Pins Maximum)
+ * bit 10..12 - Alternate Function Selection
+ * bit 13..15 - Drive Strength
+ * bit 16..18 - Low Power Mode State
+ * bit 19..20 - Low Power Mode Edge Detection
+ * bit 21..22 - Run Mode Pull State
+ *
+ * to facilitate the definition, the following macros are provided
+ *
+ * MFP_CFG_DEFAULT - default MFP configuration value, with
+ * alternate function = 0,
+ * drive strength = fast 3mA (MFP_DS03X)
+ * low power mode = default
+ * edge detection = none
+ *
+ * MFP_CFG - default MFPR value with alternate function
+ * MFP_CFG_DRV - default MFPR value with alternate function and
+ * pin drive strength
+ * MFP_CFG_LPM - default MFPR value with alternate function and
+ * low power mode
+ * MFP_CFG_X - default MFPR value with alternate function,
+ * pin drive strength and low power mode
+ */
- #define GPIO94_SSP3_RXD MFP_CFG_X(GPIO94, AF1, DS08X, FLOAT)
+ Examples of pin configurations are::
+
+ #define GPIO94_SSP3_RXD MFP_CFG_X(GPIO94, AF1, DS08X, FLOAT)
which reads GPIO94 can be configured as SSP3_RXD, with alternate function
selection of 1, driving strength of 0b101, and a float state in low power
@@ -272,8 +274,8 @@ make them effective there-after.
do so, simply because this default setting is usually carefully encoded,
and is supposed to work in most cases.
- Register Settings
- -----------------
+Register Settings
+-----------------
Register settings on PXA3xx for a pin configuration is actually very
straight-forward, most bits can be converted directly into MFPR value
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/adsbitsy.rst
similarity index 90%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/adsbitsy.rst
index f9f62e8c0719..c179cb26b682 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/ADSBitsy
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/adsbitsy.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,7 @@
+===============================
ADS Bitsy Single Board Computer
+===============================
+
(It is different from Bitsy(iPAQ) of Compaq)
For more details, contact Applied Data Systems or see
@@ -15,7 +18,9 @@ The kernel zImage is linked to be loaded and executed at 0xc0400000.
Linux can be used with the ADS BootLoader that ships with the
newer rev boards. See their documentation on how to load Linux.
-Supported peripherals:
+Supported peripherals
+=====================
+
- SA1100 LCD frame buffer (8/16bpp...sort of)
- SA1111 USB Master
- SA1100 serial port
@@ -25,10 +30,13 @@ Supported peripherals:
- serial ports (ttyS[0-2])
- ttyS0 is default for serial console
-To do:
+To do
+=====
+
- everything else! :-)
-Notes:
+Notes
+=====
- The flash on board is divided into 3 partitions.
You should be careful to use flash on board.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Assabet b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/assabet.rst
similarity index 62%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/Assabet
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/assabet.rst
index e08a6739e72c..3e704831c311 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Assabet
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/assabet.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+============================================
The Intel Assabet (SA-1110 evaluation) board
============================================
@@ -11,7 +12,7 @@ http://www.cs.cmu.edu/~wearable/software/assabet.html
Building the kernel
-------------------
-To build the kernel with current defaults:
+To build the kernel with current defaults::
make assabet_config
make oldconfig
@@ -51,9 +52,9 @@ Brief examples on how to boot Linux with RedBoot are shown below. But first
you need to have RedBoot installed in your flash memory. A known to work
precompiled RedBoot binary is available from the following location:
-ftp://ftp.netwinder.org/users/n/nico/
-ftp://ftp.arm.linux.org.uk/pub/linux/arm/people/nico/
-ftp://ftp.handhelds.org/pub/linux/arm/sa-1100-patches/
+- ftp://ftp.netwinder.org/users/n/nico/
+- ftp://ftp.arm.linux.org.uk/pub/linux/arm/people/nico/
+- ftp://ftp.handhelds.org/pub/linux/arm/sa-1100-patches/
Look for redboot-assabet*.tgz. Some installation infos are provided in
redboot-assabet*.txt.
@@ -71,12 +72,12 @@ Socket Communications Inc.), you should strongly consider using it for TFTP
file transfers. You must insert it before RedBoot runs since it can't detect
it dynamically.
-To initialize the flash directory:
+To initialize the flash directory::
fis init -f
To initialize the non-volatile settings, like whether you want to use BOOTP or
-a static IP address, etc, use this command:
+a static IP address, etc, use this command::
fconfig -i
@@ -85,15 +86,15 @@ Writing a kernel image into flash
---------------------------------
First, the kernel image must be loaded into RAM. If you have the zImage file
-available on a TFTP server:
+available on a TFTP server::
load zImage -r -b 0x100000
-If you rather want to use Y-Modem upload over the serial port:
+If you rather want to use Y-Modem upload over the serial port::
load -m ymodem -r -b 0x100000
-To write it to flash:
+To write it to flash::
fis create "Linux kernel" -b 0x100000 -l 0xc0000
@@ -102,18 +103,18 @@ Booting the kernel
------------------
The kernel still requires a filesystem to boot. A ramdisk image can be loaded
-as follows:
+as follows::
load ramdisk_image.gz -r -b 0x800000
Again, Y-Modem upload can be used instead of TFTP by replacing the file name
by '-y ymodem'.
-Now the kernel can be retrieved from flash like this:
+Now the kernel can be retrieved from flash like this::
fis load "Linux kernel"
-or loaded as described previously. To boot the kernel:
+or loaded as described previously. To boot the kernel::
exec -b 0x100000 -l 0xc0000
@@ -134,35 +135,35 @@ creating JFFS/JFFS2 images is available from the same site.
For instance, a sample JFFS2 image can be retrieved from the same FTP sites
mentioned below for the precompiled RedBoot image.
-To load this file:
+To load this file::
load sample_img.jffs2 -r -b 0x100000
-The result should look like:
+The result should look like::
-RedBoot> load sample_img.jffs2 -r -b 0x100000
-Raw file loaded 0x00100000-0x00377424
+ RedBoot> load sample_img.jffs2 -r -b 0x100000
+ Raw file loaded 0x00100000-0x00377424
-Now we must know the size of the unallocated flash:
+Now we must know the size of the unallocated flash::
fis free
-Result:
+Result::
-RedBoot> fis free
- 0x500E0000 .. 0x503C0000
+ RedBoot> fis free
+ 0x500E0000 .. 0x503C0000
The values above may be different depending on the size of the filesystem and
the type of flash. See their usage below as an example and take care of
substituting yours appropriately.
-We must determine some values:
+We must determine some values::
-size of unallocated flash: 0x503c0000 - 0x500e0000 = 0x2e0000
-size of the filesystem image: 0x00377424 - 0x00100000 = 0x277424
+ size of unallocated flash: 0x503c0000 - 0x500e0000 = 0x2e0000
+ size of the filesystem image: 0x00377424 - 0x00100000 = 0x277424
We want to fit the filesystem image of course, but we also want to give it all
-the remaining flash space as well. To write it:
+the remaining flash space as well. To write it::
fis unlock -f 0x500E0000 -l 0x2e0000
fis erase -f 0x500E0000 -l 0x2e0000
@@ -171,32 +172,32 @@ the remaining flash space as well. To write it:
Now the filesystem is associated to a MTD "partition" once Linux has discovered
what they are in the boot process. From Redboot, the 'fis list' command
-displays them:
+displays them::
-RedBoot> fis list
-Name FLASH addr Mem addr Length Entry point
-RedBoot 0x50000000 0x50000000 0x00020000 0x00000000
-RedBoot config 0x503C0000 0x503C0000 0x00020000 0x00000000
-FIS directory 0x503E0000 0x503E0000 0x00020000 0x00000000
-Linux kernel 0x50020000 0x00100000 0x000C0000 0x00000000
-JFFS2 0x500E0000 0x500E0000 0x002E0000 0x00000000
+ RedBoot> fis list
+ Name FLASH addr Mem addr Length Entry point
+ RedBoot 0x50000000 0x50000000 0x00020000 0x00000000
+ RedBoot config 0x503C0000 0x503C0000 0x00020000 0x00000000
+ FIS directory 0x503E0000 0x503E0000 0x00020000 0x00000000
+ Linux kernel 0x50020000 0x00100000 0x000C0000 0x00000000
+ JFFS2 0x500E0000 0x500E0000 0x002E0000 0x00000000
-However Linux should display something like:
+However Linux should display something like::
-SA1100 flash: probing 32-bit flash bus
-SA1100 flash: Found 2 x16 devices at 0x0 in 32-bit mode
-Using RedBoot partition definition
-Creating 5 MTD partitions on "SA1100 flash":
-0x00000000-0x00020000 : "RedBoot"
-0x00020000-0x000e0000 : "Linux kernel"
-0x000e0000-0x003c0000 : "JFFS2"
-0x003c0000-0x003e0000 : "RedBoot config"
-0x003e0000-0x00400000 : "FIS directory"
+ SA1100 flash: probing 32-bit flash bus
+ SA1100 flash: Found 2 x16 devices at 0x0 in 32-bit mode
+ Using RedBoot partition definition
+ Creating 5 MTD partitions on "SA1100 flash":
+ 0x00000000-0x00020000 : "RedBoot"
+ 0x00020000-0x000e0000 : "Linux kernel"
+ 0x000e0000-0x003c0000 : "JFFS2"
+ 0x003c0000-0x003e0000 : "RedBoot config"
+ 0x003e0000-0x00400000 : "FIS directory"
What's important here is the position of the partition we are interested in,
which is the third one. Within Linux, this correspond to /dev/mtdblock2.
Therefore to boot Linux with the kernel and its root filesystem in flash, we
-need this RedBoot command:
+need this RedBoot command::
fis load "Linux kernel"
exec -b 0x100000 -l 0xc0000 -c "root=/dev/mtdblock2"
@@ -218,21 +219,21 @@ time the Assabet is rebooted. Therefore it's possible to automate the boot
process using RedBoot's scripting capability.
For example, I use this to boot Linux with both the kernel and the ramdisk
-images retrieved from a TFTP server on the network:
+images retrieved from a TFTP server on the network::
-RedBoot> fconfig
-Run script at boot: false true
-Boot script:
-Enter script, terminate with empty line
->> load zImage -r -b 0x100000
->> load ramdisk_ks.gz -r -b 0x800000
->> exec -b 0x100000 -l 0xc0000
->>
-Boot script timeout (1000ms resolution): 3
-Use BOOTP for network configuration: true
-GDB connection port: 9000
-Network debug at boot time: false
-Update RedBoot non-volatile configuration - are you sure (y/n)? y
+ RedBoot> fconfig
+ Run script at boot: false true
+ Boot script:
+ Enter script, terminate with empty line
+ >> load zImage -r -b 0x100000
+ >> load ramdisk_ks.gz -r -b 0x800000
+ >> exec -b 0x100000 -l 0xc0000
+ >>
+ Boot script timeout (1000ms resolution): 3
+ Use BOOTP for network configuration: true
+ GDB connection port: 9000
+ Network debug at boot time: false
+ Update RedBoot non-volatile configuration - are you sure (y/n)? y
Then, rebooting the Assabet is just a matter of waiting for the login prompt.
@@ -240,6 +241,7 @@ Then, rebooting the Assabet is just a matter of waiting for the login prompt.
Nicolas Pitre
nico@fluxnic.net
+
June 12, 2001
@@ -249,52 +251,51 @@ Status of peripherals in -rmk tree (updated 14/10/2001)
Assabet:
Serial ports:
Radio: TX, RX, CTS, DSR, DCD, RI
- PM: Not tested.
- COM: TX, RX, CTS, DSR, DCD, RTS, DTR, PM
- PM: Not tested.
- I2C: Implemented, not fully tested.
- L3: Fully tested, pass.
- PM: Not tested.
+ - PM: Not tested.
+ - COM: TX, RX, CTS, DSR, DCD, RTS, DTR, PM
+ - PM: Not tested.
+ - I2C: Implemented, not fully tested.
+ - L3: Fully tested, pass.
+ - PM: Not tested.
Video:
- LCD: Fully tested. PM
- (LCD doesn't like being blanked with
- neponset connected)
- Video out: Not fully
+ - LCD: Fully tested. PM
+
+ (LCD doesn't like being blanked with neponset connected)
+
+ - Video out: Not fully
Audio:
UDA1341:
- Playback: Fully tested, pass.
- Record: Implemented, not tested.
- PM: Not tested.
+ - Playback: Fully tested, pass.
+ - Record: Implemented, not tested.
+ - PM: Not tested.
UCB1200:
- Audio play: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- Audio rec: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- Telco audio play: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- Telco audio rec: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- POTS control: No
- Touchscreen: Yes
- PM: Not tested.
+ - Audio play: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - Audio rec: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - Telco audio play: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - Telco audio rec: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - POTS control: No
+ - Touchscreen: Yes
+ - PM: Not tested.
Other:
- PCMCIA:
- LPE: Fully tested, pass.
- USB: No
- IRDA:
- SIR: Fully tested, pass.
- FIR: Fully tested, pass.
- PM: Not tested.
+ - PCMCIA:
+ - LPE: Fully tested, pass.
+ - USB: No
+ - IRDA:
+ - SIR: Fully tested, pass.
+ - FIR: Fully tested, pass.
+ - PM: Not tested.
Neponset:
Serial ports:
- COM1,2: TX, RX, CTS, DSR, DCD, RTS, DTR
- PM: Not tested.
- USB: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- PCMCIA: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- PM: Not tested.
- CF: Implemented, not heavily tested.
- PM: Not tested.
+ - COM1,2: TX, RX, CTS, DSR, DCD, RTS, DTR
+ - PM: Not tested.
+ - USB: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - PCMCIA: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - CF: Implemented, not heavily tested.
+ - PM: Not tested.
More stuff can be found in the -np (Nicolas Pitre's) tree.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Brutus b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/brutus.rst
similarity index 75%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/Brutus
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/brutus.rst
index 6a3aa95e9bfd..e1a23bee6d44 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Brutus
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/brutus.rst
@@ -1,9 +1,13 @@
-Brutus is an evaluation platform for the SA1100 manufactured by Intel.
+======
+Brutus
+======
+
+Brutus is an evaluation platform for the SA1100 manufactured by Intel.
For more details, see:
http://developer.intel.com
-To compile for Brutus, you must issue the following commands:
+To compile for Brutus, you must issue the following commands::
make brutus_config
make config
@@ -16,25 +20,23 @@ must be loaded at 0xc0008000 in Brutus's memory and execution started at
entry.
But prior to execute the kernel, a ramdisk image must also be loaded in
-memory. Use memory address 0xd8000000 for this. Note that the file
+memory. Use memory address 0xd8000000 for this. Note that the file
containing the (compressed) ramdisk image must not exceed 4 MB.
Typically, you'll need angelboot to load the kernel.
-The following angelboot.opt file should be used:
+The following angelboot.opt file should be used::
------ begin angelboot.opt -----
-base 0xc0008000
-entry 0xc0008000
-r0 0x00000000
-r1 0x00000010
-device /dev/ttyS0
-options "9600 8N1"
-baud 115200
-otherfile ramdisk_img.gz
-otherbase 0xd8000000
------ end angelboot.opt -----
+ base 0xc0008000
+ entry 0xc0008000
+ r0 0x00000000
+ r1 0x00000010
+ device /dev/ttyS0
+ options "9600 8N1"
+ baud 115200
+ otherfile ramdisk_img.gz
+ otherbase 0xd8000000
-Then load the kernel and ramdisk with:
+Then load the kernel and ramdisk with::
angelboot -f angelboot.opt zImage
@@ -44,14 +46,16 @@ console is provided through the second Brutus serial port. To access it,
you may use minicom configured with /dev/ttyS1, 9600 baud, 8N1, no flow
control.
-Currently supported:
+Currently supported
+===================
+
- RS232 serial ports
- audio output
- LCD screen
- keyboard
-
-The actual Brutus support may not be complete without extra patches.
-If such patches exist, they should be found from
+
+The actual Brutus support may not be complete without extra patches.
+If such patches exist, they should be found from
ftp.netwinder.org/users/n/nico.
A full PCMCIA support is still missing, although it's possible to hack
@@ -63,4 +67,3 @@ Any contribution is welcome.
Please send patches to nico@fluxnic.net
Have Fun !
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/CERF b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/cerf.rst
similarity index 91%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/CERF
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/cerf.rst
index b3d845301ef1..7fa71b609bf9 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/CERF
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/cerf.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+==============
+CerfBoard/Cube
+==============
+
*** The StrongARM version of the CerfBoard/Cube has been discontinued ***
The Intrinsyc CerfBoard is a StrongARM 1110-based computer on a board
@@ -9,7 +13,9 @@ Intrinsyc website, http://www.intrinsyc.com.
This document describes the support in the Linux kernel for the
Intrinsyc CerfBoard.
-Supported in this version:
+Supported in this version
+=========================
+
- CompactFlash+ slot (select PCMCIA in General Setup and any options
that may be required)
- Onboard Crystal CS8900 Ethernet controller (Cerf CS8900A support in
@@ -19,7 +25,7 @@ Supported in this version:
In order to get this kernel onto your Cerf, you need a server that runs
both BOOTP and TFTP. Detailed instructions should have come with your
evaluation kit on how to use the bootloader. This series of commands
-will suffice:
+will suffice::
make ARCH=arm CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux- cerfcube_defconfig
make ARCH=arm CROSS_COMPILE=arm-linux- zImage
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sa1100/freebird.rst b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/freebird.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..81043d0c6d64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/freebird.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+========
+Freebird
+========
+
+Freebird-1.1 is produced by Legend(C), Inc.
+`http://web.archive.org/web/*/http://www.legend.com.cn`
+and software/linux maintained by Coventive(C), Inc.
+(http://www.coventive.com)
+
+Based on the Nicolas's strongarm kernel tree.
+
+Maintainer:
+
+Chester Kuo
+ - <chester@coventive.com>
+ - <chester@linux.org.tw>
+
+Author:
+
+- Tim wu <timwu@coventive.com>
+- CIH <cih@coventive.com>
+- Eric Peng <ericpeng@coventive.com>
+- Jeff Lee <jeff_lee@coventive.com>
+- Allen Cheng
+- Tony Liu <tonyliu@coventive.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsClient b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/graphicsclient.rst
similarity index 87%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsClient
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/graphicsclient.rst
index 867bb35943af..a73d61c3ce91 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsClient
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/graphicsclient.rst
@@ -1,9 +1,11 @@
+=============================================
ADS GraphicsClient Plus Single Board Computer
+=============================================
For more details, contact Applied Data Systems or see
http://www.applieddata.net/products.html
-The original Linux support for this product has been provided by
+The original Linux support for this product has been provided by
Nicolas Pitre <nico@fluxnic.net>. Continued development work by
Woojung Huh <whuh@applieddata.net>
@@ -14,8 +16,8 @@ board supports MTD/JFFS, so you could also mount something on there.
Use 'make graphicsclient_config' before any 'make config'. This will set up
defaults for GraphicsClient Plus support.
-The kernel zImage is linked to be loaded and executed at 0xc0200000.
-Also the following registers should have the specified values upon entry:
+The kernel zImage is linked to be loaded and executed at 0xc0200000.
+Also the following registers should have the specified values upon entry::
r0 = 0
r1 = 29 (this is the GraphicsClient architecture number)
@@ -31,23 +33,21 @@ as outlined below. In any case, if you're planning on deploying
something en masse, you should probably get the newer board.
If using Angel on the older boards, here is a typical angel.opt option file
-if the kernel is loaded through the Angel Debug Monitor:
+if the kernel is loaded through the Angel Debug Monitor::
------ begin angelboot.opt -----
-base 0xc0200000
-entry 0xc0200000
-r0 0x00000000
-r1 0x0000001d
-device /dev/ttyS1
-options "38400 8N1"
-baud 115200
-#otherfile ramdisk.gz
-#otherbase 0xc0800000
-exec minicom
------ end angelboot.opt -----
+ base 0xc0200000
+ entry 0xc0200000
+ r0 0x00000000
+ r1 0x0000001d
+ device /dev/ttyS1
+ options "38400 8N1"
+ baud 115200
+ #otherfile ramdisk.gz
+ #otherbase 0xc0800000
+ exec minicom
Then the kernel (and ramdisk if otherfile/otherbase lines above are
-uncommented) would be loaded with:
+uncommented) would be loaded with::
angelboot -f angelboot.opt zImage
@@ -59,7 +59,9 @@ If any other bootloader is used, ensure it accomplish the same, especially
for r0/r1 register values before jumping into the kernel.
-Supported peripherals:
+Supported peripherals
+=====================
+
- SA1100 LCD frame buffer (8/16bpp...sort of)
- on-board SMC 92C96 ethernet NIC
- SA1100 serial port
@@ -74,11 +76,14 @@ Supported peripherals:
See http://www.eurotech-inc.com/linux-sbc.asp for IOCTL documentation
and example user space code. ps/2 keybd is multiplexed through this driver
-To do:
+To do
+=====
+
- UCB1200 audio with new ucb_generic layer
- everything else! :-)
-Notes:
+Notes
+=====
- The flash on board is divided into 3 partitions. mtd0 is where
the ADS boot ROM and zImage is stored. It's been marked as
@@ -95,4 +100,3 @@ Notes:
fixed soon.
Any contribution can be sent to nico@fluxnic.net and will be greatly welcome!
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsMaster b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/graphicsmaster.rst
similarity index 92%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsMaster
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/graphicsmaster.rst
index 9145088a0ba2..e39892514f0c 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/GraphicsMaster
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/graphicsmaster.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+========================================
ADS GraphicsMaster Single Board Computer
+========================================
For more details, contact Applied Data Systems or see
http://www.applieddata.net/products.html
@@ -15,7 +17,9 @@ The kernel zImage is linked to be loaded and executed at 0xc0400000.
Linux can be used with the ADS BootLoader that ships with the
newer rev boards. See their documentation on how to load Linux.
-Supported peripherals:
+Supported peripherals
+=====================
+
- SA1100 LCD frame buffer (8/16bpp...sort of)
- SA1111 USB Master
- on-board SMC 92C96 ethernet NIC
@@ -31,10 +35,13 @@ Supported peripherals:
See http://www.eurotech-inc.com/linux-sbc.asp for IOCTL documentation
and example user space code. ps/2 keybd is multiplexed through this driver
-To do:
+To do
+=====
+
- everything else! :-)
-Notes:
+Notes
+=====
- The flash on board is divided into 3 partitions. mtd0 is where
the zImage is stored. It's been marked as read-only to keep you
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/HUW_WEBPANEL b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/huw_webpanel.rst
similarity index 78%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/HUW_WEBPANEL
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/huw_webpanel.rst
index fd56b48d4833..1dc7ccb165f0 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/HUW_WEBPANEL
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/huw_webpanel.rst
@@ -1,9 +1,14 @@
+=======================
+Hoeft & Wessel Webpanel
+=======================
+
The HUW_WEBPANEL is a product of the german company Hoeft & Wessel AG
If you want more information, please visit
http://www.hoeft-wessel.de
-To build the kernel:
+To build the kernel::
+
make huw_webpanel_config
make oldconfig
[accept all defaults]
@@ -14,4 +19,3 @@ Roman Jordan jor@hoeft-wessel.de
Christoph Schulz schu@hoeft-wessel.de
2000/12/18/
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sa1100/index.rst b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..fb2385b3accf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,23 @@
+====================
+Intel StrongARM 1100
+====================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ adsbitsy
+ assabet
+ brutus
+ cerf
+ freebird
+ graphicsclient
+ graphicsmaster
+ huw_webpanel
+ itsy
+ lart
+ nanoengine
+ pangolin
+ pleb
+ serial_uart
+ tifon
+ yopy
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Itsy b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/itsy.rst
similarity index 88%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/Itsy
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/itsy.rst
index 44b94997fa0d..f49896ba3ef1 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Itsy
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/itsy.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+====
+Itsy
+====
+
Itsy is a research project done by the Western Research Lab, and Systems
Research Center in Palo Alto, CA. The Itsy project is one of several
research projects at Compaq that are related to pocket computing.
@@ -7,6 +11,7 @@ For more information, see:
http://www.hpl.hp.com/downloads/crl/itsy/
Notes on initial 2.4 Itsy support (8/27/2000) :
+
The port was done on an Itsy version 1.5 machine with a daughtercard with
64 Meg of DRAM and 32 Meg of Flash. The initial work includes support for
serial console (to see what you're doing). No other devices have been
@@ -18,8 +23,10 @@ Finally, you will need to cd to arch/arm/boot/tools and execute a make there
to build the params-itsy program used to boot the kernel.
In order to install the port of 2.4 to the itsy, You will need to set the
-configuration parameters in the monitor as follows:
-Arg 1:0x08340000, Arg2: 0xC0000000, Arg3:18 (0x12), Arg4:0
+configuration parameters in the monitor as follows::
+
+ Arg 1:0x08340000, Arg2: 0xC0000000, Arg3:18 (0x12), Arg4:0
+
Make sure the start-routine address is set to 0x00060000.
Next, flash the params-itsy program to 0x00060000 ("p 1 0x00060000" in the
@@ -29,7 +36,8 @@ flash menu) Flash the kernel in arch/arm/boot/zImage into 0x08340000
handhelds.org.
The serial connection we established was at:
- 8-bit data, no parity, 1 stop bit(s), 115200.00 b/s. in the monitor, in the
+
+8-bit data, no parity, 1 stop bit(s), 115200.00 b/s. in the monitor, in the
params-itsy program, and in the kernel itself. This can be changed, but
not easily. The monitor parameters are easily changed, the params program
setup is assembly outl's, and the kernel is a configuration item specific to
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/LART b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/lart.rst
similarity index 90%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/LART
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/lart.rst
index 6d412b685598..94c0568d1095 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/LART
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/lart.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+====================================
Linux Advanced Radio Terminal (LART)
-------------------------------------
+====================================
The LART is a small (7.5 x 10cm) SA-1100 board, designed for embedded
applications. It has 32 MB DRAM, 4MB Flash ROM, double RS232 and all
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/nanoEngine b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/nanoengine.rst
similarity index 74%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/nanoEngine
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/nanoengine.rst
index 48a7934f95f6..47f1a14cf98a 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/nanoEngine
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/nanoengine.rst
@@ -1,11 +1,11 @@
+==========
nanoEngine
-----------
+==========
-"nanoEngine" is a SA1110 based single board computer from
+"nanoEngine" is a SA1110 based single board computer from
Bright Star Engineering Inc. See www.brightstareng.com/arm
for more info.
(Ref: Stuart Adams <sja@brightstareng.com>)
Also visit Larry Doolittle's "Linux for the nanoEngine" site:
http://www.brightstareng.com/arm/nanoeng.htm
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Pangolin b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/pangolin.rst
similarity index 81%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/Pangolin
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/pangolin.rst
index 077a6120e129..f0c5c1618553 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Pangolin
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/pangolin.rst
@@ -1,16 +1,22 @@
+========
+Pangolin
+========
+
Pangolin is a StrongARM 1110-based evaluation platform produced
by Dialogue Technology (http://www.dialogue.com.tw/).
It has EISA slots for ease of configuration with SDRAM/Flash
memory card, USB/Serial/Audio card, Compact Flash card,
PCMCIA/IDE card and TFT-LCD card.
-To compile for Pangolin, you must issue the following commands:
+To compile for Pangolin, you must issue the following commands::
make pangolin_config
make oldconfig
make zImage
-Supported peripherals:
+Supported peripherals
+=====================
+
- SA1110 serial port (UART1/UART2/UART3)
- flash memory access
- compact flash driver
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/PLEB b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/pleb.rst
similarity index 95%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/PLEB
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/pleb.rst
index b9c8a631a351..d5b732967aa3 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/PLEB
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/pleb.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+====
+PLEB
+====
+
The PLEB project was started as a student initiative at the School of
Computer Science and Engineering, University of New South Wales to make a
pocket computer capable of running the Linux Kernel.
@@ -7,5 +11,3 @@ PLEB support has yet to be fully integrated.
For more information, see:
http://www.cse.unsw.edu.au
-
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sa1100/serial_uart.rst b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/serial_uart.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..ea983642b9be
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/serial_uart.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+==================
+SA1100 serial port
+==================
+
+The SA1100 serial port had its major/minor numbers officially assigned::
+
+ > Date: Sun, 24 Sep 2000 21:40:27 -0700
+ > From: H. Peter Anvin <hpa@transmeta.com>
+ > To: Nicolas Pitre <nico@CAM.ORG>
+ > Cc: Device List Maintainer <device@lanana.org>
+ > Subject: Re: device
+ >
+ > Okay. Note that device numbers 204 and 205 are used for "low density
+ > serial devices", so you will have a range of minors on those majors (the
+ > tty device layer handles this just fine, so you don't have to worry about
+ > doing anything special.)
+ >
+ > So your assignments are:
+ >
+ > 204 char Low-density serial ports
+ > 5 = /dev/ttySA0 SA1100 builtin serial port 0
+ > 6 = /dev/ttySA1 SA1100 builtin serial port 1
+ > 7 = /dev/ttySA2 SA1100 builtin serial port 2
+ >
+ > 205 char Low-density serial ports (alternate device)
+ > 5 = /dev/cusa0 Callout device for ttySA0
+ > 6 = /dev/cusa1 Callout device for ttySA1
+ > 7 = /dev/cusa2 Callout device for ttySA2
+ >
+
+You must create those inodes in /dev on the root filesystem used
+by your SA1100-based device::
+
+ mknod ttySA0 c 204 5
+ mknod ttySA1 c 204 6
+ mknod ttySA2 c 204 7
+ mknod cusa0 c 205 5
+ mknod cusa1 c 205 6
+ mknod cusa2 c 205 7
+
+In addition to the creation of the appropriate device nodes above, you
+must ensure your user space applications make use of the correct device
+name. The classic example is the content of the /etc/inittab file where
+you might have a getty process started on ttyS0.
+
+In this case:
+
+- replace occurrences of ttyS0 with ttySA0, ttyS1 with ttySA1, etc.
+
+- don't forget to add 'ttySA0', 'console', or the appropriate tty name
+ in /etc/securetty for root to be allowed to login as well.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Tifon b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/tifon.rst
similarity index 88%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/Tifon
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/tifon.rst
index dd1934d9c851..c26e910b9ea7 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Tifon
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/tifon.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
+=====
Tifon
------
+=====
More info has to come...
Contact: Peter Danielsson <peter.danielsson@era-t.ericsson.se>
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Yopy b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/yopy.rst
similarity index 74%
rename from Documentation/arm/SA1100/Yopy
rename to Documentation/arm/sa1100/yopy.rst
index e14f16d836ac..5b35a5f61a44 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SA1100/Yopy
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sa1100/yopy.rst
@@ -1,2 +1,5 @@
-See http://www.yopydeveloper.org for more.
+====
+Yopy
+====
+See http://www.yopydeveloper.org for more.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/cpufreq.rst
similarity index 96%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/cpufreq.rst
index fa968aa99d67..2ddc26c03b1f 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/CPUfreq.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/cpufreq.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C24XX CPUfreq support
- =======================
+=======================
+S3C24XX CPUfreq support
+=======================
Introduction
------------
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/EB2410ITX.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/eb2410itx.rst
similarity index 92%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/EB2410ITX.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/eb2410itx.rst
index b87292e05f2f..7863c93652f8 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/EB2410ITX.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/eb2410itx.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- Simtec Electronics EB2410ITX (BAST)
- ===================================
+===================================
+Simtec Electronics EB2410ITX (BAST)
+===================================
http://www.simtec.co.uk/products/EB2410ITX/
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/gpio.rst
similarity index 89%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/gpio.rst
index e8f918b96123..f7c3d7d011a2 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/gpio.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C24XX GPIO Control
- ====================
+====================
+S3C24XX GPIO Control
+====================
Introduction
------------
@@ -12,7 +13,7 @@ Introduction
of the s3c2410 GPIO system, please read the Samsung provided
data-sheet/users manual to find out the complete list.
- See Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt for the core implementation.
+ See Documentation/arm/samsung/gpio.rst for the core implementation.
GPIOLIB
@@ -26,16 +27,16 @@ GPIOLIB
listed below will be removed (they may be marked as __deprecated
in the near future).
- The following functions now either have a s3c_ specific variant
+ The following functions now either have a `s3c_` specific variant
or are merged into gpiolib. See the definitions in
arch/arm/plat-samsung/include/plat/gpio-cfg.h:
- s3c2410_gpio_setpin() gpio_set_value() or gpio_direction_output()
- s3c2410_gpio_getpin() gpio_get_value() or gpio_direction_input()
- s3c2410_gpio_getirq() gpio_to_irq()
- s3c2410_gpio_cfgpin() s3c_gpio_cfgpin()
- s3c2410_gpio_getcfg() s3c_gpio_getcfg()
- s3c2410_gpio_pullup() s3c_gpio_setpull()
+ - s3c2410_gpio_setpin() gpio_set_value() or gpio_direction_output()
+ - s3c2410_gpio_getpin() gpio_get_value() or gpio_direction_input()
+ - s3c2410_gpio_getirq() gpio_to_irq()
+ - s3c2410_gpio_cfgpin() s3c_gpio_cfgpin()
+ - s3c2410_gpio_getcfg() s3c_gpio_getcfg()
+ - s3c2410_gpio_pullup() s3c_gpio_setpull()
GPIOLIB conversion
@@ -77,7 +78,7 @@ out s3c2410 API, then here are some notes on the process.
6) s3c2410_gpio_getirq() should be directly replaceable with the
gpio_to_irq() call.
-The s3c2410_gpio and gpio_ calls have always operated on the same gpio
+The s3c2410_gpio and `gpio_` calls have always operated on the same gpio
numberspace, so there is no problem with converting the gpio numbering
between the calls.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/h1940.rst
similarity index 94%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/h1940.rst
index b738859b1fc0..62a562c178e3 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/H1940.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/h1940.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- HP IPAQ H1940
- =============
+=============
+HP IPAQ H1940
+=============
http://www.handhelds.org/projects/h1940.html
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/index.rst b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..6c7b241cbf37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+==========================
+Samsung S3C24XX SoC Family
+==========================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ h1940
+ gpio
+ cpufreq
+ suspend
+ usb-host
+ s3c2412
+ eb2410itx
+ nand
+ smdk2440
+ s3c2413
+ overview
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/nand.rst
similarity index 92%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/nand.rst
index bc478a3409b8..938995694ee7 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/nand.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C24XX NAND Support
- ====================
+====================
+S3C24XX NAND Support
+====================
Introduction
------------
@@ -27,4 +28,3 @@ Document Author
---------------
Ben Dooks, Copyright 2007 Simtec Electronics
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/overview.rst
similarity index 94%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/overview.rst
index 00d3c3141e21..e9a1dc7276b5 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C24XX ARM Linux Overview
- ==========================
+==========================
+S3C24XX ARM Linux Overview
+==========================
@@ -182,7 +183,7 @@ NAND
controller. If there are any problems the latest linux-mtd
code can be found from http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/
- For more information see Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/NAND.txt
+ For more information see Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/nand.rst
SD/MMC
@@ -221,8 +222,8 @@ GPIO
As of v2.6.34, the move towards using gpiolib support is almost
complete, and very little of the old calls are left.
- See Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt for the S3C24XX specific
- support and Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt for the core Samsung
+ See Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/gpio.rst for the S3C24XX specific
+ support and Documentation/arm/samsung/gpio.rst for the core Samsung
implementation.
@@ -276,18 +277,18 @@ Platform Data
kmalloc()s an area of memory, and copies the __initdata
and then sets the relevant device's platform data. Making
the function `__init` takes care of ensuring it is discarded
- with the rest of the initialisation code
+ with the rest of the initialisation code::
- static __init void s3c24xx_xxx_set_platdata(struct xxx_data *pd)
- {
- struct s3c2410_xxx_mach_info *npd;
+ static __init void s3c24xx_xxx_set_platdata(struct xxx_data *pd)
+ {
+ struct s3c2410_xxx_mach_info *npd;
npd = kmalloc(sizeof(struct s3c2410_xxx_mach_info), GFP_KERNEL);
if (npd) {
memcpy(npd, pd, sizeof(struct s3c2410_xxx_mach_info));
s3c_device_xxx.dev.platform_data = npd;
} else {
- printk(KERN_ERR "no memory for xxx platform data\n");
+ printk(KERN_ERR "no memory for xxx platform data\n");
}
}
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2412.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/s3c2412.rst
similarity index 96%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2412.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/s3c2412.rst
index dc1fd362d3c1..68b985fc6bf4 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2412.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/s3c2412.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C2412 ARM Linux Overview
- ==========================
+==========================
+S3C2412 ARM Linux Overview
+==========================
Introduction
------------
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2413.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/s3c2413.rst
similarity index 77%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2413.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/s3c2413.rst
index 909bdc7dd7b5..1f51e207fc46 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/S3C2413.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/s3c2413.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C2413 ARM Linux Overview
- ==========================
+==========================
+S3C2413 ARM Linux Overview
+==========================
Introduction
------------
@@ -10,7 +11,7 @@ Introduction
Camera Interface
----------------
+----------------
This block is currently not supported.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/smdk2440.rst
similarity index 94%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/smdk2440.rst
index 429390bd4684..524fd0b4afaf 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/SMDK2440.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/smdk2440.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- Samsung/Meritech SMDK2440
- =========================
+=========================
+Samsung/Meritech SMDK2440
+=========================
Introduction
------------
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/suspend.rst
similarity index 94%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/suspend.rst
index cb4f0c0cdf9d..b4f3ae9fe76e 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/suspend.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C24XX Suspend Support
- =======================
+=======================
+S3C24XX Suspend Support
+=======================
Introduction
@@ -57,16 +58,16 @@ Machine Support
and will end up initialising all compiled machines' pm init!
The following is an example of code used for testing wakeup from
- an falling edge on IRQ_EINT0:
+ an falling edge on IRQ_EINT0::
-static irqreturn_t button_irq(int irq, void *pw)
-{
+ static irqreturn_t button_irq(int irq, void *pw)
+ {
return IRQ_HANDLED;
-}
+ }
-statuc void __init machine_init(void)
-{
+ statuc void __init machine_init(void)
+ {
...
request_irq(IRQ_EINT0, button_irq, IRQF_TRIGGER_FALLING,
@@ -75,7 +76,7 @@ statuc void __init machine_init(void)
enable_irq_wake(IRQ_EINT0);
s3c_pm_init();
-}
+ }
Debugging
@@ -134,4 +135,3 @@ Document Author
---------------
Ben Dooks, Copyright 2004 Simtec Electronics
-
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/usb-host.rst
similarity index 94%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/usb-host.rst
index f82b1faefad5..c84268bd1884 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/USB-Host.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/usb-host.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- S3C24XX USB Host support
- ========================
+========================
+S3C24XX USB Host support
+========================
@@ -13,7 +14,7 @@ Configuration
Enable at least the following kernel options:
- menuconfig:
+ menuconfig::
Device Drivers --->
USB support --->
@@ -22,8 +23,9 @@ Configuration
.config:
- CONFIG_USB
- CONFIG_USB_OHCI_HCD
+
+ - CONFIG_USB
+ - CONFIG_USB_OHCI_HCD
Once these options are configured, the standard set of USB device
@@ -60,17 +62,14 @@ Platform Data
The ports are numbered 0 and 1.
power_control:
-
Called to enable or disable the power on the port.
enable_oc:
-
Called to enable or disable the over-current monitoring.
This should claim or release the resources being used to
check the power condition on the port, such as an IRQ.
report_oc:
-
The OHCI driver fills this field in for the over-current code
to call when there is a change to the over-current state on
an port. The ports argument is a bitmask of 1 bit per port,
@@ -80,7 +79,6 @@ Platform Data
ensure this is called correctly.
port[x]:
-
This is struct describes each port, 0 or 1. The platform driver
should set the flags field of each port to S3C_HCDFLG_USED if
the port is enabled.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Bootloader-interface.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung/bootloader-interface.rst
similarity index 72%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung/Bootloader-interface.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung/bootloader-interface.rst
index d17ed518a7ea..a56f325dae78 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Bootloader-interface.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung/bootloader-interface.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
- Interface between kernel and boot loaders on Exynos boards
- ==========================================================
+==========================================================
+Interface between kernel and boot loaders on Exynos boards
+==========================================================
Author: Krzysztof Kozlowski
+
Date : 6 June 2015
The document tries to describe currently used interface between Linux kernel
@@ -17,8 +19,10 @@ executing kernel.
1. Non-Secure mode
Address: sysram_ns_base_addr
+
+============= ============================================ ==================
Offset Value Purpose
-=============================================================================
+============= ============================================ ==================
0x08 exynos_cpu_resume_ns, mcpm_entry_point System suspend
0x0c 0x00000bad (Magic cookie) System suspend
0x1c exynos4_secondary_startup Secondary CPU boot
@@ -27,22 +31,28 @@ Offset Value Purpose
0x24 exynos_cpu_resume_ns AFTR
0x28 + 4*cpu 0x8 (Magic cookie, Exynos3250) AFTR
0x28 0x0 or last value during resume (Exynos542x) System suspend
+============= ============================================ ==================
2. Secure mode
Address: sysram_base_addr
+
+============= ============================================ ==================
Offset Value Purpose
-=============================================================================
+============= ============================================ ==================
0x00 exynos4_secondary_startup Secondary CPU boot
0x04 exynos4_secondary_startup (Exynos542x) Secondary CPU boot
4*cpu exynos4_secondary_startup (Exynos4412) Secondary CPU boot
0x20 exynos_cpu_resume (Exynos4210 r1.0) AFTR
0x24 0xfcba0d10 (Magic cookie, Exynos4210 r1.0) AFTR
+============= ============================================ ==================
Address: pmu_base_addr
+
+============= ============================================ ==================
Offset Value Purpose
-=============================================================================
+============= ============================================ ==================
0x0800 exynos_cpu_resume AFTR, suspend
0x0800 mcpm_entry_point (Exynos542x with MCPM) AFTR, suspend
0x0804 0xfcba0d10 (Magic cookie) AFTR
@@ -50,15 +60,18 @@ Offset Value Purpose
0x0814 exynos4_secondary_startup (Exynos4210 r1.1) Secondary CPU boot
0x0818 0xfcba0d10 (Magic cookie, Exynos4210 r1.1) AFTR
0x081C exynos_cpu_resume (Exynos4210 r1.1) AFTR
-
+============= ============================================ ==================
3. Other (regardless of secure/non-secure mode)
Address: pmu_base_addr
+
+============= =============================== ===============================
Offset Value Purpose
-=============================================================================
+============= =============================== ===============================
0x0908 Non-zero Secondary CPU boot up indicator
on Exynos3250 and Exynos542x
+============= =============================== ===============================
4. Glossary
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/clksrc-change-registers.awk b/Documentation/arm/samsung/clksrc-change-registers.awk
similarity index 100%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung/clksrc-change-registers.awk
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung/clksrc-change-registers.awk
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung/gpio.rst
similarity index 87%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung/gpio.rst
index 795adfd88081..5f7cadd7159e 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/GPIO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung/gpio.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- Samsung GPIO implementation
- ===========================
+===========================
+Samsung GPIO implementation
+===========================
Introduction
------------
@@ -11,7 +12,7 @@ specific calls provided alongside the drivers/gpio core.
S3C24XX (Legacy)
----------------
-See Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/GPIO.txt for more information
+See Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/gpio.rst for more information
about these devices. Their implementation has been brought into line
with the core samsung implementation described in this document.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/samsung/index.rst b/Documentation/arm/samsung/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..f54d95734362
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,10 @@
+===========
+Samsung SoC
+===========
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ gpio
+ bootloader-interface
+ overview
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/samsung/overview.rst
similarity index 86%
rename from Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/samsung/overview.rst
index 8f7309bad460..e74307897416 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Samsung/Overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/samsung/overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- Samsung ARM Linux Overview
- ==========================
+==========================
+Samsung ARM Linux Overview
+==========================
Introduction
------------
@@ -11,7 +12,7 @@ Introduction
The currently supported SoCs are:
- - S3C24XX: See Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt for full list
+ - S3C24XX: See Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/overview.rst for full list
- S3C64XX: S3C6400 and S3C6410
- S5PC110 / S5PV210
@@ -22,7 +23,7 @@ S3C24XX Systems
There is still documentation in Documnetation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/ which
deals with the architecture and drivers specific to these devices.
- See Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Overview.txt for more information
+ See Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/overview.rst for more information
on the implementation details and specific support.
@@ -32,8 +33,10 @@ Configuration
A number of configurations are supplied, as there is no current way of
unifying all the SoCs into one kernel.
- s5pc110_defconfig - S5PC110 specific default configuration
- s5pv210_defconfig - S5PV210 specific default configuration
+ s5pc110_defconfig
+ - S5PC110 specific default configuration
+ s5pv210_defconfig
+ - S5PV210 specific default configuration
Layout
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/Setup b/Documentation/arm/setup.rst
similarity index 87%
rename from Documentation/arm/Setup
rename to Documentation/arm/setup.rst
index 0cb1e64bde80..8e12ef3fb9a7 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/Setup
+++ b/Documentation/arm/setup.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=============================================
Kernel initialisation parameters on ARM Linux
----------------------------------------------
+=============================================
The following document describes the kernel initialisation parameter
structure, otherwise known as 'struct param_struct' which is used
@@ -14,12 +15,10 @@ There are a lot of parameters listed in there, and they are described
below:
page_size
-
This parameter must be set to the page size of the machine, and
will be checked by the kernel.
nr_pages
-
This is the total number of pages of memory in the system. If
the memory is banked, then this should contain the total number
of pages in the system.
@@ -28,24 +27,22 @@ below:
include this information.
ramdisk_size
-
This is now obsolete, and should not be used.
flags
-
Various kernel flags, including:
- bit 0 - 1 = mount root read only
- bit 1 - unused
- bit 2 - 0 = load ramdisk
- bit 3 - 0 = prompt for ramdisk
+
+ ===== ========================
+ bit 0 1 = mount root read only
+ bit 1 unused
+ bit 2 0 = load ramdisk
+ bit 3 0 = prompt for ramdisk
+ ===== ========================
rootdev
-
major/minor number pair of device to mount as the root filesystem.
- video_num_cols
- video_num_rows
-
+ video_num_cols / video_num_rows
These two together describe the character size of the dummy console,
or VGA console character size. They should not be used for any other
purpose.
@@ -54,66 +51,50 @@ below:
the equivalent character size of your fbcon display. This then allows
all the bootup messages to be displayed correctly.
- video_x
- video_y
-
+ video_x / video_y
This describes the character position of cursor on VGA console, and
is otherwise unused. (should not be used for other console types, and
should not be used for other purposes).
memc_control_reg
-
MEMC chip control register for Acorn Archimedes and Acorn A5000
based machines. May be used differently by different architectures.
sounddefault
-
Default sound setting on Acorn machines. May be used differently by
different architectures.
adfsdrives
-
Number of ADFS/MFM disks. May be used differently by different
architectures.
- bytes_per_char_h
- bytes_per_char_v
-
+ bytes_per_char_h / bytes_per_char_v
These are now obsolete, and should not be used.
pages_in_bank[4]
-
Number of pages in each bank of the systems memory (used for RiscPC).
This is intended to be used on systems where the physical memory
is non-contiguous from the processors point of view.
pages_in_vram
-
Number of pages in VRAM (used on Acorn RiscPC). This value may also
be used by loaders if the size of the video RAM can't be obtained
from the hardware.
- initrd_start
- initrd_size
-
+ initrd_start / initrd_size
This describes the kernel virtual start address and size of the
initial ramdisk.
rd_start
-
Start address in sectors of the ramdisk image on a floppy disk.
system_rev
-
system revision number.
- system_serial_low
- system_serial_high
-
+ system_serial_low / system_serial_high
system 64-bit serial number
mem_fclk_21285
-
The speed of the external oscillator to the 21285 (footbridge),
which control's the speed of the memory bus, timer & serial port.
Depending upon the speed of the cpu its value can be between
@@ -121,9 +102,7 @@ below:
then a value of 50 Mhz is the default on 21285 architectures.
paths[8][128]
-
These are now obsolete, and should not be used.
commandline
-
Kernel command line parameters. Details can be found elsewhere.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/.gitignore b/Documentation/arm/sh-mobile/.gitignore
similarity index 100%
rename from Documentation/arm/SH-Mobile/.gitignore
rename to Documentation/arm/sh-mobile/.gitignore
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/spear/overview.rst
similarity index 91%
rename from Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/spear/overview.rst
index 1b049be6c84f..8a1a87aca427 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/SPEAr/overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/spear/overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- SPEAr ARM Linux Overview
- ==========================
+========================
+SPEAr ARM Linux Overview
+========================
Introduction
------------
@@ -30,17 +31,18 @@ Introduction
- SPEAr1340 (SOC)
- SPEAr1340 Evaluation Board
- Configuration
- -------------
+Configuration
+-------------
A generic configuration is provided for each machine, and can be used as the
- default by
+ default by::
+
make spear13xx_defconfig
make spear3xx_defconfig
make spear6xx_defconfig
- Layout
- ------
+Layout
+------
The common files for multiple machine families (SPEAr3xx, SPEAr6xx and
SPEAr13xx) are located in the platform code contained in arch/arm/plat-spear
@@ -57,7 +59,7 @@ Introduction
support Flattened Device Tree.
- Document Author
- ---------------
+Document Author
+---------------
Viresh Kumar <vireshk@kernel.org>, (c) 2010-2012 ST Microelectronics
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/overview.rst
similarity index 82%
rename from Documentation/arm/sti/overview.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/sti/overview.rst
index 1a4e93d6027f..70743617a74f 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sti/overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- STi ARM Linux Overview
- ==========================
+======================
+STi ARM Linux Overview
+======================
Introduction
------------
@@ -10,15 +11,17 @@ Introduction
B2000 and B2020 Reference boards.
- configuration
- -------------
+configuration
+-------------
A generic configuration is provided for both STiH415/416, and can be used as the
- default by
+ default by::
+
make stih41x_defconfig
- Layout
- ------
+Layout
+------
+
All the files for multiple machine families (STiH415, STiH416, and STiG125)
are located in the platform code contained in arch/arm/mach-sti
@@ -27,7 +30,7 @@ Introduction
Device Trees.
- Document Author
- ---------------
+Document Author
+---------------
Srinivas Kandagatla <srinivas.kandagatla@st.com>, (c) 2013 ST Microelectronics
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.rst
similarity index 82%
rename from Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.rst
index 3343f32f58bc..027e75bc7b7c 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih407-overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- STiH407 Overview
- ================
+================
+STiH407 Overview
+================
Introduction
------------
@@ -12,7 +13,7 @@ Introduction
- ARM Cortex-A9 1.5 GHz dual core CPU (28nm)
- SATA2, USB 3.0, PCIe, Gbit Ethernet
- Document Author
- ---------------
+Document Author
+---------------
Maxime Coquelin <maxime.coquelin@st.com>, (c) 2014 ST Microelectronics
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.rst
similarity index 79%
rename from Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.rst
index 1383e33f265d..b67452d610c4 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih415-overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- STiH415 Overview
- ================
+================
+STiH415 Overview
+================
Introduction
------------
@@ -7,6 +8,7 @@ Introduction
The STiH415 is the next generation of HD, AVC set-top box processors
for satellite, cable, terrestrial and IP-STB markets.
- Features
+ Features:
+
- ARM Cortex-A9 1.0 GHz, dual-core CPU
- SATA2x2,USB 2.0x3, PCIe, Gbit Ethernet MACx2
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.rst
similarity index 83%
rename from Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.rst
index 558444c201c6..93f17d74d8db 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih416-overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- STiH416 Overview
- ================
+================
+STiH416 Overview
+================
Introduction
------------
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih418-overview.txt b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih418-overview.rst
similarity index 83%
rename from Documentation/arm/sti/stih418-overview.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/sti/stih418-overview.rst
index 1cd8fc80646d..b563c1f4fe5a 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sti/stih418-overview.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sti/stih418-overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- STiH418 Overview
- ================
+================
+STiH418 Overview
+================
Introduction
------------
@@ -14,7 +15,7 @@ Introduction
- HEVC L5.1 Main 10
- VP9
- Document Author
- ---------------
+Document Author
+---------------
Maxime Coquelin <maxime.coquelin@st.com>, (c) 2015 ST Microelectronics
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/stm32/overview.rst b/Documentation/arm/stm32/overview.rst
index f7e734153860..85cfc8410798 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/stm32/overview.rst
+++ b/Documentation/arm/stm32/overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,3 @@
-:orphan:
-
========================
STM32 ARM Linux Overview
========================
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f429-overview.rst b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f429-overview.rst
index 65bbb1c3b423..a7ebe8ea6697 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f429-overview.rst
+++ b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f429-overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
-:orphan:
-
+==================
STM32F429 Overview
==================
@@ -23,6 +22,4 @@ Datasheet and reference manual are publicly available on ST website (STM32F429_)
.. _STM32F429: http://www.st.com/web/en/catalog/mmc/FM141/SC1169/SS1577/LN1806?ecmp=stm32f429-439_pron_pr-ces2014_nov2013
-:Authors:
-
-Maxime Coquelin <mcoquelin.stm32@gmail.com>
+:Authors: Maxime Coquelin <mcoquelin.stm32@gmail.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f746-overview.rst b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f746-overview.rst
index 42d593085015..78befddc7740 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f746-overview.rst
+++ b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f746-overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
-:orphan:
-
+==================
STM32F746 Overview
==================
@@ -30,6 +29,4 @@ Datasheet and reference manual are publicly available on ST website (STM32F746_)
.. _STM32F746: http://www.st.com/content/st_com/en/products/microcontrollers/stm32-32-bit-arm-cortex-mcus/stm32f7-series/stm32f7x6/stm32f746ng.html
-:Authors:
-
-Alexandre Torgue <alexandre.torgue@st.com>
+:Authors: Alexandre Torgue <alexandre.torgue@st.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f769-overview.rst b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f769-overview.rst
index f6adac862b17..e482980ddf21 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f769-overview.rst
+++ b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32f769-overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
-:orphan:
-
+==================
STM32F769 Overview
==================
@@ -32,6 +31,4 @@ Datasheet and reference manual are publicly available on ST website (STM32F769_)
.. _STM32F769: http://www.st.com/content/st_com/en/products/microcontrollers/stm32-32-bit-arm-cortex-mcus/stm32-high-performance-mcus/stm32f7-series/stm32f7x9/stm32f769ni.html
-:Authors:
-
-Alexandre Torgue <alexandre.torgue@st.com>
+:Authors: Alexandre Torgue <alexandre.torgue@st.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32h743-overview.rst b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32h743-overview.rst
index c525835e7473..4e15f1a42730 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32h743-overview.rst
+++ b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32h743-overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
-:orphan:
-
+==================
STM32H743 Overview
==================
@@ -31,6 +30,4 @@ Datasheet and reference manual are publicly available on ST website (STM32H743_)
.. _STM32H743: http://www.st.com/en/microcontrollers/stm32h7x3.html?querycriteria=productId=LN2033
-:Authors:
-
-Alexandre Torgue <alexandre.torgue@st.com>
+:Authors: Alexandre Torgue <alexandre.torgue@st.com>
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32mp157-overview.rst b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32mp157-overview.rst
index 2c52cd020601..f62fdc8e7d8d 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32mp157-overview.rst
+++ b/Documentation/arm/stm32/stm32mp157-overview.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
-:orphan:
-
+===================
STM32MP157 Overview
===================
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README b/Documentation/arm/sunxi.rst
similarity index 83%
rename from Documentation/arm/sunxi/README
rename to Documentation/arm/sunxi.rst
index f8efc21998bf..b037428aee98 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/README
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sunxi.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==================
ARM Allwinner SoCs
==================
@@ -10,93 +11,140 @@ SunXi family
Linux kernel mach directory: arch/arm/mach-sunxi
Flavors:
+
* ARM926 based SoCs
- Allwinner F20 (sun3i)
- + Not Supported
+
+ * Not Supported
* ARM Cortex-A8 based SoCs
- Allwinner A10 (sun4i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A10/A10%20Datasheet%20-%20v1.21%20%282012-04-06%29.pdf
- + User Manual
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A10/A10%20User%20Manual%20-%20v1.20%20%282012-04-09%2c%20DECRYPTED%29.pdf
- Allwinner A10s (sun5i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A10s/A10s%20Datasheet%20-%20v1.20%20%282012-03-27%29.pdf
- Allwinner A13 / R8 (sun5i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A13/A13%20Datasheet%20-%20v1.12%20%282012-03-29%29.pdf
- + User Manual
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A13/A13%20User%20Manual%20-%20v1.2%20%282013-01-08%29.pdf
- Next Thing Co GR8 (sun5i)
* Single ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs
- Allwinner V3s (sun8i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://linux-sunxi.org/File:Allwinner_V3s_Datasheet_V1.0.pdf
* Dual ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs
- Allwinner A20 (sun7i)
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A20/A20%20User%20Manual%202013-03-22.pdf
- Allwinner A23 (sun8i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A23/A23%20Datasheet%20V1.0%2020130830.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A23/A23%20User%20Manual%20V1.0%2020130830.pdf
* Quad ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs
- Allwinner A31 (sun6i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A3x_release_document/A31/IC/A31%20datasheet%20V1.3%2020131106.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A3x_release_document/A31/IC/A31%20user%20manual%20V1.1%2020130630.pdf
- Allwinner A31s (sun6i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A3x_release_document/A31s/IC/A31s%20datasheet%20V1.3%2020131106.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A31/A3x_release_document/A31s/IC/A31s%20User%20Manual%20%20V1.0%2020130322.pdf
- Allwinner A33 (sun8i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A33/A33%20Datasheet%20release%201.1.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A33/A33%20user%20manual%20release%201.1.pdf
- Allwinner H2+ (sun8i)
- + No document available now, but is known to be working properly with
+
+ * No document available now, but is known to be working properly with
H3 drivers and memory map.
- Allwinner H3 (sun8i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/H3/Allwinner_H3_Datasheet_V1.0.pdf
- Allwinner R40 (sun8i)
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
https://github.com/tinalinux/docs/raw/r40-v1.y/R40_Datasheet_V1.0.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
https://github.com/tinalinux/docs/raw/r40-v1.y/Allwinner_R40_User_Manual_V1.0.pdf
* Quad ARM Cortex-A15, Quad ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs
- Allwinner A80
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A80/A80_Datasheet_Revision_1.0_0404.pdf
* Octa ARM Cortex-A7 based SoCs
- Allwinner A83T
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
https://github.com/allwinner-zh/documents/raw/master/A83T/A83T_Datasheet_v1.3_20150510.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
https://github.com/allwinner-zh/documents/raw/master/A83T/A83T_User_Manual_v1.5.1_20150513.pdf
* Quad ARM Cortex-A53 based SoCs
- Allwinner A64
- + Datasheet
+
+ * Datasheet
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A64/A64_Datasheet_V1.1.pdf
- + User Manual
+
+ * User Manual
+
http://dl.linux-sunxi.org/A64/Allwinner%20A64%20User%20Manual%20v1.0.pdf
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.txt b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.rst
similarity index 92%
rename from Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.rst
index e09a88aa3136..23bd03f3e21f 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/sunxi/clocks.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=======================================================
Frequently asked questions about the sunxi clock system
=======================================================
@@ -12,7 +13,7 @@ A: The 24MHz oscillator allows gating to save power. Indeed, if gated
steps, one can gate it and keep the system running. Consider this
simplified suspend example:
- While the system is operational, you would see something like
+ While the system is operational, you would see something like::
24MHz 32kHz
|
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ A: The 24MHz oscillator allows gating to save power. Indeed, if gated
[CPU]
When you are about to suspend, you switch the CPU Mux to the 32kHz
- oscillator:
+ oscillator::
24Mhz 32kHz
| |
@@ -33,7 +34,7 @@ A: The 24MHz oscillator allows gating to save power. Indeed, if gated
|
[CPU]
- Finally you can gate the main oscillator
+ Finally you can gate the main oscillator::
32kHz
|
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation b/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation.rst
similarity index 63%
rename from Documentation/arm/swp_emulation
rename to Documentation/arm/swp_emulation.rst
index af903d22fd93..6a608a9c3715 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation
+++ b/Documentation/arm/swp_emulation.rst
@@ -11,17 +11,17 @@ sequence. If a memory access fault (an abort) occurs, a segmentation fault is
signalled to the triggering process.
/proc/cpu/swp_emulation holds some statistics/information, including the PID of
-the last process to trigger the emulation to be invocated. For example:
----
-Emulated SWP: 12
-Emulated SWPB: 0
-Aborted SWP{B}: 1
-Last process: 314
----
+the last process to trigger the emulation to be invocated. For example::
-NOTE: when accessing uncached shared regions, LDREX/STREX rely on an external
-transaction monitoring block called a global monitor to maintain update
-atomicity. If your system does not implement a global monitor, this option can
-cause programs that perform SWP operations to uncached memory to deadlock, as
-the STREX operation will always fail.
+ Emulated SWP: 12
+ Emulated SWPB: 0
+ Aborted SWP{B}: 1
+ Last process: 314
+
+NOTE:
+ when accessing uncached shared regions, LDREX/STREX rely on an external
+ transaction monitoring block called a global monitor to maintain update
+ atomicity. If your system does not implement a global monitor, this option can
+ cause programs that perform SWP operations to uncached memory to deadlock, as
+ the STREX operation will always fail.
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/tcm.txt b/Documentation/arm/tcm.rst
similarity index 86%
rename from Documentation/arm/tcm.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/tcm.rst
index 7c15871c1885..effd9c7bc968 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/tcm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/tcm.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
+==================================================
ARM TCM (Tightly-Coupled Memory) handling in Linux
-----
+==================================================
+
Written by Linus Walleij <linus.walleij@stericsson.com>
Some ARM SoC:s have a so-called TCM (Tightly-Coupled Memory).
@@ -85,46 +87,50 @@ to have functions called locally inside the TCM without
wasting space, there is also the __tcmlocalfunc prefix that
will make the call relative.
-Variables to go into dtcm can be tagged like this:
-int __tcmdata foo;
+Variables to go into dtcm can be tagged like this::
-Constants can be tagged like this:
-int __tcmconst foo;
+ int __tcmdata foo;
+
+Constants can be tagged like this::
+
+ int __tcmconst foo;
+
+To put assembler into TCM just use::
+
+ .section ".tcm.text" or .section ".tcm.data"
-To put assembler into TCM just use
-.section ".tcm.text" or .section ".tcm.data"
respectively.
-Example code:
+Example code::
-#include <asm/tcm.h>
+ #include <asm/tcm.h>
-/* Uninitialized data */
-static u32 __tcmdata tcmvar;
-/* Initialized data */
-static u32 __tcmdata tcmassigned = 0x2BADBABEU;
-/* Constant */
-static const u32 __tcmconst tcmconst = 0xCAFEBABEU;
+ /* Uninitialized data */
+ static u32 __tcmdata tcmvar;
+ /* Initialized data */
+ static u32 __tcmdata tcmassigned = 0x2BADBABEU;
+ /* Constant */
+ static const u32 __tcmconst tcmconst = 0xCAFEBABEU;
-static void __tcmlocalfunc tcm_to_tcm(void)
-{
+ static void __tcmlocalfunc tcm_to_tcm(void)
+ {
int i;
for (i = 0; i < 100; i++)
tcmvar ++;
-}
+ }
-static void __tcmfunc hello_tcm(void)
-{
+ static void __tcmfunc hello_tcm(void)
+ {
/* Some abstract code that runs in ITCM */
int i;
for (i = 0; i < 100; i++) {
tcmvar ++;
}
tcm_to_tcm();
-}
+ }
-static void __init test_tcm(void)
-{
+ static void __init test_tcm(void)
+ {
u32 *tcmem;
int i;
@@ -152,4 +158,4 @@ static void __init test_tcm(void)
printk("TCM tcmem[%d] = %08x\n", i, tcmem[i]);
tcm_free(tcmem, 20);
}
-}
+ }
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/uefi.txt b/Documentation/arm/uefi.rst
similarity index 63%
rename from Documentation/arm/uefi.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/uefi.rst
index 6543a0adea8a..f868330df6be 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/uefi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/uefi.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+================================================
+The Unified Extensible Firmware Interface (UEFI)
+================================================
+
UEFI, the Unified Extensible Firmware Interface, is a specification
governing the behaviours of compatible firmware interfaces. It is
maintained by the UEFI Forum - http://www.uefi.org/.
@@ -11,11 +15,13 @@ UEFI support in Linux
=====================
Booting on a platform with firmware compliant with the UEFI specification
makes it possible for the kernel to support additional features:
+
- UEFI Runtime Services
- Retrieving various configuration information through the standardised
interface of UEFI configuration tables. (ACPI, SMBIOS, ...)
For actually enabling [U]EFI support, enable:
+
- CONFIG_EFI=y
- CONFIG_EFI_VARS=y or m
@@ -42,19 +48,20 @@ Instead, the kernel reads the UEFI memory map.
The stub populates the FDT /chosen node with (and the kernel scans for) the
following parameters:
-________________________________________________________________________________
-Name | Size | Description
-================================================================================
-linux,uefi-system-table | 64-bit | Physical address of the UEFI System Table.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-linux,uefi-mmap-start | 64-bit | Physical address of the UEFI memory map,
- | | populated by the UEFI GetMemoryMap() call.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-linux,uefi-mmap-size | 32-bit | Size in bytes of the UEFI memory map
- | | pointed to in previous entry.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-linux,uefi-mmap-desc-size | 32-bit | Size in bytes of each entry in the UEFI
- | | memory map.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-linux,uefi-mmap-desc-ver | 32-bit | Version of the mmap descriptor format.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+========================== ====== ===========================================
+Name Size Description
+========================== ====== ===========================================
+linux,uefi-system-table 64-bit Physical address of the UEFI System Table.
+
+linux,uefi-mmap-start 64-bit Physical address of the UEFI memory map,
+ populated by the UEFI GetMemoryMap() call.
+
+linux,uefi-mmap-size 32-bit Size in bytes of the UEFI memory map
+ pointed to in previous entry.
+
+linux,uefi-mmap-desc-size 32-bit Size in bytes of each entry in the UEFI
+ memory map.
+
+linux,uefi-mmap-desc-ver 32-bit Version of the mmap descriptor format.
+========================== ====== ===========================================
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/VFP/release-notes.txt b/Documentation/arm/vfp/release-notes.rst
similarity index 92%
rename from Documentation/arm/VFP/release-notes.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/vfp/release-notes.rst
index 28a2795705ca..c6b04937cee3 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/VFP/release-notes.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/vfp/release-notes.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
+===============================================
Release notes for Linux Kernel VFP support code
------------------------------------------------
+===============================================
Date: 20 May 2004
+
Author: Russell King
This is the first release of the Linux Kernel VFP support code. It
diff --git a/Documentation/arm/vlocks.txt b/Documentation/arm/vlocks.rst
similarity index 98%
rename from Documentation/arm/vlocks.txt
rename to Documentation/arm/vlocks.rst
index 45731672c564..a40a1742110b 100644
--- a/Documentation/arm/vlocks.txt
+++ b/Documentation/arm/vlocks.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+======================================
vlocks for Bare-Metal Mutual Exclusion
======================================
@@ -26,7 +27,7 @@ started yet.
Algorithm
---------
-The easiest way to explain the vlocks algorithm is with some pseudo-code:
+The easiest way to explain the vlocks algorithm is with some pseudo-code::
int currently_voting[NR_CPUS] = { 0, };
@@ -93,7 +94,7 @@ Features and limitations
number of CPUs.
vlocks can be cascaded in a voting hierarchy to permit better scaling
- if necessary, as in the following hypothetical example for 4096 CPUs:
+ if necessary, as in the following hypothetical example for 4096 CPUs::
/* first level: local election */
my_town = towns[(this_cpu >> 4) & 0xf];
@@ -127,12 +128,12 @@ the basic algorithm:
reduces the number of round-trips required to external memory.
In the ARM implementation, this means that we can use a single load
- and comparison:
+ and comparison::
LDR Rt, [Rn]
CMP Rt, #0
- ...in place of code equivalent to:
+ ...in place of code equivalent to::
LDRB Rt, [Rn]
CMP Rt, #0
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xen.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xen.txt
index c9b9321434ea..db5c56db30ec 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xen.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/xen.txt
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ hypervisor {
};
The format and meaning of the "xen,uefi-*" parameters are similar to those in
-Documentation/arm/uefi.txt, which are provided by the regular UEFI stub. However
+Documentation/arm/uefi.rst, which are provided by the regular UEFI stub. However
they differ because they are provided by the Xen hypervisor, together with a set
of UEFI runtime services implemented via hypercalls, see
http://xenbits.xen.org/docs/unstable/hypercall/x86_64/include,public,platform.h.html.
diff --git a/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt
index 60f8640f2b2f..4660ccee35a3 100644
--- a/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt
+++ b/Documentation/devicetree/booting-without-of.txt
@@ -160,7 +160,7 @@ it with special cases.
of the kernel image. That entry point supports two calling
conventions. A summary of the interface is described here. A full
description of the boot requirements is documented in
- Documentation/arm/Booting
+ Documentation/arm/booting.rst
a) ATAGS interface. Minimal information is passed from firmware
to the kernel with a tagged list of predefined parameters.
@@ -174,7 +174,7 @@ it with special cases.
b) Entry with a flattened device-tree block. Firmware loads the
physical address of the flattened device tree block (dtb) into r2,
r1 is not used, but it is considered good practice to use a valid
- machine number as described in Documentation/arm/Booting.
+ machine number as described in Documentation/arm/booting.rst.
r0 : 0
diff --git a/Documentation/index.rst b/Documentation/index.rst
index 239100accbf6..a57d975e969a 100644
--- a/Documentation/index.rst
+++ b/Documentation/index.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+
.. The Linux Kernel documentation master file, created by
sphinx-quickstart on Fri Feb 12 13:51:46 2016.
You can adapt this file completely to your liking, but it should at least
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/arm/Booting b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/arm/Booting
index 1fe866f8218f..562e9a2957e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/arm/Booting
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/arm/Booting
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-Chinese translated version of Documentation/arm/Booting
+Chinese translated version of Documentation/arm/booting.rst
If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
original document maintainer directly. However, if you have a problem
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@ or if there is a problem with the translation.
Maintainer: Russell King <linux@arm.linux.org.uk>
Chinese maintainer: Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
---------------------------------------------------------------------
-Documentation/arm/Booting 的中文翻译
+Documentation/arm/booting.rst 的中文翻译
如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻
diff --git a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt
index cd7fc8f34cf9..99af4363984d 100644
--- a/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt
+++ b/Documentation/translations/zh_CN/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-Chinese translated version of Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt
+Chinese translated version of Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.rst
If you have any comment or update to the content, please contact the
original document maintainer directly. However, if you have a problem
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@ Maintainer: Nicolas Pitre <nicolas.pitre@linaro.org>
Dave Martin <dave.martin@linaro.org>
Chinese maintainer: Fu Wei <tekkamanninja@gmail.com>
---------------------------------------------------------------------
-Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt 的中文翻译
+Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.rst 的中文翻译
如果想评论或更新本文的内容，请直接联系原文档的维护者。如果你使用英文
交流有困难的话，也可以向中文版维护者求助。如果本翻译更新不及时或者翻
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index 3e43c7ab3d6a..9958d322e355 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -2189,7 +2189,7 @@ F: drivers/*/*s3c64xx*
F: drivers/*/*s5pv210*
F: drivers/memory/samsung/*
F: drivers/soc/samsung/*
-F: Documentation/arm/Samsung/
+F: Documentation/arm/samsung/
F: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/arm/samsung/
F: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/sram/samsung-sram.txt
F: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/power/pd-samsung.txt
@@ -11456,7 +11456,7 @@ L: linux-omap@vger.kernel.org
L: linux-fbdev@vger.kernel.org
S: Orphan
F: drivers/video/fbdev/omap2/
-F: Documentation/arm/OMAP/DSS
+F: Documentation/arm/omap/dss.rst
OMAP FRAMEBUFFER SUPPORT
L: linux-fbdev@vger.kernel.org
diff --git a/arch/arm/Kconfig b/arch/arm/Kconfig
index fd18b6f33c97..71b35159b4ce 100644
--- a/arch/arm/Kconfig
+++ b/arch/arm/Kconfig
@@ -2115,7 +2115,7 @@ config VFP
Say Y to include VFP support code in the kernel. This is needed
if your hardware includes a VFP unit.
- Please see <file:Documentation/arm/VFP/release-notes.txt> for
+ Please see <file:Documentation/arm/vfp/release-notes.rst> for
release notes and additional status information.
Say N if your target does not have VFP hardware.
diff --git a/arch/arm/common/mcpm_entry.c b/arch/arm/common/mcpm_entry.c
index 1b1b82b37ce0..ef3d407475b7 100644
--- a/arch/arm/common/mcpm_entry.c
+++ b/arch/arm/common/mcpm_entry.c
@@ -24,7 +24,7 @@
/*
* The public API for this code is documented in arch/arm/include/asm/mcpm.h.
* For a comprehensive description of the main algorithm used here, please
- * see Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt.
+ * see Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.rst.
*/
struct sync_struct mcpm_sync;
diff --git a/arch/arm/common/mcpm_head.S b/arch/arm/common/mcpm_head.S
index 08b3bb9bc6a2..008c95f0b409 100644
--- a/arch/arm/common/mcpm_head.S
+++ b/arch/arm/common/mcpm_head.S
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
* published by the Free Software Foundation.
*
*
- * Refer to Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.txt
+ * Refer to Documentation/arm/cluster-pm-race-avoidance.rst
* for details of the synchronisation algorithms used here.
*/
diff --git a/arch/arm/common/vlock.S b/arch/arm/common/vlock.S
index 9675cc15d0c4..f1c7fd44f1b1 100644
--- a/arch/arm/common/vlock.S
+++ b/arch/arm/common/vlock.S
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
* Copyright: (C) 2012-2013 Linaro Limited
*
* This algorithm is described in more detail in
- * Documentation/arm/vlocks.txt.
+ * Documentation/arm/vlocks.rst.
*/
#include <linux/linkage.h>
diff --git a/arch/arm/include/asm/setup.h b/arch/arm/include/asm/setup.h
index 3613d7e9fc40..96392cdae861 100644
--- a/arch/arm/include/asm/setup.h
+++ b/arch/arm/include/asm/setup.h
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
* published by the Free Software Foundation.
*
* Structure passed to kernel to tell it about the
- * hardware it's running on. See Documentation/arm/Setup
+ * hardware it's running on. See Documentation/arm/setup.rst
* for more info.
*/
#ifndef __ASMARM_SETUP_H
diff --git a/arch/arm/include/uapi/asm/setup.h b/arch/arm/include/uapi/asm/setup.h
index 6b335a9ff8c8..25ceda63b284 100644
--- a/arch/arm/include/uapi/asm/setup.h
+++ b/arch/arm/include/uapi/asm/setup.h
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
* published by the Free Software Foundation.
*
* Structure passed to kernel to tell it about the
- * hardware it's running on. See Documentation/arm/Setup
+ * hardware it's running on. See Documentation/arm/setup.rst
* for more info.
*/
#ifndef _UAPI__ASMARM_SETUP_H
diff --git a/arch/arm/kernel/entry-armv.S b/arch/arm/kernel/entry-armv.S
index ce4aea57130a..57516333496f 100644
--- a/arch/arm/kernel/entry-armv.S
+++ b/arch/arm/kernel/entry-armv.S
@@ -829,7 +829,7 @@ ENDPROC(__switch_to)
* existing ones. This mechanism should be used only for things that are
* really small and justified, and not be abused freely.
*
- * See Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt for formal definitions.
+ * See Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.rst for formal definitions.
*/
THUMB( .arm )
diff --git a/arch/arm/mach-exynos/common.h b/arch/arm/mach-exynos/common.h
index c93356a8d662..56411bb63d45 100644
--- a/arch/arm/mach-exynos/common.h
+++ b/arch/arm/mach-exynos/common.h
@@ -106,7 +106,7 @@ void exynos_firmware_init(void);
#define C2_STATE (1 << 3)
/*
* Magic values for bootloader indicating chosen low power mode.
- * See also Documentation/arm/Samsung/Bootloader-interface.txt
+ * See also Documentation/arm/samsung/bootloader-interface.rst
*/
#define EXYNOS_SLEEP_MAGIC 0x00000bad
#define EXYNOS_AFTR_MAGIC 0xfcba0d10
diff --git a/arch/arm/mach-ixp4xx/Kconfig b/arch/arm/mach-ixp4xx/Kconfig
index 2f052c56cd9e..ab9cd1eb4d90 100644
--- a/arch/arm/mach-ixp4xx/Kconfig
+++ b/arch/arm/mach-ixp4xx/Kconfig
@@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ config MACH_AVILA
help
Say 'Y' here if you want your kernel to support the Gateworks
Avila Network Platform. For more information on this platform,
- see <file:Documentation/arm/IXP4xx>.
+ see <file:Documentation/arm/ixp4xx.rst>.
config MACH_LOFT
bool "Loft"
@@ -50,7 +50,7 @@ config ARCH_ADI_COYOTE
help
Say 'Y' here if you want your kernel to support the ADI
Engineering Coyote Gateway Reference Platform. For more
- information on this platform, see <file:Documentation/arm/IXP4xx>.
+ information on this platform, see <file:Documentation/arm/ixp4xx.rst>.
config MACH_GATEWAY7001
bool "Gateway 7001"
@@ -73,21 +73,21 @@ config ARCH_IXDP425
help
Say 'Y' here if you want your kernel to support Intel's
IXDP425 Development Platform (Also known as Richfield).
- For more information on this platform, see <file:Documentation/arm/IXP4xx>.
+ For more information on this platform, see <file:Documentation/arm/ixp4xx.rst>.
config MACH_IXDPG425
bool "IXDPG425"
help
Say 'Y' here if you want your kernel to support Intel's
IXDPG425 Development Platform (Also known as Montajade).
- For more information on this platform, see <file:Documentation/arm/IXP4xx>.
+ For more information on this platform, see <file:Documentation/arm/ixp4xx.rst>.
config MACH_IXDP465
bool "IXDP465"
help
Say 'Y' here if you want your kernel to support Intel's
IXDP465 Development Platform (Also known as BMP).
- For more information on this platform, see <file:Documentation/arm/IXP4xx>.
+ For more information on this platform, see <file:Documentation/arm/ixp4xx.rst>.
config MACH_GORAMO_MLR
bool "GORAMO Multi Link Router"
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ config MACH_KIXRP435
help
Say 'Y' here if you want your kernel to support Intel's
KIXRP435 Reference Platform.
- For more information on this platform, see <file:Documentation/arm/IXP4xx>.
+ For more information on this platform, see <file:Documentation/arm/ixp4xx.rst>.
#
# IXCDP1100 is the exact same HW as IXDP425, but with a different machine
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ config ARCH_PRPMC1100
help
Say 'Y' here if you want your kernel to support the Motorola
PrPCM1100 Processor Mezanine Module. For more information on
- this platform, see <file:Documentation/arm/IXP4xx>.
+ this platform, see <file:Documentation/arm/ixp4xx.rst>.
config MACH_NAS100D
bool
diff --git a/arch/arm/mach-s3c24xx/pm.c b/arch/arm/mach-s3c24xx/pm.c
index adcb90645460..c64988c609ad 100644
--- a/arch/arm/mach-s3c24xx/pm.c
+++ b/arch/arm/mach-s3c24xx/pm.c
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
//
// S3C24XX Power Manager (Suspend-To-RAM) support
//
-// See Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt for more information
+// See Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/suspend.rst for more information
//
// Parts based on arch/arm/mach-pxa/pm.c
//
diff --git a/arch/arm/mm/Kconfig b/arch/arm/mm/Kconfig
index b169e580bf82..28f11246de41 100644
--- a/arch/arm/mm/Kconfig
+++ b/arch/arm/mm/Kconfig
@@ -709,7 +709,7 @@ config ARM_VIRT_EXT
assistance.
A compliant bootloader is required in order to make maximum
- use of this feature. Refer to Documentation/arm/Booting for
+ use of this feature. Refer to Documentation/arm/booting.rst for
details.
config SWP_EMULATE
@@ -867,7 +867,7 @@ config KUSER_HELPERS
the CPU type fitted to the system. This permits binaries to be
run on ARMv4 through to ARMv7 without modification.
- See Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt for details.
+ See Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.rst for details.
However, the fixed address nature of these helpers can be used
by ROP (return orientated programming) authors when creating
diff --git a/arch/arm/plat-samsung/Kconfig b/arch/arm/plat-samsung/Kconfig
index 53da57fba39c..301e572651c0 100644
--- a/arch/arm/plat-samsung/Kconfig
+++ b/arch/arm/plat-samsung/Kconfig
@@ -243,7 +243,7 @@ config SAMSUNG_PM_DEBUG
depends on DEBUG_EXYNOS_UART || DEBUG_S3C24XX_UART || DEBUG_S3C2410_UART
help
Say Y here if you want verbose debugging from the PM Suspend and
- Resume code. See <file:Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt>
+ Resume code. See <file:Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/suspend.rst>
for more information.
config S3C_PM_DEBUG_LED_SMDK
@@ -268,7 +268,7 @@ config SAMSUNG_PM_CHECK
Note, this can take several seconds depending on memory size
and CPU speed.
- See <file:Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt>
+ See <file:Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/suspend.rst>
config SAMSUNG_PM_CHECK_CHUNKSIZE
int "S3C2410 PM Suspend CRC Chunksize (KiB)"
@@ -280,7 +280,7 @@ config SAMSUNG_PM_CHECK_CHUNKSIZE
the CRC data block will take more memory, but will identify any
faults with better precision.
- See <file:Documentation/arm/Samsung-S3C24XX/Suspend.txt>
+ See <file:Documentation/arm/samsung-s3c24xx/suspend.rst>
config SAMSUNG_WAKEMASK
bool
diff --git a/arch/arm/tools/mach-types b/arch/arm/tools/mach-types
index 4eac94c1eb6f..9e74c7ff6b04 100644
--- a/arch/arm/tools/mach-types
+++ b/arch/arm/tools/mach-types
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
# http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/download.php
#
# Please do not send patches to this file; it is automatically generated!
-# To add an entry into this database, please see Documentation/arm/README,
+# To add an entry into this database, please see Documentation/arm/arm.rst,
# or visit:
#
# http://www.arm.linux.org.uk/developer/machines/?action=new
diff --git a/arch/arm64/Kconfig b/arch/arm64/Kconfig
index 6426f48549c8..a8a5fe91c579 100644
--- a/arch/arm64/Kconfig
+++ b/arch/arm64/Kconfig
@@ -1141,7 +1141,7 @@ config KUSER_HELPERS
the system. This permits binaries to be run on ARMv4 through
to ARMv8 without modification.
- See Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt for details.
+ See Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.rst for details.
However, the fixed address nature of these helpers can be used
by ROP (return orientated programming) authors when creating
diff --git a/arch/arm64/kernel/kuser32.S b/arch/arm64/kernel/kuser32.S
index 49825e9e421e..42bd8c0c60e0 100644
--- a/arch/arm64/kernel/kuser32.S
+++ b/arch/arm64/kernel/kuser32.S
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
* aarch32_setup_additional_pages() and are provided for compatibility
* reasons with 32 bit (aarch32) applications that need them.
*
- * See Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.txt for formal definitions.
+ * See Documentation/arm/kernel_user_helpers.rst for formal definitions.
*/
#include <asm/unistd.h>
diff --git a/arch/mips/bmips/setup.c b/arch/mips/bmips/setup.c
index 1738a06396f9..2f81a94c71a6 100644
--- a/arch/mips/bmips/setup.c
+++ b/arch/mips/bmips/setup.c
@@ -162,7 +162,7 @@ void __init plat_mem_setup(void)
ioport_resource.start = 0;
ioport_resource.end = ~0;
- /* intended to somewhat resemble ARM; see Documentation/arm/Booting */
+ /* intended to somewhat resemble ARM; see Documentation/arm/booting.rst */
if (fw_arg0 == 0 && fw_arg1 == 0xffffffff)
dtb = phys_to_virt(fw_arg2);
else if (fw_passed_dtb) /* UHI interface or appended dtb */
diff --git a/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-cipher.c b/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-cipher.c
index 7b0c42882830..6ba2699053df 100644
--- a/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-cipher.c
+++ b/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-cipher.c
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
* keysize in CBC and ECB mode.
* Add support also for DES and 3DES in CBC and ECB mode.
*
- * You could find the datasheet in Documentation/arm/sunxi/README
+ * You could find the datasheet in Documentation/arm/sunxi.rst
*/
#include "sun4i-ss.h"
diff --git a/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-core.c b/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-core.c
index cdcda7f059c8..2e8704271f45 100644
--- a/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-core.c
+++ b/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-core.c
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
*
* Core file which registers crypto algorithms supported by the SS.
*
- * You could find a link for the datasheet in Documentation/arm/sunxi/README
+ * You could find a link for the datasheet in Documentation/arm/sunxi.rst
*/
#include <linux/clk.h>
#include <linux/crypto.h>
diff --git a/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-hash.c b/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-hash.c
index d2b6d89aad28..fcffba5ef927 100644
--- a/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-hash.c
+++ b/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-hash.c
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
*
* This file add support for MD5 and SHA1.
*
- * You could find the datasheet in Documentation/arm/sunxi/README
+ * You could find the datasheet in Documentation/arm/sunxi.rst
*/
#include "sun4i-ss.h"
#include <linux/scatterlist.h>
diff --git a/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss.h b/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss.h
index 68b82d1a6303..8654d48aedc0 100644
--- a/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss.h
+++ b/drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss.h
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
* Support MD5 and SHA1 hash algorithms.
* Support DES and 3DES
*
- * You could find the datasheet in Documentation/arm/sunxi/README
+ * You could find the datasheet in Documentation/arm/sunxi.rst
*/
#include <linux/clk.h>
diff --git a/drivers/input/touchscreen/sun4i-ts.c b/drivers/input/touchscreen/sun4i-ts.c
index 92f6e1ae23a2..f11ba7f2dca7 100644
--- a/drivers/input/touchscreen/sun4i-ts.c
+++ b/drivers/input/touchscreen/sun4i-ts.c
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@
* in the kernel). So this driver offers straight forward, reliable single
* touch functionality only.
*
- * s.a. A20 User Manual "1.15 TP" (Documentation/arm/sunxi/README)
+ * s.a. A20 User Manual "1.15 TP" (Documentation/arm/sunxi.rst)
* (looks like the description in the A20 User Manual v1.3 is better
* than the one in the A10 User Manual v.1.5)
*/
diff --git a/drivers/tty/serial/Kconfig b/drivers/tty/serial/Kconfig
index 2c86d196fb3b..c12d1f8b2a56 100644
--- a/drivers/tty/serial/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/tty/serial/Kconfig
@@ -515,7 +515,7 @@ config SERIAL_SA1100
help
If you have a machine based on a SA1100/SA1110 StrongARM(R) CPU you
can enable its onboard serial port by enabling this option.
- Please read <file:Documentation/arm/SA1100/serial_UART> for further
+ Please read <file:Documentation/arm/sa1100/serial_uart.rst> for further
info.
config SERIAL_SA1100_CONSOLE
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* Re: [PATCH v2 10/29] docs: arm: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 10/29] docs: arm: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-21 12:59 ` Corentin Labbe
0 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Corentin Labbe @ 2019-06-21 12:59 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Mauro Carvalho Chehab
Cc: Linux Doc Mailing List, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Kukjin Kim, Krzysztof Kozlowski,
Maxime Coquelin, Alexandre Torgue, Maxime Ripard, Chen-Yu Tsai,
Rob Herring, Mark Rutland, Harry Wei, Alex Shi, Russell King,
Linus Walleij, Imre Kaloz, Krzysztof Halasa, Catalin Marinas,
Will Deacon, Kevin Cernekee, Florian Fainelli, Ralf Baechle,
Paul Burton, James Hogan, Herbert Xu, David S. Miller,
Dmitry Torokhov, Greg Kroah-Hartman, Jiri Slaby,
Alexei Starovoitov, Daniel Borkmann, Jakub Kicinski,
Jesper Dangaard Brouer, John Fastabend, linux-omap, linux-fbdev,
linux-arm-kernel, linux-samsung-soc, linux-stm32, devicetree,
bcm-kernel-feedback-list, linux-mips, linux-crypto, linux-input,
linux-serial, netdev, xdp-newbies, bpf
On Tue, Jun 18, 2019 at 05:53:28PM -0300, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> Converts ARM the text files to ReST, preparing them to be an
> architecture book.
>
> The conversion is actually:
> - add blank lines and identation in order to identify paragraphs;
> - fix tables markups;
> - add some lists markups;
> - mark literal blocks;
> - adjust title markups.
>
> At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
> the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
> ---
> Documentation/arm/{sunxi/README => sunxi.rst} | 98 +++-
> drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-cipher.c | 2 +-
> drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-core.c | 2 +-
> drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss-hash.c | 2 +-
> drivers/crypto/sunxi-ss/sun4i-ss.h | 2 +-
For sun4i-s::
Reviewed-by Corentin Labbe <clabbe.montjoie@gmail.com>
^ permalink raw reply [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* [PATCH v2 11/29] docs: memory-devices: convert ti-emif.txt to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (9 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 10/29] docs: arm: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 12/29] docs: xen-tpmfront.txt: convert it to .rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (17 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
Prepare this file to be moved to a kernel book by converting
it to ReST format and renaming it to ti-emif.rst.
While this is not part of any book, mark it as :orphan:, in order
to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../{ti-emif.txt => ti-emif.rst} | 27 ++++++++++++-------
1 file changed, 17 insertions(+), 10 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/memory-devices/{ti-emif.txt => ti-emif.rst} (81%)
diff --git a/Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.txt b/Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.rst
similarity index 81%
rename from Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.txt
rename to Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.rst
index f4ad9a7d0f4b..c9242294e63c 100644
--- a/Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.txt
+++ b/Documentation/memory-devices/ti-emif.rst
@@ -1,20 +1,24 @@
-TI EMIF SDRAM Controller Driver:
+:orphan:
+
+===============================
+TI EMIF SDRAM Controller Driver
+===============================
Author
-========
+======
Aneesh V <aneesh@ti.com>
Location
-============
+========
driver/memory/emif.c
Supported SoCs:
-===================
+===============
TI OMAP44xx
TI OMAP54xx
Menuconfig option:
-==========================
+==================
Device Drivers
Memory devices
Texas Instruments EMIF driver
@@ -29,10 +33,11 @@ functions of the driver includes re-configuring AC timing
parameters and other settings during frequency, voltage and
temperature changes
-Platform Data (see include/linux/platform_data/emif_plat.h):
-=====================================================================
+Platform Data (see include/linux/platform_data/emif_plat.h)
+===========================================================
DDR device details and other board dependent and SoC dependent
information can be passed through platform data (struct emif_platform_data)
+
- DDR device details: 'struct ddr_device_info'
- Device AC timings: 'struct lpddr2_timings' and 'struct lpddr2_min_tck'
- Custom configurations: customizable policy options through
@@ -40,17 +45,19 @@ information can be passed through platform data (struct emif_platform_data)
- IP revision
- PHY type
-Interface to the external world:
-================================
+Interface to the external world
+===============================
EMIF driver registers notifiers for voltage and frequency changes
affecting EMIF and takes appropriate actions when these are invoked.
+
- freq_pre_notify_handling()
- freq_post_notify_handling()
- volt_notify_handling()
Debugfs
-========
+=======
The driver creates two debugfs entries per device.
+
- regcache_dump : dump of register values calculated and saved for all
frequencies used so far.
- mr4 : last polled value of MR4 register in the LPDDR2 device. MR4
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 12/29] docs: xen-tpmfront.txt: convert it to .rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (10 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 11/29] docs: memory-devices: convert ti-emif.txt to ReST Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 13/29] docs: bus-devices: ti-gpmc.rst: convert it to ReST Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (16 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
In order to be able to add this file to the security book,
we need first to convert it to reST.
While this is not part of any book, mark it as :orphan:, in order
to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../{xen-tpmfront.txt => xen-tpmfront.rst} | 103 ++++++++++--------
1 file changed, 58 insertions(+), 45 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/security/tpm/{xen-tpmfront.txt => xen-tpmfront.rst} (66%)
diff --git a/Documentation/security/tpm/xen-tpmfront.txt b/Documentation/security/tpm/xen-tpmfront.rst
similarity index 66%
rename from Documentation/security/tpm/xen-tpmfront.txt
rename to Documentation/security/tpm/xen-tpmfront.rst
index 69346de87ff3..98a16ab87360 100644
--- a/Documentation/security/tpm/xen-tpmfront.txt
+++ b/Documentation/security/tpm/xen-tpmfront.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,8 @@
+:orphan:
+
+=============================
Virtual TPM interface for Xen
+=============================
Authors: Matthew Fioravante (JHUAPL), Daniel De Graaf (NSA)
@@ -6,7 +10,8 @@ This document describes the virtual Trusted Platform Module (vTPM) subsystem for
Xen. The reader is assumed to have familiarity with building and installing Xen,
Linux, and a basic understanding of the TPM and vTPM concepts.
-INTRODUCTION
+Introduction
+------------
The goal of this work is to provide a TPM functionality to a virtual guest
operating system (in Xen terms, a DomU). This allows programs to interact with
@@ -24,81 +29,89 @@ This mini-os vTPM subsystem was built on top of the previous vTPM work done by
IBM and Intel corporation.
-DESIGN OVERVIEW
+Design Overview
---------------
-The architecture of vTPM is described below:
+The architecture of vTPM is described below::
-+------------------+
-| Linux DomU | ...
-| | ^ |
-| v | |
-| xen-tpmfront |
-+------------------+
- | ^
- v |
-+------------------+
-| mini-os/tpmback |
-| | ^ |
-| v | |
-| vtpm-stubdom | ...
-| | ^ |
-| v | |
-| mini-os/tpmfront |
-+------------------+
- | ^
- v |
-+------------------+
-| mini-os/tpmback |
-| | ^ |
-| v | |
-| vtpmmgr-stubdom |
-| | ^ |
-| v | |
-| mini-os/tpm_tis |
-+------------------+
- | ^
- v |
-+------------------+
-| Hardware TPM |
-+------------------+
+ +------------------+
+ | Linux DomU | ...
+ | | ^ |
+ | v | |
+ | xen-tpmfront |
+ +------------------+
+ | ^
+ v |
+ +------------------+
+ | mini-os/tpmback |
+ | | ^ |
+ | v | |
+ | vtpm-stubdom | ...
+ | | ^ |
+ | v | |
+ | mini-os/tpmfront |
+ +------------------+
+ | ^
+ v |
+ +------------------+
+ | mini-os/tpmback |
+ | | ^ |
+ | v | |
+ | vtpmmgr-stubdom |
+ | | ^ |
+ | v | |
+ | mini-os/tpm_tis |
+ +------------------+
+ | ^
+ v |
+ +------------------+
+ | Hardware TPM |
+ +------------------+
- * Linux DomU: The Linux based guest that wants to use a vTPM. There may be
+* Linux DomU:
+ The Linux based guest that wants to use a vTPM. There may be
more than one of these.
- * xen-tpmfront.ko: Linux kernel virtual TPM frontend driver. This driver
+* xen-tpmfront.ko:
+ Linux kernel virtual TPM frontend driver. This driver
provides vTPM access to a Linux-based DomU.
- * mini-os/tpmback: Mini-os TPM backend driver. The Linux frontend driver
+* mini-os/tpmback:
+ Mini-os TPM backend driver. The Linux frontend driver
connects to this backend driver to facilitate communications
between the Linux DomU and its vTPM. This driver is also
used by vtpmmgr-stubdom to communicate with vtpm-stubdom.
- * vtpm-stubdom: A mini-os stub domain that implements a vTPM. There is a
+* vtpm-stubdom:
+ A mini-os stub domain that implements a vTPM. There is a
one to one mapping between running vtpm-stubdom instances and
logical vtpms on the system. The vTPM Platform Configuration
Registers (PCRs) are normally all initialized to zero.
- * mini-os/tpmfront: Mini-os TPM frontend driver. The vTPM mini-os domain
+* mini-os/tpmfront:
+ Mini-os TPM frontend driver. The vTPM mini-os domain
vtpm-stubdom uses this driver to communicate with
vtpmmgr-stubdom. This driver is also used in mini-os
domains such as pv-grub that talk to the vTPM domain.
- * vtpmmgr-stubdom: A mini-os domain that implements the vTPM manager. There is
+* vtpmmgr-stubdom:
+ A mini-os domain that implements the vTPM manager. There is
only one vTPM manager and it should be running during the
entire lifetime of the machine. This domain regulates
access to the physical TPM on the system and secures the
persistent state of each vTPM.
- * mini-os/tpm_tis: Mini-os TPM version 1.2 TPM Interface Specification (TIS)
+* mini-os/tpm_tis:
+ Mini-os TPM version 1.2 TPM Interface Specification (TIS)
driver. This driver used by vtpmmgr-stubdom to talk directly to
the hardware TPM. Communication is facilitated by mapping
hardware memory pages into vtpmmgr-stubdom.
- * Hardware TPM: The physical TPM that is soldered onto the motherboard.
+* Hardware TPM:
+ The physical TPM that is soldered onto the motherboard.
-INTEGRATION WITH XEN
+Integration With Xen
--------------------
Support for the vTPM driver was added in Xen using the libxl toolstack in Xen
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 13/29] docs: bus-devices: ti-gpmc.rst: convert it to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (11 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 12/29] docs: xen-tpmfront.txt: convert it to .rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 14/29] docs: nvmem: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (15 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
In order to be able to add this file to a book, it needs
first to be converted to ReST and renamed.
While this is not part of any book, mark it as :orphan:, in order
to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../bus-devices/{ti-gpmc.txt => ti-gpmc.rst} | 159 ++++++++++++------
1 file changed, 108 insertions(+), 51 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/bus-devices/{ti-gpmc.txt => ti-gpmc.rst} (58%)
diff --git a/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt b/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.rst
similarity index 58%
rename from Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt
rename to Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.rst
index cc9ce57e0a26..87c366e418be 100644
--- a/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/bus-devices/ti-gpmc.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,12 @@
-GPMC (General Purpose Memory Controller):
-=========================================
+:orphan:
+
+========================================
+GPMC (General Purpose Memory Controller)
+========================================
GPMC is an unified memory controller dedicated to interfacing external
memory devices like
+
* Asynchronous SRAM like memories and application specific integrated
circuit devices.
* Asynchronous, synchronous, and page mode burst NOR flash devices
@@ -48,75 +52,128 @@ most of the datasheets & hardware (to be exact none of those supported
in mainline having custom timing routine) and by simulation.
gpmc timing dependency on peripheral timings:
+
[<gpmc_timing>: <peripheral timing1>, <peripheral timing2> ...]
1. common
-cs_on: t_ceasu
-adv_on: t_avdasu, t_ceavd
+
+cs_on:
+ t_ceasu
+adv_on:
+ t_avdasu, t_ceavd
2. sync common
-sync_clk: clk
-page_burst_access: t_bacc
-clk_activation: t_ces, t_avds
+
+sync_clk:
+ clk
+page_burst_access:
+ t_bacc
+clk_activation:
+ t_ces, t_avds
3. read async muxed
-adv_rd_off: t_avdp_r
-oe_on: t_oeasu, t_aavdh
-access: t_iaa, t_oe, t_ce, t_aa
-rd_cycle: t_rd_cycle, t_cez_r, t_oez
+
+adv_rd_off:
+ t_avdp_r
+oe_on:
+ t_oeasu, t_aavdh
+access:
+ t_iaa, t_oe, t_ce, t_aa
+rd_cycle:
+ t_rd_cycle, t_cez_r, t_oez
4. read async non-muxed
-adv_rd_off: t_avdp_r
-oe_on: t_oeasu
-access: t_iaa, t_oe, t_ce, t_aa
-rd_cycle: t_rd_cycle, t_cez_r, t_oez
+
+adv_rd_off:
+ t_avdp_r
+oe_on:
+ t_oeasu
+access:
+ t_iaa, t_oe, t_ce, t_aa
+rd_cycle:
+ t_rd_cycle, t_cez_r, t_oez
5. read sync muxed
-adv_rd_off: t_avdp_r, t_avdh
-oe_on: t_oeasu, t_ach, cyc_aavdh_oe
-access: t_iaa, cyc_iaa, cyc_oe
-rd_cycle: t_cez_r, t_oez, t_ce_rdyz
+
+adv_rd_off:
+ t_avdp_r, t_avdh
+oe_on:
+ t_oeasu, t_ach, cyc_aavdh_oe
+access:
+ t_iaa, cyc_iaa, cyc_oe
+rd_cycle:
+ t_cez_r, t_oez, t_ce_rdyz
6. read sync non-muxed
-adv_rd_off: t_avdp_r
-oe_on: t_oeasu
-access: t_iaa, cyc_iaa, cyc_oe
-rd_cycle: t_cez_r, t_oez, t_ce_rdyz
+
+adv_rd_off:
+ t_avdp_r
+oe_on:
+ t_oeasu
+access:
+ t_iaa, cyc_iaa, cyc_oe
+rd_cycle:
+ t_cez_r, t_oez, t_ce_rdyz
7. write async muxed
-adv_wr_off: t_avdp_w
-we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: t_weasu, t_aavdh, cyc_aavhd_we
-we_off: t_wpl
-cs_wr_off: t_wph
-wr_cycle: t_cez_w, t_wr_cycle
+
+adv_wr_off:
+ t_avdp_w
+we_on, wr_data_mux_bus:
+ t_weasu, t_aavdh, cyc_aavhd_we
+we_off:
+ t_wpl
+cs_wr_off:
+ t_wph
+wr_cycle:
+ t_cez_w, t_wr_cycle
8. write async non-muxed
-adv_wr_off: t_avdp_w
-we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: t_weasu
-we_off: t_wpl
-cs_wr_off: t_wph
-wr_cycle: t_cez_w, t_wr_cycle
+
+adv_wr_off:
+ t_avdp_w
+we_on, wr_data_mux_bus:
+ t_weasu
+we_off:
+ t_wpl
+cs_wr_off:
+ t_wph
+wr_cycle:
+ t_cez_w, t_wr_cycle
9. write sync muxed
-adv_wr_off: t_avdp_w, t_avdh
-we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: t_weasu, t_rdyo, t_aavdh, cyc_aavhd_we
-we_off: t_wpl, cyc_wpl
-cs_wr_off: t_wph
-wr_cycle: t_cez_w, t_ce_rdyz
+
+adv_wr_off:
+ t_avdp_w, t_avdh
+we_on, wr_data_mux_bus:
+ t_weasu, t_rdyo, t_aavdh, cyc_aavhd_we
+we_off:
+ t_wpl, cyc_wpl
+cs_wr_off:
+ t_wph
+wr_cycle:
+ t_cez_w, t_ce_rdyz
10. write sync non-muxed
-adv_wr_off: t_avdp_w
-we_on, wr_data_mux_bus: t_weasu, t_rdyo
-we_off: t_wpl, cyc_wpl
-cs_wr_off: t_wph
-wr_cycle: t_cez_w, t_ce_rdyz
+adv_wr_off:
+ t_avdp_w
+we_on, wr_data_mux_bus:
+ t_weasu, t_rdyo
+we_off:
+ t_wpl, cyc_wpl
+cs_wr_off:
+ t_wph
+wr_cycle:
+ t_cez_w, t_ce_rdyz
-Note: Many of gpmc timings are dependent on other gpmc timings (a few
-gpmc timings purely dependent on other gpmc timings, a reason that
-some of the gpmc timings are missing above), and it will result in
-indirect dependency of peripheral timings to gpmc timings other than
-mentioned above, refer timing routine for more details. To know what
-these peripheral timings correspond to, please see explanations in
-struct gpmc_device_timings definition. And for gpmc timings refer
-IP details (link above).
+
+Note:
+ Many of gpmc timings are dependent on other gpmc timings (a few
+ gpmc timings purely dependent on other gpmc timings, a reason that
+ some of the gpmc timings are missing above), and it will result in
+ indirect dependency of peripheral timings to gpmc timings other than
+ mentioned above, refer timing routine for more details. To know what
+ these peripheral timings correspond to, please see explanations in
+ struct gpmc_device_timings definition. And for gpmc timings refer
+ IP details (link above).
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 14/29] docs: nvmem: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (12 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 13/29] docs: bus-devices: ti-gpmc.rst: convert it to ReST Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 15/29] docs: phy: convert samsung-usb2.txt to ReST format Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (14 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
In order to be able to add it into a doc book, we need first
convert it to ReST.
The conversion is actually:
- add blank lines and identation in order to identify paragraphs;
- mark literal blocks;
- adjust title markups.
While this is not part of any book, mark it as :orphan:, in order
to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/nvmem/{nvmem.txt => nvmem.rst} | 112 ++++++++++---------
1 file changed, 59 insertions(+), 53 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/nvmem/{nvmem.txt => nvmem.rst} (62%)
diff --git a/Documentation/nvmem/nvmem.txt b/Documentation/nvmem/nvmem.rst
similarity index 62%
rename from Documentation/nvmem/nvmem.txt
rename to Documentation/nvmem/nvmem.rst
index fc2fe4b18655..3866b6e066d5 100644
--- a/Documentation/nvmem/nvmem.txt
+++ b/Documentation/nvmem/nvmem.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,10 @@
- NVMEM SUBSYSTEM
- Srinivas Kandagatla <srinivas.kandagatla@linaro.org>
+:orphan:
+
+===============
+NVMEM Subsystem
+===============
+
+ Srinivas Kandagatla <srinivas.kandagatla@linaro.org>
This document explains the NVMEM Framework along with the APIs provided,
and how to use it.
@@ -40,54 +45,54 @@ nvmem_device pointer.
nvmem_unregister(nvmem) is used to unregister a previously registered provider.
-For example, a simple qfprom case:
+For example, a simple qfprom case::
-static struct nvmem_config econfig = {
+ static struct nvmem_config econfig = {
.name = "qfprom",
.owner = THIS_MODULE,
-};
+ };
-static int qfprom_probe(struct platform_device *pdev)
-{
+ static int qfprom_probe(struct platform_device *pdev)
+ {
...
econfig.dev = &pdev->dev;
nvmem = nvmem_register(&econfig);
...
-}
+ }
It is mandatory that the NVMEM provider has a regmap associated with its
struct device. Failure to do would return error code from nvmem_register().
Users of board files can define and register nvmem cells using the
-nvmem_cell_table struct:
+nvmem_cell_table struct::
-static struct nvmem_cell_info foo_nvmem_cells[] = {
+ static struct nvmem_cell_info foo_nvmem_cells[] = {
{
.name = "macaddr",
.offset = 0x7f00,
.bytes = ETH_ALEN,
}
-};
+ };
-static struct nvmem_cell_table foo_nvmem_cell_table = {
+ static struct nvmem_cell_table foo_nvmem_cell_table = {
.nvmem_name = "i2c-eeprom",
.cells = foo_nvmem_cells,
.ncells = ARRAY_SIZE(foo_nvmem_cells),
-};
+ };
-nvmem_add_cell_table(&foo_nvmem_cell_table);
+ nvmem_add_cell_table(&foo_nvmem_cell_table);
Additionally it is possible to create nvmem cell lookup entries and register
-them with the nvmem framework from machine code as shown in the example below:
+them with the nvmem framework from machine code as shown in the example below::
-static struct nvmem_cell_lookup foo_nvmem_lookup = {
+ static struct nvmem_cell_lookup foo_nvmem_lookup = {
.nvmem_name = "i2c-eeprom",
.cell_name = "macaddr",
.dev_id = "foo_mac.0",
.con_id = "mac-address",
-};
+ };
-nvmem_add_cell_lookups(&foo_nvmem_lookup, 1);
+ nvmem_add_cell_lookups(&foo_nvmem_lookup, 1);
NVMEM Consumers
+++++++++++++++
@@ -99,43 +104,43 @@ read from and to NVMEM.
=================================
NVMEM cells are the data entries/fields in the NVMEM.
-The NVMEM framework provides 3 APIs to read/write NVMEM cells.
+The NVMEM framework provides 3 APIs to read/write NVMEM cells::
-struct nvmem_cell *nvmem_cell_get(struct device *dev, const char *name);
-struct nvmem_cell *devm_nvmem_cell_get(struct device *dev, const char *name);
+ struct nvmem_cell *nvmem_cell_get(struct device *dev, const char *name);
+ struct nvmem_cell *devm_nvmem_cell_get(struct device *dev, const char *name);
-void nvmem_cell_put(struct nvmem_cell *cell);
-void devm_nvmem_cell_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_cell *cell);
+ void nvmem_cell_put(struct nvmem_cell *cell);
+ void devm_nvmem_cell_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_cell *cell);
-void *nvmem_cell_read(struct nvmem_cell *cell, ssize_t *len);
-int nvmem_cell_write(struct nvmem_cell *cell, void *buf, ssize_t len);
+ void *nvmem_cell_read(struct nvmem_cell *cell, ssize_t *len);
+ int nvmem_cell_write(struct nvmem_cell *cell, void *buf, ssize_t len);
-*nvmem_cell_get() apis will get a reference to nvmem cell for a given id,
+`*nvmem_cell_get()` apis will get a reference to nvmem cell for a given id,
and nvmem_cell_read/write() can then read or write to the cell.
-Once the usage of the cell is finished the consumer should call *nvmem_cell_put()
-to free all the allocation memory for the cell.
+Once the usage of the cell is finished the consumer should call
+`*nvmem_cell_put()` to free all the allocation memory for the cell.
4. Direct NVMEM device based consumer APIs
==========================================
In some instances it is necessary to directly read/write the NVMEM.
-To facilitate such consumers NVMEM framework provides below apis.
+To facilitate such consumers NVMEM framework provides below apis::
-struct nvmem_device *nvmem_device_get(struct device *dev, const char *name);
-struct nvmem_device *devm_nvmem_device_get(struct device *dev,
+ struct nvmem_device *nvmem_device_get(struct device *dev, const char *name);
+ struct nvmem_device *devm_nvmem_device_get(struct device *dev,
const char *name);
-void nvmem_device_put(struct nvmem_device *nvmem);
-int nvmem_device_read(struct nvmem_device *nvmem, unsigned int offset,
+ void nvmem_device_put(struct nvmem_device *nvmem);
+ int nvmem_device_read(struct nvmem_device *nvmem, unsigned int offset,
size_t bytes, void *buf);
-int nvmem_device_write(struct nvmem_device *nvmem, unsigned int offset,
+ int nvmem_device_write(struct nvmem_device *nvmem, unsigned int offset,
size_t bytes, void *buf);
-int nvmem_device_cell_read(struct nvmem_device *nvmem,
+ int nvmem_device_cell_read(struct nvmem_device *nvmem,
struct nvmem_cell_info *info, void *buf);
-int nvmem_device_cell_write(struct nvmem_device *nvmem,
+ int nvmem_device_cell_write(struct nvmem_device *nvmem,
struct nvmem_cell_info *info, void *buf);
Before the consumers can read/write NVMEM directly, it should get hold
-of nvmem_controller from one of the *nvmem_device_get() api.
+of nvmem_controller from one of the `*nvmem_device_get()` api.
The difference between these apis and cell based apis is that these apis always
take nvmem_device as parameter.
@@ -145,12 +150,12 @@ take nvmem_device as parameter.
When a consumer no longer needs the NVMEM, it has to release the reference
to the NVMEM it has obtained using the APIs mentioned in the above section.
-The NVMEM framework provides 2 APIs to release a reference to the NVMEM.
+The NVMEM framework provides 2 APIs to release a reference to the NVMEM::
-void nvmem_cell_put(struct nvmem_cell *cell);
-void devm_nvmem_cell_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_cell *cell);
-void nvmem_device_put(struct nvmem_device *nvmem);
-void devm_nvmem_device_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_device *nvmem);
+ void nvmem_cell_put(struct nvmem_cell *cell);
+ void devm_nvmem_cell_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_cell *cell);
+ void nvmem_device_put(struct nvmem_device *nvmem);
+ void devm_nvmem_device_put(struct device *dev, struct nvmem_device *nvmem);
Both these APIs are used to release a reference to the NVMEM and
devm_nvmem_cell_put and devm_nvmem_device_put destroys the devres associated
@@ -162,20 +167,21 @@ Userspace
6. Userspace binary interface
==============================
-Userspace can read/write the raw NVMEM file located at
-/sys/bus/nvmem/devices/*/nvmem
+Userspace can read/write the raw NVMEM file located at::
-ex:
+ /sys/bus/nvmem/devices/*/nvmem
-hexdump /sys/bus/nvmem/devices/qfprom0/nvmem
+ex::
-0000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
-*
-00000a0 db10 2240 0000 e000 0c00 0c00 0000 0c00
-0000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
-...
-*
-0001000
+ hexdump /sys/bus/nvmem/devices/qfprom0/nvmem
+
+ 0000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
+ *
+ 00000a0 db10 2240 0000 e000 0c00 0c00 0000 0c00
+ 0000000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
+ ...
+ *
+ 0001000
7. DeviceTree Binding
=====================
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 15/29] docs: phy: convert samsung-usb2.txt to ReST format
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (13 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 14/29] docs: nvmem: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 16/29] docs: rbtree.txt: fix Sphinx build warnings Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (13 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Kamil Debski, Sylwester Nawrocki
In order to merge it into a Sphinx book, we need first to
convert to ReST.
While this is not part of any book, mark it as :orphan:, in order
to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../{samsung-usb2.txt => samsung-usb2.rst} | 62 ++++++++++---------
MAINTAINERS | 2 +-
2 files changed, 34 insertions(+), 30 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/phy/{samsung-usb2.txt => samsung-usb2.rst} (77%)
diff --git a/Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.txt b/Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.rst
similarity index 77%
rename from Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.txt
rename to Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.rst
index ed12d437189d..98b5952fcb97 100644
--- a/Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.txt
+++ b/Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.rst
@@ -1,9 +1,11 @@
-.------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
-| Samsung USB 2.0 PHY adaptation layer |
-+-----------------------------------------------------------------------------+'
+:orphan:
-| 1. Description
-+----------------
+====================================
+Samsung USB 2.0 PHY adaptation layer
+====================================
+
+1. Description
+--------------
The architecture of the USB 2.0 PHY module in Samsung SoCs is similar
among many SoCs. In spite of the similarities it proved difficult to
@@ -14,8 +16,8 @@ the PHY powering up process had to be altered. This adaptation layer is
a compromise between having separate drivers and having a single driver
with added support for many special cases.
-| 2. Files description
-+----------------------
+2. Files description
+--------------------
- phy-samsung-usb2.c
This is the main file of the adaptation layer. This file contains
@@ -32,44 +34,45 @@ with added support for many special cases.
driver. In addition it should contain extern declarations for
structures that describe particular SoCs.
-| 3. Supporting SoCs
-+--------------------
+3. Supporting SoCs
+------------------
To support a new SoC a new file should be added to the drivers/phy
directory. Each SoC's configuration is stored in an instance of the
-struct samsung_usb2_phy_config.
+struct samsung_usb2_phy_config::
-struct samsung_usb2_phy_config {
+ struct samsung_usb2_phy_config {
const struct samsung_usb2_common_phy *phys;
int (*rate_to_clk)(unsigned long, u32 *);
unsigned int num_phys;
bool has_mode_switch;
-};
+ };
-The num_phys is the number of phys handled by the driver. *phys is an
+The num_phys is the number of phys handled by the driver. `*phys` is an
array that contains the configuration for each phy. The has_mode_switch
property is a boolean flag that determines whether the SoC has USB host
and device on a single pair of pins. If so, a special register has to
be modified to change the internal routing of these pins between a USB
device or host module.
-For example the configuration for Exynos 4210 is following:
+For example the configuration for Exynos 4210 is following::
-const struct samsung_usb2_phy_config exynos4210_usb2_phy_config = {
+ const struct samsung_usb2_phy_config exynos4210_usb2_phy_config = {
.has_mode_switch = 0,
.num_phys = EXYNOS4210_NUM_PHYS,
.phys = exynos4210_phys,
.rate_to_clk = exynos4210_rate_to_clk,
-}
+ }
+
+- `int (*rate_to_clk)(unsigned long, u32 *)`
-- int (*rate_to_clk)(unsigned long, u32 *)
The rate_to_clk callback is to convert the rate of the clock
used as the reference clock for the PHY module to the value
that should be written in the hardware register.
-The exynos4210_phys configuration array is as follows:
+The exynos4210_phys configuration array is as follows::
-static const struct samsung_usb2_common_phy exynos4210_phys[] = {
+ static const struct samsung_usb2_common_phy exynos4210_phys[] = {
{
.label = "device",
.id = EXYNOS4210_DEVICE,
@@ -95,29 +98,30 @@ static const struct samsung_usb2_common_phy exynos4210_phys[] = {
.power_off = exynos4210_power_off,
},
{},
-};
+ };
+
+- `int (*power_on)(struct samsung_usb2_phy_instance *);`
+ `int (*power_off)(struct samsung_usb2_phy_instance *);`
-- int (*power_on)(struct samsung_usb2_phy_instance *);
-- int (*power_off)(struct samsung_usb2_phy_instance *);
These two callbacks are used to power on and power off the phy
by modifying appropriate registers.
Final change to the driver is adding appropriate compatible value to the
phy-samsung-usb2.c file. In case of Exynos 4210 the following lines were
-added to the struct of_device_id samsung_usb2_phy_of_match[] array:
+added to the struct of_device_id samsung_usb2_phy_of_match[] array::
-#ifdef CONFIG_PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2
+ #ifdef CONFIG_PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2
{
.compatible = "samsung,exynos4210-usb2-phy",
.data = &exynos4210_usb2_phy_config,
},
-#endif
+ #endif
To add further flexibility to the driver the Kconfig file enables to
include support for selected SoCs in the compiled driver. The Kconfig
-entry for Exynos 4210 is following:
+entry for Exynos 4210 is following::
-config PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2
+ config PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2
bool "Support for Exynos 4210"
depends on PHY_SAMSUNG_USB2
depends on CPU_EXYNOS4210
@@ -128,8 +132,8 @@ config PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2
phys are available - device, host, HSCI0 and HSCI1.
The newly created file that supports the new SoC has to be also added to the
-Makefile. In case of Exynos 4210 the added line is following:
+Makefile. In case of Exynos 4210 the added line is following::
-obj-$(CONFIG_PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2) += phy-exynos4210-usb2.o
+ obj-$(CONFIG_PHY_EXYNOS4210_USB2) += phy-exynos4210-usb2.o
After completing these steps the support for the new SoC should be ready.
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index 9958d322e355..8941a73880e6 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -13966,7 +13966,7 @@ M: Sylwester Nawrocki <s.nawrocki@samsung.com>
L: linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org
S: Supported
F: Documentation/devicetree/bindings/phy/samsung-phy.txt
-F: Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.txt
+F: Documentation/phy/samsung-usb2.rst
F: drivers/phy/samsung/phy-exynos4210-usb2.c
F: drivers/phy/samsung/phy-exynos4x12-usb2.c
F: drivers/phy/samsung/phy-exynos5250-usb2.c
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 16/29] docs: rbtree.txt: fix Sphinx build warnings
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (14 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 15/29] docs: phy: convert samsung-usb2.txt to ReST format Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 17/29] docs: DMA-API-HOWTO.txt: fix an unmarked code block Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (12 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
Ths file is already at ReST format. Yet, some recent changes
made it to produce a few warnings when building it with
Sphinx.
Those are trivially fixed by marking some literal blocks.
Fix them before adding it to the docs building system.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/rbtree.txt | 6 +++---
1 file changed, 3 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/rbtree.txt b/Documentation/rbtree.txt
index c42a21b99046..523d54b60087 100644
--- a/Documentation/rbtree.txt
+++ b/Documentation/rbtree.txt
@@ -204,21 +204,21 @@ potentially expensive tree iterations. This is done at negligible runtime
overhead for maintanence; albeit larger memory footprint.
Similar to the rb_root structure, cached rbtrees are initialized to be
-empty via:
+empty via::
struct rb_root_cached mytree = RB_ROOT_CACHED;
Cached rbtree is simply a regular rb_root with an extra pointer to cache the
leftmost node. This allows rb_root_cached to exist wherever rb_root does,
which permits augmented trees to be supported as well as only a few extra
-interfaces:
+interfaces::
struct rb_node *rb_first_cached(struct rb_root_cached *tree);
void rb_insert_color_cached(struct rb_node *, struct rb_root_cached *, bool);
void rb_erase_cached(struct rb_node *node, struct rb_root_cached *);
Both insert and erase calls have their respective counterpart of augmented
-trees:
+trees::
void rb_insert_augmented_cached(struct rb_node *node, struct rb_root_cached *,
bool, struct rb_augment_callbacks *);
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 17/29] docs: DMA-API-HOWTO.txt: fix an unmarked code block
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (15 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 16/29] docs: rbtree.txt: fix Sphinx build warnings Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 18/29] docs: accounting: convert to ReST Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (11 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
When building with Sphinx, it would produce this warning:
docs/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.rst:222: WARNING: Definition list ends without a blank line; unexpected unindent.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt | 2 +-
1 file changed, 1 insertion(+), 1 deletion(-)
diff --git a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
index cb712a02f59f..358d495456d1 100644
--- a/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
+++ b/Documentation/DMA-API-HOWTO.txt
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ The standard 64-bit addressing device would do something like this::
If the device only supports 32-bit addressing for descriptors in the
coherent allocations, but supports full 64-bits for streaming mappings
-it would look like this:
+it would look like this::
if (dma_set_mask(dev, DMA_BIT_MASK(64))) {
dev_warn(dev, "mydev: No suitable DMA available\n");
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 18/29] docs: accounting: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (16 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 17/29] docs: DMA-API-HOWTO.txt: fix an unmarked code block Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (10 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Balbir Singh, Tejun Heo, Li Zefan,
Johannes Weiner, cgroups
Rename the accounting documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../{cgroupstats.txt => cgroupstats.rst} | 14 ++--
...ay-accounting.txt => delay-accounting.rst} | 61 ++++++++------
Documentation/accounting/index.rst | 14 ++++
Documentation/accounting/{psi.txt => psi.rst} | 40 +++++-----
...kstats-struct.txt => taskstats-struct.rst} | 79 ++++++++++++-------
.../{taskstats.txt => taskstats.rst} | 15 ++--
Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst | 6 +-
init/Kconfig | 2 +-
8 files changed, 139 insertions(+), 92 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/accounting/{cgroupstats.txt => cgroupstats.rst} (77%)
rename Documentation/accounting/{delay-accounting.txt => delay-accounting.rst} (77%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/accounting/index.rst
rename Documentation/accounting/{psi.txt => psi.rst} (91%)
rename Documentation/accounting/{taskstats-struct.txt => taskstats-struct.rst} (78%)
rename Documentation/accounting/{taskstats.txt => taskstats.rst} (95%)
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/cgroupstats.txt b/Documentation/accounting/cgroupstats.rst
similarity index 77%
rename from Documentation/accounting/cgroupstats.txt
rename to Documentation/accounting/cgroupstats.rst
index d16a9849e60e..b9afc48f4ea2 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/cgroupstats.txt
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/cgroupstats.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+==================
+Control Groupstats
+==================
+
Control Groupstats is inspired by the discussion at
http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/4/11/187 and implements per cgroup statistics as
suggested by Andrew Morton in http://lkml.org/lkml/2007/4/11/263.
@@ -19,9 +23,9 @@ about tasks blocked on I/O. If CONFIG_TASK_DELAY_ACCT is disabled, this
information will not be available.
To extract cgroup statistics a utility very similar to getdelays.c
-has been developed, the sample output of the utility is shown below
+has been developed, the sample output of the utility is shown below::
-~/balbir/cgroupstats # ./getdelays -C "/sys/fs/cgroup/a"
-sleeping 1, blocked 0, running 1, stopped 0, uninterruptible 0
-~/balbir/cgroupstats # ./getdelays -C "/sys/fs/cgroup"
-sleeping 155, blocked 0, running 1, stopped 0, uninterruptible 2
+ ~/balbir/cgroupstats # ./getdelays -C "/sys/fs/cgroup/a"
+ sleeping 1, blocked 0, running 1, stopped 0, uninterruptible 0
+ ~/balbir/cgroupstats # ./getdelays -C "/sys/fs/cgroup"
+ sleeping 155, blocked 0, running 1, stopped 0, uninterruptible 2
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt b/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.rst
similarity index 77%
rename from Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt
rename to Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.rst
index 042ea59b5853..7cc7f5852da0 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.txt
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/delay-accounting.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+================
Delay accounting
-----------------
+================
Tasks encounter delays in execution when they wait
for some kernel resource to become available e.g. a
@@ -39,7 +40,9 @@ in detail in a separate document in this directory. Taskstats returns a
generic data structure to userspace corresponding to per-pid and per-tgid
statistics. The delay accounting functionality populates specific fields of
this structure. See
+
include/linux/taskstats.h
+
for a description of the fields pertaining to delay accounting.
It will generally be in the form of counters returning the cumulative
delay seen for cpu, sync block I/O, swapin, memory reclaim etc.
@@ -61,13 +64,16 @@ also serves as an example of using the taskstats interface.
Usage
-----
-Compile the kernel with
+Compile the kernel with::
+
CONFIG_TASK_DELAY_ACCT=y
CONFIG_TASKSTATS=y
Delay accounting is enabled by default at boot up.
-To disable, add
+To disable, add::
+
nodelayacct
+
to the kernel boot options. The rest of the instructions
below assume this has not been done.
@@ -78,40 +84,43 @@ The utility also allows a given command to be
executed and the corresponding delays to be
seen.
-General format of the getdelays command
+General format of the getdelays command::
-getdelays [-t tgid] [-p pid] [-c cmd...]
+ getdelays [-t tgid] [-p pid] [-c cmd...]
-Get delays, since system boot, for pid 10
-# ./getdelays -p 10
-(output similar to next case)
+Get delays, since system boot, for pid 10::
-Get sum of delays, since system boot, for all pids with tgid 5
-# ./getdelays -t 5
+ # ./getdelays -p 10
+ (output similar to next case)
+Get sum of delays, since system boot, for all pids with tgid 5::
-CPU count real total virtual total delay total
- 7876 92005750 100000000 24001500
-IO count delay total
- 0 0
-SWAP count delay total
- 0 0
-RECLAIM count delay total
- 0 0
+ # ./getdelays -t 5
-Get delays seen in executing a given simple command
-# ./getdelays -c ls /
-bin data1 data3 data5 dev home media opt root srv sys usr
-boot data2 data4 data6 etc lib mnt proc sbin subdomain tmp var
+ CPU count real total virtual total delay total
+ 7876 92005750 100000000 24001500
+ IO count delay total
+ 0 0
+ SWAP count delay total
+ 0 0
+ RECLAIM count delay total
+ 0 0
+Get delays seen in executing a given simple command::
-CPU count real total virtual total delay total
+ # ./getdelays -c ls /
+
+ bin data1 data3 data5 dev home media opt root srv sys usr
+ boot data2 data4 data6 etc lib mnt proc sbin subdomain tmp var
+
+
+ CPU count real total virtual total delay total
6 4000250 4000000 0
-IO count delay total
+ IO count delay total
0 0
-SWAP count delay total
+ SWAP count delay total
0 0
-RECLAIM count delay total
+ RECLAIM count delay total
0 0
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/index.rst b/Documentation/accounting/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e1f6284b5ff3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+:orphan:
+
+==========
+Accounting
+==========
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ cgroupstats
+ delay-accounting
+ psi
+ taskstats
+ taskstats-struct
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/psi.txt b/Documentation/accounting/psi.rst
similarity index 91%
rename from Documentation/accounting/psi.txt
rename to Documentation/accounting/psi.rst
index 5cbe5659e3b7..621111ce5740 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/psi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/psi.rst
@@ -35,14 +35,14 @@ Pressure interface
Pressure information for each resource is exported through the
respective file in /proc/pressure/ -- cpu, memory, and io.
-The format for CPU is as such:
+The format for CPU is as such::
-some avg10=0.00 avg60=0.00 avg300=0.00 total=0
+ some avg10=0.00 avg60=0.00 avg300=0.00 total=0
-and for memory and IO:
+and for memory and IO::
-some avg10=0.00 avg60=0.00 avg300=0.00 total=0
-full avg10=0.00 avg60=0.00 avg300=0.00 total=0
+ some avg10=0.00 avg60=0.00 avg300=0.00 total=0
+ full avg10=0.00 avg60=0.00 avg300=0.00 total=0
The "some" line indicates the share of time in which at least some
tasks are stalled on a given resource.
@@ -77,9 +77,9 @@ To register a trigger user has to open psi interface file under
/proc/pressure/ representing the resource to be monitored and write the
desired threshold and time window. The open file descriptor should be
used to wait for trigger events using select(), poll() or epoll().
-The following format is used:
+The following format is used::
-<some|full> <stall amount in us> <time window in us>
+ <some|full> <stall amount in us> <time window in us>
For example writing "some 150000 1000000" into /proc/pressure/memory
would add 150ms threshold for partial memory stall measured within
@@ -115,18 +115,20 @@ trigger is closed.
Userspace monitor usage example
===============================
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <poll.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
+::
-/*
- * Monitor memory partial stall with 1s tracking window size
- * and 150ms threshold.
- */
-int main() {
+ #include <errno.h>
+ #include <fcntl.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <poll.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+ #include <unistd.h>
+
+ /*
+ * Monitor memory partial stall with 1s tracking window size
+ * and 150ms threshold.
+ */
+ int main() {
const char trig[] = "some 150000 1000000";
struct pollfd fds;
int n;
@@ -165,7 +167,7 @@ int main() {
}
return 0;
-}
+ }
Cgroup2 interface
=================
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt b/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.rst
similarity index 78%
rename from Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt
rename to Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.rst
index e7512c061c15..ca90fd489c9a 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.txt
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/taskstats-struct.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+====================
The struct taskstats
---------------------
+====================
This document contains an explanation of the struct taskstats fields.
@@ -10,16 +11,24 @@ There are three different groups of fields in the struct taskstats:
the common fields and basic accounting fields are collected for
delivery at do_exit() of a task.
2) Delay accounting fields
- These fields are placed between
- /* Delay accounting fields start */
- and
- /* Delay accounting fields end */
+ These fields are placed between::
+
+ /* Delay accounting fields start */
+
+ and::
+
+ /* Delay accounting fields end */
+
Their values are collected if CONFIG_TASK_DELAY_ACCT is set.
3) Extended accounting fields
- These fields are placed between
- /* Extended accounting fields start */
- and
- /* Extended accounting fields end */
+ These fields are placed between::
+
+ /* Extended accounting fields start */
+
+ and::
+
+ /* Extended accounting fields end */
+
Their values are collected if CONFIG_TASK_XACCT is set.
4) Per-task and per-thread context switch count statistics
@@ -31,31 +40,33 @@ There are three different groups of fields in the struct taskstats:
Future extension should add fields to the end of the taskstats struct, and
should not change the relative position of each field within the struct.
+::
-struct taskstats {
+ struct taskstats {
+
+1) Common and basic accounting fields::
-1) Common and basic accounting fields:
/* The version number of this struct. This field is always set to
* TAKSTATS_VERSION, which is defined in <linux/taskstats.h>.
* Each time the struct is changed, the value should be incremented.
*/
__u16 version;
- /* The exit code of a task. */
+ /* The exit code of a task. */
__u32 ac_exitcode; /* Exit status */
- /* The accounting flags of a task as defined in <linux/acct.h>
+ /* The accounting flags of a task as defined in <linux/acct.h>
* Defined values are AFORK, ASU, ACOMPAT, ACORE, and AXSIG.
*/
__u8 ac_flag; /* Record flags */
- /* The value of task_nice() of a task. */
+ /* The value of task_nice() of a task. */
__u8 ac_nice; /* task_nice */
- /* The name of the command that started this task. */
+ /* The name of the command that started this task. */
char ac_comm[TS_COMM_LEN]; /* Command name */
- /* The scheduling discipline as set in task->policy field. */
+ /* The scheduling discipline as set in task->policy field. */
__u8 ac_sched; /* Scheduling discipline */
__u8 ac_pad[3];
@@ -64,26 +75,27 @@ struct taskstats {
__u32 ac_pid; /* Process ID */
__u32 ac_ppid; /* Parent process ID */
- /* The time when a task begins, in [secs] since 1970. */
+ /* The time when a task begins, in [secs] since 1970. */
__u32 ac_btime; /* Begin time [sec since 1970] */
- /* The elapsed time of a task, in [usec]. */
+ /* The elapsed time of a task, in [usec]. */
__u64 ac_etime; /* Elapsed time [usec] */
- /* The user CPU time of a task, in [usec]. */
+ /* The user CPU time of a task, in [usec]. */
__u64 ac_utime; /* User CPU time [usec] */
- /* The system CPU time of a task, in [usec]. */
+ /* The system CPU time of a task, in [usec]. */
__u64 ac_stime; /* System CPU time [usec] */
- /* The minor page fault count of a task, as set in task->min_flt. */
+ /* The minor page fault count of a task, as set in task->min_flt. */
__u64 ac_minflt; /* Minor Page Fault Count */
/* The major page fault count of a task, as set in task->maj_flt. */
__u64 ac_majflt; /* Major Page Fault Count */
-2) Delay accounting fields:
+2) Delay accounting fields::
+
/* Delay accounting fields start
*
* All values, until the comment "Delay accounting fields end" are
@@ -134,7 +146,8 @@ struct taskstats {
/* version 1 ends here */
-3) Extended accounting fields
+3) Extended accounting fields::
+
/* Extended accounting fields start */
/* Accumulated RSS usage in duration of a task, in MBytes-usecs.
@@ -145,15 +158,15 @@ struct taskstats {
*/
__u64 coremem; /* accumulated RSS usage in MB-usec */
- /* Accumulated virtual memory usage in duration of a task.
+ /* Accumulated virtual memory usage in duration of a task.
* Same as acct_rss_mem1 above except that we keep track of VM usage.
*/
__u64 virtmem; /* accumulated VM usage in MB-usec */
- /* High watermark of RSS usage in duration of a task, in KBytes. */
+ /* High watermark of RSS usage in duration of a task, in KBytes. */
__u64 hiwater_rss; /* High-watermark of RSS usage */
- /* High watermark of VM usage in duration of a task, in KBytes. */
+ /* High watermark of VM usage in duration of a task, in KBytes. */
__u64 hiwater_vm; /* High-water virtual memory usage */
/* The following four fields are I/O statistics of a task. */
@@ -164,17 +177,23 @@ struct taskstats {
/* Extended accounting fields end */
-4) Per-task and per-thread statistics
+4) Per-task and per-thread statistics::
+
__u64 nvcsw; /* Context voluntary switch counter */
__u64 nivcsw; /* Context involuntary switch counter */
-5) Time accounting for SMT machines
+5) Time accounting for SMT machines::
+
__u64 ac_utimescaled; /* utime scaled on frequency etc */
__u64 ac_stimescaled; /* stime scaled on frequency etc */
__u64 cpu_scaled_run_real_total; /* scaled cpu_run_real_total */
-6) Extended delay accounting fields for memory reclaim
+6) Extended delay accounting fields for memory reclaim::
+
/* Delay waiting for memory reclaim */
__u64 freepages_count;
__u64 freepages_delay_total;
-}
+
+::
+
+ }
diff --git a/Documentation/accounting/taskstats.txt b/Documentation/accounting/taskstats.rst
similarity index 95%
rename from Documentation/accounting/taskstats.txt
rename to Documentation/accounting/taskstats.rst
index ff06b738bb88..2a28b7f55c10 100644
--- a/Documentation/accounting/taskstats.txt
+++ b/Documentation/accounting/taskstats.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+=============================
Per-task statistics interface
------------------------------
+=============================
Taskstats is a netlink-based interface for sending per-task and
@@ -65,7 +66,7 @@ taskstats.h file.
The data exchanged between user and kernel space is a netlink message belonging
to the NETLINK_GENERIC family and using the netlink attributes interface.
-The messages are in the format
+The messages are in the format::
+----------+- - -+-------------+-------------------+
| nlmsghdr | Pad | genlmsghdr | taskstats payload |
@@ -167,15 +168,13 @@ extended and the number of cpus grows large.
To avoid losing statistics, userspace should do one or more of the following:
- increase the receive buffer sizes for the netlink sockets opened by
-listeners to receive exit data.
+ listeners to receive exit data.
- create more listeners and reduce the number of cpus being listened to by
-each listener. In the extreme case, there could be one listener for each cpu.
-Users may also consider setting the cpu affinity of the listener to the subset
-of cpus to which it listens, especially if they are listening to just one cpu.
+ each listener. In the extreme case, there could be one listener for each cpu.
+ Users may also consider setting the cpu affinity of the listener to the subset
+ of cpus to which it listens, especially if they are listening to just one cpu.
Despite these measures, if the userspace receives ENOBUFS error messages
indicated overflow of receive buffers, it should take measures to handle the
loss of data.
-
-----
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst b/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst
index 110c3d34df71..4b971a0bc99a 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/cgroup-v2.rst
@@ -1014,7 +1014,7 @@ All time durations are in microseconds.
A read-only nested-key file which exists on non-root cgroups.
Shows pressure stall information for CPU. See
- Documentation/accounting/psi.txt for details.
+ Documentation/accounting/psi.rst for details.
Memory
@@ -1361,7 +1361,7 @@ PAGE_SIZE multiple when read back.
A read-only nested-key file which exists on non-root cgroups.
Shows pressure stall information for memory. See
- Documentation/accounting/psi.txt for details.
+ Documentation/accounting/psi.rst for details.
Usage Guidelines
@@ -1504,7 +1504,7 @@ IO Interface Files
A read-only nested-key file which exists on non-root cgroups.
Shows pressure stall information for IO. See
- Documentation/accounting/psi.txt for details.
+ Documentation/accounting/psi.rst for details.
Writeback
diff --git a/init/Kconfig b/init/Kconfig
index 6db89d4155d8..1707cf0802a7 100644
--- a/init/Kconfig
+++ b/init/Kconfig
@@ -517,7 +517,7 @@ config PSI
have cpu.pressure, memory.pressure, and io.pressure files,
which aggregate pressure stalls for the grouped tasks only.
- For more details see Documentation/accounting/psi.txt.
+ For more details see Documentation/accounting/psi.rst.
Say N if unsure.
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 19/29] docs: ia64: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 02/29] docs: lcd-panel-cgram.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (27 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Pat Gefre, Ard Biesheuvel, Tony Luck,
Fenghua Yu, linux-ia64, linux-efi
Rename the ia64 documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
There are two upper case file names. Rename them to
lower case, as we're working to avoid upper case file
names at Documentation.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../ia64/{aliasing.txt => aliasing.rst} | 73 ++--
Documentation/ia64/{efirtc.txt => efirtc.rst} | 118 +++---
.../ia64/{err_inject.txt => err_inject.rst} | 349 +++++++++---------
Documentation/ia64/{fsys.txt => fsys.rst} | 127 ++++---
Documentation/ia64/{README => ia64.rst} | 26 +-
Documentation/ia64/index.rst | 18 +
.../ia64/{IRQ-redir.txt => irq-redir.rst} | 31 +-
Documentation/ia64/{mca.txt => mca.rst} | 10 +-
Documentation/ia64/{serial.txt => serial.rst} | 36 +-
Documentation/ia64/xen.rst | 206 +++++++++++
Documentation/ia64/xen.txt | 183 ---------
MAINTAINERS | 2 +-
arch/ia64/kernel/efi.c | 2 +-
arch/ia64/kernel/fsys.S | 2 +-
arch/ia64/mm/ioremap.c | 2 +-
arch/ia64/pci/pci.c | 2 +-
16 files changed, 660 insertions(+), 527 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/ia64/{aliasing.txt => aliasing.rst} (83%)
rename Documentation/ia64/{efirtc.txt => efirtc.rst} (70%)
rename Documentation/ia64/{err_inject.txt => err_inject.rst} (82%)
rename Documentation/ia64/{fsys.txt => fsys.rst} (76%)
rename Documentation/ia64/{README => ia64.rst} (61%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/ia64/index.rst
rename Documentation/ia64/{IRQ-redir.txt => irq-redir.rst} (86%)
rename Documentation/ia64/{mca.txt => mca.rst} (96%)
rename Documentation/ia64/{serial.txt => serial.rst} (87%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/ia64/xen.rst
delete mode 100644 Documentation/ia64/xen.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt b/Documentation/ia64/aliasing.rst
similarity index 83%
rename from Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/aliasing.rst
index 5a4dea6abebd..a08b36aba015 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/aliasing.rst
@@ -1,20 +1,25 @@
- MEMORY ATTRIBUTE ALIASING ON IA-64
+==================================
+Memory Attribute Aliasing on IA-64
+==================================
- Bjorn Helgaas
- <bjorn.helgaas@hp.com>
- May 4, 2006
+Bjorn Helgaas <bjorn.helgaas@hp.com>
+May 4, 2006
-MEMORY ATTRIBUTES
+
+Memory Attributes
+=================
Itanium supports several attributes for virtual memory references.
The attribute is part of the virtual translation, i.e., it is
contained in the TLB entry. The ones of most interest to the Linux
kernel are:
- WB Write-back (cacheable)
+ == ======================
+ WB Write-back (cacheable)
UC Uncacheable
WC Write-coalescing
+ == ======================
System memory typically uses the WB attribute. The UC attribute is
used for memory-mapped I/O devices. The WC attribute is uncacheable
@@ -29,7 +34,8 @@ MEMORY ATTRIBUTES
support either WB or UC access to main memory, while others support
only WB access.
-MEMORY MAP
+Memory Map
+==========
Platform firmware describes the physical memory map and the
supported attributes for each region. At boot-time, the kernel uses
@@ -55,7 +61,8 @@ MEMORY MAP
The efi_memmap table is preserved unmodified because the original
boot-time information is required for kexec.
-KERNEL IDENTITY MAPPINGS
+Kernel Identify Mappings
+========================
Linux/ia64 identity mappings are done with large pages, currently
either 16MB or 64MB, referred to as "granules." Cacheable mappings
@@ -74,17 +81,20 @@ KERNEL IDENTITY MAPPINGS
are only partially populated, or populated with a combination of UC
and WB regions.
-USER MAPPINGS
+User Mappings
+=============
User mappings are typically done with 16K or 64K pages. The smaller
page size allows more flexibility because only 16K or 64K has to be
homogeneous with respect to memory attributes.
-POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
+Potential Attribute Aliasing Cases
+==================================
There are several ways the kernel creates new mappings:
- mmap of /dev/mem
+mmap of /dev/mem
+----------------
This uses remap_pfn_range(), which creates user mappings. These
mappings may be either WB or UC. If the region being mapped
@@ -98,7 +108,8 @@ POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
Since the EFI memory map does not describe MMIO on some
machines, this should use an uncacheable mapping as a fallback.
- mmap of /sys/class/pci_bus/.../legacy_mem
+mmap of /sys/class/pci_bus/.../legacy_mem
+-----------------------------------------
This is very similar to mmap of /dev/mem, except that legacy_mem
only allows mmap of the one megabyte "legacy MMIO" area for a
@@ -112,9 +123,10 @@ POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
The /dev/mem mmap constraints apply.
- mmap of /proc/bus/pci/.../??.?
+mmap of /proc/bus/pci/.../??.?
+------------------------------
- This is an MMIO mmap of PCI functions, which additionally may or
+ This is an MMIO mmap of PCI functions, which additionally may or
may not be requested as using the WC attribute.
If WC is requested, and the region in kern_memmap is either WC
@@ -124,7 +136,8 @@ POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
Otherwise, the user mapping must use the same attribute as the
kernel mapping.
- read/write of /dev/mem
+read/write of /dev/mem
+----------------------
This uses copy_from_user(), which implicitly uses a kernel
identity mapping. This is obviously safe for things in
@@ -138,7 +151,8 @@ POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
eight-byte accesses, and the copy_from_user() path doesn't allow
any control over the access size, so this would be dangerous.
- ioremap()
+ioremap()
+---------
This returns a mapping for use inside the kernel.
@@ -155,9 +169,11 @@ POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
Failing all of the above, we have to fall back to a UC mapping.
-PAST PROBLEM CASES
+Past Problem Cases
+==================
- mmap of various MMIO regions from /dev/mem by "X" on Intel platforms
+mmap of various MMIO regions from /dev/mem by "X" on Intel platforms
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
The EFI memory map may not report these MMIO regions.
@@ -166,12 +182,16 @@ PAST PROBLEM CASES
succeed. It may create either WB or UC user mappings, depending
on whether the region is in kern_memmap or the EFI memory map.
- mmap of 0x0-0x9FFFF /dev/mem by "hwinfo" on HP sx1000 with VGA enabled
+mmap of 0x0-0x9FFFF /dev/mem by "hwinfo" on HP sx1000 with VGA enabled
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
The EFI memory map reports the following attributes:
+
+ =============== ======= ==================
0x00000-0x9FFFF WB only
0xA0000-0xBFFFF UC only (VGA frame buffer)
0xC0000-0xFFFFF WB only
+ =============== ======= ==================
This mmap is done with user pages, not kernel identity mappings,
so it is safe to use WB mappings.
@@ -182,7 +202,8 @@ PAST PROBLEM CASES
never generate an uncacheable reference to the WB-only areas unless
the driver explicitly touches them.
- mmap of 0x0-0xFFFFF legacy_mem by "X"
+mmap of 0x0-0xFFFFF legacy_mem by "X"
+-------------------------------------
If the EFI memory map reports that the entire range supports the
same attributes, we can allow the mmap (and we will prefer WB if
@@ -197,15 +218,18 @@ PAST PROBLEM CASES
that doesn't report the VGA frame buffer at all), we should fail the
mmap and force the user to map just the specific region of interest.
- mmap of 0xA0000-0xBFFFF legacy_mem by "X" on HP sx1000 with VGA disabled
+mmap of 0xA0000-0xBFFFF legacy_mem by "X" on HP sx1000 with VGA disabled
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ The EFI memory map reports the following attributes::
- The EFI memory map reports the following attributes:
0x00000-0xFFFFF WB only (no VGA MMIO hole)
This is a special case of the previous case, and the mmap should
fail for the same reason as above.
- read of /sys/devices/.../rom
+read of /sys/devices/.../rom
+----------------------------
For VGA devices, this may cause an ioremap() of 0xC0000. This
used to be done with a UC mapping, because the VGA frame buffer
@@ -215,7 +239,8 @@ PAST PROBLEM CASES
We should use WB page table mappings to avoid covering the VGA
frame buffer.
-NOTES
+Notes
+=====
[1] SDM rev 2.2, vol 2, sec 4.4.1.
[2] SDM rev 2.2, vol 2, sec 4.4.6.
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/efirtc.txt b/Documentation/ia64/efirtc.rst
similarity index 70%
rename from Documentation/ia64/efirtc.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/efirtc.rst
index 057e6bebda8f..2f7ff5026308 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/efirtc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/efirtc.rst
@@ -1,12 +1,16 @@
+==========================
EFI Real Time Clock driver
--------------------------------
+==========================
+
S. Eranian <eranian@hpl.hp.com>
+
March 2000
-I/ Introduction
+1. Introduction
+===============
This document describes the efirtc.c driver has provided for
-the IA-64 platform.
+the IA-64 platform.
The purpose of this driver is to supply an API for kernel and user applications
to get access to the Time Service offered by EFI version 0.92.
@@ -16,112 +20,124 @@ SetTime(), GetWakeupTime(), SetWakeupTime() which are all supported by this
driver. We describe those calls as well the design of the driver in the
following sections.
-II/ Design Decisions
+2. Design Decisions
+===================
-The original ideas was to provide a very simple driver to get access to,
-at first, the time of day service. This is required in order to access, in a
-portable way, the CMOS clock. A program like /sbin/hwclock uses such a clock
+The original ideas was to provide a very simple driver to get access to,
+at first, the time of day service. This is required in order to access, in a
+portable way, the CMOS clock. A program like /sbin/hwclock uses such a clock
to initialize the system view of the time during boot.
Because we wanted to minimize the impact on existing user-level apps using
the CMOS clock, we decided to expose an API that was very similar to the one
-used today with the legacy RTC driver (driver/char/rtc.c). However, because
+used today with the legacy RTC driver (driver/char/rtc.c). However, because
EFI provides a simpler services, not all ioctl() are available. Also
-new ioctl()s have been introduced for things that EFI provides but not the
+new ioctl()s have been introduced for things that EFI provides but not the
legacy.
EFI uses a slightly different way of representing the time, noticeably
the reference date is different. Year is the using the full 4-digit format.
The Epoch is January 1st 1998. For backward compatibility reasons we don't
-expose this new way of representing time. Instead we use something very
+expose this new way of representing time. Instead we use something very
similar to the struct tm, i.e. struct rtc_time, as used by hwclock.
One of the reasons for doing it this way is to allow for EFI to still evolve
without necessarily impacting any of the user applications. The decoupling
enables flexibility and permits writing wrapper code is ncase things change.
The driver exposes two interfaces, one via the device file and a set of
-ioctl()s. The other is read-only via the /proc filesystem.
+ioctl()s. The other is read-only via the /proc filesystem.
As of today we don't offer a /proc/sys interface.
To allow for a uniform interface between the legacy RTC and EFI time service,
-we have created the include/linux/rtc.h header file to contain only the
-"public" API of the two drivers. The specifics of the legacy RTC are still
+we have created the include/linux/rtc.h header file to contain only the
+"public" API of the two drivers. The specifics of the legacy RTC are still
in include/linux/mc146818rtc.h.
-
-III/ Time of day service
+
+3. Time of day service
+======================
The part of the driver gives access to the time of day service of EFI.
Two ioctl()s, compatible with the legacy RTC calls:
- Read the CMOS clock: ioctl(d, RTC_RD_TIME, &rtc);
+ Read the CMOS clock::
- Write the CMOS clock: ioctl(d, RTC_SET_TIME, &rtc);
+ ioctl(d, RTC_RD_TIME, &rtc);
+
+ Write the CMOS clock::
+
+ ioctl(d, RTC_SET_TIME, &rtc);
The rtc is a pointer to a data structure defined in rtc.h which is close
-to a struct tm:
+to a struct tm::
-struct rtc_time {
- int tm_sec;
- int tm_min;
- int tm_hour;
- int tm_mday;
- int tm_mon;
- int tm_year;
- int tm_wday;
- int tm_yday;
- int tm_isdst;
-};
+ struct rtc_time {
+ int tm_sec;
+ int tm_min;
+ int tm_hour;
+ int tm_mday;
+ int tm_mon;
+ int tm_year;
+ int tm_wday;
+ int tm_yday;
+ int tm_isdst;
+ };
The driver takes care of converting back an forth between the EFI time and
this format.
Those two ioctl()s can be exercised with the hwclock command:
-For reading:
-# /sbin/hwclock --show
-Mon Mar 6 15:32:32 2000 -0.910248 seconds
+For reading::
-For setting:
-# /sbin/hwclock --systohc
+ # /sbin/hwclock --show
+ Mon Mar 6 15:32:32 2000 -0.910248 seconds
+
+For setting::
+
+ # /sbin/hwclock --systohc
Root privileges are required to be able to set the time of day.
-IV/ Wakeup Alarm service
+4. Wakeup Alarm service
+=======================
EFI provides an API by which one can program when a machine should wakeup,
i.e. reboot. This is very different from the alarm provided by the legacy
RTC which is some kind of interval timer alarm. For this reason we don't use
the same ioctl()s to get access to the service. Instead we have
-introduced 2 news ioctl()s to the interface of an RTC.
+introduced 2 news ioctl()s to the interface of an RTC.
We have added 2 new ioctl()s that are specific to the EFI driver:
- Read the current state of the alarm
- ioctl(d, RTC_WKLAM_RD, &wkt)
+ Read the current state of the alarm::
- Set the alarm or change its status
- ioctl(d, RTC_WKALM_SET, &wkt)
+ ioctl(d, RTC_WKLAM_RD, &wkt)
-The wkt structure encapsulates a struct rtc_time + 2 extra fields to get
-status information:
-
-struct rtc_wkalrm {
+ Set the alarm or change its status::
- unsigned char enabled; /* =1 if alarm is enabled */
- unsigned char pending; /* =1 if alarm is pending */
+ ioctl(d, RTC_WKALM_SET, &wkt)
- struct rtc_time time;
-}
+The wkt structure encapsulates a struct rtc_time + 2 extra fields to get
+status information::
+
+ struct rtc_wkalrm {
+
+ unsigned char enabled; /* =1 if alarm is enabled */
+ unsigned char pending; /* =1 if alarm is pending */
+
+ struct rtc_time time;
+ }
As of today, none of the existing user-level apps supports this feature.
-However writing such a program should be hard by simply using those two
-ioctl().
+However writing such a program should be hard by simply using those two
+ioctl().
Root privileges are required to be able to set the alarm.
-V/ References.
+5. References
+=============
Checkout the following Web site for more information on EFI:
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/err_inject.txt b/Documentation/ia64/err_inject.rst
similarity index 82%
rename from Documentation/ia64/err_inject.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/err_inject.rst
index 9f651c181429..900f71e93a29 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/err_inject.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/err_inject.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-
+========================================
IPF Machine Check (MC) error inject tool
========================================
@@ -32,94 +32,94 @@ Errata: Itanium 2 Processors Specification Update lists some errata against
the pal_mc_error_inject PAL procedure. The following err.conf has been tested
on latest Montecito PAL.
-err.conf:
+err.conf::
-#This is configuration file for err_inject_tool.
-#The format of the each line is:
-#cpu, loop, interval, err_type_info, err_struct_info, err_data_buffer
-#where
-# cpu: logical cpu number the error will be inject in.
-# loop: times the error will be injected.
-# interval: In second. every so often one error is injected.
-# err_type_info, err_struct_info: PAL parameters.
-#
-#Note: All values are hex w/o or w/ 0x prefix.
+ #This is configuration file for err_inject_tool.
+ #The format of the each line is:
+ #cpu, loop, interval, err_type_info, err_struct_info, err_data_buffer
+ #where
+ # cpu: logical cpu number the error will be inject in.
+ # loop: times the error will be injected.
+ # interval: In second. every so often one error is injected.
+ # err_type_info, err_struct_info: PAL parameters.
+ #
+ #Note: All values are hex w/o or w/ 0x prefix.
-#On cpu2, inject only total 0x10 errors, interval 5 seconds
-#corrected, data cache, hier-2, physical addr(assigned by tool code).
-#working on Montecito latest PAL.
-2, 10, 5, 4101, 95
+ #On cpu2, inject only total 0x10 errors, interval 5 seconds
+ #corrected, data cache, hier-2, physical addr(assigned by tool code).
+ #working on Montecito latest PAL.
+ 2, 10, 5, 4101, 95
-#On cpu4, inject and consume total 0x10 errors, interval 5 seconds
-#corrected, data cache, hier-2, physical addr(assigned by tool code).
-#working on Montecito latest PAL.
-4, 10, 5, 4109, 95
+ #On cpu4, inject and consume total 0x10 errors, interval 5 seconds
+ #corrected, data cache, hier-2, physical addr(assigned by tool code).
+ #working on Montecito latest PAL.
+ 4, 10, 5, 4109, 95
-#On cpu15, inject and consume total 0x10 errors, interval 5 seconds
-#recoverable, DTR0, hier-2.
-#working on Montecito latest PAL.
-0xf, 0x10, 5, 4249, 15
+ #On cpu15, inject and consume total 0x10 errors, interval 5 seconds
+ #recoverable, DTR0, hier-2.
+ #working on Montecito latest PAL.
+ 0xf, 0x10, 5, 4249, 15
The sample application source code:
-err_injection_tool.c:
+err_injection_tool.c::
-/*
- * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- * the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
- * (at your option) any later version.
- *
- * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
- * WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- * MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, GOOD TITLE or
- * NON INFRINGEMENT. See the GNU General Public License for more
- * details.
- *
- * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
- * along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
- * Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
- *
- * Copyright (C) 2006 Intel Co
- * Fenghua Yu <fenghua.yu@intel.com>
- *
- */
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <sys/stat.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <sched.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <stdarg.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <time.h>
-#include <sys/ipc.h>
-#include <sys/sem.h>
-#include <sys/wait.h>
-#include <sys/mman.h>
-#include <sys/shm.h>
+ /*
+ * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ * the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ * (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+ * WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, GOOD TITLE or
+ * NON INFRINGEMENT. See the GNU General Public License for more
+ * details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ * along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+ *
+ * Copyright (C) 2006 Intel Co
+ * Fenghua Yu <fenghua.yu@intel.com>
+ *
+ */
+ #include <sys/types.h>
+ #include <sys/stat.h>
+ #include <fcntl.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <sched.h>
+ #include <unistd.h>
+ #include <stdlib.h>
+ #include <stdarg.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+ #include <errno.h>
+ #include <time.h>
+ #include <sys/ipc.h>
+ #include <sys/sem.h>
+ #include <sys/wait.h>
+ #include <sys/mman.h>
+ #include <sys/shm.h>
-#define MAX_FN_SIZE 256
-#define MAX_BUF_SIZE 256
-#define DATA_BUF_SIZE 256
-#define NR_CPUS 512
-#define MAX_TASK_NUM 2048
-#define MIN_INTERVAL 5 // seconds
-#define ERR_DATA_BUFFER_SIZE 3 // Three 8-byte.
-#define PARA_FIELD_NUM 5
-#define MASK_SIZE (NR_CPUS/64)
-#define PATH_FORMAT "/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu%d/err_inject/"
+ #define MAX_FN_SIZE 256
+ #define MAX_BUF_SIZE 256
+ #define DATA_BUF_SIZE 256
+ #define NR_CPUS 512
+ #define MAX_TASK_NUM 2048
+ #define MIN_INTERVAL 5 // seconds
+ #define ERR_DATA_BUFFER_SIZE 3 // Three 8-byte.
+ #define PARA_FIELD_NUM 5
+ #define MASK_SIZE (NR_CPUS/64)
+ #define PATH_FORMAT "/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu%d/err_inject/"
-int sched_setaffinity(pid_t pid, unsigned int len, unsigned long *mask);
+ int sched_setaffinity(pid_t pid, unsigned int len, unsigned long *mask);
-int verbose;
-#define vbprintf if (verbose) printf
+ int verbose;
+ #define vbprintf if (verbose) printf
-int log_info(int cpu, const char *fmt, ...)
-{
+ int log_info(int cpu, const char *fmt, ...)
+ {
FILE *log;
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
char buf[MAX_BUF_SIZE];
@@ -142,12 +142,12 @@ int log_info(int cpu, const char *fmt, ...)
fclose(log);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-typedef unsigned long u64;
-typedef unsigned int u32;
+ typedef unsigned long u64;
+ typedef unsigned int u32;
-typedef union err_type_info_u {
+ typedef union err_type_info_u {
struct {
u64 mode : 3, /* 0-2 */
err_inj : 3, /* 3-5 */
@@ -157,9 +157,9 @@ typedef union err_type_info_u {
reserved : 48; /* 16-63 */
} err_type_info_u;
u64 err_type_info;
-} err_type_info_t;
+ } err_type_info_t;
-typedef union err_struct_info_u {
+ typedef union err_struct_info_u {
struct {
u64 siv : 1, /* 0 */
c_t : 2, /* 1-2 */
@@ -197,9 +197,9 @@ typedef union err_struct_info_u {
u64 reserved;
} err_struct_info_bus_processor_interconnect;
u64 err_struct_info;
-} err_struct_info_t;
+ } err_struct_info_t;
-typedef union err_data_buffer_u {
+ typedef union err_data_buffer_u {
struct {
u64 trigger_addr; /* 0-63 */
u64 inj_addr; /* 64-127 */
@@ -221,9 +221,9 @@ typedef union err_data_buffer_u {
u64 reserved; /* 0-63 */
} err_data_buffer_bus_processor_interconnect;
u64 err_data_buffer[ERR_DATA_BUFFER_SIZE];
-} err_data_buffer_t;
+ } err_data_buffer_t;
-typedef union capabilities_u {
+ typedef union capabilities_u {
struct {
u64 i : 1,
d : 1,
@@ -276,9 +276,9 @@ typedef union capabilities_u {
struct {
u64 reserved;
} capabilities_bus_processor_interconnect;
-} capabilities_t;
+ } capabilities_t;
-typedef struct resources_s {
+ typedef struct resources_s {
u64 ibr0 : 1,
ibr2 : 1,
ibr4 : 1,
@@ -288,24 +288,24 @@ typedef struct resources_s {
dbr4 : 1,
dbr6 : 1,
reserved : 48;
-} resources_t;
+ } resources_t;
-long get_page_size(void)
-{
+ long get_page_size(void)
+ {
long page_size=sysconf(_SC_PAGESIZE);
return page_size;
-}
+ }
-#define PAGE_SIZE (get_page_size()==-1?0x4000:get_page_size())
-#define SHM_SIZE (2*PAGE_SIZE*NR_CPUS)
-#define SHM_VA 0x2000000100000000
+ #define PAGE_SIZE (get_page_size()==-1?0x4000:get_page_size())
+ #define SHM_SIZE (2*PAGE_SIZE*NR_CPUS)
+ #define SHM_VA 0x2000000100000000
-int shmid;
-void *shmaddr;
+ int shmid;
+ void *shmaddr;
-int create_shm(void)
-{
+ int create_shm(void)
+ {
key_t key;
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
@@ -343,34 +343,34 @@ int create_shm(void)
mlock(shmaddr, SHM_SIZE);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int free_shm()
-{
+ int free_shm()
+ {
munlock(shmaddr, SHM_SIZE);
- shmdt(shmaddr);
+ shmdt(shmaddr);
semctl(shmid, 0, IPC_RMID);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-#ifdef _SEM_SEMUN_UNDEFINED
-union semun
-{
+ #ifdef _SEM_SEMUN_UNDEFINED
+ union semun
+ {
int val;
struct semid_ds *buf;
unsigned short int *array;
struct seminfo *__buf;
-};
-#endif
+ };
+ #endif
-u32 mode=1; /* 1: physical mode; 2: virtual mode. */
-int one_lock=1;
-key_t key[NR_CPUS];
-int semid[NR_CPUS];
+ u32 mode=1; /* 1: physical mode; 2: virtual mode. */
+ int one_lock=1;
+ key_t key[NR_CPUS];
+ int semid[NR_CPUS];
-int create_sem(int cpu)
-{
+ int create_sem(int cpu)
+ {
union semun arg;
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
int sid;
@@ -407,37 +407,37 @@ int create_sem(int cpu)
}
return 0;
-}
+ }
-static int lock(int cpu)
-{
+ static int lock(int cpu)
+ {
struct sembuf lock;
lock.sem_num = cpu;
lock.sem_op = 1;
semop(semid[cpu], &lock, 1);
- return 0;
-}
+ return 0;
+ }
-static int unlock(int cpu)
-{
+ static int unlock(int cpu)
+ {
struct sembuf unlock;
unlock.sem_num = cpu;
unlock.sem_op = -1;
semop(semid[cpu], &unlock, 1);
- return 0;
-}
+ return 0;
+ }
-void free_sem(int cpu)
-{
+ void free_sem(int cpu)
+ {
semctl(semid[cpu], 0, IPC_RMID);
-}
+ }
-int wr_multi(char *fn, unsigned long *data, int size)
-{
+ int wr_multi(char *fn, unsigned long *data, int size)
+ {
int fd;
char buf[MAX_BUF_SIZE];
int ret;
@@ -459,15 +459,15 @@ int wr_multi(char *fn, unsigned long *data, int size)
ret=write(fd, buf, sizeof(buf));
close(fd);
return ret;
-}
+ }
-int wr(char *fn, unsigned long data)
-{
+ int wr(char *fn, unsigned long data)
+ {
return wr_multi(fn, &data, 1);
-}
+ }
-int rd(char *fn, unsigned long *data)
-{
+ int rd(char *fn, unsigned long *data)
+ {
int fd;
char buf[MAX_BUF_SIZE];
@@ -480,10 +480,10 @@ int rd(char *fn, unsigned long *data)
*data=strtoul(buf, NULL, 16);
close(fd);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int rd_status(char *path, int *status)
-{
+ int rd_status(char *path, int *status)
+ {
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
sprintf(fn, "%s/status", path);
if (rd(fn, (u64*)status)<0) {
@@ -492,10 +492,10 @@ int rd_status(char *path, int *status)
}
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int rd_capabilities(char *path, u64 *capabilities)
-{
+ int rd_capabilities(char *path, u64 *capabilities)
+ {
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
sprintf(fn, "%s/capabilities", path);
if (rd(fn, capabilities)<0) {
@@ -504,10 +504,10 @@ int rd_capabilities(char *path, u64 *capabilities)
}
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int rd_all(char *path)
-{
+ int rd_all(char *path)
+ {
unsigned long err_type_info, err_struct_info, err_data_buffer;
int status;
unsigned long capabilities, resources;
@@ -556,11 +556,11 @@ int rd_all(char *path)
printf("resources=%lx\n", resources);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int query_capabilities(char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
+ int query_capabilities(char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
u64 *capabilities)
-{
+ {
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
err_struct_info_t err_struct_info;
err_data_buffer_t err_data_buffer;
@@ -583,10 +583,10 @@ int query_capabilities(char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
return -1;
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int query_all_capabilities()
-{
+ int query_all_capabilities()
+ {
int status;
err_type_info_t err_type_info;
int err_sev, err_struct, struct_hier;
@@ -629,12 +629,12 @@ int query_all_capabilities()
}
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int err_inject(int cpu, char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
+ int err_inject(int cpu, char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
err_struct_info_t err_struct_info,
err_data_buffer_t err_data_buffer)
-{
+ {
int status;
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
@@ -667,13 +667,13 @@ int err_inject(int cpu, char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
}
return status;
-}
+ }
-static int construct_data_buf(char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
+ static int construct_data_buf(char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
err_struct_info_t err_struct_info,
err_data_buffer_t *err_data_buffer,
void *va1)
-{
+ {
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
u64 virt_addr=0, phys_addr=0;
@@ -710,22 +710,22 @@ static int construct_data_buf(char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
}
return 0;
-}
+ }
-typedef struct {
+ typedef struct {
u64 cpu;
u64 loop;
u64 interval;
u64 err_type_info;
u64 err_struct_info;
u64 err_data_buffer[ERR_DATA_BUFFER_SIZE];
-} parameters_t;
+ } parameters_t;
-parameters_t line_para;
-int para;
+ parameters_t line_para;
+ int para;
-static int empty_data_buffer(u64 *err_data_buffer)
-{
+ static int empty_data_buffer(u64 *err_data_buffer)
+ {
int empty=1;
int i;
@@ -734,10 +734,10 @@ static int empty_data_buffer(u64 *err_data_buffer)
empty=0;
return empty;
-}
+ }
-int err_inj()
-{
+ int err_inj()
+ {
err_type_info_t err_type_info;
err_struct_info_t err_struct_info;
err_data_buffer_t err_data_buffer;
@@ -951,10 +951,10 @@ int err_inj()
printf("All done.\n");
return 0;
-}
+ }
-void help()
-{
+ void help()
+ {
printf("err_inject_tool:\n");
printf("\t-q: query all capabilities. default: off\n");
printf("\t-m: procedure mode. 1: physical 2: virtual. default: 1\n");
@@ -977,10 +977,10 @@ void help()
printf("The tool will take err.conf file as ");
printf("input to inject single or multiple errors ");
printf("on one or multiple cpus in parallel.\n");
-}
+ }
-int main(int argc, char **argv)
-{
+ int main(int argc, char **argv)
+ {
char c;
int do_err_inj=0;
int do_query_all=0;
@@ -1031,7 +1031,7 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv)
if (count!=PARA_FIELD_NUM+3) {
line_para.err_data_buffer[0]=-1,
line_para.err_data_buffer[1]=-1,
- line_para.err_data_buffer[2]=-1;
+ line_para.err_data_buffer[2]=-1;
count=sscanf(optarg, "%lx, %lx, %lx, %lx, %lx\n",
&line_para.cpu,
&line_para.loop,
@@ -1064,5 +1064,4 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv)
help();
return 0;
-}
-
+ }
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/fsys.txt b/Documentation/ia64/fsys.rst
similarity index 76%
rename from Documentation/ia64/fsys.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/fsys.rst
index 59dd689d9b86..a702d2cc94b6 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/fsys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/fsys.rst
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
--*-Mode: outline-*-
-
- Light-weight System Calls for IA-64
- -----------------------------------
+===================================
+Light-weight System Calls for IA-64
+===================================
Started: 13-Jan-2003
+
Last update: 27-Sep-2003
David Mosberger-Tang
@@ -52,12 +52,13 @@ privilege level is at level 0, this means that fsys-mode requires some
care (see below).
-* How to tell fsys-mode
+How to tell fsys-mode
+=====================
Linux operates in fsys-mode when (a) the privilege level is 0 (most
privileged) and (b) the stacks have NOT been switched to kernel memory
yet. For convenience, the header file <asm-ia64/ptrace.h> provides
-three macros:
+three macros::
user_mode(regs)
user_stack(task,regs)
@@ -70,11 +71,12 @@ to by "regs" was executing in user mode (privilege level 3).
user_stack() returns TRUE if the state pointed to by "regs" was
executing on the user-level stack(s). Finally, fsys_mode() returns
TRUE if the CPU state pointed to by "regs" was executing in fsys-mode.
-The fsys_mode() macro is equivalent to the expression:
+The fsys_mode() macro is equivalent to the expression::
!user_mode(regs) && user_stack(task,regs)
-* How to write an fsyscall handler
+How to write an fsyscall handler
+================================
The file arch/ia64/kernel/fsys.S contains a table of fsyscall-handlers
(fsyscall_table). This table contains one entry for each system call.
@@ -87,66 +89,72 @@ of the getpid() system call.
The entry and exit-state of an fsyscall handler is as follows:
-** Machine state on entry to fsyscall handler:
+Machine state on entry to fsyscall handler
+------------------------------------------
- - r10 = 0
- - r11 = saved ar.pfs (a user-level value)
- - r15 = system call number
- - r16 = "current" task pointer (in normal kernel-mode, this is in r13)
- - r32-r39 = system call arguments
- - b6 = return address (a user-level value)
- - ar.pfs = previous frame-state (a user-level value)
- - PSR.be = cleared to zero (i.e., little-endian byte order is in effect)
- - all other registers may contain values passed in from user-mode
+ ========= ===============================================================
+ r10 0
+ r11 saved ar.pfs (a user-level value)
+ r15 system call number
+ r16 "current" task pointer (in normal kernel-mode, this is in r13)
+ r32-r39 system call arguments
+ b6 return address (a user-level value)
+ ar.pfs previous frame-state (a user-level value)
+ PSR.be cleared to zero (i.e., little-endian byte order is in effect)
+ - all other registers may contain values passed in from user-mode
+ ========= ===============================================================
-** Required machine state on exit to fsyscall handler:
+Required machine state on exit to fsyscall handler
+--------------------------------------------------
- - r11 = saved ar.pfs (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
- - r15 = system call number (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
- - r32-r39 = system call arguments (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
- - b6 = return address (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
- - ar.pfs = previous frame-state (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
+ ========= ===========================================================
+ r11 saved ar.pfs (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
+ r15 system call number (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
+ r32-r39 system call arguments (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
+ b6 return address (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
+ ar.pfs previous frame-state (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
+ ========= ===========================================================
Fsyscall handlers can execute with very little overhead, but with that
speed comes a set of restrictions:
- o Fsyscall-handlers MUST check for any pending work in the flags
+ * Fsyscall-handlers MUST check for any pending work in the flags
member of the thread-info structure and if any of the
TIF_ALLWORK_MASK flags are set, the handler needs to fall back on
doing a full system call (by calling fsys_fallback_syscall).
- o Fsyscall-handlers MUST preserve incoming arguments (r32-r39, r11,
+ * Fsyscall-handlers MUST preserve incoming arguments (r32-r39, r11,
r15, b6, and ar.pfs) because they will be needed in case of a
system call restart. Of course, all "preserved" registers also
must be preserved, in accordance to the normal calling conventions.
- o Fsyscall-handlers MUST check argument registers for containing a
+ * Fsyscall-handlers MUST check argument registers for containing a
NaT value before using them in any way that could trigger a
NaT-consumption fault. If a system call argument is found to
contain a NaT value, an fsyscall-handler may return immediately
with r8=EINVAL, r10=-1.
- o Fsyscall-handlers MUST NOT use the "alloc" instruction or perform
+ * Fsyscall-handlers MUST NOT use the "alloc" instruction or perform
any other operation that would trigger mandatory RSE
(register-stack engine) traffic.
- o Fsyscall-handlers MUST NOT write to any stacked registers because
+ * Fsyscall-handlers MUST NOT write to any stacked registers because
it is not safe to assume that user-level called a handler with the
proper number of arguments.
- o Fsyscall-handlers need to be careful when accessing per-CPU variables:
+ * Fsyscall-handlers need to be careful when accessing per-CPU variables:
unless proper safe-guards are taken (e.g., interruptions are avoided),
execution may be pre-empted and resumed on another CPU at any given
time.
- o Fsyscall-handlers must be careful not to leak sensitive kernel'
+ * Fsyscall-handlers must be careful not to leak sensitive kernel'
information back to user-level. In particular, before returning to
user-level, care needs to be taken to clear any scratch registers
that could contain sensitive information (note that the current
task pointer is not considered sensitive: it's already exposed
through ar.k6).
- o Fsyscall-handlers MUST NOT access user-memory without first
+ * Fsyscall-handlers MUST NOT access user-memory without first
validating access-permission (this can be done typically via
probe.r.fault and/or probe.w.fault) and without guarding against
memory access exceptions (this can be done with the EX() macros
@@ -162,7 +170,8 @@ fast system call execution (while fully preserving system call
semantics), but there is also a lot of flexibility in handling more
complicated cases.
-* Signal handling
+Signal handling
+===============
The delivery of (asynchronous) signals must be delayed until fsys-mode
is exited. This is accomplished with the help of the lower-privilege
@@ -173,7 +182,8 @@ PSR.lp and returns immediately. When fsys-mode is exited via the
occur. The trap handler clears PSR.lp again and returns immediately.
The kernel exit path then checks for and delivers any pending signals.
-* PSR Handling
+PSR Handling
+============
The "epc" instruction doesn't change the contents of PSR at all. This
is in contrast to a regular interruption, which clears almost all
@@ -181,6 +191,7 @@ bits. Because of that, some care needs to be taken to ensure things
work as expected. The following discussion describes how each PSR bit
is handled.
+======= =======================================================================
PSR.be Cleared when entering fsys-mode. A srlz.d instruction is used
to ensure the CPU is in little-endian mode before the first
load/store instruction is executed. PSR.be is normally NOT
@@ -202,7 +213,8 @@ PSR.pp Unchanged.
PSR.di Unchanged.
PSR.si Unchanged.
PSR.db Unchanged. The kernel prevents user-level from setting a hardware
- breakpoint that triggers at any privilege level other than 3 (user-mode).
+ breakpoint that triggers at any privilege level other than
+ 3 (user-mode).
PSR.lp Unchanged.
PSR.tb Lazy redirect. If a taken-branch trap occurs while in
fsys-mode, the trap-handler modifies the saved machine state
@@ -235,47 +247,52 @@ PSR.ed Unchanged. Note: This bit could only have an effect if an fsys-mode
PSR.bn Unchanged. Note: fsys-mode handlers may clear the bit, if needed.
Doing so requires clearing PSR.i and PSR.ic as well.
PSR.ia Unchanged. Note: the ia64 linux kernel never sets this bit.
+======= =======================================================================
-* Using fast system calls
+Using fast system calls
+=======================
To use fast system calls, userspace applications need simply call
__kernel_syscall_via_epc(). For example
-- example fgettimeofday() call --
+
-- fgettimeofday.S --
-#include <asm/asmmacro.h>
+::
-GLOBAL_ENTRY(fgettimeofday)
-.prologue
-.save ar.pfs, r11
-mov r11 = ar.pfs
-.body
+ #include <asm/asmmacro.h>
-mov r2 = 0xa000000000020660;; // gate address
- // found by inspection of System.map for the
+ GLOBAL_ENTRY(fgettimeofday)
+ .prologue
+ .save ar.pfs, r11
+ mov r11 = ar.pfs
+ .body
+
+ mov r2 = 0xa000000000020660;; // gate address
+ // found by inspection of System.map for the
// __kernel_syscall_via_epc() function. See
// below for how to do this for real.
-mov b7 = r2
-mov r15 = 1087 // gettimeofday syscall
-;;
-br.call.sptk.many b6 = b7
-;;
+ mov b7 = r2
+ mov r15 = 1087 // gettimeofday syscall
+ ;;
+ br.call.sptk.many b6 = b7
+ ;;
-.restore sp
+ .restore sp
-mov ar.pfs = r11
-br.ret.sptk.many rp;; // return to caller
-END(fgettimeofday)
+ mov ar.pfs = r11
+ br.ret.sptk.many rp;; // return to caller
+ END(fgettimeofday)
-- end fgettimeofday.S --
In reality, getting the gate address is accomplished by two extra
values passed via the ELF auxiliary vector (include/asm-ia64/elf.h)
- o AT_SYSINFO : is the address of __kernel_syscall_via_epc()
- o AT_SYSINFO_EHDR : is the address of the kernel gate ELF DSO
+ * AT_SYSINFO : is the address of __kernel_syscall_via_epc()
+ * AT_SYSINFO_EHDR : is the address of the kernel gate ELF DSO
The ELF DSO is a pre-linked library that is mapped in by the kernel at
the gate page. It is a proper ELF shared object so, with a dynamic
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/README b/Documentation/ia64/ia64.rst
similarity index 61%
rename from Documentation/ia64/README
rename to Documentation/ia64/ia64.rst
index aa17f2154cba..b725019a9492 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/README
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/ia64.rst
@@ -1,43 +1,49 @@
- Linux kernel release 2.4.xx for the IA-64 Platform
+===========================================
+Linux kernel release for the IA-64 Platform
+===========================================
- These are the release notes for Linux version 2.4 for IA-64
+ These are the release notes for Linux since version 2.4 for IA-64
platform. This document provides information specific to IA-64
ONLY, to get additional information about the Linux kernel also
read the original Linux README provided with the kernel.
-INSTALLING the kernel:
+Installing the Kernel
+=====================
- IA-64 kernel installation is the same as the other platforms, see
original README for details.
-SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
+Software Requirements
+=====================
Compiling and running this kernel requires an IA-64 compliant GCC
compiler. And various software packages also compiled with an
IA-64 compliant GCC compiler.
-CONFIGURING the kernel:
+Configuring the Kernel
+======================
Configuration is the same, see original README for details.
-COMPILING the kernel:
+Compiling the Kernel:
- Compiling this kernel doesn't differ from other platform so read
the original README for details BUT make sure you have an IA-64
compliant GCC compiler.
-IA-64 SPECIFICS
+IA-64 Specifics
+===============
- General issues:
- o Hardly any performance tuning has been done. Obvious targets
+ * Hardly any performance tuning has been done. Obvious targets
include the library routines (IP checksum, etc.). Less
obvious targets include making sure we don't flush the TLB
needlessly, etc.
- o SMP locks cleanup/optimization
+ * SMP locks cleanup/optimization
- o IA32 support. Currently experimental. It mostly works.
+ * IA32 support. Currently experimental. It mostly works.
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/index.rst b/Documentation/ia64/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a3e3052ad6e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+:orphan:
+
+==================
+IA-64 Architecture
+==================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ ia64
+ aliasing
+ efirtc
+ err_inject
+ fsys
+ irq-redir
+ mca
+ serial
+ xen
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/IRQ-redir.txt b/Documentation/ia64/irq-redir.rst
similarity index 86%
rename from Documentation/ia64/IRQ-redir.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/irq-redir.rst
index f7bd72261283..39bf94484a15 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/IRQ-redir.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/irq-redir.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
+==============================
IRQ affinity on IA64 platforms
-------------------------------
- 07.01.2002, Erich Focht <efocht@ess.nec.de>
+==============================
+
+07.01.2002, Erich Focht <efocht@ess.nec.de>
By writing to /proc/irq/IRQ#/smp_affinity the interrupt routing can be
@@ -12,22 +14,27 @@ IRQ target is one particular CPU and cannot be a mask of several
CPUs. Only the first non-zero bit is taken into account.
-Usage examples:
+Usage examples
+==============
The target CPU has to be specified as a hexadecimal CPU mask. The
first non-zero bit is the selected CPU. This format has been kept for
compatibility reasons with i386.
Set the delivery mode of interrupt 41 to fixed and route the
-interrupts to CPU #3 (logical CPU number) (2^3=0x08):
+interrupts to CPU #3 (logical CPU number) (2^3=0x08)::
+
echo "8" >/proc/irq/41/smp_affinity
Set the default route for IRQ number 41 to CPU 6 in lowest priority
-delivery mode (redirectable):
+delivery mode (redirectable)::
+
echo "r 40" >/proc/irq/41/smp_affinity
-The output of the command
+The output of the command::
+
cat /proc/irq/IRQ#/smp_affinity
+
gives the target CPU mask for the specified interrupt vector. If the CPU
mask is preceded by the character "r", the interrupt is redirectable
(i.e. lowest priority mode routing is used), otherwise its route is
@@ -35,7 +42,8 @@ fixed.
-Initialization and default behavior:
+Initialization and default behavior
+===================================
If the platform features IRQ redirection (info provided by SAL) all
IO-SAPIC interrupts are initialized with CPU#0 as their default target
@@ -43,9 +51,11 @@ and the routing is the so called "lowest priority mode" (actually
fixed SAPIC mode with hint). The XTP chipset registers are used as hints
for the IRQ routing. Currently in Linux XTP registers can have three
values:
+
- minimal for an idle task,
- normal if any other task runs,
- maximal if the CPU is going to be switched off.
+
The IRQ is routed to the CPU with lowest XTP register value, the
search begins at the default CPU. Therefore most of the interrupts
will be handled by CPU #0.
@@ -53,12 +63,14 @@ will be handled by CPU #0.
If the platform doesn't feature interrupt redirection IOSAPIC fixed
routing is used. The target CPUs are distributed in a round robin
manner. IRQs will be routed only to the selected target CPUs. Check
-with
+with::
+
cat /proc/interrupts
-Comments:
+Comments
+========
On large (multi-node) systems it is recommended to route the IRQs to
the node to which the corresponding device is connected.
@@ -66,4 +78,3 @@ For systems like the NEC AzusA we get IRQ node-affinity for free. This
is because usually the chipsets on each node redirect the interrupts
only to their own CPUs (as they cannot see the XTP registers on the
other nodes).
-
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/mca.txt b/Documentation/ia64/mca.rst
similarity index 96%
rename from Documentation/ia64/mca.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/mca.rst
index f097c60cba1b..08270bba44a4 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/mca.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/mca.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
-An ad-hoc collection of notes on IA64 MCA and INIT processing. Feel
-free to update it with notes about any area that is not clear.
+=============================================================
+An ad-hoc collection of notes on IA64 MCA and INIT processing
+=============================================================
+
+Feel free to update it with notes about any area that is not clear.
---
@@ -82,7 +85,8 @@ if we have a choice here.
own stack as running on that cpu. Then a recursive error gets a
trace of the failing handler's "task".
-[1] My (Keith Owens) original design called for ia64 to separate its
+[1]
+ My (Keith Owens) original design called for ia64 to separate its
struct task and the kernel stacks. Then the MCA/INIT data would be
chained stacks like i386 interrupt stacks. But that required
radical surgery on the rest of ia64, plus extra hard wired TLB
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/serial.txt b/Documentation/ia64/serial.rst
similarity index 87%
rename from Documentation/ia64/serial.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/serial.rst
index a63d2c54329b..1de70c305a79 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/serial.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/serial.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
-SERIAL DEVICE NAMING
+==============
+Serial Devices
+==============
+
+Serial Device Naming
+====================
As of 2.6.10, serial devices on ia64 are named based on the
order of ACPI and PCI enumeration. The first device in the
@@ -30,17 +35,21 @@ SERIAL DEVICE NAMING
(described in the ACPI namespace) plus an MP[2] (a PCI device) has
these ports:
- pre-2.6.10 pre-2.6.10
- MMIO (EFI console (EFI console
- address on builtin) on MP port) 2.6.10
- ========== ========== ========== ======
+ ========== ========== ============ ============ =======
+ Type MMIO pre-2.6.10 pre-2.6.10 2.6.10+
+ address
+ (EFI console (EFI console
+ on builtin) on MP port)
+ ========== ========== ============ ============ =======
builtin 0xff5e0000 ttyS0 ttyS1 ttyS0
MP UPS 0xf8031000 ttyS1 ttyS2 ttyS1
MP Console 0xf8030000 ttyS2 ttyS0 ttyS2
MP 2 0xf8030010 ttyS3 ttyS3 ttyS3
MP 3 0xf8030038 ttyS4 ttyS4 ttyS4
+ ========== ========== ============ ============ =======
-CONSOLE SELECTION
+Console Selection
+=================
EFI knows what your console devices are, but it doesn't tell the
kernel quite enough to actually locate them. The DIG64 HCDP
@@ -67,7 +76,8 @@ CONSOLE SELECTION
entries in /etc/inittab (for getty) and /etc/securetty (to allow
root login).
-EARLY SERIAL CONSOLE
+Early Serial Console
+====================
The kernel can't start using a serial console until it knows where
the device lives. Normally this happens when the driver enumerates
@@ -80,7 +90,8 @@ EARLY SERIAL CONSOLE
or if the EFI console path contains only a UART device and the
firmware supplies an HCDP.
-TROUBLESHOOTING SERIAL CONSOLE PROBLEMS
+Troubleshooting Serial Console Problems
+=======================================
No kernel output after elilo prints "Uncompressing Linux... done":
@@ -133,19 +144,22 @@ TROUBLESHOOTING SERIAL CONSOLE PROBLEMS
-[1] http://www.dig64.org/specifications/agreement
+[1]
+ http://www.dig64.org/specifications/agreement
The table was originally defined as the "HCDP" for "Headless
Console/Debug Port." The current version is the "PCDP" for
"Primary Console and Debug Port Devices."
-[2] The HP MP (management processor) is a PCI device that provides
+[2]
+ The HP MP (management processor) is a PCI device that provides
several UARTs. One of the UARTs is often used as a console; the
EFI Boot Manager identifies it as "Acpi(HWP0002,700)/Pci(...)/Uart".
The external connection is usually a 25-pin connector, and a
special dongle converts that to three 9-pin connectors, one of
which is labelled "Console."
-[3] EFI console devices are configured using the EFI Boot Manager
+[3]
+ EFI console devices are configured using the EFI Boot Manager
"Boot option maintenance" menu. You may have to interrupt the
boot sequence to use this menu, and you will have to reset the
box after changing console configuration.
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/xen.rst b/Documentation/ia64/xen.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..831339c74441
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/xen.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,206 @@
+********************************************************
+Recipe for getting/building/running Xen/ia64 with pv_ops
+********************************************************
+This recipe describes how to get xen-ia64 source and build it,
+and run domU with pv_ops.
+
+Requirements
+============
+
+ - python
+ - mercurial
+ it (aka "hg") is an open-source source code
+ management software. See the below.
+ http://www.selenic.com/mercurial/wiki/
+ - git
+ - bridge-utils
+
+Getting and Building Xen and Dom0
+=================================
+
+ My environment is:
+
+ - Machine : Tiger4
+ - Domain0 OS : RHEL5
+ - DomainU OS : RHEL5
+
+ 1. Download source::
+
+ # hg clone http://xenbits.xensource.com/ext/ia64/xen-unstable.hg
+ # cd xen-unstable.hg
+ # hg clone http://xenbits.xensource.com/ext/ia64/linux-2.6.18-xen.hg
+
+ 2. # make world
+
+ 3. # make install-tools
+
+ 4. copy kernels and xen::
+
+ # cp xen/xen.gz /boot/efi/efi/redhat/
+ # cp build-linux-2.6.18-xen_ia64/vmlinux.gz \
+ /boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6.18.8-xen
+
+ 5. make initrd for Dom0/DomU::
+
+ # make -C linux-2.6.18-xen.hg ARCH=ia64 modules_install \
+ O=$(pwd)/build-linux-2.6.18-xen_ia64
+ # mkinitrd -f /boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6.18.8-xen.img \
+ 2.6.18.8-xen --builtin mptspi --builtin mptbase \
+ --builtin mptscsih --builtin uhci-hcd --builtin ohci-hcd \
+ --builtin ehci-hcd
+
+Making a disk image for guest OS
+================================
+
+ 1. make file::
+
+ # dd if=/dev/zero of=/root/rhel5.img bs=1M seek=4096 count=0
+ # mke2fs -F -j /root/rhel5.img
+ # mount -o loop /root/rhel5.img /mnt
+ # cp -ax /{dev,var,etc,usr,bin,sbin,lib} /mnt
+ # mkdir /mnt/{root,proc,sys,home,tmp}
+
+ Note: You may miss some device files. If so, please create them
+ with mknod. Or you can use tar instead of cp.
+
+ 2. modify DomU's fstab::
+
+ # vi /mnt/etc/fstab
+ /dev/xvda1 / ext3 defaults 1 1
+ none /dev/pts devpts gid=5,mode=620 0 0
+ none /dev/shm tmpfs defaults 0 0
+ none /proc proc defaults 0 0
+ none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
+
+ 3. modify inittab
+
+ set runlevel to 3 to avoid X trying to start::
+
+ # vi /mnt/etc/inittab
+ id:3:initdefault:
+
+ Start a getty on the hvc0 console::
+
+ X0:2345:respawn:/sbin/mingetty hvc0
+
+ tty1-6 mingetty can be commented out
+
+ 4. add hvc0 into /etc/securetty::
+
+ # vi /mnt/etc/securetty (add hvc0)
+
+ 5. umount::
+
+ # umount /mnt
+
+FYI, virt-manager can also make a disk image for guest OS.
+It's GUI tools and easy to make it.
+
+Boot Xen & Domain0
+==================
+
+ 1. replace elilo
+ elilo of RHEL5 can boot Xen and Dom0.
+ If you use old elilo (e.g RHEL4), please download from the below
+ http://elilo.sourceforge.net/cgi-bin/blosxom
+ and copy into /boot/efi/efi/redhat/::
+
+ # cp elilo-3.6-ia64.efi /boot/efi/efi/redhat/elilo.efi
+
+ 2. modify elilo.conf (like the below)::
+
+ # vi /boot/efi/efi/redhat/elilo.conf
+ prompt
+ timeout=20
+ default=xen
+ relocatable
+
+ image=vmlinuz-2.6.18.8-xen
+ label=xen
+ vmm=xen.gz
+ initrd=initrd-2.6.18.8-xen.img
+ read-only
+ append=" -- rhgb root=/dev/sda2"
+
+The append options before "--" are for xen hypervisor,
+the options after "--" are for dom0.
+
+FYI, your machine may need console options like
+"com1=19200,8n1 console=vga,com1". For example,
+append="com1=19200,8n1 console=vga,com1 -- rhgb console=tty0 \
+console=ttyS0 root=/dev/sda2"
+
+Getting and Building domU with pv_ops
+=====================================
+
+ 1. get pv_ops tree::
+
+ # git clone http://people.valinux.co.jp/~yamahata/xen-ia64/linux-2.6-xen-ia64.git/
+
+ 2. git branch (if necessary)::
+
+ # cd linux-2.6-xen-ia64/
+ # git checkout -b your_branch origin/xen-ia64-domu-minimal-2008may19
+
+ Note:
+ The current branch is xen-ia64-domu-minimal-2008may19.
+ But you would find the new branch. You can see with
+ "git branch -r" to get the branch lists.
+
+ http://people.valinux.co.jp/~yamahata/xen-ia64/for_eagl/linux-2.6-ia64-pv-ops.git/
+
+ is also available.
+
+ The tree is based on
+
+ git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aegl/linux-2.6 test)
+
+ 3. copy .config for pv_ops of domU::
+
+ # cp arch/ia64/configs/xen_domu_wip_defconfig .config
+
+ 4. make kernel with pv_ops::
+
+ # make oldconfig
+ # make
+
+ 5. install the kernel and initrd::
+
+ # cp vmlinux.gz /boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6-pv_ops-xenU
+ # make modules_install
+ # mkinitrd -f /boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6-pv_ops-xenU.img \
+ 2.6.26-rc3xen-ia64-08941-g1b12161 --builtin mptspi \
+ --builtin mptbase --builtin mptscsih --builtin uhci-hcd \
+ --builtin ohci-hcd --builtin ehci-hcd
+
+Boot DomainU with pv_ops
+========================
+
+ 1. make config of DomU::
+
+ # vi /etc/xen/rhel5
+ kernel = "/boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6-pv_ops-xenU"
+ ramdisk = "/boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6-pv_ops-xenU.img"
+ vcpus = 1
+ memory = 512
+ name = "rhel5"
+ disk = [ 'file:/root/rhel5.img,xvda1,w' ]
+ root = "/dev/xvda1 ro"
+ extra= "rhgb console=hvc0"
+
+ 2. After boot xen and dom0, start xend::
+
+ # /etc/init.d/xend start
+
+ ( In the debugging case, `# XEND_DEBUG=1 xend trace_start` )
+
+ 3. start domU::
+
+ # xm create -c rhel5
+
+Reference
+=========
+- Wiki of Xen/IA64 upstream merge
+ http://wiki.xensource.com/xenwiki/XenIA64/UpstreamMerge
+
+Written by Akio Takebe <takebe_akio@jp.fujitsu.com> on 28 May 2008
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/xen.txt b/Documentation/ia64/xen.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index a12c74ce2773..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/ia64/xen.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,183 +0,0 @@
- Recipe for getting/building/running Xen/ia64 with pv_ops
- --------------------------------------------------------
-
-This recipe describes how to get xen-ia64 source and build it,
-and run domU with pv_ops.
-
-============
-Requirements
-============
-
- - python
- - mercurial
- it (aka "hg") is an open-source source code
- management software. See the below.
- http://www.selenic.com/mercurial/wiki/
- - git
- - bridge-utils
-
-=================================
-Getting and Building Xen and Dom0
-=================================
-
- My environment is;
- Machine : Tiger4
- Domain0 OS : RHEL5
- DomainU OS : RHEL5
-
- 1. Download source
- # hg clone http://xenbits.xensource.com/ext/ia64/xen-unstable.hg
- # cd xen-unstable.hg
- # hg clone http://xenbits.xensource.com/ext/ia64/linux-2.6.18-xen.hg
-
- 2. # make world
-
- 3. # make install-tools
-
- 4. copy kernels and xen
- # cp xen/xen.gz /boot/efi/efi/redhat/
- # cp build-linux-2.6.18-xen_ia64/vmlinux.gz \
- /boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6.18.8-xen
-
- 5. make initrd for Dom0/DomU
- # make -C linux-2.6.18-xen.hg ARCH=ia64 modules_install \
- O=$(pwd)/build-linux-2.6.18-xen_ia64
- # mkinitrd -f /boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6.18.8-xen.img \
- 2.6.18.8-xen --builtin mptspi --builtin mptbase \
- --builtin mptscsih --builtin uhci-hcd --builtin ohci-hcd \
- --builtin ehci-hcd
-
-================================
-Making a disk image for guest OS
-================================
-
- 1. make file
- # dd if=/dev/zero of=/root/rhel5.img bs=1M seek=4096 count=0
- # mke2fs -F -j /root/rhel5.img
- # mount -o loop /root/rhel5.img /mnt
- # cp -ax /{dev,var,etc,usr,bin,sbin,lib} /mnt
- # mkdir /mnt/{root,proc,sys,home,tmp}
-
- Note: You may miss some device files. If so, please create them
- with mknod. Or you can use tar instead of cp.
-
- 2. modify DomU's fstab
- # vi /mnt/etc/fstab
- /dev/xvda1 / ext3 defaults 1 1
- none /dev/pts devpts gid=5,mode=620 0 0
- none /dev/shm tmpfs defaults 0 0
- none /proc proc defaults 0 0
- none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
-
- 3. modify inittab
- set runlevel to 3 to avoid X trying to start
- # vi /mnt/etc/inittab
- id:3:initdefault:
- Start a getty on the hvc0 console
- X0:2345:respawn:/sbin/mingetty hvc0
- tty1-6 mingetty can be commented out
-
- 4. add hvc0 into /etc/securetty
- # vi /mnt/etc/securetty (add hvc0)
-
- 5. umount
- # umount /mnt
-
-FYI, virt-manager can also make a disk image for guest OS.
-It's GUI tools and easy to make it.
-
-==================
-Boot Xen & Domain0
-==================
-
- 1. replace elilo
- elilo of RHEL5 can boot Xen and Dom0.
- If you use old elilo (e.g RHEL4), please download from the below
- http://elilo.sourceforge.net/cgi-bin/blosxom
- and copy into /boot/efi/efi/redhat/
- # cp elilo-3.6-ia64.efi /boot/efi/efi/redhat/elilo.efi
-
- 2. modify elilo.conf (like the below)
- # vi /boot/efi/efi/redhat/elilo.conf
- prompt
- timeout=20
- default=xen
- relocatable
-
- image=vmlinuz-2.6.18.8-xen
- label=xen
- vmm=xen.gz
- initrd=initrd-2.6.18.8-xen.img
- read-only
- append=" -- rhgb root=/dev/sda2"
-
-The append options before "--" are for xen hypervisor,
-the options after "--" are for dom0.
-
-FYI, your machine may need console options like
-"com1=19200,8n1 console=vga,com1". For example,
-append="com1=19200,8n1 console=vga,com1 -- rhgb console=tty0 \
-console=ttyS0 root=/dev/sda2"
-
-=====================================
-Getting and Building domU with pv_ops
-=====================================
-
- 1. get pv_ops tree
- # git clone http://people.valinux.co.jp/~yamahata/xen-ia64/linux-2.6-xen-ia64.git/
-
- 2. git branch (if necessary)
- # cd linux-2.6-xen-ia64/
- # git checkout -b your_branch origin/xen-ia64-domu-minimal-2008may19
- (Note: The current branch is xen-ia64-domu-minimal-2008may19.
- But you would find the new branch. You can see with
- "git branch -r" to get the branch lists.
- http://people.valinux.co.jp/~yamahata/xen-ia64/for_eagl/linux-2.6-ia64-pv-ops.git/
- is also available. The tree is based on
- git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aegl/linux-2.6 test)
-
-
- 3. copy .config for pv_ops of domU
- # cp arch/ia64/configs/xen_domu_wip_defconfig .config
-
- 4. make kernel with pv_ops
- # make oldconfig
- # make
-
- 5. install the kernel and initrd
- # cp vmlinux.gz /boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6-pv_ops-xenU
- # make modules_install
- # mkinitrd -f /boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6-pv_ops-xenU.img \
- 2.6.26-rc3xen-ia64-08941-g1b12161 --builtin mptspi \
- --builtin mptbase --builtin mptscsih --builtin uhci-hcd \
- --builtin ohci-hcd --builtin ehci-hcd
-
-========================
-Boot DomainU with pv_ops
-========================
-
- 1. make config of DomU
- # vi /etc/xen/rhel5
- kernel = "/boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6-pv_ops-xenU"
- ramdisk = "/boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6-pv_ops-xenU.img"
- vcpus = 1
- memory = 512
- name = "rhel5"
- disk = [ 'file:/root/rhel5.img,xvda1,w' ]
- root = "/dev/xvda1 ro"
- extra= "rhgb console=hvc0"
-
- 2. After boot xen and dom0, start xend
- # /etc/init.d/xend start
- ( In the debugging case, # XEND_DEBUG=1 xend trace_start )
-
- 3. start domU
- # xm create -c rhel5
-
-=========
-Reference
-=========
-- Wiki of Xen/IA64 upstream merge
- http://wiki.xensource.com/xenwiki/XenIA64/UpstreamMerge
-
-Written by Akio Takebe <takebe_akio@jp.fujitsu.com> on 28 May 2008
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index 8941a73880e6..f27f50f88638 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -14266,7 +14266,7 @@ SGI SN-IA64 (Altix) SERIAL CONSOLE DRIVER
M: Pat Gefre <pfg@sgi.com>
L: linux-ia64@vger.kernel.org
S: Supported
-F: Documentation/ia64/serial.txt
+F: Documentation/ia64/serial.rst
F: drivers/tty/serial/ioc?_serial.c
F: include/linux/ioc?.h
diff --git a/arch/ia64/kernel/efi.c b/arch/ia64/kernel/efi.c
index 8f106638913c..3795d18276c4 100644
--- a/arch/ia64/kernel/efi.c
+++ b/arch/ia64/kernel/efi.c
@@ -852,7 +852,7 @@ valid_phys_addr_range (phys_addr_t phys_addr, unsigned long size)
* /dev/mem reads and writes use copy_to_user(), which implicitly
* uses a granule-sized kernel identity mapping. It's really
* only safe to do this for regions in kern_memmap. For more
- * details, see Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt.
+ * details, see Documentation/ia64/aliasing.rst.
*/
attr = kern_mem_attribute(phys_addr, size);
if (attr & EFI_MEMORY_WB || attr & EFI_MEMORY_UC)
diff --git a/arch/ia64/kernel/fsys.S b/arch/ia64/kernel/fsys.S
index d80c99a5f55d..0750a716adc7 100644
--- a/arch/ia64/kernel/fsys.S
+++ b/arch/ia64/kernel/fsys.S
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
#include <asm/native/inst.h>
/*
- * See Documentation/ia64/fsys.txt for details on fsyscalls.
+ * See Documentation/ia64/fsys.rst for details on fsyscalls.
*
* On entry to an fsyscall handler:
* r10 = 0 (i.e., defaults to "successful syscall return")
diff --git a/arch/ia64/mm/ioremap.c b/arch/ia64/mm/ioremap.c
index 43964cde6214..c7da3376b6f8 100644
--- a/arch/ia64/mm/ioremap.c
+++ b/arch/ia64/mm/ioremap.c
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ ioremap (unsigned long phys_addr, unsigned long size)
/*
* For things in kern_memmap, we must use the same attribute
* as the rest of the kernel. For more details, see
- * Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt.
+ * Documentation/ia64/aliasing.rst.
*/
attr = kern_mem_attribute(phys_addr, size);
if (attr & EFI_MEMORY_WB)
diff --git a/arch/ia64/pci/pci.c b/arch/ia64/pci/pci.c
index e308196c2229..165e561dc81a 100644
--- a/arch/ia64/pci/pci.c
+++ b/arch/ia64/pci/pci.c
@@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ pci_mmap_legacy_page_range(struct pci_bus *bus, struct vm_area_struct *vma,
return -ENOSYS;
/*
- * Avoid attribute aliasing. See Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt
+ * Avoid attribute aliasing. See Documentation/ia64/aliasing.rst
* for more details.
*/
if (!valid_mmap_phys_addr_range(vma->vm_pgoff, size))
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 19/29] docs: ia64: convert to ReST
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
0 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Pat Gefre, Ard Biesheuvel, Tony Luck,
Fenghua Yu, linux-ia64, linux-efi
Rename the ia64 documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
There are two upper case file names. Rename them to
lower case, as we're working to avoid upper case file
names at Documentation.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../ia64/{aliasing.txt => aliasing.rst} | 73 ++--
Documentation/ia64/{efirtc.txt => efirtc.rst} | 118 +++---
.../ia64/{err_inject.txt => err_inject.rst} | 349 +++++++++---------
Documentation/ia64/{fsys.txt => fsys.rst} | 127 ++++---
Documentation/ia64/{README => ia64.rst} | 26 +-
Documentation/ia64/index.rst | 18 +
.../ia64/{IRQ-redir.txt => irq-redir.rst} | 31 +-
Documentation/ia64/{mca.txt => mca.rst} | 10 +-
Documentation/ia64/{serial.txt => serial.rst} | 36 +-
Documentation/ia64/xen.rst | 206 +++++++++++
Documentation/ia64/xen.txt | 183 ---------
MAINTAINERS | 2 +-
arch/ia64/kernel/efi.c | 2 +-
arch/ia64/kernel/fsys.S | 2 +-
arch/ia64/mm/ioremap.c | 2 +-
arch/ia64/pci/pci.c | 2 +-
16 files changed, 660 insertions(+), 527 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/ia64/{aliasing.txt => aliasing.rst} (83%)
rename Documentation/ia64/{efirtc.txt => efirtc.rst} (70%)
rename Documentation/ia64/{err_inject.txt => err_inject.rst} (82%)
rename Documentation/ia64/{fsys.txt => fsys.rst} (76%)
rename Documentation/ia64/{README => ia64.rst} (61%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/ia64/index.rst
rename Documentation/ia64/{IRQ-redir.txt => irq-redir.rst} (86%)
rename Documentation/ia64/{mca.txt => mca.rst} (96%)
rename Documentation/ia64/{serial.txt => serial.rst} (87%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/ia64/xen.rst
delete mode 100644 Documentation/ia64/xen.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt b/Documentation/ia64/aliasing.rst
similarity index 83%
rename from Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/aliasing.rst
index 5a4dea6abebd..a08b36aba015 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/aliasing.rst
@@ -1,20 +1,25 @@
- MEMORY ATTRIBUTE ALIASING ON IA-64
+=================
+Memory Attribute Aliasing on IA-64
+=================
- Bjorn Helgaas
- <bjorn.helgaas@hp.com>
- May 4, 2006
+Bjorn Helgaas <bjorn.helgaas@hp.com>
+May 4, 2006
-MEMORY ATTRIBUTES
+
+Memory Attributes
+========
Itanium supports several attributes for virtual memory references.
The attribute is part of the virtual translation, i.e., it is
contained in the TLB entry. The ones of most interest to the Linux
kernel are:
- WB Write-back (cacheable)
+ = ===========
+ WB Write-back (cacheable)
UC Uncacheable
WC Write-coalescing
+ = ===========
System memory typically uses the WB attribute. The UC attribute is
used for memory-mapped I/O devices. The WC attribute is uncacheable
@@ -29,7 +34,8 @@ MEMORY ATTRIBUTES
support either WB or UC access to main memory, while others support
only WB access.
-MEMORY MAP
+Memory Map
+=====
Platform firmware describes the physical memory map and the
supported attributes for each region. At boot-time, the kernel uses
@@ -55,7 +61,8 @@ MEMORY MAP
The efi_memmap table is preserved unmodified because the original
boot-time information is required for kexec.
-KERNEL IDENTITY MAPPINGS
+Kernel Identify Mappings
+============
Linux/ia64 identity mappings are done with large pages, currently
either 16MB or 64MB, referred to as "granules." Cacheable mappings
@@ -74,17 +81,20 @@ KERNEL IDENTITY MAPPINGS
are only partially populated, or populated with a combination of UC
and WB regions.
-USER MAPPINGS
+User Mappings
+======
User mappings are typically done with 16K or 64K pages. The smaller
page size allows more flexibility because only 16K or 64K has to be
homogeneous with respect to memory attributes.
-POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
+Potential Attribute Aliasing Cases
+=================
There are several ways the kernel creates new mappings:
- mmap of /dev/mem
+mmap of /dev/mem
+----------------
This uses remap_pfn_range(), which creates user mappings. These
mappings may be either WB or UC. If the region being mapped
@@ -98,7 +108,8 @@ POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
Since the EFI memory map does not describe MMIO on some
machines, this should use an uncacheable mapping as a fallback.
- mmap of /sys/class/pci_bus/.../legacy_mem
+mmap of /sys/class/pci_bus/.../legacy_mem
+-----------------------------------------
This is very similar to mmap of /dev/mem, except that legacy_mem
only allows mmap of the one megabyte "legacy MMIO" area for a
@@ -112,9 +123,10 @@ POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
The /dev/mem mmap constraints apply.
- mmap of /proc/bus/pci/.../??.?
+mmap of /proc/bus/pci/.../??.?
+------------------------------
- This is an MMIO mmap of PCI functions, which additionally may or
+ This is an MMIO mmap of PCI functions, which additionally may or
may not be requested as using the WC attribute.
If WC is requested, and the region in kern_memmap is either WC
@@ -124,7 +136,8 @@ POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
Otherwise, the user mapping must use the same attribute as the
kernel mapping.
- read/write of /dev/mem
+read/write of /dev/mem
+----------------------
This uses copy_from_user(), which implicitly uses a kernel
identity mapping. This is obviously safe for things in
@@ -138,7 +151,8 @@ POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
eight-byte accesses, and the copy_from_user() path doesn't allow
any control over the access size, so this would be dangerous.
- ioremap()
+ioremap()
+---------
This returns a mapping for use inside the kernel.
@@ -155,9 +169,11 @@ POTENTIAL ATTRIBUTE ALIASING CASES
Failing all of the above, we have to fall back to a UC mapping.
-PAST PROBLEM CASES
+Past Problem Cases
+=========
- mmap of various MMIO regions from /dev/mem by "X" on Intel platforms
+mmap of various MMIO regions from /dev/mem by "X" on Intel platforms
+--------------------------------------------------------------------
The EFI memory map may not report these MMIO regions.
@@ -166,12 +182,16 @@ PAST PROBLEM CASES
succeed. It may create either WB or UC user mappings, depending
on whether the region is in kern_memmap or the EFI memory map.
- mmap of 0x0-0x9FFFF /dev/mem by "hwinfo" on HP sx1000 with VGA enabled
+mmap of 0x0-0x9FFFF /dev/mem by "hwinfo" on HP sx1000 with VGA enabled
+----------------------------------------------------------------------
The EFI memory map reports the following attributes:
+
+ ======== ==== =========
0x00000-0x9FFFF WB only
0xA0000-0xBFFFF UC only (VGA frame buffer)
0xC0000-0xFFFFF WB only
+ ======== ==== =========
This mmap is done with user pages, not kernel identity mappings,
so it is safe to use WB mappings.
@@ -182,7 +202,8 @@ PAST PROBLEM CASES
never generate an uncacheable reference to the WB-only areas unless
the driver explicitly touches them.
- mmap of 0x0-0xFFFFF legacy_mem by "X"
+mmap of 0x0-0xFFFFF legacy_mem by "X"
+-------------------------------------
If the EFI memory map reports that the entire range supports the
same attributes, we can allow the mmap (and we will prefer WB if
@@ -197,15 +218,18 @@ PAST PROBLEM CASES
that doesn't report the VGA frame buffer at all), we should fail the
mmap and force the user to map just the specific region of interest.
- mmap of 0xA0000-0xBFFFF legacy_mem by "X" on HP sx1000 with VGA disabled
+mmap of 0xA0000-0xBFFFF legacy_mem by "X" on HP sx1000 with VGA disabled
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ The EFI memory map reports the following attributes::
- The EFI memory map reports the following attributes:
0x00000-0xFFFFF WB only (no VGA MMIO hole)
This is a special case of the previous case, and the mmap should
fail for the same reason as above.
- read of /sys/devices/.../rom
+read of /sys/devices/.../rom
+----------------------------
For VGA devices, this may cause an ioremap() of 0xC0000. This
used to be done with a UC mapping, because the VGA frame buffer
@@ -215,7 +239,8 @@ PAST PROBLEM CASES
We should use WB page table mappings to avoid covering the VGA
frame buffer.
-NOTES
+Notes
+==
[1] SDM rev 2.2, vol 2, sec 4.4.1.
[2] SDM rev 2.2, vol 2, sec 4.4.6.
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/efirtc.txt b/Documentation/ia64/efirtc.rst
similarity index 70%
rename from Documentation/ia64/efirtc.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/efirtc.rst
index 057e6bebda8f..2f7ff5026308 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/efirtc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/efirtc.rst
@@ -1,12 +1,16 @@
+=============
EFI Real Time Clock driver
--------------------------------
+=============
+
S. Eranian <eranian@hpl.hp.com>
+
March 2000
-I/ Introduction
+1. Introduction
+=======
This document describes the efirtc.c driver has provided for
-the IA-64 platform.
+the IA-64 platform.
The purpose of this driver is to supply an API for kernel and user applications
to get access to the Time Service offered by EFI version 0.92.
@@ -16,112 +20,124 @@ SetTime(), GetWakeupTime(), SetWakeupTime() which are all supported by this
driver. We describe those calls as well the design of the driver in the
following sections.
-II/ Design Decisions
+2. Design Decisions
+=========
-The original ideas was to provide a very simple driver to get access to,
-at first, the time of day service. This is required in order to access, in a
-portable way, the CMOS clock. A program like /sbin/hwclock uses such a clock
+The original ideas was to provide a very simple driver to get access to,
+at first, the time of day service. This is required in order to access, in a
+portable way, the CMOS clock. A program like /sbin/hwclock uses such a clock
to initialize the system view of the time during boot.
Because we wanted to minimize the impact on existing user-level apps using
the CMOS clock, we decided to expose an API that was very similar to the one
-used today with the legacy RTC driver (driver/char/rtc.c). However, because
+used today with the legacy RTC driver (driver/char/rtc.c). However, because
EFI provides a simpler services, not all ioctl() are available. Also
-new ioctl()s have been introduced for things that EFI provides but not the
+new ioctl()s have been introduced for things that EFI provides but not the
legacy.
EFI uses a slightly different way of representing the time, noticeably
the reference date is different. Year is the using the full 4-digit format.
The Epoch is January 1st 1998. For backward compatibility reasons we don't
-expose this new way of representing time. Instead we use something very
+expose this new way of representing time. Instead we use something very
similar to the struct tm, i.e. struct rtc_time, as used by hwclock.
One of the reasons for doing it this way is to allow for EFI to still evolve
without necessarily impacting any of the user applications. The decoupling
enables flexibility and permits writing wrapper code is ncase things change.
The driver exposes two interfaces, one via the device file and a set of
-ioctl()s. The other is read-only via the /proc filesystem.
+ioctl()s. The other is read-only via the /proc filesystem.
As of today we don't offer a /proc/sys interface.
To allow for a uniform interface between the legacy RTC and EFI time service,
-we have created the include/linux/rtc.h header file to contain only the
-"public" API of the two drivers. The specifics of the legacy RTC are still
+we have created the include/linux/rtc.h header file to contain only the
+"public" API of the two drivers. The specifics of the legacy RTC are still
in include/linux/mc146818rtc.h.
-
-III/ Time of day service
+
+3. Time of day service
+===========
The part of the driver gives access to the time of day service of EFI.
Two ioctl()s, compatible with the legacy RTC calls:
- Read the CMOS clock: ioctl(d, RTC_RD_TIME, &rtc);
+ Read the CMOS clock::
- Write the CMOS clock: ioctl(d, RTC_SET_TIME, &rtc);
+ ioctl(d, RTC_RD_TIME, &rtc);
+
+ Write the CMOS clock::
+
+ ioctl(d, RTC_SET_TIME, &rtc);
The rtc is a pointer to a data structure defined in rtc.h which is close
-to a struct tm:
+to a struct tm::
-struct rtc_time {
- int tm_sec;
- int tm_min;
- int tm_hour;
- int tm_mday;
- int tm_mon;
- int tm_year;
- int tm_wday;
- int tm_yday;
- int tm_isdst;
-};
+ struct rtc_time {
+ int tm_sec;
+ int tm_min;
+ int tm_hour;
+ int tm_mday;
+ int tm_mon;
+ int tm_year;
+ int tm_wday;
+ int tm_yday;
+ int tm_isdst;
+ };
The driver takes care of converting back an forth between the EFI time and
this format.
Those two ioctl()s can be exercised with the hwclock command:
-For reading:
-# /sbin/hwclock --show
-Mon Mar 6 15:32:32 2000 -0.910248 seconds
+For reading::
-For setting:
-# /sbin/hwclock --systohc
+ # /sbin/hwclock --show
+ Mon Mar 6 15:32:32 2000 -0.910248 seconds
+
+For setting::
+
+ # /sbin/hwclock --systohc
Root privileges are required to be able to set the time of day.
-IV/ Wakeup Alarm service
+4. Wakeup Alarm service
+===========
EFI provides an API by which one can program when a machine should wakeup,
i.e. reboot. This is very different from the alarm provided by the legacy
RTC which is some kind of interval timer alarm. For this reason we don't use
the same ioctl()s to get access to the service. Instead we have
-introduced 2 news ioctl()s to the interface of an RTC.
+introduced 2 news ioctl()s to the interface of an RTC.
We have added 2 new ioctl()s that are specific to the EFI driver:
- Read the current state of the alarm
- ioctl(d, RTC_WKLAM_RD, &wkt)
+ Read the current state of the alarm::
- Set the alarm or change its status
- ioctl(d, RTC_WKALM_SET, &wkt)
+ ioctl(d, RTC_WKLAM_RD, &wkt)
-The wkt structure encapsulates a struct rtc_time + 2 extra fields to get
-status information:
-
-struct rtc_wkalrm {
+ Set the alarm or change its status::
- unsigned char enabled; /* =1 if alarm is enabled */
- unsigned char pending; /* =1 if alarm is pending */
+ ioctl(d, RTC_WKALM_SET, &wkt)
- struct rtc_time time;
-}
+The wkt structure encapsulates a struct rtc_time + 2 extra fields to get
+status information::
+
+ struct rtc_wkalrm {
+
+ unsigned char enabled; /* =1 if alarm is enabled */
+ unsigned char pending; /* =1 if alarm is pending */
+
+ struct rtc_time time;
+ }
As of today, none of the existing user-level apps supports this feature.
-However writing such a program should be hard by simply using those two
-ioctl().
+However writing such a program should be hard by simply using those two
+ioctl().
Root privileges are required to be able to set the alarm.
-V/ References.
+5. References
+======
Checkout the following Web site for more information on EFI:
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/err_inject.txt b/Documentation/ia64/err_inject.rst
similarity index 82%
rename from Documentation/ia64/err_inject.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/err_inject.rst
index 9f651c181429..900f71e93a29 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/err_inject.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/err_inject.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-
+====================
IPF Machine Check (MC) error inject tool
====================
@@ -32,94 +32,94 @@ Errata: Itanium 2 Processors Specification Update lists some errata against
the pal_mc_error_inject PAL procedure. The following err.conf has been tested
on latest Montecito PAL.
-err.conf:
+err.conf::
-#This is configuration file for err_inject_tool.
-#The format of the each line is:
-#cpu, loop, interval, err_type_info, err_struct_info, err_data_buffer
-#where
-# cpu: logical cpu number the error will be inject in.
-# loop: times the error will be injected.
-# interval: In second. every so often one error is injected.
-# err_type_info, err_struct_info: PAL parameters.
-#
-#Note: All values are hex w/o or w/ 0x prefix.
+ #This is configuration file for err_inject_tool.
+ #The format of the each line is:
+ #cpu, loop, interval, err_type_info, err_struct_info, err_data_buffer
+ #where
+ # cpu: logical cpu number the error will be inject in.
+ # loop: times the error will be injected.
+ # interval: In second. every so often one error is injected.
+ # err_type_info, err_struct_info: PAL parameters.
+ #
+ #Note: All values are hex w/o or w/ 0x prefix.
-#On cpu2, inject only total 0x10 errors, interval 5 seconds
-#corrected, data cache, hier-2, physical addr(assigned by tool code).
-#working on Montecito latest PAL.
-2, 10, 5, 4101, 95
+ #On cpu2, inject only total 0x10 errors, interval 5 seconds
+ #corrected, data cache, hier-2, physical addr(assigned by tool code).
+ #working on Montecito latest PAL.
+ 2, 10, 5, 4101, 95
-#On cpu4, inject and consume total 0x10 errors, interval 5 seconds
-#corrected, data cache, hier-2, physical addr(assigned by tool code).
-#working on Montecito latest PAL.
-4, 10, 5, 4109, 95
+ #On cpu4, inject and consume total 0x10 errors, interval 5 seconds
+ #corrected, data cache, hier-2, physical addr(assigned by tool code).
+ #working on Montecito latest PAL.
+ 4, 10, 5, 4109, 95
-#On cpu15, inject and consume total 0x10 errors, interval 5 seconds
-#recoverable, DTR0, hier-2.
-#working on Montecito latest PAL.
-0xf, 0x10, 5, 4249, 15
+ #On cpu15, inject and consume total 0x10 errors, interval 5 seconds
+ #recoverable, DTR0, hier-2.
+ #working on Montecito latest PAL.
+ 0xf, 0x10, 5, 4249, 15
The sample application source code:
-err_injection_tool.c:
+err_injection_tool.c::
-/*
- * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
- * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
- * the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
- * (at your option) any later version.
- *
- * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
- * WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
- * MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, GOOD TITLE or
- * NON INFRINGEMENT. See the GNU General Public License for more
- * details.
- *
- * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
- * along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
- * Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
- *
- * Copyright (C) 2006 Intel Co
- * Fenghua Yu <fenghua.yu@intel.com>
- *
- */
-#include <sys/types.h>
-#include <sys/stat.h>
-#include <fcntl.h>
-#include <stdio.h>
-#include <sched.h>
-#include <unistd.h>
-#include <stdlib.h>
-#include <stdarg.h>
-#include <string.h>
-#include <errno.h>
-#include <time.h>
-#include <sys/ipc.h>
-#include <sys/sem.h>
-#include <sys/wait.h>
-#include <sys/mman.h>
-#include <sys/shm.h>
+ /*
+ * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+ * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+ * the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+ * (at your option) any later version.
+ *
+ * This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+ * WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+ * MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, GOOD TITLE or
+ * NON INFRINGEMENT. See the GNU General Public License for more
+ * details.
+ *
+ * You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+ * along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+ * Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+ *
+ * Copyright (C) 2006 Intel Co
+ * Fenghua Yu <fenghua.yu@intel.com>
+ *
+ */
+ #include <sys/types.h>
+ #include <sys/stat.h>
+ #include <fcntl.h>
+ #include <stdio.h>
+ #include <sched.h>
+ #include <unistd.h>
+ #include <stdlib.h>
+ #include <stdarg.h>
+ #include <string.h>
+ #include <errno.h>
+ #include <time.h>
+ #include <sys/ipc.h>
+ #include <sys/sem.h>
+ #include <sys/wait.h>
+ #include <sys/mman.h>
+ #include <sys/shm.h>
-#define MAX_FN_SIZE 256
-#define MAX_BUF_SIZE 256
-#define DATA_BUF_SIZE 256
-#define NR_CPUS 512
-#define MAX_TASK_NUM 2048
-#define MIN_INTERVAL 5 // seconds
-#define ERR_DATA_BUFFER_SIZE 3 // Three 8-byte.
-#define PARA_FIELD_NUM 5
-#define MASK_SIZE (NR_CPUS/64)
-#define PATH_FORMAT "/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu%d/err_inject/"
+ #define MAX_FN_SIZE 256
+ #define MAX_BUF_SIZE 256
+ #define DATA_BUF_SIZE 256
+ #define NR_CPUS 512
+ #define MAX_TASK_NUM 2048
+ #define MIN_INTERVAL 5 // seconds
+ #define ERR_DATA_BUFFER_SIZE 3 // Three 8-byte.
+ #define PARA_FIELD_NUM 5
+ #define MASK_SIZE (NR_CPUS/64)
+ #define PATH_FORMAT "/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu%d/err_inject/"
-int sched_setaffinity(pid_t pid, unsigned int len, unsigned long *mask);
+ int sched_setaffinity(pid_t pid, unsigned int len, unsigned long *mask);
-int verbose;
-#define vbprintf if (verbose) printf
+ int verbose;
+ #define vbprintf if (verbose) printf
-int log_info(int cpu, const char *fmt, ...)
-{
+ int log_info(int cpu, const char *fmt, ...)
+ {
FILE *log;
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
char buf[MAX_BUF_SIZE];
@@ -142,12 +142,12 @@ int log_info(int cpu, const char *fmt, ...)
fclose(log);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-typedef unsigned long u64;
-typedef unsigned int u32;
+ typedef unsigned long u64;
+ typedef unsigned int u32;
-typedef union err_type_info_u {
+ typedef union err_type_info_u {
struct {
u64 mode : 3, /* 0-2 */
err_inj : 3, /* 3-5 */
@@ -157,9 +157,9 @@ typedef union err_type_info_u {
reserved : 48; /* 16-63 */
} err_type_info_u;
u64 err_type_info;
-} err_type_info_t;
+ } err_type_info_t;
-typedef union err_struct_info_u {
+ typedef union err_struct_info_u {
struct {
u64 siv : 1, /* 0 */
c_t : 2, /* 1-2 */
@@ -197,9 +197,9 @@ typedef union err_struct_info_u {
u64 reserved;
} err_struct_info_bus_processor_interconnect;
u64 err_struct_info;
-} err_struct_info_t;
+ } err_struct_info_t;
-typedef union err_data_buffer_u {
+ typedef union err_data_buffer_u {
struct {
u64 trigger_addr; /* 0-63 */
u64 inj_addr; /* 64-127 */
@@ -221,9 +221,9 @@ typedef union err_data_buffer_u {
u64 reserved; /* 0-63 */
} err_data_buffer_bus_processor_interconnect;
u64 err_data_buffer[ERR_DATA_BUFFER_SIZE];
-} err_data_buffer_t;
+ } err_data_buffer_t;
-typedef union capabilities_u {
+ typedef union capabilities_u {
struct {
u64 i : 1,
d : 1,
@@ -276,9 +276,9 @@ typedef union capabilities_u {
struct {
u64 reserved;
} capabilities_bus_processor_interconnect;
-} capabilities_t;
+ } capabilities_t;
-typedef struct resources_s {
+ typedef struct resources_s {
u64 ibr0 : 1,
ibr2 : 1,
ibr4 : 1,
@@ -288,24 +288,24 @@ typedef struct resources_s {
dbr4 : 1,
dbr6 : 1,
reserved : 48;
-} resources_t;
+ } resources_t;
-long get_page_size(void)
-{
+ long get_page_size(void)
+ {
long page_size=sysconf(_SC_PAGESIZE);
return page_size;
-}
+ }
-#define PAGE_SIZE (get_page_size()=-1?0x4000:get_page_size())
-#define SHM_SIZE (2*PAGE_SIZE*NR_CPUS)
-#define SHM_VA 0x2000000100000000
+ #define PAGE_SIZE (get_page_size()=-1?0x4000:get_page_size())
+ #define SHM_SIZE (2*PAGE_SIZE*NR_CPUS)
+ #define SHM_VA 0x2000000100000000
-int shmid;
-void *shmaddr;
+ int shmid;
+ void *shmaddr;
-int create_shm(void)
-{
+ int create_shm(void)
+ {
key_t key;
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
@@ -343,34 +343,34 @@ int create_shm(void)
mlock(shmaddr, SHM_SIZE);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int free_shm()
-{
+ int free_shm()
+ {
munlock(shmaddr, SHM_SIZE);
- shmdt(shmaddr);
+ shmdt(shmaddr);
semctl(shmid, 0, IPC_RMID);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-#ifdef _SEM_SEMUN_UNDEFINED
-union semun
-{
+ #ifdef _SEM_SEMUN_UNDEFINED
+ union semun
+ {
int val;
struct semid_ds *buf;
unsigned short int *array;
struct seminfo *__buf;
-};
-#endif
+ };
+ #endif
-u32 mode=1; /* 1: physical mode; 2: virtual mode. */
-int one_lock=1;
-key_t key[NR_CPUS];
-int semid[NR_CPUS];
+ u32 mode=1; /* 1: physical mode; 2: virtual mode. */
+ int one_lock=1;
+ key_t key[NR_CPUS];
+ int semid[NR_CPUS];
-int create_sem(int cpu)
-{
+ int create_sem(int cpu)
+ {
union semun arg;
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
int sid;
@@ -407,37 +407,37 @@ int create_sem(int cpu)
}
return 0;
-}
+ }
-static int lock(int cpu)
-{
+ static int lock(int cpu)
+ {
struct sembuf lock;
lock.sem_num = cpu;
lock.sem_op = 1;
semop(semid[cpu], &lock, 1);
- return 0;
-}
+ return 0;
+ }
-static int unlock(int cpu)
-{
+ static int unlock(int cpu)
+ {
struct sembuf unlock;
unlock.sem_num = cpu;
unlock.sem_op = -1;
semop(semid[cpu], &unlock, 1);
- return 0;
-}
+ return 0;
+ }
-void free_sem(int cpu)
-{
+ void free_sem(int cpu)
+ {
semctl(semid[cpu], 0, IPC_RMID);
-}
+ }
-int wr_multi(char *fn, unsigned long *data, int size)
-{
+ int wr_multi(char *fn, unsigned long *data, int size)
+ {
int fd;
char buf[MAX_BUF_SIZE];
int ret;
@@ -459,15 +459,15 @@ int wr_multi(char *fn, unsigned long *data, int size)
ret=write(fd, buf, sizeof(buf));
close(fd);
return ret;
-}
+ }
-int wr(char *fn, unsigned long data)
-{
+ int wr(char *fn, unsigned long data)
+ {
return wr_multi(fn, &data, 1);
-}
+ }
-int rd(char *fn, unsigned long *data)
-{
+ int rd(char *fn, unsigned long *data)
+ {
int fd;
char buf[MAX_BUF_SIZE];
@@ -480,10 +480,10 @@ int rd(char *fn, unsigned long *data)
*data=strtoul(buf, NULL, 16);
close(fd);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int rd_status(char *path, int *status)
-{
+ int rd_status(char *path, int *status)
+ {
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
sprintf(fn, "%s/status", path);
if (rd(fn, (u64*)status)<0) {
@@ -492,10 +492,10 @@ int rd_status(char *path, int *status)
}
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int rd_capabilities(char *path, u64 *capabilities)
-{
+ int rd_capabilities(char *path, u64 *capabilities)
+ {
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
sprintf(fn, "%s/capabilities", path);
if (rd(fn, capabilities)<0) {
@@ -504,10 +504,10 @@ int rd_capabilities(char *path, u64 *capabilities)
}
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int rd_all(char *path)
-{
+ int rd_all(char *path)
+ {
unsigned long err_type_info, err_struct_info, err_data_buffer;
int status;
unsigned long capabilities, resources;
@@ -556,11 +556,11 @@ int rd_all(char *path)
printf("resources=%lx\n", resources);
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int query_capabilities(char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
+ int query_capabilities(char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
u64 *capabilities)
-{
+ {
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
err_struct_info_t err_struct_info;
err_data_buffer_t err_data_buffer;
@@ -583,10 +583,10 @@ int query_capabilities(char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
return -1;
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int query_all_capabilities()
-{
+ int query_all_capabilities()
+ {
int status;
err_type_info_t err_type_info;
int err_sev, err_struct, struct_hier;
@@ -629,12 +629,12 @@ int query_all_capabilities()
}
return 0;
-}
+ }
-int err_inject(int cpu, char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
+ int err_inject(int cpu, char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
err_struct_info_t err_struct_info,
err_data_buffer_t err_data_buffer)
-{
+ {
int status;
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
@@ -667,13 +667,13 @@ int err_inject(int cpu, char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
}
return status;
-}
+ }
-static int construct_data_buf(char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
+ static int construct_data_buf(char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
err_struct_info_t err_struct_info,
err_data_buffer_t *err_data_buffer,
void *va1)
-{
+ {
char fn[MAX_FN_SIZE];
u64 virt_addr=0, phys_addr=0;
@@ -710,22 +710,22 @@ static int construct_data_buf(char *path, err_type_info_t err_type_info,
}
return 0;
-}
+ }
-typedef struct {
+ typedef struct {
u64 cpu;
u64 loop;
u64 interval;
u64 err_type_info;
u64 err_struct_info;
u64 err_data_buffer[ERR_DATA_BUFFER_SIZE];
-} parameters_t;
+ } parameters_t;
-parameters_t line_para;
-int para;
+ parameters_t line_para;
+ int para;
-static int empty_data_buffer(u64 *err_data_buffer)
-{
+ static int empty_data_buffer(u64 *err_data_buffer)
+ {
int empty=1;
int i;
@@ -734,10 +734,10 @@ static int empty_data_buffer(u64 *err_data_buffer)
empty=0;
return empty;
-}
+ }
-int err_inj()
-{
+ int err_inj()
+ {
err_type_info_t err_type_info;
err_struct_info_t err_struct_info;
err_data_buffer_t err_data_buffer;
@@ -951,10 +951,10 @@ int err_inj()
printf("All done.\n");
return 0;
-}
+ }
-void help()
-{
+ void help()
+ {
printf("err_inject_tool:\n");
printf("\t-q: query all capabilities. default: off\n");
printf("\t-m: procedure mode. 1: physical 2: virtual. default: 1\n");
@@ -977,10 +977,10 @@ void help()
printf("The tool will take err.conf file as ");
printf("input to inject single or multiple errors ");
printf("on one or multiple cpus in parallel.\n");
-}
+ }
-int main(int argc, char **argv)
-{
+ int main(int argc, char **argv)
+ {
char c;
int do_err_inj=0;
int do_query_all=0;
@@ -1031,7 +1031,7 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv)
if (count!=PARA_FIELD_NUM+3) {
line_para.err_data_buffer[0]=-1,
line_para.err_data_buffer[1]=-1,
- line_para.err_data_buffer[2]=-1;
+ line_para.err_data_buffer[2]=-1;
count=sscanf(optarg, "%lx, %lx, %lx, %lx, %lx\n",
&line_para.cpu,
&line_para.loop,
@@ -1064,5 +1064,4 @@ int main(int argc, char **argv)
help();
return 0;
-}
-
+ }
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/fsys.txt b/Documentation/ia64/fsys.rst
similarity index 76%
rename from Documentation/ia64/fsys.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/fsys.rst
index 59dd689d9b86..a702d2cc94b6 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/fsys.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/fsys.rst
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
--*-Mode: outline-*-
-
- Light-weight System Calls for IA-64
- -----------------------------------
+=================+Light-weight System Calls for IA-64
+=================
Started: 13-Jan-2003
+
Last update: 27-Sep-2003
David Mosberger-Tang
@@ -52,12 +52,13 @@ privilege level is at level 0, this means that fsys-mode requires some
care (see below).
-* How to tell fsys-mode
+How to tell fsys-mode
+==========
Linux operates in fsys-mode when (a) the privilege level is 0 (most
privileged) and (b) the stacks have NOT been switched to kernel memory
yet. For convenience, the header file <asm-ia64/ptrace.h> provides
-three macros:
+three macros::
user_mode(regs)
user_stack(task,regs)
@@ -70,11 +71,12 @@ to by "regs" was executing in user mode (privilege level 3).
user_stack() returns TRUE if the state pointed to by "regs" was
executing on the user-level stack(s). Finally, fsys_mode() returns
TRUE if the CPU state pointed to by "regs" was executing in fsys-mode.
-The fsys_mode() macro is equivalent to the expression:
+The fsys_mode() macro is equivalent to the expression::
!user_mode(regs) && user_stack(task,regs)
-* How to write an fsyscall handler
+How to write an fsyscall handler
+================
The file arch/ia64/kernel/fsys.S contains a table of fsyscall-handlers
(fsyscall_table). This table contains one entry for each system call.
@@ -87,66 +89,72 @@ of the getpid() system call.
The entry and exit-state of an fsyscall handler is as follows:
-** Machine state on entry to fsyscall handler:
+Machine state on entry to fsyscall handler
+------------------------------------------
- - r10 = 0
- - r11 = saved ar.pfs (a user-level value)
- - r15 = system call number
- - r16 = "current" task pointer (in normal kernel-mode, this is in r13)
- - r32-r39 = system call arguments
- - b6 = return address (a user-level value)
- - ar.pfs = previous frame-state (a user-level value)
- - PSR.be = cleared to zero (i.e., little-endian byte order is in effect)
- - all other registers may contain values passed in from user-mode
+ ===== ===============================+ r10 0
+ r11 saved ar.pfs (a user-level value)
+ r15 system call number
+ r16 "current" task pointer (in normal kernel-mode, this is in r13)
+ r32-r39 system call arguments
+ b6 return address (a user-level value)
+ ar.pfs previous frame-state (a user-level value)
+ PSR.be cleared to zero (i.e., little-endian byte order is in effect)
+ - all other registers may contain values passed in from user-mode
+ ===== ===============================
-** Required machine state on exit to fsyscall handler:
+Required machine state on exit to fsyscall handler
+--------------------------------------------------
- - r11 = saved ar.pfs (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
- - r15 = system call number (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
- - r32-r39 = system call arguments (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
- - b6 = return address (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
- - ar.pfs = previous frame-state (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
+ ===== =============================+ r11 saved ar.pfs (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
+ r15 system call number (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
+ r32-r39 system call arguments (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
+ b6 return address (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
+ ar.pfs previous frame-state (as passed into the fsyscall handler)
+ ===== =============================
Fsyscall handlers can execute with very little overhead, but with that
speed comes a set of restrictions:
- o Fsyscall-handlers MUST check for any pending work in the flags
+ * Fsyscall-handlers MUST check for any pending work in the flags
member of the thread-info structure and if any of the
TIF_ALLWORK_MASK flags are set, the handler needs to fall back on
doing a full system call (by calling fsys_fallback_syscall).
- o Fsyscall-handlers MUST preserve incoming arguments (r32-r39, r11,
+ * Fsyscall-handlers MUST preserve incoming arguments (r32-r39, r11,
r15, b6, and ar.pfs) because they will be needed in case of a
system call restart. Of course, all "preserved" registers also
must be preserved, in accordance to the normal calling conventions.
- o Fsyscall-handlers MUST check argument registers for containing a
+ * Fsyscall-handlers MUST check argument registers for containing a
NaT value before using them in any way that could trigger a
NaT-consumption fault. If a system call argument is found to
contain a NaT value, an fsyscall-handler may return immediately
with r8=EINVAL, r10=-1.
- o Fsyscall-handlers MUST NOT use the "alloc" instruction or perform
+ * Fsyscall-handlers MUST NOT use the "alloc" instruction or perform
any other operation that would trigger mandatory RSE
(register-stack engine) traffic.
- o Fsyscall-handlers MUST NOT write to any stacked registers because
+ * Fsyscall-handlers MUST NOT write to any stacked registers because
it is not safe to assume that user-level called a handler with the
proper number of arguments.
- o Fsyscall-handlers need to be careful when accessing per-CPU variables:
+ * Fsyscall-handlers need to be careful when accessing per-CPU variables:
unless proper safe-guards are taken (e.g., interruptions are avoided),
execution may be pre-empted and resumed on another CPU at any given
time.
- o Fsyscall-handlers must be careful not to leak sensitive kernel'
+ * Fsyscall-handlers must be careful not to leak sensitive kernel'
information back to user-level. In particular, before returning to
user-level, care needs to be taken to clear any scratch registers
that could contain sensitive information (note that the current
task pointer is not considered sensitive: it's already exposed
through ar.k6).
- o Fsyscall-handlers MUST NOT access user-memory without first
+ * Fsyscall-handlers MUST NOT access user-memory without first
validating access-permission (this can be done typically via
probe.r.fault and/or probe.w.fault) and without guarding against
memory access exceptions (this can be done with the EX() macros
@@ -162,7 +170,8 @@ fast system call execution (while fully preserving system call
semantics), but there is also a lot of flexibility in handling more
complicated cases.
-* Signal handling
+Signal handling
+=======
The delivery of (asynchronous) signals must be delayed until fsys-mode
is exited. This is accomplished with the help of the lower-privilege
@@ -173,7 +182,8 @@ PSR.lp and returns immediately. When fsys-mode is exited via the
occur. The trap handler clears PSR.lp again and returns immediately.
The kernel exit path then checks for and delivers any pending signals.
-* PSR Handling
+PSR Handling
+======
The "epc" instruction doesn't change the contents of PSR at all. This
is in contrast to a regular interruption, which clears almost all
@@ -181,6 +191,7 @@ bits. Because of that, some care needs to be taken to ensure things
work as expected. The following discussion describes how each PSR bit
is handled.
+==== =================================== PSR.be Cleared when entering fsys-mode. A srlz.d instruction is used
to ensure the CPU is in little-endian mode before the first
load/store instruction is executed. PSR.be is normally NOT
@@ -202,7 +213,8 @@ PSR.pp Unchanged.
PSR.di Unchanged.
PSR.si Unchanged.
PSR.db Unchanged. The kernel prevents user-level from setting a hardware
- breakpoint that triggers at any privilege level other than 3 (user-mode).
+ breakpoint that triggers at any privilege level other than
+ 3 (user-mode).
PSR.lp Unchanged.
PSR.tb Lazy redirect. If a taken-branch trap occurs while in
fsys-mode, the trap-handler modifies the saved machine state
@@ -235,47 +247,52 @@ PSR.ed Unchanged. Note: This bit could only have an effect if an fsys-mode
PSR.bn Unchanged. Note: fsys-mode handlers may clear the bit, if needed.
Doing so requires clearing PSR.i and PSR.ic as well.
PSR.ia Unchanged. Note: the ia64 linux kernel never sets this bit.
+==== ===================================
-* Using fast system calls
+Using fast system calls
+===========
To use fast system calls, userspace applications need simply call
__kernel_syscall_via_epc(). For example
-- example fgettimeofday() call --
+
-- fgettimeofday.S --
-#include <asm/asmmacro.h>
+::
-GLOBAL_ENTRY(fgettimeofday)
-.prologue
-.save ar.pfs, r11
-mov r11 = ar.pfs
-.body
+ #include <asm/asmmacro.h>
-mov r2 = 0xa000000000020660;; // gate address
- // found by inspection of System.map for the
+ GLOBAL_ENTRY(fgettimeofday)
+ .prologue
+ .save ar.pfs, r11
+ mov r11 = ar.pfs
+ .body
+
+ mov r2 = 0xa000000000020660;; // gate address
+ // found by inspection of System.map for the
// __kernel_syscall_via_epc() function. See
// below for how to do this for real.
-mov b7 = r2
-mov r15 = 1087 // gettimeofday syscall
-;;
-br.call.sptk.many b6 = b7
-;;
+ mov b7 = r2
+ mov r15 = 1087 // gettimeofday syscall
+ ;;
+ br.call.sptk.many b6 = b7
+ ;;
-.restore sp
+ .restore sp
-mov ar.pfs = r11
-br.ret.sptk.many rp;; // return to caller
-END(fgettimeofday)
+ mov ar.pfs = r11
+ br.ret.sptk.many rp;; // return to caller
+ END(fgettimeofday)
-- end fgettimeofday.S --
In reality, getting the gate address is accomplished by two extra
values passed via the ELF auxiliary vector (include/asm-ia64/elf.h)
- o AT_SYSINFO : is the address of __kernel_syscall_via_epc()
- o AT_SYSINFO_EHDR : is the address of the kernel gate ELF DSO
+ * AT_SYSINFO : is the address of __kernel_syscall_via_epc()
+ * AT_SYSINFO_EHDR : is the address of the kernel gate ELF DSO
The ELF DSO is a pre-linked library that is mapped in by the kernel at
the gate page. It is a proper ELF shared object so, with a dynamic
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/README b/Documentation/ia64/ia64.rst
similarity index 61%
rename from Documentation/ia64/README
rename to Documentation/ia64/ia64.rst
index aa17f2154cba..b725019a9492 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/README
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/ia64.rst
@@ -1,43 +1,49 @@
- Linux kernel release 2.4.xx for the IA-64 Platform
+=====================+Linux kernel release for the IA-64 Platform
+=====================
- These are the release notes for Linux version 2.4 for IA-64
+ These are the release notes for Linux since version 2.4 for IA-64
platform. This document provides information specific to IA-64
ONLY, to get additional information about the Linux kernel also
read the original Linux README provided with the kernel.
-INSTALLING the kernel:
+Installing the Kernel
+==========
- IA-64 kernel installation is the same as the other platforms, see
original README for details.
-SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
+Software Requirements
+==========
Compiling and running this kernel requires an IA-64 compliant GCC
compiler. And various software packages also compiled with an
IA-64 compliant GCC compiler.
-CONFIGURING the kernel:
+Configuring the Kernel
+===========
Configuration is the same, see original README for details.
-COMPILING the kernel:
+Compiling the Kernel:
- Compiling this kernel doesn't differ from other platform so read
the original README for details BUT make sure you have an IA-64
compliant GCC compiler.
-IA-64 SPECIFICS
+IA-64 Specifics
+=======
- General issues:
- o Hardly any performance tuning has been done. Obvious targets
+ * Hardly any performance tuning has been done. Obvious targets
include the library routines (IP checksum, etc.). Less
obvious targets include making sure we don't flush the TLB
needlessly, etc.
- o SMP locks cleanup/optimization
+ * SMP locks cleanup/optimization
- o IA32 support. Currently experimental. It mostly works.
+ * IA32 support. Currently experimental. It mostly works.
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/index.rst b/Documentation/ia64/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..a3e3052ad6e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+:orphan:
+
+=========
+IA-64 Architecture
+=========
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ ia64
+ aliasing
+ efirtc
+ err_inject
+ fsys
+ irq-redir
+ mca
+ serial
+ xen
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/IRQ-redir.txt b/Documentation/ia64/irq-redir.rst
similarity index 86%
rename from Documentation/ia64/IRQ-redir.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/irq-redir.rst
index f7bd72261283..39bf94484a15 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/IRQ-redir.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/irq-redir.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
+===============
IRQ affinity on IA64 platforms
-------------------------------
- 07.01.2002, Erich Focht <efocht@ess.nec.de>
+===============
+
+07.01.2002, Erich Focht <efocht@ess.nec.de>
By writing to /proc/irq/IRQ#/smp_affinity the interrupt routing can be
@@ -12,22 +14,27 @@ IRQ target is one particular CPU and cannot be a mask of several
CPUs. Only the first non-zero bit is taken into account.
-Usage examples:
+Usage examples
+=======
The target CPU has to be specified as a hexadecimal CPU mask. The
first non-zero bit is the selected CPU. This format has been kept for
compatibility reasons with i386.
Set the delivery mode of interrupt 41 to fixed and route the
-interrupts to CPU #3 (logical CPU number) (2^3=0x08):
+interrupts to CPU #3 (logical CPU number) (2^3=0x08)::
+
echo "8" >/proc/irq/41/smp_affinity
Set the default route for IRQ number 41 to CPU 6 in lowest priority
-delivery mode (redirectable):
+delivery mode (redirectable)::
+
echo "r 40" >/proc/irq/41/smp_affinity
-The output of the command
+The output of the command::
+
cat /proc/irq/IRQ#/smp_affinity
+
gives the target CPU mask for the specified interrupt vector. If the CPU
mask is preceded by the character "r", the interrupt is redirectable
(i.e. lowest priority mode routing is used), otherwise its route is
@@ -35,7 +42,8 @@ fixed.
-Initialization and default behavior:
+Initialization and default behavior
+=================
If the platform features IRQ redirection (info provided by SAL) all
IO-SAPIC interrupts are initialized with CPU#0 as their default target
@@ -43,9 +51,11 @@ and the routing is the so called "lowest priority mode" (actually
fixed SAPIC mode with hint). The XTP chipset registers are used as hints
for the IRQ routing. Currently in Linux XTP registers can have three
values:
+
- minimal for an idle task,
- normal if any other task runs,
- maximal if the CPU is going to be switched off.
+
The IRQ is routed to the CPU with lowest XTP register value, the
search begins at the default CPU. Therefore most of the interrupts
will be handled by CPU #0.
@@ -53,12 +63,14 @@ will be handled by CPU #0.
If the platform doesn't feature interrupt redirection IOSAPIC fixed
routing is used. The target CPUs are distributed in a round robin
manner. IRQs will be routed only to the selected target CPUs. Check
-with
+with::
+
cat /proc/interrupts
-Comments:
+Comments
+====
On large (multi-node) systems it is recommended to route the IRQs to
the node to which the corresponding device is connected.
@@ -66,4 +78,3 @@ For systems like the NEC AzusA we get IRQ node-affinity for free. This
is because usually the chipsets on each node redirect the interrupts
only to their own CPUs (as they cannot see the XTP registers on the
other nodes).
-
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/mca.txt b/Documentation/ia64/mca.rst
similarity index 96%
rename from Documentation/ia64/mca.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/mca.rst
index f097c60cba1b..08270bba44a4 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/mca.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/mca.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,8 @@
-An ad-hoc collection of notes on IA64 MCA and INIT processing. Feel
-free to update it with notes about any area that is not clear.
+==============================+An ad-hoc collection of notes on IA64 MCA and INIT processing
+==============================+
+Feel free to update it with notes about any area that is not clear.
---
@@ -82,7 +85,8 @@ if we have a choice here.
own stack as running on that cpu. Then a recursive error gets a
trace of the failing handler's "task".
-[1] My (Keith Owens) original design called for ia64 to separate its
+[1]
+ My (Keith Owens) original design called for ia64 to separate its
struct task and the kernel stacks. Then the MCA/INIT data would be
chained stacks like i386 interrupt stacks. But that required
radical surgery on the rest of ia64, plus extra hard wired TLB
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/serial.txt b/Documentation/ia64/serial.rst
similarity index 87%
rename from Documentation/ia64/serial.txt
rename to Documentation/ia64/serial.rst
index a63d2c54329b..1de70c305a79 100644
--- a/Documentation/ia64/serial.txt
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/serial.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,9 @@
-SERIAL DEVICE NAMING
+=======
+Serial Devices
+=======
+
+Serial Device Naming
+==========
As of 2.6.10, serial devices on ia64 are named based on the
order of ACPI and PCI enumeration. The first device in the
@@ -30,17 +35,21 @@ SERIAL DEVICE NAMING
(described in the ACPI namespace) plus an MP[2] (a PCI device) has
these ports:
- pre-2.6.10 pre-2.6.10
- MMIO (EFI console (EFI console
- address on builtin) on MP port) 2.6.10
- ===== ===== ===== ===
+ ===== ===== ====== ====== ===+ Type MMIO pre-2.6.10 pre-2.6.10 2.6.10+
+ address
+ (EFI console (EFI console
+ on builtin) on MP port)
+ ===== ===== ====== ====== === builtin 0xff5e0000 ttyS0 ttyS1 ttyS0
MP UPS 0xf8031000 ttyS1 ttyS2 ttyS1
MP Console 0xf8030000 ttyS2 ttyS0 ttyS2
MP 2 0xf8030010 ttyS3 ttyS3 ttyS3
MP 3 0xf8030038 ttyS4 ttyS4 ttyS4
+ ===== ===== ====== ====== ===
-CONSOLE SELECTION
+Console Selection
+========
EFI knows what your console devices are, but it doesn't tell the
kernel quite enough to actually locate them. The DIG64 HCDP
@@ -67,7 +76,8 @@ CONSOLE SELECTION
entries in /etc/inittab (for getty) and /etc/securetty (to allow
root login).
-EARLY SERIAL CONSOLE
+Early Serial Console
+==========
The kernel can't start using a serial console until it knows where
the device lives. Normally this happens when the driver enumerates
@@ -80,7 +90,8 @@ EARLY SERIAL CONSOLE
or if the EFI console path contains only a UART device and the
firmware supplies an HCDP.
-TROUBLESHOOTING SERIAL CONSOLE PROBLEMS
+Troubleshooting Serial Console Problems
+===================
No kernel output after elilo prints "Uncompressing Linux... done":
@@ -133,19 +144,22 @@ TROUBLESHOOTING SERIAL CONSOLE PROBLEMS
-[1] http://www.dig64.org/specifications/agreement
+[1]
+ http://www.dig64.org/specifications/agreement
The table was originally defined as the "HCDP" for "Headless
Console/Debug Port." The current version is the "PCDP" for
"Primary Console and Debug Port Devices."
-[2] The HP MP (management processor) is a PCI device that provides
+[2]
+ The HP MP (management processor) is a PCI device that provides
several UARTs. One of the UARTs is often used as a console; the
EFI Boot Manager identifies it as "Acpi(HWP0002,700)/Pci(...)/Uart".
The external connection is usually a 25-pin connector, and a
special dongle converts that to three 9-pin connectors, one of
which is labelled "Console."
-[3] EFI console devices are configured using the EFI Boot Manager
+[3]
+ EFI console devices are configured using the EFI Boot Manager
"Boot option maintenance" menu. You may have to interrupt the
boot sequence to use this menu, and you will have to reset the
box after changing console configuration.
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/xen.rst b/Documentation/ia64/xen.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..831339c74441
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/ia64/xen.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,206 @@
+********************************************************
+Recipe for getting/building/running Xen/ia64 with pv_ops
+********************************************************
+This recipe describes how to get xen-ia64 source and build it,
+and run domU with pv_ops.
+
+Requirements
+======
+
+ - python
+ - mercurial
+ it (aka "hg") is an open-source source code
+ management software. See the below.
+ http://www.selenic.com/mercurial/wiki/
+ - git
+ - bridge-utils
+
+Getting and Building Xen and Dom0
+================+
+ My environment is:
+
+ - Machine : Tiger4
+ - Domain0 OS : RHEL5
+ - DomainU OS : RHEL5
+
+ 1. Download source::
+
+ # hg clone http://xenbits.xensource.com/ext/ia64/xen-unstable.hg
+ # cd xen-unstable.hg
+ # hg clone http://xenbits.xensource.com/ext/ia64/linux-2.6.18-xen.hg
+
+ 2. # make world
+
+ 3. # make install-tools
+
+ 4. copy kernels and xen::
+
+ # cp xen/xen.gz /boot/efi/efi/redhat/
+ # cp build-linux-2.6.18-xen_ia64/vmlinux.gz \
+ /boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6.18.8-xen
+
+ 5. make initrd for Dom0/DomU::
+
+ # make -C linux-2.6.18-xen.hg ARCH=ia64 modules_install \
+ O=$(pwd)/build-linux-2.6.18-xen_ia64
+ # mkinitrd -f /boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6.18.8-xen.img \
+ 2.6.18.8-xen --builtin mptspi --builtin mptbase \
+ --builtin mptscsih --builtin uhci-hcd --builtin ohci-hcd \
+ --builtin ehci-hcd
+
+Making a disk image for guest OS
+================
+
+ 1. make file::
+
+ # dd if=/dev/zero of=/root/rhel5.img bs=1M seek@96 count=0
+ # mke2fs -F -j /root/rhel5.img
+ # mount -o loop /root/rhel5.img /mnt
+ # cp -ax /{dev,var,etc,usr,bin,sbin,lib} /mnt
+ # mkdir /mnt/{root,proc,sys,home,tmp}
+
+ Note: You may miss some device files. If so, please create them
+ with mknod. Or you can use tar instead of cp.
+
+ 2. modify DomU's fstab::
+
+ # vi /mnt/etc/fstab
+ /dev/xvda1 / ext3 defaults 1 1
+ none /dev/pts devpts gid=5,modeb0 0 0
+ none /dev/shm tmpfs defaults 0 0
+ none /proc proc defaults 0 0
+ none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
+
+ 3. modify inittab
+
+ set runlevel to 3 to avoid X trying to start::
+
+ # vi /mnt/etc/inittab
+ id:3:initdefault:
+
+ Start a getty on the hvc0 console::
+
+ X0:2345:respawn:/sbin/mingetty hvc0
+
+ tty1-6 mingetty can be commented out
+
+ 4. add hvc0 into /etc/securetty::
+
+ # vi /mnt/etc/securetty (add hvc0)
+
+ 5. umount::
+
+ # umount /mnt
+
+FYI, virt-manager can also make a disk image for guest OS.
+It's GUI tools and easy to make it.
+
+Boot Xen & Domain0
+=========
+
+ 1. replace elilo
+ elilo of RHEL5 can boot Xen and Dom0.
+ If you use old elilo (e.g RHEL4), please download from the below
+ http://elilo.sourceforge.net/cgi-bin/blosxom
+ and copy into /boot/efi/efi/redhat/::
+
+ # cp elilo-3.6-ia64.efi /boot/efi/efi/redhat/elilo.efi
+
+ 2. modify elilo.conf (like the below)::
+
+ # vi /boot/efi/efi/redhat/elilo.conf
+ prompt
+ timeout
+ default=xen
+ relocatable
+
+ image=vmlinuz-2.6.18.8-xen
+ label=xen
+ vmm=xen.gz
+ initrd=initrd-2.6.18.8-xen.img
+ read-only
+ append=" -- rhgb root=/dev/sda2"
+
+The append options before "--" are for xen hypervisor,
+the options after "--" are for dom0.
+
+FYI, your machine may need console options like
+"com1\x19200,8n1 console=vga,com1". For example,
+append="com1\x19200,8n1 console=vga,com1 -- rhgb console=tty0 \
+console=ttyS0 root=/dev/sda2"
+
+Getting and Building domU with pv_ops
+==================+
+ 1. get pv_ops tree::
+
+ # git clone http://people.valinux.co.jp/~yamahata/xen-ia64/linux-2.6-xen-ia64.git/
+
+ 2. git branch (if necessary)::
+
+ # cd linux-2.6-xen-ia64/
+ # git checkout -b your_branch origin/xen-ia64-domu-minimal-2008may19
+
+ Note:
+ The current branch is xen-ia64-domu-minimal-2008may19.
+ But you would find the new branch. You can see with
+ "git branch -r" to get the branch lists.
+
+ http://people.valinux.co.jp/~yamahata/xen-ia64/for_eagl/linux-2.6-ia64-pv-ops.git/
+
+ is also available.
+
+ The tree is based on
+
+ git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aegl/linux-2.6 test)
+
+ 3. copy .config for pv_ops of domU::
+
+ # cp arch/ia64/configs/xen_domu_wip_defconfig .config
+
+ 4. make kernel with pv_ops::
+
+ # make oldconfig
+ # make
+
+ 5. install the kernel and initrd::
+
+ # cp vmlinux.gz /boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6-pv_ops-xenU
+ # make modules_install
+ # mkinitrd -f /boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6-pv_ops-xenU.img \
+ 2.6.26-rc3xen-ia64-08941-g1b12161 --builtin mptspi \
+ --builtin mptbase --builtin mptscsih --builtin uhci-hcd \
+ --builtin ohci-hcd --builtin ehci-hcd
+
+Boot DomainU with pv_ops
+============
+
+ 1. make config of DomU::
+
+ # vi /etc/xen/rhel5
+ kernel = "/boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6-pv_ops-xenU"
+ ramdisk = "/boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6-pv_ops-xenU.img"
+ vcpus = 1
+ memory = 512
+ name = "rhel5"
+ disk = [ 'file:/root/rhel5.img,xvda1,w' ]
+ root = "/dev/xvda1 ro"
+ extra= "rhgb console=hvc0"
+
+ 2. After boot xen and dom0, start xend::
+
+ # /etc/init.d/xend start
+
+ ( In the debugging case, `# XEND_DEBUG=1 xend trace_start` )
+
+ 3. start domU::
+
+ # xm create -c rhel5
+
+Reference
+====+- Wiki of Xen/IA64 upstream merge
+ http://wiki.xensource.com/xenwiki/XenIA64/UpstreamMerge
+
+Written by Akio Takebe <takebe_akio@jp.fujitsu.com> on 28 May 2008
diff --git a/Documentation/ia64/xen.txt b/Documentation/ia64/xen.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index a12c74ce2773..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/ia64/xen.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,183 +0,0 @@
- Recipe for getting/building/running Xen/ia64 with pv_ops
- --------------------------------------------------------
-
-This recipe describes how to get xen-ia64 source and build it,
-and run domU with pv_ops.
-
-======
-Requirements
-======
-
- - python
- - mercurial
- it (aka "hg") is an open-source source code
- management software. See the below.
- http://www.selenic.com/mercurial/wiki/
- - git
- - bridge-utils
-
-================-Getting and Building Xen and Dom0
-================-
- My environment is;
- Machine : Tiger4
- Domain0 OS : RHEL5
- DomainU OS : RHEL5
-
- 1. Download source
- # hg clone http://xenbits.xensource.com/ext/ia64/xen-unstable.hg
- # cd xen-unstable.hg
- # hg clone http://xenbits.xensource.com/ext/ia64/linux-2.6.18-xen.hg
-
- 2. # make world
-
- 3. # make install-tools
-
- 4. copy kernels and xen
- # cp xen/xen.gz /boot/efi/efi/redhat/
- # cp build-linux-2.6.18-xen_ia64/vmlinux.gz \
- /boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6.18.8-xen
-
- 5. make initrd for Dom0/DomU
- # make -C linux-2.6.18-xen.hg ARCH=ia64 modules_install \
- O=$(pwd)/build-linux-2.6.18-xen_ia64
- # mkinitrd -f /boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6.18.8-xen.img \
- 2.6.18.8-xen --builtin mptspi --builtin mptbase \
- --builtin mptscsih --builtin uhci-hcd --builtin ohci-hcd \
- --builtin ehci-hcd
-
-================
-Making a disk image for guest OS
-================
-
- 1. make file
- # dd if=/dev/zero of=/root/rhel5.img bs=1M seek@96 count=0
- # mke2fs -F -j /root/rhel5.img
- # mount -o loop /root/rhel5.img /mnt
- # cp -ax /{dev,var,etc,usr,bin,sbin,lib} /mnt
- # mkdir /mnt/{root,proc,sys,home,tmp}
-
- Note: You may miss some device files. If so, please create them
- with mknod. Or you can use tar instead of cp.
-
- 2. modify DomU's fstab
- # vi /mnt/etc/fstab
- /dev/xvda1 / ext3 defaults 1 1
- none /dev/pts devpts gid=5,modeb0 0 0
- none /dev/shm tmpfs defaults 0 0
- none /proc proc defaults 0 0
- none /sys sysfs defaults 0 0
-
- 3. modify inittab
- set runlevel to 3 to avoid X trying to start
- # vi /mnt/etc/inittab
- id:3:initdefault:
- Start a getty on the hvc0 console
- X0:2345:respawn:/sbin/mingetty hvc0
- tty1-6 mingetty can be commented out
-
- 4. add hvc0 into /etc/securetty
- # vi /mnt/etc/securetty (add hvc0)
-
- 5. umount
- # umount /mnt
-
-FYI, virt-manager can also make a disk image for guest OS.
-It's GUI tools and easy to make it.
-
-=========
-Boot Xen & Domain0
-=========
-
- 1. replace elilo
- elilo of RHEL5 can boot Xen and Dom0.
- If you use old elilo (e.g RHEL4), please download from the below
- http://elilo.sourceforge.net/cgi-bin/blosxom
- and copy into /boot/efi/efi/redhat/
- # cp elilo-3.6-ia64.efi /boot/efi/efi/redhat/elilo.efi
-
- 2. modify elilo.conf (like the below)
- # vi /boot/efi/efi/redhat/elilo.conf
- prompt
- timeout
- default=xen
- relocatable
-
- image=vmlinuz-2.6.18.8-xen
- label=xen
- vmm=xen.gz
- initrd=initrd-2.6.18.8-xen.img
- read-only
- append=" -- rhgb root=/dev/sda2"
-
-The append options before "--" are for xen hypervisor,
-the options after "--" are for dom0.
-
-FYI, your machine may need console options like
-"com1\x19200,8n1 console=vga,com1". For example,
-append="com1\x19200,8n1 console=vga,com1 -- rhgb console=tty0 \
-console=ttyS0 root=/dev/sda2"
-
-==================-Getting and Building domU with pv_ops
-==================-
- 1. get pv_ops tree
- # git clone http://people.valinux.co.jp/~yamahata/xen-ia64/linux-2.6-xen-ia64.git/
-
- 2. git branch (if necessary)
- # cd linux-2.6-xen-ia64/
- # git checkout -b your_branch origin/xen-ia64-domu-minimal-2008may19
- (Note: The current branch is xen-ia64-domu-minimal-2008may19.
- But you would find the new branch. You can see with
- "git branch -r" to get the branch lists.
- http://people.valinux.co.jp/~yamahata/xen-ia64/for_eagl/linux-2.6-ia64-pv-ops.git/
- is also available. The tree is based on
- git://git.kernel.org/pub/scm/linux/kernel/git/aegl/linux-2.6 test)
-
-
- 3. copy .config for pv_ops of domU
- # cp arch/ia64/configs/xen_domu_wip_defconfig .config
-
- 4. make kernel with pv_ops
- # make oldconfig
- # make
-
- 5. install the kernel and initrd
- # cp vmlinux.gz /boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6-pv_ops-xenU
- # make modules_install
- # mkinitrd -f /boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6-pv_ops-xenU.img \
- 2.6.26-rc3xen-ia64-08941-g1b12161 --builtin mptspi \
- --builtin mptbase --builtin mptscsih --builtin uhci-hcd \
- --builtin ohci-hcd --builtin ehci-hcd
-
-============
-Boot DomainU with pv_ops
-============
-
- 1. make config of DomU
- # vi /etc/xen/rhel5
- kernel = "/boot/efi/efi/redhat/vmlinuz-2.6-pv_ops-xenU"
- ramdisk = "/boot/efi/efi/redhat/initrd-2.6-pv_ops-xenU.img"
- vcpus = 1
- memory = 512
- name = "rhel5"
- disk = [ 'file:/root/rhel5.img,xvda1,w' ]
- root = "/dev/xvda1 ro"
- extra= "rhgb console=hvc0"
-
- 2. After boot xen and dom0, start xend
- # /etc/init.d/xend start
- ( In the debugging case, # XEND_DEBUG=1 xend trace_start )
-
- 3. start domU
- # xm create -c rhel5
-
-====-Reference
-====-- Wiki of Xen/IA64 upstream merge
- http://wiki.xensource.com/xenwiki/XenIA64/UpstreamMerge
-
-Written by Akio Takebe <takebe_akio@jp.fujitsu.com> on 28 May 2008
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index 8941a73880e6..f27f50f88638 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -14266,7 +14266,7 @@ SGI SN-IA64 (Altix) SERIAL CONSOLE DRIVER
M: Pat Gefre <pfg@sgi.com>
L: linux-ia64@vger.kernel.org
S: Supported
-F: Documentation/ia64/serial.txt
+F: Documentation/ia64/serial.rst
F: drivers/tty/serial/ioc?_serial.c
F: include/linux/ioc?.h
diff --git a/arch/ia64/kernel/efi.c b/arch/ia64/kernel/efi.c
index 8f106638913c..3795d18276c4 100644
--- a/arch/ia64/kernel/efi.c
+++ b/arch/ia64/kernel/efi.c
@@ -852,7 +852,7 @@ valid_phys_addr_range (phys_addr_t phys_addr, unsigned long size)
* /dev/mem reads and writes use copy_to_user(), which implicitly
* uses a granule-sized kernel identity mapping. It's really
* only safe to do this for regions in kern_memmap. For more
- * details, see Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt.
+ * details, see Documentation/ia64/aliasing.rst.
*/
attr = kern_mem_attribute(phys_addr, size);
if (attr & EFI_MEMORY_WB || attr & EFI_MEMORY_UC)
diff --git a/arch/ia64/kernel/fsys.S b/arch/ia64/kernel/fsys.S
index d80c99a5f55d..0750a716adc7 100644
--- a/arch/ia64/kernel/fsys.S
+++ b/arch/ia64/kernel/fsys.S
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@
#include <asm/native/inst.h>
/*
- * See Documentation/ia64/fsys.txt for details on fsyscalls.
+ * See Documentation/ia64/fsys.rst for details on fsyscalls.
*
* On entry to an fsyscall handler:
* r10 = 0 (i.e., defaults to "successful syscall return")
diff --git a/arch/ia64/mm/ioremap.c b/arch/ia64/mm/ioremap.c
index 43964cde6214..c7da3376b6f8 100644
--- a/arch/ia64/mm/ioremap.c
+++ b/arch/ia64/mm/ioremap.c
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ ioremap (unsigned long phys_addr, unsigned long size)
/*
* For things in kern_memmap, we must use the same attribute
* as the rest of the kernel. For more details, see
- * Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt.
+ * Documentation/ia64/aliasing.rst.
*/
attr = kern_mem_attribute(phys_addr, size);
if (attr & EFI_MEMORY_WB)
diff --git a/arch/ia64/pci/pci.c b/arch/ia64/pci/pci.c
index e308196c2229..165e561dc81a 100644
--- a/arch/ia64/pci/pci.c
+++ b/arch/ia64/pci/pci.c
@@ -450,7 +450,7 @@ pci_mmap_legacy_page_range(struct pci_bus *bus, struct vm_area_struct *vma,
return -ENOSYS;
/*
- * Avoid attribute aliasing. See Documentation/ia64/aliasing.txt
+ * Avoid attribute aliasing. See Documentation/ia64/aliasing.rst
* for more details.
*/
if (!valid_mmap_phys_addr_range(vma->vm_pgoff, size))
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* [PATCH v2 20/29] docs: leds: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (18 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-21 10:59 ` Pavel Machek
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 21/29] docs: laptops: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (8 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 1 reply; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Vadim Pasternak, Jacek Anaszewski, Pavel Machek,
Dan Murphy, Pablo Neira Ayuso, Jozsef Kadlecsik,
Florian Westphal, David S. Miller, linux-leds, netfilter-devel,
coreteam, netdev
Rename the leds documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt | 4 +-
Documentation/leds/index.rst | 25 ++
.../leds/{leds-blinkm.txt => leds-blinkm.rst} | 64 ++---
...s-class-flash.txt => leds-class-flash.rst} | 49 ++--
.../leds/{leds-class.txt => leds-class.rst} | 15 +-
.../leds/{leds-lm3556.txt => leds-lm3556.rst} | 100 ++++++--
.../leds/{leds-lp3944.txt => leds-lp3944.rst} | 23 +-
Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.rst | 115 +++++++++
Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt | 101 --------
Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.rst | 147 ++++++++++++
Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt | 130 ----------
Documentation/leds/leds-lp5562.rst | 137 +++++++++++
Documentation/leds/leds-lp5562.txt | 120 ----------
Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.rst | 224 ++++++++++++++++++
Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt | 194 ---------------
Documentation/leds/leds-mlxcpld.rst | 118 +++++++++
Documentation/leds/leds-mlxcpld.txt | 110 ---------
...edtrig-oneshot.txt => ledtrig-oneshot.rst} | 11 +-
...ig-transient.txt => ledtrig-transient.rst} | 63 +++--
...edtrig-usbport.txt => ledtrig-usbport.rst} | 11 +-
Documentation/leds/{uleds.txt => uleds.rst} | 5 +-
MAINTAINERS | 2 +-
drivers/leds/trigger/Kconfig | 2 +-
drivers/leds/trigger/ledtrig-transient.c | 2 +-
net/netfilter/Kconfig | 2 +-
25 files changed, 996 insertions(+), 778 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 Documentation/leds/index.rst
rename Documentation/leds/{leds-blinkm.txt => leds-blinkm.rst} (57%)
rename Documentation/leds/{leds-class-flash.txt => leds-class-flash.rst} (74%)
rename Documentation/leds/{leds-class.txt => leds-class.rst} (92%)
rename Documentation/leds/{leds-lm3556.txt => leds-lm3556.rst} (70%)
rename Documentation/leds/{leds-lp3944.txt => leds-lp3944.rst} (78%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.rst
delete mode 100644 Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt
create mode 100644 Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.rst
delete mode 100644 Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt
create mode 100644 Documentation/leds/leds-lp5562.rst
delete mode 100644 Documentation/leds/leds-lp5562.txt
create mode 100644 Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.rst
delete mode 100644 Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt
create mode 100644 Documentation/leds/leds-mlxcpld.rst
delete mode 100644 Documentation/leds/leds-mlxcpld.txt
rename Documentation/leds/{ledtrig-oneshot.txt => ledtrig-oneshot.rst} (90%)
rename Documentation/leds/{ledtrig-transient.txt => ledtrig-transient.rst} (81%)
rename Documentation/leds/{ledtrig-usbport.txt => ledtrig-usbport.rst} (86%)
rename Documentation/leds/{uleds.txt => uleds.rst} (95%)
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
index 6cced88de6da..75ef063622d2 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
@@ -679,7 +679,7 @@ status as "unknown". The available commands are:
sysfs notes:
The ThinkLight sysfs interface is documented by the LED class
-documentation, in Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt. The ThinkLight LED name
+documentation, in Documentation/leds/leds-class.rst. The ThinkLight LED name
is "tpacpi::thinklight".
Due to limitations in the sysfs LED class, if the status of the ThinkLight
@@ -779,7 +779,7 @@ All of the above can be turned on and off and can be made to blink.
sysfs notes:
The ThinkPad LED sysfs interface is described in detail by the LED class
-documentation, in Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt.
+documentation, in Documentation/leds/leds-class.rst.
The LEDs are named (in LED ID order, from 0 to 12):
"tpacpi::power", "tpacpi:orange:batt", "tpacpi:green:batt",
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/index.rst b/Documentation/leds/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..9885f7c1b75d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/leds/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,25 @@
+:orphan:
+
+====
+LEDs
+====
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ leds-class
+ leds-class-flash
+ ledtrig-oneshot
+ ledtrig-transient
+ ledtrig-usbport
+
+ uleds
+
+ leds-blinkm
+ leds-lm3556
+ leds-lp3944
+ leds-lp5521
+ leds-lp5523
+ leds-lp5562
+ leds-lp55xx
+ leds-mlxcpld
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-blinkm.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-blinkm.rst
similarity index 57%
rename from Documentation/leds/leds-blinkm.txt
rename to Documentation/leds/leds-blinkm.rst
index 9dd92f4cf4e1..c74b5bc877b1 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds/leds-blinkm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-blinkm.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+==================
+Leds BlinkM driver
+==================
+
The leds-blinkm driver supports the devices of the BlinkM family.
They are RGB-LED modules driven by a (AT)tiny microcontroller and
@@ -14,35 +18,36 @@ The interface this driver provides is 2-fold:
a) LED class interface for use with triggers
############################################
-The registration follows the scheme:
-blinkm-<i2c-bus-nr>-<i2c-device-nr>-<color>
+The registration follows the scheme::
-$ ls -h /sys/class/leds/blinkm-6-*
-/sys/class/leds/blinkm-6-9-blue:
-brightness device max_brightness power subsystem trigger uevent
+ blinkm-<i2c-bus-nr>-<i2c-device-nr>-<color>
-/sys/class/leds/blinkm-6-9-green:
-brightness device max_brightness power subsystem trigger uevent
+ $ ls -h /sys/class/leds/blinkm-6-*
+ /sys/class/leds/blinkm-6-9-blue:
+ brightness device max_brightness power subsystem trigger uevent
-/sys/class/leds/blinkm-6-9-red:
-brightness device max_brightness power subsystem trigger uevent
+ /sys/class/leds/blinkm-6-9-green:
+ brightness device max_brightness power subsystem trigger uevent
+
+ /sys/class/leds/blinkm-6-9-red:
+ brightness device max_brightness power subsystem trigger uevent
(same is /sys/bus/i2c/devices/6-0009/leds)
We can control the colors separated into red, green and blue and
assign triggers on each color.
-E.g.:
+E.g.::
-$ cat blinkm-6-9-blue/brightness
-05
+ $ cat blinkm-6-9-blue/brightness
+ 05
-$ echo 200 > blinkm-6-9-blue/brightness
-$
+ $ echo 200 > blinkm-6-9-blue/brightness
+ $
-$ modprobe ledtrig-heartbeat
-$ echo heartbeat > blinkm-6-9-green/trigger
-$
+ $ modprobe ledtrig-heartbeat
+ $ echo heartbeat > blinkm-6-9-green/trigger
+ $
b) Sysfs group to control rgb, fade, hsb, scripts ...
@@ -52,29 +57,28 @@ This extended interface is available as folder blinkm
in the sysfs folder of the I2C device.
E.g. below /sys/bus/i2c/devices/6-0009/blinkm
-$ ls -h /sys/bus/i2c/devices/6-0009/blinkm/
-blue green red test
+ $ ls -h /sys/bus/i2c/devices/6-0009/blinkm/
+ blue green red test
Currently supported is just setting red, green, blue
and a test sequence.
-E.g.:
+E.g.::
-$ cat *
-00
-00
-00
-#Write into test to start test sequence!#
+ $ cat *
+ 00
+ 00
+ 00
+ #Write into test to start test sequence!#
-$ echo 1 > test
-$
+ $ echo 1 > test
+ $
-$ echo 255 > red
-$
+ $ echo 255 > red
+ $
as of 6/2012
dl9pf <at> gmx <dot> de
-
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-class-flash.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-class-flash.rst
similarity index 74%
rename from Documentation/leds/leds-class-flash.txt
rename to Documentation/leds/leds-class-flash.rst
index 8da3c6f4b60b..6ec12c5a1a0e 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds/leds-class-flash.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-class-flash.rst
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-
+==============================
Flash LED handling under Linux
==============================
Some LED devices provide two modes - torch and flash. In the LED subsystem
-those modes are supported by LED class (see Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt)
+those modes are supported by LED class (see Documentation/leds/leds-class.rst)
and LED Flash class respectively. The torch mode related features are enabled
by default and the flash ones only if a driver declares it by setting
LED_DEV_CAP_FLASH flag.
@@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ registered in the LED subsystem with led_classdev_flash_register function.
Following sysfs attributes are exposed for controlling flash LED devices:
(see Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-flash)
+
- flash_brightness
- max_flash_brightness
- flash_timeout
@@ -31,30 +32,46 @@ be defined in the kernel config.
The driver must call the v4l2_flash_init function to get registered in the
V4L2 subsystem. The function takes six arguments:
-- dev : flash device, e.g. an I2C device
-- of_node : of_node of the LED, may be NULL if the same as device's
-- fled_cdev : LED flash class device to wrap
-- iled_cdev : LED flash class device representing indicator LED associated with
- fled_cdev, may be NULL
-- ops : V4L2 specific ops
- * external_strobe_set - defines the source of the flash LED strobe -
+
+- dev:
+ flash device, e.g. an I2C device
+- of_node:
+ of_node of the LED, may be NULL if the same as device's
+- fled_cdev:
+ LED flash class device to wrap
+- iled_cdev:
+ LED flash class device representing indicator LED associated with
+ fled_cdev, may be NULL
+- ops:
+ V4L2 specific ops
+
+ * external_strobe_set
+ defines the source of the flash LED strobe -
V4L2_CID_FLASH_STROBE control or external source, typically
a sensor, which makes it possible to synchronise the flash
strobe start with exposure start,
- * intensity_to_led_brightness and led_brightness_to_intensity - perform
+ * intensity_to_led_brightness and led_brightness_to_intensity
+ perform
enum led_brightness <-> V4L2 intensity conversion in a device
specific manner - they can be used for devices with non-linear
LED current scale.
-- config : configuration for V4L2 Flash sub-device
- * dev_name - the name of the media entity, unique in the system,
- * flash_faults - bitmask of flash faults that the LED flash class
+- config:
+ configuration for V4L2 Flash sub-device
+
+ * dev_name
+ the name of the media entity, unique in the system,
+ * flash_faults
+ bitmask of flash faults that the LED flash class
device can report; corresponding LED_FAULT* bit definitions are
available in <linux/led-class-flash.h>,
- * torch_intensity - constraints for the LED in TORCH mode
+ * torch_intensity
+ constraints for the LED in TORCH mode
in microamperes,
- * indicator_intensity - constraints for the indicator LED
+ * indicator_intensity
+ constraints for the indicator LED
in microamperes,
- * has_external_strobe - determines whether the flash strobe source
+ * has_external_strobe
+ determines whether the flash strobe source
can be switched to external,
On remove the v4l2_flash_release function has to be called, which takes one
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-class.rst
similarity index 92%
rename from Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt
rename to Documentation/leds/leds-class.rst
index 8b39cc6b03ee..df0120a1ee3c 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-class.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,4 @@
-
+========================
LED handling under Linux
========================
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ LED Device Naming
Is currently of the form:
-"devicename:colour:function"
+ "devicename:colour:function"
There have been calls for LED properties such as colour to be exported as
individual led class attributes. As a solution which doesn't incur as much
@@ -57,9 +57,12 @@ Brightness setting API
LED subsystem core exposes following API for setting brightness:
- - led_set_brightness : it is guaranteed not to sleep, passing LED_OFF stops
+ - led_set_brightness:
+ it is guaranteed not to sleep, passing LED_OFF stops
blinking,
- - led_set_brightness_sync : for use cases when immediate effect is desired -
+
+ - led_set_brightness_sync:
+ for use cases when immediate effect is desired -
it can block the caller for the time required for accessing
device registers and can sleep, passing LED_OFF stops hardware
blinking, returns -EBUSY if software blink fallback is enabled.
@@ -70,7 +73,7 @@ LED registration API
A driver wanting to register a LED classdev for use by other drivers /
userspace needs to allocate and fill a led_classdev struct and then call
-[devm_]led_classdev_register. If the non devm version is used the driver
+`[devm_]led_classdev_register`. If the non devm version is used the driver
must call led_classdev_unregister from its remove function before
free-ing the led_classdev struct.
@@ -94,7 +97,7 @@ with brightness value LED_OFF, which should stop any software
timers that may have been required for blinking.
The blink_set() function should choose a user friendly blinking value
-if it is called with *delay_on==0 && *delay_off==0 parameters. In this
+if it is called with `*delay_on==0` && `*delay_off==0` parameters. In this
case the driver should give back the chosen value through delay_on and
delay_off parameters to the leds subsystem.
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lm3556.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lm3556.rst
similarity index 70%
rename from Documentation/leds/leds-lm3556.txt
rename to Documentation/leds/leds-lm3556.rst
index 62278e871b50..1ef17d7d800e 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds/leds-lm3556.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lm3556.rst
@@ -1,68 +1,118 @@
+========================
Kernel driver for lm3556
========================
-*Texas Instrument:
- 1.5 A Synchronous Boost LED Flash Driver w/ High-Side Current Source
+* Texas Instrument:
+ 1.5 A Synchronous Boost LED Flash Driver w/ High-Side Current Source
* Datasheet: http://www.national.com/ds/LM/LM3556.pdf
Authors:
- Daniel Jeong
+ - Daniel Jeong
+
Contact:Daniel Jeong(daniel.jeong-at-ti.com, gshark.jeong-at-gmail.com)
Description
-----------
There are 3 functions in LM3556, Flash, Torch and Indicator.
-FLASH MODE
+Flash Mode
+^^^^^^^^^^
+
In Flash Mode, the LED current source(LED) provides 16 target current levels
from 93.75 mA to 1500 mA.The Flash currents are adjusted via the CURRENT
CONTROL REGISTER(0x09).Flash mode is activated by the ENABLE REGISTER(0x0A),
or by pulling the STROBE pin HIGH.
+
LM3556 Flash can be controlled through sys/class/leds/flash/brightness file
+
* if STROBE pin is enabled, below example control brightness only, and
-ON / OFF will be controlled by STROBE pin.
+ ON / OFF will be controlled by STROBE pin.
Flash Example:
-OFF : #echo 0 > sys/class/leds/flash/brightness
-93.75 mA: #echo 1 > sys/class/leds/flash/brightness
-... .....
-1500 mA: #echo 16 > sys/class/leds/flash/brightness
-TORCH MODE
+OFF::
+
+ #echo 0 > sys/class/leds/flash/brightness
+
+93.75 mA::
+
+ #echo 1 > sys/class/leds/flash/brightness
+
+...
+
+1500 mA::
+
+ #echo 16 > sys/class/leds/flash/brightness
+
+Torch Mode
+^^^^^^^^^^
+
In Torch Mode, the current source(LED) is programmed via the CURRENT CONTROL
REGISTER(0x09).Torch Mode is activated by the ENABLE REGISTER(0x0A) or by the
hardware TORCH input.
+
LM3556 torch can be controlled through sys/class/leds/torch/brightness file.
* if TORCH pin is enabled, below example control brightness only,
and ON / OFF will be controlled by TORCH pin.
Torch Example:
-OFF : #echo 0 > sys/class/leds/torch/brightness
-46.88 mA: #echo 1 > sys/class/leds/torch/brightness
-... .....
-375 mA : #echo 8 > sys/class/leds/torch/brightness
-INDICATOR MODE
+OFF::
+
+ #echo 0 > sys/class/leds/torch/brightness
+
+46.88 mA::
+
+ #echo 1 > sys/class/leds/torch/brightness
+
+...
+
+375 mA::
+
+ #echo 8 > sys/class/leds/torch/brightness
+
+Indicator Mode
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
Indicator pattern can be set through sys/class/leds/indicator/pattern file,
and 4 patterns are pre-defined in indicator_pattern array.
+
According to N-lank, Pulse time and N Period values, different pattern wiill
be generated.If you want new patterns for your own device, change
indicator_pattern array with your own values and INDIC_PATTERN_SIZE.
+
Please refer datasheet for more detail about N-Blank, Pulse time and N Period.
Indicator pattern example:
-pattern 0: #echo 0 > sys/class/leds/indicator/pattern
-....
-pattern 3: #echo 3 > sys/class/leds/indicator/pattern
+
+pattern 0::
+
+ #echo 0 > sys/class/leds/indicator/pattern
+
+...
+
+pattern 3::
+
+ #echo 3 > sys/class/leds/indicator/pattern
Indicator brightness can be controlled through
sys/class/leds/indicator/brightness file.
Example:
-OFF : #echo 0 > sys/class/leds/indicator/brightness
-5.86 mA : #echo 1 > sys/class/leds/indicator/brightness
-........
-46.875mA : #echo 8 > sys/class/leds/indicator/brightness
+
+OFF::
+
+ #echo 0 > sys/class/leds/indicator/brightness
+
+5.86 mA::
+
+ #echo 1 > sys/class/leds/indicator/brightness
+
+...
+
+46.875mA::
+
+ #echo 8 > sys/class/leds/indicator/brightness
Notes
-----
@@ -70,7 +120,8 @@ Driver expects it is registered using the i2c_board_info mechanism.
To register the chip at address 0x63 on specific adapter, set the platform data
according to include/linux/platform_data/leds-lm3556.h, set the i2c board info
-Example:
+Example::
+
static struct i2c_board_info board_i2c_ch4[] __initdata = {
{
I2C_BOARD_INFO(LM3556_NAME, 0x63),
@@ -80,6 +131,7 @@ Example:
and register it in the platform init function
-Example:
+Example::
+
board_register_i2c_bus(4, 400,
board_i2c_ch4, ARRAY_SIZE(board_i2c_ch4));
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.rst
similarity index 78%
rename from Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.txt
rename to Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.rst
index e88ac3b60c08..c2f87dc1a3a9 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp3944.rst
@@ -1,14 +1,20 @@
+====================
Kernel driver lp3944
====================
* National Semiconductor LP3944 Fun-light Chip
+
Prefix: 'lp3944'
+
Addresses scanned: None (see the Notes section below)
- Datasheet: Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
- http://www.national.com/pf/LP/LP3944.html
+
+ Datasheet:
+
+ Publicly available at the National Semiconductor website
+ http://www.national.com/pf/LP/LP3944.html
Authors:
- Antonio Ospite <ospite@studenti.unina.it>
+ Antonio Ospite <ospite@studenti.unina.it>
Description
@@ -19,8 +25,11 @@ is used as a led controller.
The DIM modes are used to set _blink_ patterns for leds, the pattern is
specified supplying two parameters:
- - period: from 0s to 1.6s
- - duty cycle: percentage of the period the led is on, from 0 to 100
+
+ - period:
+ from 0s to 1.6s
+ - duty cycle:
+ percentage of the period the led is on, from 0 to 100
Setting a led in DIM0 or DIM1 mode makes it blink according to the pattern.
See the datasheet for details.
@@ -35,7 +44,7 @@ The chip is used mainly in embedded contexts, so this driver expects it is
registered using the i2c_board_info mechanism.
To register the chip at address 0x60 on adapter 0, set the platform data
-according to include/linux/leds-lp3944.h, set the i2c board info:
+according to include/linux/leds-lp3944.h, set the i2c board info::
static struct i2c_board_info a910_i2c_board_info[] __initdata = {
{
@@ -44,7 +53,7 @@ according to include/linux/leds-lp3944.h, set the i2c board info:
},
};
-and register it in the platform init function
+and register it in the platform init function::
i2c_register_board_info(0, a910_i2c_board_info,
ARRAY_SIZE(a910_i2c_board_info));
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.rst b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0432615b083d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+========================
+Kernel driver for lp5521
+========================
+
+* National Semiconductor LP5521 led driver chip
+* Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LP/LP5521.html
+
+Authors: Mathias Nyman, Yuri Zaporozhets, Samu Onkalo
+
+Contact: Samu Onkalo (samu.p.onkalo-at-nokia.com)
+
+Description
+-----------
+
+LP5521 can drive up to 3 channels. Leds can be controlled directly via
+the led class control interface. Channels have generic names:
+lp5521:channelx, where x is 0 .. 2
+
+All three channels can be also controlled using the engine micro programs.
+More details of the instructions can be found from the public data sheet.
+
+LP5521 has the internal program memory for running various LED patterns.
+There are two ways to run LED patterns.
+
+1) Legacy interface - enginex_mode and enginex_load
+ Control interface for the engines:
+
+ x is 1 .. 3
+
+ enginex_mode:
+ disabled, load, run
+ enginex_load:
+ store program (visible only in engine load mode)
+
+ Example (start to blink the channel 2 led)::
+
+ cd /sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel2/device
+ echo "load" > engine3_mode
+ echo "037f4d0003ff6000" > engine3_load
+ echo "run" > engine3_mode
+
+ To stop the engine::
+
+ echo "disabled" > engine3_mode
+
+2) Firmware interface - LP55xx common interface
+
+For the details, please refer to 'firmware' section in leds-lp55xx.txt
+
+sysfs contains a selftest entry.
+
+The test communicates with the chip and checks that
+the clock mode is automatically set to the requested one.
+
+Each channel has its own led current settings.
+
+- /sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel0/led_current - RW
+- /sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel0/max_current - RO
+
+Format: 10x mA i.e 10 means 1.0 mA
+
+example platform data::
+
+ static struct lp55xx_led_config lp5521_led_config[] = {
+ {
+ .name = "red",
+ .chan_nr = 0,
+ .led_current = 50,
+ .max_current = 130,
+ }, {
+ .name = "green",
+ .chan_nr = 1,
+ .led_current = 0,
+ .max_current = 130,
+ }, {
+ .name = "blue",
+ .chan_nr = 2,
+ .led_current = 0,
+ .max_current = 130,
+ }
+ };
+
+ static int lp5521_setup(void)
+ {
+ /* setup HW resources */
+ }
+
+ static void lp5521_release(void)
+ {
+ /* Release HW resources */
+ }
+
+ static void lp5521_enable(bool state)
+ {
+ /* Control of chip enable signal */
+ }
+
+ static struct lp55xx_platform_data lp5521_platform_data = {
+ .led_config = lp5521_led_config,
+ .num_channels = ARRAY_SIZE(lp5521_led_config),
+ .clock_mode = LP55XX_CLOCK_EXT,
+ .setup_resources = lp5521_setup,
+ .release_resources = lp5521_release,
+ .enable = lp5521_enable,
+ };
+
+Note:
+ chan_nr can have values between 0 and 2.
+ The name of each channel can be configurable.
+ If the name field is not defined, the default name will be set to 'xxxx:channelN'
+ (XXXX : pdata->label or i2c client name, N : channel number)
+
+
+If the current is set to 0 in the platform data, that channel is
+disabled and it is not visible in the sysfs.
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index d08d8c179f85..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5521.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver for lp5521
-========================
-
-* National Semiconductor LP5521 led driver chip
-* Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LP/LP5521.html
-
-Authors: Mathias Nyman, Yuri Zaporozhets, Samu Onkalo
-Contact: Samu Onkalo (samu.p.onkalo-at-nokia.com)
-
-Description
------------
-
-LP5521 can drive up to 3 channels. Leds can be controlled directly via
-the led class control interface. Channels have generic names:
-lp5521:channelx, where x is 0 .. 2
-
-All three channels can be also controlled using the engine micro programs.
-More details of the instructions can be found from the public data sheet.
-
-LP5521 has the internal program memory for running various LED patterns.
-There are two ways to run LED patterns.
-
-1) Legacy interface - enginex_mode and enginex_load
- Control interface for the engines:
- x is 1 .. 3
- enginex_mode : disabled, load, run
- enginex_load : store program (visible only in engine load mode)
-
- Example (start to blink the channel 2 led):
- cd /sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel2/device
- echo "load" > engine3_mode
- echo "037f4d0003ff6000" > engine3_load
- echo "run" > engine3_mode
-
- To stop the engine:
- echo "disabled" > engine3_mode
-
-2) Firmware interface - LP55xx common interface
- For the details, please refer to 'firmware' section in leds-lp55xx.txt
-
-sysfs contains a selftest entry.
-The test communicates with the chip and checks that
-the clock mode is automatically set to the requested one.
-
-Each channel has its own led current settings.
-/sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel0/led_current - RW
-/sys/class/leds/lp5521:channel0/max_current - RO
-Format: 10x mA i.e 10 means 1.0 mA
-
-example platform data:
-
-Note: chan_nr can have values between 0 and 2.
-The name of each channel can be configurable.
-If the name field is not defined, the default name will be set to 'xxxx:channelN'
-(XXXX : pdata->label or i2c client name, N : channel number)
-
-static struct lp55xx_led_config lp5521_led_config[] = {
- {
- .name = "red",
- .chan_nr = 0,
- .led_current = 50,
- .max_current = 130,
- }, {
- .name = "green",
- .chan_nr = 1,
- .led_current = 0,
- .max_current = 130,
- }, {
- .name = "blue",
- .chan_nr = 2,
- .led_current = 0,
- .max_current = 130,
- }
-};
-
-static int lp5521_setup(void)
-{
- /* setup HW resources */
-}
-
-static void lp5521_release(void)
-{
- /* Release HW resources */
-}
-
-static void lp5521_enable(bool state)
-{
- /* Control of chip enable signal */
-}
-
-static struct lp55xx_platform_data lp5521_platform_data = {
- .led_config = lp5521_led_config,
- .num_channels = ARRAY_SIZE(lp5521_led_config),
- .clock_mode = LP55XX_CLOCK_EXT,
- .setup_resources = lp5521_setup,
- .release_resources = lp5521_release,
- .enable = lp5521_enable,
-};
-
-If the current is set to 0 in the platform data, that channel is
-disabled and it is not visible in the sysfs.
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.rst b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..7d7362a1dd57
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+========================
+Kernel driver for lp5523
+========================
+
+* National Semiconductor LP5523 led driver chip
+* Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LP/LP5523.html
+
+Authors: Mathias Nyman, Yuri Zaporozhets, Samu Onkalo
+Contact: Samu Onkalo (samu.p.onkalo-at-nokia.com)
+
+Description
+-----------
+LP5523 can drive up to 9 channels. Leds can be controlled directly via
+the led class control interface.
+The name of each channel is configurable in the platform data - name and label.
+There are three options to make the channel name.
+
+a) Define the 'name' in the platform data
+
+To make specific channel name, then use 'name' platform data.
+
+- /sys/class/leds/R1 (name: 'R1')
+- /sys/class/leds/B1 (name: 'B1')
+
+b) Use the 'label' with no 'name' field
+
+For one device name with channel number, then use 'label'.
+- /sys/class/leds/RGB:channelN (label: 'RGB', N: 0 ~ 8)
+
+c) Default
+
+If both fields are NULL, 'lp5523' is used by default.
+- /sys/class/leds/lp5523:channelN (N: 0 ~ 8)
+
+LP5523 has the internal program memory for running various LED patterns.
+There are two ways to run LED patterns.
+
+1) Legacy interface - enginex_mode, enginex_load and enginex_leds
+
+ Control interface for the engines:
+
+ x is 1 .. 3
+
+ enginex_mode:
+ disabled, load, run
+ enginex_load:
+ microcode load
+ enginex_leds:
+ led mux control
+
+ ::
+
+ cd /sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/device
+ echo "load" > engine3_mode
+ echo "9d80400004ff05ff437f0000" > engine3_load
+ echo "111111111" > engine3_leds
+ echo "run" > engine3_mode
+
+ To stop the engine::
+
+ echo "disabled" > engine3_mode
+
+2) Firmware interface - LP55xx common interface
+
+For the details, please refer to 'firmware' section in leds-lp55xx.txt
+
+LP5523 has three master faders. If a channel is mapped to one of
+the master faders, its output is dimmed based on the value of the master
+fader.
+
+For example::
+
+ echo "123000123" > master_fader_leds
+
+creates the following channel-fader mappings::
+
+ channel 0,6 to master_fader1
+ channel 1,7 to master_fader2
+ channel 2,8 to master_fader3
+
+Then, to have 25% of the original output on channel 0,6::
+
+ echo 64 > master_fader1
+
+To have 0% of the original output (i.e. no output) channel 1,7::
+
+ echo 0 > master_fader2
+
+To have 100% of the original output (i.e. no dimming) on channel 2,8::
+
+ echo 255 > master_fader3
+
+To clear all master fader controls::
+
+ echo "000000000" > master_fader_leds
+
+Selftest uses always the current from the platform data.
+
+Each channel contains led current settings.
+- /sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/led_current - RW
+- /sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/max_current - RO
+
+Format: 10x mA i.e 10 means 1.0 mA
+
+Example platform data::
+
+ static struct lp55xx_led_config lp5523_led_config[] = {
+ {
+ .name = "D1",
+ .chan_nr = 0,
+ .led_current = 50,
+ .max_current = 130,
+ },
+ ...
+ {
+ .chan_nr = 8,
+ .led_current = 50,
+ .max_current = 130,
+ }
+ };
+
+ static int lp5523_setup(void)
+ {
+ /* Setup HW resources */
+ }
+
+ static void lp5523_release(void)
+ {
+ /* Release HW resources */
+ }
+
+ static void lp5523_enable(bool state)
+ {
+ /* Control chip enable signal */
+ }
+
+ static struct lp55xx_platform_data lp5523_platform_data = {
+ .led_config = lp5523_led_config,
+ .num_channels = ARRAY_SIZE(lp5523_led_config),
+ .clock_mode = LP55XX_CLOCK_EXT,
+ .setup_resources = lp5523_setup,
+ .release_resources = lp5523_release,
+ .enable = lp5523_enable,
+ };
+
+Note
+ chan_nr can have values between 0 and 8.
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 0961a060fc4d..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5523.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,130 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver for lp5523
-========================
-
-* National Semiconductor LP5523 led driver chip
-* Datasheet: http://www.national.com/pf/LP/LP5523.html
-
-Authors: Mathias Nyman, Yuri Zaporozhets, Samu Onkalo
-Contact: Samu Onkalo (samu.p.onkalo-at-nokia.com)
-
-Description
------------
-LP5523 can drive up to 9 channels. Leds can be controlled directly via
-the led class control interface.
-The name of each channel is configurable in the platform data - name and label.
-There are three options to make the channel name.
-
-a) Define the 'name' in the platform data
-To make specific channel name, then use 'name' platform data.
-/sys/class/leds/R1 (name: 'R1')
-/sys/class/leds/B1 (name: 'B1')
-
-b) Use the 'label' with no 'name' field
-For one device name with channel number, then use 'label'.
-/sys/class/leds/RGB:channelN (label: 'RGB', N: 0 ~ 8)
-
-c) Default
-If both fields are NULL, 'lp5523' is used by default.
-/sys/class/leds/lp5523:channelN (N: 0 ~ 8)
-
-LP5523 has the internal program memory for running various LED patterns.
-There are two ways to run LED patterns.
-
-1) Legacy interface - enginex_mode, enginex_load and enginex_leds
- Control interface for the engines:
- x is 1 .. 3
- enginex_mode : disabled, load, run
- enginex_load : microcode load
- enginex_leds : led mux control
-
- cd /sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/device
- echo "load" > engine3_mode
- echo "9d80400004ff05ff437f0000" > engine3_load
- echo "111111111" > engine3_leds
- echo "run" > engine3_mode
-
- To stop the engine:
- echo "disabled" > engine3_mode
-
-2) Firmware interface - LP55xx common interface
- For the details, please refer to 'firmware' section in leds-lp55xx.txt
-
-LP5523 has three master faders. If a channel is mapped to one of
-the master faders, its output is dimmed based on the value of the master
-fader.
-
-For example,
-
- echo "123000123" > master_fader_leds
-
-creates the following channel-fader mappings:
-
- channel 0,6 to master_fader1
- channel 1,7 to master_fader2
- channel 2,8 to master_fader3
-
-Then, to have 25% of the original output on channel 0,6:
-
- echo 64 > master_fader1
-
-To have 0% of the original output (i.e. no output) channel 1,7:
-
- echo 0 > master_fader2
-
-To have 100% of the original output (i.e. no dimming) on channel 2,8:
-
- echo 255 > master_fader3
-
-To clear all master fader controls:
-
- echo "000000000" > master_fader_leds
-
-Selftest uses always the current from the platform data.
-
-Each channel contains led current settings.
-/sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/led_current - RW
-/sys/class/leds/lp5523:channel2/max_current - RO
-Format: 10x mA i.e 10 means 1.0 mA
-
-Example platform data:
-
-Note - chan_nr can have values between 0 and 8.
-
-static struct lp55xx_led_config lp5523_led_config[] = {
- {
- .name = "D1",
- .chan_nr = 0,
- .led_current = 50,
- .max_current = 130,
- },
-...
- {
- .chan_nr = 8,
- .led_current = 50,
- .max_current = 130,
- }
-};
-
-static int lp5523_setup(void)
-{
- /* Setup HW resources */
-}
-
-static void lp5523_release(void)
-{
- /* Release HW resources */
-}
-
-static void lp5523_enable(bool state)
-{
- /* Control chip enable signal */
-}
-
-static struct lp55xx_platform_data lp5523_platform_data = {
- .led_config = lp5523_led_config,
- .num_channels = ARRAY_SIZE(lp5523_led_config),
- .clock_mode = LP55XX_CLOCK_EXT,
- .setup_resources = lp5523_setup,
- .release_resources = lp5523_release,
- .enable = lp5523_enable,
-};
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5562.rst b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5562.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..79bbb2487ff6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5562.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,137 @@
+========================
+Kernel driver for lp5562
+========================
+
+* TI LP5562 LED Driver
+
+Author: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com>
+
+Description
+===========
+
+ LP5562 can drive up to 4 channels. R/G/B and White.
+ LEDs can be controlled directly via the led class control interface.
+
+ All four channels can be also controlled using the engine micro programs.
+ LP5562 has the internal program memory for running various LED patterns.
+ For the details, please refer to 'firmware' section in leds-lp55xx.txt
+
+Device attribute
+================
+
+engine_mux
+ 3 Engines are allocated in LP5562, but the number of channel is 4.
+ Therefore each channel should be mapped to the engine number.
+
+ Value: RGB or W
+
+ This attribute is used for programming LED data with the firmware interface.
+ Unlike the LP5521/LP5523/55231, LP5562 has unique feature for the engine mux,
+ so additional sysfs is required
+
+ LED Map
+
+ ===== === ===============================
+ Red ... Engine 1 (fixed)
+ Green ... Engine 2 (fixed)
+ Blue ... Engine 3 (fixed)
+ White ... Engine 1 or 2 or 3 (selective)
+ ===== === ===============================
+
+How to load the program data using engine_mux
+=============================================
+
+ Before loading the LP5562 program data, engine_mux should be written between
+ the engine selection and loading the firmware.
+ Engine mux has two different mode, RGB and W.
+ RGB is used for loading RGB program data, W is used for W program data.
+
+ For example, run blinking green channel pattern::
+
+ echo 2 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine # 2 is for green channel
+ echo "RGB" > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/engine_mux # engine mux for RGB
+ echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/loading
+ echo "4000600040FF6000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/data
+ echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/loading
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
+
+ To run a blinking white pattern::
+
+ echo 1 or 2 or 3 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+ echo "W" > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/engine_mux
+ echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/loading
+ echo "4000600040FF6000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/data
+ echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/loading
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
+
+How to load the predefined patterns
+===================================
+
+ Please refer to 'leds-lp55xx.txt"
+
+Setting Current of Each Channel
+===============================
+
+ Like LP5521 and LP5523/55231, LP5562 provides LED current settings.
+ The 'led_current' and 'max_current' are used.
+
+Example of Platform data
+========================
+
+::
+
+ static struct lp55xx_led_config lp5562_led_config[] = {
+ {
+ .name = "R",
+ .chan_nr = 0,
+ .led_current = 20,
+ .max_current = 40,
+ },
+ {
+ .name = "G",
+ .chan_nr = 1,
+ .led_current = 20,
+ .max_current = 40,
+ },
+ {
+ .name = "B",
+ .chan_nr = 2,
+ .led_current = 20,
+ .max_current = 40,
+ },
+ {
+ .name = "W",
+ .chan_nr = 3,
+ .led_current = 20,
+ .max_current = 40,
+ },
+ };
+
+ static int lp5562_setup(void)
+ {
+ /* setup HW resources */
+ }
+
+ static void lp5562_release(void)
+ {
+ /* Release HW resources */
+ }
+
+ static void lp5562_enable(bool state)
+ {
+ /* Control of chip enable signal */
+ }
+
+ static struct lp55xx_platform_data lp5562_platform_data = {
+ .led_config = lp5562_led_config,
+ .num_channels = ARRAY_SIZE(lp5562_led_config),
+ .setup_resources = lp5562_setup,
+ .release_resources = lp5562_release,
+ .enable = lp5562_enable,
+ };
+
+To configure the platform specific data, lp55xx_platform_data structure is used
+
+
+If the current is set to 0 in the platform data, that channel is
+disabled and it is not visible in the sysfs.
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5562.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5562.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 5a823ff6b393..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp5562.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,120 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver for LP5562
-========================
-
-* TI LP5562 LED Driver
-
-Author: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com>
-
-Description
-
- LP5562 can drive up to 4 channels. R/G/B and White.
- LEDs can be controlled directly via the led class control interface.
-
- All four channels can be also controlled using the engine micro programs.
- LP5562 has the internal program memory for running various LED patterns.
- For the details, please refer to 'firmware' section in leds-lp55xx.txt
-
-Device attribute: engine_mux
-
- 3 Engines are allocated in LP5562, but the number of channel is 4.
- Therefore each channel should be mapped to the engine number.
- Value : RGB or W
-
- This attribute is used for programming LED data with the firmware interface.
- Unlike the LP5521/LP5523/55231, LP5562 has unique feature for the engine mux,
- so additional sysfs is required.
-
- LED Map
- Red ... Engine 1 (fixed)
- Green ... Engine 2 (fixed)
- Blue ... Engine 3 (fixed)
- White ... Engine 1 or 2 or 3 (selective)
-
-How to load the program data using engine_mux
-
- Before loading the LP5562 program data, engine_mux should be written between
- the engine selection and loading the firmware.
- Engine mux has two different mode, RGB and W.
- RGB is used for loading RGB program data, W is used for W program data.
-
- For example, run blinking green channel pattern,
- echo 2 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine # 2 is for green channel
- echo "RGB" > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/engine_mux # engine mux for RGB
- echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/loading
- echo "4000600040FF6000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/data
- echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/loading
- echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
-
- To run a blinking white pattern,
- echo 1 or 2 or 3 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
- echo "W" > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/engine_mux
- echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/loading
- echo "4000600040FF6000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/data
- echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5562/loading
- echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
-
-How to load the predefined patterns
-
- Please refer to 'leds-lp55xx.txt"
-
-Setting Current of Each Channel
-
- Like LP5521 and LP5523/55231, LP5562 provides LED current settings.
- The 'led_current' and 'max_current' are used.
-
-(Example of Platform data)
-
-To configure the platform specific data, lp55xx_platform_data structure is used.
-
-static struct lp55xx_led_config lp5562_led_config[] = {
- {
- .name = "R",
- .chan_nr = 0,
- .led_current = 20,
- .max_current = 40,
- },
- {
- .name = "G",
- .chan_nr = 1,
- .led_current = 20,
- .max_current = 40,
- },
- {
- .name = "B",
- .chan_nr = 2,
- .led_current = 20,
- .max_current = 40,
- },
- {
- .name = "W",
- .chan_nr = 3,
- .led_current = 20,
- .max_current = 40,
- },
-};
-
-static int lp5562_setup(void)
-{
- /* setup HW resources */
-}
-
-static void lp5562_release(void)
-{
- /* Release HW resources */
-}
-
-static void lp5562_enable(bool state)
-{
- /* Control of chip enable signal */
-}
-
-static struct lp55xx_platform_data lp5562_platform_data = {
- .led_config = lp5562_led_config,
- .num_channels = ARRAY_SIZE(lp5562_led_config),
- .setup_resources = lp5562_setup,
- .release_resources = lp5562_release,
- .enable = lp5562_enable,
-};
-
-If the current is set to 0 in the platform data, that channel is
-disabled and it is not visible in the sysfs.
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.rst b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..632e41cec0b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,224 @@
+=================================================
+LP5521/LP5523/LP55231/LP5562/LP8501 Common Driver
+=================================================
+
+Authors: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com>
+
+Description
+-----------
+LP5521, LP5523/55231, LP5562 and LP8501 have common features as below.
+
+ Register access via the I2C
+ Device initialization/deinitialization
+ Create LED class devices for multiple output channels
+ Device attributes for user-space interface
+ Program memory for running LED patterns
+
+The LP55xx common driver provides these features using exported functions.
+
+ lp55xx_init_device() / lp55xx_deinit_device()
+ lp55xx_register_leds() / lp55xx_unregister_leds()
+ lp55xx_regsister_sysfs() / lp55xx_unregister_sysfs()
+
+( Driver Structure Data )
+
+In lp55xx common driver, two different data structure is used.
+
+* lp55xx_led
+ control multi output LED channels such as led current, channel index.
+* lp55xx_chip
+ general chip control such like the I2C and platform data.
+
+For example, LP5521 has maximum 3 LED channels.
+LP5523/55231 has 9 output channels::
+
+ lp55xx_chip for LP5521 ... lp55xx_led #1
+ lp55xx_led #2
+ lp55xx_led #3
+
+ lp55xx_chip for LP5523 ... lp55xx_led #1
+ lp55xx_led #2
+ .
+ .
+ lp55xx_led #9
+
+( Chip Dependent Code )
+
+To support device specific configurations, special structure
+'lpxx_device_config' is used.
+
+ - Maximum number of channels
+ - Reset command, chip enable command
+ - Chip specific initialization
+ - Brightness control register access
+ - Setting LED output current
+ - Program memory address access for running patterns
+ - Additional device specific attributes
+
+( Firmware Interface )
+
+LP55xx family devices have the internal program memory for running
+various LED patterns.
+
+This pattern data is saved as a file in the user-land or
+hex byte string is written into the memory through the I2C.
+
+LP55xx common driver supports the firmware interface.
+
+LP55xx chips have three program engines.
+
+To load and run the pattern, the programming sequence is following.
+
+ (1) Select an engine number (1/2/3)
+ (2) Mode change to load
+ (3) Write pattern data into selected area
+ (4) Mode change to run
+
+The LP55xx common driver provides simple interfaces as below.
+
+select_engine:
+ Select which engine is used for running program
+run_engine:
+ Start program which is loaded via the firmware interface
+firmware:
+ Load program data
+
+In case of LP5523, one more command is required, 'enginex_leds'.
+It is used for selecting LED output(s) at each engine number.
+In more details, please refer to 'leds-lp5523.txt'.
+
+For example, run blinking pattern in engine #1 of LP5521::
+
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+ echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/loading
+ echo "4000600040FF6000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/data
+ echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/loading
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
+
+For example, run blinking pattern in engine #3 of LP55231
+
+Two LEDs are configured as pattern output channels::
+
+ echo 3 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+ echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp55231/loading
+ echo "9d0740ff7e0040007e00a0010000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp55231/data
+ echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp55231/loading
+ echo "000001100" > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/engine3_leds
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
+
+To start blinking patterns in engine #2 and #3 simultaneously::
+
+ for idx in 2 3
+ do
+ echo $idx > /sys/class/leds/red/device/select_engine
+ sleep 0.1
+ echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/loading
+ echo "4000600040FF6000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/data
+ echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/loading
+ done
+ echo 1 > /sys/class/leds/red/device/run_engine
+
+Here is another example for LP5523.
+
+Full LED strings are selected by 'engine2_leds'::
+
+ echo 2 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+ echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5523/loading
+ echo "9d80400004ff05ff437f0000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5523/data
+ echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5523/loading
+ echo "111111111" > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/engine2_leds
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
+
+As soon as 'loading' is set to 0, registered callback is called.
+Inside the callback, the selected engine is loaded and memory is updated.
+To run programmed pattern, 'run_engine' attribute should be enabled.
+
+The pattern sequence of LP8501 is similar to LP5523.
+
+However pattern data is specific.
+
+Ex 1) Engine 1 is used::
+
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+ echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
+ echo "9d0140ff7e0040007e00a001c000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/data
+ echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
+
+Ex 2) Engine 2 and 3 are used at the same time::
+
+ echo 2 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+ sleep 1
+ echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
+ echo "9d0140ff7e0040007e00a001c000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/data
+ echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
+ sleep 1
+ echo 3 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
+ sleep 1
+ echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
+ echo "9d0340ff7e0040007e00a001c000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/data
+ echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
+ sleep 1
+ echo 1 > /sys/class/leds/d1/device/run_engine
+
+( 'run_engine' and 'firmware_cb' )
+
+The sequence of running the program data is common.
+
+But each device has own specific register addresses for commands.
+
+To support this, 'run_engine' and 'firmware_cb' are configurable in each driver.
+
+run_engine:
+ Control the selected engine
+firmware_cb:
+ The callback function after loading the firmware is done.
+
+ Chip specific commands for loading and updating program memory.
+
+( Predefined pattern data )
+
+Without the firmware interface, LP55xx driver provides another method for
+loading a LED pattern. That is 'predefined' pattern.
+
+A predefined pattern is defined in the platform data and load it(or them)
+via the sysfs if needed.
+
+To use the predefined pattern concept, 'patterns' and 'num_patterns' should be
+configured.
+
+Example of predefined pattern data::
+
+ /* mode_1: blinking data */
+ static const u8 mode_1[] = {
+ 0x40, 0x00, 0x60, 0x00, 0x40, 0xFF, 0x60, 0x00,
+ };
+
+ /* mode_2: always on */
+ static const u8 mode_2[] = { 0x40, 0xFF, };
+
+ struct lp55xx_predef_pattern board_led_patterns[] = {
+ {
+ .r = mode_1,
+ .size_r = ARRAY_SIZE(mode_1),
+ },
+ {
+ .b = mode_2,
+ .size_b = ARRAY_SIZE(mode_2),
+ },
+ }
+
+ struct lp55xx_platform_data lp5562_pdata = {
+ ...
+ .patterns = board_led_patterns,
+ .num_patterns = ARRAY_SIZE(board_led_patterns),
+ };
+
+Then, mode_1 and mode_2 can be run via through the sysfs::
+
+ echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/led_pattern # red blinking LED pattern
+ echo 2 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/led_pattern # blue LED always on
+
+To stop running pattern::
+
+ echo 0 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/led_pattern
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index e23fa91ea722..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/leds/leds-lp55xx.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,194 +0,0 @@
-LP5521/LP5523/LP55231/LP5562/LP8501 Common Driver
-=================================================
-
-Authors: Milo(Woogyom) Kim <milo.kim@ti.com>
-
-Description
------------
-LP5521, LP5523/55231, LP5562 and LP8501 have common features as below.
-
- Register access via the I2C
- Device initialization/deinitialization
- Create LED class devices for multiple output channels
- Device attributes for user-space interface
- Program memory for running LED patterns
-
-The LP55xx common driver provides these features using exported functions.
- lp55xx_init_device() / lp55xx_deinit_device()
- lp55xx_register_leds() / lp55xx_unregister_leds()
- lp55xx_regsister_sysfs() / lp55xx_unregister_sysfs()
-
-( Driver Structure Data )
-
-In lp55xx common driver, two different data structure is used.
-
-o lp55xx_led
- control multi output LED channels such as led current, channel index.
-o lp55xx_chip
- general chip control such like the I2C and platform data.
-
-For example, LP5521 has maximum 3 LED channels.
-LP5523/55231 has 9 output channels.
-
-lp55xx_chip for LP5521 ... lp55xx_led #1
- lp55xx_led #2
- lp55xx_led #3
-
-lp55xx_chip for LP5523 ... lp55xx_led #1
- lp55xx_led #2
- .
- .
- lp55xx_led #9
-
-( Chip Dependent Code )
-
-To support device specific configurations, special structure
-'lpxx_device_config' is used.
-
- Maximum number of channels
- Reset command, chip enable command
- Chip specific initialization
- Brightness control register access
- Setting LED output current
- Program memory address access for running patterns
- Additional device specific attributes
-
-( Firmware Interface )
-
-LP55xx family devices have the internal program memory for running
-various LED patterns.
-This pattern data is saved as a file in the user-land or
-hex byte string is written into the memory through the I2C.
-LP55xx common driver supports the firmware interface.
-
-LP55xx chips have three program engines.
-To load and run the pattern, the programming sequence is following.
- (1) Select an engine number (1/2/3)
- (2) Mode change to load
- (3) Write pattern data into selected area
- (4) Mode change to run
-
-The LP55xx common driver provides simple interfaces as below.
-select_engine : Select which engine is used for running program
-run_engine : Start program which is loaded via the firmware interface
-firmware : Load program data
-
-In case of LP5523, one more command is required, 'enginex_leds'.
-It is used for selecting LED output(s) at each engine number.
-In more details, please refer to 'leds-lp5523.txt'.
-
-For example, run blinking pattern in engine #1 of LP5521
-echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
-echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/loading
-echo "4000600040FF6000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/data
-echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/loading
-echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
-
-For example, run blinking pattern in engine #3 of LP55231
-Two LEDs are configured as pattern output channels.
-echo 3 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
-echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp55231/loading
-echo "9d0740ff7e0040007e00a0010000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp55231/data
-echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp55231/loading
-echo "000001100" > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/engine3_leds
-echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
-
-To start blinking patterns in engine #2 and #3 simultaneously,
-for idx in 2 3
-do
- echo $idx > /sys/class/leds/red/device/select_engine
- sleep 0.1
- echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/loading
- echo "4000600040FF6000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/data
- echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5521/loading
-done
-echo 1 > /sys/class/leds/red/device/run_engine
-
-Here is another example for LP5523.
-Full LED strings are selected by 'engine2_leds'.
-echo 2 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
-echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5523/loading
-echo "9d80400004ff05ff437f0000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp5523/data
-echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp5523/loading
-echo "111111111" > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/engine2_leds
-echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
-
-As soon as 'loading' is set to 0, registered callback is called.
-Inside the callback, the selected engine is loaded and memory is updated.
-To run programmed pattern, 'run_engine' attribute should be enabled.
-
-The pattern sequence of LP8501 is similar to LP5523.
-However pattern data is specific.
-Ex 1) Engine 1 is used
-echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
-echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
-echo "9d0140ff7e0040007e00a001c000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/data
-echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
-echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/run_engine
-
-Ex 2) Engine 2 and 3 are used at the same time
-echo 2 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
-sleep 1
-echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
-echo "9d0140ff7e0040007e00a001c000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/data
-echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
-sleep 1
-echo 3 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/select_engine
-sleep 1
-echo 1 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
-echo "9d0340ff7e0040007e00a001c000" > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/data
-echo 0 > /sys/class/firmware/lp8501/loading
-sleep 1
-echo 1 > /sys/class/leds/d1/device/run_engine
-
-( 'run_engine' and 'firmware_cb' )
-The sequence of running the program data is common.
-But each device has own specific register addresses for commands.
-To support this, 'run_engine' and 'firmware_cb' are configurable in each driver.
-run_engine : Control the selected engine
-firmware_cb : The callback function after loading the firmware is done.
- Chip specific commands for loading and updating program memory.
-
-( Predefined pattern data )
-
-Without the firmware interface, LP55xx driver provides another method for
-loading a LED pattern. That is 'predefined' pattern.
-A predefined pattern is defined in the platform data and load it(or them)
-via the sysfs if needed.
-To use the predefined pattern concept, 'patterns' and 'num_patterns' should be
-configured.
-
- Example of predefined pattern data:
-
- /* mode_1: blinking data */
- static const u8 mode_1[] = {
- 0x40, 0x00, 0x60, 0x00, 0x40, 0xFF, 0x60, 0x00,
- };
-
- /* mode_2: always on */
- static const u8 mode_2[] = { 0x40, 0xFF, };
-
- struct lp55xx_predef_pattern board_led_patterns[] = {
- {
- .r = mode_1,
- .size_r = ARRAY_SIZE(mode_1),
- },
- {
- .b = mode_2,
- .size_b = ARRAY_SIZE(mode_2),
- },
- }
-
- struct lp55xx_platform_data lp5562_pdata = {
- ...
- .patterns = board_led_patterns,
- .num_patterns = ARRAY_SIZE(board_led_patterns),
- };
-
-Then, mode_1 and mode_2 can be run via through the sysfs.
-
- echo 1 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/led_pattern # red blinking LED pattern
- echo 2 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/led_pattern # blue LED always on
-
-To stop running pattern,
- echo 0 > /sys/bus/i2c/devices/xxxx/led_pattern
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-mlxcpld.rst b/Documentation/leds/leds-mlxcpld.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..528582429e0b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/leds/leds-mlxcpld.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,118 @@
+=======================================
+Kernel driver for Mellanox systems LEDs
+=======================================
+
+Provide system LED support for the nex Mellanox systems:
+"msx6710", "msx6720", "msb7700", "msn2700", "msx1410",
+"msn2410", "msb7800", "msn2740", "msn2100".
+
+Description
+-----------
+Driver provides the following LEDs for the systems "msx6710", "msx6720",
+"msb7700", "msn2700", "msx1410", "msn2410", "msb7800", "msn2740":
+
+ - mlxcpld:fan1:green
+ - mlxcpld:fan1:red
+ - mlxcpld:fan2:green
+ - mlxcpld:fan2:red
+ - mlxcpld:fan3:green
+ - mlxcpld:fan3:red
+ - mlxcpld:fan4:green
+ - mlxcpld:fan4:red
+ - mlxcpld:psu:green
+ - mlxcpld:psu:red
+ - mlxcpld:status:green
+ - mlxcpld:status:red
+
+ "status"
+ - CPLD reg offset: 0x20
+ - Bits [3:0]
+
+ "psu"
+ - CPLD reg offset: 0x20
+ - Bits [7:4]
+
+ "fan1"
+ - CPLD reg offset: 0x21
+ - Bits [3:0]
+
+ "fan2"
+ - CPLD reg offset: 0x21
+ - Bits [7:4]
+
+ "fan3"
+ - CPLD reg offset: 0x22
+ - Bits [3:0]
+
+ "fan4"
+ - CPLD reg offset: 0x22
+ - Bits [7:4]
+
+ Color mask for all the above LEDs:
+
+ [bit3,bit2,bit1,bit0] or
+ [bit7,bit6,bit5,bit4]:
+
+ - [0,0,0,0] = LED OFF
+ - [0,1,0,1] = Red static ON
+ - [1,1,0,1] = Green static ON
+ - [0,1,1,0] = Red blink 3Hz
+ - [1,1,1,0] = Green blink 3Hz
+ - [0,1,1,1] = Red blink 6Hz
+ - [1,1,1,1] = Green blink 6Hz
+
+Driver provides the following LEDs for the system "msn2100":
+
+ - mlxcpld:fan:green
+ - mlxcpld:fan:red
+ - mlxcpld:psu1:green
+ - mlxcpld:psu1:red
+ - mlxcpld:psu2:green
+ - mlxcpld:psu2:red
+ - mlxcpld:status:green
+ - mlxcpld:status:red
+ - mlxcpld:uid:blue
+
+ "status"
+ - CPLD reg offset: 0x20
+ - Bits [3:0]
+
+ "fan"
+ - CPLD reg offset: 0x21
+ - Bits [3:0]
+
+ "psu1"
+ - CPLD reg offset: 0x23
+ - Bits [3:0]
+
+ "psu2"
+ - CPLD reg offset: 0x23
+ - Bits [7:4]
+
+ "uid"
+ - CPLD reg offset: 0x24
+ - Bits [3:0]
+
+ Color mask for all the above LEDs, excepted uid:
+
+ [bit3,bit2,bit1,bit0] or
+ [bit7,bit6,bit5,bit4]:
+
+ - [0,0,0,0] = LED OFF
+ - [0,1,0,1] = Red static ON
+ - [1,1,0,1] = Green static ON
+ - [0,1,1,0] = Red blink 3Hz
+ - [1,1,1,0] = Green blink 3Hz
+ - [0,1,1,1] = Red blink 6Hz
+ - [1,1,1,1] = Green blink 6Hz
+
+ Color mask for uid LED:
+ [bit3,bit2,bit1,bit0]:
+
+ - [0,0,0,0] = LED OFF
+ - [1,1,0,1] = Blue static ON
+ - [1,1,1,0] = Blue blink 3Hz
+ - [1,1,1,1] = Blue blink 6Hz
+
+Driver supports HW blinking at 3Hz and 6Hz frequency (50% duty cycle).
+For 3Hz duty cylce is about 167 msec, for 6Hz is about 83 msec.
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/leds-mlxcpld.txt b/Documentation/leds/leds-mlxcpld.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index a0e8fd457117..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/leds/leds-mlxcpld.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,110 +0,0 @@
-Kernel driver for Mellanox systems LEDs
-=======================================
-
-Provide system LED support for the nex Mellanox systems:
-"msx6710", "msx6720", "msb7700", "msn2700", "msx1410",
-"msn2410", "msb7800", "msn2740", "msn2100".
-
-Description
------------
-Driver provides the following LEDs for the systems "msx6710", "msx6720",
-"msb7700", "msn2700", "msx1410", "msn2410", "msb7800", "msn2740":
- mlxcpld:fan1:green
- mlxcpld:fan1:red
- mlxcpld:fan2:green
- mlxcpld:fan2:red
- mlxcpld:fan3:green
- mlxcpld:fan3:red
- mlxcpld:fan4:green
- mlxcpld:fan4:red
- mlxcpld:psu:green
- mlxcpld:psu:red
- mlxcpld:status:green
- mlxcpld:status:red
-
- "status"
- CPLD reg offset: 0x20
- Bits [3:0]
-
- "psu"
- CPLD reg offset: 0x20
- Bits [7:4]
-
- "fan1"
- CPLD reg offset: 0x21
- Bits [3:0]
-
- "fan2"
- CPLD reg offset: 0x21
- Bits [7:4]
-
- "fan3"
- CPLD reg offset: 0x22
- Bits [3:0]
-
- "fan4"
- CPLD reg offset: 0x22
- Bits [7:4]
-
- Color mask for all the above LEDs:
- [bit3,bit2,bit1,bit0] or
- [bit7,bit6,bit5,bit4]:
- [0,0,0,0] = LED OFF
- [0,1,0,1] = Red static ON
- [1,1,0,1] = Green static ON
- [0,1,1,0] = Red blink 3Hz
- [1,1,1,0] = Green blink 3Hz
- [0,1,1,1] = Red blink 6Hz
- [1,1,1,1] = Green blink 6Hz
-
-Driver provides the following LEDs for the system "msn2100":
- mlxcpld:fan:green
- mlxcpld:fan:red
- mlxcpld:psu1:green
- mlxcpld:psu1:red
- mlxcpld:psu2:green
- mlxcpld:psu2:red
- mlxcpld:status:green
- mlxcpld:status:red
- mlxcpld:uid:blue
-
- "status"
- CPLD reg offset: 0x20
- Bits [3:0]
-
- "fan"
- CPLD reg offset: 0x21
- Bits [3:0]
-
- "psu1"
- CPLD reg offset: 0x23
- Bits [3:0]
-
- "psu2"
- CPLD reg offset: 0x23
- Bits [7:4]
-
- "uid"
- CPLD reg offset: 0x24
- Bits [3:0]
-
- Color mask for all the above LEDs, excepted uid:
- [bit3,bit2,bit1,bit0] or
- [bit7,bit6,bit5,bit4]:
- [0,0,0,0] = LED OFF
- [0,1,0,1] = Red static ON
- [1,1,0,1] = Green static ON
- [0,1,1,0] = Red blink 3Hz
- [1,1,1,0] = Green blink 3Hz
- [0,1,1,1] = Red blink 6Hz
- [1,1,1,1] = Green blink 6Hz
-
- Color mask for uid LED:
- [bit3,bit2,bit1,bit0]:
- [0,0,0,0] = LED OFF
- [1,1,0,1] = Blue static ON
- [1,1,1,0] = Blue blink 3Hz
- [1,1,1,1] = Blue blink 6Hz
-
-Driver supports HW blinking at 3Hz and 6Hz frequency (50% duty cycle).
-For 3Hz duty cylce is about 167 msec, for 6Hz is about 83 msec.
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-oneshot.txt b/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-oneshot.rst
similarity index 90%
rename from Documentation/leds/ledtrig-oneshot.txt
rename to Documentation/leds/ledtrig-oneshot.rst
index fe57474a12e2..69fa3ea1d554 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-oneshot.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-oneshot.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+====================
One-shot LED Trigger
====================
@@ -17,27 +18,27 @@ additional "invert" property specifies if the LED has to stay off (normal) or
on (inverted) when not rearmed.
The trigger can be activated from user space on led class devices as shown
-below:
+below::
echo oneshot > trigger
This adds sysfs attributes to the LED that are documented in:
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-trigger-oneshot
-Example use-case: network devices, initialization:
+Example use-case: network devices, initialization::
echo oneshot > trigger # set trigger for this led
echo 33 > delay_on # blink at 1 / (33 + 33) Hz on continuous traffic
echo 33 > delay_off
-interface goes up:
+interface goes up::
echo 1 > invert # set led as normally-on, turn the led on
-packet received/transmitted:
+packet received/transmitted::
echo 1 > shot # led starts blinking, ignored if already blinking
-interface goes down
+interface goes down::
echo 0 > invert # set led as normally-off, turn the led off
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-transient.txt b/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-transient.rst
similarity index 81%
rename from Documentation/leds/ledtrig-transient.txt
rename to Documentation/leds/ledtrig-transient.rst
index 3bd38b487df1..d921dc830cd0 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-transient.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-transient.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+=====================
LED Transient Trigger
=====================
@@ -62,12 +63,13 @@ non-transient state. When driver gets suspended, irrespective of the transient
state, the LED state changes to LED_OFF.
Transient trigger can be enabled and disabled from user space on led class
-devices, that support this trigger as shown below:
+devices, that support this trigger as shown below::
-echo transient > trigger
-echo none > trigger
+ echo transient > trigger
+ echo none > trigger
-NOTE: Add a new property trigger state to control the state.
+NOTE:
+ Add a new property trigger state to control the state.
This trigger exports three properties, activate, state, and duration. When
transient trigger is activated these properties are set to default values.
@@ -79,7 +81,8 @@ transient trigger is activated these properties are set to default values.
- state allows user to specify a transient state to be held for the specified
duration.
- activate - one shot timer activate mechanism.
+ activate
+ - one shot timer activate mechanism.
1 when activated, 0 when deactivated.
default value is zero when transient trigger is enabled,
to allow duration to be set.
@@ -89,12 +92,14 @@ transient trigger is activated these properties are set to default values.
deactivated state indicates that there is no active timer
running.
- duration - one shot timer value. When activate is set, duration value
+ duration
+ - one shot timer value. When activate is set, duration value
is used to start a timer that runs once. This value doesn't
get changed by the trigger unless user does a set via
echo new_value > duration
- state - transient state to be held. It has two values 0 or 1. 0 maps
+ state
+ - transient state to be held. It has two values 0 or 1. 0 maps
to LED_OFF and 1 maps to LED_FULL. The specified state is
held for the duration of the one shot timer and then the
state gets changed to the non-transient state which is the
@@ -114,39 +119,49 @@ When timer expires activate goes back to deactivated state, duration is left
at the set value to be used when activate is set at a future time. This will
allow user app to set the time once and activate it to run it once for the
specified value as needed. When timer expires, state is restored to the
-non-transient state which is the inverse of the transient state.
+non-transient state which is the inverse of the transient state:
- echo 1 > activate - starts timer = duration when duration is not 0.
- echo 0 > activate - cancels currently running timer.
- echo n > duration - stores timer value to be used upon next
- activate. Currently active timer if
- any, continues to run for the specified time.
- echo 0 > duration - stores timer value to be used upon next
- activate. Currently active timer if any,
- continues to run for the specified time.
- echo 1 > state - stores desired transient state LED_FULL to be
+ ================= ===============================================
+ echo 1 > activate starts timer = duration when duration is not 0.
+ echo 0 > activate cancels currently running timer.
+ echo n > duration stores timer value to be used upon next
+ activate. Currently active timer if
+ any, continues to run for the specified time.
+ echo 0 > duration stores timer value to be used upon next
+ activate. Currently active timer if any,
+ continues to run for the specified time.
+ echo 1 > state stores desired transient state LED_FULL to be
held for the specified duration.
- echo 0 > state - stores desired transient state LED_OFF to be
+ echo 0 > state stores desired transient state LED_OFF to be
held for the specified duration.
+ ================= ===============================================
+
+What is not supported
+=====================
-What is not supported:
-======================
- Timer activation is one shot and extending and/or shortening the timer
is not supported.
-Example use-case 1:
+Examples
+========
+
+use-case 1::
+
echo transient > trigger
echo n > duration
echo 1 > state
-repeat the following step as needed:
+
+repeat the following step as needed::
+
echo 1 > activate - start timer = duration to run once
echo 1 > activate - start timer = duration to run once
echo none > trigger
This trigger is intended to be used for for the following example use cases:
+
- Control of vibrate (phones, tablets etc.) hardware by user space app.
- Use of LED by user space app as activity indicator.
- Use of LED by user space app as a kind of watchdog indicator -- as
- long as the app is alive, it can keep the LED illuminated, if it dies
- the LED will be extinguished automatically.
+ long as the app is alive, it can keep the LED illuminated, if it dies
+ the LED will be extinguished automatically.
- Use by any user space app that needs a transient GPIO output.
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-usbport.txt b/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-usbport.rst
similarity index 86%
rename from Documentation/leds/ledtrig-usbport.txt
rename to Documentation/leds/ledtrig-usbport.rst
index 69f54bfb4789..37c2505bfd57 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-usbport.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds/ledtrig-usbport.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+====================
USB port LED trigger
====================
@@ -10,14 +11,18 @@ listed as separated entries in a "ports" subdirectory. Selecting is handled by
echoing "1" to a chosen port.
Please note that this trigger allows selecting multiple USB ports for a single
-LED. This can be useful in two cases:
+LED.
+
+This can be useful in two cases:
1) Device with single USB LED and few physical ports
+====================================================
In such a case LED will be turned on as long as there is at least one connected
USB device.
2) Device with a physical port handled by few controllers
+=========================================================
Some devices may have one controller per PHY standard. E.g. USB 3.0 physical
port may be handled by ohci-platform, ehci-platform and xhci-hcd. If there is
@@ -25,14 +30,14 @@ only one LED user will most likely want to assign ports from all 3 hubs.
This trigger can be activated from user space on led class devices as shown
-below:
+below::
echo usbport > trigger
This adds sysfs attributes to the LED that are documented in:
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-class-led-trigger-usbport
-Example use-case:
+Example use-case::
echo usbport > trigger
echo 1 > ports/usb1-port1
diff --git a/Documentation/leds/uleds.txt b/Documentation/leds/uleds.rst
similarity index 95%
rename from Documentation/leds/uleds.txt
rename to Documentation/leds/uleds.rst
index 13e375a580f9..83221098009c 100644
--- a/Documentation/leds/uleds.txt
+++ b/Documentation/leds/uleds.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==============
Userspace LEDs
==============
@@ -10,12 +11,12 @@ Usage
When the driver is loaded, a character device is created at /dev/uleds. To
create a new LED class device, open /dev/uleds and write a uleds_user_dev
-structure to it (found in kernel public header file linux/uleds.h).
+structure to it (found in kernel public header file linux/uleds.h)::
#define LED_MAX_NAME_SIZE 64
struct uleds_user_dev {
- char name[LED_MAX_NAME_SIZE];
+ char name[LED_MAX_NAME_SIZE];
};
A new LED class device will be created with the name given. The name can be
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index f27f50f88638..b7d5faf95e25 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -10175,7 +10175,7 @@ L: linux-leds@vger.kernel.org
S: Supported
F: drivers/leds/leds-mlxcpld.c
F: drivers/leds/leds-mlxreg.c
-F: Documentation/leds/leds-mlxcpld.txt
+F: Documentation/leds/leds-mlxcpld.rst
MELLANOX PLATFORM DRIVER
M: Vadim Pasternak <vadimp@mellanox.com>
diff --git a/drivers/leds/trigger/Kconfig b/drivers/leds/trigger/Kconfig
index 7fa9d174a40c..ce9429ca6dde 100644
--- a/drivers/leds/trigger/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/leds/trigger/Kconfig
@@ -15,7 +15,7 @@ config LEDS_TRIGGER_TIMER
This allows LEDs to be controlled by a programmable timer
via sysfs. Some LED hardware can be programmed to start
blinking the LED without any further software interaction.
- For more details read Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt.
+ For more details read Documentation/leds/leds-class.rst.
If unsure, say Y.
diff --git a/drivers/leds/trigger/ledtrig-transient.c b/drivers/leds/trigger/ledtrig-transient.c
index a80bb82aacc2..80635183fac8 100644
--- a/drivers/leds/trigger/ledtrig-transient.c
+++ b/drivers/leds/trigger/ledtrig-transient.c
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
// LED Kernel Transient Trigger
//
// Transient trigger allows one shot timer activation. Please refer to
-// Documentation/leds/ledtrig-transient.txt for details
+// Documentation/leds/ledtrig-transient.rst for details
// Copyright (C) 2012 Shuah Khan <shuahkhan@gmail.com>
//
// Based on Richard Purdie's ledtrig-timer.c and Atsushi Nemoto's
diff --git a/net/netfilter/Kconfig b/net/netfilter/Kconfig
index dd2af7be3eea..1837734ce85b 100644
--- a/net/netfilter/Kconfig
+++ b/net/netfilter/Kconfig
@@ -906,7 +906,7 @@ config NETFILTER_XT_TARGET_LED
echo netfilter-ssh > /sys/class/leds/<ledname>/trigger
For more information on the LEDs available on your system, see
- Documentation/leds/leds-class.txt
+ Documentation/leds/leds-class.rst
config NETFILTER_XT_TARGET_LOG
tristate "LOG target support"
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* Re: [PATCH v2 20/29] docs: leds: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 20/29] docs: leds: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-21 10:59 ` Pavel Machek
0 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Pavel Machek @ 2019-06-21 10:59 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Mauro Carvalho Chehab
Cc: Linux Doc Mailing List, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Vadim Pasternak, Jacek Anaszewski, Dan Murphy,
Pablo Neira Ayuso, Jozsef Kadlecsik, Florian Westphal,
David S. Miller, linux-leds, netfilter-devel, coreteam, netdev
[-- Attachment #1: Type: text/plain, Size: 608 bytes --]
On Tue 2019-06-18 17:53:38, Mauro Carvalho Chehab wrote:
> Rename the leds documentation files to ReST, add an
> index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
> output via the Sphinx build system.
>
> At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
> the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Pavel Machek <pavel@ucw.cz>
--
(english) http://www.livejournal.com/~pavelmachek
(cesky, pictures) http://atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz/~pavel/picture/horses/blog.html
[-- Attachment #2: Digital signature --]
[-- Type: application/pgp-signature, Size: 181 bytes --]
^ permalink raw reply [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* [PATCH v2 21/29] docs: laptops: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (19 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 20/29] docs: leds: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 22/29] docs: iio: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (7 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Arnd Bergmann, Greg Kroah-Hartman, Darren Hart,
Andy Shevchenko, platform-driver-x86, Andy Shevchenko
Rename the laptops documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Andy Shevchenko <andy.shevchenko@gmail.com>
---
Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-device | 2 +-
.../ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop | 2 +-
.../admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt | 2 +-
.../{asus-laptop.txt => asus-laptop.rst} | 92 ++--
...otection.txt => disk-shock-protection.rst} | 32 +-
Documentation/laptops/index.rst | 17 +
.../{laptop-mode.txt => laptop-mode.rst} | 509 +++++++++---------
.../{sony-laptop.txt => sony-laptop.rst} | 58 +-
.../laptops/{sonypi.txt => sonypi.rst} | 28 +-
.../{thinkpad-acpi.txt => thinkpad-acpi.rst} | 363 ++++++++-----
.../{toshiba_haps.txt => toshiba_haps.rst} | 47 +-
Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt | 4 +-
MAINTAINERS | 2 +-
drivers/char/Kconfig | 2 +-
drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig | 4 +-
15 files changed, 660 insertions(+), 504 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/laptops/{asus-laptop.txt => asus-laptop.rst} (84%)
rename Documentation/laptops/{disk-shock-protection.txt => disk-shock-protection.rst} (91%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/laptops/index.rst
rename Documentation/laptops/{laptop-mode.txt => laptop-mode.rst} (62%)
rename Documentation/laptops/{sony-laptop.txt => sony-laptop.rst} (85%)
rename Documentation/laptops/{sonypi.txt => sonypi.rst} (87%)
rename Documentation/laptops/{thinkpad-acpi.txt => thinkpad-acpi.rst} (89%)
rename Documentation/laptops/{toshiba_haps.txt => toshiba_haps.rst} (60%)
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-device b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-device
index 82ef6eab042d..0d57bbb4fddc 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-device
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-block-device
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ Description:
- Values below -2 are rejected with -EINVAL
For more information, see
- Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt
+ Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.rst
What: /sys/block/*/device/ncq_prio_enable
diff --git a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop
index cd9d667c3da2..d67fa4bafa70 100644
--- a/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop
+++ b/Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-platform-asus-laptop
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ Description:
To control the LED display, use the following :
echo 0x0T000DDD > /sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/
where T control the 3 letters display, and DDD the 3 digits display.
- The DDD table can be found in Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt
+ The DDD table can be found in Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.rst
What: /sys/devices/platform/asus_laptop/bluetooth
Date: January 2007
diff --git a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
index 3faf37b8b001..7abe677f8c5e 100644
--- a/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
+++ b/Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.txt
@@ -4356,7 +4356,7 @@
Format: <integer>
sonypi.*= [HW] Sony Programmable I/O Control Device driver
- See Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt
+ See Documentation/laptops/sonypi.rst
spectre_v2= [X86] Control mitigation of Spectre variant 2
(indirect branch speculation) vulnerability.
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt b/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.rst
similarity index 84%
rename from Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.rst
index 5f2858712aa0..95176321a25a 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/asus-laptop.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
+==================
Asus Laptop Extras
+==================
Version 0.1
+
August 6, 2009
Corentin Chary <corentincj@iksaif.net>
@@ -10,11 +13,12 @@ http://acpi4asus.sf.net/
It may also support some MEDION, JVC or VICTOR laptops (such as MEDION 9675 or
VICTOR XP7210 for example). It makes all the extra buttons generate input
events (like keyboards).
+
On some models adds support for changing the display brightness and output,
switching the LCD backlight on and off, and most importantly, allows you to
blink those fancy LEDs intended for reporting mail and wireless status.
-This driver supercedes the old asus_acpi driver.
+This driver supersedes the old asus_acpi driver.
Requirements
------------
@@ -49,7 +53,7 @@ Usage
see some lines like this :
Asus Laptop Extras version 0.42
- L2D model detected.
+ - L2D model detected.
If it is not the output you have on your laptop, send it (and the laptop's
DSDT) to me.
@@ -68,9 +72,12 @@ Usage
LEDs
----
- You can modify LEDs be echoing values to /sys/class/leds/asus::*/brightness :
+ You can modify LEDs be echoing values to `/sys/class/leds/asus/*/brightness`::
+
echo 1 > /sys/class/leds/asus::mail/brightness
+
will switch the mail LED on.
+
You can also know if they are on/off by reading their content and use
kernel triggers like disk-activity or heartbeat.
@@ -81,7 +88,7 @@ Backlight
/sys/class/backlight/asus-laptop/. Brightness Values are between 0 and 15.
Wireless devices
----------------
+----------------
You can turn the internal Bluetooth adapter on/off with the bluetooth entry
(only on models with Bluetooth). This usually controls the associated LED.
@@ -93,18 +100,20 @@ Display switching
Note: the display switching code is currently considered EXPERIMENTAL.
Switching works for the following models:
- L3800C
- A2500H
- L5800C
- M5200N
- W1000N (albeit with some glitches)
- M6700R
- A6JC
- F3J
+
+ - L3800C
+ - A2500H
+ - L5800C
+ - M5200N
+ - W1000N (albeit with some glitches)
+ - M6700R
+ - A6JC
+ - F3J
Switching doesn't work for the following:
- M3700N
- L2X00D (locks the laptop under certain conditions)
+
+ - M3700N
+ - L2X00D (locks the laptop under certain conditions)
To switch the displays, echo values from 0 to 15 to
/sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/display. The significance of those values
@@ -113,48 +122,51 @@ Display switching
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
| Bin | Val | DVI | TV | CRT | LCD |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0000 + 0 + + + + +
+ | 0000 | 0 | | | | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0001 + 1 + + + + X +
+ | 0001 | 1 | | | | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0010 + 2 + + + X + +
+ | 0010 | 2 | | | X | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0011 + 3 + + + X + X +
+ | 0011 | 3 | | | X | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0100 + 4 + + X + + +
+ | 0100 | 4 | | X | | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0101 + 5 + + X + + X +
+ | 0101 | 5 | | X | | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0110 + 6 + + X + X + +
+ | 0110 | 6 | | X | X | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 0111 + 7 + + X + X + X +
+ | 0111 | 7 | | X | X | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1000 + 8 + X + + + +
+ | 1000 | 8 | X | | | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1001 + 9 + X + + + X +
+ | 1001 | 9 | X | | | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1010 + 10 + X + + X + +
+ | 1010 | 10 | X | | X | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1011 + 11 + X + + X + X +
+ | 1011 | 11 | X | | X | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1100 + 12 + X + X + + +
+ | 1100 | 12 | X | X | | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1101 + 13 + X + X + + X +
+ | 1101 | 13 | X | X | | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1110 + 14 + X + X + X + +
+ | 1110 | 14 | X | X | X | |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
- + 1111 + 15 + X + X + X + X +
+ | 1111 | 15 | X | X | X | X |
+-------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+
In most cases, the appropriate displays must be plugged in for the above
combinations to work. TV-Out may need to be initialized at boot time.
Debugging:
+
1) Check whether the Fn+F8 key:
+
a) does not lock the laptop (try a boot with noapic / nolapic if it does)
b) generates events (0x6n, where n is the value corresponding to the
configuration above)
c) actually works
+
Record the disp value at every configuration.
2) Echo values from 0 to 15 to /sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/display.
Record its value, note any change. If nothing changes, try a broader range,
@@ -164,7 +176,7 @@ Display switching
Note: on some machines (e.g. L3C), after the module has been loaded, only 0x6n
events are generated and no actual switching occurs. In such a case, a line
- like:
+ like::
echo $((10#$arg-60)) > /sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/display
@@ -180,15 +192,16 @@ LED display
several items of information.
LED display works for the following models:
- W1000N
- W1J
- To control the LED display, use the following :
+ - W1000N
+ - W1J
+
+ To control the LED display, use the following::
echo 0x0T000DDD > /sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/
where T control the 3 letters display, and DDD the 3 digits display,
- according to the tables below.
+ according to the tables below::
DDD (digits)
000 to 999 = display digits
@@ -208,8 +221,8 @@ LED display
For example "echo 0x01000001 >/sys/devices/platform/asus-laptop/ledd"
would display "DVD001".
-Driver options:
----------------
+Driver options
+--------------
Options can be passed to the asus-laptop driver using the standard
module argument syntax (<param>=<value> when passing the option to the
@@ -219,6 +232,7 @@ Driver options:
wapf: WAPF defines the behavior of the Fn+Fx wlan key
The significance of values is yet to be found, but
most of the time:
+
- 0x0 should do nothing
- 0x1 should allow to control the device with Fn+Fx key.
- 0x4 should send an ACPI event (0x88) while pressing the Fn+Fx key
@@ -237,7 +251,7 @@ Unsupported models
- ASUS L7300G
- ASUS L8400
-Patches, Errors, Questions:
+Patches, Errors, Questions
--------------------------
I appreciate any success or failure
@@ -253,5 +267,5 @@ Patches, Errors, Questions:
Any other comments or patches are also more than welcome.
acpi4asus-user@lists.sourceforge.net
+
http://sourceforge.net/projects/acpi4asus
-
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt b/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.rst
similarity index 91%
rename from Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.rst
index 0e6ba2663834..e97c5f78d8c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/disk-shock-protection.rst
@@ -1,17 +1,18 @@
+==========================
Hard disk shock protection
==========================
Author: Elias Oltmanns <eo@nebensachen.de>
+
Last modified: 2008-10-03
-0. Contents
------------
+.. 0. Contents
-1. Intro
-2. The interface
-3. References
-4. CREDITS
+ 1. Intro
+ 2. The interface
+ 3. References
+ 4. CREDITS
1. Intro
@@ -36,8 +37,8 @@ that).
----------------
For each ATA device, the kernel exports the file
-block/*/device/unload_heads in sysfs (here assumed to be mounted under
-/sys). Access to /sys/block/*/device/unload_heads is denied with
+`block/*/device/unload_heads` in sysfs (here assumed to be mounted under
+/sys). Access to `/sys/block/*/device/unload_heads` is denied with
-EOPNOTSUPP if the device does not support the unload feature.
Otherwise, writing an integer value to this file will take the heads
of the respective drive off the platter and block all I/O operations
@@ -54,18 +55,18 @@ cancel a previously set timeout and resume normal operation
immediately by specifying a timeout of 0. Values below -2 are rejected
with -EINVAL (see below for the special meaning of -1 and -2). If the
timeout specified for a recent head park request has not yet expired,
-reading from /sys/block/*/device/unload_heads will report the number
+reading from `/sys/block/*/device/unload_heads` will report the number
of milliseconds remaining until normal operation will be resumed;
otherwise, reading the unload_heads attribute will return 0.
For example, do the following in order to park the heads of drive
-/dev/sda and stop all I/O operations for five seconds:
+/dev/sda and stop all I/O operations for five seconds::
-# echo 5000 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
+ # echo 5000 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
-A simple
+A simple::
-# cat /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
+ # cat /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
will show you how many milliseconds are left before normal operation
will be resumed.
@@ -112,9 +113,9 @@ unload_heads attribute. If you know that your device really does
support the unload feature (for instance, because the vendor of your
laptop or the hard drive itself told you so), then you can tell the
kernel to enable the usage of this feature for that drive by writing
-the special value -1 to the unload_heads attribute:
+the special value -1 to the unload_heads attribute::
-# echo -1 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
+ # echo -1 > /sys/block/sda/device/unload_heads
will enable the feature for /dev/sda, and giving -2 instead of -1 will
disable it again.
@@ -135,6 +136,7 @@ for use. Please feel free to add projects that have been the victims
of my ignorance.
- http://www.thinkwiki.org/wiki/HDAPS
+
See this page for information about Linux support of the hard disk
active protection system as implemented in IBM/Lenovo Thinkpads.
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/index.rst b/Documentation/laptops/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..001a30910d09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,17 @@
+:orphan:
+
+==============
+Laptop Drivers
+==============
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ asus-laptop
+ disk-shock-protection
+ laptop-mode
+ lg-laptop
+ sony-laptop
+ sonypi
+ thinkpad-acpi
+ toshiba_haps
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt b/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.rst
similarity index 62%
rename from Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.rst
index 1c707fc9b141..c984c4262f2e 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,11 @@
+===============================================
How to conserve battery power using laptop-mode
------------------------------------------------
+===============================================
Document Author: Bart Samwel (bart@samwel.tk)
+
Date created: January 2, 2004
+
Last modified: December 06, 2004
Introduction
@@ -12,17 +15,16 @@ Laptop mode is used to minimize the time that the hard disk needs to be spun up,
to conserve battery power on laptops. It has been reported to cause significant
power savings.
-Contents
---------
+.. Contents
-* Introduction
-* Installation
-* Caveats
-* The Details
-* Tips & Tricks
-* Control script
-* ACPI integration
-* Monitoring tool
+ * Introduction
+ * Installation
+ * Caveats
+ * The Details
+ * Tips & Tricks
+ * Control script
+ * ACPI integration
+ * Monitoring tool
Installation
@@ -33,7 +35,7 @@ or anything. Simply install all the files included in this document, and
laptop mode will automatically be started when you're on battery. For
your convenience, a tarball containing an installer can be downloaded at:
-http://www.samwel.tk/laptop_mode/laptop_mode/
+ http://www.samwel.tk/laptop_mode/laptop_mode/
To configure laptop mode, you need to edit the configuration file, which is
located in /etc/default/laptop-mode on Debian-based systems, or in
@@ -209,7 +211,7 @@ Tips & Tricks
this on powerbooks too. I hope that this is a piece of information that
might be useful to the Laptop Mode patch or its users."
-* In syslog.conf, you can prefix entries with a dash ``-'' to omit syncing the
+* In syslog.conf, you can prefix entries with a dash `-` to omit syncing the
file after every logging. When you're using laptop-mode and your disk doesn't
spin down, this is a likely culprit.
@@ -233,83 +235,82 @@ configuration file
It should be installed as /etc/default/laptop-mode on Debian, and as
/etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode on Red Hat, SUSE, Mandrake, and other work-alikes.
---------------------CONFIG FILE BEGIN-------------------------------------------
-# Maximum time, in seconds, of hard drive spindown time that you are
-# comfortable with. Worst case, it's possible that you could lose this
-# amount of work if your battery fails you while in laptop mode.
-#MAX_AGE=600
+Config file::
-# Automatically disable laptop mode when the number of minutes of battery
-# that you have left goes below this threshold.
-MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES=10
+ # Maximum time, in seconds, of hard drive spindown time that you are
+ # comfortable with. Worst case, it's possible that you could lose this
+ # amount of work if your battery fails you while in laptop mode.
+ #MAX_AGE=600
-# Read-ahead, in 512-byte sectors. You can spin down the disk while playing MP3/OGG
-# by setting the disk readahead to 8MB (READAHEAD=16384). Effectively, the disk
-# will read a complete MP3 at once, and will then spin down while the MP3/OGG is
-# playing.
-#READAHEAD=4096
+ # Automatically disable laptop mode when the number of minutes of battery
+ # that you have left goes below this threshold.
+ MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES=10
-# Shall we remount journaled fs. with appropriate commit interval? (1=yes)
-#DO_REMOUNTS=1
+ # Read-ahead, in 512-byte sectors. You can spin down the disk while playing MP3/OGG
+ # by setting the disk readahead to 8MB (READAHEAD=16384). Effectively, the disk
+ # will read a complete MP3 at once, and will then spin down while the MP3/OGG is
+ # playing.
+ #READAHEAD=4096
-# And shall we add the "noatime" option to that as well? (1=yes)
-#DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME=1
+ # Shall we remount journaled fs. with appropriate commit interval? (1=yes)
+ #DO_REMOUNTS=1
-# Dirty synchronous ratio. At this percentage of dirty pages the process
-# which
-# calls write() does its own writeback
-#DIRTY_RATIO=40
+ # And shall we add the "noatime" option to that as well? (1=yes)
+ #DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME=1
-#
-# Allowed dirty background ratio, in percent. Once DIRTY_RATIO has been
-# exceeded, the kernel will wake flusher threads which will then reduce the
-# amount of dirty memory to dirty_background_ratio. Set this nice and low,
-# so once some writeout has commenced, we do a lot of it.
-#
-#DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=5
+ # Dirty synchronous ratio. At this percentage of dirty pages the process
+ # which
+ # calls write() does its own writeback
+ #DIRTY_RATIO=40
-# kernel default dirty buffer age
-#DEF_AGE=30
-#DEF_UPDATE=5
-#DEF_DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=10
-#DEF_DIRTY_RATIO=40
-#DEF_XFS_AGE_BUFFER=15
-#DEF_XFS_SYNC_INTERVAL=30
-#DEF_XFS_BUFD_INTERVAL=1
+ #
+ # Allowed dirty background ratio, in percent. Once DIRTY_RATIO has been
+ # exceeded, the kernel will wake flusher threads which will then reduce the
+ # amount of dirty memory to dirty_background_ratio. Set this nice and low,
+ # so once some writeout has commenced, we do a lot of it.
+ #
+ #DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=5
-# This must be adjusted manually to the value of HZ in the running kernel
-# on 2.4, until the XFS people change their 2.4 external interfaces to work in
-# centisecs. This can be automated, but it's a work in progress that still
-# needs# some fixes. On 2.6 kernels, XFS uses USER_HZ instead of HZ for
-# external interfaces, and that is currently always set to 100. So you don't
-# need to change this on 2.6.
-#XFS_HZ=100
+ # kernel default dirty buffer age
+ #DEF_AGE=30
+ #DEF_UPDATE=5
+ #DEF_DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=10
+ #DEF_DIRTY_RATIO=40
+ #DEF_XFS_AGE_BUFFER=15
+ #DEF_XFS_SYNC_INTERVAL=30
+ #DEF_XFS_BUFD_INTERVAL=1
-# Should the maximum CPU frequency be adjusted down while on battery?
-# Requires CPUFreq to be setup.
-# See Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpufreq.rst for more info
-#DO_CPU=0
+ # This must be adjusted manually to the value of HZ in the running kernel
+ # on 2.4, until the XFS people change their 2.4 external interfaces to work in
+ # centisecs. This can be automated, but it's a work in progress that still
+ # needs# some fixes. On 2.6 kernels, XFS uses USER_HZ instead of HZ for
+ # external interfaces, and that is currently always set to 100. So you don't
+ # need to change this on 2.6.
+ #XFS_HZ=100
-# When on battery what is the maximum CPU speed that the system should
-# use? Legal values are "slowest" for the slowest speed that your
-# CPU is able to operate at, or a value listed in:
-# /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/scaling_available_frequencies
-# Only applicable if DO_CPU=1.
-#CPU_MAXFREQ=slowest
+ # Should the maximum CPU frequency be adjusted down while on battery?
+ # Requires CPUFreq to be setup.
+ # See Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpufreq.rst for more info
+ #DO_CPU=0
-# Idle timeout for your hard drive (man hdparm for valid values, -S option)
-# Default is 2 hours on AC (AC_HD=244) and 20 seconds for battery (BATT_HD=4).
-#AC_HD=244
-#BATT_HD=4
+ # When on battery what is the maximum CPU speed that the system should
+ # use? Legal values are "slowest" for the slowest speed that your
+ # CPU is able to operate at, or a value listed in:
+ # /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu0/cpufreq/scaling_available_frequencies
+ # Only applicable if DO_CPU=1.
+ #CPU_MAXFREQ=slowest
-# The drives for which to adjust the idle timeout. Separate them by a space,
-# e.g. HD="/dev/hda /dev/hdb".
-#HD="/dev/hda"
+ # Idle timeout for your hard drive (man hdparm for valid values, -S option)
+ # Default is 2 hours on AC (AC_HD=244) and 20 seconds for battery (BATT_HD=4).
+ #AC_HD=244
+ #BATT_HD=4
-# Set the spindown timeout on a hard drive?
-#DO_HD=1
+ # The drives for which to adjust the idle timeout. Separate them by a space,
+ # e.g. HD="/dev/hda /dev/hdb".
+ #HD="/dev/hda"
---------------------CONFIG FILE END---------------------------------------------
+ # Set the spindown timeout on a hard drive?
+ #DO_HD=1
Control script
@@ -318,125 +319,126 @@ Control script
Please note that this control script works for the Linux 2.4 and 2.6 series (thanks
to Kiko Piris).
---------------------CONTROL SCRIPT BEGIN----------------------------------------
-#!/bin/bash
+Control script::
-# start or stop laptop_mode, best run by a power management daemon when
-# ac gets connected/disconnected from a laptop
-#
-# install as /sbin/laptop_mode
-#
-# Contributors to this script: Kiko Piris
-# Bart Samwel
-# Micha Feigin
-# Andrew Morton
-# Herve Eychenne
-# Dax Kelson
-#
-# Original Linux 2.4 version by: Jens Axboe
+ #!/bin/bash
-#############################################################################
+ # start or stop laptop_mode, best run by a power management daemon when
+ # ac gets connected/disconnected from a laptop
+ #
+ # install as /sbin/laptop_mode
+ #
+ # Contributors to this script: Kiko Piris
+ # Bart Samwel
+ # Micha Feigin
+ # Andrew Morton
+ # Herve Eychenne
+ # Dax Kelson
+ #
+ # Original Linux 2.4 version by: Jens Axboe
-# Source config
-if [ -f /etc/default/laptop-mode ] ; then
+ #############################################################################
+
+ # Source config
+ if [ -f /etc/default/laptop-mode ] ; then
# Debian
. /etc/default/laptop-mode
-elif [ -f /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode ] ; then
+ elif [ -f /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode ] ; then
# Others
- . /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode
-fi
+ . /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode
+ fi
-# Don't raise an error if the config file is incomplete
-# set defaults instead:
+ # Don't raise an error if the config file is incomplete
+ # set defaults instead:
-# Maximum time, in seconds, of hard drive spindown time that you are
-# comfortable with. Worst case, it's possible that you could lose this
-# amount of work if your battery fails you while in laptop mode.
-MAX_AGE=${MAX_AGE:-'600'}
+ # Maximum time, in seconds, of hard drive spindown time that you are
+ # comfortable with. Worst case, it's possible that you could lose this
+ # amount of work if your battery fails you while in laptop mode.
+ MAX_AGE=${MAX_AGE:-'600'}
-# Read-ahead, in kilobytes
-READAHEAD=${READAHEAD:-'4096'}
+ # Read-ahead, in kilobytes
+ READAHEAD=${READAHEAD:-'4096'}
-# Shall we remount journaled fs. with appropriate commit interval? (1=yes)
-DO_REMOUNTS=${DO_REMOUNTS:-'1'}
+ # Shall we remount journaled fs. with appropriate commit interval? (1=yes)
+ DO_REMOUNTS=${DO_REMOUNTS:-'1'}
-# And shall we add the "noatime" option to that as well? (1=yes)
-DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME=${DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME:-'1'}
+ # And shall we add the "noatime" option to that as well? (1=yes)
+ DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME=${DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME:-'1'}
-# Shall we adjust the idle timeout on a hard drive?
-DO_HD=${DO_HD:-'1'}
+ # Shall we adjust the idle timeout on a hard drive?
+ DO_HD=${DO_HD:-'1'}
-# Adjust idle timeout on which hard drive?
-HD="${HD:-'/dev/hda'}"
+ # Adjust idle timeout on which hard drive?
+ HD="${HD:-'/dev/hda'}"
-# spindown time for HD (hdparm -S values)
-AC_HD=${AC_HD:-'244'}
-BATT_HD=${BATT_HD:-'4'}
+ # spindown time for HD (hdparm -S values)
+ AC_HD=${AC_HD:-'244'}
+ BATT_HD=${BATT_HD:-'4'}
-# Dirty synchronous ratio. At this percentage of dirty pages the process which
-# calls write() does its own writeback
-DIRTY_RATIO=${DIRTY_RATIO:-'40'}
+ # Dirty synchronous ratio. At this percentage of dirty pages the process which
+ # calls write() does its own writeback
+ DIRTY_RATIO=${DIRTY_RATIO:-'40'}
-# cpu frequency scaling
-# See Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpufreq.rst for more info
-DO_CPU=${CPU_MANAGE:-'0'}
-CPU_MAXFREQ=${CPU_MAXFREQ:-'slowest'}
+ # cpu frequency scaling
+ # See Documentation/admin-guide/pm/cpufreq.rst for more info
+ DO_CPU=${CPU_MANAGE:-'0'}
+ CPU_MAXFREQ=${CPU_MAXFREQ:-'slowest'}
-#
-# Allowed dirty background ratio, in percent. Once DIRTY_RATIO has been
-# exceeded, the kernel will wake flusher threads which will then reduce the
-# amount of dirty memory to dirty_background_ratio. Set this nice and low,
-# so once some writeout has commenced, we do a lot of it.
-#
-DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=${DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO:-'5'}
+ #
+ # Allowed dirty background ratio, in percent. Once DIRTY_RATIO has been
+ # exceeded, the kernel will wake flusher threads which will then reduce the
+ # amount of dirty memory to dirty_background_ratio. Set this nice and low,
+ # so once some writeout has commenced, we do a lot of it.
+ #
+ DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=${DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO:-'5'}
-# kernel default dirty buffer age
-DEF_AGE=${DEF_AGE:-'30'}
-DEF_UPDATE=${DEF_UPDATE:-'5'}
-DEF_DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=${DEF_DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO:-'10'}
-DEF_DIRTY_RATIO=${DEF_DIRTY_RATIO:-'40'}
-DEF_XFS_AGE_BUFFER=${DEF_XFS_AGE_BUFFER:-'15'}
-DEF_XFS_SYNC_INTERVAL=${DEF_XFS_SYNC_INTERVAL:-'30'}
-DEF_XFS_BUFD_INTERVAL=${DEF_XFS_BUFD_INTERVAL:-'1'}
+ # kernel default dirty buffer age
+ DEF_AGE=${DEF_AGE:-'30'}
+ DEF_UPDATE=${DEF_UPDATE:-'5'}
+ DEF_DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO=${DEF_DIRTY_BACKGROUND_RATIO:-'10'}
+ DEF_DIRTY_RATIO=${DEF_DIRTY_RATIO:-'40'}
+ DEF_XFS_AGE_BUFFER=${DEF_XFS_AGE_BUFFER:-'15'}
+ DEF_XFS_SYNC_INTERVAL=${DEF_XFS_SYNC_INTERVAL:-'30'}
+ DEF_XFS_BUFD_INTERVAL=${DEF_XFS_BUFD_INTERVAL:-'1'}
-# This must be adjusted manually to the value of HZ in the running kernel
-# on 2.4, until the XFS people change their 2.4 external interfaces to work in
-# centisecs. This can be automated, but it's a work in progress that still needs
-# some fixes. On 2.6 kernels, XFS uses USER_HZ instead of HZ for external
-# interfaces, and that is currently always set to 100. So you don't need to
-# change this on 2.6.
-XFS_HZ=${XFS_HZ:-'100'}
+ # This must be adjusted manually to the value of HZ in the running kernel
+ # on 2.4, until the XFS people change their 2.4 external interfaces to work in
+ # centisecs. This can be automated, but it's a work in progress that still needs
+ # some fixes. On 2.6 kernels, XFS uses USER_HZ instead of HZ for external
+ # interfaces, and that is currently always set to 100. So you don't need to
+ # change this on 2.6.
+ XFS_HZ=${XFS_HZ:-'100'}
-#############################################################################
+ #############################################################################
-KLEVEL="$(uname -r |
- {
+ KLEVEL="$(uname -r |
+ {
IFS='.' read a b c
echo $a.$b
}
-)"
-case "$KLEVEL" in
+ )"
+ case "$KLEVEL" in
"2.4"|"2.6")
;;
*)
echo "Unhandled kernel version: $KLEVEL ('uname -r' = '$(uname -r)')" >&2
exit 1
;;
-esac
+ esac
-if [ ! -e /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode ] ; then
+ if [ ! -e /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode ] ; then
echo "Kernel is not patched with laptop_mode patch." >&2
exit 1
-fi
+ fi
-if [ ! -w /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode ] ; then
+ if [ ! -w /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode ] ; then
echo "You do not have enough privileges to enable laptop_mode." >&2
exit 1
-fi
+ fi
-# Remove an option (the first parameter) of the form option=<number> from
-# a mount options string (the rest of the parameters).
-parse_mount_opts () {
+ # Remove an option (the first parameter) of the form option=<number> from
+ # a mount options string (the rest of the parameters).
+ parse_mount_opts () {
OPT="$1"
shift
echo ",$*," | sed \
@@ -444,11 +446,11 @@ parse_mount_opts () {
-e 's/,,*/,/g' \
-e 's/^,//' \
-e 's/,$//'
-}
+ }
-# Remove an option (the first parameter) without any arguments from
-# a mount option string (the rest of the parameters).
-parse_nonumber_mount_opts () {
+ # Remove an option (the first parameter) without any arguments from
+ # a mount option string (the rest of the parameters).
+ parse_nonumber_mount_opts () {
OPT="$1"
shift
echo ",$*," | sed \
@@ -456,20 +458,20 @@ parse_nonumber_mount_opts () {
-e 's/,,*/,/g' \
-e 's/^,//' \
-e 's/,$//'
-}
+ }
-# Find out the state of a yes/no option (e.g. "atime"/"noatime") in
-# fstab for a given filesystem, and use this state to replace the
-# value of the option in another mount options string. The device
-# is the first argument, the option name the second, and the default
-# value the third. The remainder is the mount options string.
-#
-# Example:
-# parse_yesno_opts_wfstab /dev/hda1 atime atime defaults,noatime
-#
-# If fstab contains, say, "rw" for this filesystem, then the result
-# will be "defaults,atime".
-parse_yesno_opts_wfstab () {
+ # Find out the state of a yes/no option (e.g. "atime"/"noatime") in
+ # fstab for a given filesystem, and use this state to replace the
+ # value of the option in another mount options string. The device
+ # is the first argument, the option name the second, and the default
+ # value the third. The remainder is the mount options string.
+ #
+ # Example:
+ # parse_yesno_opts_wfstab /dev/hda1 atime atime defaults,noatime
+ #
+ # If fstab contains, say, "rw" for this filesystem, then the result
+ # will be "defaults,atime".
+ parse_yesno_opts_wfstab () {
L_DEV="$1"
OPT="$2"
DEF_OPT="$3"
@@ -491,21 +493,21 @@ parse_yesno_opts_wfstab () {
# option not specified in fstab -- choose the default.
echo "$PARSEDOPTS1,$DEF_OPT"
fi
-}
+ }
-# Find out the state of a numbered option (e.g. "commit=NNN") in
-# fstab for a given filesystem, and use this state to replace the
-# value of the option in another mount options string. The device
-# is the first argument, and the option name the second. The
-# remainder is the mount options string in which the replacement
-# must be done.
-#
-# Example:
-# parse_mount_opts_wfstab /dev/hda1 commit defaults,commit=7
-#
-# If fstab contains, say, "commit=3,rw" for this filesystem, then the
-# result will be "rw,commit=3".
-parse_mount_opts_wfstab () {
+ # Find out the state of a numbered option (e.g. "commit=NNN") in
+ # fstab for a given filesystem, and use this state to replace the
+ # value of the option in another mount options string. The device
+ # is the first argument, and the option name the second. The
+ # remainder is the mount options string in which the replacement
+ # must be done.
+ #
+ # Example:
+ # parse_mount_opts_wfstab /dev/hda1 commit defaults,commit=7
+ #
+ # If fstab contains, say, "commit=3,rw" for this filesystem, then the
+ # result will be "rw,commit=3".
+ parse_mount_opts_wfstab () {
L_DEV="$1"
OPT="$2"
shift 2
@@ -523,9 +525,9 @@ parse_mount_opts_wfstab () {
# option not specified in fstab: set it to 0
echo "$PARSEDOPTS1,$OPT=0"
fi
-}
+ }
-deduce_fstype () {
+ deduce_fstype () {
MP="$1"
# My root filesystem unfortunately has
# type "unknown" in /etc/mtab. If we encounter
@@ -538,13 +540,13 @@ deduce_fstype () {
exit 0
fi
done
-}
+ }
-if [ $DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME -eq 1 ] ; then
+ if [ $DO_REMOUNT_NOATIME -eq 1 ] ; then
NOATIME_OPT=",noatime"
-fi
+ fi
-case "$1" in
+ case "$1" in
start)
AGE=$((100*$MAX_AGE))
XFS_AGE=$(($XFS_HZ*$MAX_AGE))
@@ -687,10 +689,9 @@ case "$1" in
exit 1
;;
-esac
+ esac
-exit 0
---------------------CONTROL SCRIPT END------------------------------------------
+ exit 0
ACPI integration
@@ -701,78 +702,76 @@ kick off the laptop_mode script and run hdparm. The part that
automatically disables laptop mode when the battery is low was
written by Jan Topinski.
------------------/etc/acpi/events/ac_adapter BEGIN------------------------------
-event=ac_adapter
-action=/etc/acpi/actions/ac.sh %e
-----------------/etc/acpi/events/ac_adapter END---------------------------------
+/etc/acpi/events/ac_adapter::
+ event=ac_adapter
+ action=/etc/acpi/actions/ac.sh %e
------------------/etc/acpi/events/battery BEGIN---------------------------------
-event=battery.*
-action=/etc/acpi/actions/battery.sh %e
-----------------/etc/acpi/events/battery END------------------------------------
+/etc/acpi/events/battery::
+ event=battery.*
+ action=/etc/acpi/actions/battery.sh %e
-----------------/etc/acpi/actions/ac.sh BEGIN-----------------------------------
-#!/bin/bash
+/etc/acpi/actions/ac.sh::
-# ac on/offline event handler
+ #!/bin/bash
-status=`awk '/^state: / { print $2 }' /proc/acpi/ac_adapter/$2/state`
+ # ac on/offline event handler
-case $status in
- "on-line")
- /sbin/laptop_mode stop
- exit 0
- ;;
- "off-line")
- /sbin/laptop_mode start
- exit 0
- ;;
-esac
----------------------------/etc/acpi/actions/ac.sh END--------------------------
+ status=`awk '/^state: / { print $2 }' /proc/acpi/ac_adapter/$2/state`
+ case $status in
+ "on-line")
+ /sbin/laptop_mode stop
+ exit 0
+ ;;
+ "off-line")
+ /sbin/laptop_mode start
+ exit 0
+ ;;
+ esac
----------------------------/etc/acpi/actions/battery.sh BEGIN-------------------
-#! /bin/bash
-# Automatically disable laptop mode when the battery almost runs out.
+/etc/acpi/actions/battery.sh::
-BATT_INFO=/proc/acpi/battery/$2/state
+ #! /bin/bash
-if [[ -f /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode ]]
-then
- LM=`cat /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode`
- if [[ $LM -gt 0 ]]
- then
- if [[ -f $BATT_INFO ]]
+ # Automatically disable laptop mode when the battery almost runs out.
+
+ BATT_INFO=/proc/acpi/battery/$2/state
+
+ if [[ -f /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode ]]
+ then
+ LM=`cat /proc/sys/vm/laptop_mode`
+ if [[ $LM -gt 0 ]]
then
- # Source the config file only now that we know we need
- if [ -f /etc/default/laptop-mode ] ; then
- # Debian
- . /etc/default/laptop-mode
- elif [ -f /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode ] ; then
- # Others
- . /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode
- fi
- MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES=${MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES:-'10'}
+ if [[ -f $BATT_INFO ]]
+ then
+ # Source the config file only now that we know we need
+ if [ -f /etc/default/laptop-mode ] ; then
+ # Debian
+ . /etc/default/laptop-mode
+ elif [ -f /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode ] ; then
+ # Others
+ . /etc/sysconfig/laptop-mode
+ fi
+ MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES=${MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES:-'10'}
- ACTION="`cat $BATT_INFO | grep charging | cut -c 26-`"
- if [[ ACTION -eq "discharging" ]]
- then
- PRESENT_RATE=`cat $BATT_INFO | grep "present rate:" | sed "s/.* \([0-9][0-9]* \).*/\1/" `
- REMAINING=`cat $BATT_INFO | grep "remaining capacity:" | sed "s/.* \([0-9][0-9]* \).*/\1/" `
- fi
- if (($REMAINING * 60 / $PRESENT_RATE < $MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES))
- then
- /sbin/laptop_mode stop
- fi
- else
- logger -p daemon.warning "You are using laptop mode and your battery interface $BATT_INFO is missing. This may lead to loss of data when the battery runs out. Check kernel ACPI support and /proc/acpi/battery folder, and edit /etc/acpi/battery.sh to set BATT_INFO to the correct path."
+ ACTION="`cat $BATT_INFO | grep charging | cut -c 26-`"
+ if [[ ACTION -eq "discharging" ]]
+ then
+ PRESENT_RATE=`cat $BATT_INFO | grep "present rate:" | sed "s/.* \([0-9][0-9]* \).*/\1/" `
+ REMAINING=`cat $BATT_INFO | grep "remaining capacity:" | sed "s/.* \([0-9][0-9]* \).*/\1/" `
+ fi
+ if (($REMAINING * 60 / $PRESENT_RATE < $MINIMUM_BATTERY_MINUTES))
+ then
+ /sbin/laptop_mode stop
+ fi
+ else
+ logger -p daemon.warning "You are using laptop mode and your battery interface $BATT_INFO is missing. This may lead to loss of data when the battery runs out. Check kernel ACPI support and /proc/acpi/battery folder, and edit /etc/acpi/battery.sh to set BATT_INFO to the correct path."
+ fi
fi
- fi
-fi
----------------------------/etc/acpi/actions/battery.sh END--------------------
+ fi
Monitoring tool
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt b/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.rst
similarity index 85%
rename from Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.rst
index 978b1e615155..9edcc7f6612f 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
+=========================================
Sony Notebook Control Driver (SNC) Readme
------------------------------------------
- Copyright (C) 2004- 2005 Stelian Pop <stelian@popies.net>
- Copyright (C) 2007 Mattia Dongili <malattia@linux.it>
+=========================================
+
+ - Copyright (C) 2004- 2005 Stelian Pop <stelian@popies.net>
+ - Copyright (C) 2007 Mattia Dongili <malattia@linux.it>
This mini-driver drives the SNC and SPIC device present in the ACPI BIOS of the
Sony Vaio laptops. This driver mixes both devices functions under the same
@@ -10,6 +12,7 @@ obsoleted by sony-laptop now.
Fn keys (hotkeys):
------------------
+
Some models report hotkeys through the SNC or SPIC devices, such events are
reported both through the ACPI subsystem as acpi events and through the INPUT
subsystem. See the logs of /proc/bus/input/devices to find out what those
@@ -28,11 +31,14 @@ If your laptop model supports it, you will find sysfs files in the
/sys/class/backlight/sony/
directory. You will be able to query and set the current screen
brightness:
+
+ ====================== =========================================
brightness get/set screen brightness (an integer
between 0 and 7)
actual_brightness reading from this file will query the HW
to get real brightness value
max_brightness the maximum brightness value
+ ====================== =========================================
Platform specific:
@@ -45,6 +51,8 @@ You then read/write integer values from/to those files by using
standard UNIX tools.
The files are:
+
+ ====================== ==========================================
brightness_default screen brightness which will be set
when the laptop will be rebooted
cdpower power on/off the internal CD drive
@@ -53,21 +61,39 @@ The files are:
(only in debug mode)
bluetoothpower power on/off the internal bluetooth device
fanspeed get/set the fan speed
+ ====================== ==========================================
Note that some files may be missing if they are not supported
by your particular laptop model.
-Example usage:
+Example usage::
+
# echo "1" > /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/brightness_default
-sets the lowest screen brightness for the next and later reboots,
+
+sets the lowest screen brightness for the next and later reboots
+
+::
+
# echo "8" > /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/brightness_default
-sets the highest screen brightness for the next and later reboots,
+
+sets the highest screen brightness for the next and later reboots
+
+::
+
# cat /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/brightness_default
-retrieves the value.
+
+retrieves the value
+
+::
# echo "0" > /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/audiopower
-powers off the sound card,
+
+powers off the sound card
+
+::
+
# echo "1" > /sys/devices/platform/sony-laptop/audiopower
+
powers on the sound card.
@@ -76,7 +102,8 @@ RFkill control:
More recent Vaio models expose a consistent set of ACPI methods to
control radio frequency emitting devices. If you are a lucky owner of
such a laptop you will find the necessary rfkill devices under
-/sys/class/rfkill. Check those starting with sony-* in
+/sys/class/rfkill. Check those starting with sony-* in::
+
# grep . /sys/class/rfkill/*/{state,name}
@@ -88,26 +115,29 @@ you are not afraid of any side effects doing strange things with
your ACPI BIOS could have on your laptop), load the driver and
pass the option 'debug=1'.
-REPEAT: DON'T DO THIS IF YOU DON'T LIKE RISKY BUSINESS.
+REPEAT:
+ **DON'T DO THIS IF YOU DON'T LIKE RISKY BUSINESS.**
In your kernel logs you will find the list of all ACPI methods
the SNC device has on your laptop.
* For new models you will see a long list of meaningless method names,
-reading the DSDT table source should reveal that:
+ reading the DSDT table source should reveal that:
+
(1) the SNC device uses an internal capability lookup table
(2) SN00 is used to find values in the lookup table
(3) SN06 and SN07 are used to call into the real methods based on
offsets you can obtain iterating the table using SN00
(4) SN02 used to enable events.
+
Some values in the capability lookup table are more or less known, see
the code for all sony_call_snc_handle calls, others are more obscure.
* For old models you can see the GCDP/GCDP methods used to pwer on/off
-the CD drive, but there are others and they are usually different from
-model to model.
+ the CD drive, but there are others and they are usually different from
+ model to model.
-I HAVE NO IDEA WHAT THOSE METHODS DO.
+**I HAVE NO IDEA WHAT THOSE METHODS DO.**
The sony-laptop driver creates, for some of those methods (the most
current ones found on several Vaio models), an entry under
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/sonypi.rst
similarity index 87%
rename from Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/sonypi.rst
index 606bdb9ce036..2a1975ed7ee4 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/sonypi.rst
@@ -1,11 +1,13 @@
+==================================================
Sony Programmable I/O Control Device Driver Readme
---------------------------------------------------
- Copyright (C) 2001-2004 Stelian Pop <stelian@popies.net>
- Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Alcôve <www.alcove.com>
- Copyright (C) 2001 Michael Ashley <m.ashley@unsw.edu.au>
- Copyright (C) 2001 Junichi Morita <jun1m@mars.dti.ne.jp>
- Copyright (C) 2000 Takaya Kinjo <t-kinjo@tc4.so-net.ne.jp>
- Copyright (C) 2000 Andrew Tridgell <tridge@samba.org>
+==================================================
+
+ - Copyright (C) 2001-2004 Stelian Pop <stelian@popies.net>
+ - Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Alcôve <www.alcove.com>
+ - Copyright (C) 2001 Michael Ashley <m.ashley@unsw.edu.au>
+ - Copyright (C) 2001 Junichi Morita <jun1m@mars.dti.ne.jp>
+ - Copyright (C) 2000 Takaya Kinjo <t-kinjo@tc4.so-net.ne.jp>
+ - Copyright (C) 2000 Andrew Tridgell <tridge@samba.org>
This driver enables access to the Sony Programmable I/O Control Device which
can be found in many Sony Vaio laptops. Some newer Sony laptops (seems to be
@@ -14,6 +16,7 @@ sonypi device and are not supported at all by this driver.
It will give access (through a user space utility) to some events those laptops
generate, like:
+
- jogdial events (the small wheel on the side of Vaios)
- capture button events (only on Vaio Picturebook series)
- Fn keys
@@ -49,6 +52,7 @@ module argument syntax (<param>=<value> when passing the option to the
module or sonypi.<param>=<value> on the kernel boot line when sonypi is
statically linked into the kernel). Those options are:
+ =============== =======================================================
minor: minor number of the misc device /dev/sonypi,
default is -1 (automatic allocation, see /proc/misc
or kernel logs)
@@ -86,6 +90,8 @@ statically linked into the kernel). Those options are:
will be tried. You can use the following bits to
construct your own event mask (from
drivers/char/sonypi.h):
+
+ ======================== ======
SONYPI_JOGGER_MASK 0x0001
SONYPI_CAPTURE_MASK 0x0002
SONYPI_FNKEY_MASK 0x0004
@@ -100,22 +106,24 @@ statically linked into the kernel). Those options are:
SONYPI_MEMORYSTICK_MASK 0x0800
SONYPI_BATTERY_MASK 0x1000
SONYPI_WIRELESS_MASK 0x2000
+ ======================== ======
useinput: if set (which is the default) two input devices are
created, one which interprets the jogdial events as
mouse events, the other one which acts like a
keyboard reporting the pressing of the special keys.
+ =============== =======================================================
Module use:
-----------
In order to automatically load the sonypi module on use, you can put those
-lines a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/:
+lines a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/::
alias char-major-10-250 sonypi
options sonypi minor=250
-This supposes the use of minor 250 for the sonypi device:
+This supposes the use of minor 250 for the sonypi device::
# mknod /dev/sonypi c 10 250
@@ -148,5 +156,5 @@ Bugs:
http://www.acc.umu.se/~erikw/program/smartdimmer-0.1.tar.bz2
- since all development was done by reverse engineering, there is
- _absolutely no guarantee_ that this driver will not crash your
+ *absolutely no guarantee* that this driver will not crash your
laptop. Permanently.
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.rst
similarity index 89%
rename from Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.rst
index 75ef063622d2..19d52fc3c5e9 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.rst
@@ -1,12 +1,15 @@
- ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver
+===========================
+ThinkPad ACPI Extras Driver
+===========================
- Version 0.25
- October 16th, 2013
+Version 0.25
- Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net>
- Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br>
- http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/
+October 16th, 2013
+- Borislav Deianov <borislav@users.sf.net>
+- Henrique de Moraes Holschuh <hmh@hmh.eng.br>
+
+http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/
This is a Linux driver for the IBM and Lenovo ThinkPad laptops. It
supports various features of these laptops which are accessible
@@ -91,7 +94,8 @@ yet ready or stabilized, it is expected that this interface will change,
and any and all userspace programs must deal with it.
-Notes about the sysfs interface:
+Notes about the sysfs interface
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Unlike what was done with the procfs interface, correctness when talking
to the sysfs interfaces will be enforced, as will correctness in the
@@ -129,6 +133,7 @@ Driver version
--------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/driver
+
sysfs driver attribute: version
The driver name and version. No commands can be written to this file.
@@ -141,9 +146,13 @@ sysfs driver attribute: interface_version
Version of the thinkpad-acpi sysfs interface, as an unsigned long
(output in hex format: 0xAAAABBCC), where:
- AAAA - major revision
- BB - minor revision
- CC - bugfix revision
+
+ AAAA
+ - major revision
+ BB
+ - minor revision
+ CC
+ - bugfix revision
The sysfs interface version changelog for the driver can be found at the
end of this document. Changes to the sysfs interface done by the kernel
@@ -170,6 +179,7 @@ Hot keys
--------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey
+
sysfs device attribute: hotkey_*
In a ThinkPad, the ACPI HKEY handler is responsible for communicating
@@ -181,7 +191,7 @@ firmware will behave in many situations.
The driver enables the HKEY ("hot key") event reporting automatically
when loaded, and disables it when it is removed.
-The driver will report HKEY events in the following format:
+The driver will report HKEY events in the following format::
ibm/hotkey HKEY 00000080 0000xxxx
@@ -217,9 +227,10 @@ ThinkPads, it is still possible to support some extra hotkeys by
polling the "CMOS NVRAM" at least 10 times per second. The driver
attempts to enables this functionality automatically when required.
-procfs notes:
+procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
-The following commands can be written to the /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey file:
+The following commands can be written to the /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey file::
echo 0xffffffff > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- enable all hot keys
echo 0 > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- disable all possible hot keys
@@ -227,7 +238,7 @@ The following commands can be written to the /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey file:
echo reset > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- restore the recommended mask
The following commands have been deprecated and will cause the kernel
-to log a warning:
+to log a warning::
echo enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- does nothing
echo disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey -- returns an error
@@ -237,7 +248,8 @@ maintain maximum bug-to-bug compatibility, it does not report any masks,
nor does it allow one to manipulate the hot key mask when the firmware
does not support masks at all, even if NVRAM polling is in use.
-sysfs notes:
+sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
hotkey_bios_enabled:
DEPRECATED, WILL BE REMOVED SOON.
@@ -349,7 +361,8 @@ sysfs notes:
This attribute has poll()/select() support.
-input layer notes:
+input layer notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
A Hot key is mapped to a single input layer EV_KEY event, possibly
followed by an EV_MSC MSC_SCAN event that shall contain that key's scan
@@ -362,11 +375,13 @@ remapping KEY_UNKNOWN keys.
The events are available in an input device, with the following id:
- Bus: BUS_HOST
- vendor: 0x1014 (PCI_VENDOR_ID_IBM) or
+ ============== ==============================
+ Bus BUS_HOST
+ vendor 0x1014 (PCI_VENDOR_ID_IBM) or
0x17aa (PCI_VENDOR_ID_LENOVO)
- product: 0x5054 ("TP")
- version: 0x4101
+ product 0x5054 ("TP")
+ version 0x4101
+ ============== ==============================
The version will have its LSB incremented if the keymap changes in a
backwards-compatible way. The MSB shall always be 0x41 for this input
@@ -380,9 +395,10 @@ backwards-compatible change for this input device.
Thinkpad-acpi Hot Key event map (version 0x4101):
+======= ======= ============== ==============================================
ACPI Scan
event code Key Notes
-
+======= ======= ============== ==============================================
0x1001 0x00 FN+F1 -
0x1002 0x01 FN+F2 IBM: battery (rare)
@@ -426,7 +442,9 @@ event code Key Notes
or toggle screen expand
0x1009 0x08 FN+F9 -
- .. .. ..
+
+... ... ... ...
+
0x100B 0x0A FN+F11 -
0x100C 0x0B FN+F12 Sleep to disk. You are always
@@ -480,8 +498,11 @@ event code Key Notes
0x1018 0x17 THINKPAD ThinkPad/Access IBM/Lenovo key
0x1019 0x18 unknown
-.. .. ..
+
+... ... ...
+
0x1020 0x1F unknown
+======= ======= ============== ==============================================
The ThinkPad firmware does not allow one to differentiate when most hot
keys are pressed or released (either that, or we don't know how to, yet).
@@ -499,14 +520,17 @@ generate input device EV_KEY events.
In addition to the EV_KEY events, thinkpad-acpi may also issue EV_SW
events for switches:
+============== ==============================================
SW_RFKILL_ALL T60 and later hardware rfkill rocker switch
SW_TABLET_MODE Tablet ThinkPads HKEY events 0x5009 and 0x500A
+============== ==============================================
-Non hotkey ACPI HKEY event map:
--------------------------------
+Non hotkey ACPI HKEY event map
+------------------------------
Events that are never propagated by the driver:
+====== ==================================================
0x2304 System is waking up from suspend to undock
0x2305 System is waking up from suspend to eject bay
0x2404 System is waking up from hibernation to undock
@@ -519,10 +543,12 @@ Events that are never propagated by the driver:
0x6000 KEYBOARD: Numlock key pressed
0x6005 KEYBOARD: Fn key pressed (TO BE VERIFIED)
0x7000 Radio Switch may have changed state
+====== ==================================================
Events that are propagated by the driver to userspace:
+====== =====================================================
0x2313 ALARM: System is waking up from suspend because
the battery is nearly empty
0x2413 ALARM: System is waking up from hibernation because
@@ -544,6 +570,7 @@ Events that are propagated by the driver to userspace:
0x6040 Nvidia Optimus/AC adapter related (TO BE VERIFIED)
0x60C0 X1 Yoga 2016, Tablet mode status changed
0x60F0 Thermal Transformation changed (GMTS, Windows)
+====== =====================================================
Battery nearly empty alarms are a last resort attempt to get the
operating system to hibernate or shutdown cleanly (0x2313), or shutdown
@@ -562,7 +589,8 @@ cycle, or a system shutdown. Obviously, something is very wrong if this
happens.
-Brightness hotkey notes:
+Brightness hotkey notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Don't mess with the brightness hotkeys in a Thinkpad. If you want
notifications for OSD, use the sysfs backlight class event support.
@@ -579,7 +607,9 @@ Bluetooth
---------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
+
sysfs device attribute: bluetooth_enable (deprecated)
+
sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_bluetooth_sw"
This feature shows the presence and current state of a ThinkPad
@@ -588,22 +618,25 @@ Bluetooth device in the internal ThinkPad CDC slot.
If the ThinkPad supports it, the Bluetooth state is stored in NVRAM,
so it is kept across reboots and power-off.
-Procfs notes:
+Procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
-If Bluetooth is installed, the following commands can be used:
+If Bluetooth is installed, the following commands can be used::
echo enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
echo disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/bluetooth
-Sysfs notes:
+Sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
If the Bluetooth CDC card is installed, it can be enabled /
disabled through the "bluetooth_enable" thinkpad-acpi device
attribute, and its current status can also be queried.
enable:
- 0: disables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is disabled
- 1: enables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is enabled.
+
+ - 0: disables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is disabled
+ - 1: enables Bluetooth / Bluetooth is enabled.
Note: this interface has been superseded by the generic rfkill
class. It has been deprecated, and it will be removed in year
@@ -617,7 +650,7 @@ Video output control -- /proc/acpi/ibm/video
--------------------------------------------
This feature allows control over the devices used for video output -
-LCD, CRT or DVI (if available). The following commands are available:
+LCD, CRT or DVI (if available). The following commands are available::
echo lcd_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo lcd_disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
@@ -630,9 +663,10 @@ LCD, CRT or DVI (if available). The following commands are available:
echo expand_toggle > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
echo video_switch > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
-NOTE: Access to this feature is restricted to processes owning the
-CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability for safety reasons, as it can interact badly
-enough with some versions of X.org to crash it.
+NOTE:
+ Access to this feature is restricted to processes owning the
+ CAP_SYS_ADMIN capability for safety reasons, as it can interact badly
+ enough with some versions of X.org to crash it.
Each video output device can be enabled or disabled individually.
Reading /proc/acpi/ibm/video shows the status of each device.
@@ -665,18 +699,21 @@ ThinkLight control
------------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/light
+
sysfs attributes: as per LED class, for the "tpacpi::thinklight" LED
-procfs notes:
+procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
The ThinkLight status can be read and set through the procfs interface. A
few models which do not make the status available will show the ThinkLight
-status as "unknown". The available commands are:
+status as "unknown". The available commands are::
echo on > /proc/acpi/ibm/light
echo off > /proc/acpi/ibm/light
-sysfs notes:
+sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
The ThinkLight sysfs interface is documented by the LED class
documentation, in Documentation/leds/leds-class.rst. The ThinkLight LED name
@@ -691,6 +728,7 @@ CMOS/UCMS control
-----------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/cmos
+
sysfs device attribute: cmos_command
This feature is mostly used internally by the ACPI firmware to keep the legacy
@@ -707,16 +745,16 @@ The range of valid cmos command numbers is 0 to 21, but not all have an
effect and the behavior varies from model to model. Here is the behavior
on the X40 (tpb is the ThinkPad Buttons utility):
- 0 - Related to "Volume down" key press
- 1 - Related to "Volume up" key press
- 2 - Related to "Mute on" key press
- 3 - Related to "Access IBM" key press
- 4 - Related to "LCD brightness up" key press
- 5 - Related to "LCD brightness down" key press
- 11 - Related to "toggle screen expansion" key press/function
- 12 - Related to "ThinkLight on"
- 13 - Related to "ThinkLight off"
- 14 - Related to "ThinkLight" key press (toggle ThinkLight)
+ - 0 - Related to "Volume down" key press
+ - 1 - Related to "Volume up" key press
+ - 2 - Related to "Mute on" key press
+ - 3 - Related to "Access IBM" key press
+ - 4 - Related to "LCD brightness up" key press
+ - 5 - Related to "LCD brightness down" key press
+ - 11 - Related to "toggle screen expansion" key press/function
+ - 12 - Related to "ThinkLight on"
+ - 13 - Related to "ThinkLight off"
+ - 14 - Related to "ThinkLight" key press (toggle ThinkLight)
The cmos command interface is prone to firmware split-brain problems, as
in newer ThinkPads it is just a compatibility layer. Do not use it, it is
@@ -748,9 +786,10 @@ are aware of the consequences are welcome to enabling it.
Audio mute and microphone mute LEDs are supported, but currently not
visible to userspace. They are used by the snd-hda-intel audio driver.
-procfs notes:
+procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
-The available commands are:
+The available commands are::
echo '<LED number> on' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
echo '<LED number> off' >/proc/acpi/ibm/led
@@ -760,23 +799,24 @@ The <LED number> range is 0 to 15. The set of LEDs that can be
controlled varies from model to model. Here is the common ThinkPad
mapping:
- 0 - power
- 1 - battery (orange)
- 2 - battery (green)
- 3 - UltraBase/dock
- 4 - UltraBay
- 5 - UltraBase battery slot
- 6 - (unknown)
- 7 - standby
- 8 - dock status 1
- 9 - dock status 2
- 10, 11 - (unknown)
- 12 - thinkvantage
- 13, 14, 15 - (unknown)
+ - 0 - power
+ - 1 - battery (orange)
+ - 2 - battery (green)
+ - 3 - UltraBase/dock
+ - 4 - UltraBay
+ - 5 - UltraBase battery slot
+ - 6 - (unknown)
+ - 7 - standby
+ - 8 - dock status 1
+ - 9 - dock status 2
+ - 10, 11 - (unknown)
+ - 12 - thinkvantage
+ - 13, 14, 15 - (unknown)
All of the above can be turned on and off and can be made to blink.
-sysfs notes:
+sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
The ThinkPad LED sysfs interface is described in detail by the LED class
documentation, in Documentation/leds/leds-class.rst.
@@ -815,7 +855,7 @@ The BEEP method is used internally by the ACPI firmware to provide
audible alerts in various situations. This feature allows the same
sounds to be triggered manually.
-The commands are non-negative integer numbers:
+The commands are non-negative integer numbers::
echo <number> >/proc/acpi/ibm/beep
@@ -823,25 +863,26 @@ The valid <number> range is 0 to 17. Not all numbers trigger sounds
and the sounds vary from model to model. Here is the behavior on the
X40:
- 0 - stop a sound in progress (but use 17 to stop 16)
- 2 - two beeps, pause, third beep ("low battery")
- 3 - single beep
- 4 - high, followed by low-pitched beep ("unable")
- 5 - single beep
- 6 - very high, followed by high-pitched beep ("AC/DC")
- 7 - high-pitched beep
- 9 - three short beeps
- 10 - very long beep
- 12 - low-pitched beep
- 15 - three high-pitched beeps repeating constantly, stop with 0
- 16 - one medium-pitched beep repeating constantly, stop with 17
- 17 - stop 16
+ - 0 - stop a sound in progress (but use 17 to stop 16)
+ - 2 - two beeps, pause, third beep ("low battery")
+ - 3 - single beep
+ - 4 - high, followed by low-pitched beep ("unable")
+ - 5 - single beep
+ - 6 - very high, followed by high-pitched beep ("AC/DC")
+ - 7 - high-pitched beep
+ - 9 - three short beeps
+ - 10 - very long beep
+ - 12 - low-pitched beep
+ - 15 - three high-pitched beeps repeating constantly, stop with 0
+ - 16 - one medium-pitched beep repeating constantly, stop with 17
+ - 17 - stop 16
Temperature sensors
-------------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/thermal
+
sysfs device attributes: (hwmon "thinkpad") temp*_input
Most ThinkPads include six or more separate temperature sensors but only
@@ -850,10 +891,14 @@ feature shows readings from up to eight different sensors on older
ThinkPads, and up to sixteen different sensors on newer ThinkPads.
For example, on the X40, a typical output may be:
-temperatures: 42 42 45 41 36 -128 33 -128
+
+temperatures:
+ 42 42 45 41 36 -128 33 -128
On the T43/p, a typical output may be:
-temperatures: 48 48 36 52 38 -128 31 -128 48 52 48 -128 -128 -128 -128 -128
+
+temperatures:
+ 48 48 36 52 38 -128 31 -128 48 52 48 -128 -128 -128 -128 -128
The mapping of thermal sensors to physical locations varies depending on
system-board model (and thus, on ThinkPad model).
@@ -863,46 +908,53 @@ tries to track down these locations for various models.
Most (newer?) models seem to follow this pattern:
-1: CPU
-2: (depends on model)
-3: (depends on model)
-4: GPU
-5: Main battery: main sensor
-6: Bay battery: main sensor
-7: Main battery: secondary sensor
-8: Bay battery: secondary sensor
-9-15: (depends on model)
+- 1: CPU
+- 2: (depends on model)
+- 3: (depends on model)
+- 4: GPU
+- 5: Main battery: main sensor
+- 6: Bay battery: main sensor
+- 7: Main battery: secondary sensor
+- 8: Bay battery: secondary sensor
+- 9-15: (depends on model)
For the R51 (source: Thomas Gruber):
-2: Mini-PCI
-3: Internal HDD
+
+- 2: Mini-PCI
+- 3: Internal HDD
For the T43, T43/p (source: Shmidoax/Thinkwiki.org)
http://thinkwiki.org/wiki/Thermal_Sensors#ThinkPad_T43.2C_T43p
-2: System board, left side (near PCMCIA slot), reported as HDAPS temp
-3: PCMCIA slot
-9: MCH (northbridge) to DRAM Bus
-10: Clock-generator, mini-pci card and ICH (southbridge), under Mini-PCI
- card, under touchpad
-11: Power regulator, underside of system board, below F2 key
+
+- 2: System board, left side (near PCMCIA slot), reported as HDAPS temp
+- 3: PCMCIA slot
+- 9: MCH (northbridge) to DRAM Bus
+- 10: Clock-generator, mini-pci card and ICH (southbridge), under Mini-PCI
+ card, under touchpad
+- 11: Power regulator, underside of system board, below F2 key
The A31 has a very atypical layout for the thermal sensors
(source: Milos Popovic, http://thinkwiki.org/wiki/Thermal_Sensors#ThinkPad_A31)
-1: CPU
-2: Main Battery: main sensor
-3: Power Converter
-4: Bay Battery: main sensor
-5: MCH (northbridge)
-6: PCMCIA/ambient
-7: Main Battery: secondary sensor
-8: Bay Battery: secondary sensor
+- 1: CPU
+- 2: Main Battery: main sensor
+- 3: Power Converter
+- 4: Bay Battery: main sensor
+- 5: MCH (northbridge)
+- 6: PCMCIA/ambient
+- 7: Main Battery: secondary sensor
+- 8: Bay Battery: secondary sensor
+
+
+Procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
-Procfs notes:
Readings from sensors that are not available return -128.
No commands can be written to this file.
-Sysfs notes:
+Sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
+
Sensors that are not available return the ENXIO error. This
status may change at runtime, as there are hotplug thermal
sensors, like those inside the batteries and docks.
@@ -921,6 +973,7 @@ ftp://ftp.suse.com/pub/people/trenn/sources/ec
Use it to determine the register holding the fan
speed on some models. To do that, do the following:
+
- make sure the battery is fully charged
- make sure the fan is running
- use above mentioned tool to read out the EC
@@ -941,6 +994,7 @@ LCD brightness control
----------------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
+
sysfs backlight device "thinkpad_screen"
This feature allows software control of the LCD brightness on ThinkPad
@@ -985,15 +1039,17 @@ brightness_enable=0 forces it to be disabled. brightness_enable=1
forces it to be enabled when available, even if the standard ACPI
interface is also available.
-Procfs notes:
+Procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
- The available commands are:
+The available commands are::
echo up >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
echo down >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
echo 'level <level>' >/proc/acpi/ibm/brightness
-Sysfs notes:
+Sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
The interface is implemented through the backlight sysfs class, which is
poorly documented at this time.
@@ -1038,6 +1094,7 @@ Volume control (Console Audio control)
--------------------------------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/volume
+
ALSA: "ThinkPad Console Audio Control", default ID: "ThinkPadEC"
NOTE: by default, the volume control interface operates in read-only
@@ -1053,7 +1110,8 @@ Software volume control should be done only in the main AC97/HDA
mixer.
-About the ThinkPad Console Audio control:
+About the ThinkPad Console Audio control
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
ThinkPads have a built-in amplifier and muting circuit that drives the
console headphone and speakers. This circuit is after the main AC97
@@ -1092,13 +1150,14 @@ normal key presses to the operating system (thinkpad-acpi is not
involved).
-The ThinkPad-ACPI volume control:
+The ThinkPad-ACPI volume control
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The preferred way to interact with the Console Audio control is the
ALSA interface.
The legacy procfs interface allows one to read the current state,
-and if volume control is enabled, accepts the following commands:
+and if volume control is enabled, accepts the following commands::
echo up >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume
echo down >/proc/acpi/ibm/volume
@@ -1137,13 +1196,15 @@ Fan control and monitoring: fan speed, fan enable/disable
---------------------------------------------------------
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
-sysfs device attributes: (hwmon "thinkpad") fan1_input, pwm1,
- pwm1_enable, fan2_input
+
+sysfs device attributes: (hwmon "thinkpad") fan1_input, pwm1, pwm1_enable, fan2_input
+
sysfs hwmon driver attributes: fan_watchdog
-NOTE NOTE NOTE: fan control operations are disabled by default for
-safety reasons. To enable them, the module parameter "fan_control=1"
-must be given to thinkpad-acpi.
+NOTE NOTE NOTE:
+ fan control operations are disabled by default for
+ safety reasons. To enable them, the module parameter "fan_control=1"
+ must be given to thinkpad-acpi.
This feature attempts to show the current fan speed, control mode and
other fan data that might be available. The speed is read directly
@@ -1154,7 +1215,8 @@ value on other models.
Some Lenovo ThinkPads support a secondary fan. This fan cannot be
controlled separately, it shares the main fan control.
-Fan levels:
+Fan levels
+^^^^^^^^^^
Most ThinkPad fans work in "levels" at the firmware interface. Level 0
stops the fan. The higher the level, the higher the fan speed, although
@@ -1209,9 +1271,10 @@ therefore, not suitable to protect against fan mode changes made through
means other than the "enable", "disable", and "level" procfs fan
commands, or the hwmon fan control sysfs interface.
-Procfs notes:
+Procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
-The fan may be enabled or disabled with the following commands:
+The fan may be enabled or disabled with the following commands::
echo enable >/proc/acpi/ibm/fan
echo disable >/proc/acpi/ibm/fan
@@ -1219,7 +1282,7 @@ The fan may be enabled or disabled with the following commands:
Placing a fan on level 0 is the same as disabling it. Enabling a fan
will try to place it in a safe level if it is too slow or disabled.
-The fan level can be controlled with the command:
+The fan level can be controlled with the command::
echo 'level <level>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
@@ -1231,7 +1294,7 @@ compatibility.
On the X31 and X40 (and ONLY on those models), the fan speed can be
controlled to a certain degree. Once the fan is running, it can be
-forced to run faster or slower with the following command:
+forced to run faster or slower with the following command::
echo 'speed <speed>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
@@ -1241,13 +1304,14 @@ effect or the fan speed eventually settles somewhere in that range. The
fan cannot be stopped or started with this command. This functionality
is incomplete, and not available through the sysfs interface.
-To program the safety watchdog, use the "watchdog" command.
+To program the safety watchdog, use the "watchdog" command::
echo 'watchdog <interval in seconds>' > /proc/acpi/ibm/fan
If you want to disable the watchdog, use 0 as the interval.
-Sysfs notes:
+Sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
The sysfs interface follows the hwmon subsystem guidelines for the most
part, and the exception is the fan safety watchdog.
@@ -1261,10 +1325,10 @@ to the firmware).
Features not yet implemented by the driver return ENOSYS.
hwmon device attribute pwm1_enable:
- 0: PWM offline (fan is set to full-speed mode)
- 1: Manual PWM control (use pwm1 to set fan level)
- 2: Hardware PWM control (EC "auto" mode)
- 3: reserved (Software PWM control, not implemented yet)
+ - 0: PWM offline (fan is set to full-speed mode)
+ - 1: Manual PWM control (use pwm1 to set fan level)
+ - 2: Hardware PWM control (EC "auto" mode)
+ - 3: reserved (Software PWM control, not implemented yet)
Modes 0 and 2 are not supported by all ThinkPads, and the
driver is not always able to detect this. If it does know a
@@ -1304,7 +1368,9 @@ WAN
---
procfs: /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
+
sysfs device attribute: wwan_enable (deprecated)
+
sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_wwan_sw"
This feature shows the presence and current state of the built-in
@@ -1316,22 +1382,24 @@ so it is kept across reboots and power-off.
It was tested on a Lenovo ThinkPad X60. It should probably work on other
ThinkPad models which come with this module installed.
-Procfs notes:
+Procfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
-If the W-WAN card is installed, the following commands can be used:
+If the W-WAN card is installed, the following commands can be used::
echo enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
echo disable > /proc/acpi/ibm/wan
-Sysfs notes:
+Sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
If the W-WAN card is installed, it can be enabled /
disabled through the "wwan_enable" thinkpad-acpi device
attribute, and its current status can also be queried.
enable:
- 0: disables WWAN card / WWAN card is disabled
- 1: enables WWAN card / WWAN card is enabled.
+ - 0: disables WWAN card / WWAN card is disabled
+ - 1: enables WWAN card / WWAN card is enabled.
Note: this interface has been superseded by the generic rfkill
class. It has been deprecated, and it will be removed in year
@@ -1354,7 +1422,8 @@ sysfs rfkill class: switch "tpacpi_uwb_sw"
This feature exports an rfkill controller for the UWB device, if one is
present and enabled in the BIOS.
-Sysfs notes:
+Sysfs notes
+^^^^^^^^^^^
rfkill controller switch "tpacpi_uwb_sw": refer to
Documentation/rfkill.txt for details.
@@ -1368,11 +1437,11 @@ This sysfs attribute controls the keyboard "face" that will be shown on the
Lenovo X1 Carbon 2nd gen (2014)'s adaptive keyboard. The value can be read
and set.
-1 = Home mode
-2 = Web-browser mode
-3 = Web-conference mode
-4 = Function mode
-5 = Layflat mode
+- 1 = Home mode
+- 2 = Web-browser mode
+- 3 = Web-conference mode
+- 4 = Function mode
+- 5 = Layflat mode
For more details about which buttons will appear depending on the mode, please
review the laptop's user guide:
@@ -1382,13 +1451,13 @@ Multiple Commands, Module Parameters
------------------------------------
Multiple commands can be written to the proc files in one shot by
-separating them with commas, for example:
+separating them with commas, for example::
echo enable,0xffff > /proc/acpi/ibm/hotkey
echo lcd_disable,crt_enable > /proc/acpi/ibm/video
Commands can also be specified when loading the thinkpad-acpi module,
-for example:
+for example::
modprobe thinkpad_acpi hotkey=enable,0xffff video=auto_disable
@@ -1397,14 +1466,16 @@ Enabling debugging output
-------------------------
The module takes a debug parameter which can be used to selectively
-enable various classes of debugging output, for example:
+enable various classes of debugging output, for example::
modprobe thinkpad_acpi debug=0xffff
will enable all debugging output classes. It takes a bitmask, so
to enable more than one output class, just add their values.
+ ============= ======================================
Debug bitmask Description
+ ============= ======================================
0x8000 Disclose PID of userspace programs
accessing some functions of the driver
0x0001 Initialization and probing
@@ -1415,6 +1486,7 @@ to enable more than one output class, just add their values.
0x0010 Fan control
0x0020 Backlight brightness
0x0040 Audio mixer/volume control
+ ============= ======================================
There is also a kernel build option to enable more debugging
information, which may be necessary to debug driver problems.
@@ -1432,8 +1504,10 @@ the module parameter force_load=1. Regardless of whether this works or
not, please contact ibm-acpi-devel@lists.sourceforge.net with a report.
-Sysfs interface changelog:
+Sysfs interface changelog
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+========= ===============================================================
0x000100: Initial sysfs support, as a single platform driver and
device.
0x000200: Hot key support for 32 hot keys, and radio slider switch
@@ -1485,3 +1559,4 @@ Sysfs interface changelog:
0x030000: Thermal and fan sysfs attributes were moved to the hwmon
device instead of being attached to the backing platform
device.
+========= ===============================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/laptops/toshiba_haps.txt b/Documentation/laptops/toshiba_haps.rst
similarity index 60%
rename from Documentation/laptops/toshiba_haps.txt
rename to Documentation/laptops/toshiba_haps.rst
index 0c1d88dedbde..11dfc428c080 100644
--- a/Documentation/laptops/toshiba_haps.txt
+++ b/Documentation/laptops/toshiba_haps.rst
@@ -1,18 +1,19 @@
-Kernel driver toshiba_haps
+====================================
Toshiba HDD Active Protection Sensor
====================================
+Kernel driver: toshiba_haps
+
Author: Azael Avalos <coproscefalo@gmail.com>
-0. Contents
------------
+.. 0. Contents
-1. Description
-2. Interface
-3. Accelerometer axes
-4. Supported devices
-5. Usage
+ 1. Description
+ 2. Interface
+ 3. Accelerometer axes
+ 4. Supported devices
+ 5. Usage
1. Description
@@ -32,17 +33,20 @@ file to set the desired protection level or sensor sensibility.
------------
This device comes with 3 methods:
-_STA - Checks existence of the device, returning Zero if the device does not
+
+==== =====================================================================
+_STA Checks existence of the device, returning Zero if the device does not
exists or is not supported.
-PTLV - Sets the desired protection level.
-RSSS - Shuts down the HDD protection interface for a few seconds,
+PTLV Sets the desired protection level.
+RSSS Shuts down the HDD protection interface for a few seconds,
then restores normal operation.
+==== =====================================================================
Note:
-The presence of Solid State Drives (SSD) can make this driver to fail loading,
-given the fact that such drives have no movable parts, and thus, not requiring
-any "protection" as well as failing during the evaluation of the _STA method
-found under this device.
+ The presence of Solid State Drives (SSD) can make this driver to fail loading,
+ given the fact that such drives have no movable parts, and thus, not requiring
+ any "protection" as well as failing during the evaluation of the _STA method
+ found under this device.
3. Accelerometer axes
@@ -66,11 +70,18 @@ conventional HDD and not only SSD, or a combination of both HDD and SSD.
--------
The sysfs files under /sys/devices/LNXSYSTM:00/LNXSYBUS:00/TOS620A:00/ are:
-protection_level - The protection_level is readable and writeable, and
+
+================ ============================================================
+protection_level The protection_level is readable and writeable, and
provides a way to let userspace query the current protection
level, as well as set the desired protection level, the
available protection levels are:
- 0 - Disabled | 1 - Low | 2 - Medium | 3 - High
-reset_protection - The reset_protection entry is writeable only, being "1"
+
+ ============ ======= ========== ========
+ 0 - Disabled 1 - Low 2 - Medium 3 - High
+ ============ ======= ========== ========
+
+reset_protection The reset_protection entry is writeable only, being "1"
the only parameter it accepts, it is used to trigger
a reset of the protection interface.
+================ ============================================================
diff --git a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
index 749322060f10..c5f0d44433a2 100644
--- a/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/sysctl/vm.txt
@@ -102,7 +102,7 @@ Changing this takes effect whenever an application requests memory.
block_dump
block_dump enables block I/O debugging when set to a nonzero value. More
-information on block I/O debugging is in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt.
+information on block I/O debugging is in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.rst.
==============================================================
@@ -286,7 +286,7 @@ shared memory segment using hugetlb page.
laptop_mode
laptop_mode is a knob that controls "laptop mode". All the things that are
-controlled by this knob are discussed in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt.
+controlled by this knob are discussed in Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.rst.
==============================================================
diff --git a/MAINTAINERS b/MAINTAINERS
index b7d5faf95e25..58e103015dea 100644
--- a/MAINTAINERS
+++ b/MAINTAINERS
@@ -14756,7 +14756,7 @@ M: Mattia Dongili <malattia@linux.it>
L: platform-driver-x86@vger.kernel.org
W: http://www.linux.it/~malattia/wiki/index.php/Sony_drivers
S: Maintained
-F: Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt
+F: Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.rst
F: drivers/char/sonypi.c
F: drivers/platform/x86/sony-laptop.c
F: include/linux/sony-laptop.h
diff --git a/drivers/char/Kconfig b/drivers/char/Kconfig
index 466ebd84ad17..bb734066075f 100644
--- a/drivers/char/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/char/Kconfig
@@ -382,7 +382,7 @@ config SONYPI
Device which can be found in many (all ?) Sony Vaio laptops.
If you have one of those laptops, read
- <file:Documentation/laptops/sonypi.txt>, and say Y or M here.
+ <file:Documentation/laptops/sonypi.rst>, and say Y or M here.
To compile this driver as a module, choose M here: the
module will be called sonypi.
diff --git a/drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig b/drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig
index bd15b47abcb4..abae73f72e75 100644
--- a/drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/platform/x86/Kconfig
@@ -451,7 +451,7 @@ config SONY_LAPTOP
screen brightness control, Fn keys and allows powering on/off some
devices.
- Read <file:Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.txt> for more information.
+ Read <file:Documentation/laptops/sony-laptop.rst> for more information.
config SONYPI_COMPAT
bool "Sonypi compatibility"
@@ -503,7 +503,7 @@ config THINKPAD_ACPI
support for Fn-Fx key combinations, Bluetooth control, video
output switching, ThinkLight control, UltraBay eject and more.
For more information about this driver see
- <file:Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.txt> and
+ <file:Documentation/laptops/thinkpad-acpi.rst> and
<http://ibm-acpi.sf.net/> .
This driver was formerly known as ibm-acpi.
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 22/29] docs: iio: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (20 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 21/29] docs: laptops: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-22 9:43 ` Jonathan Cameron
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 23/29] docs: namespaces: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (6 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 1 reply; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Jonathan Cameron, Hartmut Knaack,
Lars-Peter Clausen, Peter Meerwald-Stadler, linux-iio,
Jonathan Cameron
Rename the iio documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
Acked-by: Jonathan Cameron <Jonathan.Cameron@huawei.com>
---
.../iio/{ep93xx_adc.txt => ep93xx_adc.rst} | 15 +++++-
.../{iio_configfs.txt => iio_configfs.rst} | 52 +++++++++++--------
Documentation/iio/index.rst | 12 +++++
drivers/iio/Kconfig | 2 +-
4 files changed, 56 insertions(+), 25 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/iio/{ep93xx_adc.txt => ep93xx_adc.rst} (71%)
rename Documentation/iio/{iio_configfs.txt => iio_configfs.rst} (73%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/iio/index.rst
diff --git a/Documentation/iio/ep93xx_adc.txt b/Documentation/iio/ep93xx_adc.rst
similarity index 71%
rename from Documentation/iio/ep93xx_adc.txt
rename to Documentation/iio/ep93xx_adc.rst
index 23053e7817bd..4fd8dea3f6b8 100644
--- a/Documentation/iio/ep93xx_adc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/iio/ep93xx_adc.rst
@@ -1,12 +1,16 @@
-Cirrus Logic EP93xx ADC driver.
+==============================
+Cirrus Logic EP93xx ADC driver
+==============================
1. Overview
+===========
The driver is intended to work on both low-end (EP9301, EP9302) devices with
5-channel ADC and high-end (EP9307, EP9312, EP9315) devices with 10-channel
touchscreen/ADC module.
2. Channel numbering
+====================
Numbering scheme for channels 0..4 is defined in EP9301 and EP9302 datasheets.
EP9307, EP9312 and EP9312 have 3 channels more (total 8), but the numbering is
@@ -17,13 +21,20 @@ Assuming ep93xx_adc is IIO device0, you'd find the following entries under
+-----------------+---------------+
| sysfs entry | ball/pin name |
- +-----------------+---------------+
+ +=================+===============+
| in_voltage0_raw | YM |
+ +-----------------+---------------+
| in_voltage1_raw | SXP |
+ +-----------------+---------------+
| in_voltage2_raw | SXM |
+ +-----------------+---------------+
| in_voltage3_raw | SYP |
+ +-----------------+---------------+
| in_voltage4_raw | SYM |
+ +-----------------+---------------+
| in_voltage5_raw | XP |
+ +-----------------+---------------+
| in_voltage6_raw | XM |
+ +-----------------+---------------+
| in_voltage7_raw | YP |
+-----------------+---------------+
diff --git a/Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.txt b/Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.rst
similarity index 73%
rename from Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.txt
rename to Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.rst
index 4e5f101837a8..ecbfdb3afef7 100644
--- a/Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.rst
@@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
+===============================
Industrial IIO configfs support
+===============================
1. Overview
+===========
Configfs is a filesystem-based manager of kernel objects. IIO uses some
objects that could be easily configured using configfs (e.g.: devices,
@@ -10,20 +13,22 @@ See Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt for more information
about how configfs works.
2. Usage
+========
In order to use configfs support in IIO we need to select it at compile
time via CONFIG_IIO_CONFIGFS config option.
-Then, mount the configfs filesystem (usually under /config directory):
+Then, mount the configfs filesystem (usually under /config directory)::
-$ mkdir /config
-$ mount -t configfs none /config
+ $ mkdir /config
+ $ mount -t configfs none /config
At this point, all default IIO groups will be created and can be accessed
under /config/iio. Next chapters will describe available IIO configuration
objects.
3. Software triggers
+====================
One of the IIO default configfs groups is the "triggers" group. It is
automagically accessible when the configfs is mounted and can be found
@@ -31,40 +36,40 @@ under /config/iio/triggers.
IIO software triggers implementation offers support for creating multiple
trigger types. A new trigger type is usually implemented as a separate
-kernel module following the interface in include/linux/iio/sw_trigger.h:
+kernel module following the interface in include/linux/iio/sw_trigger.h::
-/*
- * drivers/iio/trigger/iio-trig-sample.c
- * sample kernel module implementing a new trigger type
- */
-#include <linux/iio/sw_trigger.h>
+ /*
+ * drivers/iio/trigger/iio-trig-sample.c
+ * sample kernel module implementing a new trigger type
+ */
+ #include <linux/iio/sw_trigger.h>
-static struct iio_sw_trigger *iio_trig_sample_probe(const char *name)
-{
+ static struct iio_sw_trigger *iio_trig_sample_probe(const char *name)
+ {
/*
* This allocates and registers an IIO trigger plus other
* trigger type specific initialization.
*/
-}
+ }
-static int iio_trig_hrtimer_remove(struct iio_sw_trigger *swt)
-{
+ static int iio_trig_hrtimer_remove(struct iio_sw_trigger *swt)
+ {
/*
* This undoes the actions in iio_trig_sample_probe
*/
-}
+ }
-static const struct iio_sw_trigger_ops iio_trig_sample_ops = {
+ static const struct iio_sw_trigger_ops iio_trig_sample_ops = {
.probe = iio_trig_sample_probe,
.remove = iio_trig_sample_remove,
-};
+ };
-static struct iio_sw_trigger_type iio_trig_sample = {
+ static struct iio_sw_trigger_type iio_trig_sample = {
.name = "trig-sample",
.owner = THIS_MODULE,
.ops = &iio_trig_sample_ops,
-};
+ };
module_iio_sw_trigger_driver(iio_trig_sample);
@@ -73,21 +78,24 @@ iio-trig-sample module will create 'trig-sample' trigger type directory
/config/iio/triggers/trig-sample.
We support the following interrupt sources (trigger types):
+
* hrtimer, uses high resolution timers as interrupt source
3.1 Hrtimer triggers creation and destruction
+---------------------------------------------
Loading iio-trig-hrtimer module will register hrtimer trigger types allowing
users to create hrtimer triggers under /config/iio/triggers/hrtimer.
-e.g:
+e.g::
-$ mkdir /config/iio/triggers/hrtimer/instance1
-$ rmdir /config/iio/triggers/hrtimer/instance1
+ $ mkdir /config/iio/triggers/hrtimer/instance1
+ $ rmdir /config/iio/triggers/hrtimer/instance1
Each trigger can have one or more attributes specific to the trigger type.
3.2 "hrtimer" trigger types attributes
+--------------------------------------
"hrtimer" trigger type doesn't have any configurable attribute from /config dir.
It does introduce the sampling_frequency attribute to trigger directory.
diff --git a/Documentation/iio/index.rst b/Documentation/iio/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..0593dca89a94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/iio/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+:orphan:
+
+==============
+Industrial I/O
+==============
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ iio_configfs
+
+ ep93xx_adc
diff --git a/drivers/iio/Kconfig b/drivers/iio/Kconfig
index 1d736a4952ab..5bd51853b15e 100644
--- a/drivers/iio/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/iio/Kconfig
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ config IIO_CONFIGFS
help
This allows configuring various IIO bits through configfs
(e.g. software triggers). For more info see
- Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.txt.
+ Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.rst.
config IIO_TRIGGER
bool "Enable triggered sampling support"
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* Re: [PATCH v2 22/29] docs: iio: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 22/29] docs: iio: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-22 9:43 ` Jonathan Cameron
0 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Jonathan Cameron @ 2019-06-22 9:43 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Mauro Carvalho Chehab
Cc: Linux Doc Mailing List, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Hartmut Knaack, Lars-Peter Clausen,
Peter Meerwald-Stadler, linux-iio, Jonathan Cameron
On Tue, 18 Jun 2019 17:53:40 -0300
Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org> wrote:
> Rename the iio documentation files to ReST, add an
> index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
> output via the Sphinx build system.
>
> At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
> the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
>
> Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
> Acked-by: Jonathan Cameron <Jonathan.Cameron@huawei.com>
I'll take this via IIO.
Applied to the togreg branch of iio.git and pushed out as testing.
I'll probably do a pull request to Greg tomorrow and these will hopefully
turn up in linux-next not long after that.
Thanks Mauro!
Jonathan
> ---
> .../iio/{ep93xx_adc.txt => ep93xx_adc.rst} | 15 +++++-
> .../{iio_configfs.txt => iio_configfs.rst} | 52 +++++++++++--------
> Documentation/iio/index.rst | 12 +++++
> drivers/iio/Kconfig | 2 +-
> 4 files changed, 56 insertions(+), 25 deletions(-)
> rename Documentation/iio/{ep93xx_adc.txt => ep93xx_adc.rst} (71%)
> rename Documentation/iio/{iio_configfs.txt => iio_configfs.rst} (73%)
> create mode 100644 Documentation/iio/index.rst
>
> diff --git a/Documentation/iio/ep93xx_adc.txt b/Documentation/iio/ep93xx_adc.rst
> similarity index 71%
> rename from Documentation/iio/ep93xx_adc.txt
> rename to Documentation/iio/ep93xx_adc.rst
> index 23053e7817bd..4fd8dea3f6b8 100644
> --- a/Documentation/iio/ep93xx_adc.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/iio/ep93xx_adc.rst
> @@ -1,12 +1,16 @@
> -Cirrus Logic EP93xx ADC driver.
> +==============================
> +Cirrus Logic EP93xx ADC driver
> +==============================
>
> 1. Overview
> +===========
>
> The driver is intended to work on both low-end (EP9301, EP9302) devices with
> 5-channel ADC and high-end (EP9307, EP9312, EP9315) devices with 10-channel
> touchscreen/ADC module.
>
> 2. Channel numbering
> +====================
>
> Numbering scheme for channels 0..4 is defined in EP9301 and EP9302 datasheets.
> EP9307, EP9312 and EP9312 have 3 channels more (total 8), but the numbering is
> @@ -17,13 +21,20 @@ Assuming ep93xx_adc is IIO device0, you'd find the following entries under
>
> +-----------------+---------------+
> | sysfs entry | ball/pin name |
> - +-----------------+---------------+
> + +=================+===============+
> | in_voltage0_raw | YM |
> + +-----------------+---------------+
> | in_voltage1_raw | SXP |
> + +-----------------+---------------+
> | in_voltage2_raw | SXM |
> + +-----------------+---------------+
> | in_voltage3_raw | SYP |
> + +-----------------+---------------+
> | in_voltage4_raw | SYM |
> + +-----------------+---------------+
> | in_voltage5_raw | XP |
> + +-----------------+---------------+
> | in_voltage6_raw | XM |
> + +-----------------+---------------+
> | in_voltage7_raw | YP |
> +-----------------+---------------+
> diff --git a/Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.txt b/Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.rst
> similarity index 73%
> rename from Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.txt
> rename to Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.rst
> index 4e5f101837a8..ecbfdb3afef7 100644
> --- a/Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.txt
> +++ b/Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.rst
> @@ -1,6 +1,9 @@
> +===============================
> Industrial IIO configfs support
> +===============================
>
> 1. Overview
> +===========
>
> Configfs is a filesystem-based manager of kernel objects. IIO uses some
> objects that could be easily configured using configfs (e.g.: devices,
> @@ -10,20 +13,22 @@ See Documentation/filesystems/configfs/configfs.txt for more information
> about how configfs works.
>
> 2. Usage
> +========
>
> In order to use configfs support in IIO we need to select it at compile
> time via CONFIG_IIO_CONFIGFS config option.
>
> -Then, mount the configfs filesystem (usually under /config directory):
> +Then, mount the configfs filesystem (usually under /config directory)::
>
> -$ mkdir /config
> -$ mount -t configfs none /config
> + $ mkdir /config
> + $ mount -t configfs none /config
>
> At this point, all default IIO groups will be created and can be accessed
> under /config/iio. Next chapters will describe available IIO configuration
> objects.
>
> 3. Software triggers
> +====================
>
> One of the IIO default configfs groups is the "triggers" group. It is
> automagically accessible when the configfs is mounted and can be found
> @@ -31,40 +36,40 @@ under /config/iio/triggers.
>
> IIO software triggers implementation offers support for creating multiple
> trigger types. A new trigger type is usually implemented as a separate
> -kernel module following the interface in include/linux/iio/sw_trigger.h:
> +kernel module following the interface in include/linux/iio/sw_trigger.h::
>
> -/*
> - * drivers/iio/trigger/iio-trig-sample.c
> - * sample kernel module implementing a new trigger type
> - */
> -#include <linux/iio/sw_trigger.h>
> + /*
> + * drivers/iio/trigger/iio-trig-sample.c
> + * sample kernel module implementing a new trigger type
> + */
> + #include <linux/iio/sw_trigger.h>
>
>
> -static struct iio_sw_trigger *iio_trig_sample_probe(const char *name)
> -{
> + static struct iio_sw_trigger *iio_trig_sample_probe(const char *name)
> + {
> /*
> * This allocates and registers an IIO trigger plus other
> * trigger type specific initialization.
> */
> -}
> + }
>
> -static int iio_trig_hrtimer_remove(struct iio_sw_trigger *swt)
> -{
> + static int iio_trig_hrtimer_remove(struct iio_sw_trigger *swt)
> + {
> /*
> * This undoes the actions in iio_trig_sample_probe
> */
> -}
> + }
>
> -static const struct iio_sw_trigger_ops iio_trig_sample_ops = {
> + static const struct iio_sw_trigger_ops iio_trig_sample_ops = {
> .probe = iio_trig_sample_probe,
> .remove = iio_trig_sample_remove,
> -};
> + };
>
> -static struct iio_sw_trigger_type iio_trig_sample = {
> + static struct iio_sw_trigger_type iio_trig_sample = {
> .name = "trig-sample",
> .owner = THIS_MODULE,
> .ops = &iio_trig_sample_ops,
> -};
> + };
>
> module_iio_sw_trigger_driver(iio_trig_sample);
>
> @@ -73,21 +78,24 @@ iio-trig-sample module will create 'trig-sample' trigger type directory
> /config/iio/triggers/trig-sample.
>
> We support the following interrupt sources (trigger types):
> +
> * hrtimer, uses high resolution timers as interrupt source
>
> 3.1 Hrtimer triggers creation and destruction
> +---------------------------------------------
>
> Loading iio-trig-hrtimer module will register hrtimer trigger types allowing
> users to create hrtimer triggers under /config/iio/triggers/hrtimer.
>
> -e.g:
> +e.g::
>
> -$ mkdir /config/iio/triggers/hrtimer/instance1
> -$ rmdir /config/iio/triggers/hrtimer/instance1
> + $ mkdir /config/iio/triggers/hrtimer/instance1
> + $ rmdir /config/iio/triggers/hrtimer/instance1
>
> Each trigger can have one or more attributes specific to the trigger type.
>
> 3.2 "hrtimer" trigger types attributes
> +--------------------------------------
>
> "hrtimer" trigger type doesn't have any configurable attribute from /config dir.
> It does introduce the sampling_frequency attribute to trigger directory.
> diff --git a/Documentation/iio/index.rst b/Documentation/iio/index.rst
> new file mode 100644
> index 000000000000..0593dca89a94
> --- /dev/null
> +++ b/Documentation/iio/index.rst
> @@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
> +:orphan:
> +
> +==============
> +Industrial I/O
> +==============
> +
> +.. toctree::
> + :maxdepth: 1
> +
> + iio_configfs
> +
> + ep93xx_adc
> diff --git a/drivers/iio/Kconfig b/drivers/iio/Kconfig
> index 1d736a4952ab..5bd51853b15e 100644
> --- a/drivers/iio/Kconfig
> +++ b/drivers/iio/Kconfig
> @@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ config IIO_CONFIGFS
> help
> This allows configuring various IIO bits through configfs
> (e.g. software triggers). For more info see
> - Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.txt.
> + Documentation/iio/iio_configfs.rst.
>
> config IIO_TRIGGER
> bool "Enable triggered sampling support"
^ permalink raw reply [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* [PATCH v2 23/29] docs: namespaces: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (21 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 22/29] docs: iio: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 24/29] docs: nfc: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (5 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
Rename the namespaces documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
There are two upper case file names. Rename them to
lower case, as we're working to avoid upper case file
names at Documentation.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
...{compatibility-list.txt => compatibility-list.rst} | 10 +++++++---
Documentation/namespaces/index.rst | 11 +++++++++++
.../{resource-control.txt => resource-control.rst} | 4 ++++
3 files changed, 22 insertions(+), 3 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/namespaces/{compatibility-list.txt => compatibility-list.rst} (86%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/namespaces/index.rst
rename Documentation/namespaces/{resource-control.txt => resource-control.rst} (89%)
diff --git a/Documentation/namespaces/compatibility-list.txt b/Documentation/namespaces/compatibility-list.rst
similarity index 86%
rename from Documentation/namespaces/compatibility-list.txt
rename to Documentation/namespaces/compatibility-list.rst
index defc5589bfcd..318800b2a943 100644
--- a/Documentation/namespaces/compatibility-list.txt
+++ b/Documentation/namespaces/compatibility-list.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
- Namespaces compatibility list
+=============================
+Namespaces compatibility list
+=============================
This document contains the information about the problems user
may have when creating tasks living in different namespaces.
@@ -7,13 +9,16 @@ Here's the summary. This matrix shows the known problems, that
occur when tasks share some namespace (the columns) while living
in different other namespaces (the rows):
- UTS IPC VFS PID User Net
+==== === === === === ==== ===
+- UTS IPC VFS PID User Net
+==== === === === === ==== ===
UTS X
IPC X 1
VFS X
PID 1 1 X
User 2 2 X
Net X
+==== === === === === ==== ===
1. Both the IPC and the PID namespaces provide IDs to address
object inside the kernel. E.g. semaphore with IPCID or
@@ -36,4 +41,3 @@ Net X
even having equal UIDs.
But currently this is not so.
-
diff --git a/Documentation/namespaces/index.rst b/Documentation/namespaces/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..bf40625dd11a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/namespaces/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+:orphan:
+
+==========
+Namespaces
+==========
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ compatibility-list
+ resource-control
diff --git a/Documentation/namespaces/resource-control.txt b/Documentation/namespaces/resource-control.rst
similarity index 89%
rename from Documentation/namespaces/resource-control.txt
rename to Documentation/namespaces/resource-control.rst
index abc13c394738..369556e00f0c 100644
--- a/Documentation/namespaces/resource-control.txt
+++ b/Documentation/namespaces/resource-control.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+===========================
+Namespaces research control
+===========================
+
There are a lot of kinds of objects in the kernel that don't have
individual limits or that have limits that are ineffective when a set
of processes is allowed to switch user ids. With user namespaces
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 24/29] docs: nfc: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (22 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 23/29] docs: namespaces: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 25/29] docs: md: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (4 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
Rename the nfc documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/nfc/index.rst | 11 ++
.../nfc/{nfc-hci.txt => nfc-hci.rst} | 163 ++++++++++--------
.../nfc/{nfc-pn544.txt => nfc-pn544.rst} | 6 +-
3 files changed, 107 insertions(+), 73 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 Documentation/nfc/index.rst
rename Documentation/nfc/{nfc-hci.txt => nfc-hci.rst} (71%)
rename Documentation/nfc/{nfc-pn544.txt => nfc-pn544.rst} (82%)
diff --git a/Documentation/nfc/index.rst b/Documentation/nfc/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4f4947fce80d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/nfc/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+:orphan:
+
+========================
+Near Field Communication
+========================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ nfc-hci
+ nfc-pn544
diff --git a/Documentation/nfc/nfc-hci.txt b/Documentation/nfc/nfc-hci.rst
similarity index 71%
rename from Documentation/nfc/nfc-hci.txt
rename to Documentation/nfc/nfc-hci.rst
index 0dc078cab972..eb8a1a14e919 100644
--- a/Documentation/nfc/nfc-hci.txt
+++ b/Documentation/nfc/nfc-hci.rst
@@ -1,7 +1,9 @@
+========================
HCI backend for NFC Core
+========================
-Author: Eric Lapuyade, Samuel Ortiz
-Contact: eric.lapuyade@intel.com, samuel.ortiz@intel.com
+- Author: Eric Lapuyade, Samuel Ortiz
+- Contact: eric.lapuyade@intel.com, samuel.ortiz@intel.com
General
-------
@@ -24,12 +26,13 @@ HCI events can also be received from the host controller. They will be handled
and a translation will be forwarded to NFC Core as needed. There are hooks to
let the HCI driver handle proprietary events or override standard behavior.
HCI uses 2 execution contexts:
+
- one for executing commands : nfc_hci_msg_tx_work(). Only one command
-can be executing at any given moment.
+ can be executing at any given moment.
- one for dispatching received events and commands : nfc_hci_msg_rx_work().
-HCI Session initialization:
----------------------------
+HCI Session initialization
+--------------------------
The Session initialization is an HCI standard which must unfortunately
support proprietary gates. This is the reason why the driver will pass a list
@@ -58,9 +61,9 @@ HCI Management
--------------
A driver would normally register itself with HCI and provide the following
-entry points:
+entry points::
-struct nfc_hci_ops {
+ struct nfc_hci_ops {
int (*open)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev);
void (*close)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev);
int (*hci_ready) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev);
@@ -82,38 +85,38 @@ struct nfc_hci_ops {
struct nfc_target *target);
int (*event_received)(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 gate, u8 event,
struct sk_buff *skb);
-};
+ };
- open() and close() shall turn the hardware on and off.
- hci_ready() is an optional entry point that is called right after the hci
-session has been set up. The driver can use it to do additional initialization
-that must be performed using HCI commands.
+ session has been set up. The driver can use it to do additional initialization
+ that must be performed using HCI commands.
- xmit() shall simply write a frame to the physical link.
- start_poll() is an optional entrypoint that shall set the hardware in polling
-mode. This must be implemented only if the hardware uses proprietary gates or a
-mechanism slightly different from the HCI standard.
+ mode. This must be implemented only if the hardware uses proprietary gates or a
+ mechanism slightly different from the HCI standard.
- dep_link_up() is called after a p2p target has been detected, to finish
-the p2p connection setup with hardware parameters that need to be passed back
-to nfc core.
+ the p2p connection setup with hardware parameters that need to be passed back
+ to nfc core.
- dep_link_down() is called to bring the p2p link down.
- target_from_gate() is an optional entrypoint to return the nfc protocols
-corresponding to a proprietary gate.
+ corresponding to a proprietary gate.
- complete_target_discovered() is an optional entry point to let the driver
-perform additional proprietary processing necessary to auto activate the
-discovered target.
+ perform additional proprietary processing necessary to auto activate the
+ discovered target.
- im_transceive() must be implemented by the driver if proprietary HCI commands
-are required to send data to the tag. Some tag types will require custom
-commands, others can be written to using the standard HCI commands. The driver
-can check the tag type and either do proprietary processing, or return 1 to ask
-for standard processing. The data exchange command itself must be sent
-asynchronously.
+ are required to send data to the tag. Some tag types will require custom
+ commands, others can be written to using the standard HCI commands. The driver
+ can check the tag type and either do proprietary processing, or return 1 to ask
+ for standard processing. The data exchange command itself must be sent
+ asynchronously.
- tm_send() is called to send data in the case of a p2p connection
- check_presence() is an optional entry point that will be called regularly
-by the core to check that an activated tag is still in the field. If this is
-not implemented, the core will not be able to push tag_lost events to the user
-space
+ by the core to check that an activated tag is still in the field. If this is
+ not implemented, the core will not be able to push tag_lost events to the user
+ space
- event_received() is called to handle an event coming from the chip. Driver
-can handle the event or return 1 to let HCI attempt standard processing.
+ can handle the event or return 1 to let HCI attempt standard processing.
On the rx path, the driver is responsible to push incoming HCP frames to HCI
using nfc_hci_recv_frame(). HCI will take care of re-aggregation and handling
@@ -122,20 +125,23 @@ This must be done from a context that can sleep.
PHY Management
--------------
-The physical link (i2c, ...) management is defined by the following structure:
+The physical link (i2c, ...) management is defined by the following structure::
-struct nfc_phy_ops {
+ struct nfc_phy_ops {
int (*write)(void *dev_id, struct sk_buff *skb);
int (*enable)(void *dev_id);
void (*disable)(void *dev_id);
-};
+ };
-enable(): turn the phy on (power on), make it ready to transfer data
-disable(): turn the phy off
-write(): Send a data frame to the chip. Note that to enable higher
-layers such as an llc to store the frame for re-emission, this function must
-not alter the skb. It must also not return a positive result (return 0 for
-success, negative for failure).
+enable():
+ turn the phy on (power on), make it ready to transfer data
+disable():
+ turn the phy off
+write():
+ Send a data frame to the chip. Note that to enable higher
+ layers such as an llc to store the frame for re-emission, this
+ function must not alter the skb. It must also not return a positive
+ result (return 0 for success, negative for failure).
Data coming from the chip shall be sent directly to nfc_hci_recv_frame().
@@ -145,9 +151,9 @@ LLC
Communication between the CPU and the chip often requires some link layer
protocol. Those are isolated as modules managed by the HCI layer. There are
currently two modules : nop (raw transfert) and shdlc.
-A new llc must implement the following functions:
+A new llc must implement the following functions::
-struct nfc_llc_ops {
+ struct nfc_llc_ops {
void *(*init) (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, xmit_to_drv_t xmit_to_drv,
rcv_to_hci_t rcv_to_hci, int tx_headroom,
int tx_tailroom, int *rx_headroom, int *rx_tailroom,
@@ -157,17 +163,25 @@ struct nfc_llc_ops {
int (*stop) (struct nfc_llc *llc);
void (*rcv_from_drv) (struct nfc_llc *llc, struct sk_buff *skb);
int (*xmit_from_hci) (struct nfc_llc *llc, struct sk_buff *skb);
-};
+ };
-- init() : allocate and init your private storage
-- deinit() : cleanup
-- start() : establish the logical connection
-- stop () : terminate the logical connection
-- rcv_from_drv() : handle data coming from the chip, going to HCI
-- xmit_from_hci() : handle data sent by HCI, going to the chip
+init():
+ allocate and init your private storage
+deinit():
+ cleanup
+start():
+ establish the logical connection
+stop ():
+ terminate the logical connection
+rcv_from_drv():
+ handle data coming from the chip, going to HCI
+xmit_from_hci():
+ handle data sent by HCI, going to the chip
The llc must be registered with nfc before it can be used. Do that by
-calling nfc_llc_register(const char *name, struct nfc_llc_ops *ops);
+calling::
+
+ nfc_llc_register(const char *name, struct nfc_llc_ops *ops);
Again, note that the llc does not handle the physical link. It is thus very
easy to mix any physical link with any llc for a given chip driver.
@@ -187,26 +201,32 @@ fast, cannot sleep. sends incoming frames to HCI where they are passed to
the current llc. In case of shdlc, the frame is queued in shdlc rx queue.
- SHDLC State Machine worker (SMW)
-Only when llc_shdlc is used: handles shdlc rx & tx queues.
-Dispatches HCI cmd responses.
+
+ Only when llc_shdlc is used: handles shdlc rx & tx queues.
+
+ Dispatches HCI cmd responses.
- HCI Tx Cmd worker (MSGTXWQ)
-Serializes execution of HCI commands. Completes execution in case of response
-timeout.
+
+ Serializes execution of HCI commands.
+
+ Completes execution in case of response timeout.
- HCI Rx worker (MSGRXWQ)
-Dispatches incoming HCI commands or events.
+
+ Dispatches incoming HCI commands or events.
- Syscall context from a userspace call (SYSCALL)
-Any entrypoint in HCI called from NFC Core
+
+ Any entrypoint in HCI called from NFC Core
Workflow executing an HCI command (using shdlc)
-----------------------------------------------
Executing an HCI command can easily be performed synchronously using the
-following API:
+following API::
-int nfc_hci_send_cmd (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 gate, u8 cmd,
+ int nfc_hci_send_cmd (struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 gate, u8 cmd,
const u8 *param, size_t param_len, struct sk_buff **skb)
The API must be invoked from a context that can sleep. Most of the time, this
@@ -234,11 +254,11 @@ waiting command execution. Response processing involves invoking the completion
callback that was provided by nfc_hci_msg_tx_work() when it sent the command.
The completion callback will then wake the syscall context.
-It is also possible to execute the command asynchronously using this API:
+It is also possible to execute the command asynchronously using this API::
-static int nfc_hci_execute_cmd_async(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 pipe, u8 cmd,
- const u8 *param, size_t param_len,
- data_exchange_cb_t cb, void *cb_context)
+ static int nfc_hci_execute_cmd_async(struct nfc_hci_dev *hdev, u8 pipe, u8 cmd,
+ const u8 *param, size_t param_len,
+ data_exchange_cb_t cb, void *cb_context)
The workflow is the same, except that the API call returns immediately, and
the callback will be called with the result from the SMW context.
@@ -268,23 +288,24 @@ went wrong below and know that expected events will probably never happen.
Handling of these errors is done as follows:
- driver (pn544) fails to deliver an incoming frame: it stores the error such
-that any subsequent call to the driver will result in this error. Then it calls
-the standard nfc_shdlc_recv_frame() with a NULL argument to report the problem
-above. shdlc stores a EREMOTEIO sticky status, which will trigger SMW to
-report above in turn.
+ that any subsequent call to the driver will result in this error. Then it
+ calls the standard nfc_shdlc_recv_frame() with a NULL argument to report the
+ problem above. shdlc stores a EREMOTEIO sticky status, which will trigger
+ SMW to report above in turn.
- SMW is basically a background thread to handle incoming and outgoing shdlc
-frames. This thread will also check the shdlc sticky status and report to HCI
-when it discovers it is not able to run anymore because of an unrecoverable
-error that happened within shdlc or below. If the problem occurs during shdlc
-connection, the error is reported through the connect completion.
+ frames. This thread will also check the shdlc sticky status and report to HCI
+ when it discovers it is not able to run anymore because of an unrecoverable
+ error that happened within shdlc or below. If the problem occurs during shdlc
+ connection, the error is reported through the connect completion.
- HCI: if an internal HCI error happens (frame is lost), or HCI is reported an
-error from a lower layer, HCI will either complete the currently executing
-command with that error, or notify NFC Core directly if no command is executing.
+ error from a lower layer, HCI will either complete the currently executing
+ command with that error, or notify NFC Core directly if no command is
+ executing.
- NFC Core: when NFC Core is notified of an error from below and polling is
-active, it will send a tag discovered event with an empty tag list to the user
-space to let it know that the poll operation will never be able to detect a tag.
-If polling is not active and the error was sticky, lower levels will return it
-at next invocation.
+ active, it will send a tag discovered event with an empty tag list to the user
+ space to let it know that the poll operation will never be able to detect a
+ tag. If polling is not active and the error was sticky, lower levels will
+ return it at next invocation.
diff --git a/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.txt b/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.rst
similarity index 82%
rename from Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.txt
rename to Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.rst
index b36ca14ca2d6..6b2d8aae0c4e 100644
--- a/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.txt
+++ b/Documentation/nfc/nfc-pn544.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,7 @@
-Kernel driver for the NXP Semiconductors PN544 Near Field
-Communication chip
+============================================================================
+Kernel driver for the NXP Semiconductors PN544 Near Field Communication chip
+============================================================================
+
General
-------
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 25/29] docs: md: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (23 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 24/29] docs: nfc: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (3 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
Rename the md documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/md/index.rst | 12 ++
.../md/{md-cluster.txt => md-cluster.rst} | 188 ++++++++++++------
.../md/{raid5-cache.txt => raid5-cache.rst} | 28 +--
.../md/{raid5-ppl.txt => raid5-ppl.rst} | 2 +
4 files changed, 153 insertions(+), 77 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 Documentation/md/index.rst
rename Documentation/md/{md-cluster.txt => md-cluster.rst} (68%)
rename Documentation/md/{raid5-cache.txt => raid5-cache.rst} (92%)
rename Documentation/md/{raid5-ppl.txt => raid5-ppl.rst} (98%)
diff --git a/Documentation/md/index.rst b/Documentation/md/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..c4db34ed327d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/md/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+:orphan:
+
+====
+RAID
+====
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ md-cluster
+ raid5-cache
+ raid5-ppl
diff --git a/Documentation/md/md-cluster.txt b/Documentation/md/md-cluster.rst
similarity index 68%
rename from Documentation/md/md-cluster.txt
rename to Documentation/md/md-cluster.rst
index e1055f105cf5..96eb52cec7eb 100644
--- a/Documentation/md/md-cluster.txt
+++ b/Documentation/md/md-cluster.rst
@@ -1,19 +1,24 @@
+==========
+MD Cluster
+==========
+
The cluster MD is a shared-device RAID for a cluster, it supports
two levels: raid1 and raid10 (limited support).
1. On-disk format
+=================
Separate write-intent-bitmaps are used for each cluster node.
The bitmaps record all writes that may have been started on that node,
-and may not yet have finished. The on-disk layout is:
+and may not yet have finished. The on-disk layout is::
-0 4k 8k 12k
--------------------------------------------------------------------
-| idle | md super | bm super [0] + bits |
-| bm bits[0, contd] | bm super[1] + bits | bm bits[1, contd] |
-| bm super[2] + bits | bm bits [2, contd] | bm super[3] + bits |
-| bm bits [3, contd] | | |
+ 0 4k 8k 12k
+ -------------------------------------------------------------------
+ | idle | md super | bm super [0] + bits |
+ | bm bits[0, contd] | bm super[1] + bits | bm bits[1, contd] |
+ | bm super[2] + bits | bm bits [2, contd] | bm super[3] + bits |
+ | bm bits [3, contd] | | |
During "normal" functioning we assume the filesystem ensures that only
one node writes to any given block at a time, so a write request will
@@ -28,10 +33,12 @@ node) is writing.
2. DLM Locks for management
+===========================
There are three groups of locks for managing the device:
2.1 Bitmap lock resource (bm_lockres)
+-------------------------------------
The bm_lockres protects individual node bitmaps. They are named in
the form bitmap000 for node 1, bitmap001 for node 2 and so on. When a
@@ -48,6 +55,7 @@ There are three groups of locks for managing the device:
joins the cluster.
2.2 Message passing locks
+-------------------------
Each node has to communicate with other nodes when starting or ending
resync, and for metadata superblock updates. This communication is
@@ -55,116 +63,155 @@ There are three groups of locks for managing the device:
with the Lock Value Block (LVB) of one of the "message" lock.
2.3 new-device management
+-------------------------
A single lock: "no-new-dev" is used to co-ordinate the addition of
new devices - this must be synchronized across the array.
Normally all nodes hold a concurrent-read lock on this device.
3. Communication
+================
Messages can be broadcast to all nodes, and the sender waits for all
other nodes to acknowledge the message before proceeding. Only one
message can be processed at a time.
3.1 Message Types
+-----------------
There are six types of messages which are passed:
- 3.1.1 METADATA_UPDATED: informs other nodes that the metadata has
+3.1.1 METADATA_UPDATED
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+ informs other nodes that the metadata has
been updated, and the node must re-read the md superblock. This is
performed synchronously. It is primarily used to signal device
failure.
- 3.1.2 RESYNCING: informs other nodes that a resync is initiated or
+3.1.2 RESYNCING
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+ informs other nodes that a resync is initiated or
ended so that each node may suspend or resume the region. Each
RESYNCING message identifies a range of the devices that the
sending node is about to resync. This overrides any previous
notification from that node: only one ranged can be resynced at a
time per-node.
- 3.1.3 NEWDISK: informs other nodes that a device is being added to
+3.1.3 NEWDISK
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+ informs other nodes that a device is being added to
the array. Message contains an identifier for that device. See
below for further details.
- 3.1.4 REMOVE: A failed or spare device is being removed from the
+3.1.4 REMOVE
+^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+ A failed or spare device is being removed from the
array. The slot-number of the device is included in the message.
- 3.1.5 RE_ADD: A failed device is being re-activated - the assumption
+ 3.1.5 RE_ADD:
+
+ A failed device is being re-activated - the assumption
is that it has been determined to be working again.
- 3.1.6 BITMAP_NEEDS_SYNC: if a node is stopped locally but the bitmap
+ 3.1.6 BITMAP_NEEDS_SYNC:
+
+ If a node is stopped locally but the bitmap
isn't clean, then another node is informed to take the ownership of
resync.
3.2 Communication mechanism
+---------------------------
The DLM LVB is used to communicate within nodes of the cluster. There
are three resources used for the purpose:
- 3.2.1 token: The resource which protects the entire communication
+3.2.1 token
+^^^^^^^^^^^
+ The resource which protects the entire communication
system. The node having the token resource is allowed to
communicate.
- 3.2.2 message: The lock resource which carries the data to
- communicate.
+3.2.2 message
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+ The lock resource which carries the data to communicate.
- 3.2.3 ack: The resource, acquiring which means the message has been
+3.2.3 ack
+^^^^^^^^^
+
+ The resource, acquiring which means the message has been
acknowledged by all nodes in the cluster. The BAST of the resource
is used to inform the receiving node that a node wants to
communicate.
The algorithm is:
- 1. receive status - all nodes have concurrent-reader lock on "ack".
+ 1. receive status - all nodes have concurrent-reader lock on "ack"::
- sender receiver receiver
- "ack":CR "ack":CR "ack":CR
+ sender receiver receiver
+ "ack":CR "ack":CR "ack":CR
- 2. sender get EX on "token"
- sender get EX on "message"
- sender receiver receiver
- "token":EX "ack":CR "ack":CR
- "message":EX
- "ack":CR
+ 2. sender get EX on "token",
+ sender get EX on "message"::
+
+ sender receiver receiver
+ "token":EX "ack":CR "ack":CR
+ "message":EX
+ "ack":CR
Sender checks that it still needs to send a message. Messages
received or other events that happened while waiting for the
"token" may have made this message inappropriate or redundant.
- 3. sender writes LVB.
+ 3. sender writes LVB
+
sender down-convert "message" from EX to CW
+
sender try to get EX of "ack"
- [ wait until all receivers have *processed* the "message" ]
-
- [ triggered by bast of "ack" ]
- receiver get CR on "message"
- receiver read LVB
- receiver processes the message
- [ wait finish ]
- receiver releases "ack"
- receiver tries to get PR on "message"
-
- sender receiver receiver
- "token":EX "message":CR "message":CR
- "message":CW
- "ack":EX
+
+ ::
+
+ [ wait until all receivers have *processed* the "message" ]
+
+ [ triggered by bast of "ack" ]
+ receiver get CR on "message"
+ receiver read LVB
+ receiver processes the message
+ [ wait finish ]
+ receiver releases "ack"
+ receiver tries to get PR on "message"
+
+ sender receiver receiver
+ "token":EX "message":CR "message":CR
+ "message":CW
+ "ack":EX
4. triggered by grant of EX on "ack" (indicating all receivers
have processed message)
+
sender down-converts "ack" from EX to CR
+
sender releases "message"
+
sender releases "token"
- receiver upconvert to PR on "message"
- receiver get CR of "ack"
- receiver release "message"
- sender receiver receiver
- "ack":CR "ack":CR "ack":CR
+ ::
+
+ receiver upconvert to PR on "message"
+ receiver get CR of "ack"
+ receiver release "message"
+
+ sender receiver receiver
+ "ack":CR "ack":CR "ack":CR
4. Handling Failures
+====================
4.1 Node Failure
+----------------
When a node fails, the DLM informs the cluster with the slot
number. The node starts a cluster recovery thread. The cluster
@@ -177,11 +224,11 @@ The algorithm is:
- cleans the bitmap of the failed node
- releases bitmap<number> lock of the failed node
- initiates resync of the bitmap on the current node
- md_check_recovery is invoked within recover_bitmaps,
- then md_check_recovery -> metadata_update_start/finish,
- it will lock the communication by lock_comm.
- Which means when one node is resyncing it blocks all
- other nodes from writing anywhere on the array.
+ md_check_recovery is invoked within recover_bitmaps,
+ then md_check_recovery -> metadata_update_start/finish,
+ it will lock the communication by lock_comm.
+ Which means when one node is resyncing it blocks all
+ other nodes from writing anywhere on the array.
The resync process is the regular md resync. However, in a clustered
environment when a resync is performed, it needs to tell other nodes
@@ -198,6 +245,7 @@ The algorithm is:
particular I/O range should be suspended or not.
4.2 Device Failure
+==================
Device failures are handled and communicated with the metadata update
routine. When a node detects a device failure it does not allow
@@ -205,38 +253,41 @@ The algorithm is:
acknowledged by all other nodes.
5. Adding a new Device
+----------------------
For adding a new device, it is necessary that all nodes "see" the new
device to be added. For this, the following algorithm is used:
- 1. Node 1 issues mdadm --manage /dev/mdX --add /dev/sdYY which issues
+ 1. Node 1 issues mdadm --manage /dev/mdX --add /dev/sdYY which issues
ioctl(ADD_NEW_DISK with disc.state set to MD_DISK_CLUSTER_ADD)
- 2. Node 1 sends a NEWDISK message with uuid and slot number
- 3. Other nodes issue kobject_uevent_env with uuid and slot number
+ 2. Node 1 sends a NEWDISK message with uuid and slot number
+ 3. Other nodes issue kobject_uevent_env with uuid and slot number
(Steps 4,5 could be a udev rule)
- 4. In userspace, the node searches for the disk, perhaps
+ 4. In userspace, the node searches for the disk, perhaps
using blkid -t SUB_UUID=""
- 5. Other nodes issue either of the following depending on whether
+ 5. Other nodes issue either of the following depending on whether
the disk was found:
ioctl(ADD_NEW_DISK with disc.state set to MD_DISK_CANDIDATE and
- disc.number set to slot number)
+ disc.number set to slot number)
ioctl(CLUSTERED_DISK_NACK)
- 6. Other nodes drop lock on "no-new-devs" (CR) if device is found
- 7. Node 1 attempts EX lock on "no-new-dev"
- 8. If node 1 gets the lock, it sends METADATA_UPDATED after
+ 6. Other nodes drop lock on "no-new-devs" (CR) if device is found
+ 7. Node 1 attempts EX lock on "no-new-dev"
+ 8. If node 1 gets the lock, it sends METADATA_UPDATED after
unmarking the disk as SpareLocal
- 9. If not (get "no-new-dev" lock), it fails the operation and sends
+ 9. If not (get "no-new-dev" lock), it fails the operation and sends
METADATA_UPDATED.
10. Other nodes get the information whether a disk is added or not
by the following METADATA_UPDATED.
-6. Module interface.
+6. Module interface
+===================
There are 17 call-backs which the md core can make to the cluster
module. Understanding these can give a good overview of the whole
process.
6.1 join(nodes) and leave()
+---------------------------
These are called when an array is started with a clustered bitmap,
and when the array is stopped. join() ensures the cluster is
@@ -244,11 +295,13 @@ The algorithm is:
Only the first 'nodes' nodes in the cluster can use the array.
6.2 slot_number()
+-----------------
Reports the slot number advised by the cluster infrastructure.
Range is from 0 to nodes-1.
6.3 resync_info_update()
+------------------------
This updates the resync range that is stored in the bitmap lock.
The starting point is updated as the resync progresses. The
@@ -256,6 +309,7 @@ The algorithm is:
It does *not* send a RESYNCING message.
6.4 resync_start(), resync_finish()
+-----------------------------------
These are called when resync/recovery/reshape starts or stops.
They update the resyncing range in the bitmap lock and also
@@ -265,8 +319,8 @@ The algorithm is:
resync_finish() also sends a BITMAP_NEEDS_SYNC message which
allows some other node to take over.
-6.5 metadata_update_start(), metadata_update_finish(),
- metadata_update_cancel().
+6.5 metadata_update_start(), metadata_update_finish(), metadata_update_cancel()
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
metadata_update_start is used to get exclusive access to
the metadata. If a change is still needed once that access is
@@ -275,6 +329,7 @@ The algorithm is:
can be used to release the lock.
6.6 area_resyncing()
+--------------------
This combines two elements of functionality.
@@ -289,6 +344,7 @@ The algorithm is:
a node failure.
6.7 add_new_disk_start(), add_new_disk_finish(), new_disk_ack()
+---------------------------------------------------------------
These are used to manage the new-disk protocol described above.
When a new device is added, add_new_disk_start() is called before
@@ -300,17 +356,20 @@ The algorithm is:
new_disk_ack() is called.
6.8 remove_disk()
+-----------------
This is called when a spare or failed device is removed from
the array. It causes a REMOVE message to be send to other nodes.
6.9 gather_bitmaps()
+--------------------
This sends a RE_ADD message to all other nodes and then
gathers bitmap information from all bitmaps. This combined
bitmap is then used to recovery the re-added device.
6.10 lock_all_bitmaps() and unlock_all_bitmaps()
+------------------------------------------------
These are called when change bitmap to none. If a node plans
to clear the cluster raid's bitmap, it need to make sure no other
@@ -319,6 +378,7 @@ The algorithm is:
accordingly.
7. Unsupported features
+=======================
There are somethings which are not supported by cluster MD yet.
diff --git a/Documentation/md/raid5-cache.txt b/Documentation/md/raid5-cache.rst
similarity index 92%
rename from Documentation/md/raid5-cache.txt
rename to Documentation/md/raid5-cache.rst
index 2b210f295786..d7a15f44a7c3 100644
--- a/Documentation/md/raid5-cache.txt
+++ b/Documentation/md/raid5-cache.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
-RAID5 cache
+================
+RAID 4/5/6 cache
+================
Raid 4/5/6 could include an extra disk for data cache besides normal RAID
disks. The role of RAID disks isn't changed with the cache disk. The cache disk
@@ -6,19 +8,19 @@ caches data to the RAID disks. The cache can be in write-through (supported
since 4.4) or write-back mode (supported since 4.10). mdadm (supported since
3.4) has a new option '--write-journal' to create array with cache. Please
refer to mdadm manual for details. By default (RAID array starts), the cache is
-in write-through mode. A user can switch it to write-back mode by:
+in write-through mode. A user can switch it to write-back mode by::
-echo "write-back" > /sys/block/md0/md/journal_mode
+ echo "write-back" > /sys/block/md0/md/journal_mode
-And switch it back to write-through mode by:
+And switch it back to write-through mode by::
-echo "write-through" > /sys/block/md0/md/journal_mode
+ echo "write-through" > /sys/block/md0/md/journal_mode
In both modes, all writes to the array will hit cache disk first. This means
the cache disk must be fast and sustainable.
--------------------------------------
-write-through mode:
+write-through mode
+==================
This mode mainly fixes the 'write hole' issue. For RAID 4/5/6 array, an unclean
shutdown can cause data in some stripes to not be in consistent state, eg, data
@@ -42,8 +44,8 @@ exposed to 'write hole' again.
In write-through mode, the cache disk isn't required to be big. Several
hundreds megabytes are enough.
---------------------------------------
-write-back mode:
+write-back mode
+===============
write-back mode fixes the 'write hole' issue too, since all write data is
cached on cache disk. But the main goal of 'write-back' cache is to speed up
@@ -64,16 +66,16 @@ data loss.
In write-back mode, MD also caches data in memory. The memory cache includes
the same data stored on cache disk, so a power loss doesn't cause data loss.
The memory cache size has performance impact for the array. It's recommended
-the size is big. A user can configure the size by:
+the size is big. A user can configure the size by::
-echo "2048" > /sys/block/md0/md/stripe_cache_size
+ echo "2048" > /sys/block/md0/md/stripe_cache_size
Too small cache disk will make the write aggregation less efficient in this
mode depending on the workloads. It's recommended to use a cache disk with at
least several gigabytes size in write-back mode.
---------------------------------------
-The implementation:
+The implementation
+==================
The write-through and write-back cache use the same disk format. The cache disk
is organized as a simple write log. The log consists of 'meta data' and 'data'
diff --git a/Documentation/md/raid5-ppl.txt b/Documentation/md/raid5-ppl.rst
similarity index 98%
rename from Documentation/md/raid5-ppl.txt
rename to Documentation/md/raid5-ppl.rst
index bfa092589e00..357e5515bc55 100644
--- a/Documentation/md/raid5-ppl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/md/raid5-ppl.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,6 @@
+==================
Partial Parity Log
+==================
Partial Parity Log (PPL) is a feature available for RAID5 arrays. The issue
addressed by PPL is that after a dirty shutdown, parity of a particular stripe
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 26/29] docs: mtd: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 02/29] docs: lcd-panel-cgram.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (27 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Miquel Raynal, Richard Weinberger,
David Woodhouse, Brian Norris, Marek Vasut, Vignesh Raghavendra,
linux-mtd
Rename the mtd documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
It should be noticed that Sphinx doesn't handle very well
URLs with dots in the middle. Thankfully, internally, the '.'
char is translated to %2E, so we can jus use %2E instead of
dots, and this will work fine on both text and processed files.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/mtd/index.rst | 12 +
.../mtd/{intel-spi.txt => intel-spi.rst} | 46 +-
.../mtd/{nand_ecc.txt => nand_ecc.rst} | 481 ++++++++++--------
.../mtd/{spi-nor.txt => spi-nor.rst} | 7 +-
drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand_ecc.c | 2 +-
5 files changed, 306 insertions(+), 242 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 Documentation/mtd/index.rst
rename Documentation/mtd/{intel-spi.txt => intel-spi.rst} (71%)
rename Documentation/mtd/{nand_ecc.txt => nand_ecc.rst} (67%)
rename Documentation/mtd/{spi-nor.txt => spi-nor.rst} (94%)
diff --git a/Documentation/mtd/index.rst b/Documentation/mtd/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4fdae418ac97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/mtd/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+:orphan:
+
+==============================
+Memory Technology Device (MTD)
+==============================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ intel-spi
+ nand_ecc
+ spi-nor
diff --git a/Documentation/mtd/intel-spi.txt b/Documentation/mtd/intel-spi.rst
similarity index 71%
rename from Documentation/mtd/intel-spi.txt
rename to Documentation/mtd/intel-spi.rst
index bc357729c2cb..0e6d9cd5388d 100644
--- a/Documentation/mtd/intel-spi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mtd/intel-spi.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+==============================
Upgrading BIOS using intel-spi
-------------------------------
+==============================
Many Intel CPUs like Baytrail and Braswell include SPI serial flash host
controller which is used to hold BIOS and other platform specific data.
@@ -36,45 +37,45 @@ Linux.
module parameter to modprobe).
4) Once the board is up and running again, find the right MTD partition
- (it is named as "BIOS"):
+ (it is named as "BIOS")::
- # cat /proc/mtd
- dev: size erasesize name
- mtd0: 00800000 00001000 "BIOS"
+ # cat /proc/mtd
+ dev: size erasesize name
+ mtd0: 00800000 00001000 "BIOS"
So here it will be /dev/mtd0 but it may vary.
- 5) Make backup of the existing image first:
+ 5) Make backup of the existing image first::
- # dd if=/dev/mtd0ro of=bios.bak
- 16384+0 records in
- 16384+0 records out
- 8388608 bytes (8.4 MB) copied, 10.0269 s, 837 kB/s
+ # dd if=/dev/mtd0ro of=bios.bak
+ 16384+0 records in
+ 16384+0 records out
+ 8388608 bytes (8.4 MB) copied, 10.0269 s, 837 kB/s
- 6) Verify the backup
+ 6) Verify the backup:
- # sha1sum /dev/mtd0ro bios.bak
- fdbb011920572ca6c991377c4b418a0502668b73 /dev/mtd0ro
- fdbb011920572ca6c991377c4b418a0502668b73 bios.bak
+ # sha1sum /dev/mtd0ro bios.bak
+ fdbb011920572ca6c991377c4b418a0502668b73 /dev/mtd0ro
+ fdbb011920572ca6c991377c4b418a0502668b73 bios.bak
The SHA1 sums must match. Otherwise do not continue any further!
7) Erase the SPI serial flash. After this step, do not reboot the
- board! Otherwise it will not start anymore.
+ board! Otherwise it will not start anymore::
- # flash_erase /dev/mtd0 0 0
- Erasing 4 Kibyte @ 7ff000 -- 100 % complete
+ # flash_erase /dev/mtd0 0 0
+ Erasing 4 Kibyte @ 7ff000 -- 100 % complete
8) Once completed without errors you can write the new BIOS image:
# dd if=MNW2MAX1.X64.0092.R01.1605221712.bin of=/dev/mtd0
9) Verify that the new content of the SPI serial flash matches the new
- BIOS image:
+ BIOS image::
- # sha1sum /dev/mtd0ro MNW2MAX1.X64.0092.R01.1605221712.bin
- 9b4df9e4be2057fceec3a5529ec3d950836c87a2 /dev/mtd0ro
- 9b4df9e4be2057fceec3a5529ec3d950836c87a2 MNW2MAX1.X64.0092.R01.1605221712.bin
+ # sha1sum /dev/mtd0ro MNW2MAX1.X64.0092.R01.1605221712.bin
+ 9b4df9e4be2057fceec3a5529ec3d950836c87a2 /dev/mtd0ro
+ 9b4df9e4be2057fceec3a5529ec3d950836c87a2 MNW2MAX1.X64.0092.R01.1605221712.bin
The SHA1 sums should match.
@@ -84,5 +85,6 @@ Linux.
References
----------
-[1] https://firmware.intel.com/sites/default/files/MinnowBoard.MAX_.X64.92.R01.zip
+[1] https://firmware.intel.com/sites/default/files/MinnowBoard%2EMAX_%2EX64%2E92%2ER01%2Ezip
+
[2] http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/
diff --git a/Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.txt b/Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.rst
similarity index 67%
rename from Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.txt
rename to Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.rst
index f8c3284bf6a7..e8d3c53a5056 100644
--- a/Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+==========================
+NAND Error-correction Code
+==========================
+
Introduction
============
@@ -37,63 +41,79 @@ sometimes also referred to as xor. In C the operator for xor is ^
Back to ecc.
Let's give a small figure:
+========= ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== === === === === ====
byte 0: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp0 rp2 rp4 ... rp14
byte 1: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp1 rp2 rp4 ... rp14
byte 2: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp0 rp3 rp4 ... rp14
byte 3: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp1 rp3 rp4 ... rp14
byte 4: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp0 rp2 rp5 ... rp14
-....
+...
byte 254: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp0 rp3 rp5 ... rp15
byte 255: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp1 rp3 rp5 ... rp15
cp1 cp0 cp1 cp0 cp1 cp0 cp1 cp0
cp3 cp3 cp2 cp2 cp3 cp3 cp2 cp2
cp5 cp5 cp5 cp5 cp4 cp4 cp4 cp4
+========= ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== === === === === ====
This figure represents a sector of 256 bytes.
cp is my abbreviation for column parity, rp for row parity.
Let's start to explain column parity.
-cp0 is the parity that belongs to all bit0, bit2, bit4, bit6.
-so the sum of all bit0, bit2, bit4 and bit6 values + cp0 itself is even.
+
+- cp0 is the parity that belongs to all bit0, bit2, bit4, bit6.
+
+ so the sum of all bit0, bit2, bit4 and bit6 values + cp0 itself is even.
+
Similarly cp1 is the sum of all bit1, bit3, bit5 and bit7.
-cp2 is the parity over bit0, bit1, bit4 and bit5
-cp3 is the parity over bit2, bit3, bit6 and bit7.
-cp4 is the parity over bit0, bit1, bit2 and bit3.
-cp5 is the parity over bit4, bit5, bit6 and bit7.
+
+- cp2 is the parity over bit0, bit1, bit4 and bit5
+- cp3 is the parity over bit2, bit3, bit6 and bit7.
+- cp4 is the parity over bit0, bit1, bit2 and bit3.
+- cp5 is the parity over bit4, bit5, bit6 and bit7.
+
Note that each of cp0 .. cp5 is exactly one bit.
Row parity actually works almost the same.
-rp0 is the parity of all even bytes (0, 2, 4, 6, ... 252, 254)
-rp1 is the parity of all odd bytes (1, 3, 5, 7, ..., 253, 255)
-rp2 is the parity of all bytes 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9, ...
-(so handle two bytes, then skip 2 bytes).
-rp3 is covers the half rp2 does not cover (bytes 2, 3, 6, 7, 10, 11, ...)
-for rp4 the rule is cover 4 bytes, skip 4 bytes, cover 4 bytes, skip 4 etc.
-so rp4 calculates parity over bytes 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, ...)
-and rp5 covers the other half, so bytes 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, ..
+
+- rp0 is the parity of all even bytes (0, 2, 4, 6, ... 252, 254)
+- rp1 is the parity of all odd bytes (1, 3, 5, 7, ..., 253, 255)
+- rp2 is the parity of all bytes 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9, ...
+ (so handle two bytes, then skip 2 bytes).
+- rp3 is covers the half rp2 does not cover (bytes 2, 3, 6, 7, 10, 11, ...)
+- for rp4 the rule is cover 4 bytes, skip 4 bytes, cover 4 bytes, skip 4 etc.
+
+ so rp4 calculates parity over bytes 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, ...)
+- and rp5 covers the other half, so bytes 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, ..
+
The story now becomes quite boring. I guess you get the idea.
-rp6 covers 8 bytes then skips 8 etc
-rp7 skips 8 bytes then covers 8 etc
-rp8 covers 16 bytes then skips 16 etc
-rp9 skips 16 bytes then covers 16 etc
-rp10 covers 32 bytes then skips 32 etc
-rp11 skips 32 bytes then covers 32 etc
-rp12 covers 64 bytes then skips 64 etc
-rp13 skips 64 bytes then covers 64 etc
-rp14 covers 128 bytes then skips 128
-rp15 skips 128 bytes then covers 128
+
+- rp6 covers 8 bytes then skips 8 etc
+- rp7 skips 8 bytes then covers 8 etc
+- rp8 covers 16 bytes then skips 16 etc
+- rp9 skips 16 bytes then covers 16 etc
+- rp10 covers 32 bytes then skips 32 etc
+- rp11 skips 32 bytes then covers 32 etc
+- rp12 covers 64 bytes then skips 64 etc
+- rp13 skips 64 bytes then covers 64 etc
+- rp14 covers 128 bytes then skips 128
+- rp15 skips 128 bytes then covers 128
In the end the parity bits are grouped together in three bytes as
follows:
+
+===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== =====
ECC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
+===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== =====
ECC 0 rp07 rp06 rp05 rp04 rp03 rp02 rp01 rp00
ECC 1 rp15 rp14 rp13 rp12 rp11 rp10 rp09 rp08
ECC 2 cp5 cp4 cp3 cp2 cp1 cp0 1 1
+===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== =====
I detected after writing this that ST application note AN1823
(http://www.st.com/stonline/) gives a much
nicer picture.(but they use line parity as term where I use row parity)
Oh well, I'm graphically challenged, so suffer with me for a moment :-)
+
And I could not reuse the ST picture anyway for copyright reasons.
@@ -101,9 +121,10 @@ Attempt 0
=========
Implementing the parity calculation is pretty simple.
-In C pseudocode:
-for (i = 0; i < 256; i++)
-{
+In C pseudocode::
+
+ for (i = 0; i < 256; i++)
+ {
if (i & 0x01)
rp1 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp1;
else
@@ -142,7 +163,7 @@ for (i = 0; i < 256; i++)
cp3 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ cp3
cp4 = bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ cp4
cp5 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ cp5
-}
+ }
Analysis 0
@@ -167,82 +188,84 @@ This leads to:
Attempt 1
=========
-const char parity[256] = {
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0
-};
+::
-void ecc1(const unsigned char *buf, unsigned char *code)
-{
- int i;
- const unsigned char *bp = buf;
- unsigned char cur;
- unsigned char rp0, rp1, rp2, rp3, rp4, rp5, rp6, rp7;
- unsigned char rp8, rp9, rp10, rp11, rp12, rp13, rp14, rp15;
- unsigned char par;
+ const char parity[256] = {
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0
+ };
- par = 0;
- rp0 = 0; rp1 = 0; rp2 = 0; rp3 = 0;
- rp4 = 0; rp5 = 0; rp6 = 0; rp7 = 0;
- rp8 = 0; rp9 = 0; rp10 = 0; rp11 = 0;
- rp12 = 0; rp13 = 0; rp14 = 0; rp15 = 0;
+ void ecc1(const unsigned char *buf, unsigned char *code)
+ {
+ int i;
+ const unsigned char *bp = buf;
+ unsigned char cur;
+ unsigned char rp0, rp1, rp2, rp3, rp4, rp5, rp6, rp7;
+ unsigned char rp8, rp9, rp10, rp11, rp12, rp13, rp14, rp15;
+ unsigned char par;
- for (i = 0; i < 256; i++)
- {
- cur = *bp++;
- par ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x01) rp1 ^= cur; else rp0 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x02) rp3 ^= cur; else rp2 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x04) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x08) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x10) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x20) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x40) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x80) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur;
- }
- code[0] =
- (parity[rp7] << 7) |
- (parity[rp6] << 6) |
- (parity[rp5] << 5) |
- (parity[rp4] << 4) |
- (parity[rp3] << 3) |
- (parity[rp2] << 2) |
- (parity[rp1] << 1) |
- (parity[rp0]);
- code[1] =
- (parity[rp15] << 7) |
- (parity[rp14] << 6) |
- (parity[rp13] << 5) |
- (parity[rp12] << 4) |
- (parity[rp11] << 3) |
- (parity[rp10] << 2) |
- (parity[rp9] << 1) |
- (parity[rp8]);
- code[2] =
- (parity[par & 0xf0] << 7) |
- (parity[par & 0x0f] << 6) |
- (parity[par & 0xcc] << 5) |
- (parity[par & 0x33] << 4) |
- (parity[par & 0xaa] << 3) |
- (parity[par & 0x55] << 2);
- code[0] = ~code[0];
- code[1] = ~code[1];
- code[2] = ~code[2];
-}
+ par = 0;
+ rp0 = 0; rp1 = 0; rp2 = 0; rp3 = 0;
+ rp4 = 0; rp5 = 0; rp6 = 0; rp7 = 0;
+ rp8 = 0; rp9 = 0; rp10 = 0; rp11 = 0;
+ rp12 = 0; rp13 = 0; rp14 = 0; rp15 = 0;
+
+ for (i = 0; i < 256; i++)
+ {
+ cur = *bp++;
+ par ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x01) rp1 ^= cur; else rp0 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x02) rp3 ^= cur; else rp2 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x04) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x08) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x10) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x20) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x40) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x80) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur;
+ }
+ code[0] =
+ (parity[rp7] << 7) |
+ (parity[rp6] << 6) |
+ (parity[rp5] << 5) |
+ (parity[rp4] << 4) |
+ (parity[rp3] << 3) |
+ (parity[rp2] << 2) |
+ (parity[rp1] << 1) |
+ (parity[rp0]);
+ code[1] =
+ (parity[rp15] << 7) |
+ (parity[rp14] << 6) |
+ (parity[rp13] << 5) |
+ (parity[rp12] << 4) |
+ (parity[rp11] << 3) |
+ (parity[rp10] << 2) |
+ (parity[rp9] << 1) |
+ (parity[rp8]);
+ code[2] =
+ (parity[par & 0xf0] << 7) |
+ (parity[par & 0x0f] << 6) |
+ (parity[par & 0xcc] << 5) |
+ (parity[par & 0x33] << 4) |
+ (parity[par & 0xaa] << 3) |
+ (parity[par & 0x55] << 2);
+ code[0] = ~code[0];
+ code[1] = ~code[1];
+ code[2] = ~code[2];
+ }
Still pretty straightforward. The last three invert statements are there to
give a checksum of 0xff 0xff 0xff for an empty flash. In an empty flash
@@ -293,88 +316,90 @@ Let's give it a try...
Attempt 2
=========
-extern const char parity[256];
+::
-void ecc2(const unsigned char *buf, unsigned char *code)
-{
- int i;
- const unsigned long *bp = (unsigned long *)buf;
- unsigned long cur;
- unsigned long rp0, rp1, rp2, rp3, rp4, rp5, rp6, rp7;
- unsigned long rp8, rp9, rp10, rp11, rp12, rp13, rp14, rp15;
- unsigned long par;
+ extern const char parity[256];
- par = 0;
- rp0 = 0; rp1 = 0; rp2 = 0; rp3 = 0;
- rp4 = 0; rp5 = 0; rp6 = 0; rp7 = 0;
- rp8 = 0; rp9 = 0; rp10 = 0; rp11 = 0;
- rp12 = 0; rp13 = 0; rp14 = 0; rp15 = 0;
+ void ecc2(const unsigned char *buf, unsigned char *code)
+ {
+ int i;
+ const unsigned long *bp = (unsigned long *)buf;
+ unsigned long cur;
+ unsigned long rp0, rp1, rp2, rp3, rp4, rp5, rp6, rp7;
+ unsigned long rp8, rp9, rp10, rp11, rp12, rp13, rp14, rp15;
+ unsigned long par;
- for (i = 0; i < 64; i++)
- {
- cur = *bp++;
- par ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur;
- }
- /*
- we need to adapt the code generation for the fact that rp vars are now
- long; also the column parity calculation needs to be changed.
- we'll bring rp4 to 15 back to single byte entities by shifting and
- xoring
- */
- rp4 ^= (rp4 >> 16); rp4 ^= (rp4 >> 8); rp4 &= 0xff;
- rp5 ^= (rp5 >> 16); rp5 ^= (rp5 >> 8); rp5 &= 0xff;
- rp6 ^= (rp6 >> 16); rp6 ^= (rp6 >> 8); rp6 &= 0xff;
- rp7 ^= (rp7 >> 16); rp7 ^= (rp7 >> 8); rp7 &= 0xff;
- rp8 ^= (rp8 >> 16); rp8 ^= (rp8 >> 8); rp8 &= 0xff;
- rp9 ^= (rp9 >> 16); rp9 ^= (rp9 >> 8); rp9 &= 0xff;
- rp10 ^= (rp10 >> 16); rp10 ^= (rp10 >> 8); rp10 &= 0xff;
- rp11 ^= (rp11 >> 16); rp11 ^= (rp11 >> 8); rp11 &= 0xff;
- rp12 ^= (rp12 >> 16); rp12 ^= (rp12 >> 8); rp12 &= 0xff;
- rp13 ^= (rp13 >> 16); rp13 ^= (rp13 >> 8); rp13 &= 0xff;
- rp14 ^= (rp14 >> 16); rp14 ^= (rp14 >> 8); rp14 &= 0xff;
- rp15 ^= (rp15 >> 16); rp15 ^= (rp15 >> 8); rp15 &= 0xff;
- rp3 = (par >> 16); rp3 ^= (rp3 >> 8); rp3 &= 0xff;
- rp2 = par & 0xffff; rp2 ^= (rp2 >> 8); rp2 &= 0xff;
- par ^= (par >> 16);
- rp1 = (par >> 8); rp1 &= 0xff;
- rp0 = (par & 0xff);
- par ^= (par >> 8); par &= 0xff;
+ par = 0;
+ rp0 = 0; rp1 = 0; rp2 = 0; rp3 = 0;
+ rp4 = 0; rp5 = 0; rp6 = 0; rp7 = 0;
+ rp8 = 0; rp9 = 0; rp10 = 0; rp11 = 0;
+ rp12 = 0; rp13 = 0; rp14 = 0; rp15 = 0;
- code[0] =
- (parity[rp7] << 7) |
- (parity[rp6] << 6) |
- (parity[rp5] << 5) |
- (parity[rp4] << 4) |
- (parity[rp3] << 3) |
- (parity[rp2] << 2) |
- (parity[rp1] << 1) |
- (parity[rp0]);
- code[1] =
- (parity[rp15] << 7) |
- (parity[rp14] << 6) |
- (parity[rp13] << 5) |
- (parity[rp12] << 4) |
- (parity[rp11] << 3) |
- (parity[rp10] << 2) |
- (parity[rp9] << 1) |
- (parity[rp8]);
- code[2] =
- (parity[par & 0xf0] << 7) |
- (parity[par & 0x0f] << 6) |
- (parity[par & 0xcc] << 5) |
- (parity[par & 0x33] << 4) |
- (parity[par & 0xaa] << 3) |
- (parity[par & 0x55] << 2);
- code[0] = ~code[0];
- code[1] = ~code[1];
- code[2] = ~code[2];
-}
+ for (i = 0; i < 64; i++)
+ {
+ cur = *bp++;
+ par ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur;
+ }
+ /*
+ we need to adapt the code generation for the fact that rp vars are now
+ long; also the column parity calculation needs to be changed.
+ we'll bring rp4 to 15 back to single byte entities by shifting and
+ xoring
+ */
+ rp4 ^= (rp4 >> 16); rp4 ^= (rp4 >> 8); rp4 &= 0xff;
+ rp5 ^= (rp5 >> 16); rp5 ^= (rp5 >> 8); rp5 &= 0xff;
+ rp6 ^= (rp6 >> 16); rp6 ^= (rp6 >> 8); rp6 &= 0xff;
+ rp7 ^= (rp7 >> 16); rp7 ^= (rp7 >> 8); rp7 &= 0xff;
+ rp8 ^= (rp8 >> 16); rp8 ^= (rp8 >> 8); rp8 &= 0xff;
+ rp9 ^= (rp9 >> 16); rp9 ^= (rp9 >> 8); rp9 &= 0xff;
+ rp10 ^= (rp10 >> 16); rp10 ^= (rp10 >> 8); rp10 &= 0xff;
+ rp11 ^= (rp11 >> 16); rp11 ^= (rp11 >> 8); rp11 &= 0xff;
+ rp12 ^= (rp12 >> 16); rp12 ^= (rp12 >> 8); rp12 &= 0xff;
+ rp13 ^= (rp13 >> 16); rp13 ^= (rp13 >> 8); rp13 &= 0xff;
+ rp14 ^= (rp14 >> 16); rp14 ^= (rp14 >> 8); rp14 &= 0xff;
+ rp15 ^= (rp15 >> 16); rp15 ^= (rp15 >> 8); rp15 &= 0xff;
+ rp3 = (par >> 16); rp3 ^= (rp3 >> 8); rp3 &= 0xff;
+ rp2 = par & 0xffff; rp2 ^= (rp2 >> 8); rp2 &= 0xff;
+ par ^= (par >> 16);
+ rp1 = (par >> 8); rp1 &= 0xff;
+ rp0 = (par & 0xff);
+ par ^= (par >> 8); par &= 0xff;
+
+ code[0] =
+ (parity[rp7] << 7) |
+ (parity[rp6] << 6) |
+ (parity[rp5] << 5) |
+ (parity[rp4] << 4) |
+ (parity[rp3] << 3) |
+ (parity[rp2] << 2) |
+ (parity[rp1] << 1) |
+ (parity[rp0]);
+ code[1] =
+ (parity[rp15] << 7) |
+ (parity[rp14] << 6) |
+ (parity[rp13] << 5) |
+ (parity[rp12] << 4) |
+ (parity[rp11] << 3) |
+ (parity[rp10] << 2) |
+ (parity[rp9] << 1) |
+ (parity[rp8]);
+ code[2] =
+ (parity[par & 0xf0] << 7) |
+ (parity[par & 0x0f] << 6) |
+ (parity[par & 0xcc] << 5) |
+ (parity[par & 0x33] << 4) |
+ (parity[par & 0xaa] << 3) |
+ (parity[par & 0x55] << 2);
+ code[0] = ~code[0];
+ code[1] = ~code[1];
+ code[2] = ~code[2];
+ }
The parity array is not shown any more. Note also that for these
examples I kinda deviated from my regular programming style by allowing
@@ -403,28 +428,32 @@ lookups
Attempt 3
=========
-Odd replaced:
- if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur;
-with
- if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur;
+Odd replaced::
- and outside the loop added:
- rp4 = par ^ rp5;
- rp6 = par ^ rp7;
- rp8 = par ^ rp9;
- rp10 = par ^ rp11;
- rp12 = par ^ rp13;
- rp14 = par ^ rp15;
+ if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur;
+
+with::
+
+ if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur;
+
+and outside the loop added::
+
+ rp4 = par ^ rp5;
+ rp6 = par ^ rp7;
+ rp8 = par ^ rp9;
+ rp10 = par ^ rp11;
+ rp12 = par ^ rp13;
+ rp14 = par ^ rp15;
And after that the code takes about 30% more time, although the number of
statements is reduced. This is also reflected in the assembly code.
@@ -448,7 +477,7 @@ Attempt 4
=========
Unrolled the loop 1, 2, 3 and 4 times.
-For 4 the code starts with:
+For 4 the code starts with::
for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
{
@@ -471,8 +500,11 @@ Analysis 4
==========
Unrolling once gains about 15%
+
Unrolling twice keeps the gain at about 15%
+
Unrolling three times gives a gain of 30% compared to attempt 2.
+
Unrolling four times gives a marginal improvement compared to unrolling
three times.
@@ -492,8 +524,10 @@ Attempt 5
Effectively so all odd digit rp assignments in the loop were removed.
This included the else clause of the if statements.
-Of course after the loop we need to correct things by adding code like:
+Of course after the loop we need to correct things by adding code like::
+
rp5 = par ^ rp4;
+
Also the initial assignments (rp5 = 0; etc) could be removed.
Along the line I also removed the initialisation of rp0/1/2/3.
@@ -513,7 +547,7 @@ statement. Time for yet another version!
Attempt 6
=========
-THe code within the for loop was changed to:
+THe code within the for loop was changed to::
for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
{
@@ -564,13 +598,17 @@ million iterations in order not to lose too much accuracy. This one
definitely seemed to be the jackpot!
There is a little bit more room for improvement though. There are three
-places with statements:
-rp4 ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur;
+places with statements::
+
+ rp4 ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur;
+
It seems more efficient to also maintain a variable rp4_6 in the while
loop; This eliminates 3 statements per loop. Of course after the loop we
-need to correct by adding:
- rp4 ^= rp4_6;
- rp6 ^= rp4_6
+need to correct by adding::
+
+ rp4 ^= rp4_6;
+ rp6 ^= rp4_6
+
Furthermore there are 4 sequential assignments to rp8. This can be
encoded slightly more efficiently by saving tmppar before those 4 lines
and later do rp8 = rp8 ^ tmppar ^ notrp8;
@@ -582,7 +620,7 @@ Time for a new test!
Attempt 7
=========
-The new code now looks like:
+The new code now looks like::
for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
{
@@ -644,9 +682,12 @@ Although it seems that the code within the loop cannot be optimised
further there is still room to optimize the generation of the ecc codes.
We can simply calculate the total parity. If this is 0 then rp4 = rp5
etc. If the parity is 1, then rp4 = !rp5;
+
But if rp4 = rp5 we do not need rp5 etc. We can just write the even bits
-in the result byte and then do something like
+in the result byte and then do something like::
+
code[0] |= (code[0] << 1);
+
Lets test this.
@@ -657,11 +698,13 @@ Changed the code but again this slightly degrades performance. Tried all
kind of other things, like having dedicated parity arrays to avoid the
shift after parity[rp7] << 7; No gain.
Change the lookup using the parity array by using shift operators (e.g.
-replace parity[rp7] << 7 with:
-rp7 ^= (rp7 << 4);
-rp7 ^= (rp7 << 2);
-rp7 ^= (rp7 << 1);
-rp7 &= 0x80;
+replace parity[rp7] << 7 with::
+
+ rp7 ^= (rp7 << 4);
+ rp7 ^= (rp7 << 2);
+ rp7 ^= (rp7 << 1);
+ rp7 &= 0x80;
+
No gain.
The only marginal change was inverting the parity bits, so we can remove
@@ -683,13 +726,16 @@ Correcting errors
For correcting errors I again used the ST application note as a starter,
but I also peeked at the existing code.
+
The algorithm itself is pretty straightforward. Just xor the given and
the calculated ecc. If all bytes are 0 there is no problem. If 11 bits
are 1 we have one correctable bit error. If there is 1 bit 1, we have an
error in the given ecc code.
+
It proved to be fastest to do some table lookups. Performance gain
introduced by this is about a factor 2 on my system when a repair had to
be done, and 1% or so if no repair had to be done.
+
Code size increased from 330 bytes to 686 bytes for this function.
(gcc 4.2, -O3)
@@ -700,8 +746,10 @@ Conclusion
The gain when calculating the ecc is tremendous. Om my development hardware
a speedup of a factor of 18 for ecc calculation was achieved. On a test on an
embedded system with a MIPS core a factor 7 was obtained.
+
On a test with a Linksys NSLU2 (ARMv5TE processor) the speedup was a factor
5 (big endian mode, gcc 4.1.2, -O3)
+
For correction not much gain could be obtained (as bitflips are rare). Then
again there are also much less cycles spent there.
@@ -711,4 +759,5 @@ out of it with an assembler program, but due to pipeline behaviour etc
this is very tricky (at least for intel hw).
Author: Frans Meulenbroeks
+
Copyright (C) 2008 Koninklijke Philips Electronics NV.
diff --git a/Documentation/mtd/spi-nor.txt b/Documentation/mtd/spi-nor.rst
similarity index 94%
rename from Documentation/mtd/spi-nor.txt
rename to Documentation/mtd/spi-nor.rst
index da1fbff5a24c..f5333e3bf486 100644
--- a/Documentation/mtd/spi-nor.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mtd/spi-nor.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- SPI NOR framework
- ============================================
+=================
+SPI NOR framework
+=================
Part I - Why do we need this framework?
---------------------------------------
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ This framework just adds a new layer between the MTD and the SPI bus driver.
With this new layer, the SPI NOR controller driver does not depend on the
m25p80 code anymore.
- Before this framework, the layer is like:
+Before this framework, the layer is like::
MTD
------------------------
diff --git a/drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand_ecc.c b/drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand_ecc.c
index 223fbd8052b3..f6a7808db818 100644
--- a/drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand_ecc.c
+++ b/drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand_ecc.c
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
* Thomas Gleixner (tglx@linutronix.de)
*
* Information on how this algorithm works and how it was developed
- * can be found in Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.txt
+ * can be found in Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.rst
*/
#include <linux/types.h>
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 26/29] docs: mtd: convert to ReST
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
0 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Vignesh Raghavendra, Jonathan Corbet, Richard Weinberger,
linux-kernel, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Marek Vasut, linux-mtd,
Miquel Raynal, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Brian Norris,
David Woodhouse
Rename the mtd documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
It should be noticed that Sphinx doesn't handle very well
URLs with dots in the middle. Thankfully, internally, the '.'
char is translated to %2E, so we can jus use %2E instead of
dots, and this will work fine on both text and processed files.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/mtd/index.rst | 12 +
.../mtd/{intel-spi.txt => intel-spi.rst} | 46 +-
.../mtd/{nand_ecc.txt => nand_ecc.rst} | 481 ++++++++++--------
.../mtd/{spi-nor.txt => spi-nor.rst} | 7 +-
drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand_ecc.c | 2 +-
5 files changed, 306 insertions(+), 242 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 Documentation/mtd/index.rst
rename Documentation/mtd/{intel-spi.txt => intel-spi.rst} (71%)
rename Documentation/mtd/{nand_ecc.txt => nand_ecc.rst} (67%)
rename Documentation/mtd/{spi-nor.txt => spi-nor.rst} (94%)
diff --git a/Documentation/mtd/index.rst b/Documentation/mtd/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..4fdae418ac97
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/mtd/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+:orphan:
+
+==============================
+Memory Technology Device (MTD)
+==============================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ intel-spi
+ nand_ecc
+ spi-nor
diff --git a/Documentation/mtd/intel-spi.txt b/Documentation/mtd/intel-spi.rst
similarity index 71%
rename from Documentation/mtd/intel-spi.txt
rename to Documentation/mtd/intel-spi.rst
index bc357729c2cb..0e6d9cd5388d 100644
--- a/Documentation/mtd/intel-spi.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mtd/intel-spi.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
+==============================
Upgrading BIOS using intel-spi
-------------------------------
+==============================
Many Intel CPUs like Baytrail and Braswell include SPI serial flash host
controller which is used to hold BIOS and other platform specific data.
@@ -36,45 +37,45 @@ Linux.
module parameter to modprobe).
4) Once the board is up and running again, find the right MTD partition
- (it is named as "BIOS"):
+ (it is named as "BIOS")::
- # cat /proc/mtd
- dev: size erasesize name
- mtd0: 00800000 00001000 "BIOS"
+ # cat /proc/mtd
+ dev: size erasesize name
+ mtd0: 00800000 00001000 "BIOS"
So here it will be /dev/mtd0 but it may vary.
- 5) Make backup of the existing image first:
+ 5) Make backup of the existing image first::
- # dd if=/dev/mtd0ro of=bios.bak
- 16384+0 records in
- 16384+0 records out
- 8388608 bytes (8.4 MB) copied, 10.0269 s, 837 kB/s
+ # dd if=/dev/mtd0ro of=bios.bak
+ 16384+0 records in
+ 16384+0 records out
+ 8388608 bytes (8.4 MB) copied, 10.0269 s, 837 kB/s
- 6) Verify the backup
+ 6) Verify the backup:
- # sha1sum /dev/mtd0ro bios.bak
- fdbb011920572ca6c991377c4b418a0502668b73 /dev/mtd0ro
- fdbb011920572ca6c991377c4b418a0502668b73 bios.bak
+ # sha1sum /dev/mtd0ro bios.bak
+ fdbb011920572ca6c991377c4b418a0502668b73 /dev/mtd0ro
+ fdbb011920572ca6c991377c4b418a0502668b73 bios.bak
The SHA1 sums must match. Otherwise do not continue any further!
7) Erase the SPI serial flash. After this step, do not reboot the
- board! Otherwise it will not start anymore.
+ board! Otherwise it will not start anymore::
- # flash_erase /dev/mtd0 0 0
- Erasing 4 Kibyte @ 7ff000 -- 100 % complete
+ # flash_erase /dev/mtd0 0 0
+ Erasing 4 Kibyte @ 7ff000 -- 100 % complete
8) Once completed without errors you can write the new BIOS image:
# dd if=MNW2MAX1.X64.0092.R01.1605221712.bin of=/dev/mtd0
9) Verify that the new content of the SPI serial flash matches the new
- BIOS image:
+ BIOS image::
- # sha1sum /dev/mtd0ro MNW2MAX1.X64.0092.R01.1605221712.bin
- 9b4df9e4be2057fceec3a5529ec3d950836c87a2 /dev/mtd0ro
- 9b4df9e4be2057fceec3a5529ec3d950836c87a2 MNW2MAX1.X64.0092.R01.1605221712.bin
+ # sha1sum /dev/mtd0ro MNW2MAX1.X64.0092.R01.1605221712.bin
+ 9b4df9e4be2057fceec3a5529ec3d950836c87a2 /dev/mtd0ro
+ 9b4df9e4be2057fceec3a5529ec3d950836c87a2 MNW2MAX1.X64.0092.R01.1605221712.bin
The SHA1 sums should match.
@@ -84,5 +85,6 @@ Linux.
References
----------
-[1] https://firmware.intel.com/sites/default/files/MinnowBoard.MAX_.X64.92.R01.zip
+[1] https://firmware.intel.com/sites/default/files/MinnowBoard%2EMAX_%2EX64%2E92%2ER01%2Ezip
+
[2] http://www.linux-mtd.infradead.org/
diff --git a/Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.txt b/Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.rst
similarity index 67%
rename from Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.txt
rename to Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.rst
index f8c3284bf6a7..e8d3c53a5056 100644
--- a/Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+==========================
+NAND Error-correction Code
+==========================
+
Introduction
============
@@ -37,63 +41,79 @@ sometimes also referred to as xor. In C the operator for xor is ^
Back to ecc.
Let's give a small figure:
+========= ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== === === === === ====
byte 0: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp0 rp2 rp4 ... rp14
byte 1: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp1 rp2 rp4 ... rp14
byte 2: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp0 rp3 rp4 ... rp14
byte 3: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp1 rp3 rp4 ... rp14
byte 4: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp0 rp2 rp5 ... rp14
-....
+...
byte 254: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp0 rp3 rp5 ... rp15
byte 255: bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0 rp1 rp3 rp5 ... rp15
cp1 cp0 cp1 cp0 cp1 cp0 cp1 cp0
cp3 cp3 cp2 cp2 cp3 cp3 cp2 cp2
cp5 cp5 cp5 cp5 cp4 cp4 cp4 cp4
+========= ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== ==== === === === === ====
This figure represents a sector of 256 bytes.
cp is my abbreviation for column parity, rp for row parity.
Let's start to explain column parity.
-cp0 is the parity that belongs to all bit0, bit2, bit4, bit6.
-so the sum of all bit0, bit2, bit4 and bit6 values + cp0 itself is even.
+
+- cp0 is the parity that belongs to all bit0, bit2, bit4, bit6.
+
+ so the sum of all bit0, bit2, bit4 and bit6 values + cp0 itself is even.
+
Similarly cp1 is the sum of all bit1, bit3, bit5 and bit7.
-cp2 is the parity over bit0, bit1, bit4 and bit5
-cp3 is the parity over bit2, bit3, bit6 and bit7.
-cp4 is the parity over bit0, bit1, bit2 and bit3.
-cp5 is the parity over bit4, bit5, bit6 and bit7.
+
+- cp2 is the parity over bit0, bit1, bit4 and bit5
+- cp3 is the parity over bit2, bit3, bit6 and bit7.
+- cp4 is the parity over bit0, bit1, bit2 and bit3.
+- cp5 is the parity over bit4, bit5, bit6 and bit7.
+
Note that each of cp0 .. cp5 is exactly one bit.
Row parity actually works almost the same.
-rp0 is the parity of all even bytes (0, 2, 4, 6, ... 252, 254)
-rp1 is the parity of all odd bytes (1, 3, 5, 7, ..., 253, 255)
-rp2 is the parity of all bytes 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9, ...
-(so handle two bytes, then skip 2 bytes).
-rp3 is covers the half rp2 does not cover (bytes 2, 3, 6, 7, 10, 11, ...)
-for rp4 the rule is cover 4 bytes, skip 4 bytes, cover 4 bytes, skip 4 etc.
-so rp4 calculates parity over bytes 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, ...)
-and rp5 covers the other half, so bytes 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, ..
+
+- rp0 is the parity of all even bytes (0, 2, 4, 6, ... 252, 254)
+- rp1 is the parity of all odd bytes (1, 3, 5, 7, ..., 253, 255)
+- rp2 is the parity of all bytes 0, 1, 4, 5, 8, 9, ...
+ (so handle two bytes, then skip 2 bytes).
+- rp3 is covers the half rp2 does not cover (bytes 2, 3, 6, 7, 10, 11, ...)
+- for rp4 the rule is cover 4 bytes, skip 4 bytes, cover 4 bytes, skip 4 etc.
+
+ so rp4 calculates parity over bytes 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11, 16, ...)
+- and rp5 covers the other half, so bytes 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 13, 14, 15, 20, ..
+
The story now becomes quite boring. I guess you get the idea.
-rp6 covers 8 bytes then skips 8 etc
-rp7 skips 8 bytes then covers 8 etc
-rp8 covers 16 bytes then skips 16 etc
-rp9 skips 16 bytes then covers 16 etc
-rp10 covers 32 bytes then skips 32 etc
-rp11 skips 32 bytes then covers 32 etc
-rp12 covers 64 bytes then skips 64 etc
-rp13 skips 64 bytes then covers 64 etc
-rp14 covers 128 bytes then skips 128
-rp15 skips 128 bytes then covers 128
+
+- rp6 covers 8 bytes then skips 8 etc
+- rp7 skips 8 bytes then covers 8 etc
+- rp8 covers 16 bytes then skips 16 etc
+- rp9 skips 16 bytes then covers 16 etc
+- rp10 covers 32 bytes then skips 32 etc
+- rp11 skips 32 bytes then covers 32 etc
+- rp12 covers 64 bytes then skips 64 etc
+- rp13 skips 64 bytes then covers 64 etc
+- rp14 covers 128 bytes then skips 128
+- rp15 skips 128 bytes then covers 128
In the end the parity bits are grouped together in three bytes as
follows:
+
+===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== =====
ECC Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
+===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== =====
ECC 0 rp07 rp06 rp05 rp04 rp03 rp02 rp01 rp00
ECC 1 rp15 rp14 rp13 rp12 rp11 rp10 rp09 rp08
ECC 2 cp5 cp4 cp3 cp2 cp1 cp0 1 1
+===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== =====
I detected after writing this that ST application note AN1823
(http://www.st.com/stonline/) gives a much
nicer picture.(but they use line parity as term where I use row parity)
Oh well, I'm graphically challenged, so suffer with me for a moment :-)
+
And I could not reuse the ST picture anyway for copyright reasons.
@@ -101,9 +121,10 @@ Attempt 0
=========
Implementing the parity calculation is pretty simple.
-In C pseudocode:
-for (i = 0; i < 256; i++)
-{
+In C pseudocode::
+
+ for (i = 0; i < 256; i++)
+ {
if (i & 0x01)
rp1 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ rp1;
else
@@ -142,7 +163,7 @@ for (i = 0; i < 256; i++)
cp3 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit3 ^ bit2 ^ cp3
cp4 = bit3 ^ bit2 ^ bit1 ^ bit0 ^ cp4
cp5 = bit7 ^ bit6 ^ bit5 ^ bit4 ^ cp5
-}
+ }
Analysis 0
@@ -167,82 +188,84 @@ This leads to:
Attempt 1
=========
-const char parity[256] = {
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
- 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0
-};
+::
-void ecc1(const unsigned char *buf, unsigned char *code)
-{
- int i;
- const unsigned char *bp = buf;
- unsigned char cur;
- unsigned char rp0, rp1, rp2, rp3, rp4, rp5, rp6, rp7;
- unsigned char rp8, rp9, rp10, rp11, rp12, rp13, rp14, rp15;
- unsigned char par;
+ const char parity[256] = {
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1,
+ 0, 1, 1, 0, 1, 0, 0, 1, 1, 0, 0, 1, 0, 1, 1, 0
+ };
- par = 0;
- rp0 = 0; rp1 = 0; rp2 = 0; rp3 = 0;
- rp4 = 0; rp5 = 0; rp6 = 0; rp7 = 0;
- rp8 = 0; rp9 = 0; rp10 = 0; rp11 = 0;
- rp12 = 0; rp13 = 0; rp14 = 0; rp15 = 0;
+ void ecc1(const unsigned char *buf, unsigned char *code)
+ {
+ int i;
+ const unsigned char *bp = buf;
+ unsigned char cur;
+ unsigned char rp0, rp1, rp2, rp3, rp4, rp5, rp6, rp7;
+ unsigned char rp8, rp9, rp10, rp11, rp12, rp13, rp14, rp15;
+ unsigned char par;
- for (i = 0; i < 256; i++)
- {
- cur = *bp++;
- par ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x01) rp1 ^= cur; else rp0 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x02) rp3 ^= cur; else rp2 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x04) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x08) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x10) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x20) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x40) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x80) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur;
- }
- code[0] =
- (parity[rp7] << 7) |
- (parity[rp6] << 6) |
- (parity[rp5] << 5) |
- (parity[rp4] << 4) |
- (parity[rp3] << 3) |
- (parity[rp2] << 2) |
- (parity[rp1] << 1) |
- (parity[rp0]);
- code[1] =
- (parity[rp15] << 7) |
- (parity[rp14] << 6) |
- (parity[rp13] << 5) |
- (parity[rp12] << 4) |
- (parity[rp11] << 3) |
- (parity[rp10] << 2) |
- (parity[rp9] << 1) |
- (parity[rp8]);
- code[2] =
- (parity[par & 0xf0] << 7) |
- (parity[par & 0x0f] << 6) |
- (parity[par & 0xcc] << 5) |
- (parity[par & 0x33] << 4) |
- (parity[par & 0xaa] << 3) |
- (parity[par & 0x55] << 2);
- code[0] = ~code[0];
- code[1] = ~code[1];
- code[2] = ~code[2];
-}
+ par = 0;
+ rp0 = 0; rp1 = 0; rp2 = 0; rp3 = 0;
+ rp4 = 0; rp5 = 0; rp6 = 0; rp7 = 0;
+ rp8 = 0; rp9 = 0; rp10 = 0; rp11 = 0;
+ rp12 = 0; rp13 = 0; rp14 = 0; rp15 = 0;
+
+ for (i = 0; i < 256; i++)
+ {
+ cur = *bp++;
+ par ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x01) rp1 ^= cur; else rp0 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x02) rp3 ^= cur; else rp2 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x04) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x08) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x10) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x20) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x40) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x80) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur;
+ }
+ code[0] =
+ (parity[rp7] << 7) |
+ (parity[rp6] << 6) |
+ (parity[rp5] << 5) |
+ (parity[rp4] << 4) |
+ (parity[rp3] << 3) |
+ (parity[rp2] << 2) |
+ (parity[rp1] << 1) |
+ (parity[rp0]);
+ code[1] =
+ (parity[rp15] << 7) |
+ (parity[rp14] << 6) |
+ (parity[rp13] << 5) |
+ (parity[rp12] << 4) |
+ (parity[rp11] << 3) |
+ (parity[rp10] << 2) |
+ (parity[rp9] << 1) |
+ (parity[rp8]);
+ code[2] =
+ (parity[par & 0xf0] << 7) |
+ (parity[par & 0x0f] << 6) |
+ (parity[par & 0xcc] << 5) |
+ (parity[par & 0x33] << 4) |
+ (parity[par & 0xaa] << 3) |
+ (parity[par & 0x55] << 2);
+ code[0] = ~code[0];
+ code[1] = ~code[1];
+ code[2] = ~code[2];
+ }
Still pretty straightforward. The last three invert statements are there to
give a checksum of 0xff 0xff 0xff for an empty flash. In an empty flash
@@ -293,88 +316,90 @@ Let's give it a try...
Attempt 2
=========
-extern const char parity[256];
+::
-void ecc2(const unsigned char *buf, unsigned char *code)
-{
- int i;
- const unsigned long *bp = (unsigned long *)buf;
- unsigned long cur;
- unsigned long rp0, rp1, rp2, rp3, rp4, rp5, rp6, rp7;
- unsigned long rp8, rp9, rp10, rp11, rp12, rp13, rp14, rp15;
- unsigned long par;
+ extern const char parity[256];
- par = 0;
- rp0 = 0; rp1 = 0; rp2 = 0; rp3 = 0;
- rp4 = 0; rp5 = 0; rp6 = 0; rp7 = 0;
- rp8 = 0; rp9 = 0; rp10 = 0; rp11 = 0;
- rp12 = 0; rp13 = 0; rp14 = 0; rp15 = 0;
+ void ecc2(const unsigned char *buf, unsigned char *code)
+ {
+ int i;
+ const unsigned long *bp = (unsigned long *)buf;
+ unsigned long cur;
+ unsigned long rp0, rp1, rp2, rp3, rp4, rp5, rp6, rp7;
+ unsigned long rp8, rp9, rp10, rp11, rp12, rp13, rp14, rp15;
+ unsigned long par;
- for (i = 0; i < 64; i++)
- {
- cur = *bp++;
- par ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur;
- }
- /*
- we need to adapt the code generation for the fact that rp vars are now
- long; also the column parity calculation needs to be changed.
- we'll bring rp4 to 15 back to single byte entities by shifting and
- xoring
- */
- rp4 ^= (rp4 >> 16); rp4 ^= (rp4 >> 8); rp4 &= 0xff;
- rp5 ^= (rp5 >> 16); rp5 ^= (rp5 >> 8); rp5 &= 0xff;
- rp6 ^= (rp6 >> 16); rp6 ^= (rp6 >> 8); rp6 &= 0xff;
- rp7 ^= (rp7 >> 16); rp7 ^= (rp7 >> 8); rp7 &= 0xff;
- rp8 ^= (rp8 >> 16); rp8 ^= (rp8 >> 8); rp8 &= 0xff;
- rp9 ^= (rp9 >> 16); rp9 ^= (rp9 >> 8); rp9 &= 0xff;
- rp10 ^= (rp10 >> 16); rp10 ^= (rp10 >> 8); rp10 &= 0xff;
- rp11 ^= (rp11 >> 16); rp11 ^= (rp11 >> 8); rp11 &= 0xff;
- rp12 ^= (rp12 >> 16); rp12 ^= (rp12 >> 8); rp12 &= 0xff;
- rp13 ^= (rp13 >> 16); rp13 ^= (rp13 >> 8); rp13 &= 0xff;
- rp14 ^= (rp14 >> 16); rp14 ^= (rp14 >> 8); rp14 &= 0xff;
- rp15 ^= (rp15 >> 16); rp15 ^= (rp15 >> 8); rp15 &= 0xff;
- rp3 = (par >> 16); rp3 ^= (rp3 >> 8); rp3 &= 0xff;
- rp2 = par & 0xffff; rp2 ^= (rp2 >> 8); rp2 &= 0xff;
- par ^= (par >> 16);
- rp1 = (par >> 8); rp1 &= 0xff;
- rp0 = (par & 0xff);
- par ^= (par >> 8); par &= 0xff;
+ par = 0;
+ rp0 = 0; rp1 = 0; rp2 = 0; rp3 = 0;
+ rp4 = 0; rp5 = 0; rp6 = 0; rp7 = 0;
+ rp8 = 0; rp9 = 0; rp10 = 0; rp11 = 0;
+ rp12 = 0; rp13 = 0; rp14 = 0; rp15 = 0;
- code[0] =
- (parity[rp7] << 7) |
- (parity[rp6] << 6) |
- (parity[rp5] << 5) |
- (parity[rp4] << 4) |
- (parity[rp3] << 3) |
- (parity[rp2] << 2) |
- (parity[rp1] << 1) |
- (parity[rp0]);
- code[1] =
- (parity[rp15] << 7) |
- (parity[rp14] << 6) |
- (parity[rp13] << 5) |
- (parity[rp12] << 4) |
- (parity[rp11] << 3) |
- (parity[rp10] << 2) |
- (parity[rp9] << 1) |
- (parity[rp8]);
- code[2] =
- (parity[par & 0xf0] << 7) |
- (parity[par & 0x0f] << 6) |
- (parity[par & 0xcc] << 5) |
- (parity[par & 0x33] << 4) |
- (parity[par & 0xaa] << 3) |
- (parity[par & 0x55] << 2);
- code[0] = ~code[0];
- code[1] = ~code[1];
- code[2] = ~code[2];
-}
+ for (i = 0; i < 64; i++)
+ {
+ cur = *bp++;
+ par ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur;
+ }
+ /*
+ we need to adapt the code generation for the fact that rp vars are now
+ long; also the column parity calculation needs to be changed.
+ we'll bring rp4 to 15 back to single byte entities by shifting and
+ xoring
+ */
+ rp4 ^= (rp4 >> 16); rp4 ^= (rp4 >> 8); rp4 &= 0xff;
+ rp5 ^= (rp5 >> 16); rp5 ^= (rp5 >> 8); rp5 &= 0xff;
+ rp6 ^= (rp6 >> 16); rp6 ^= (rp6 >> 8); rp6 &= 0xff;
+ rp7 ^= (rp7 >> 16); rp7 ^= (rp7 >> 8); rp7 &= 0xff;
+ rp8 ^= (rp8 >> 16); rp8 ^= (rp8 >> 8); rp8 &= 0xff;
+ rp9 ^= (rp9 >> 16); rp9 ^= (rp9 >> 8); rp9 &= 0xff;
+ rp10 ^= (rp10 >> 16); rp10 ^= (rp10 >> 8); rp10 &= 0xff;
+ rp11 ^= (rp11 >> 16); rp11 ^= (rp11 >> 8); rp11 &= 0xff;
+ rp12 ^= (rp12 >> 16); rp12 ^= (rp12 >> 8); rp12 &= 0xff;
+ rp13 ^= (rp13 >> 16); rp13 ^= (rp13 >> 8); rp13 &= 0xff;
+ rp14 ^= (rp14 >> 16); rp14 ^= (rp14 >> 8); rp14 &= 0xff;
+ rp15 ^= (rp15 >> 16); rp15 ^= (rp15 >> 8); rp15 &= 0xff;
+ rp3 = (par >> 16); rp3 ^= (rp3 >> 8); rp3 &= 0xff;
+ rp2 = par & 0xffff; rp2 ^= (rp2 >> 8); rp2 &= 0xff;
+ par ^= (par >> 16);
+ rp1 = (par >> 8); rp1 &= 0xff;
+ rp0 = (par & 0xff);
+ par ^= (par >> 8); par &= 0xff;
+
+ code[0] =
+ (parity[rp7] << 7) |
+ (parity[rp6] << 6) |
+ (parity[rp5] << 5) |
+ (parity[rp4] << 4) |
+ (parity[rp3] << 3) |
+ (parity[rp2] << 2) |
+ (parity[rp1] << 1) |
+ (parity[rp0]);
+ code[1] =
+ (parity[rp15] << 7) |
+ (parity[rp14] << 6) |
+ (parity[rp13] << 5) |
+ (parity[rp12] << 4) |
+ (parity[rp11] << 3) |
+ (parity[rp10] << 2) |
+ (parity[rp9] << 1) |
+ (parity[rp8]);
+ code[2] =
+ (parity[par & 0xf0] << 7) |
+ (parity[par & 0x0f] << 6) |
+ (parity[par & 0xcc] << 5) |
+ (parity[par & 0x33] << 4) |
+ (parity[par & 0xaa] << 3) |
+ (parity[par & 0x55] << 2);
+ code[0] = ~code[0];
+ code[1] = ~code[1];
+ code[2] = ~code[2];
+ }
The parity array is not shown any more. Note also that for these
examples I kinda deviated from my regular programming style by allowing
@@ -403,28 +428,32 @@ lookups
Attempt 3
=========
-Odd replaced:
- if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur;
-with
- if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur;
- if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur;
+Odd replaced::
- and outside the loop added:
- rp4 = par ^ rp5;
- rp6 = par ^ rp7;
- rp8 = par ^ rp9;
- rp10 = par ^ rp11;
- rp12 = par ^ rp13;
- rp14 = par ^ rp15;
+ if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur; else rp4 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur; else rp6 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur; else rp8 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur; else rp10 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur; else rp12 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur; else rp14 ^= cur;
+
+with::
+
+ if (i & 0x01) rp5 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x02) rp7 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x04) rp9 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x08) rp11 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x10) rp13 ^= cur;
+ if (i & 0x20) rp15 ^= cur;
+
+and outside the loop added::
+
+ rp4 = par ^ rp5;
+ rp6 = par ^ rp7;
+ rp8 = par ^ rp9;
+ rp10 = par ^ rp11;
+ rp12 = par ^ rp13;
+ rp14 = par ^ rp15;
And after that the code takes about 30% more time, although the number of
statements is reduced. This is also reflected in the assembly code.
@@ -448,7 +477,7 @@ Attempt 4
=========
Unrolled the loop 1, 2, 3 and 4 times.
-For 4 the code starts with:
+For 4 the code starts with::
for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
{
@@ -471,8 +500,11 @@ Analysis 4
==========
Unrolling once gains about 15%
+
Unrolling twice keeps the gain at about 15%
+
Unrolling three times gives a gain of 30% compared to attempt 2.
+
Unrolling four times gives a marginal improvement compared to unrolling
three times.
@@ -492,8 +524,10 @@ Attempt 5
Effectively so all odd digit rp assignments in the loop were removed.
This included the else clause of the if statements.
-Of course after the loop we need to correct things by adding code like:
+Of course after the loop we need to correct things by adding code like::
+
rp5 = par ^ rp4;
+
Also the initial assignments (rp5 = 0; etc) could be removed.
Along the line I also removed the initialisation of rp0/1/2/3.
@@ -513,7 +547,7 @@ statement. Time for yet another version!
Attempt 6
=========
-THe code within the for loop was changed to:
+THe code within the for loop was changed to::
for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
{
@@ -564,13 +598,17 @@ million iterations in order not to lose too much accuracy. This one
definitely seemed to be the jackpot!
There is a little bit more room for improvement though. There are three
-places with statements:
-rp4 ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur;
+places with statements::
+
+ rp4 ^= cur; rp6 ^= cur;
+
It seems more efficient to also maintain a variable rp4_6 in the while
loop; This eliminates 3 statements per loop. Of course after the loop we
-need to correct by adding:
- rp4 ^= rp4_6;
- rp6 ^= rp4_6
+need to correct by adding::
+
+ rp4 ^= rp4_6;
+ rp6 ^= rp4_6
+
Furthermore there are 4 sequential assignments to rp8. This can be
encoded slightly more efficiently by saving tmppar before those 4 lines
and later do rp8 = rp8 ^ tmppar ^ notrp8;
@@ -582,7 +620,7 @@ Time for a new test!
Attempt 7
=========
-The new code now looks like:
+The new code now looks like::
for (i = 0; i < 4; i++)
{
@@ -644,9 +682,12 @@ Although it seems that the code within the loop cannot be optimised
further there is still room to optimize the generation of the ecc codes.
We can simply calculate the total parity. If this is 0 then rp4 = rp5
etc. If the parity is 1, then rp4 = !rp5;
+
But if rp4 = rp5 we do not need rp5 etc. We can just write the even bits
-in the result byte and then do something like
+in the result byte and then do something like::
+
code[0] |= (code[0] << 1);
+
Lets test this.
@@ -657,11 +698,13 @@ Changed the code but again this slightly degrades performance. Tried all
kind of other things, like having dedicated parity arrays to avoid the
shift after parity[rp7] << 7; No gain.
Change the lookup using the parity array by using shift operators (e.g.
-replace parity[rp7] << 7 with:
-rp7 ^= (rp7 << 4);
-rp7 ^= (rp7 << 2);
-rp7 ^= (rp7 << 1);
-rp7 &= 0x80;
+replace parity[rp7] << 7 with::
+
+ rp7 ^= (rp7 << 4);
+ rp7 ^= (rp7 << 2);
+ rp7 ^= (rp7 << 1);
+ rp7 &= 0x80;
+
No gain.
The only marginal change was inverting the parity bits, so we can remove
@@ -683,13 +726,16 @@ Correcting errors
For correcting errors I again used the ST application note as a starter,
but I also peeked at the existing code.
+
The algorithm itself is pretty straightforward. Just xor the given and
the calculated ecc. If all bytes are 0 there is no problem. If 11 bits
are 1 we have one correctable bit error. If there is 1 bit 1, we have an
error in the given ecc code.
+
It proved to be fastest to do some table lookups. Performance gain
introduced by this is about a factor 2 on my system when a repair had to
be done, and 1% or so if no repair had to be done.
+
Code size increased from 330 bytes to 686 bytes for this function.
(gcc 4.2, -O3)
@@ -700,8 +746,10 @@ Conclusion
The gain when calculating the ecc is tremendous. Om my development hardware
a speedup of a factor of 18 for ecc calculation was achieved. On a test on an
embedded system with a MIPS core a factor 7 was obtained.
+
On a test with a Linksys NSLU2 (ARMv5TE processor) the speedup was a factor
5 (big endian mode, gcc 4.1.2, -O3)
+
For correction not much gain could be obtained (as bitflips are rare). Then
again there are also much less cycles spent there.
@@ -711,4 +759,5 @@ out of it with an assembler program, but due to pipeline behaviour etc
this is very tricky (at least for intel hw).
Author: Frans Meulenbroeks
+
Copyright (C) 2008 Koninklijke Philips Electronics NV.
diff --git a/Documentation/mtd/spi-nor.txt b/Documentation/mtd/spi-nor.rst
similarity index 94%
rename from Documentation/mtd/spi-nor.txt
rename to Documentation/mtd/spi-nor.rst
index da1fbff5a24c..f5333e3bf486 100644
--- a/Documentation/mtd/spi-nor.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mtd/spi-nor.rst
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
- SPI NOR framework
- ============================================
+=================
+SPI NOR framework
+=================
Part I - Why do we need this framework?
---------------------------------------
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@ This framework just adds a new layer between the MTD and the SPI bus driver.
With this new layer, the SPI NOR controller driver does not depend on the
m25p80 code anymore.
- Before this framework, the layer is like:
+Before this framework, the layer is like::
MTD
------------------------
diff --git a/drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand_ecc.c b/drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand_ecc.c
index 223fbd8052b3..f6a7808db818 100644
--- a/drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand_ecc.c
+++ b/drivers/mtd/nand/raw/nand_ecc.c
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@
* Thomas Gleixner (tglx@linutronix.de)
*
* Information on how this algorithm works and how it was developed
- * can be found in Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.txt
+ * can be found in Documentation/mtd/nand_ecc.rst
*/
#include <linux/types.h>
--
2.21.0
______________________________________________________
Linux MTD discussion mailing list
http://lists.infradead.org/mailman/listinfo/linux-mtd/
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* [PATCH v2 27/29] docs: nvdimm: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 02/29] docs: lcd-panel-cgram.txt: convert docs to ReST and rename to *.rst Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (27 subsequent siblings)
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Jonathan Corbet, linux-nvdimm, linux-kernel,
Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab
Rename the nvdimm documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/nvdimm/{btt.txt => btt.rst} | 140 ++---
Documentation/nvdimm/index.rst | 12 +
.../nvdimm/{nvdimm.txt => nvdimm.rst} | 518 ++++++++++--------
.../nvdimm/{security.txt => security.rst} | 4 +-
drivers/nvdimm/Kconfig | 2 +-
5 files changed, 387 insertions(+), 289 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/nvdimm/{btt.txt => btt.rst} (71%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/nvdimm/index.rst
rename Documentation/nvdimm/{nvdimm.txt => nvdimm.rst} (60%)
rename Documentation/nvdimm/{security.txt => security.rst} (99%)
diff --git a/Documentation/nvdimm/btt.txt b/Documentation/nvdimm/btt.rst
similarity index 71%
rename from Documentation/nvdimm/btt.txt
rename to Documentation/nvdimm/btt.rst
index e293fb664924..2d8269f834bd 100644
--- a/Documentation/nvdimm/btt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/nvdimm/btt.rst
@@ -1,9 +1,10 @@
+=============================
BTT - Block Translation Table
=============================
1. Introduction
----------------
+===============
Persistent memory based storage is able to perform IO at byte (or more
accurately, cache line) granularity. However, we often want to expose such
@@ -25,7 +26,7 @@ provides atomic sector updates.
2. Static Layout
-----------------
+================
The underlying storage on which a BTT can be laid out is not limited in any way.
The BTT, however, splits the available space into chunks of up to 512 GiB,
@@ -33,43 +34,43 @@ called "Arenas".
Each arena follows the same layout for its metadata, and all references in an
arena are internal to it (with the exception of one field that points to the
-next arena). The following depicts the "On-disk" metadata layout:
+next arena). The following depicts the "On-disk" metadata layout::
- Backing Store +-------> Arena
-+---------------+ | +------------------+
-| | | | Arena info block |
-| Arena 0 +---+ | 4K |
-| 512G | +------------------+
-| | | |
-+---------------+ | |
-| | | |
-| Arena 1 | | Data Blocks |
-| 512G | | |
-| | | |
-+---------------+ | |
-| . | | |
-| . | | |
-| . | | |
-| | | |
-| | | |
-+---------------+ +------------------+
- | |
- | BTT Map |
- | |
- | |
- +------------------+
- | |
- | BTT Flog |
- | |
- +------------------+
- | Info block copy |
- | 4K |
- +------------------+
+ Backing Store +-------> Arena
+ +---------------+ | +------------------+
+ | | | | Arena info block |
+ | Arena 0 +---+ | 4K |
+ | 512G | +------------------+
+ | | | |
+ +---------------+ | |
+ | | | |
+ | Arena 1 | | Data Blocks |
+ | 512G | | |
+ | | | |
+ +---------------+ | |
+ | . | | |
+ | . | | |
+ | . | | |
+ | | | |
+ | | | |
+ +---------------+ +------------------+
+ | |
+ | BTT Map |
+ | |
+ | |
+ +------------------+
+ | |
+ | BTT Flog |
+ | |
+ +------------------+
+ | Info block copy |
+ | 4K |
+ +------------------+
3. Theory of Operation
-----------------------
+======================
a. The BTT Map
@@ -79,31 +80,37 @@ The map is a simple lookup/indirection table that maps an LBA to an internal
block. Each map entry is 32 bits. The two most significant bits are special
flags, and the remaining form the internal block number.
+======== =============================================================
Bit Description
-31 - 30 : Error and Zero flags - Used in the following way:
- Bit Description
- 31 30
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
- 00 Initial state. Reads return zeroes; Premap = Postmap
- 01 Zero state: Reads return zeroes
- 10 Error state: Reads fail; Writes clear 'E' bit
- 11 Normal Block – has valid postmap
+======== =============================================================
+31 - 30 Error and Zero flags - Used in the following way:
+ == == ====================================================
+ 31 30 Description
+ == == ====================================================
+ 0 0 Initial state. Reads return zeroes; Premap = Postmap
+ 0 1 Zero state: Reads return zeroes
+ 1 0 Error state: Reads fail; Writes clear 'E' bit
+ 1 1 Normal Block – has valid postmap
+ == == ====================================================
-29 - 0 : Mappings to internal 'postmap' blocks
+29 - 0 Mappings to internal 'postmap' blocks
+======== =============================================================
Some of the terminology that will be subsequently used:
-External LBA : LBA as made visible to upper layers.
-ABA : Arena Block Address - Block offset/number within an arena
-Premap ABA : The block offset into an arena, which was decided upon by range
+============ ================================================================
+External LBA LBA as made visible to upper layers.
+ABA Arena Block Address - Block offset/number within an arena
+Premap ABA The block offset into an arena, which was decided upon by range
checking the External LBA
-Postmap ABA : The block number in the "Data Blocks" area obtained after
+Postmap ABA The block number in the "Data Blocks" area obtained after
indirection from the map
-nfree : The number of free blocks that are maintained at any given time.
+nfree The number of free blocks that are maintained at any given time.
This is the number of concurrent writes that can happen to the
arena.
+============ ================================================================
For example, after adding a BTT, we surface a disk of 1024G. We get a read for
@@ -121,19 +128,21 @@ i.e. Every write goes to a "free" block. A running list of free blocks is
maintained in the form of the BTT flog. 'Flog' is a combination of the words
"free list" and "log". The flog contains 'nfree' entries, and an entry contains:
-lba : The premap ABA that is being written to
-old_map : The old postmap ABA - after 'this' write completes, this will be a
+======== =====================================================================
+lba The premap ABA that is being written to
+old_map The old postmap ABA - after 'this' write completes, this will be a
free block.
-new_map : The new postmap ABA. The map will up updated to reflect this
+new_map The new postmap ABA. The map will up updated to reflect this
lba->postmap_aba mapping, but we log it here in case we have to
recover.
-seq : Sequence number to mark which of the 2 sections of this flog entry is
+seq Sequence number to mark which of the 2 sections of this flog entry is
valid/newest. It cycles between 01->10->11->01 (binary) under normal
operation, with 00 indicating an uninitialized state.
-lba' : alternate lba entry
-old_map': alternate old postmap entry
-new_map': alternate new postmap entry
-seq' : alternate sequence number.
+lba' alternate lba entry
+old_map' alternate old postmap entry
+new_map' alternate new postmap entry
+seq' alternate sequence number.
+======== =====================================================================
Each of the above fields is 32-bit, making one entry 32 bytes. Entries are also
padded to 64 bytes to avoid cache line sharing or aliasing. Flog updates are
@@ -147,8 +156,10 @@ c. The concept of lanes
While 'nfree' describes the number of concurrent IOs an arena can process
concurrently, 'nlanes' is the number of IOs the BTT device as a whole can
-process.
- nlanes = min(nfree, num_cpus)
+process::
+
+ nlanes = min(nfree, num_cpus)
+
A lane number is obtained at the start of any IO, and is used for indexing into
all the on-disk and in-memory data structures for the duration of the IO. If
there are more CPUs than the max number of available lanes, than lanes are
@@ -180,10 +191,10 @@ e. In-memory data structure: map locks
--------------------------------------
Consider a case where two writer threads are writing to the same LBA. There can
-be a race in the following sequence of steps:
+be a race in the following sequence of steps::
-free[lane] = map[premap_aba]
-map[premap_aba] = postmap_aba
+ free[lane] = map[premap_aba]
+ map[premap_aba] = postmap_aba
Both threads can update their respective free[lane] with the same old, freed
postmap_aba. This has made the layout inconsistent by losing a free entry, and
@@ -202,6 +213,7 @@ On startup, we analyze the BTT flog to create our list of free blocks. We walk
through all the entries, and for each lane, of the set of two possible
'sections', we always look at the most recent one only (based on the sequence
number). The reconstruction rules/steps are simple:
+
- Read map[log_entry.lba].
- If log_entry.new matches the map entry, then log_entry.old is free.
- If log_entry.new does not match the map entry, then log_entry.new is free.
@@ -228,7 +240,7 @@ Write:
1. Convert external LBA to Arena number + pre-map ABA
2. Get a lane (and take lane_lock)
3. Use lane to index into in-memory free list and obtain a new block, next flog
- index, next sequence number
+ index, next sequence number
4. Scan the RTT to check if free block is present, and spin/wait if it is.
5. Write data to this free block
6. Read map to get the existing post-map ABA entry for this pre-map ABA
@@ -245,6 +257,7 @@ Write:
An arena would be in an error state if any of the metadata is corrupted
irrecoverably, either due to a bug or a media error. The following conditions
indicate an error:
+
- Info block checksum does not match (and recovering from the copy also fails)
- All internal available blocks are not uniquely and entirely addressed by the
sum of mapped blocks and free blocks (from the BTT flog).
@@ -263,11 +276,10 @@ The BTT can be set up on any disk (namespace) exposed by the libnvdimm subsystem
(pmem, or blk mode). The easiest way to set up such a namespace is using the
'ndctl' utility [1]:
-For example, the ndctl command line to setup a btt with a 4k sector size is:
+For example, the ndctl command line to setup a btt with a 4k sector size is::
ndctl create-namespace -f -e namespace0.0 -m sector -l 4k
See ndctl create-namespace --help for more options.
[1]: https://github.com/pmem/ndctl
-
diff --git a/Documentation/nvdimm/index.rst b/Documentation/nvdimm/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1a3402d3775e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/nvdimm/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+:orphan:
+
+===================================
+Non-Volatile Memory Device (NVDIMM)
+===================================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ nvdimm
+ btt
+ security
diff --git a/Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.txt b/Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.rst
similarity index 60%
rename from Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.txt
rename to Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.rst
index 1669f626b037..08f855cbb4e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,14 @@
- LIBNVDIMM: Non-Volatile Devices
- libnvdimm - kernel / libndctl - userspace helper library
- linux-nvdimm@lists.01.org
- v13
+===============================
+LIBNVDIMM: Non-Volatile Devices
+===============================
+libnvdimm - kernel / libndctl - userspace helper library
+
+linux-nvdimm@lists.01.org
+
+Version 13
+
+.. contents:
Glossary
Overview
@@ -40,49 +46,57 @@
Glossary
---------
-
-PMEM: A system-physical-address range where writes are persistent. A
-block device composed of PMEM is capable of DAX. A PMEM address range
-may span an interleave of several DIMMs.
-
-BLK: A set of one or more programmable memory mapped apertures provided
-by a DIMM to access its media. This indirection precludes the
-performance benefit of interleaving, but enables DIMM-bounded failure
-modes.
-
-DPA: DIMM Physical Address, is a DIMM-relative offset. With one DIMM in
-the system there would be a 1:1 system-physical-address:DPA association.
-Once more DIMMs are added a memory controller interleave must be
-decoded to determine the DPA associated with a given
-system-physical-address. BLK capacity always has a 1:1 relationship
-with a single-DIMM's DPA range.
-
-DAX: File system extensions to bypass the page cache and block layer to
-mmap persistent memory, from a PMEM block device, directly into a
-process address space.
-
-DSM: Device Specific Method: ACPI method to to control specific
-device - in this case the firmware.
-
-DCR: NVDIMM Control Region Structure defined in ACPI 6 Section 5.2.25.5.
-It defines a vendor-id, device-id, and interface format for a given DIMM.
-
-BTT: Block Translation Table: Persistent memory is byte addressable.
-Existing software may have an expectation that the power-fail-atomicity
-of writes is at least one sector, 512 bytes. The BTT is an indirection
-table with atomic update semantics to front a PMEM/BLK block device
-driver and present arbitrary atomic sector sizes.
-
-LABEL: Metadata stored on a DIMM device that partitions and identifies
-(persistently names) storage between PMEM and BLK. It also partitions
-BLK storage to host BTTs with different parameters per BLK-partition.
-Note that traditional partition tables, GPT/MBR, are layered on top of a
-BLK or PMEM device.
+========
+
+PMEM:
+ A system-physical-address range where writes are persistent. A
+ block device composed of PMEM is capable of DAX. A PMEM address range
+ may span an interleave of several DIMMs.
+
+BLK:
+ A set of one or more programmable memory mapped apertures provided
+ by a DIMM to access its media. This indirection precludes the
+ performance benefit of interleaving, but enables DIMM-bounded failure
+ modes.
+
+DPA:
+ DIMM Physical Address, is a DIMM-relative offset. With one DIMM in
+ the system there would be a 1:1 system-physical-address:DPA association.
+ Once more DIMMs are added a memory controller interleave must be
+ decoded to determine the DPA associated with a given
+ system-physical-address. BLK capacity always has a 1:1 relationship
+ with a single-DIMM's DPA range.
+
+DAX:
+ File system extensions to bypass the page cache and block layer to
+ mmap persistent memory, from a PMEM block device, directly into a
+ process address space.
+
+DSM:
+ Device Specific Method: ACPI method to to control specific
+ device - in this case the firmware.
+
+DCR:
+ NVDIMM Control Region Structure defined in ACPI 6 Section 5.2.25.5.
+ It defines a vendor-id, device-id, and interface format for a given DIMM.
+
+BTT:
+ Block Translation Table: Persistent memory is byte addressable.
+ Existing software may have an expectation that the power-fail-atomicity
+ of writes is at least one sector, 512 bytes. The BTT is an indirection
+ table with atomic update semantics to front a PMEM/BLK block device
+ driver and present arbitrary atomic sector sizes.
+
+LABEL:
+ Metadata stored on a DIMM device that partitions and identifies
+ (persistently names) storage between PMEM and BLK. It also partitions
+ BLK storage to host BTTs with different parameters per BLK-partition.
+ Note that traditional partition tables, GPT/MBR, are layered on top of a
+ BLK or PMEM device.
Overview
---------
+========
The LIBNVDIMM subsystem provides support for three types of NVDIMMs, namely,
PMEM, BLK, and NVDIMM devices that can simultaneously support both PMEM
@@ -96,19 +110,30 @@ accessible via BLK. When that occurs a LABEL is needed to reserve DPA
for exclusive access via one mode a time.
Supporting Documents
-ACPI 6: http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/ACPI_6.0.pdf
-NVDIMM Namespace: http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_Namespace_Spec.pdf
-DSM Interface Example: http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_DSM_Interface_Example.pdf
-Driver Writer's Guide: http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_Driver_Writers_Guide.pdf
+--------------------
+
+ACPI 6:
+ http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/ACPI_6.0.pdf
+NVDIMM Namespace:
+ http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_Namespace_Spec.pdf
+DSM Interface Example:
+ http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_DSM_Interface_Example.pdf
+Driver Writer's Guide:
+ http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_Driver_Writers_Guide.pdf
Git Trees
-LIBNVDIMM: https://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/djbw/nvdimm.git
-LIBNDCTL: https://github.com/pmem/ndctl.git
-PMEM: https://github.com/01org/prd
+---------
+
+LIBNVDIMM:
+ https://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/djbw/nvdimm.git
+LIBNDCTL:
+ https://github.com/pmem/ndctl.git
+PMEM:
+ https://github.com/01org/prd
LIBNVDIMM PMEM and BLK
-------------------
+======================
Prior to the arrival of the NFIT, non-volatile memory was described to a
system in various ad-hoc ways. Usually only the bare minimum was
@@ -122,38 +147,39 @@ For each NVDIMM access method (PMEM, BLK), LIBNVDIMM provides a block
device driver:
1. PMEM (nd_pmem.ko): Drives a system-physical-address range. This
- range is contiguous in system memory and may be interleaved (hardware
- memory controller striped) across multiple DIMMs. When interleaved the
- platform may optionally provide details of which DIMMs are participating
- in the interleave.
+ range is contiguous in system memory and may be interleaved (hardware
+ memory controller striped) across multiple DIMMs. When interleaved the
+ platform may optionally provide details of which DIMMs are participating
+ in the interleave.
- Note that while LIBNVDIMM describes system-physical-address ranges that may
- alias with BLK access as ND_NAMESPACE_PMEM ranges and those without
- alias as ND_NAMESPACE_IO ranges, to the nd_pmem driver there is no
- distinction. The different device-types are an implementation detail
- that userspace can exploit to implement policies like "only interface
- with address ranges from certain DIMMs". It is worth noting that when
- aliasing is present and a DIMM lacks a label, then no block device can
- be created by default as userspace needs to do at least one allocation
- of DPA to the PMEM range. In contrast ND_NAMESPACE_IO ranges, once
- registered, can be immediately attached to nd_pmem.
+ Note that while LIBNVDIMM describes system-physical-address ranges that may
+ alias with BLK access as ND_NAMESPACE_PMEM ranges and those without
+ alias as ND_NAMESPACE_IO ranges, to the nd_pmem driver there is no
+ distinction. The different device-types are an implementation detail
+ that userspace can exploit to implement policies like "only interface
+ with address ranges from certain DIMMs". It is worth noting that when
+ aliasing is present and a DIMM lacks a label, then no block device can
+ be created by default as userspace needs to do at least one allocation
+ of DPA to the PMEM range. In contrast ND_NAMESPACE_IO ranges, once
+ registered, can be immediately attached to nd_pmem.
2. BLK (nd_blk.ko): This driver performs I/O using a set of platform
- defined apertures. A set of apertures will access just one DIMM.
- Multiple windows (apertures) allow multiple concurrent accesses, much like
- tagged-command-queuing, and would likely be used by different threads or
- different CPUs.
+ defined apertures. A set of apertures will access just one DIMM.
+ Multiple windows (apertures) allow multiple concurrent accesses, much like
+ tagged-command-queuing, and would likely be used by different threads or
+ different CPUs.
- The NFIT specification defines a standard format for a BLK-aperture, but
- the spec also allows for vendor specific layouts, and non-NFIT BLK
- implementations may have other designs for BLK I/O. For this reason
- "nd_blk" calls back into platform-specific code to perform the I/O.
- One such implementation is defined in the "Driver Writer's Guide" and "DSM
- Interface Example".
+ The NFIT specification defines a standard format for a BLK-aperture, but
+ the spec also allows for vendor specific layouts, and non-NFIT BLK
+ implementations may have other designs for BLK I/O. For this reason
+ "nd_blk" calls back into platform-specific code to perform the I/O.
+
+ One such implementation is defined in the "Driver Writer's Guide" and "DSM
+ Interface Example".
Why BLK?
---------
+========
While PMEM provides direct byte-addressable CPU-load/store access to
NVDIMM storage, it does not provide the best system RAS (recovery,
@@ -162,12 +188,15 @@ system-physical-address address causes a CPU exception while an access
to a corrupted address through an BLK-aperture causes that block window
to raise an error status in a register. The latter is more aligned with
the standard error model that host-bus-adapter attached disks present.
+
Also, if an administrator ever wants to replace a memory it is easier to
service a system at DIMM module boundaries. Compare this to PMEM where
data could be interleaved in an opaque hardware specific manner across
several DIMMs.
PMEM vs BLK
+-----------
+
BLK-apertures solve these RAS problems, but their presence is also the
major contributing factor to the complexity of the ND subsystem. They
complicate the implementation because PMEM and BLK alias in DPA space.
@@ -185,13 +214,14 @@ carved into an arbitrary number of BLK devices with discontiguous
extents.
BLK-REGIONs, PMEM-REGIONs, Atomic Sectors, and DAX
---------------------------------------------------
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
One of the few
reasons to allow multiple BLK namespaces per REGION is so that each
BLK-namespace can be configured with a BTT with unique atomic sector
sizes. While a PMEM device can host a BTT the LABEL specification does
not provide for a sector size to be specified for a PMEM namespace.
+
This is due to the expectation that the primary usage model for PMEM is
via DAX, and the BTT is incompatible with DAX. However, for the cases
where an application or filesystem still needs atomic sector update
@@ -200,52 +230,52 @@ LIBNVDIMM/NDCTL: Block Translation Table "btt"
Example NVDIMM Platform
------------------------
+=======================
For the remainder of this document the following diagram will be
-referenced for any example sysfs layouts.
+referenced for any example sysfs layouts::
- (a) (b) DIMM BLK-REGION
- +-------------------+--------+--------+--------+
-+------+ | pm0.0 | blk2.0 | pm1.0 | blk2.1 | 0 region2
-| imc0 +--+- - - region0- - - +--------+ +--------+
-+--+---+ | pm0.0 | blk3.0 | pm1.0 | blk3.1 | 1 region3
- | +-------------------+--------v v--------+
-+--+---+ | |
-| cpu0 | region1
-+--+---+ | |
- | +----------------------------^ ^--------+
-+--+---+ | blk4.0 | pm1.0 | blk4.0 | 2 region4
-| imc1 +--+----------------------------| +--------+
-+------+ | blk5.0 | pm1.0 | blk5.0 | 3 region5
- +----------------------------+--------+--------+
+ (a) (b) DIMM BLK-REGION
+ +-------------------+--------+--------+--------+
+ +------+ | pm0.0 | blk2.0 | pm1.0 | blk2.1 | 0 region2
+ | imc0 +--+- - - region0- - - +--------+ +--------+
+ +--+---+ | pm0.0 | blk3.0 | pm1.0 | blk3.1 | 1 region3
+ | +-------------------+--------v v--------+
+ +--+---+ | |
+ | cpu0 | region1
+ +--+---+ | |
+ | +----------------------------^ ^--------+
+ +--+---+ | blk4.0 | pm1.0 | blk4.0 | 2 region4
+ | imc1 +--+----------------------------| +--------+
+ +------+ | blk5.0 | pm1.0 | blk5.0 | 3 region5
+ +----------------------------+--------+--------+
In this platform we have four DIMMs and two memory controllers in one
socket. Each unique interface (BLK or PMEM) to DPA space is identified
by a region device with a dynamically assigned id (REGION0 - REGION5).
1. The first portion of DIMM0 and DIMM1 are interleaved as REGION0. A
- single PMEM namespace is created in the REGION0-SPA-range that spans most
- of DIMM0 and DIMM1 with a user-specified name of "pm0.0". Some of that
- interleaved system-physical-address range is reclaimed as BLK-aperture
- accessed space starting at DPA-offset (a) into each DIMM. In that
- reclaimed space we create two BLK-aperture "namespaces" from REGION2 and
- REGION3 where "blk2.0" and "blk3.0" are just human readable names that
- could be set to any user-desired name in the LABEL.
+ single PMEM namespace is created in the REGION0-SPA-range that spans most
+ of DIMM0 and DIMM1 with a user-specified name of "pm0.0". Some of that
+ interleaved system-physical-address range is reclaimed as BLK-aperture
+ accessed space starting at DPA-offset (a) into each DIMM. In that
+ reclaimed space we create two BLK-aperture "namespaces" from REGION2 and
+ REGION3 where "blk2.0" and "blk3.0" are just human readable names that
+ could be set to any user-desired name in the LABEL.
2. In the last portion of DIMM0 and DIMM1 we have an interleaved
- system-physical-address range, REGION1, that spans those two DIMMs as
- well as DIMM2 and DIMM3. Some of REGION1 is allocated to a PMEM namespace
- named "pm1.0", the rest is reclaimed in 4 BLK-aperture namespaces (for
- each DIMM in the interleave set), "blk2.1", "blk3.1", "blk4.0", and
- "blk5.0".
+ system-physical-address range, REGION1, that spans those two DIMMs as
+ well as DIMM2 and DIMM3. Some of REGION1 is allocated to a PMEM namespace
+ named "pm1.0", the rest is reclaimed in 4 BLK-aperture namespaces (for
+ each DIMM in the interleave set), "blk2.1", "blk3.1", "blk4.0", and
+ "blk5.0".
3. The portion of DIMM2 and DIMM3 that do not participate in the REGION1
- interleaved system-physical-address range (i.e. the DPA address past
- offset (b) are also included in the "blk4.0" and "blk5.0" namespaces.
- Note, that this example shows that BLK-aperture namespaces don't need to
- be contiguous in DPA-space.
+ interleaved system-physical-address range (i.e. the DPA address past
+ offset (b) are also included in the "blk4.0" and "blk5.0" namespaces.
+ Note, that this example shows that BLK-aperture namespaces don't need to
+ be contiguous in DPA-space.
This bus is provided by the kernel under the device
/sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0 when CONFIG_NFIT_TEST is enabled and
@@ -254,7 +284,7 @@ by a region device with a dynamically assigned id (REGION0 - REGION5).
LIBNVDIMM Kernel Device Model and LIBNDCTL Userspace API
-----------------------------------------------------
+========================================================
What follows is a description of the LIBNVDIMM sysfs layout and a
corresponding object hierarchy diagram as viewed through the LIBNDCTL
@@ -263,12 +293,18 @@ NVDIMM Platform which is also the LIBNVDIMM bus used in the LIBNDCTL unit
test.
LIBNDCTL: Context
+-----------------
+
Every API call in the LIBNDCTL library requires a context that holds the
logging parameters and other library instance state. The library is
based on the libabc template:
-https://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/kay/libabc.git
+
+ https://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/kay/libabc.git
LIBNDCTL: instantiate a new library context example
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+::
struct ndctl_ctx *ctx;
@@ -278,7 +314,7 @@ LIBNDCTL: instantiate a new library context example
return NULL;
LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Bus
--------------------
+-----------------------
A bus has a 1:1 relationship with an NFIT. The current expectation for
ACPI based systems is that there is only ever one platform-global NFIT.
@@ -288,9 +324,10 @@ we use this capability to test multiple NFIT configurations in the unit
test.
LIBNVDIMM: control class device in /sys/class
+---------------------------------------------
This character device accepts DSM messages to be passed to DIMM
-identified by its NFIT handle.
+identified by its NFIT handle::
/sys/class/nd/ndctl0
|-- dev
@@ -300,10 +337,15 @@ identified by its NFIT handle.
LIBNVDIMM: bus
+--------------
+
+::
struct nvdimm_bus *nvdimm_bus_register(struct device *parent,
struct nvdimm_bus_descriptor *nfit_desc);
+::
+
/sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0
|-- commands
|-- nd
@@ -324,7 +366,9 @@ LIBNVDIMM: bus
`-- wait_probe
LIBNDCTL: bus enumeration example
-Find the bus handle that describes the bus from Example NVDIMM Platform
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Find the bus handle that describes the bus from Example NVDIMM Platform::
static struct ndctl_bus *get_bus_by_provider(struct ndctl_ctx *ctx,
const char *provider)
@@ -342,7 +386,7 @@ Find the bus handle that describes the bus from Example NVDIMM Platform
LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: DIMM (NMEM)
----------------------------
+-------------------------------
The DIMM device provides a character device for sending commands to
hardware, and it is a container for LABELs. If the DIMM is defined by
@@ -355,11 +399,16 @@ Range Mapping Structure", and there is no requirement that they actually
be physical DIMMs, so we use a more generic name.
LIBNVDIMM: DIMM (NMEM)
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+::
struct nvdimm *nvdimm_create(struct nvdimm_bus *nvdimm_bus, void *provider_data,
const struct attribute_group **groups, unsigned long flags,
unsigned long *dsm_mask);
+::
+
/sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0
|-- nmem0
| |-- available_slots
@@ -384,15 +433,20 @@ LIBNVDIMM: DIMM (NMEM)
LIBNDCTL: DIMM enumeration example
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Note, in this example we are assuming NFIT-defined DIMMs which are
identified by an "nfit_handle" a 32-bit value where:
-Bit 3:0 DIMM number within the memory channel
-Bit 7:4 memory channel number
-Bit 11:8 memory controller ID
-Bit 15:12 socket ID (within scope of a Node controller if node controller is present)
-Bit 27:16 Node Controller ID
-Bit 31:28 Reserved
+
+ - Bit 3:0 DIMM number within the memory channel
+ - Bit 7:4 memory channel number
+ - Bit 11:8 memory controller ID
+ - Bit 15:12 socket ID (within scope of a Node controller if node
+ controller is present)
+ - Bit 27:16 Node Controller ID
+ - Bit 31:28 Reserved
+
+::
static struct ndctl_dimm *get_dimm_by_handle(struct ndctl_bus *bus,
unsigned int handle)
@@ -413,7 +467,7 @@ Bit 31:28 Reserved
dimm = get_dimm_by_handle(bus, DIMM_HANDLE(0, 0, 0, 0, 0));
LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Region
-----------------------
+--------------------------
A generic REGION device is registered for each PMEM range or BLK-aperture
set. Per the example there are 6 regions: 2 PMEM and 4 BLK-aperture
@@ -435,13 +489,15 @@ emits, "devtype" duplicates the DEVTYPE variable stored by udev at the
at the 'add' event, and finally, the optional "spa_index" is provided in
the case where the region is defined by a SPA.
-LIBNVDIMM: region
+LIBNVDIMM: region::
struct nd_region *nvdimm_pmem_region_create(struct nvdimm_bus *nvdimm_bus,
struct nd_region_desc *ndr_desc);
struct nd_region *nvdimm_blk_region_create(struct nvdimm_bus *nvdimm_bus,
struct nd_region_desc *ndr_desc);
+::
+
/sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0
|-- region0
| |-- available_size
@@ -468,10 +524,11 @@ LIBNVDIMM: region
[..]
LIBNDCTL: region enumeration example
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Sample region retrieval routines based on NFIT-unique data like
"spa_index" (interleave set id) for PMEM and "nfit_handle" (dimm id) for
-BLK.
+BLK::
static struct ndctl_region *get_pmem_region_by_spa_index(struct ndctl_bus *bus,
unsigned int spa_index)
@@ -518,33 +575,33 @@ REGION name generic and expects userspace to always consider the
region-attributes for four reasons:
1. There are already more than two REGION and "namespace" types. For
- PMEM there are two subtypes. As mentioned previously we have PMEM where
- the constituent DIMM devices are known and anonymous PMEM. For BLK
- regions the NFIT specification already anticipates vendor specific
- implementations. The exact distinction of what a region contains is in
- the region-attributes not the region-name or the region-devtype.
+ PMEM there are two subtypes. As mentioned previously we have PMEM where
+ the constituent DIMM devices are known and anonymous PMEM. For BLK
+ regions the NFIT specification already anticipates vendor specific
+ implementations. The exact distinction of what a region contains is in
+ the region-attributes not the region-name or the region-devtype.
2. A region with zero child-namespaces is a possible configuration. For
- example, the NFIT allows for a DCR to be published without a
- corresponding BLK-aperture. This equates to a DIMM that can only accept
- control/configuration messages, but no i/o through a descendant block
- device. Again, this "type" is advertised in the attributes ('mappings'
- == 0) and the name does not tell you much.
+ example, the NFIT allows for a DCR to be published without a
+ corresponding BLK-aperture. This equates to a DIMM that can only accept
+ control/configuration messages, but no i/o through a descendant block
+ device. Again, this "type" is advertised in the attributes ('mappings'
+ == 0) and the name does not tell you much.
3. What if a third major interface type arises in the future? Outside
- of vendor specific implementations, it's not difficult to envision a
- third class of interface type beyond BLK and PMEM. With a generic name
- for the REGION level of the device-hierarchy old userspace
- implementations can still make sense of new kernel advertised
- region-types. Userspace can always rely on the generic region
- attributes like "mappings", "size", etc and the expected child devices
- named "namespace". This generic format of the device-model hierarchy
- allows the LIBNVDIMM and LIBNDCTL implementations to be more uniform and
- future-proof.
+ of vendor specific implementations, it's not difficult to envision a
+ third class of interface type beyond BLK and PMEM. With a generic name
+ for the REGION level of the device-hierarchy old userspace
+ implementations can still make sense of new kernel advertised
+ region-types. Userspace can always rely on the generic region
+ attributes like "mappings", "size", etc and the expected child devices
+ named "namespace". This generic format of the device-model hierarchy
+ allows the LIBNVDIMM and LIBNDCTL implementations to be more uniform and
+ future-proof.
4. There are more robust mechanisms for determining the major type of a
- region than a device name. See the next section, How Do I Determine the
- Major Type of a Region?
+ region than a device name. See the next section, How Do I Determine the
+ Major Type of a Region?
How Do I Determine the Major Type of a Region?
----------------------------------------------
@@ -553,7 +610,8 @@ Outside of the blanket recommendation of "use libndctl", or simply
looking at the kernel header (/usr/include/linux/ndctl.h) to decode the
"nstype" integer attribute, here are some other options.
- 1. module alias lookup:
+1. module alias lookup
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The whole point of region/namespace device type differentiation is to
decide which block-device driver will attach to a given LIBNVDIMM namespace.
@@ -569,28 +627,31 @@ looking at the kernel header (/usr/include/linux/ndctl.h) to decode the
the resulting namespaces. The output from module resolution is more
accurate than a region-name or region-devtype.
- 2. udev:
+2. udev
+^^^^^^^
- The kernel "devtype" is registered in the udev database
- # udevadm info --path=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0
- P: /devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0
- E: DEVPATH=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0
- E: DEVTYPE=nd_pmem
- E: MODALIAS=nd:t2
- E: SUBSYSTEM=nd
+ The kernel "devtype" is registered in the udev database::
- # udevadm info --path=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4
- P: /devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4
- E: DEVPATH=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4
- E: DEVTYPE=nd_blk
- E: MODALIAS=nd:t3
- E: SUBSYSTEM=nd
+ # udevadm info --path=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0
+ P: /devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0
+ E: DEVPATH=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0
+ E: DEVTYPE=nd_pmem
+ E: MODALIAS=nd:t2
+ E: SUBSYSTEM=nd
+
+ # udevadm info --path=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4
+ P: /devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4
+ E: DEVPATH=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4
+ E: DEVTYPE=nd_blk
+ E: MODALIAS=nd:t3
+ E: SUBSYSTEM=nd
...and is available as a region attribute, but keep in mind that the
"devtype" does not indicate sub-type variations and scripts should
really be understanding the other attributes.
- 3. type specific attributes:
+3. type specific attributes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
As it currently stands a BLK-aperture region will never have a
"nfit/spa_index" attribute, but neither will a non-NFIT PMEM region. A
@@ -600,7 +661,7 @@ looking at the kernel header (/usr/include/linux/ndctl.h) to decode the
LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Namespace
--------------------------
+-----------------------------
A REGION, after resolving DPA aliasing and LABEL specified boundaries,
surfaces one or more "namespace" devices. The arrival of a "namespace"
@@ -608,12 +669,14 @@ device currently triggers either the nd_blk or nd_pmem driver to load
and register a disk/block device.
LIBNVDIMM: namespace
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
Here is a sample layout from the three major types of NAMESPACE where
namespace0.0 represents DIMM-info-backed PMEM (note that it has a 'uuid'
attribute), namespace2.0 represents a BLK namespace (note it has a
'sector_size' attribute) that, and namespace6.0 represents an anonymous
PMEM namespace (note that has no 'uuid' attribute due to not support a
-LABEL).
+LABEL)::
/sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0/namespace0.0
|-- alt_name
@@ -656,76 +719,84 @@ LABEL).
`-- uevent
LIBNDCTL: namespace enumeration example
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Namespaces are indexed relative to their parent region, example below.
These indexes are mostly static from boot to boot, but subsystem makes
no guarantees in this regard. For a static namespace identifier use its
'uuid' attribute.
-static struct ndctl_namespace *get_namespace_by_id(struct ndctl_region *region,
- unsigned int id)
-{
- struct ndctl_namespace *ndns;
+::
- ndctl_namespace_foreach(region, ndns)
- if (ndctl_namespace_get_id(ndns) == id)
- return ndns;
+ static struct ndctl_namespace
+ *get_namespace_by_id(struct ndctl_region *region, unsigned int id)
+ {
+ struct ndctl_namespace *ndns;
- return NULL;
-}
+ ndctl_namespace_foreach(region, ndns)
+ if (ndctl_namespace_get_id(ndns) == id)
+ return ndns;
+
+ return NULL;
+ }
LIBNDCTL: namespace creation example
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
Idle namespaces are automatically created by the kernel if a given
region has enough available capacity to create a new namespace.
Namespace instantiation involves finding an idle namespace and
configuring it. For the most part the setting of namespace attributes
can occur in any order, the only constraint is that 'uuid' must be set
before 'size'. This enables the kernel to track DPA allocations
-internally with a static identifier.
+internally with a static identifier::
-static int configure_namespace(struct ndctl_region *region,
- struct ndctl_namespace *ndns,
- struct namespace_parameters *parameters)
-{
- char devname[50];
+ static int configure_namespace(struct ndctl_region *region,
+ struct ndctl_namespace *ndns,
+ struct namespace_parameters *parameters)
+ {
+ char devname[50];
- snprintf(devname, sizeof(devname), "namespace%d.%d",
- ndctl_region_get_id(region), paramaters->id);
+ snprintf(devname, sizeof(devname), "namespace%d.%d",
+ ndctl_region_get_id(region), paramaters->id);
- ndctl_namespace_set_alt_name(ndns, devname);
- /* 'uuid' must be set prior to setting size! */
- ndctl_namespace_set_uuid(ndns, paramaters->uuid);
- ndctl_namespace_set_size(ndns, paramaters->size);
- /* unlike pmem namespaces, blk namespaces have a sector size */
- if (parameters->lbasize)
- ndctl_namespace_set_sector_size(ndns, parameters->lbasize);
- ndctl_namespace_enable(ndns);
-}
+ ndctl_namespace_set_alt_name(ndns, devname);
+ /* 'uuid' must be set prior to setting size! */
+ ndctl_namespace_set_uuid(ndns, paramaters->uuid);
+ ndctl_namespace_set_size(ndns, paramaters->size);
+ /* unlike pmem namespaces, blk namespaces have a sector size */
+ if (parameters->lbasize)
+ ndctl_namespace_set_sector_size(ndns, parameters->lbasize);
+ ndctl_namespace_enable(ndns);
+ }
Why the Term "namespace"?
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
1. Why not "volume" for instance? "volume" ran the risk of confusing
- ND (libnvdimm subsystem) to a volume manager like device-mapper.
+ ND (libnvdimm subsystem) to a volume manager like device-mapper.
2. The term originated to describe the sub-devices that can be created
- within a NVME controller (see the nvme specification:
- http://www.nvmexpress.org/specifications/), and NFIT namespaces are
- meant to parallel the capabilities and configurability of
- NVME-namespaces.
+ within a NVME controller (see the nvme specification:
+ http://www.nvmexpress.org/specifications/), and NFIT namespaces are
+ meant to parallel the capabilities and configurability of
+ NVME-namespaces.
LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Block Translation Table "btt"
----------------------------------------------
+-------------------------------------------------
A BTT (design document: http://pmem.io/2014/09/23/btt.html) is a stacked
block device driver that fronts either the whole block device or a
partition of a block device emitted by either a PMEM or BLK NAMESPACE.
LIBNVDIMM: btt layout
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
Every region will start out with at least one BTT device which is the
seed device. To activate it set the "namespace", "uuid", and
"sector_size" attributes and then bind the device to the nd_pmem or
-nd_blk driver depending on the region type.
+nd_blk driver depending on the region type::
/sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.1/ndbus0/region0/btt0/
|-- namespace
@@ -739,10 +810,12 @@ nd_blk driver depending on the region type.
`-- uuid
LIBNDCTL: btt creation example
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
Similar to namespaces an idle BTT device is automatically created per
region. Each time this "seed" btt device is configured and enabled a new
seed is created. Creating a BTT configuration involves two steps of
-finding and idle BTT and assigning it to consume a PMEM or BLK namespace.
+finding and idle BTT and assigning it to consume a PMEM or BLK namespace::
static struct ndctl_btt *get_idle_btt(struct ndctl_region *region)
{
@@ -787,29 +860,28 @@ Summary LIBNDCTL Diagram
------------------------
For the given example above, here is the view of the objects as seen by the
-LIBNDCTL API:
- +---+
- |CTX| +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
- +-+-+ +-> REGION0 +---> NAMESPACE0.0 +--> PMEM8 "pm0.0" |
- | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
-+-------+ | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
-| DIMM0 <-+ | +-> REGION1 +---> NAMESPACE1.0 +--> PMEM6 "pm1.0" |
-+-------+ | | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
-| DIMM1 <-+ +-v--+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
-+-------+ +-+BUS0+---> REGION2 +-+-> NAMESPACE2.0 +--> ND6 "blk2.0" |
-| DIMM2 <-+ +----+ | +---------+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
-+-------+ | | +-> NAMESPACE2.1 +--> ND5 "blk2.1" | BTT2 |
-| DIMM3 <-+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
-+-------+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
- +-> REGION3 +-+-> NAMESPACE3.0 +--> ND4 "blk3.0" |
- | +---------+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
- | +-> NAMESPACE3.1 +--> ND3 "blk3.1" | BTT1 |
- | +--------------+ +----------------------+
- | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
- +-> REGION4 +---> NAMESPACE4.0 +--> ND2 "blk4.0" |
- | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
- | +---------+ +--------------+ +----------------------+
- +-> REGION5 +---> NAMESPACE5.0 +--> ND1 "blk5.0" | BTT0 |
- +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+------+
-
+LIBNDCTL API::
+ +---+
+ |CTX| +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ +-+-+ +-> REGION0 +---> NAMESPACE0.0 +--> PMEM8 "pm0.0" |
+ | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ +-------+ | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ | DIMM0 <-+ | +-> REGION1 +---> NAMESPACE1.0 +--> PMEM6 "pm1.0" |
+ +-------+ | | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ | DIMM1 <-+ +-v--+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ +-------+ +-+BUS0+---> REGION2 +-+-> NAMESPACE2.0 +--> ND6 "blk2.0" |
+ | DIMM2 <-+ +----+ | +---------+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
+ +-------+ | | +-> NAMESPACE2.1 +--> ND5 "blk2.1" | BTT2 |
+ | DIMM3 <-+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
+ +-------+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ +-> REGION3 +-+-> NAMESPACE3.0 +--> ND4 "blk3.0" |
+ | +---------+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
+ | +-> NAMESPACE3.1 +--> ND3 "blk3.1" | BTT1 |
+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ +-> REGION4 +---> NAMESPACE4.0 +--> ND2 "blk4.0" |
+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +----------------------+
+ +-> REGION5 +---> NAMESPACE5.0 +--> ND1 "blk5.0" | BTT0 |
+ +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+------+
diff --git a/Documentation/nvdimm/security.txt b/Documentation/nvdimm/security.rst
similarity index 99%
rename from Documentation/nvdimm/security.txt
rename to Documentation/nvdimm/security.rst
index 4c36c05ca98e..ad9dea099b34 100644
--- a/Documentation/nvdimm/security.txt
+++ b/Documentation/nvdimm/security.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
-NVDIMM SECURITY
+===============
+NVDIMM Security
===============
1. Introduction
@@ -138,4 +139,5 @@ This command is only available when the master security is enabled, indicated
by the extended security status.
[1]: http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_DSM_Interface-V1.8.pdf
+
[2]: http://www.t13.org/documents/UploadedDocuments/docs2006/e05179r4-ACS-SecurityClarifications.pdf
diff --git a/drivers/nvdimm/Kconfig b/drivers/nvdimm/Kconfig
index 54500798f23a..e89c1c332407 100644
--- a/drivers/nvdimm/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/nvdimm/Kconfig
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ config BLK_DEV_PMEM
Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst). This driver converts
these persistent memory ranges into block devices that are
capable of DAX (direct-access) file system mappings. See
- Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.txt for more details.
+ Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.rst for more details.
Say Y if you want to use an NVDIMM
--
2.21.0
_______________________________________________
Linux-nvdimm mailing list
Linux-nvdimm@lists.01.org
https://lists.01.org/mailman/listinfo/linux-nvdimm
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 27/29] docs: nvdimm: convert to ReST
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
0 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Dan Williams, Vishal Verma, Dave Jiang,
Keith Busch, Ira Weiny, linux-nvdimm
Rename the nvdimm documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/nvdimm/{btt.txt => btt.rst} | 140 ++---
Documentation/nvdimm/index.rst | 12 +
.../nvdimm/{nvdimm.txt => nvdimm.rst} | 518 ++++++++++--------
.../nvdimm/{security.txt => security.rst} | 4 +-
drivers/nvdimm/Kconfig | 2 +-
5 files changed, 387 insertions(+), 289 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/nvdimm/{btt.txt => btt.rst} (71%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/nvdimm/index.rst
rename Documentation/nvdimm/{nvdimm.txt => nvdimm.rst} (60%)
rename Documentation/nvdimm/{security.txt => security.rst} (99%)
diff --git a/Documentation/nvdimm/btt.txt b/Documentation/nvdimm/btt.rst
similarity index 71%
rename from Documentation/nvdimm/btt.txt
rename to Documentation/nvdimm/btt.rst
index e293fb664924..2d8269f834bd 100644
--- a/Documentation/nvdimm/btt.txt
+++ b/Documentation/nvdimm/btt.rst
@@ -1,9 +1,10 @@
+=============================
BTT - Block Translation Table
=============================
1. Introduction
----------------
+===============
Persistent memory based storage is able to perform IO at byte (or more
accurately, cache line) granularity. However, we often want to expose such
@@ -25,7 +26,7 @@ provides atomic sector updates.
2. Static Layout
-----------------
+================
The underlying storage on which a BTT can be laid out is not limited in any way.
The BTT, however, splits the available space into chunks of up to 512 GiB,
@@ -33,43 +34,43 @@ called "Arenas".
Each arena follows the same layout for its metadata, and all references in an
arena are internal to it (with the exception of one field that points to the
-next arena). The following depicts the "On-disk" metadata layout:
+next arena). The following depicts the "On-disk" metadata layout::
- Backing Store +-------> Arena
-+---------------+ | +------------------+
-| | | | Arena info block |
-| Arena 0 +---+ | 4K |
-| 512G | +------------------+
-| | | |
-+---------------+ | |
-| | | |
-| Arena 1 | | Data Blocks |
-| 512G | | |
-| | | |
-+---------------+ | |
-| . | | |
-| . | | |
-| . | | |
-| | | |
-| | | |
-+---------------+ +------------------+
- | |
- | BTT Map |
- | |
- | |
- +------------------+
- | |
- | BTT Flog |
- | |
- +------------------+
- | Info block copy |
- | 4K |
- +------------------+
+ Backing Store +-------> Arena
+ +---------------+ | +------------------+
+ | | | | Arena info block |
+ | Arena 0 +---+ | 4K |
+ | 512G | +------------------+
+ | | | |
+ +---------------+ | |
+ | | | |
+ | Arena 1 | | Data Blocks |
+ | 512G | | |
+ | | | |
+ +---------------+ | |
+ | . | | |
+ | . | | |
+ | . | | |
+ | | | |
+ | | | |
+ +---------------+ +------------------+
+ | |
+ | BTT Map |
+ | |
+ | |
+ +------------------+
+ | |
+ | BTT Flog |
+ | |
+ +------------------+
+ | Info block copy |
+ | 4K |
+ +------------------+
3. Theory of Operation
-----------------------
+======================
a. The BTT Map
@@ -79,31 +80,37 @@ The map is a simple lookup/indirection table that maps an LBA to an internal
block. Each map entry is 32 bits. The two most significant bits are special
flags, and the remaining form the internal block number.
+======== =============================================================
Bit Description
-31 - 30 : Error and Zero flags - Used in the following way:
- Bit Description
- 31 30
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
- 00 Initial state. Reads return zeroes; Premap = Postmap
- 01 Zero state: Reads return zeroes
- 10 Error state: Reads fail; Writes clear 'E' bit
- 11 Normal Block – has valid postmap
+======== =============================================================
+31 - 30 Error and Zero flags - Used in the following way:
+ == == ====================================================
+ 31 30 Description
+ == == ====================================================
+ 0 0 Initial state. Reads return zeroes; Premap = Postmap
+ 0 1 Zero state: Reads return zeroes
+ 1 0 Error state: Reads fail; Writes clear 'E' bit
+ 1 1 Normal Block – has valid postmap
+ == == ====================================================
-29 - 0 : Mappings to internal 'postmap' blocks
+29 - 0 Mappings to internal 'postmap' blocks
+======== =============================================================
Some of the terminology that will be subsequently used:
-External LBA : LBA as made visible to upper layers.
-ABA : Arena Block Address - Block offset/number within an arena
-Premap ABA : The block offset into an arena, which was decided upon by range
+============ ================================================================
+External LBA LBA as made visible to upper layers.
+ABA Arena Block Address - Block offset/number within an arena
+Premap ABA The block offset into an arena, which was decided upon by range
checking the External LBA
-Postmap ABA : The block number in the "Data Blocks" area obtained after
+Postmap ABA The block number in the "Data Blocks" area obtained after
indirection from the map
-nfree : The number of free blocks that are maintained at any given time.
+nfree The number of free blocks that are maintained at any given time.
This is the number of concurrent writes that can happen to the
arena.
+============ ================================================================
For example, after adding a BTT, we surface a disk of 1024G. We get a read for
@@ -121,19 +128,21 @@ i.e. Every write goes to a "free" block. A running list of free blocks is
maintained in the form of the BTT flog. 'Flog' is a combination of the words
"free list" and "log". The flog contains 'nfree' entries, and an entry contains:
-lba : The premap ABA that is being written to
-old_map : The old postmap ABA - after 'this' write completes, this will be a
+======== =====================================================================
+lba The premap ABA that is being written to
+old_map The old postmap ABA - after 'this' write completes, this will be a
free block.
-new_map : The new postmap ABA. The map will up updated to reflect this
+new_map The new postmap ABA. The map will up updated to reflect this
lba->postmap_aba mapping, but we log it here in case we have to
recover.
-seq : Sequence number to mark which of the 2 sections of this flog entry is
+seq Sequence number to mark which of the 2 sections of this flog entry is
valid/newest. It cycles between 01->10->11->01 (binary) under normal
operation, with 00 indicating an uninitialized state.
-lba' : alternate lba entry
-old_map': alternate old postmap entry
-new_map': alternate new postmap entry
-seq' : alternate sequence number.
+lba' alternate lba entry
+old_map' alternate old postmap entry
+new_map' alternate new postmap entry
+seq' alternate sequence number.
+======== =====================================================================
Each of the above fields is 32-bit, making one entry 32 bytes. Entries are also
padded to 64 bytes to avoid cache line sharing or aliasing. Flog updates are
@@ -147,8 +156,10 @@ c. The concept of lanes
While 'nfree' describes the number of concurrent IOs an arena can process
concurrently, 'nlanes' is the number of IOs the BTT device as a whole can
-process.
- nlanes = min(nfree, num_cpus)
+process::
+
+ nlanes = min(nfree, num_cpus)
+
A lane number is obtained at the start of any IO, and is used for indexing into
all the on-disk and in-memory data structures for the duration of the IO. If
there are more CPUs than the max number of available lanes, than lanes are
@@ -180,10 +191,10 @@ e. In-memory data structure: map locks
--------------------------------------
Consider a case where two writer threads are writing to the same LBA. There can
-be a race in the following sequence of steps:
+be a race in the following sequence of steps::
-free[lane] = map[premap_aba]
-map[premap_aba] = postmap_aba
+ free[lane] = map[premap_aba]
+ map[premap_aba] = postmap_aba
Both threads can update their respective free[lane] with the same old, freed
postmap_aba. This has made the layout inconsistent by losing a free entry, and
@@ -202,6 +213,7 @@ On startup, we analyze the BTT flog to create our list of free blocks. We walk
through all the entries, and for each lane, of the set of two possible
'sections', we always look at the most recent one only (based on the sequence
number). The reconstruction rules/steps are simple:
+
- Read map[log_entry.lba].
- If log_entry.new matches the map entry, then log_entry.old is free.
- If log_entry.new does not match the map entry, then log_entry.new is free.
@@ -228,7 +240,7 @@ Write:
1. Convert external LBA to Arena number + pre-map ABA
2. Get a lane (and take lane_lock)
3. Use lane to index into in-memory free list and obtain a new block, next flog
- index, next sequence number
+ index, next sequence number
4. Scan the RTT to check if free block is present, and spin/wait if it is.
5. Write data to this free block
6. Read map to get the existing post-map ABA entry for this pre-map ABA
@@ -245,6 +257,7 @@ Write:
An arena would be in an error state if any of the metadata is corrupted
irrecoverably, either due to a bug or a media error. The following conditions
indicate an error:
+
- Info block checksum does not match (and recovering from the copy also fails)
- All internal available blocks are not uniquely and entirely addressed by the
sum of mapped blocks and free blocks (from the BTT flog).
@@ -263,11 +276,10 @@ The BTT can be set up on any disk (namespace) exposed by the libnvdimm subsystem
(pmem, or blk mode). The easiest way to set up such a namespace is using the
'ndctl' utility [1]:
-For example, the ndctl command line to setup a btt with a 4k sector size is:
+For example, the ndctl command line to setup a btt with a 4k sector size is::
ndctl create-namespace -f -e namespace0.0 -m sector -l 4k
See ndctl create-namespace --help for more options.
[1]: https://github.com/pmem/ndctl
-
diff --git a/Documentation/nvdimm/index.rst b/Documentation/nvdimm/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..1a3402d3775e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/nvdimm/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+:orphan:
+
+===================================
+Non-Volatile Memory Device (NVDIMM)
+===================================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ nvdimm
+ btt
+ security
diff --git a/Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.txt b/Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.rst
similarity index 60%
rename from Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.txt
rename to Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.rst
index 1669f626b037..08f855cbb4e6 100644
--- a/Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.txt
+++ b/Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.rst
@@ -1,8 +1,14 @@
- LIBNVDIMM: Non-Volatile Devices
- libnvdimm - kernel / libndctl - userspace helper library
- linux-nvdimm@lists.01.org
- v13
+===============================
+LIBNVDIMM: Non-Volatile Devices
+===============================
+libnvdimm - kernel / libndctl - userspace helper library
+
+linux-nvdimm@lists.01.org
+
+Version 13
+
+.. contents:
Glossary
Overview
@@ -40,49 +46,57 @@
Glossary
---------
-
-PMEM: A system-physical-address range where writes are persistent. A
-block device composed of PMEM is capable of DAX. A PMEM address range
-may span an interleave of several DIMMs.
-
-BLK: A set of one or more programmable memory mapped apertures provided
-by a DIMM to access its media. This indirection precludes the
-performance benefit of interleaving, but enables DIMM-bounded failure
-modes.
-
-DPA: DIMM Physical Address, is a DIMM-relative offset. With one DIMM in
-the system there would be a 1:1 system-physical-address:DPA association.
-Once more DIMMs are added a memory controller interleave must be
-decoded to determine the DPA associated with a given
-system-physical-address. BLK capacity always has a 1:1 relationship
-with a single-DIMM's DPA range.
-
-DAX: File system extensions to bypass the page cache and block layer to
-mmap persistent memory, from a PMEM block device, directly into a
-process address space.
-
-DSM: Device Specific Method: ACPI method to to control specific
-device - in this case the firmware.
-
-DCR: NVDIMM Control Region Structure defined in ACPI 6 Section 5.2.25.5.
-It defines a vendor-id, device-id, and interface format for a given DIMM.
-
-BTT: Block Translation Table: Persistent memory is byte addressable.
-Existing software may have an expectation that the power-fail-atomicity
-of writes is at least one sector, 512 bytes. The BTT is an indirection
-table with atomic update semantics to front a PMEM/BLK block device
-driver and present arbitrary atomic sector sizes.
-
-LABEL: Metadata stored on a DIMM device that partitions and identifies
-(persistently names) storage between PMEM and BLK. It also partitions
-BLK storage to host BTTs with different parameters per BLK-partition.
-Note that traditional partition tables, GPT/MBR, are layered on top of a
-BLK or PMEM device.
+========
+
+PMEM:
+ A system-physical-address range where writes are persistent. A
+ block device composed of PMEM is capable of DAX. A PMEM address range
+ may span an interleave of several DIMMs.
+
+BLK:
+ A set of one or more programmable memory mapped apertures provided
+ by a DIMM to access its media. This indirection precludes the
+ performance benefit of interleaving, but enables DIMM-bounded failure
+ modes.
+
+DPA:
+ DIMM Physical Address, is a DIMM-relative offset. With one DIMM in
+ the system there would be a 1:1 system-physical-address:DPA association.
+ Once more DIMMs are added a memory controller interleave must be
+ decoded to determine the DPA associated with a given
+ system-physical-address. BLK capacity always has a 1:1 relationship
+ with a single-DIMM's DPA range.
+
+DAX:
+ File system extensions to bypass the page cache and block layer to
+ mmap persistent memory, from a PMEM block device, directly into a
+ process address space.
+
+DSM:
+ Device Specific Method: ACPI method to to control specific
+ device - in this case the firmware.
+
+DCR:
+ NVDIMM Control Region Structure defined in ACPI 6 Section 5.2.25.5.
+ It defines a vendor-id, device-id, and interface format for a given DIMM.
+
+BTT:
+ Block Translation Table: Persistent memory is byte addressable.
+ Existing software may have an expectation that the power-fail-atomicity
+ of writes is at least one sector, 512 bytes. The BTT is an indirection
+ table with atomic update semantics to front a PMEM/BLK block device
+ driver and present arbitrary atomic sector sizes.
+
+LABEL:
+ Metadata stored on a DIMM device that partitions and identifies
+ (persistently names) storage between PMEM and BLK. It also partitions
+ BLK storage to host BTTs with different parameters per BLK-partition.
+ Note that traditional partition tables, GPT/MBR, are layered on top of a
+ BLK or PMEM device.
Overview
---------
+========
The LIBNVDIMM subsystem provides support for three types of NVDIMMs, namely,
PMEM, BLK, and NVDIMM devices that can simultaneously support both PMEM
@@ -96,19 +110,30 @@ accessible via BLK. When that occurs a LABEL is needed to reserve DPA
for exclusive access via one mode a time.
Supporting Documents
-ACPI 6: http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/ACPI_6.0.pdf
-NVDIMM Namespace: http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_Namespace_Spec.pdf
-DSM Interface Example: http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_DSM_Interface_Example.pdf
-Driver Writer's Guide: http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_Driver_Writers_Guide.pdf
+--------------------
+
+ACPI 6:
+ http://www.uefi.org/sites/default/files/resources/ACPI_6.0.pdf
+NVDIMM Namespace:
+ http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_Namespace_Spec.pdf
+DSM Interface Example:
+ http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_DSM_Interface_Example.pdf
+Driver Writer's Guide:
+ http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_Driver_Writers_Guide.pdf
Git Trees
-LIBNVDIMM: https://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/djbw/nvdimm.git
-LIBNDCTL: https://github.com/pmem/ndctl.git
-PMEM: https://github.com/01org/prd
+---------
+
+LIBNVDIMM:
+ https://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/djbw/nvdimm.git
+LIBNDCTL:
+ https://github.com/pmem/ndctl.git
+PMEM:
+ https://github.com/01org/prd
LIBNVDIMM PMEM and BLK
-------------------
+======================
Prior to the arrival of the NFIT, non-volatile memory was described to a
system in various ad-hoc ways. Usually only the bare minimum was
@@ -122,38 +147,39 @@ For each NVDIMM access method (PMEM, BLK), LIBNVDIMM provides a block
device driver:
1. PMEM (nd_pmem.ko): Drives a system-physical-address range. This
- range is contiguous in system memory and may be interleaved (hardware
- memory controller striped) across multiple DIMMs. When interleaved the
- platform may optionally provide details of which DIMMs are participating
- in the interleave.
+ range is contiguous in system memory and may be interleaved (hardware
+ memory controller striped) across multiple DIMMs. When interleaved the
+ platform may optionally provide details of which DIMMs are participating
+ in the interleave.
- Note that while LIBNVDIMM describes system-physical-address ranges that may
- alias with BLK access as ND_NAMESPACE_PMEM ranges and those without
- alias as ND_NAMESPACE_IO ranges, to the nd_pmem driver there is no
- distinction. The different device-types are an implementation detail
- that userspace can exploit to implement policies like "only interface
- with address ranges from certain DIMMs". It is worth noting that when
- aliasing is present and a DIMM lacks a label, then no block device can
- be created by default as userspace needs to do at least one allocation
- of DPA to the PMEM range. In contrast ND_NAMESPACE_IO ranges, once
- registered, can be immediately attached to nd_pmem.
+ Note that while LIBNVDIMM describes system-physical-address ranges that may
+ alias with BLK access as ND_NAMESPACE_PMEM ranges and those without
+ alias as ND_NAMESPACE_IO ranges, to the nd_pmem driver there is no
+ distinction. The different device-types are an implementation detail
+ that userspace can exploit to implement policies like "only interface
+ with address ranges from certain DIMMs". It is worth noting that when
+ aliasing is present and a DIMM lacks a label, then no block device can
+ be created by default as userspace needs to do at least one allocation
+ of DPA to the PMEM range. In contrast ND_NAMESPACE_IO ranges, once
+ registered, can be immediately attached to nd_pmem.
2. BLK (nd_blk.ko): This driver performs I/O using a set of platform
- defined apertures. A set of apertures will access just one DIMM.
- Multiple windows (apertures) allow multiple concurrent accesses, much like
- tagged-command-queuing, and would likely be used by different threads or
- different CPUs.
+ defined apertures. A set of apertures will access just one DIMM.
+ Multiple windows (apertures) allow multiple concurrent accesses, much like
+ tagged-command-queuing, and would likely be used by different threads or
+ different CPUs.
- The NFIT specification defines a standard format for a BLK-aperture, but
- the spec also allows for vendor specific layouts, and non-NFIT BLK
- implementations may have other designs for BLK I/O. For this reason
- "nd_blk" calls back into platform-specific code to perform the I/O.
- One such implementation is defined in the "Driver Writer's Guide" and "DSM
- Interface Example".
+ The NFIT specification defines a standard format for a BLK-aperture, but
+ the spec also allows for vendor specific layouts, and non-NFIT BLK
+ implementations may have other designs for BLK I/O. For this reason
+ "nd_blk" calls back into platform-specific code to perform the I/O.
+
+ One such implementation is defined in the "Driver Writer's Guide" and "DSM
+ Interface Example".
Why BLK?
---------
+========
While PMEM provides direct byte-addressable CPU-load/store access to
NVDIMM storage, it does not provide the best system RAS (recovery,
@@ -162,12 +188,15 @@ system-physical-address address causes a CPU exception while an access
to a corrupted address through an BLK-aperture causes that block window
to raise an error status in a register. The latter is more aligned with
the standard error model that host-bus-adapter attached disks present.
+
Also, if an administrator ever wants to replace a memory it is easier to
service a system at DIMM module boundaries. Compare this to PMEM where
data could be interleaved in an opaque hardware specific manner across
several DIMMs.
PMEM vs BLK
+-----------
+
BLK-apertures solve these RAS problems, but their presence is also the
major contributing factor to the complexity of the ND subsystem. They
complicate the implementation because PMEM and BLK alias in DPA space.
@@ -185,13 +214,14 @@ carved into an arbitrary number of BLK devices with discontiguous
extents.
BLK-REGIONs, PMEM-REGIONs, Atomic Sectors, and DAX
---------------------------------------------------
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
One of the few
reasons to allow multiple BLK namespaces per REGION is so that each
BLK-namespace can be configured with a BTT with unique atomic sector
sizes. While a PMEM device can host a BTT the LABEL specification does
not provide for a sector size to be specified for a PMEM namespace.
+
This is due to the expectation that the primary usage model for PMEM is
via DAX, and the BTT is incompatible with DAX. However, for the cases
where an application or filesystem still needs atomic sector update
@@ -200,52 +230,52 @@ LIBNVDIMM/NDCTL: Block Translation Table "btt"
Example NVDIMM Platform
------------------------
+=======================
For the remainder of this document the following diagram will be
-referenced for any example sysfs layouts.
+referenced for any example sysfs layouts::
- (a) (b) DIMM BLK-REGION
- +-------------------+--------+--------+--------+
-+------+ | pm0.0 | blk2.0 | pm1.0 | blk2.1 | 0 region2
-| imc0 +--+- - - region0- - - +--------+ +--------+
-+--+---+ | pm0.0 | blk3.0 | pm1.0 | blk3.1 | 1 region3
- | +-------------------+--------v v--------+
-+--+---+ | |
-| cpu0 | region1
-+--+---+ | |
- | +----------------------------^ ^--------+
-+--+---+ | blk4.0 | pm1.0 | blk4.0 | 2 region4
-| imc1 +--+----------------------------| +--------+
-+------+ | blk5.0 | pm1.0 | blk5.0 | 3 region5
- +----------------------------+--------+--------+
+ (a) (b) DIMM BLK-REGION
+ +-------------------+--------+--------+--------+
+ +------+ | pm0.0 | blk2.0 | pm1.0 | blk2.1 | 0 region2
+ | imc0 +--+- - - region0- - - +--------+ +--------+
+ +--+---+ | pm0.0 | blk3.0 | pm1.0 | blk3.1 | 1 region3
+ | +-------------------+--------v v--------+
+ +--+---+ | |
+ | cpu0 | region1
+ +--+---+ | |
+ | +----------------------------^ ^--------+
+ +--+---+ | blk4.0 | pm1.0 | blk4.0 | 2 region4
+ | imc1 +--+----------------------------| +--------+
+ +------+ | blk5.0 | pm1.0 | blk5.0 | 3 region5
+ +----------------------------+--------+--------+
In this platform we have four DIMMs and two memory controllers in one
socket. Each unique interface (BLK or PMEM) to DPA space is identified
by a region device with a dynamically assigned id (REGION0 - REGION5).
1. The first portion of DIMM0 and DIMM1 are interleaved as REGION0. A
- single PMEM namespace is created in the REGION0-SPA-range that spans most
- of DIMM0 and DIMM1 with a user-specified name of "pm0.0". Some of that
- interleaved system-physical-address range is reclaimed as BLK-aperture
- accessed space starting at DPA-offset (a) into each DIMM. In that
- reclaimed space we create two BLK-aperture "namespaces" from REGION2 and
- REGION3 where "blk2.0" and "blk3.0" are just human readable names that
- could be set to any user-desired name in the LABEL.
+ single PMEM namespace is created in the REGION0-SPA-range that spans most
+ of DIMM0 and DIMM1 with a user-specified name of "pm0.0". Some of that
+ interleaved system-physical-address range is reclaimed as BLK-aperture
+ accessed space starting at DPA-offset (a) into each DIMM. In that
+ reclaimed space we create two BLK-aperture "namespaces" from REGION2 and
+ REGION3 where "blk2.0" and "blk3.0" are just human readable names that
+ could be set to any user-desired name in the LABEL.
2. In the last portion of DIMM0 and DIMM1 we have an interleaved
- system-physical-address range, REGION1, that spans those two DIMMs as
- well as DIMM2 and DIMM3. Some of REGION1 is allocated to a PMEM namespace
- named "pm1.0", the rest is reclaimed in 4 BLK-aperture namespaces (for
- each DIMM in the interleave set), "blk2.1", "blk3.1", "blk4.0", and
- "blk5.0".
+ system-physical-address range, REGION1, that spans those two DIMMs as
+ well as DIMM2 and DIMM3. Some of REGION1 is allocated to a PMEM namespace
+ named "pm1.0", the rest is reclaimed in 4 BLK-aperture namespaces (for
+ each DIMM in the interleave set), "blk2.1", "blk3.1", "blk4.0", and
+ "blk5.0".
3. The portion of DIMM2 and DIMM3 that do not participate in the REGION1
- interleaved system-physical-address range (i.e. the DPA address past
- offset (b) are also included in the "blk4.0" and "blk5.0" namespaces.
- Note, that this example shows that BLK-aperture namespaces don't need to
- be contiguous in DPA-space.
+ interleaved system-physical-address range (i.e. the DPA address past
+ offset (b) are also included in the "blk4.0" and "blk5.0" namespaces.
+ Note, that this example shows that BLK-aperture namespaces don't need to
+ be contiguous in DPA-space.
This bus is provided by the kernel under the device
/sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0 when CONFIG_NFIT_TEST is enabled and
@@ -254,7 +284,7 @@ by a region device with a dynamically assigned id (REGION0 - REGION5).
LIBNVDIMM Kernel Device Model and LIBNDCTL Userspace API
-----------------------------------------------------
+========================================================
What follows is a description of the LIBNVDIMM sysfs layout and a
corresponding object hierarchy diagram as viewed through the LIBNDCTL
@@ -263,12 +293,18 @@ NVDIMM Platform which is also the LIBNVDIMM bus used in the LIBNDCTL unit
test.
LIBNDCTL: Context
+-----------------
+
Every API call in the LIBNDCTL library requires a context that holds the
logging parameters and other library instance state. The library is
based on the libabc template:
-https://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/kay/libabc.git
+
+ https://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/kay/libabc.git
LIBNDCTL: instantiate a new library context example
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+::
struct ndctl_ctx *ctx;
@@ -278,7 +314,7 @@ LIBNDCTL: instantiate a new library context example
return NULL;
LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Bus
--------------------
+-----------------------
A bus has a 1:1 relationship with an NFIT. The current expectation for
ACPI based systems is that there is only ever one platform-global NFIT.
@@ -288,9 +324,10 @@ we use this capability to test multiple NFIT configurations in the unit
test.
LIBNVDIMM: control class device in /sys/class
+---------------------------------------------
This character device accepts DSM messages to be passed to DIMM
-identified by its NFIT handle.
+identified by its NFIT handle::
/sys/class/nd/ndctl0
|-- dev
@@ -300,10 +337,15 @@ identified by its NFIT handle.
LIBNVDIMM: bus
+--------------
+
+::
struct nvdimm_bus *nvdimm_bus_register(struct device *parent,
struct nvdimm_bus_descriptor *nfit_desc);
+::
+
/sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0
|-- commands
|-- nd
@@ -324,7 +366,9 @@ LIBNVDIMM: bus
`-- wait_probe
LIBNDCTL: bus enumeration example
-Find the bus handle that describes the bus from Example NVDIMM Platform
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Find the bus handle that describes the bus from Example NVDIMM Platform::
static struct ndctl_bus *get_bus_by_provider(struct ndctl_ctx *ctx,
const char *provider)
@@ -342,7 +386,7 @@ Find the bus handle that describes the bus from Example NVDIMM Platform
LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: DIMM (NMEM)
----------------------------
+-------------------------------
The DIMM device provides a character device for sending commands to
hardware, and it is a container for LABELs. If the DIMM is defined by
@@ -355,11 +399,16 @@ Range Mapping Structure", and there is no requirement that they actually
be physical DIMMs, so we use a more generic name.
LIBNVDIMM: DIMM (NMEM)
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+::
struct nvdimm *nvdimm_create(struct nvdimm_bus *nvdimm_bus, void *provider_data,
const struct attribute_group **groups, unsigned long flags,
unsigned long *dsm_mask);
+::
+
/sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0
|-- nmem0
| |-- available_slots
@@ -384,15 +433,20 @@ LIBNVDIMM: DIMM (NMEM)
LIBNDCTL: DIMM enumeration example
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Note, in this example we are assuming NFIT-defined DIMMs which are
identified by an "nfit_handle" a 32-bit value where:
-Bit 3:0 DIMM number within the memory channel
-Bit 7:4 memory channel number
-Bit 11:8 memory controller ID
-Bit 15:12 socket ID (within scope of a Node controller if node controller is present)
-Bit 27:16 Node Controller ID
-Bit 31:28 Reserved
+
+ - Bit 3:0 DIMM number within the memory channel
+ - Bit 7:4 memory channel number
+ - Bit 11:8 memory controller ID
+ - Bit 15:12 socket ID (within scope of a Node controller if node
+ controller is present)
+ - Bit 27:16 Node Controller ID
+ - Bit 31:28 Reserved
+
+::
static struct ndctl_dimm *get_dimm_by_handle(struct ndctl_bus *bus,
unsigned int handle)
@@ -413,7 +467,7 @@ Bit 31:28 Reserved
dimm = get_dimm_by_handle(bus, DIMM_HANDLE(0, 0, 0, 0, 0));
LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Region
-----------------------
+--------------------------
A generic REGION device is registered for each PMEM range or BLK-aperture
set. Per the example there are 6 regions: 2 PMEM and 4 BLK-aperture
@@ -435,13 +489,15 @@ emits, "devtype" duplicates the DEVTYPE variable stored by udev at the
at the 'add' event, and finally, the optional "spa_index" is provided in
the case where the region is defined by a SPA.
-LIBNVDIMM: region
+LIBNVDIMM: region::
struct nd_region *nvdimm_pmem_region_create(struct nvdimm_bus *nvdimm_bus,
struct nd_region_desc *ndr_desc);
struct nd_region *nvdimm_blk_region_create(struct nvdimm_bus *nvdimm_bus,
struct nd_region_desc *ndr_desc);
+::
+
/sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0
|-- region0
| |-- available_size
@@ -468,10 +524,11 @@ LIBNVDIMM: region
[..]
LIBNDCTL: region enumeration example
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Sample region retrieval routines based on NFIT-unique data like
"spa_index" (interleave set id) for PMEM and "nfit_handle" (dimm id) for
-BLK.
+BLK::
static struct ndctl_region *get_pmem_region_by_spa_index(struct ndctl_bus *bus,
unsigned int spa_index)
@@ -518,33 +575,33 @@ REGION name generic and expects userspace to always consider the
region-attributes for four reasons:
1. There are already more than two REGION and "namespace" types. For
- PMEM there are two subtypes. As mentioned previously we have PMEM where
- the constituent DIMM devices are known and anonymous PMEM. For BLK
- regions the NFIT specification already anticipates vendor specific
- implementations. The exact distinction of what a region contains is in
- the region-attributes not the region-name or the region-devtype.
+ PMEM there are two subtypes. As mentioned previously we have PMEM where
+ the constituent DIMM devices are known and anonymous PMEM. For BLK
+ regions the NFIT specification already anticipates vendor specific
+ implementations. The exact distinction of what a region contains is in
+ the region-attributes not the region-name or the region-devtype.
2. A region with zero child-namespaces is a possible configuration. For
- example, the NFIT allows for a DCR to be published without a
- corresponding BLK-aperture. This equates to a DIMM that can only accept
- control/configuration messages, but no i/o through a descendant block
- device. Again, this "type" is advertised in the attributes ('mappings'
- == 0) and the name does not tell you much.
+ example, the NFIT allows for a DCR to be published without a
+ corresponding BLK-aperture. This equates to a DIMM that can only accept
+ control/configuration messages, but no i/o through a descendant block
+ device. Again, this "type" is advertised in the attributes ('mappings'
+ == 0) and the name does not tell you much.
3. What if a third major interface type arises in the future? Outside
- of vendor specific implementations, it's not difficult to envision a
- third class of interface type beyond BLK and PMEM. With a generic name
- for the REGION level of the device-hierarchy old userspace
- implementations can still make sense of new kernel advertised
- region-types. Userspace can always rely on the generic region
- attributes like "mappings", "size", etc and the expected child devices
- named "namespace". This generic format of the device-model hierarchy
- allows the LIBNVDIMM and LIBNDCTL implementations to be more uniform and
- future-proof.
+ of vendor specific implementations, it's not difficult to envision a
+ third class of interface type beyond BLK and PMEM. With a generic name
+ for the REGION level of the device-hierarchy old userspace
+ implementations can still make sense of new kernel advertised
+ region-types. Userspace can always rely on the generic region
+ attributes like "mappings", "size", etc and the expected child devices
+ named "namespace". This generic format of the device-model hierarchy
+ allows the LIBNVDIMM and LIBNDCTL implementations to be more uniform and
+ future-proof.
4. There are more robust mechanisms for determining the major type of a
- region than a device name. See the next section, How Do I Determine the
- Major Type of a Region?
+ region than a device name. See the next section, How Do I Determine the
+ Major Type of a Region?
How Do I Determine the Major Type of a Region?
----------------------------------------------
@@ -553,7 +610,8 @@ Outside of the blanket recommendation of "use libndctl", or simply
looking at the kernel header (/usr/include/linux/ndctl.h) to decode the
"nstype" integer attribute, here are some other options.
- 1. module alias lookup:
+1. module alias lookup
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
The whole point of region/namespace device type differentiation is to
decide which block-device driver will attach to a given LIBNVDIMM namespace.
@@ -569,28 +627,31 @@ looking at the kernel header (/usr/include/linux/ndctl.h) to decode the
the resulting namespaces. The output from module resolution is more
accurate than a region-name or region-devtype.
- 2. udev:
+2. udev
+^^^^^^^
- The kernel "devtype" is registered in the udev database
- # udevadm info --path=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0
- P: /devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0
- E: DEVPATH=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0
- E: DEVTYPE=nd_pmem
- E: MODALIAS=nd:t2
- E: SUBSYSTEM=nd
+ The kernel "devtype" is registered in the udev database::
- # udevadm info --path=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4
- P: /devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4
- E: DEVPATH=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4
- E: DEVTYPE=nd_blk
- E: MODALIAS=nd:t3
- E: SUBSYSTEM=nd
+ # udevadm info --path=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0
+ P: /devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0
+ E: DEVPATH=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0
+ E: DEVTYPE=nd_pmem
+ E: MODALIAS=nd:t2
+ E: SUBSYSTEM=nd
+
+ # udevadm info --path=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4
+ P: /devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4
+ E: DEVPATH=/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region4
+ E: DEVTYPE=nd_blk
+ E: MODALIAS=nd:t3
+ E: SUBSYSTEM=nd
...and is available as a region attribute, but keep in mind that the
"devtype" does not indicate sub-type variations and scripts should
really be understanding the other attributes.
- 3. type specific attributes:
+3. type specific attributes
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
As it currently stands a BLK-aperture region will never have a
"nfit/spa_index" attribute, but neither will a non-NFIT PMEM region. A
@@ -600,7 +661,7 @@ looking at the kernel header (/usr/include/linux/ndctl.h) to decode the
LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Namespace
--------------------------
+-----------------------------
A REGION, after resolving DPA aliasing and LABEL specified boundaries,
surfaces one or more "namespace" devices. The arrival of a "namespace"
@@ -608,12 +669,14 @@ device currently triggers either the nd_blk or nd_pmem driver to load
and register a disk/block device.
LIBNVDIMM: namespace
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
Here is a sample layout from the three major types of NAMESPACE where
namespace0.0 represents DIMM-info-backed PMEM (note that it has a 'uuid'
attribute), namespace2.0 represents a BLK namespace (note it has a
'sector_size' attribute) that, and namespace6.0 represents an anonymous
PMEM namespace (note that has no 'uuid' attribute due to not support a
-LABEL).
+LABEL)::
/sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.0/ndbus0/region0/namespace0.0
|-- alt_name
@@ -656,76 +719,84 @@ LABEL).
`-- uevent
LIBNDCTL: namespace enumeration example
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Namespaces are indexed relative to their parent region, example below.
These indexes are mostly static from boot to boot, but subsystem makes
no guarantees in this regard. For a static namespace identifier use its
'uuid' attribute.
-static struct ndctl_namespace *get_namespace_by_id(struct ndctl_region *region,
- unsigned int id)
-{
- struct ndctl_namespace *ndns;
+::
- ndctl_namespace_foreach(region, ndns)
- if (ndctl_namespace_get_id(ndns) == id)
- return ndns;
+ static struct ndctl_namespace
+ *get_namespace_by_id(struct ndctl_region *region, unsigned int id)
+ {
+ struct ndctl_namespace *ndns;
- return NULL;
-}
+ ndctl_namespace_foreach(region, ndns)
+ if (ndctl_namespace_get_id(ndns) == id)
+ return ndns;
+
+ return NULL;
+ }
LIBNDCTL: namespace creation example
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
Idle namespaces are automatically created by the kernel if a given
region has enough available capacity to create a new namespace.
Namespace instantiation involves finding an idle namespace and
configuring it. For the most part the setting of namespace attributes
can occur in any order, the only constraint is that 'uuid' must be set
before 'size'. This enables the kernel to track DPA allocations
-internally with a static identifier.
+internally with a static identifier::
-static int configure_namespace(struct ndctl_region *region,
- struct ndctl_namespace *ndns,
- struct namespace_parameters *parameters)
-{
- char devname[50];
+ static int configure_namespace(struct ndctl_region *region,
+ struct ndctl_namespace *ndns,
+ struct namespace_parameters *parameters)
+ {
+ char devname[50];
- snprintf(devname, sizeof(devname), "namespace%d.%d",
- ndctl_region_get_id(region), paramaters->id);
+ snprintf(devname, sizeof(devname), "namespace%d.%d",
+ ndctl_region_get_id(region), paramaters->id);
- ndctl_namespace_set_alt_name(ndns, devname);
- /* 'uuid' must be set prior to setting size! */
- ndctl_namespace_set_uuid(ndns, paramaters->uuid);
- ndctl_namespace_set_size(ndns, paramaters->size);
- /* unlike pmem namespaces, blk namespaces have a sector size */
- if (parameters->lbasize)
- ndctl_namespace_set_sector_size(ndns, parameters->lbasize);
- ndctl_namespace_enable(ndns);
-}
+ ndctl_namespace_set_alt_name(ndns, devname);
+ /* 'uuid' must be set prior to setting size! */
+ ndctl_namespace_set_uuid(ndns, paramaters->uuid);
+ ndctl_namespace_set_size(ndns, paramaters->size);
+ /* unlike pmem namespaces, blk namespaces have a sector size */
+ if (parameters->lbasize)
+ ndctl_namespace_set_sector_size(ndns, parameters->lbasize);
+ ndctl_namespace_enable(ndns);
+ }
Why the Term "namespace"?
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
1. Why not "volume" for instance? "volume" ran the risk of confusing
- ND (libnvdimm subsystem) to a volume manager like device-mapper.
+ ND (libnvdimm subsystem) to a volume manager like device-mapper.
2. The term originated to describe the sub-devices that can be created
- within a NVME controller (see the nvme specification:
- http://www.nvmexpress.org/specifications/), and NFIT namespaces are
- meant to parallel the capabilities and configurability of
- NVME-namespaces.
+ within a NVME controller (see the nvme specification:
+ http://www.nvmexpress.org/specifications/), and NFIT namespaces are
+ meant to parallel the capabilities and configurability of
+ NVME-namespaces.
LIBNVDIMM/LIBNDCTL: Block Translation Table "btt"
----------------------------------------------
+-------------------------------------------------
A BTT (design document: http://pmem.io/2014/09/23/btt.html) is a stacked
block device driver that fronts either the whole block device or a
partition of a block device emitted by either a PMEM or BLK NAMESPACE.
LIBNVDIMM: btt layout
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
Every region will start out with at least one BTT device which is the
seed device. To activate it set the "namespace", "uuid", and
"sector_size" attributes and then bind the device to the nd_pmem or
-nd_blk driver depending on the region type.
+nd_blk driver depending on the region type::
/sys/devices/platform/nfit_test.1/ndbus0/region0/btt0/
|-- namespace
@@ -739,10 +810,12 @@ nd_blk driver depending on the region type.
`-- uuid
LIBNDCTL: btt creation example
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
Similar to namespaces an idle BTT device is automatically created per
region. Each time this "seed" btt device is configured and enabled a new
seed is created. Creating a BTT configuration involves two steps of
-finding and idle BTT and assigning it to consume a PMEM or BLK namespace.
+finding and idle BTT and assigning it to consume a PMEM or BLK namespace::
static struct ndctl_btt *get_idle_btt(struct ndctl_region *region)
{
@@ -787,29 +860,28 @@ Summary LIBNDCTL Diagram
------------------------
For the given example above, here is the view of the objects as seen by the
-LIBNDCTL API:
- +---+
- |CTX| +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
- +-+-+ +-> REGION0 +---> NAMESPACE0.0 +--> PMEM8 "pm0.0" |
- | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
-+-------+ | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
-| DIMM0 <-+ | +-> REGION1 +---> NAMESPACE1.0 +--> PMEM6 "pm1.0" |
-+-------+ | | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
-| DIMM1 <-+ +-v--+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
-+-------+ +-+BUS0+---> REGION2 +-+-> NAMESPACE2.0 +--> ND6 "blk2.0" |
-| DIMM2 <-+ +----+ | +---------+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
-+-------+ | | +-> NAMESPACE2.1 +--> ND5 "blk2.1" | BTT2 |
-| DIMM3 <-+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
-+-------+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
- +-> REGION3 +-+-> NAMESPACE3.0 +--> ND4 "blk3.0" |
- | +---------+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
- | +-> NAMESPACE3.1 +--> ND3 "blk3.1" | BTT1 |
- | +--------------+ +----------------------+
- | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
- +-> REGION4 +---> NAMESPACE4.0 +--> ND2 "blk4.0" |
- | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
- | +---------+ +--------------+ +----------------------+
- +-> REGION5 +---> NAMESPACE5.0 +--> ND1 "blk5.0" | BTT0 |
- +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+------+
-
+LIBNDCTL API::
+ +---+
+ |CTX| +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ +-+-+ +-> REGION0 +---> NAMESPACE0.0 +--> PMEM8 "pm0.0" |
+ | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ +-------+ | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ | DIMM0 <-+ | +-> REGION1 +---> NAMESPACE1.0 +--> PMEM6 "pm1.0" |
+ +-------+ | | | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ | DIMM1 <-+ +-v--+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ +-------+ +-+BUS0+---> REGION2 +-+-> NAMESPACE2.0 +--> ND6 "blk2.0" |
+ | DIMM2 <-+ +----+ | +---------+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
+ +-------+ | | +-> NAMESPACE2.1 +--> ND5 "blk2.1" | BTT2 |
+ | DIMM3 <-+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
+ +-------+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ +-> REGION3 +-+-> NAMESPACE3.0 +--> ND4 "blk3.0" |
+ | +---------+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
+ | +-> NAMESPACE3.1 +--> ND3 "blk3.1" | BTT1 |
+ | +--------------+ +----------------------+
+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ +-> REGION4 +---> NAMESPACE4.0 +--> ND2 "blk4.0" |
+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+
+ | +---------+ +--------------+ +----------------------+
+ +-> REGION5 +---> NAMESPACE5.0 +--> ND1 "blk5.0" | BTT0 |
+ +---------+ +--------------+ +---------------+------+
diff --git a/Documentation/nvdimm/security.txt b/Documentation/nvdimm/security.rst
similarity index 99%
rename from Documentation/nvdimm/security.txt
rename to Documentation/nvdimm/security.rst
index 4c36c05ca98e..ad9dea099b34 100644
--- a/Documentation/nvdimm/security.txt
+++ b/Documentation/nvdimm/security.rst
@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
-NVDIMM SECURITY
+===============
+NVDIMM Security
===============
1. Introduction
@@ -138,4 +139,5 @@ This command is only available when the master security is enabled, indicated
by the extended security status.
[1]: http://pmem.io/documents/NVDIMM_DSM_Interface-V1.8.pdf
+
[2]: http://www.t13.org/documents/UploadedDocuments/docs2006/e05179r4-ACS-SecurityClarifications.pdf
diff --git a/drivers/nvdimm/Kconfig b/drivers/nvdimm/Kconfig
index 54500798f23a..e89c1c332407 100644
--- a/drivers/nvdimm/Kconfig
+++ b/drivers/nvdimm/Kconfig
@@ -33,7 +33,7 @@ config BLK_DEV_PMEM
Documentation/admin-guide/kernel-parameters.rst). This driver converts
these persistent memory ranges into block devices that are
capable of DAX (direct-access) file system mappings. See
- Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.txt for more details.
+ Documentation/nvdimm/nvdimm.rst for more details.
Say Y if you want to use an NVDIMM
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread
* [PATCH v2 28/29] docs: xtensa: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (26 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 29/29] docs: mmc: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet, Chris Zankel, Max Filippov, linux-xtensa
Rename the xtensa documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
.../xtensa/{atomctl.txt => atomctl.rst} | 13 +-
.../xtensa/{booting.txt => booting.rst} | 5 +-
Documentation/xtensa/index.rst | 12 ++
Documentation/xtensa/mmu.rst | 195 ++++++++++++++++++
Documentation/xtensa/mmu.txt | 189 -----------------
arch/xtensa/include/asm/initialize_mmu.h | 2 +-
6 files changed, 222 insertions(+), 194 deletions(-)
rename Documentation/xtensa/{atomctl.txt => atomctl.rst} (81%)
rename Documentation/xtensa/{booting.txt => booting.rst} (91%)
create mode 100644 Documentation/xtensa/index.rst
create mode 100644 Documentation/xtensa/mmu.rst
delete mode 100644 Documentation/xtensa/mmu.txt
diff --git a/Documentation/xtensa/atomctl.txt b/Documentation/xtensa/atomctl.rst
similarity index 81%
rename from Documentation/xtensa/atomctl.txt
rename to Documentation/xtensa/atomctl.rst
index 1da783ac200c..1ecbd0ba9a2e 100644
--- a/Documentation/xtensa/atomctl.txt
+++ b/Documentation/xtensa/atomctl.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,7 @@
+===========================================
+Atomic Operation Control (ATOMCTL) Register
+===========================================
+
We Have Atomic Operation Control (ATOMCTL) Register.
This register determines the effect of using a S32C1I instruction
with various combinations of:
@@ -8,7 +12,7 @@ with various combinations of:
2. With and without An Intelligent Memory Controller which
can do Atomic Transactions itself.
-The Core comes up with a default value of for the three types of cache ops:
+The Core comes up with a default value of for the three types of cache ops::
0x28: (WB: Internal, WT: Internal, BY:Exception)
@@ -30,15 +34,18 @@ CUSTOMER-WARNING:
Developers might find using RCW in Bypass mode convenient when testing
with the cache being bypassed; for example studying cache alias problems.
-See Section 4.3.12.4 of ISA; Bits:
+See Section 4.3.12.4 of ISA; Bits::
WB WT BY
5 4 | 3 2 | 1 0
+
+========= ================== ================== ===============
2 Bit
Field
Values WB - Write Back WT - Write Thru BY - Bypass
---------- --------------- ----------------- ----------------
+========= ================== ================== ===============
0 Exception Exception Exception
1 RCW Transaction RCW Transaction RCW Transaction
2 Internal Operation Internal Operation Reserved
3 Reserved Reserved Reserved
+========= ================== ================== ===============
diff --git a/Documentation/xtensa/booting.txt b/Documentation/xtensa/booting.rst
similarity index 91%
rename from Documentation/xtensa/booting.txt
rename to Documentation/xtensa/booting.rst
index 402b33a2619f..e1b83707e5b6 100644
--- a/Documentation/xtensa/booting.txt
+++ b/Documentation/xtensa/booting.rst
@@ -1,10 +1,13 @@
-Passing boot parameters to the kernel.
+=====================================
+Passing boot parameters to the kernel
+=====================================
Boot parameters are represented as a TLV list in the memory. Please see
arch/xtensa/include/asm/bootparam.h for definition of the bp_tag structure and
tag value constants. First entry in the list must have type BP_TAG_FIRST, last
entry must have type BP_TAG_LAST. The address of the first list entry is
passed to the kernel in the register a2. The address type depends on MMU type:
+
- For configurations without MMU, with region protection or with MPU the
address must be the physical address.
- For configurations with region translarion MMU or with MMUv3 and CONFIG_MMU=n
diff --git a/Documentation/xtensa/index.rst b/Documentation/xtensa/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..5a24e365e35f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/xtensa/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+:orphan:
+
+===================
+Xtensa Architecture
+===================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ atomctl
+ booting
+ mmu
diff --git a/Documentation/xtensa/mmu.rst b/Documentation/xtensa/mmu.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..e52a12960fdc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/xtensa/mmu.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,195 @@
+=============================
+MMUv3 initialization sequence
+=============================
+
+The code in the initialize_mmu macro sets up MMUv3 memory mapping
+identically to MMUv2 fixed memory mapping. Depending on
+CONFIG_INITIALIZE_XTENSA_MMU_INSIDE_VMLINUX symbol this code is
+located in addresses it was linked for (symbol undefined), or not
+(symbol defined), so it needs to be position-independent.
+
+The code has the following assumptions:
+
+ - This code fragment is run only on an MMU v3.
+ - TLBs are in their reset state.
+ - ITLBCFG and DTLBCFG are zero (reset state).
+ - RASID is 0x04030201 (reset state).
+ - PS.RING is zero (reset state).
+ - LITBASE is zero (reset state, PC-relative literals); required to be PIC.
+
+TLB setup proceeds along the following steps.
+
+ Legend:
+
+ - VA = virtual address (two upper nibbles of it);
+ - PA = physical address (two upper nibbles of it);
+ - pc = physical range that contains this code;
+
+After step 2, we jump to virtual address in the range 0x40000000..0x5fffffff
+or 0x00000000..0x1fffffff, depending on whether the kernel was loaded below
+0x40000000 or above. That address corresponds to next instruction to execute
+in this code. After step 4, we jump to intended (linked) address of this code.
+The scheme below assumes that the kernel is loaded below 0x40000000.
+
+ ====== ===== ===== ===== ===== ====== ===== =====
+ - Step0 Step1 Step2 Step3 Step4 Step5
+
+ VA PA PA PA PA VA PA PA
+ ====== ===== ===== ===== ===== ====== ===== =====
+ E0..FF -> E0 -> E0 -> E0 F0..FF -> F0 -> F0
+ C0..DF -> C0 -> C0 -> C0 E0..EF -> F0 -> F0
+ A0..BF -> A0 -> A0 -> A0 D8..DF -> 00 -> 00
+ 80..9F -> 80 -> 80 -> 80 D0..D7 -> 00 -> 00
+ 60..7F -> 60 -> 60 -> 60
+ 40..5F -> 40 -> pc -> pc 40..5F -> pc
+ 20..3F -> 20 -> 20 -> 20
+ 00..1F -> 00 -> 00 -> 00
+ ====== ===== ===== ===== ===== ====== ===== =====
+
+The default location of IO peripherals is above 0xf0000000. This may be changed
+using a "ranges" property in a device tree simple-bus node. See the Devicetree
+Specification, section 4.5 for details on the syntax and semantics of
+simple-bus nodes. The following limitations apply:
+
+1. Only top level simple-bus nodes are considered
+
+2. Only one (first) simple-bus node is considered
+
+3. Empty "ranges" properties are not supported
+
+4. Only the first triplet in the "ranges" property is considered
+
+5. The parent-bus-address value is rounded down to the nearest 256MB boundary
+
+6. The IO area covers the entire 256MB segment of parent-bus-address; the
+ "ranges" triplet length field is ignored
+
+
+MMUv3 address space layouts.
+============================
+
+Default MMUv2-compatible layout::
+
+ Symbol VADDR Size
+ +------------------+
+ | Userspace | 0x00000000 TASK_SIZE
+ +------------------+ 0x40000000
+ +------------------+
+ | Page table | XCHAL_PAGE_TABLE_VADDR 0x80000000 XCHAL_PAGE_TABLE_SIZE
+ +------------------+
+ | KASAN shadow map | KASAN_SHADOW_START 0x80400000 KASAN_SHADOW_SIZE
+ +------------------+ 0x8e400000
+ +------------------+
+ | VMALLOC area | VMALLOC_START 0xc0000000 128MB - 64KB
+ +------------------+ VMALLOC_END
+ | Cache aliasing | TLBTEMP_BASE_1 0xc7ff0000 DCACHE_WAY_SIZE
+ | remap area 1 |
+ +------------------+
+ | Cache aliasing | TLBTEMP_BASE_2 DCACHE_WAY_SIZE
+ | remap area 2 |
+ +------------------+
+ +------------------+
+ | KMAP area | PKMAP_BASE PTRS_PER_PTE *
+ | | DCACHE_N_COLORS *
+ | | PAGE_SIZE
+ | | (4MB * DCACHE_N_COLORS)
+ +------------------+
+ | Atomic KMAP area | FIXADDR_START KM_TYPE_NR *
+ | | NR_CPUS *
+ | | DCACHE_N_COLORS *
+ | | PAGE_SIZE
+ +------------------+ FIXADDR_TOP 0xcffff000
+ +------------------+
+ | Cached KSEG | XCHAL_KSEG_CACHED_VADDR 0xd0000000 128MB
+ +------------------+
+ | Uncached KSEG | XCHAL_KSEG_BYPASS_VADDR 0xd8000000 128MB
+ +------------------+
+ | Cached KIO | XCHAL_KIO_CACHED_VADDR 0xe0000000 256MB
+ +------------------+
+ | Uncached KIO | XCHAL_KIO_BYPASS_VADDR 0xf0000000 256MB
+ +------------------+
+
+
+256MB cached + 256MB uncached layout::
+
+ Symbol VADDR Size
+ +------------------+
+ | Userspace | 0x00000000 TASK_SIZE
+ +------------------+ 0x40000000
+ +------------------+
+ | Page table | XCHAL_PAGE_TABLE_VADDR 0x80000000 XCHAL_PAGE_TABLE_SIZE
+ +------------------+
+ | KASAN shadow map | KASAN_SHADOW_START 0x80400000 KASAN_SHADOW_SIZE
+ +------------------+ 0x8e400000
+ +------------------+
+ | VMALLOC area | VMALLOC_START 0xa0000000 128MB - 64KB
+ +------------------+ VMALLOC_END
+ | Cache aliasing | TLBTEMP_BASE_1 0xa7ff0000 DCACHE_WAY_SIZE
+ | remap area 1 |
+ +------------------+
+ | Cache aliasing | TLBTEMP_BASE_2 DCACHE_WAY_SIZE
+ | remap area 2 |
+ +------------------+
+ +------------------+
+ | KMAP area | PKMAP_BASE PTRS_PER_PTE *
+ | | DCACHE_N_COLORS *
+ | | PAGE_SIZE
+ | | (4MB * DCACHE_N_COLORS)
+ +------------------+
+ | Atomic KMAP area | FIXADDR_START KM_TYPE_NR *
+ | | NR_CPUS *
+ | | DCACHE_N_COLORS *
+ | | PAGE_SIZE
+ +------------------+ FIXADDR_TOP 0xaffff000
+ +------------------+
+ | Cached KSEG | XCHAL_KSEG_CACHED_VADDR 0xb0000000 256MB
+ +------------------+
+ | Uncached KSEG | XCHAL_KSEG_BYPASS_VADDR 0xc0000000 256MB
+ +------------------+
+ +------------------+
+ | Cached KIO | XCHAL_KIO_CACHED_VADDR 0xe0000000 256MB
+ +------------------+
+ | Uncached KIO | XCHAL_KIO_BYPASS_VADDR 0xf0000000 256MB
+ +------------------+
+
+
+512MB cached + 512MB uncached layout::
+
+ Symbol VADDR Size
+ +------------------+
+ | Userspace | 0x00000000 TASK_SIZE
+ +------------------+ 0x40000000
+ +------------------+
+ | Page table | XCHAL_PAGE_TABLE_VADDR 0x80000000 XCHAL_PAGE_TABLE_SIZE
+ +------------------+
+ | KASAN shadow map | KASAN_SHADOW_START 0x80400000 KASAN_SHADOW_SIZE
+ +------------------+ 0x8e400000
+ +------------------+
+ | VMALLOC area | VMALLOC_START 0x90000000 128MB - 64KB
+ +------------------+ VMALLOC_END
+ | Cache aliasing | TLBTEMP_BASE_1 0x97ff0000 DCACHE_WAY_SIZE
+ | remap area 1 |
+ +------------------+
+ | Cache aliasing | TLBTEMP_BASE_2 DCACHE_WAY_SIZE
+ | remap area 2 |
+ +------------------+
+ +------------------+
+ | KMAP area | PKMAP_BASE PTRS_PER_PTE *
+ | | DCACHE_N_COLORS *
+ | | PAGE_SIZE
+ | | (4MB * DCACHE_N_COLORS)
+ +------------------+
+ | Atomic KMAP area | FIXADDR_START KM_TYPE_NR *
+ | | NR_CPUS *
+ | | DCACHE_N_COLORS *
+ | | PAGE_SIZE
+ +------------------+ FIXADDR_TOP 0x9ffff000
+ +------------------+
+ | Cached KSEG | XCHAL_KSEG_CACHED_VADDR 0xa0000000 512MB
+ +------------------+
+ | Uncached KSEG | XCHAL_KSEG_BYPASS_VADDR 0xc0000000 512MB
+ +------------------+
+ | Cached KIO | XCHAL_KIO_CACHED_VADDR 0xe0000000 256MB
+ +------------------+
+ | Uncached KIO | XCHAL_KIO_BYPASS_VADDR 0xf0000000 256MB
+ +------------------+
diff --git a/Documentation/xtensa/mmu.txt b/Documentation/xtensa/mmu.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 318114de63f3..000000000000
--- a/Documentation/xtensa/mmu.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,189 +0,0 @@
-MMUv3 initialization sequence.
-
-The code in the initialize_mmu macro sets up MMUv3 memory mapping
-identically to MMUv2 fixed memory mapping. Depending on
-CONFIG_INITIALIZE_XTENSA_MMU_INSIDE_VMLINUX symbol this code is
-located in addresses it was linked for (symbol undefined), or not
-(symbol defined), so it needs to be position-independent.
-
-The code has the following assumptions:
- This code fragment is run only on an MMU v3.
- TLBs are in their reset state.
- ITLBCFG and DTLBCFG are zero (reset state).
- RASID is 0x04030201 (reset state).
- PS.RING is zero (reset state).
- LITBASE is zero (reset state, PC-relative literals); required to be PIC.
-
-TLB setup proceeds along the following steps.
-
- Legend:
- VA = virtual address (two upper nibbles of it);
- PA = physical address (two upper nibbles of it);
- pc = physical range that contains this code;
-
-After step 2, we jump to virtual address in the range 0x40000000..0x5fffffff
-or 0x00000000..0x1fffffff, depending on whether the kernel was loaded below
-0x40000000 or above. That address corresponds to next instruction to execute
-in this code. After step 4, we jump to intended (linked) address of this code.
-The scheme below assumes that the kernel is loaded below 0x40000000.
-
- Step0 Step1 Step2 Step3 Step4 Step5
- ===== ===== ===== ===== ===== =====
- VA PA PA PA PA VA PA PA
- ------ -- -- -- -- ------ -- --
- E0..FF -> E0 -> E0 -> E0 F0..FF -> F0 -> F0
- C0..DF -> C0 -> C0 -> C0 E0..EF -> F0 -> F0
- A0..BF -> A0 -> A0 -> A0 D8..DF -> 00 -> 00
- 80..9F -> 80 -> 80 -> 80 D0..D7 -> 00 -> 00
- 60..7F -> 60 -> 60 -> 60
- 40..5F -> 40 -> pc -> pc 40..5F -> pc
- 20..3F -> 20 -> 20 -> 20
- 00..1F -> 00 -> 00 -> 00
-
-The default location of IO peripherals is above 0xf0000000. This may be changed
-using a "ranges" property in a device tree simple-bus node. See the Devicetree
-Specification, section 4.5 for details on the syntax and semantics of
-simple-bus nodes. The following limitations apply:
-
-1. Only top level simple-bus nodes are considered
-
-2. Only one (first) simple-bus node is considered
-
-3. Empty "ranges" properties are not supported
-
-4. Only the first triplet in the "ranges" property is considered
-
-5. The parent-bus-address value is rounded down to the nearest 256MB boundary
-
-6. The IO area covers the entire 256MB segment of parent-bus-address; the
- "ranges" triplet length field is ignored
-
-
-MMUv3 address space layouts.
-============================
-
-Default MMUv2-compatible layout.
-
- Symbol VADDR Size
-+------------------+
-| Userspace | 0x00000000 TASK_SIZE
-+------------------+ 0x40000000
-+------------------+
-| Page table | XCHAL_PAGE_TABLE_VADDR 0x80000000 XCHAL_PAGE_TABLE_SIZE
-+------------------+
-| KASAN shadow map | KASAN_SHADOW_START 0x80400000 KASAN_SHADOW_SIZE
-+------------------+ 0x8e400000
-+------------------+
-| VMALLOC area | VMALLOC_START 0xc0000000 128MB - 64KB
-+------------------+ VMALLOC_END
-| Cache aliasing | TLBTEMP_BASE_1 0xc7ff0000 DCACHE_WAY_SIZE
-| remap area 1 |
-+------------------+
-| Cache aliasing | TLBTEMP_BASE_2 DCACHE_WAY_SIZE
-| remap area 2 |
-+------------------+
-+------------------+
-| KMAP area | PKMAP_BASE PTRS_PER_PTE *
-| | DCACHE_N_COLORS *
-| | PAGE_SIZE
-| | (4MB * DCACHE_N_COLORS)
-+------------------+
-| Atomic KMAP area | FIXADDR_START KM_TYPE_NR *
-| | NR_CPUS *
-| | DCACHE_N_COLORS *
-| | PAGE_SIZE
-+------------------+ FIXADDR_TOP 0xcffff000
-+------------------+
-| Cached KSEG | XCHAL_KSEG_CACHED_VADDR 0xd0000000 128MB
-+------------------+
-| Uncached KSEG | XCHAL_KSEG_BYPASS_VADDR 0xd8000000 128MB
-+------------------+
-| Cached KIO | XCHAL_KIO_CACHED_VADDR 0xe0000000 256MB
-+------------------+
-| Uncached KIO | XCHAL_KIO_BYPASS_VADDR 0xf0000000 256MB
-+------------------+
-
-
-256MB cached + 256MB uncached layout.
-
- Symbol VADDR Size
-+------------------+
-| Userspace | 0x00000000 TASK_SIZE
-+------------------+ 0x40000000
-+------------------+
-| Page table | XCHAL_PAGE_TABLE_VADDR 0x80000000 XCHAL_PAGE_TABLE_SIZE
-+------------------+
-| KASAN shadow map | KASAN_SHADOW_START 0x80400000 KASAN_SHADOW_SIZE
-+------------------+ 0x8e400000
-+------------------+
-| VMALLOC area | VMALLOC_START 0xa0000000 128MB - 64KB
-+------------------+ VMALLOC_END
-| Cache aliasing | TLBTEMP_BASE_1 0xa7ff0000 DCACHE_WAY_SIZE
-| remap area 1 |
-+------------------+
-| Cache aliasing | TLBTEMP_BASE_2 DCACHE_WAY_SIZE
-| remap area 2 |
-+------------------+
-+------------------+
-| KMAP area | PKMAP_BASE PTRS_PER_PTE *
-| | DCACHE_N_COLORS *
-| | PAGE_SIZE
-| | (4MB * DCACHE_N_COLORS)
-+------------------+
-| Atomic KMAP area | FIXADDR_START KM_TYPE_NR *
-| | NR_CPUS *
-| | DCACHE_N_COLORS *
-| | PAGE_SIZE
-+------------------+ FIXADDR_TOP 0xaffff000
-+------------------+
-| Cached KSEG | XCHAL_KSEG_CACHED_VADDR 0xb0000000 256MB
-+------------------+
-| Uncached KSEG | XCHAL_KSEG_BYPASS_VADDR 0xc0000000 256MB
-+------------------+
-+------------------+
-| Cached KIO | XCHAL_KIO_CACHED_VADDR 0xe0000000 256MB
-+------------------+
-| Uncached KIO | XCHAL_KIO_BYPASS_VADDR 0xf0000000 256MB
-+------------------+
-
-
-512MB cached + 512MB uncached layout.
-
- Symbol VADDR Size
-+------------------+
-| Userspace | 0x00000000 TASK_SIZE
-+------------------+ 0x40000000
-+------------------+
-| Page table | XCHAL_PAGE_TABLE_VADDR 0x80000000 XCHAL_PAGE_TABLE_SIZE
-+------------------+
-| KASAN shadow map | KASAN_SHADOW_START 0x80400000 KASAN_SHADOW_SIZE
-+------------------+ 0x8e400000
-+------------------+
-| VMALLOC area | VMALLOC_START 0x90000000 128MB - 64KB
-+------------------+ VMALLOC_END
-| Cache aliasing | TLBTEMP_BASE_1 0x97ff0000 DCACHE_WAY_SIZE
-| remap area 1 |
-+------------------+
-| Cache aliasing | TLBTEMP_BASE_2 DCACHE_WAY_SIZE
-| remap area 2 |
-+------------------+
-+------------------+
-| KMAP area | PKMAP_BASE PTRS_PER_PTE *
-| | DCACHE_N_COLORS *
-| | PAGE_SIZE
-| | (4MB * DCACHE_N_COLORS)
-+------------------+
-| Atomic KMAP area | FIXADDR_START KM_TYPE_NR *
-| | NR_CPUS *
-| | DCACHE_N_COLORS *
-| | PAGE_SIZE
-+------------------+ FIXADDR_TOP 0x9ffff000
-+------------------+
-| Cached KSEG | XCHAL_KSEG_CACHED_VADDR 0xa0000000 512MB
-+------------------+
-| Uncached KSEG | XCHAL_KSEG_BYPASS_VADDR 0xc0000000 512MB
-+------------------+
-| Cached KIO | XCHAL_KIO_CACHED_VADDR 0xe0000000 256MB
-+------------------+
-| Uncached KIO | XCHAL_KIO_BYPASS_VADDR 0xf0000000 256MB
-+------------------+
diff --git a/arch/xtensa/include/asm/initialize_mmu.h b/arch/xtensa/include/asm/initialize_mmu.h
index 323d05789159..3b054d2bede0 100644
--- a/arch/xtensa/include/asm/initialize_mmu.h
+++ b/arch/xtensa/include/asm/initialize_mmu.h
@@ -42,7 +42,7 @@
#if XCHAL_HAVE_S32C1I && (XCHAL_HW_MIN_VERSION >= XTENSA_HWVERSION_RC_2009_0)
/*
* We Have Atomic Operation Control (ATOMCTL) Register; Initialize it.
- * For details see Documentation/xtensa/atomctl.txt
+ * For details see Documentation/xtensa/atomctl.rst
*/
#if XCHAL_DCACHE_IS_COHERENT
movi a3, 0x25 /* For SMP/MX -- internal for writeback,
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread* [PATCH v2 29/29] docs: mmc: convert to ReST
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 00/29] Convert files to ReST - part 2 Mauro Carvalho Chehab
` (27 preceding siblings ...)
2019-06-18 20:53 ` [PATCH v2 28/29] docs: xtensa: " Mauro Carvalho Chehab
@ 2019-06-18 20:53 ` Mauro Carvalho Chehab
28 siblings, 0 replies; 82+ messages in thread
From: Mauro Carvalho Chehab @ 2019-06-18 20:53 UTC (permalink / raw)
To: Linux Doc Mailing List
Cc: Mauro Carvalho Chehab, Mauro Carvalho Chehab, linux-kernel,
Jonathan Corbet
Rename the mmc documentation files to ReST, add an
index for them and adjust in order to produce a nice html
output via the Sphinx build system.
At its new index.rst, let's add a :orphan: while this is not linked to
the main index.rst file, in order to avoid build warnings.
Signed-off-by: Mauro Carvalho Chehab <mchehab+samsung@kernel.org>
---
Documentation/mmc/index.rst | 13 +++++
.../{mmc-async-req.txt => mmc-async-req.rst} | 53 +++++++++++--------
.../{mmc-dev-attrs.txt => mmc-dev-attrs.rst} | 32 +++++++----
.../{mmc-dev-parts.txt => mmc-dev-parts.rst} | 13 ++---
.../mmc/{mmc-tools.txt => mmc-tools.rst} | 5 +-
5 files changed, 79 insertions(+), 37 deletions(-)
create mode 100644 Documentation/mmc/index.rst
rename Documentation/mmc/{mmc-async-req.txt => mmc-async-req.rst} (75%)
rename Documentation/mmc/{mmc-dev-attrs.txt => mmc-dev-attrs.rst} (73%)
rename Documentation/mmc/{mmc-dev-parts.txt => mmc-dev-parts.rst} (83%)
rename Documentation/mmc/{mmc-tools.txt => mmc-tools.rst} (92%)
diff --git a/Documentation/mmc/index.rst b/Documentation/mmc/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000000..3305478ddadb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/mmc/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+:orphan:
+
+========================
+MMC/SD/SDIO card support
+========================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ mmc-dev-attrs
+ mmc-dev-parts
+ mmc-async-req
+ mmc-tools
diff --git a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-async-req.txt b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-async-req.rst
similarity index 75%
rename from Documentation/mmc/mmc-async-req.txt
rename to Documentation/mmc/mmc-async-req.rst
index ae1907b10e4a..0f7197c9c3b5 100644
--- a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-async-req.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-async-req.rst
@@ -1,13 +1,20 @@
+========================
+MMC Asynchronous Request
+========================
+
Rationale
=========
How significant is the cache maintenance overhead?
+
It depends. Fast eMMC and multiple cache levels with speculative cache
pre-fetch makes the cache overhead relatively significant. If the DMA
preparations for the next request are done in parallel with the current
transfer, the DMA preparation overhead would not affect the MMC performance.
+
The intention of non-blocking (asynchronous) MMC requests is to minimize the
time between when an MMC request ends and another MMC request begins.
+
Using mmc_wait_for_req(), the MMC controller is idle while dma_map_sg and
dma_unmap_sg are processing. Using non-blocking MMC requests makes it
possible to prepare the caches for next job in parallel with an active
@@ -17,6 +24,7 @@ MMC block driver
================
The mmc_blk_issue_rw_rq() in the MMC block driver is made non-blocking.
+
The increase in throughput is proportional to the time it takes to
prepare (major part of preparations are dma_map_sg() and dma_unmap_sg())
a request and how fast the memory is. The faster the MMC/SD is the
@@ -35,6 +43,7 @@ MMC core API extension
======================
There is one new public function mmc_start_req().
+
It starts a new MMC command request for a host. The function isn't
truly non-blocking. If there is an ongoing async request it waits
for completion of that request and starts the new one and returns. It
@@ -47,6 +56,7 @@ MMC host extensions
There are two optional members in the mmc_host_ops -- pre_req() and
post_req() -- that the host driver may implement in order to move work
to before and after the actual mmc_host_ops.request() function is called.
+
In the DMA case pre_req() may do dma_map_sg() and prepare the DMA
descriptor, and post_req() runs the dma_unmap_sg().
@@ -55,33 +65,34 @@ Optimize for the first request
The first request in a series of requests can't be prepared in parallel
with the previous transfer, since there is no previous request.
+
The argument is_first_req in pre_req() indicates that there is no previous
request. The host driver may optimize for this scenario to minimize
the performance loss. A way to optimize for this is to split the current
request in two chunks, prepare the first chunk and start the request,
and finally prepare the second chunk and start the transfer.
-Pseudocode to handle is_first_req scenario with minimal prepare overhead:
+Pseudocode to handle is_first_req scenario with minimal prepare overhead::
-if (is_first_req && req->size > threshold)
- /* start MMC transfer for the complete transfer size */
- mmc_start_command(MMC_CMD_TRANSFER_FULL_SIZE);
+ if (is_first_req && req->size > threshold)
+ /* start MMC transfer for the complete transfer size */
+ mmc_start_command(MMC_CMD_TRANSFER_FULL_SIZE);
- /*
- * Begin to prepare DMA while cmd is being processed by MMC.
- * The first chunk of the request should take the same time
- * to prepare as the "MMC process command time".
- * If prepare time exceeds MMC cmd time
- * the transfer is delayed, guesstimate max 4k as first chunk size.
- */
- prepare_1st_chunk_for_dma(req);
- /* flush pending desc to the DMAC (dmaengine.h) */
- dma_issue_pending(req->dma_desc);
+ /*
+ * Begin to prepare DMA while cmd is being processed by MMC.
+ * The first chunk of the request should take the same time
+ * to prepare as the "MMC process command time".
+ * If prepare time exceeds MMC cmd time
+ * the transfer is delayed, guesstimate max 4k as first chunk size.
+ */
+ prepare_1st_chunk_for_dma(req);
+ /* flush pending desc to the DMAC (dmaengine.h) */
+ dma_issue_pending(req->dma_desc);
- prepare_2nd_chunk_for_dma(req);
- /*
- * The second issue_pending should be called before MMC runs out
- * of the first chunk. If the MMC runs out of the first data chunk
- * before this call, the transfer is delayed.
- */
- dma_issue_pending(req->dma_desc);
+ prepare_2nd_chunk_for_dma(req);
+ /*
+ * The second issue_pending should be called before MMC runs out
+ * of the first chunk. If the MMC runs out of the first data chunk
+ * before this call, the transfer is delayed.
+ */
+ dma_issue_pending(req->dma_desc);
diff --git a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.rst
similarity index 73%
rename from Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt
rename to Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.rst
index 4ad0bb17f343..4f44b1b730d6 100644
--- a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-attrs.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+==================================
SD and MMC Block Device Attributes
==================================
@@ -6,23 +7,29 @@ SD or MMC device.
The following attributes are read/write.
- force_ro Enforce read-only access even if write protect switch is off.
+ ======== ===============================================
+ force_ro Enforce read-only access even if write protect switch is off.
+ ======== ===============================================
SD and MMC Device Attributes
============================
All attributes are read-only.
+ ====================== ===============================================
cid Card Identification Register
csd Card Specific Data Register
scr SD Card Configuration Register (SD only)
date Manufacturing Date (from CID Register)
- fwrev Firmware/Product Revision (from CID Register) (SD and MMCv1 only)
- hwrev Hardware/Product Revision (from CID Register) (SD and MMCv1 only)
+ fwrev Firmware/Product Revision (from CID Register)
+ (SD and MMCv1 only)
+ hwrev Hardware/Product Revision (from CID Register)
+ (SD and MMCv1 only)
manfid Manufacturer ID (from CID Register)
name Product Name (from CID Register)
oemid OEM/Application ID (from CID Register)
- prv Product Revision (from CID Register) (SD and MMCv4 only)
+ prv Product Revision (from CID Register)
+ (SD and MMCv4 only)
serial Product Serial Number (from CID Register)
erase_size Erase group size
preferred_erase_size Preferred erase size
@@ -30,7 +37,10 @@ All attributes are read-only.
rel_sectors Reliable write sector count
ocr Operation Conditions Register
dsr Driver Stage Register
- cmdq_en Command Queue enabled: 1 => enabled, 0 => not enabled
+ cmdq_en Command Queue enabled:
+
+ 1 => enabled, 0 => not enabled
+ ====================== ===============================================
Note on Erase Size and Preferred Erase Size:
@@ -44,14 +54,15 @@ Note on Erase Size and Preferred Erase Size:
SD/MMC cards can erase an arbitrarily large area up to and
including the whole card. When erasing a large area it may
be desirable to do it in smaller chunks for three reasons:
- 1. A single erase command will make all other I/O on
+
+ 1. A single erase command will make all other I/O on
the card wait. This is not a problem if the whole card
is being erased, but erasing one partition will make
I/O for another partition on the same card wait for the
duration of the erase - which could be a several
minutes.
- 2. To be able to inform the user of erase progress.
- 3. The erase timeout becomes too large to be very
+ 2. To be able to inform the user of erase progress.
+ 3. The erase timeout becomes too large to be very
useful. Because the erase timeout contains a margin
which is multiplied by the size of the erase area,
the value can end up being several minutes for large
@@ -72,6 +83,9 @@ Note on Erase Size and Preferred Erase Size:
"preferred_erase_size" is in bytes.
Note on raw_rpmb_size_mult:
+
"raw_rpmb_size_mult" is a multiple of 128kB block.
+
RPMB size in byte is calculated by using the following equation:
- RPMB partition size = 128kB x raw_rpmb_size_mult
+
+ RPMB partition size = 128kB x raw_rpmb_size_mult
diff --git a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-parts.txt b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-parts.rst
similarity index 83%
rename from Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-parts.txt
rename to Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-parts.rst
index f08d078d43cf..995922f1f744 100644
--- a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-parts.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-dev-parts.rst
@@ -1,3 +1,4 @@
+============================
SD and MMC Device Partitions
============================
@@ -18,18 +19,18 @@ platform, write access is disabled by default to reduce the chance of
accidental bricking.
To enable write access to /dev/mmcblkXbootY, disable the forced read-only
-access with:
+access with::
-echo 0 > /sys/block/mmcblkXbootY/force_ro
+ echo 0 > /sys/block/mmcblkXbootY/force_ro
-To re-enable read-only access:
+To re-enable read-only access::
-echo 1 > /sys/block/mmcblkXbootY/force_ro
+ echo 1 > /sys/block/mmcblkXbootY/force_ro
The boot partitions can also be locked read only until the next power on,
-with:
+with::
-echo 1 > /sys/block/mmcblkXbootY/ro_lock_until_next_power_on
+ echo 1 > /sys/block/mmcblkXbootY/ro_lock_until_next_power_on
This is a feature of the card and not of the kernel. If the card does
not support boot partition locking, the file will not exist. If the
diff --git a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-tools.txt b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-tools.rst
similarity index 92%
rename from Documentation/mmc/mmc-tools.txt
rename to Documentation/mmc/mmc-tools.rst
index 735509c165d5..54406093768b 100644
--- a/Documentation/mmc/mmc-tools.txt
+++ b/Documentation/mmc/mmc-tools.rst
@@ -1,14 +1,17 @@
+======================
MMC tools introduction
======================
There is one MMC test tools called mmc-utils, which is maintained by Chris Ball,
you can find it at the below public git repository:
-http://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/cjb/mmc-utils.git/
+
+ http://git.kernel.org/cgit/linux/kernel/git/cjb/mmc-utils.git/
Functions
=========
The mmc-utils tools can do the following:
+
- Print and parse extcsd data.
- Determine the eMMC writeprotect status.
- Set the eMMC writeprotect status.
--
2.21.0
^ permalink raw reply related [flat|nested] 82+ messages in thread